diff --git a/man/man1/9.html b/man/man1/9.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1ddef719..00000000 --- a/man/man1/9.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ - -9(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9(1)9(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - 9 – run Plan 9 commands
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9 cmd [ args ... ] -
- - . 9
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Because Plan 9 supplies commands with the same name as but different - behavior than many basic Unix system commands (e.g., grep, sed, - mkdir, rm), it is not recommended to run with the Plan 9 bin directory - ahead of the system directories. -
- - 9 is a shell script that sets up a Plan 9 environment and runs - cmd . It sets $PLAN9 and adds $PLAN9/bin to the beginning of $PATH - before running cmd. -
- - If run with no arguments, 9 does not do anything. This is so that - it can be invoked from sh-style shells using . 9 in order to make - the current shell start running in the Plan 9 environment.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Search for greek in the password file:
- -
- - $ 9 grep '[α−ζ]' /etc/passwd
- -
- - -
- Start an rc(1) with the Plan 9 commands in the path before the - system commands.
- -
- - 9 rc
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/9
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/9c.html b/man/man1/9c.html deleted file mode 100644 index 894a34ae..00000000 --- a/man/man1/9c.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,172 +0,0 @@ - -9c(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9C(1)9C(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - 9c, 9a, 9l, 9ar – C compiler, assembler, linker, archiver
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9c [ −I path ] [ −D name ] file ... -
- - 9a file ... -
- - 9l [ -o target ] object ... [ library ... ] [ −Lpath ... ] [ −lname - ... ] -
- - 9ar key [ posname ] afile [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These programs are shell scripts that invoke the appropriate standard - tools for the current operating system and architecture. One can - use them to write portable recipes for mkfiles. -
- - 9c compiles the named C files into object files for the current - system. The system C compiler is invoked with warnings enabled. - The −I option adds path to the include path, and the −D option - defines name in the C preprocessor. 9c always defines the symbol - PLAN9PORT defined in the C preprocessor and adds - $PLAN9/include to the include path. -
- - 9c also defines __sun__ on SunOS systems and __Linux26__ on Linux - systems with 2.6-series kernels. -
- - 9a assembles the named files into object files for the current - system. Unlike some system assemblers, it does not promise to - run the C preprocessor on the source files. -
- - 9l links the named object files and libraries to create the target - executable. Each −l option specifies that a library named libname.a - be found and linked. The −L option adds directories to the library - search path. 9l invokes the system linker with $PLAN9/lib already - on the library search path. -
- - 9l searches the named objects and libraries for symbols of the - form __p9l_autolib_name, which it takes as indication that it - should link $PLAN9/lib/libname.a as well. It also examines such - libraries to find their own dependencies. A single −l option at - the beginning of the command line disables this - behavior. The symbol __p9l_autolib_name is added to an object - file by the macro AUTOLIB( name ), defined in <u.h>. Header files - associated with libraries contain AUTOLIB annotations; ordinary - programs need not use them. Due to shortcomings in the implementation, - a source file may not contain the - same AUTOLIB statement multiple times. -
- - 9ar maintains object file archives called libraries. The exact - set of valid command keys varies from system to system, but 9ar - always provides the following key characters:
- d     Delete files from the archive file.
- r     Replace files in the archive file, or add them if missing.
- t     List a table of contents of the archive. If names are given, - only those files are listed.
- x     Extract the named files. If no names are given, all files in - the archive are extracted. In neither case does x alter the archive - file.
- v     Verbose. Give a file-by-file description of the making of a new - archive file from the old archive and the constituent files. With - t, give a long listing of all information about the files, somewhat - like a listing by ls(1), showing
- -
- - -
- - mode uid/gid size date name
- -
- -
- c     Create. Normally 9ar will create a new archive when afile does - not exist, and give a warning. Option c discards any old contents - and suppresses the warning. -
- - When a d, r, or m key is specified, 9ar inserts a table of contents, - required by the linker, at the front of the library. The table - of contents is rebuilt whenever the archive is modified.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - 9c file1.c file2.c file3.c
- -
- - Compile three C source files.
- -
- 9a file4.s
- -
- - Assemble one assembler source file.
- -
- 9ar rvc lib.a file[12].o
- -
- - Archive the first two object files into a library.
- -
- 9l −o prog file3.o file4.o lib.a
- -
- - Link the final two object files and any necessary objects from - the library into an executable.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/9p.html b/man/man1/9p.html deleted file mode 100644 index 449d0eb5..00000000 --- a/man/man1/9p.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,122 +0,0 @@ - -9p(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9P(1)9P(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - 9p – read and write files on a 9P server
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9p [ −a addr ] read path
- 9p [ −a addr ] readfd path -
- - 9p [ −a addr ] write path
- 9p [ −a addr ] writefd path -
- - 9p [ −a addr ] stat path
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - 9p is a trivial 9P client that can access a single file on a 9P - server. It can be useful for manual interaction with a 9P server - or for accessing simple 9P services from within shell scripts. - -
- - The first argument is a command, one of:
- readprint the contents of path to standard output
- write
- -
- - write data on standard input to path
- -
- readfd, writefd
- -
- - like read and write but use openfd(9p) instead of open; this masks - errors and is mainly useful for debugging the implementation of - openfd
- -
- statexecute stat (9p) on path and print the result -
- - 9p dials address to connect to the 9P server. If the −a option - is not given, 9p requires the path to be of the form service/subpath; - it connects to the Unix domain socket service in the name space - directory (see intro(4)) and then accesses subpath.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - To update plumber(4)’s copy of your plumbing rules after editing - $HOME/lib/plumbing:
- -
- - cat $HOME/lib/plumbing | 9p write plumb/rules
- -
- - -
- To display the contents of the current acme(4) window:
- -
- - 9p read acme/$winid/body
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/9p.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(4), intro(9p), 9pclient(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/9term.html b/man/man1/9term.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7d6a741f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/9term.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,259 +0,0 @@ - -9term(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9TERM(1)9TERM(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - 9term – terminal windows
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9term [ −as ] [ −f font ] [ cmd ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - 9term is a terminal window program for the X Window System, providing - an interface similar to that used on Plan 9.
-

Command
- The 9term command starts a new window. -
- - The −a flag causes button 2 to send the selection immediately, - like acme. Otherwise button 2 brings up a menu, described below. - -
- - The −s option initializes windows so that text scrolls; the default - is not to scroll. -
- - The font argument to −f names a font used to display text, both - in 9term’s menus and as a default for any programs running in - its windows; it also establishes the environment variable $font. - If −f is not given, 9term uses the imported value of $font if - set; otherwise it uses the graphics system default. -
- - 9term runs the given command in the window, or $SHELL if no command - is given.
-

Text windows
- Characters typed on the keyboard collect in the window to form - a long, continuous document. -
- - There is always some selected text, a contiguous string marked - on the screen by reversing its color. If the selected text is - a null string, it is indicated by a hairline cursor between two - characters. The selected text may be edited by mousing and typing. - Text is selected by pointing and clicking button 1 to make a null- - string selection, or by pointing, then sweeping with button 1 - pressed. Text may also be selected by double-clicking: just inside - a matched delimiter-pair with one of {[(<`'" on the left and }])>`'" - on the right, it selects all text within the pair; at the beginning - or end of a line, it selects the line; within or at the - edge of an alphanumeric word, it selects the word. -
- - Characters typed on the keyboard replace the selected text; if - this text is not empty, it is placed in a snarf buffer common - to all windows but distinct from that of sam(1). -
- - Programs access the text in the window at a single point maintained - automatically by 9term. The output point is the location in the - text where the next character written by a program to the terminal - will appear; afterwards, the output point is the null string beyond - the new character. The output point is also the location - in the text of the next character that will be read (directly - from the text in the window, not from an intervening buffer) by - a program. Since Unix does not make it possible to know when a - program is reading the terminal, lines are sent as they are completed - (when the user types a newline character). -
- - In general there is text in the window after the output point, - usually placed there by typing but occasionally by the editing - operations described below. A pending read of the terminal will - block until the text after the output point contains a newline, - whereupon the read may acquire the text, up to and including the - newline. After the read, as described above, the output point - will be at the beginning of the next line of text. In normal circumstances, - therefore, typed text is delivered to programs a line at a time. - Changes made by typing or editing before the text is read will - not be seen by the program reading it. Because of the - Unix issues mentioned above, a line of text is only editable until - it is completed with a newline character, or when hold mode (see - below) is enabled. -
- - Even when there are newlines in the output text, 9term will not - honor reads if the window is in hold mode, which is indicated - by a white cursor and blue text and border. The ESC character - toggles hold mode. Some programs automatically turn on hold mode - to simplify the editing of multi-line text; type ESC when done - to allow mail to read the text. -
- - An EOT character (control-D) behaves exactly like newline except - that it is not delivered to a program when read. Thus on an empty - line an EOT serves to deliver an end-of-file indication: the read - will return zero characters. The BS character (control-H) erases - the character before the selected text. The ETB character - (control-W) erases any nonalphanumeric characters, then the alphanumeric - word just before the selected text. ‘Alphanumeric’ here means - non-blanks and non-punctuation. The NAK character (control-U) - erases the text after the output point, and not yet read by a - program, but not more than one line. All these - characters are typed on the keyboard and hence replace the selected - text; for example, typing a BS with a word selected places the - word in the snarf buffer, removes it from the screen, and erases - the character before the word. -
- - An ACK character (control-F) or Insert character triggers file - name completion for the preceding string (see complete(3)). -
- - Text may be moved vertically within the window. A scroll bar on - the left of the window shows in its clear portion what fragment - of the total output text is visible on the screen, and in its - gray part what is above or below view; it measures characters, - not lines. Mousing inside the scroll bar moves text: clicking - button 1 - with the mouse pointing inside the scroll bar brings the line - at the top of the window to the cursor’s vertical location; button - 3 takes the line at the cursor to the top of the window; button - 2, treating the scroll bar as a ruler, jumps to the indicated - portion of the stored text. Holding a button pressed in the scroll - bar will - cause the text to scroll continuously until the button is released. - -
- - Typing down-arrow scrolls forward one third of a window, and up-arrow - scrolls back. Typing page-down scrolls forward two thirds of a - window, and page-up scrolls back. Typing Home scrolls to the top - of the window; typing End scrolls to the end. -
- - The DEL character sends an interrupt note to all processes in - the window’s process group. Unlike the other characters, the DEL - and arrow keys do not affect the selected text. The left (right) - arrow key moves the selection to one character before (after) - the current selection. -
- - 9term relies on the kernel’s terminal processing to handle EOT - and DEL, so the terminal must be set up with EOT as the “eof” - character and DEL as the “intr” character. 9term runs stty(1) - to establish this when the terminal is created. -
- - Normally, written output to a window blocks when the text reaches - the end of the screen and the terminal buffer fills; a button - 2 menu item toggles scrolling. -
- - 9term changes behavior according to the terminal settings of the - running programs. Most programs run with echo enabled. In this - mode, 9term displays and allows editing of the input. Some programs, - typically those reading passwords, run with echo disabled. In - this mode, 9term passes keystrokes through directly, - without echoing them or buffering until a newline character. These - heuristics work well in many cases, but there are a few common - ones where they fall short. First, programs using the GNU readline - library typically disable terminal echo and perform echoing themselves. - The most common example is the shell - bash(1). Disabling the use of readline with “set +o emacs” [sic] - usually restores the desired behavior. Second, remote terminal - programs such as ssh(1) typically run with echo disabled, relying - on the remote system to echo characters as desired. Plan 9’s ssh - has a −C flag to disable this, leaving the terminal in - “cooked” mode. For similar situations on Unix, 9term’s button - 2 menu has an entry to toggle the forced use of cooked mode, despite - the terminal settings. In such cases, it is useful to run “stty - −echo” on the remote system to avoid seeing your input twice. - -
- - Editing operations are selected from a menu on button 2. The cut - operation deletes the selected text from the screen and puts it - in the snarf buffer; snarf copies the selected text to the buffer - without deleting it; paste replaces the selected text with the - contents of the buffer; and send copies the snarf buffer to - just after the output point, adding a final newline if missing. - Paste will sometimes and send will always place text after the - output point; the text so placed will behave exactly as described - above. Therefore when pasting text containing newlines after the - output point, it may be prudent to turn on hold mode first. -
- - The plumb menu item sends the contents of the selection (not the - snarf buffer) to the plumber (see plumb(1)). If the selection - is empty, it sends the white-space-delimited text containing the - selection (typing cursor). A typical use of this feature is to - tell the editor to find the source of an error by plumbing the - file and - line information in a compiler’s diagnostic. -
- - Each 9term listens for connections on a Unix socket. When a client - connects, the 9term writes the window contents to the client and - then hangs up. 9term installs the name of this socket in the environment - as $text9term before running cmd.
- -

-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/9term
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There should be a program to toggle the current window’s hold - mode. -
- - Unix makes everything harder.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - wintext(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/INDEX b/man/man1/INDEX index 629dc654..5a890303 100644 --- a/man/man1/INDEX +++ b/man/man1/INDEX @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ 0intro 0intro.1 intro 0intro.1 9 9.1 +9.rc 9.1 9a 9c.1 9ar 9c.1 9c 9c.1 @@ -35,6 +36,7 @@ comm comm.1 core core.1 crop crop.1 iconv crop.1 +cvs cvs.1 date date.1 db db.1 dc dc.1 @@ -99,8 +101,9 @@ map map.1 mapd map.1 mapdemo map.1 mc mc.1 -membername mk.1 mk mk.1 +dump9660 mk9660.1 +mk9660 mk9660.1 mkdir mkdir.1 namespace namespace.1 news news.1 diff --git a/man/man1/acid.html b/man/man1/acid.html deleted file mode 100644 index f04c9baa..00000000 --- a/man/man1/acid.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,486 +0,0 @@ - -acid(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ACID(1)ACID(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - acid, acidtypes – debugger
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - acid [ −l library ] [ −wq ] [ −m machine ] [ pid | core ] [ textfile - ] -
- - acidtypes [ −p prefix ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Acid is a programmable symbolic debugger. It can inspect one or - more processes that share an address space. A program to be debugged - may be specified by the process id of a running or defunct process, - or by the name of the program’s text file (a.out by default). - At the prompt, acid will store function definitions - or print the value of expressions. Options are
- −w         Allow the textfile to be modified.
- −q         Print variable renamings at startup.
- −l library    Load from library at startup; see below.
- −m machine   Assume instructions are for the given CPU type (see - mach(3)) instead of using the executable header to select the - CPU type.
- −k         Debug the kernel state for the process, rather than the user - state. -
- - At startup, acid obtains standard function definitions from the - library file /usr/local/plan9/acid/port, architecture-dependent - functions from /usr/local/plan9/acid/$objtype, user-specified - functions from $home/lib/acid, and further functions from −l files. - Definitions in any file may - override previously defined functions. If the function acidinit() - is defined, it will be invoked after all modules have been loaded. - Then the function acidmap() will be invoked if defined. /usr/local/plan9/acid/port - provides a definition of acidmap that attaches all the shared - libraries being used by the target - process and then runs acidtypes (q.v.) to create acid functions - for examining data structures.
-

Language
- Symbols of the program being debugged become integer variables - whose values are addresses. Contents of addresses are obtained - by indirection. Local variables are qualified by function name, - for example main:argv. When program symbols conflict with acid - words, distinguishing $ signs are prefixed. Such - renamings are reported at startup; option −q suppresses them. - -
- - Variable types (integer, float, list, string) and formats are - inferred from assignments. Truth values false/true are attributed - to zero/nonzero integers or floats and to empty/nonempty lists - or strings. Lists are sequences of expressions surrounded by {} - and separated by commas. -
- - Expressions are much as in C, but yield both a value and a format. - Casts to complex types are allowed. Lists admit the following - operators, with subscripts counted from 0.
- -
- - head list
- tail list
- append list, element
- delete list, subscript -
- - -
- Format codes are the same as in db(1). Formats may be attached - to (unary) expressions with \, e.g. (32*7)\D. There are two indirection - operators, * to address a core image, @ to address a text file. - The type and format of the result are determined by the format - of the operand, whose type must be integer. -
- - Statements are
- -
- - if expr then statement [ else statement ]
- while expr do statement
- loop expr, expr do statement
- defn name(args) { statement }
- defn name
- name(args)
- builtin name(args)
- local name
- return expr
- whatis [ name ] -
- - -
- The statement defn name clears the definition for name. A defn - may override a built-in function; prefixing a function call with - builtin ignores any overriding defn, forcing the use of the built-in - function. -
- - Here is a partial list of functions; see the manual for a complete - list.
- stk()          Print a stack trace for current process.
- lstk()         Print a stack trace with values of local variables.
- gpr()          Print general registers. Registers can also be accessed by - name, for example *R0.
- spr()          Print special registers such as program counter and stack - pointer.
- fpr()          Print floating-point registers.
- regs()         Same as spr();gpr().
- fmt(expr,format)
- -
- - -
- - Expression expr with format given by the character value of expression - format.
- -
- -
- src(address)     Print 10 lines of source around the program address.
- Bsrc(address)    Get the source line for the program address into - a window of a running sam(1) and select it.
- line(address)    Print source line nearest to the program address.
- source()       List current source directories.
- addsrcdir(string)
- -
- - -
- - Add a source directory to the list.
- -
- -
- filepc(where)   Convert a string of the form sourcefile:linenumber - to a machine address.
- pcfile(address)Convert a machine address to a source file name.
- pcline(address)Convert a machine address to a source line number.
- bptab()        List breakpoints set in the current process.
- bpset(address)   Set a breakpoint in the current process at the given - address. (Doesn’t work on Unix yet.)
- bpdel(address)   Delete a breakpoint from the current process.
- cont()         Continue execution of current process and wait for it to - stop.
- step()         Execute a single machine instruction in the current process. - (Doesn’t work on Unix yet.)
- func()         Step repeatedly until after a function return.
- stopped(pid)    This replaceable function is called automatically - when the given process stops. It normally prints the program counter - and returns to the prompt.
- asm(address)     Disassemble 30 machine instructions beginning at the - given address.
- mem(address,string)
- -
- - -
- - Print a block of memory interpreted according to a string of format - codes.
- -
- -
- dump(address,n,string)
- -
- - -
- - Like mem(), repeated for n consecutive blocks.
- -
- -
- print(expr,...)   Print the values of the expressions.
- newproc(arguments)
- -
- - -
- - Start a new process with arguments given as a string and halt - at the first instruction.
- -
- -
- new()          Like newproc(), but take arguments (except argv[0]) from - string variable progargs.
- win()          Like new(), but run the process in a separate window.
- start(pid)      Start a stopped process.
- kill(pid)       Kill the given process.
- setproc(pid)    Make the given process current.
- rc(string)       Escape to the shell, rc(1), to execute the command string.
- include(string)Read acid commands from the named file.
- includepipe(string)
- -
- - -
- - Run the command string, reading its standard output as acid commands.
- -
- -
-

Shared library segments
- When a pid or core file is specified on the command line, acid - will, as part of its startup, determine the set of shared libraries - in use by the process image and map those at appropriate locations. - If acid is started without a pid or core file and is subsequently - attached to a process via setproc, the shared library maps - can be initialized by calling dynamicmap().
-

Type information
- Unix compilers conventionally include detailed type information - in the debugging symbol section of binaries. The external program - acidtypes extracts this information and formats it as acid program - text. Once the shared libraries have been mapped, the default - acid startup invokes acidtypes (via - includepipe) on the set of currently mapped text files. The function - acidtypes() can be called to rerun the command after changing - the set of mapped text files.
-

Acid Libraries
- There are a number of acid ‘libraries’ that provide higher-level - debugging facilities. One notable example is trump, which uses - acid to trace memory allocation. Trump requires starting acid - on the program, either by attaching to a running process or by - executing new() on a binary (perhaps after setting progargs), - stopping the process, and then running trump() to execute the - program under the scaffolding. The output will be a trace of the - memory allocation and free calls executed by the program. When - finished tracing, stop the process and execute untrump() followed - by cont() to resume execution. - -

-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Start to debug /bin/ls; set some breakpoints; run up to the first - one (this example doesn’t work on Unix yet):
- -
- - % acid /bin/ls
- /bin/ls: mips plan 9 executable
- /sys/lib/acid/port
- /sys/lib/acid/mips
- acid: new()
- 70094: system call    _main       ADD    $−0x14,R29
- 70094: breakpoint     main+0x4    MOVW R31,0x0(R29)
- acid: pid
- 70094
- acid: argv0 = **main:argv\s
- acid: whatis argv0
- integer variable format s
- acid: *argv0
- /bin/ls
- acid: bpset(ls)
- acid: cont()
- 70094: breakpoint    ls      ADD    $−0x16c8,R29
- acid:
- -
- - -
- Display elements of a linked list of structures:
- -
- - complex Str { 'D' 0 val; 'X' 4 next; };
- s = *headstr;
- while s != 0 do{
- -
- - complex Str s;
- print(s.val, "\n");
- s = s.next;
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- Note the use of the . operator instead of −>. -
- - Display an array of bytes declared in C as char array[].
- -
- - *(array\s)
- -
- - -
- This example gives array string format, then prints the string - beginning at the address (in acid notation) *array. -
- - Trace the system calls executed by ls(1) (neither does this one):
- -
- - % acid −l truss /bin/ls
- /bin/ls:386 plan 9 executable
- /sys/lib/acid/port
- /sys/lib/acid/kernel
- /sys/lib/acid/truss
- /sys/lib/acid/386
- acid: progargs = "−l lib/profile"
- acid: new()
- acid: truss()
- open("#c/pid", 0)
- -
- - return value: 3
- -
- pread(3, 0x7fffeeac, 20, −1)
- -
- - return value: 12
- data: "          166 "
- -
- ...
- stat("lib/profile", 0x0000f8cc, 113)
- -
- - return value: 65
- -
- open("/env/timezone", 0)
- -
- - return value: 3
- -
- pread(3, 0x7fffd7c4, 1680, −1)
- -
- - return value: 1518
- data: "EST −18000 EDT −14400
- 9943200     25664400     41392800     57718800     73447200     89168400
- 104896800    ..."
- -
- close(3)
- -
- - return value: 0
- -
- pwrite(1, "−−rw−rw−r−− M 9 rob rob 2519 Mar 22 10:29 lib/profile
- ", 54, −1)
- −−rw−rw−r−− M 9 rob rob 2519 Mar 22 10:29 lib/profile
- -
- - return value: 54
- -
- ...
- 166: breakpoint       _exits+0x5       INTB $0x40
- acid: cont()
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/acid/$objtype
- /usr/local/plan9/acid/port
- /usr/local/plan9/acid/kernel
- /usr/local/plan9/acid/trump
- /usr/local/plan9/acid/truss
- $home/lib/acid
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/acid
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mk(1), db(1)
- Phil Winterbottom, “Acid Manual”.
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - At termination, kill commands are proposed for processes that - are still active.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There is no way to redirect the standard input and standard output - of a new process. -
- - Source line selection near the beginning of a file may pick an - adjacent file. -
- - With the extant stepping commands, one cannot step through instructions - outside the text segment and it is hard to debug across process - forks. -
- - Breakpoints do not work yet. Therefore, commands such as step, - new, and truss do not work either. New in particular will need - some help to cope with dynamic libraries.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/acme.1 b/man/man1/acme.1 index df01fcad..b2007ed1 100644 --- a/man/man1/acme.1 +++ b/man/man1/acme.1 @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ The .RB ( -F ) option sets the main font, usually variable-pitch (alternate, usually fixed-pitch); the default is -.B /usr/local/plan9/font/lucidasans/euro.8.font +.B \*9/font/lucidasans/euro.8.font .RB ( \&.../lucm/unicode.9.font ). Tab intervals are set to the width of 4 (or the value of .BR $tabstop ) diff --git a/man/man1/acme.html b/man/man1/acme.html deleted file mode 100644 index bc1063bd..00000000 --- a/man/man1/acme.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,481 +0,0 @@ - -acme(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ACME(1)ACME(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - acme, win, awd – interactive text windows
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - acme [ −f varfont ] [ −F fixfont ] [ −c ncol ] [ −br ] [ −l file - | file ... ] -
- - win [ command ] -
- - awd [ label ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Acme manages windows of text that may be edited interactively - or by external programs. The interactive interface uses the keyboard - and mouse; external programs use a set of files served by acme; - these are discussed in acme(4). -
- - Any named files are read into acme windows before acme accepts - input. With the −l option, the state of the entire system is loaded - from file, which should have been created by a Dump command (q.v.), - and subsequent file names are ignored. Plain files display as - text; directories display as columnated lists of the - names of their components, as in ls −p directory|mc except that - the names of subdirectories have a slash appended. -
- - The −f (−F) option sets the main font, usually variable-pitch - (alternate, usually fixed-pitch); the default is /usr/local/plan9/font/lucidasans/euro.8.font - (.../lucm/unicode.9.font). Tab intervals are set to the width - of 4 (or the value of $tabstop) numeral zeros in the appropriate - font. -
- -

Windows
- Acme windows are in two parts: a one-line tag above a multi-line - body. The body typically contains an image of a file, as in sam(1), - or the output of a program, as in an rio(1) window. The tag contains - a number of blank-separated words, followed by a vertical bar - character, followed by anything. The first word is the - name of the window, typically the name of the associated file - or directory, and the other words are commands available in that - window. Any text may be added after the bar; examples are strings - to search for or commands to execute in that window. Changes to - the text left of the bar will be ignored, unless the result is - to change the name of the window. -
- - If a window holds a directory, the name (first word of the tag) - will end with a slash.
-

Scrolling
- Each window has a scroll bar to the left of the body. The scroll - bar behaves much as in sam(1) or rio(1) except that scrolling - occurs when the button is pressed, rather than released, and continues - as long as the mouse button is held down in the scroll bar. For - example, to scroll slowly through a file, hold button 3 - down near the top of the scroll bar. Moving the mouse down the - scroll bar speeds up the rate of scrolling. (The experimental - option −r reverses the scrolling behavior of buttons 1 and 3, - to behave more like xterm(1).)
-

Layout
- Acme windows are arranged in columns. By default, it creates two - columns when starting; this can be overridden with the −c option. - Placement is automatic but may be adjusted using the layout box - in the upper left corner of each window and column. Pressing and - holding any mouse button in the box drags the - associated window or column. For windows, just clicking in the - layout box grows the window in place: button 1 grows it a little, - button 2 grows it as much as it can, still leaving all other tags - in that column visible, and button 3 takes over the column completely, - temporarily hiding other windows in the column. (They - will return en masse if any of them needs attention.) The layout - box in a window is normally white; when it is black in the center, - it records that the file is ‘dirty’: acme believes it is modified - from its original contents. -
- - Tags exist at the top of each column and across the whole display. - Acme pre-loads them with useful commands. Also, the tag across - the top maintains a list of executing long-running commands.
-

Typing
- The behavior of typed text is similar to that in rio(1) except - that the characters are delivered to the tag or body under the - mouse; there is no ‘click to type’. (The experimental option −b - causes typing to go to the most recently clicked-at or made window.) - The usual backspacing conventions apply. As in sam(1) but not - rio, the ESC key selects the text typed since the last mouse action, - a feature particularly useful when executing commands. A side - effect is that typing ESC with text already selected is identical - to a Cut command (q.v.). -
- - Most text, including the names of windows, may be edited uniformly. - The only exception is that the command names to the left of the - bar in a tag are maintained automatically; changes to them are - repaired by acme.
-

Directory context
- Each window’s tag names a directory: explicitly if the window - holds a directory; implicitly if it holds a regular file (e.g. - the directory /adm if the window holds /adm/users). This directory - provides a context for interpreting file names in that window. - For example, the string users in a window labeled /adm/ or - /adm/keys will be interpreted as the file name /adm/users. The - directory is defined purely textually, so it can be a non-existent - directory or a real directory associated with a non-existent file - (e.g. /adm/not−a−file). File names beginning with a slash are - assumed to be absolute file names. -

Errors
- Windows whose names begin with − or + conventionally hold diagnostics - and other data not directly associated with files. A window labeled - +Errors receives all diagnostics produced by acme itself. Diagnostics - from commands run by acme appear in a window named directory/+Errors - where directory is - identified by the context of the command. These error windows - are created when needed.
-

Mouse button 1
- Mouse button 1 selects text just as in sam(1) or rio(1), including - the usual double-clicking conventions.
-

Mouse button 2
- By an action similar to selecting text with button 1, button 2 - indicates text to execute as a command. If the indicated text - has multiple white-space-separated words, the first is the command - name and the second and subsequent are its arguments. If button - 2 is ‘clicked’--indicates a null string--acme expands the - indicated text to find a command to run: if the click is within - button-1-selected text, acme takes that selection as the command; - otherwise it takes the largest string of valid file name characters - containing the click. Valid file name characters are alphanumerics - and _ . − + /. This behavior is similar to double-clicking - with button 1 but, because a null command is meaningless, only - a single click is required. -
- - Some commands, all by convention starting with a capital letter, - are built-ins that are executed directly by acme:
- Cut   Delete most recently selected text and place in snarf buffer.
- Del   Delete window. If window is dirty, instead print a warning; - a second Del will succeed.
- Delcol
- -
- - Delete column and all its windows, after checking that windows - are not dirty.
- -
- Delete
- -
- - Delete window without checking for dirtiness.
- -
- DumpWrite the state of acme to the file name, if specified, or - $home/acme.dump by default.
- EditTreat the argument as a text editing command in the style - of sam(1). The full Sam language is implemented except for the - commands k, n, q, and !. The = command is slightly different: - it includes the file name and gives only the line address unless - the command is explicitly =#. The ‘current window’ for the - -
- - command is the body of the window in which the Edit command is - executed. Usually the Edit command would be typed in a tag; longer - commands may be prepared in a scratch window and executed, with - Edit itself in the current window, using the 2-1 chord described - below. - -
- ExitExit acme after checking that windows are not dirty.
- FontWith no arguments, change the font of the associated window - from fixed-spaced to proportional-spaced or vice versa. Given - a file name argument, change the font of the window to that stored - in the named file. If the file name argument is prefixed by var - (fix), also set the default proportional-spaced - -
- - (fixed-spaced) font for future use to that font. Other existing - windows are unaffected.
- -
- Get   Load file into window, replacing previous contents (after checking - for dirtiness as in Del). With no argument, use the existing file - name of the window. Given an argument, use that file but do not - change the window’s file name.
- ID    Print window ID number (q.v.).
- InclWhen opening ‘include’ files (those enclosed in <>) with button - 3, acme searches in directories /$objtype/include and /sys/include. - Incl adds its arguments to a supplementary list of include directories, - analogous to the −I option to the compilers. This list is per-window - and is inherited when - -
- - windows are created by actions in that window, so Incl is most - usefully applied to a directory containing relevant source. With - no arguments, Incl prints the supplementary list. This command - is largely superseded by plumbing (see plumb(7)).
- -
- KillSend a kill note to acme-initiated commands named as arguments.
- Local
- -
- - In the Plan 9 acme, this prefix causes a command to be run in - acme’sown file name space and environment variable group. On Unix - this is impossible. Local is recognized as a prefix, but has no - effect on the command being executed.
- -
- LoadRestore the state of acme from a file (default $home/acme.dump) - created by the Dump command.
- LookSearch in body for occurrence of literal text indicated by - the argument or, if none is given, by the selected text in the - body.
- New   Make new window. With arguments, load the named files into - windows.
- Newcol
- -
- - Make new column.
- -
- Paste
- -
- - Replace most recently selected text with contents of snarf buffer.
- -
- Put   Write window to the named file. With no argument, write to - the file named in the tag of the window.
- Putall
- -
- - Write all dirty windows whose names indicate existing regular - files.
- -
- RedoComplement of Undo.
- SendAppend selected text or snarf buffer to end of body; used - mainly with win.
- Snarf
- -
- - Place selected text in snarf buffer.
- -
- SortArrange the windows in the column from top to bottom in lexicographical - order based on their names.
- Tab   Set the width of tab stops for this window to the value of - the argument, in units of widths of the zero character. With no - arguments, it prints the current value.
- UndoUndo last textual change or set of changes.
- Zerox
- -
- - Create a copy of the window containing most recently selected - text. -
- - -
- A common place to store text for commands is in the tag; in fact - acme maintains a set of commands appropriate to the state of the - window to the left of the bar in the tag. -
- - If the text indicated with button 2 is not a recognized built-in, - it is executed as a shell command. For example, indicating date - with button 2 runs date(1). The standard and error outputs of - commands are sent to the error window associated with the directory - from which the command was run, which will be created if - necessary. For example, in a window /etc/passwd executing pwd - will produce the output /etc in a (possibly newly-created) window - labeled /etc/+Errors; in a window containing /home/rob/sam/sam.c - executing mk will run mk(1) in /home/rob/sam, producing output - in a window labeled - /home/rob/sam/+Errors. The environment of such commands contains - the variable $% with value set to the filename of the window in - which the command is run, and $winid set to the window’s id number - (see acme(4)).
-

Mouse button 3
- Pointing at text with button 3 instructs acme to locate or acquire - the file, string, etc. described by the indicated text and its - context. This description follows the actions taken when button - 3 is released after sweeping out some text. In the description, - text refers to the text of the original sweep or, if it was null, - the - result of applying the same expansion rules that apply to button - 2 actions. -
- - If the text names an existing window, acme moves the mouse cursor - to the selected text in the body of that window. If the text names - an existing file with no associated window, acme loads the file - into a new window and moves the mouse there. If the text is a - file name contained in angle brackets, acme loads the - indicated include file from the directory appropriate to the suffix - of the file name of the window holding the text. (The Incl command - adds directories to the standard list.) -
- - If the text begins with a colon, it is taken to be an address, - in the style of sam(1), within the body of the window containing - the text. The address is evaluated, the resulting text highlighted, - and the mouse moved to it. Thus, in acme, one must type :/regexp - or :127 not just /regexp or 127. (There is an easier - way to locate literal text; see below.) -
- - If the text is a file name followed by a colon and an address, - acme loads the file and evaluates the address. For example, clicking - button 3 anywhere in the text file.c:27 will open file.c, select - line 27, and put the mouse at the beginning of the line. The rules - about Error files, directories, and so on all combine - to make this an efficient way to investigate errors from compilers, - etc. -
- - If the text is not an address or file, it is taken to be literal - text, which is then searched for in the body of the window in - which button 3 was clicked. If a match is found, it is selected - and the mouse is moved there. Thus, to search for occurrences - of a word in a file, just click button 3 on the word. Because - of the rule of - using the selection as the button 3 action, subsequent clicks - will find subsequent occurrences without moving the mouse. -
- - In all these actions, the mouse motion is not done if the text - is a null string within a non-null selected string in the tag, - so that (for example) complex regular expressions may be selected - and applied repeatedly to the body by just clicking button 3 over - them.
-

Chords of mouse buttons
- Several operations are bound to multiple-button actions. After - selecting text, with button 1 still down, pressing button 2 executes - Cut and button 3 executes Paste. After clicking one button, the - other undoes the first; thus (while holding down button 1) 2 followed - by 3 is a Snarf that leaves the file undirtied; 3 - followed by 2 is a no-op. These actions also apply to text selected - by double-clicking because the double-click expansion is made - when the second click starts, not when it ends. -
- - Commands may be given extra arguments by a mouse chord with buttons - 2 and 1. While holding down button 2 on text to be executed as - a command, clicking button 1 appends the text last pointed to - by button 1 as a distinct final argument. For example, to search - for literal text one may execute Look text with - button 2 or instead point at text with button 1 in any window, - release button 1, then execute Look, clicking button 1 while 2 - is held down. -
- - When an external command (e.g. echo(1)) is executed this way, - the extra argument is passed as expected and an environment variable - $acmeaddr is created that holds, in the form interpreted by button - 3, the fully-qualified address of the extra argument.
-

Support programs
- Win creates a new acme window and runs a command (default $SHELL) - in it, turning the window into something analogous to an rio(1) - window. Executing text in a win window with button 2 is similar - to using Send. -
- - Awd loads the tag line of its window with the directory in which - it’s running, suffixed −label (default rc); it is intended to - be executed by a cd function for use in win windows. An example - definition is
- -
- - fn cd { builtin cd $1 && awd $sysname }
- -
-

Applications and guide files
- In the directory /acme live several subdirectories, each corresponding - to a program or set of related programs that employ acme’s user - interface. Each subdirectory includes source, binaries, and a - readme file for further information. It also includes a guide, - a text file holding sample commands to invoke the - programs. The idea is to find an example in the guide that best - matches the job at hand, edit it to suit, and execute it. -
- - Whenever a command is executed by acme, the default search path - includes the directory of the window containing the command and - its subdirectory $cputype. The program directories in /acme contain - appropriately labeled subdirectories of binaries, so commands - named in the guide files will be found - automatically when run. Also, acme binds the directories /acme/bin - and /acme/bin/$cputype to the end of /bin when it starts; this - is where acme-specific programs such as win and awd reside.
- -

-

FILES
- -
- - $home/acme.dump   default file for Dump and Load; also where state - is written if acme dies or is killed unexpectedly, e.g. by deleting - its window.
- /acme/*/guide     template files for applications
- /acme/*/readme    informal documentation for applications
- /acme/*/src       source for applications
- /acme/*/mips      MIPS-specific binaries for applications
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/acme
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/9term/win.c
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/awd
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - acme(4)
- Rob Pike, Acme: A User Interface for Programmers.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - With the −l option or Load command, the recreation of windows - under control of external programs such as win is just to rerun - the command; information may be lost.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/acmeevent.html b/man/man1/acmeevent.html deleted file mode 100644 index 230145ce..00000000 --- a/man/man1/acmeevent.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,332 +0,0 @@ - -acmeevent(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ACMEEVENT(1)ACMEEVENT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - acmeevent, acme.rc – shell script support for acme clients
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9p read acme/acme/$winid/event | acmeevent -
- - . /usr/local/plan9/lib/acme.rc -
- - newwindow -
- - winread file -
- - winwrite file -
- - winctl cmd -
- - windump [ dumpdir | − ] [ dumpcmd | − ] -
- - winname name -
- - windel [ sure ] -
- - winwriteevent c1 c2 q0 q1 [ eq0 eq1 flag textlen text chordarg - chordaddr ] -
- - wineventloop
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Acmeevent and acme.rc make it easy to write simple acme(1) client - programs as shell scripts. -
- - Acme clients read the event files (see acme(4)) for the windows - they control, reacting to the events. The events are presented - in a format that is easy to read with C programs but hard to read - with shell scripts. -
- - Acmeevent reads an acme(4) event stream from standard input, printing - a shell-friendly version of the events, one per line, on standard - output. Each output line from acmeevent has the form:
- -
- - event c1 c2 q0 q1 eq0 eq1 flag textlen text chordarg chordaddr - -
- - -
- The fields are:
- c1    A character indicating the origin or cause of the action. The - possible causes are: a write to the body or tag file (E), a write - to the window’s other files (F), input via the keyboard (K), and - input via the mouse (M).
- c2    A character indicating the type of action. The possible types - are: text deleted from the body (D), text deleted from the tag - (d), text inserted in the body (I), text inserted in the tag (i), - a button 3 action in the body (L), a button 3 action in the tag - (l), a button 2 action in the body (X), and a button 2 action - in the - -
- - tag (x).
- -
- q0, q1The character addresses of the action.
- eq0, q1
- -
- - The expanded character addresses of the action. If the text indicated - by q0, q1 is a null string that has a non-null expansion, eq0, - eq1 are the addresses of the expansion. Otherwise they are the - same as q0, q1.
- -
- flag   Flag is a bitwise OR (reported decimally) of the following: - 1 if the text indicated is recognized as an acme built-in command; - 2 if the text indicated is a null string that has a non-null expansion - (see eq0, eq1 above); 8 if the command has an extra (chorded) - argument (see chordarg below). Flag remains from the - -
- - acme(4) event format. Because eq0, eq1, and chordarg are explicit - in each event (unlike in acme(4) events), flag can usually be - ignored.
- -
- textlen
- -
- - The length of the action text (or its expansion) for button 2 - and button 3 events in characters.
- -
- text   If textlen is less than 256 chracters, text is the action - text itself. Otherwise it is an empty string and must be read - from the data file.
- chordarg
- -
- - The chorded argument for an action.
- -
- chordorigin
- -
- - If the chord argument is in the body of a named window, chordorigin - specifies the full address of the argument, as in /etc/group:#123,#234. - -
- - -
- To experiment with acmeevent, create an empty window in acme (using - New),type
- -
- - 9p read acme/$winid/event | acmeevent
- -
- - -
- inside it, and execute it. Actions performed on the window will - be printed as events in the +Errors window. -
- - Acme.rc is a library of rc(1) shell functions useful for writing - acme clients. -
- - Newwindow creates a new acme window and sets $winid to the new - window’s id. The other commands all use $winid to determine which - window to operate on. -
- - Winread prints the current window’s file to standard output. It - is equivalent to cat /mnt/acme/acme/$winid/file on Plan 9. Similarly, - winwrite writes standard input to the current window’s file. Winread - and winwrite are useful mainly in building more complex functions. - -
- - Winctl writes cmd to the window’s ctl file. The most commonly-used - command is clean, which marks the window as clean. See acme(4) - for a full list of commands. -
- - Windump sets the window’s dump directory and dump command (see - acme(4)). If either argument is omitted or is −, that argument - is not set. -
- - Winname sets the name displayed in the window’s tag. -
- - Windel simulates the Del command. If the argument sure is given, - it simulates the Delete command. -
- - Winwriteevent writes an event to the window’s event file. The - event is in the format produced by acmeevent. Only the first four - arguments are necessary: the rest are ignored. Event handlers - should call winwriteevent to pass unhandled button 2 or button - 3 events back to acme for processing. -
- - Wineventloop executes the current window’s event file, as output - by acmeevent. It returns when the window has been deleted. Before - running wineventloop , clients must define a shell function named - event, which will be run for each incoming event, as rc executes - the output of acmeevent. A typical event function - need only worry about button 2 and button 3 events. Those events - not handled should be sent back to acme with winwriteevent.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - Adict, a dictionary browser, is implemented using acmeevent and - acme.rc. The event handler is:
- -
- - fn event {
- -
- - switch($1$2){
- case Mx MX      # button 2 − pass back to acme
- winwriteevent $*
- case Ml ML      # button 3 − open new window on dictionary or entry
- {
- if(~ $dict NONE)
- dictwin /adict/$7/ $7
- if not
- dictwin /adict/$dict/$7 $dict $7
- } &
- }
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- Note that the button 3 handler starts a subshell in which to run - dictwin. That subshell will create a new window, set its name, - possibly fill the window with a dictionary list or dictionary - entry, mark the window as clean, and run the event loop:
- -
- - fn dictwin {
- -
- - newwindow
- winname $1
- dict=$2
- if(~ $dict NONE)
- dict −d '?' >[2=1] | sed 1d | winwrite body
- if(~ $#* 3)
- dict −d $dict $3 >[2=1] | winwrite body
- winctl clean
- wineventloop
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- The script starts with an initial window:
- -
- - dictwin /adict/ NONE
- -
- - -
- Button 3 clicking on a dictionary name in the initial window will - create a new empty window for that dictionary. Typing and button - 3 clicking on a word in that window will create a new window with - the dictionary’s entry for that word. -
- - See /usr/local/plan9/bin/adict for the full implementation.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/acmeevent.c
- /usr/local/plan9/lib/acme.rc
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - acme(1), acme(4), rc(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There is more that could be done to ease the writing of complicated - clients.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/ascii.html b/man/man1/ascii.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4067eece..00000000 --- a/man/man1/ascii.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,159 +0,0 @@ - -ascii(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ASCII(1)ASCII(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ascii, unicode – interpret ASCII, Unicode characters
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - ascii [ −8 ] [ −oxdbn ] [ −nct ] [ text ] -
- - unicode [ −nt ] hexmin−hexmax -
- - unicode [ −t ] hex [ ... ] -
- - unicode [ −n ] characters -
- - look hex /usr/local/plan9/lib/unicode
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Ascii prints the ASCII values corresponding to characters and - vice versa; under the −8 option, the ISO Latin-1 extensions (codes - 0200-0377) are included. The values are interpreted in a settable - numeric base; −o specifies octal, −d decimal, −x hexadecimal (the - default), and −bn base n. -
- - With no arguments, ascii prints a table of the character set in - the specified base. Characters of text are converted to their - ASCII values, one per line. If, however, the first text argument - is a valid number in the specified base, conversion goes the opposite - way. Control characters are printed as two- or three-character - mnemonics. Other options are:
- −n    Force numeric output.
- −c    Force character output.
- −t    Convert from numbers to running text; do not interpret control - characters or insert newlines. -
- - Unicode is similar; it converts between UTF and character values - from the Unicode Standard (see utf(7)). If given a range of hexadecimal - numbers, unicode prints a table of the specified Unicode characters - -- their values and UTF representations. Otherwise it translates - from UTF to numeric value or vice versa, depending - on the appearance of the supplied text; the −n option forces numeric - output to avoid ambiguity with numeric characters. If converting - to UTF , the characters are printed one per line unless the −t - flag is set, in which case the output is a single string containing - only the specified characters. Unlike ascii, unicode treats - no characters specially. -
- - The output of ascii and unicode may be unhelpful if the characters - printed are not available in the current font. -
- - The file /usr/local/plan9/lib/unicode contains a table of characters - and descriptions, sorted in hexadecimal order, suitable for look(1) - on the lower case hex values of characters.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - ascii −d
- -
- - Print the ASCII table base 10.
- -
- unicode p
- -
- - Print the hex value of ‘p’.
- -
- unicode 2200−22f1
- -
- - Print a table of miscellaneous mathematical symbols.
- -
- look 039 /usr/local/plan9/lib/unicode
- -
- - See the start of the Greek alphabet’s encoding in the Unicode - Standard.
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/unicode
- -
- - table of characters and descriptions.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/ascii.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/unicode.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - look(1), tcs(1), utf(7), font(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/astro.html b/man/man1/astro.html deleted file mode 100644 index f410421c..00000000 --- a/man/man1/astro.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ - -astro(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ASTRO(1)ASTRO(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - astro – print astronomical information
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - astro [ −dlpsatokm ] [ −c n ] [ −C d ] [ −e obj1 obj2 ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Astro reports upcoming celestial events, by default for 24 hours - starting now. The options are:
- d     Read the starting date. A prompt gives the input format.
- l     Read the north latitude, west longitude, and elevation of the - observation point. A prompt gives the input format. If l is missing, - the initial position is read from the file /usr/local/plan9/sky/here.
- c     Report for n (default 1) successive days.
- C     Used with −c, set the interval to d days (or fractions of days).
- e     Report distance between the centers of objects, in arc seconds, - during eclipses or occultations involving obj1 and obj2.
- p     Print the positions of objects at the given time rather than - searching for interesting conjunctions. For each, the name is - followed by the right ascension (hours, minutes, seconds), declination - (degrees, minutes, seconds), azimuth (degrees), elevation (degrees), - and semidiameter (arc seconds). For the sun and - -
- - moon, the magnitude is also printed. The first line of output - presents the date and time, sidereal time, and the latitude, longitude, - and elevation.
- -
- s     Print output in English words suitable for speech synthesizers.
- a     Include a list of artificial earth satellites for interesting - events. (There are no orbital elements for the satellites, so - this option is not usable.)
- t     Read ΔT from standard input. ΔT is the difference between ephemeris - and universal time (seconds) due to the slowing of the earth’s - rotation. ΔT is normally calculated from an empirical formula. - This option is needed only for very accurate timing of occultations, - eclipses, etc.
- o     Search for stellar occultations.
- k     Print times in local time (‘kitchen clock’) as described in the - timezone environment variable.
- m     Includes a single comet in the list of objects. This is modified - (in the source) to refer to an approaching comet but in steady - state usually refers to the last interesting comet (currently - Hale-Bopp, C/1995 O1).
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/sky/estartab
- -
- - ecliptic star data
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/sky/here
- -
- - default latitude (N), longitude (W), and elevation (meters)
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/astro
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - scat(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The k option reverts to GMT outside of 1970-2036.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/basename.html b/man/man1/basename.html deleted file mode 100644 index b04ce45d..00000000 --- a/man/man1/basename.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ - -basename(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
BASENAME(1)BASENAME(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - basename – strip file name affixes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - basename [ −d ] string [ suffix ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Basename deletes any prefix ending in slash (/) and the suffix, - if present in string, from string, and prints the result on the - standard output. -
- - The −d option instead prints the directory component, that is, - string up to but not including the final slash. If the string - contains no slash, a period and newline are printed.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/basename.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/bc.html b/man/man1/bc.html deleted file mode 100644 index c4f7e7ba..00000000 --- a/man/man1/bc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,272 +0,0 @@ - -bc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
BC(1)BC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - bc – arbitrary-precision arithmetic language
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - bc [ −c ] [ −l ] [ −s ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Bc is an interactive processor for a language that resembles C - but provides arithmetic on numbers of arbitrary length with up - to 100 digits right of the decimal point. It takes input from - any files given, then reads the standard input. The −l argument - stands for the name of an arbitrary precision math library. The - −s - argument suppresses the automatic display of calculation results; - all output is via the print command. -
- - The following syntax for bc programs is like that of C; L means - letter a-z, E means expression, S means statement.
- Lexical
- -
- - -
- - comments are enclosed in /* */
- newlines end statements
- -
- -
- Names
- -
- - -
- - simple variables: L
- array elements: L[E]
- The words ibase, obase, and scale
- -
- -
- Other operands
- -
- - -
- - arbitrarily long numbers with optional sign and decimal point.
- (E)
- sqrt(E)
- length(E)
- number of significant decimal digits
- scale(E)
- number of digits right of decimal point
- L(E,...,E)
- function call
- -
- -
- Operators
- -
- - -
- - +    −    *    /    %    ^ (% is remainder; ^ is power)
- ++    −−
- ==    <=    >=    !=    <    >
- =    +=    −=    *=    /=    %=    ^=
- -
- -
- Statements
- -
- - -
- - E
- { S ; ... ; S }
- print E
- if ( E ) S
- while ( E ) S
- for ( E ; E ; E ) S
- null statement
- break
- quit
- "text"
- -
- -
- Function definitions
- -
- - -
- - define L ( L , ... , L ){
- auto L , ... , L
- S ; ... ; S
- return E -
- - }
- -
- -
- Functions in    −l math library
- -
- - -
- - s(x)sine
- c(x)cosine
- e(x)exponential
- l(x)log
- a(x)arctangent
- j(n, x)
- Bessel function
- -
- - -
- -
- All function arguments are passed by value. -
- - The value of an expression at the top level is printed unless - the main operator is an assignment or the −s command line argument - is given. Text in quotes, which may include newlines, is always - printed. Either semicolons or newlines may separate statements. - Assignment to scale influences the number of digits to - be retained on arithmetic operations in the manner of dc(1). Assignments - to ibase or obase set the input and output number radix respectively. - -
- - The same letter may be used as an array, a function, and a simple - variable simultaneously. All variables are global to the program. - Automatic variables are pushed down during function calls. In - a declaration of an array as a function argument or automatic - variable empty square brackets must follow the array name. -
- - Bc is actually a preprocessor for dc(1), which it invokes automatically, - unless the −c (compile only) option is present. In this case the - dc input is sent to the standard output instead.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - Define a function to compute an approximate value of the exponential. - Use it to print 10 values. (The exponential function in the library - gives better answers.) -
- - scale = 20
- define e(x) {
- -
- - auto a, b, c, i, s
- a = 1
- b = 1
- s = 1
- for(i=1; 1; i++) {
- -
- - a *= x
- b *= i
- c = a/b
- if(c == 0) return s
- s += c
- -
- }
- -
- }
- for(i=1; i<=10; i++) print e(i)
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/bclib mathematical library
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/bc.y
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - dc(1), hoc(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - No &&, ||, or ! operators. -
- - A for statement must have all three Es. -
- - A quit is interpreted when read, not when executed.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/bundle.html b/man/man1/bundle.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4f052d42..00000000 --- a/man/man1/bundle.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ - -bundle(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
BUNDLE(1)BUNDLE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - bundle – collect files for distribution
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - bundle file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Bundle writes on its standard output a shell script for rc(1) - or a Bourne shell which, when executed, will recreate the original - files. Its main use is for distributing small numbers of text - files by mail(1). -
- - Although less refined than standard archives from 9ar (see 9c(1)) - or tar(1), a bundle file is self-documenting and complete; little - preparation is required on the receiving machine.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - bundle mkfile *.[ch] | mail kremvax!boris
- -
- - Send a makefile to Boris together with related .c and .h files. - Upon receiving the mail, Boris may save the file sans postmark, - say in gift/horse, then do
- -
- cd gift; sh horse; mk
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/bundle
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9ar (in 9c(1)), tar(1), mail(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Bundle will not create directories and is unsatisfactory for non-text - files. -
- - Beware of gift horses.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/cal.html b/man/man1/cal.html deleted file mode 100644 index ec3cffc2..00000000 --- a/man/man1/cal.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ - -cal(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CAL(1)CAL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cal – print calendar
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - cal [ month ] [ year ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Cal prints a calendar. Month is either a number from 1 to 12, - a lower case month name, or a lower case three-letter prefix of - a month name. Year can be between 1 and 9999. If either month - or year is omitted, the current month or year is used. If only - one argument is given, and it is a number larger than 12, a - calendar for all twelve months of the given year is produced; - otherwise a calendar for just one month is printed. The calendar - produced is that for England and her colonies. -
- - Try
- -
- - cal sep 1752
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/cal.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The year is always considered to start in January even though - this is historically naive. -
- - Beware that cal 90 refers to the early Christian era, not the - 20th century.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/calendar.html b/man/man1/calendar.html deleted file mode 100644 index 48b9816b..00000000 --- a/man/man1/calendar.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,82 +0,0 @@ - -calendar(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CALENDAR(1)CALENDAR(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - calendar – print upcoming events
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - calendar [ –y ] [ –p days ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Calendar reads the named files, default $HOME/lib/calendar, and - writes to standard output any lines containing today’s or tomorrow’s - date. Examples of recognized date formats are "4/11", "April 11", - "Apr 11", "11 April", and "11 Apr". All comparisons are case insensitive. - -
- - If the –y flag is given, an attempt is made to match on year too. - In this case, dates of the forms listed above will be accepted - if they are followed by the current year (or last two digits thereof) - or not a year — digits not followed by white space or non-digits. - -
- - If the –p flag is given, its argument is the number of days ahead - to match dates. This flag is not repeatable, and it performs no - special processing at the end of the week. -
- - On Friday and Saturday, events through Monday are printed. -
- - To have your calendar mailed to you every day, use cron(8).
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - $HOME/lib/calendar   personal calendar
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/calendar.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/cat.html b/man/man1/cat.html deleted file mode 100644 index 36d6923e..00000000 --- a/man/man1/cat.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ - -cat(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CAT(1)CAT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cat, read, nobs – catenate files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - cat [ file ... ]
- read [ −m ] [ −n nline ] [ file ... ]
- nobs [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Cat reads each file in sequence and writes it on the standard - output. Thus
- -
- - cat file -
- - -
- prints a file and
- -
- - cat file1 file2 >file3 -
- - -
- concatenates the first two files and places the result on the - third. -
- - If no file is given, cat reads from the standard input. Output - is buffered in blocks matching the input. -
- - Read copies to standard output exactly one line from the named - file, default standard input. It is useful in interactive rc(1) - scripts. -
- - The −m flag causes it to continue reading and writing multiple - lines until end of file; −n causes it to read no more than nline - lines. -
- - Read always executes a single write for each line of input, which - can be helpful when preparing input to programs that expect line-at-a-time - data. It never reads any more data from the input than it prints - to the output. -
- - Nobs copies the named files to standard output except that it - removes all backspace characters and the characters that precede - them. It is useful to use as $PAGER with the Unix version of man(1) - when run inside a win (see acme(1)) window.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/cat.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/read.c
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/nobs
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cp(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Read exits with status eof on end of file or, in the −n case, - if it doesn’t read nlines lines.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Beware of cat a b >a and cat a b >b, which destroy input files before - reading them.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/cleanname.html b/man/man1/cleanname.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8f736fbd..00000000 --- a/man/man1/cleanname.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ - -cleanname(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CLEANNAME(1)CLEANNAME(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cleanname – clean a path name
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - cleanname [ −d pwd ] names ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - For each file name argument, cleanname, by lexical processing - only, prints the shortest equivalent string that names the same - (possibly hypothetical) file. It eliminates multiple and trailing - slashes, and it lexically interprets . and .. directory components - in the name. If the −d option is present, unrooted names are - prefixed with pwd/ before processing.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/cleanname.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cleanname(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/clog.html b/man/man1/clog.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6c12e0be..00000000 --- a/man/man1/clog.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ - -clog(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CLOG(1)CLOG(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - auxclog – create date-stamped console log
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - auxclog console logfile
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Auxclog opens the file console and writes every line read from - it, prefixed by the ASCII time, to the file logfile.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/auxclog.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Should be named aux/clog.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/cmp.html b/man/man1/cmp.html deleted file mode 100644 index cc7831a9..00000000 --- a/man/man1/cmp.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ - -cmp(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CMP(1)CMP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cmp – compare two files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - cmp [ −lsL ] file1 file2 [ offset1 [ offset2 ] ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The two files are compared. A diagnostic results if the contents - differ, otherwise there is no output. -
- - The options are:
- l     Print the byte number (decimal) and the differing bytes (hexadecimal) - for each difference.
- s     Print nothing for differing files, but set the exit status.
- L     Print the line number of the first differing byte. -
- - If offsets are given, comparison starts at the designated byte - position of the corresponding file. Offsets that begin with 0x - are hexadecimal; with 0, octal; with anything else, decimal.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/cmp.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - diff(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - If a file is inaccessible or missing, the exit status is open. - If the files are the same, the exit status is empty (true). If - they are the same except that one is longer than the other, the - exit status is EOF. Otherwise cmp reports the position of the - first disagreeing byte and the exit status is differ. - -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/colors.html b/man/man1/colors.html deleted file mode 100644 index af67eec2..00000000 --- a/man/man1/colors.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ - -colors(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
COLORS(1)COLORS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - colors, cmapcube – display color map
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - colors [ −r −x ] -
- - cmapcube [ −nbw ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Colors presents a grid showing the colors in the RGBV color map - (see color(7)). -
- - Clicking mouse button 1 over a color in the grid will display - the map index for that color, its red, green, and blue components, - and the 32-bit hexadecimal color value as defined in allocimage(3). - If the −x option is specified, the components will also be listed - in hexadecimal. -
- - The −r option instead shows, in the same form, a grey-scale ramp. - -
- - A menu on mouse button 3 contains a single entry, to exit the - program. -
- - Cmapcube presents the same colors but in a 3-dimensional cube. - Dragging with button 1 rotates the cube. Clicking on a color with - button 2 displays the map index for that color. Clicking button - 3 exits. -
- - The −n option disables drawing of the color squares. The −b and - −w options set the background (default grey) to black or white.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/colors.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - color(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/comm.html b/man/man1/comm.html deleted file mode 100644 index 860a0956..00000000 --- a/man/man1/comm.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ - -comm(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
COMM(1)COMM(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - comm – select or reject lines common to two sorted files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - comm [ −123 ] file1 file2
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Comm reads file1 and file2, which are in lexicographical order, - and produces a three column output: lines only in file1; lines - only in file2; and lines in both files. The file name − means - the standard input. -
- - Flag 1, 2, or 3 suppresses printing of the corresponding column.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - comm −12 file1 file2
- -
- - Print lines common to two sorted files.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/comm.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sort(1), cmp(1), diff(1), uniq(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/core.html b/man/man1/core.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9c1cf3df..00000000 --- a/man/man1/core.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,83 +0,0 @@ - -core(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CORE(1)CORE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - core – print information about dead processes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - core [ dir | corefile ]...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Core prints information about dead processes that have been saved - as core dumps. -
- - Core reads its arguments in order. If a directory is encountered, - core reads every core file named core.* or *.core in that directory. - -
- - For each core file read, core prints the date and time the core - was generated, the command that generated it, and a short stack - trace at the time of the core dump. -
- - If no arguments are given, core searches the directory $COREDIR - for core files; if $COREDIR is not set, core searches the current - directory.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/core.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - acid(1), db(1), core(5)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Core has not been written.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/crop.html b/man/man1/crop.html deleted file mode 100644 index 34a4eefb..00000000 --- a/man/man1/crop.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,127 +0,0 @@ - -crop(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CROP(1)CROP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - crop, iconv – frame, crop, and convert image
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - crop [ −c red green blue ] [ −i n | −x dx | −y dy | −r minx miny - maxx maxy ] [ −t tx ty ] [ −b red green blue ] [ file ] -
- - iconv [ −u ] [ −c chandesc ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Crop reads an image(7) file (default standard input), crops it, - and writes it as a compressed image(7) file to standard output. - There are two ways to specify a crop, by color value or by geometry. - They may be combined in a single run of crop, in which case the - color value crop will be done first. -
- - The −c option takes a red-green-blue triplet as described in color(3). - (For example, white is 255 255 255.) The corresponding color is - used as a value to be cut from the outer edge of the picture; - that is, the image is cropped to remove the maximal outside rectangular - strip in which every pixel has the specified color. - -
- - The −i option insets the image rectangle by a constant amount, - n, which may be negative to generate extra space around the image. - The −x and −y options are similar, but apply only to the x or - y coordinates of the image. -
- - The −r option specifies an exact rectangle. -
- - The −t option specifies that the image’s coordinate system should - be translated by tx, ty as the last step of processing. -
- - The −b option specifies a background color to be used to fill - around the image if the cropped image is larger than the original, - such as if the −i option is given a negative argument. This can - be used to draw a monochrome frame around the image. The default - color is black. -
- - Iconv changes the format of pixels in the image file (default - standard input) and writes the resulting image to standard output. - Pixels in the image are converted according to the channel descriptor - chandesc, (see image(7)). For example, to convert a 4-bit-per-pixel - grey-scale image to an 8-bit-per-pixel color-mapped - image, chandesc should be m8. If chandesc is not given, the format - is unchanged. The output image is by default compressed; the −u - option turns off the compression.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - To crop white edges off the picture and add a ten-pixel pink border,
- -
- - crop −c 255 255 255 −i −10 −b 255 150 150 imagefile > cropped
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/crop.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - image(7), color(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Iconv should be able to do Floyd-Steinberg error diffusion or - dithering when converting to small image depths.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/cvs.1 b/man/man1/cvs.1 index cb0cec69..bb650481 100644 --- a/man/man1/cvs.1 +++ b/man/man1/cvs.1 @@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ cvs up -dP .EE .PP Compare -.IR libdraw (3) +.I libdraw against its source from January 1, 2005: .IP .EX diff --git a/man/man1/date.html b/man/man1/date.html deleted file mode 100644 index a8cbbf9a..00000000 --- a/man/man1/date.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ - -date(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DATE(1)DATE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - date – date and time
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - date [ option ] [ seconds ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Print the date, in the format -
- - -
- - Tue Aug 16 17:03:52 CDT 1977 -
- - -
- The options are
- −u    Report Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) rather than local time.
- −n    Report the date as the number of seconds since the epoch, 00:00:00 - GMT, January 1, 1970. -
- - The conversion from Greenwich Mean Time to local time depends - on the $timezone environment variable; see ctime(3). -
- - If the optional argument seconds is present, it is used as the - time to convert rather than the real time.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/date.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/db.html b/man/man1/db.html deleted file mode 100644 index eed2c3f9..00000000 --- a/man/man1/db.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,548 +0,0 @@ - -db(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DB(1)DB(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - db – debugger
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - db [ option ... ] [ textfile ] [ pid | corefile ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Db is a general purpose debugging program. It may be used to examine - files and to provide a controlled environment for the execution - of programs. -
- - A textfile is a file containing the text and initialized data - of an executable program. A pid or corefile specifies the memory - image of a process. A pid gives the id of an executing process - to be accessed via ptrace(2). A corefile specifies the name of - a core dump (see core(5) on your system of choice) containing - the - memory image of a terminated process. This manual refers to the - memory image specified by pid or corefile as a memfile. -
- - A map associated with each textfile or memfile supports accesses - to instructions and data in the file; see ‘Addresses’. -
- - An argument consisting entirely of digits is assumed to be a process - id; otherwise, it is the name of a textfile or corefile. When - a textfile is given, the textfile map is associated with it. If - only a memfile is given, the textfile map is derived from the - corresponding textfile, if it can be determined (this varies from - system to - system). When a memfile is given, the memfile map is associated - with it; otherwise the map is undefined and accesses to it are - not permitted. -
- - Commands to db are read from the standard input and responses - are to the standard output. The options are
- −w    Open textfile and memfile for writing as well as reading.
- −Ipath
- -
- - Directory in which to look for relative path names in $< and $<< - commands.
- -
- −mmachine
- -
- - Assume instructions are for the given CPU type (possible names - include 386 and powerpc; adding the suffix −co as in 386−co and - powerpc−co selects disassembly in the manufacturer’s syntax, if - available, rather than the default Plan 9 syntax). -
- - -
- Most db commands have the following form:
- -
- - [address] [, count] [command] -
- - -
- If address is present then the current position, called ‘dot’, - is set to address. Initially dot is set to 0. Most commands are - repeated count times with dot advancing between repetitions. The - default count is 1. Address and count are expressions. Multiple - commands on one line must be separated by ;. -

Expressions
- Expressions are evaluated as long ints.
- .     The value of dot.
- +     The value of dot incremented by the current increment.
- ^     The value of dot decremented by the current increment.
- "     The last address typed.
- integer
- -
- - A number, in decimal radix by default. The prefixes 0 and 0o and - 0O (zero oh) force interpretation in octal radix; the prefixes - 0t and 0T force interpretation in decimal radix; the prefixes - 0x, 0X, and # force interpretation in hexadecimal radix. Thus - 020, 0o20, 0t16, and #10 all represent sixteen. - -
- integer.fraction
- -
- - A single-precision floating point number.
- -
- 'c'   The 16-bit value of a character. \ may be used to escape a - '.
- <name
- -
- - The value of name, which is a register name. The register names - are those printed by the $r command.
- -
- symbol
- -
- - A symbol is a sequence of upper or lower case letters, underscores - or digits, not starting with a digit. \ may be used to escape - other characters. The location of the symbol is calculated from - the symbol table in textfile.
- -
- routine.name
- -
- - The address of the variable name in the specified C routine. Both - routine and name are symbols. If name is omitted the value is - the address of the most recently activated stack frame corresponding - to routine; if routine is omitted, the active procedure is assumed.
- -
- file:integer
- -
- - The address of the instruction corresponding to the source statement - at the indicated line number of the file. If the source line contains - no executable statement, the address of the instruction associated - with the nearest executable source line is returned. Files begin - at line 1. If multiple files of the same name - are loaded, an expression of this form resolves to the first file - encountered in the symbol table.
- -
- (exp)
- -
- - The value of the expression exp. -
- - -
- Monadic operators
- -
- - *exp   The contents of the location addressed by exp in memfile.
- @exp   The contents of the location addressed by exp in textfile.
- −exp   Integer negation.
- ~exp   Bitwise complement.
- %exp   When used as an address, exp is an offset into the segment - named ublock; see ‘Addresses’.
- -
- - -
- Dyadic operators are left-associative and are less binding than - monadic operators.
- -
- - e1+e2Integer addition.
- e1−e2Integer subtraction.
- e1*e2Integer multiplication.
- e1%e2Integer division.
- e1&e2Bitwise conjunction.
- e1|e2Bitwise disjunction.
- e1#e2E1 rounded up to the next multiple of e2.
- -
-

Commands
- Most commands have the following syntax:
- ?f    Locations starting at address in textfile are printed according - to the format f.
- /f    Locations starting at address in memfile are printed according - to the format f.
- =f    The value of address itself is printed according to the format - f. -
- - A format consists of one or more characters that specify a style - of printing. Each format character may be preceded by a decimal - integer that is a repeat count for the format character. If no - format is given then the last format is used. -
- - Most format letters fetch some data, print it, and advance (a - local copy of) dot by the number of bytes fetched. The total number - of bytes in a format becomes the currentincrement.
- -
- - o     Print two-byte integer in octal.
- O     Print four-byte integer in octal.
- q     Print two-byte integer in signed octal.
- Q     Print four-byte integer in signed octal.
- d     Print two-byte integer in decimal.
- D     Print four-byte integer in decimal.
- V     Print eight-byte integer in decimal.
- Z     Print eight-byte integer in unsigned decimal.
- x     Print two-byte integer in hexadecimal.
- X     Print four-byte integer in hexadecimal.
- Y     Print eight-byte integer in hexadecimal.
- u     Print two-byte integer in unsigned decimal.
- U     Print four-byte integer in unsigned decimal.
- f     Print as a single-precision floating point number.
- F     Print double-precision floating point.
- b     Print the addressed byte in hexadecimal.
- c     Print the addressed byte as an ASCII character.
- C     Print the addressed byte as a character. Printable ASCII characters - are represented normally; others are printed in the form \xnn.
- s     Print the addressed characters, as a UTF string, until a zero - byte is reached. Advance dot by the length of the string, including - the zero terminator.
- S     Print a string using the escape convention (see C above).
- r     Print as UTF the addressed two-byte integer (rune).
- R     Print as UTF the addressed two-byte integers as runes until a - zero rune is reached. Advance dot by the length of the string, - including the zero terminator.
- i     Print as machine instructions. Dot is incremented by the size - of the instruction.
- I     As i above, but print the machine instructions in an alternate - form if possible.
- M     Print the addressed machine instruction in a machine-dependent - hexadecimal form.
- a     Print the value of dot in symbolic form. Dot is unaffected.
- A     Print the value of dot in hexadecimal. Dot is unaffected.
- z     Print the function name, source file, and line number corresponding - to dot (textfile only). Dot is unaffected.
- p     Print the addressed value in symbolic form. Dot is advanced by - the size of a machine address.
- t     When preceded by an integer, tabs to the next appropriate tab - stop. For example, 8t moves to the next 8-space tab stop. Dot - is unaffected.
- n     Print a newline. Dot is unaffected.
- "..."   Print the enclosed string. Dot is unaffected.
- ^     Dot is decremented by the current increment. Nothing is printed.
- +     Dot is incremented by 1. Nothing is printed.
- −     Dot is decremented by 1. Nothing is printed.
- -
- - -
- Other commands include:
- newline
- -
- - Update dot by the current increment. Repeat the previous command - with a count of 1.
- -
- [?/]l value mask
- -
- - Words starting at dot are masked with mask and compared with value - until a match is found. If l is used, the match is for a two-byte - integer; L matches four bytes. If no match is found then dot is - unchanged; otherwise dot is set to the matched location. If mask - is omitted then ~0 is used. - -
- [?/]w value ...
- -
- - Write the two-byte value into the addressed location. If the command - is W, write four bytes.
- -
- [?/]m s b e f [?]
- -
- - New values for (b, e, f) in the segment named s are recorded. - Valid segment names are text, data, or ublock. If less than three - address expressions are given, the remaining parameters are left - unchanged. If the list is terminated by ? or / then the file (textfile - or memfile respectively) is used for subsequent - requests. For example, /m? causes / to refer to textfile.
- -
- >name
- -
- - Dot is assigned to the variable or register named.
- -
- !     The rest of the line is passed to rc(1) for execution.
- $modifier
- -
- - Miscellaneous commands. The available modifiers are:
- <f    Read commands from the file f. If this command is executed in - a file, further commands in the file are not seen. If f is omitted, - the current input stream is terminated. If a count is given, and - is zero, the command is ignored.
- <<f   Similar to < except it can be used in a file of commands without - causing the file to be closed. There is a (small) limit to the - number of << files that can be open at once.
- >f    Append output to the file f, which is created if it does not - exist. If f is omitted, output is returned to the terminal.
- ?     Print process id, the condition which caused stopping or termination, - the registers and the instruction addressed by pc. This is the - default if modifier is omitted.
- r     Print the general registers and the instruction addressed by - pc. Dot is set to pc.
- R     Like $r, but include miscellaneous processor control registers - and floating point registers.
- f     Print floating-point register values as single-precision floating - point numbers.
- F     Print floating-point register values as double-precision floating - point numbers.
- b     Print all breakpoints and their associated counts and commands. - ‘B’ produces the same results.
- c     Stack backtrace. If address is given, it specifies the address - of a pair of 32-bit values containing the sp and pc of an active - process. This allows selecting among various contexts of a multi-threaded - process. If C is used, the names and (long) values of all parameters, - automatic and static variables are - -
- - printed for each active function. If count is given, only the - first count frames are printed.
- -
- a     Attach to the running process whose pid is contained in address.
- e     The names and values of all external variables are printed.
- w     Set the page width for output to address (default 80).
- q     Exit from db.
- m     Print the address maps.
- k     Simulate kernel memory management.
- Mmachine
- -
- - Set the machine type used for disassembling instructions.
- -
- -
- :modifier
- -
- - Manage a subprocess. Available modifiers are:
- h     Halt an asynchronously running process to allow breakpointing. - Unnecessary for processes created under db, e.g. by :r.
- bc    Set breakpoint at address. The breakpoint is executed count–1 - times before causing a stop. Also, if a command c is given it - is executed at each breakpoint and if it sets dot to zero the - breakpoint causes a stop.
- d     Delete breakpoint at address.
- r     Run textfile as a subprocess. If address is given the program - is entered at that point; otherwise the standard entry point is - used. Count specifies how many breakpoints are to be ignored before - stopping. Arguments to the subprocess may be supplied on the same - line as the command. An argument - -
- - starting with < or > causes the standard input or output to be established - for the command.
- -
- cs    The subprocess is continued. If s is omitted or nonzero, the - subprocess is sent the note that caused it to stop. If 0 is specified, - no note is sent. (If the stop was due to a breakpoint or single-step, - the corresponding note is elided before continuing.) Breakpoint - skipping is the same as for r. - ss    As for c except that the subprocess is single stepped for count - machine instructions. If a note is pending, it is received before - the first instruction is executed. If there is no current subprocess - then textfile is run as a subprocess as for r. In this case no - note can be sent; the remainder of the line is - -
- - treated as arguments to the subprocess.
- -
- Ss    Identical to s except the subprocess is single stepped for count - lines of C source. In optimized code, the correspondence between - C source and the machine instructions is approximate at best.
- x     The current subprocess, if any, is released by db and allowed - to continue executing normally.
- k     The current subprocess, if any, is terminated.
- nc    Display the pending notes for the process. If c is specified, - first delete c’th pending note.
- -
-

Addresses
- The location in a file or memory image associated with an address - is calculated from a map associated with the file. Each map contains - one or more quadruples (t, f, b, e, o), defining a segment named - t (usually, text, data, or core) in file f mapping addresses in - the range b through e to the part of the file beginning at - offset o. If segments overlap, later segments obscure earlier - ones. An address a is translated to a file address by finding - the last segment in the list for which b≤a<e; the location in the - file is then address+f–b. -
- - Usually, the text and initialized data of a program are mapped - by segments called text, data, and bss. Since a program file does - not contain stack data, this data is not mapped. The text segment - is mapped similarly in a normal (i.e., non-kernel) memfile. However, - one or more segments called data provide access to - process memory. This region contains the program’s static data, - the bss, the heap and the stack. -
- - Sometimes it is useful to define a map with a single segment mapping - the region from 0 to 0xFFFFFFFF; a map of this type allows an - entire file to be examined without address translation. -
- - The $m command dumps the currently active maps. The ?m and /m - commands modify the segment parameters in the textfile and memfile - maps, respectively.
- -

-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - To set a breakpoint at the beginning of write() in extant process - 27:
- -
- - % db 27
- :h
- write:b
- :c
- -
- - -
- To set a breakpoint at the entry of function parse when the local - variable argc in main is equal to 1:
- -
- - parse:b *main.argc−1=X
- -
- - -
- This prints the value of argc−1 which as a side effect sets dot; - when argc is one the breakpoint will fire. Beware that local variables - may be stored in registers; see the BUGS section.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - acid(1)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/db
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Exit status is 0, unless the last command failed or returned non-zero - status.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Examining a local variable with routine.name returns the contents - of the memory allocated for the variable, but with optimization, - variables often reside in registers. Also, on some architectures, - the first argument is always passed in a register. -
- - Variables and parameters that have been optimized away do not - appear in the symbol table, returning the error bad local variable - when accessed by db. -
- - Breakpoints should not be set on instructions scheduled in delay - slots. When a program stops on such a breakpoint, it is usually - impossible to continue its execution.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/dc.html b/man/man1/dc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 95b7fd24..00000000 --- a/man/man1/dc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,199 +0,0 @@ - -dc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DC(1)DC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dc – desk calculator
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - dc [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Dc is an arbitrary precision desk calculator. Ordinarily it operates - on decimal integers, but one may specify an input base, output - base, and a number of fractional digits to be maintained. The - overall structure of dc is a stacking (reverse Polish) calculator. - If an argument is given, input is taken from that file until its - end, then from the standard input. The following constructions - are recognized:
- number
- -
- - The value of the number is pushed on the stack. A number is an - unbroken string of the digits 0−9A−F or 0−9a−f. A hexadecimal - number beginning with a lower case letter must be preceded by - a zero to distinguish it from the command associated with the - letter. It may be preceded by an underscore _ to - input a negative number. Numbers may contain decimal points.
- -
- +    − /    *    %    ^
- -
- - Add +, subtract −, multiply *, divide /, remainder %, or exponentiate - ^ the top two values on the stack. The two entries are popped - off the stack; the result is pushed on the stack in their place. - Any fractional part of an exponent is ignored.
- -
- sx
- Sx    Pop the top of the stack and store into a register named x, - where x may be any character. Under operation S register x is - treated as a stack and the value is pushed on it.
- lx
- Lx    Push the value in register x onto the stack. The register x - is not altered. All registers start with zero value. Under operation - L register x is treated as a stack and its top value is popped - onto the main stack.
- d     Duplicate the top value on the stack.
- p     Print the top value on the stack. The top value remains unchanged. - P interprets the top of the stack as an text string, removes it, - and prints it.
- f     Print the values on the stack.
- q
- Q     Exit the program. If executing a string, the recursion level - is popped by two. Under operation Q the top value on the stack - is popped and the string execution level is popped by that value.
- x     Treat the top element of the stack as a character string and - execute it as a string of dc commands.
- X     Replace the number on the top of the stack with its scale factor.
- [ ... ]
- -
- - Put the bracketed text string on the top of the stack.
- -
- <x
- >x
- =x    Pop and compare the top two elements of the stack. Register - x is executed if they obey the stated relation.
- v     Replace the top element on the stack by its square root. Any - existing fractional part of the argument is taken into account, - but otherwise the scale factor is ignored.
- !     Interpret the rest of the line as a shell command.
- c     Clear the stack.
- i     The top value on the stack is popped and used as the number base - for further input.
- I     Push the input base on the top of the stack.
- o     The top value on the stack is popped and used as the number base - for further output. In bases larger than 10, each ‘digit’ prints - as a group of decimal digits.
- O     Push the output base on the top of the stack.
- k     Pop the top of the stack, and use that value as a non-negative - scale factor: the appropriate number of places are printed on - output, and maintained during multiplication, division, and exponentiation. - The interaction of scale factor, input base, and output base will - be reasonable if all are changed together. - z     Push the stack level onto the stack.
- Z     Replace the number on the top of the stack with its length.
- ?     A line of input is taken from the input source (usually the terminal) - and executed.
- ; :   Used by bc for array operations. -
- - The scale factor set by k determines how many digits are kept - to the right of the decimal point. If s is the current scale factor, - sa is the scale of the first operand, sb is the scale of the second, - and b is the (integer) second operand, results are truncated to - the following scales.
- -
- - +,−     max(sa,sb)
- *      min(sa+sb , max(s,sa,sb))
- /      s
- %      so that dividend = divisor*quotient + remainder; remainder has - sign of dividend
- ^      min(sa×|b|, max(s,sa))
- v      max(s,sa)
- -
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - -
- - Print the first ten values of n!
- -
- - [la1+dsa*pla10>y]sy
- 0sa1
- lyx
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/dc.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - bc(1), hoc(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - x is unimplemented, where x is an octal number: an internal error.
- ‘Out of headers’ for too many numbers being kept around.
- ‘Nesting depth’ for too many levels of nested execution.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - When the input base exceeds 16, there is no notation for digits - greater than F. -
- - Past its time.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/deroff.html b/man/man1/deroff.html deleted file mode 100644 index cb0c5aff..00000000 --- a/man/man1/deroff.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,102 +0,0 @@ - -deroff(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DEROFF(1)DEROFF(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - deroff, delatex – remove formatting requests
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - deroff [ option ... ] file ... -
- - delatex file
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Deroff reads each file in sequence and removes all nroff and troff(1) - requests and non-text arguments, backslash constructions, and - constructs of preprocessors such as eqn(1), pic(1), and tbl(1). - Remaining text is written on the standard output. Deroff follows - files included by .so and .nx commands; if a file has - already been included, a .so for that file is ignored and a .nx - terminates execution. If no input file is given, deroff reads - from standard input. -
- - The options are
- −w    Output a word list, one ‘word’ (string of letters, digits, and - properly embedded ampersands and apostrophes, beginning with a - letter) per line. Other characters are skipped. Otherwise, the - output follows the original, with the deletions mentioned above.
- −_    Like −w, but consider underscores to be alphanumeric rather - than punctuation.
- −i    Ignore .so and .nx requests.
- −ms
- −mm   Remove titles, attachments, etc., as well as ordinary troff - constructs, from ms(7) or mm documents.
- −ml   Same as −mm, but remove lists as well. -
- - Delatex does for tex and latex (see tex(1)) files what deroff - −wi does for troff files.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/deroff.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/delatex.lx
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), tex(1), spell(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - These filters are not complete interpreters of troff or tex. For - example, macro definitions containing \$ cause chaos in deroff - when the popular $$ delimiters for eqn are in effect. -
- - Text inside macros is emitted at place of definition, not place - of call.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/dial.html b/man/man1/dial.html deleted file mode 100644 index 70456274..00000000 --- a/man/man1/dial.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ - -dial(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DIAL(1)DIAL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dial – connect to a remote service
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - dial [ −e ] addr
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Dial connects to the network address addr (see dial(3)) and then - copies data from the connection to standard output, and from standard - input to the connection. -
- - By default, dial exits when end of file is reached on standard - input or on the network connection. The −e flag causes dial to - exit only in response to end of file on the network connection.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/dial.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - dial(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/dict.html b/man/man1/dict.html deleted file mode 100644 index 48d086ba..00000000 --- a/man/man1/dict.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,168 +0,0 @@ - -dict(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DICT(1)DICT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dict, adict – dictionary browser
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - dict [ −k ] [ −d dictname ] [ −c command ] [ pattern ] adict [ - −d dictname ] [ pattern ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Dict is a dictionary browser. If a pattern is given on the command - line, dict prints all matching entries; otherwise it repeatedly - accepts and executes commands. The options are
- −d dictname   Use the given dictionary. A list of available dictionaries - is printed by option −d?. The default is the first dictionary - on the list that is installed on the system.
- −c command   Execute one command and quit. The command syntax is - described below.
- −k          Print a pronunciation key. -
- - Patterns are regular expressions (see regexp(7)), with an implicit - leading ^ and trailing $. Patterns are matched against an index - of headwords and variants, to form a ‘match set’. By default, - both patterns and the index are folded: upper case characters - are mapped into their lower case equivalents, and Latin accented - characters are mapped into their non-accented equivalents. In - interactive mode, there is always a ‘current match set’ and a - ‘current entry’ within the match set. Commands can change either - or both, as well as print the entries or information about them. - -
- - Commands have an address followed by a command letter. Addresses - have the form:
- /re/     Set the match set to all entries matching the regular expression - re, sorted in dictionary order. Set the current entry to the first - of the match set.
- !re!     Like /re/ but use exact matching, i.e., without case and accent - folding.
- n       An integer n means change the current entry to the nth of the - current match set.
- #n      The integer n is an absolute byte offset into the raw dictionary. - (See the A command, below.)
- addr+    After setting the match set and current entry according to - addr, change the match set and current entry to be the next entry - in the dictionary (not necessarily in the match set) after the - current entry.
- addr−    Like addr+ but go to previous dictionary entry. -
- - The command letters come in pairs: a lower case and the corresponding - upper case letter. The lower case version prints something about - the current entry only, and advances the current entry to the - next in the match set (wrapping around to the beginning after - the last). The upper case version prints something about - all of the match set and resets the current entry to the beginning - of the set.
- p,P    Print the whole entry.
- h,H    Print only the headword(s) of the entry.
- a,A    Print the dictionary byte offset of the entry.
- r,R    Print the whole entry in raw format (without translating special - characters, etc.). -
- - If no command letter is given for the first command, H is assumed. - After an H, the default command is p. Otherwise, the default command - is the previous command. -
- - Adict is a dictionary browser for acme(1). When run with no arguments, - it creates a new acme window named /adict/ listing the installed - dictionaries. Clicking with button 3 on a dictionary name will - create a new empty window named /adict/dict/. Typing and then - clicking on a pattern in this window will create - a new lookup window named /adict/dict/pattern containing the dictionary’s - definition of pattern. Clicking with button 3 on any word in this - new window will create new lookup windows. -
- - If adict is run with a pattern , it starts with the /adict/dict/pattern - window. -
- - If adict is run with no pattern but with a −d option, it starts - with the /adict/dict/ window.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/dict
- -
- - dictionaries
- -
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - regexp(7)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/dict
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/adict
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - A font with wide coverage of the Unicode Standard should be used - for best results. (Try /usr/local/plan9/font/pelm/unicode.9.font.) - -
- - If the pattern doesn’t begin with a few literal characters, matching - takes a long time. -
- - The dictionaries are not distributed outside Bell Labs, though - see /usr/local/plan9/dict/README for information on using free - dictionaries prepared by Project Gutenberg.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/diff.html b/man/man1/diff.html deleted file mode 100644 index c5e824be..00000000 --- a/man/man1/diff.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,141 +0,0 @@ - -diff(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DIFF(1)DIFF(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - diff – differential file comparator
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - diff [ −efmnbwr ] file1 ... file2
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Diff tells what lines must be changed in two files to bring them - into agreement. If one file is a directory, then a file in that - directory with basename the same as that of the other file is - used. If both files are directories, similarly named files in - the two directories are compared by the method of diff for text - files and - cmp(1) otherwise. If more than two file names are given, then - each argument is compared to the last argument as above. The −r - option causes diff to process similarly named subdirectories recursively. - When processing more than one file, diff prefixes file differences - with a single line listing the two differing files, in - the form of a diff command line. The −m flag causes this behavior - even when processing single files. -
- - The normal output contains lines of these forms:
- -
- - n1 a n3,n4
- n1,n2 d n3
- n1,n2 c n3,n4 -
- - -
- These lines resemble ed commands to convert file1 into file2. - The numbers after the letters pertain to file2. In fact, by exchanging - ‘a’ for ‘d’ and reading backward one may ascertain equally how - to convert file2 into file1. As in ed, identical pairs where n1 - = n2 or n3 = n4 are abbreviated as a single number. -
- - Following each of these lines come all the lines that are affected - in the first file flagged by ‘<’, then all the lines that are affected - in the second file flagged by ‘>’. -
- - The −b option causes trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) to be ignored - and other strings of blanks to compare equal. The −w option causes - all white-space to be removed from input lines before applying - the difference algorithm. -
- - The −n option prefixes each range with file: and inserts a space - around the a, c, and d verbs. The −e option produces a script - of a, c and d commands for the editor ed, which will recreate - file2 from file1. The −f option produces a similar script, not - useful with ed, in the opposite order. It may, however, be useful - as - input to a stream-oriented post-processor. -
- - Except in rare circumstances, diff finds a smallest sufficient - set of file differences.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /tmp/diff[12]
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/diff
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cmp(1), comm(1), ed(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Exit status is the empty string for no differences, some for some, - and error for trouble.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Editing scripts produced under the −e or −f option are naive about - creating lines consisting of a single ‘.’. -
- - When running diff on directories, the notion of what is a text - file is open to debate.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/doctype.html b/man/man1/doctype.html deleted file mode 100644 index f837d915..00000000 --- a/man/man1/doctype.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ - -doctype(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DOCTYPE(1)DOCTYPE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - doctype – intuit command line for formatting a document
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - doctype [ −n ] [ −T dev ] [ file ] ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Doctype examines a troff(1) input file to deduce the appropriate - text formatting command and prints it on standard output. Doctype - recognizes input for troff(1), related preprocessors like eqn(1), - and the ms(7) and mm macro packages. -
- - Option −n invokes nroff instead of troff. The −T option is passed - to troff.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - eval `{doctype chapter.?} | lp
- -
- - Typeset files named chapter.0, chapter.1, ...
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/doctype
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), eqn(1), tbl(1), pic(1), grap(1), ms(7), man(7)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - In true A.I. style, its best guesses are inspired rather than - accurate.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/echo.html b/man/man1/echo.html deleted file mode 100644 index a4f6e359..00000000 --- a/man/man1/echo.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ - -echo(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ECHO(1)ECHO(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - echo – print arguments
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - echo [ −n ] [ arg ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Echo writes its arguments separated by blanks and terminated by - a newline on the standard output. Option −n suppresses the newline.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/echo.c
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - If echo draws an error while writing to standard output, the exit - status is write error. Otherwise the exit status is empty.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/ed.html b/man/man1/ed.html deleted file mode 100644 index a259b9bc..00000000 --- a/man/man1/ed.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,439 +0,0 @@ - -ed(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ED(1)ED(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ed – text editor
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - ed [ − ] [ −o ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Ed is a venerable text editor. -
- - If a file argument is given, ed simulates an e command (see below) - on that file: it is read into ed’s buffer so that it can be edited. - The options are
- −     Suppress the printing of character counts by e, r, and w commands - and of the confirming ! by ! commands.
- −o    (for output piping) Write all output to the standard error file - except writing by w commands. If no file is given, make /dev/stdout - the remembered file; see the e command below. -
- - Ed operates on a ‘buffer’, a copy of the file it is editing; changes - made in the buffer have no effect on the file until a w (write) - command is given. The copy of the text being edited resides in - a temporary file called the buffer. -
- - Commands to ed have a simple and regular structure: zero, one, - or two addresses followed by a single character command, possibly - followed by parameters to the command. These addresses specify - one or more lines in the buffer. Missing addresses are supplied - by default. -
- - In general, only one command may appear on a line. Certain commands - allow the addition of text to the buffer. While ed is accepting - text, it is said to be in input mode. In this mode, no commands - are recognized; all input is merely collected. Input mode is left - by typing a period . alone at the beginning of a line. -
- - Ed supports the regular expression notation described in regexp(7). - Regular expressions are used in addresses to specify lines and - in one command (see s below) to specify a portion of a line which - is to be replaced. If it is desired to use one of the regular - expression metacharacters as an ordinary character, that - character may be preceded by ‘\’. This also applies to the character - bounding the regular expression (often /) and to \ itself. -
- - To understand addressing in ed it is necessary to know that at - any time there is a current line. Generally, the current line - is the last line affected by a command; however, the exact effect - on the current line is discussed under the description of each - command. Addresses are constructed as follows. - 1.    The character ., customarily called ‘dot’, addresses the current - line.
- 2.    The character $ addresses the last line of the buffer.
- 3.    A decimal number n addresses the n-th line of the buffer.
- 4.    'x addresses the line marked with the name x, which must be - a lower-case letter. Lines are marked with the k command.
- 5.    A regular expression enclosed in slashes ( /) addresses the - line found by searching forward from the current line and stopping - at the first line containing a string that matches the regular - expression. If necessary the search wraps around to the beginning - of the buffer.
- 6.    A regular expression enclosed in queries ? addresses the line - found by searching backward from the current line and stopping - at the first line containing a string that matches the regular - expression. If necessary the search wraps around to the end of - the buffer.
- 7.    An address followed by a plus sign + or a minus sign − followed - by a decimal number specifies that address plus (resp. minus) - the indicated number of lines. The plus sign may be omitted.
- 8.    An address followed by + (or −) followed by a regular expression - enclosed in slashes specifies the first matching line following - (or preceding) that address. The search wraps around if necessary. - The + may be omitted, so 0/x/ addresses the first line in the - buffer with an x. Enclosing the regular expression in - -
- - ? reverses the search direction.
- -
- 9.    If an address begins with + or − the addition or subtraction - is taken with respect to the current line; e.g. −5 is understood - to mean .−5.
- 10.   If an address ends with + or −, then 1 is added (resp. subtracted). - As a consequence of this rule and rule 9, the address − refers - to the line before the current line. Moreover, trailing + and - − characters have cumulative effect, so −− refers to the current - line less 2.
- 11.   To maintain compatibility with earlier versions of the editor, - the character ^ in addresses is equivalent to −. -
- - Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses. Commands which - require no addresses regard the presence of an address as an error. - Commands which accept one or two addresses assume default addresses - when insufficient are given. If more addresses are given than - a command requires, the last one or two - (depending on what is accepted) are used. -
- - Addresses are separated from each other typically by a comma ,. - They may also be separated by a semicolon ;. In this case the - current line is set to the previous address before the next address - is interpreted. If no address precedes a comma or semicolon, line - 1 is assumed; if no address follows, the last line of the - buffer is assumed. The second address of any two-address sequence - must correspond to a line following the line corresponding to - the first address. -
- - In the following list of ed commands, the default addresses are - shown in parentheses. The parentheses are not part of the address, - but are used to show that the given addresses are the default. - ‘Dot’ means the current line.
- (.)a
- <text>
- .     Read the given text and append it after the addressed line. Dot - is left on the last line input, if there were any, otherwise at - the addressed line. Address 0 is legal for this command; text - is placed at the beginning of the buffer.
- (.,.)b[+−][pagesize][pln]
- -
- - Browse. Print a ‘page’, normally 20 lines. The optional + (default) - or − specifies whether the next or previous page is to be printed. - The optional pagesize is the number of lines in a page. The optional - p, n, or l causes printing in the specified format, initially - p. Pagesize and format are remembered between b - commands. Dot is left at the last line displayed.
- -
- (.,.)c
- <text>
- .     Change. Delete the addressed lines, then accept input text to - replace these lines. Dot is left at the last line input; if there - were none, it is left at the line preceding the deleted lines.
- (.,.)d
- -
- - Delete the addressed lines from the buffer. Dot is set to the - line following the last line deleted, or to the last line of the - buffer if the deleted lines had no successor.
- -
- e filename
- -
- - Edit. Delete the entire contents of the buffer; then read the - named file into the buffer. Dot is set to the last line of the - buffer. The number of characters read is typed. The file name - is remembered for possible use in later e, r, or w commands. If - filename is missing, the remembered name is used. - -
- E filename
- -
- - Unconditional e; see ‘q’ below.
- -
- f filename
- -
- - Print the currently remembered file name. If filename is given, - the currently remembered file name is first changed to filename.
- -
- (1,$)g/regular expression/command list
- (1,$)g/regular expression/
- (1,$)g/regular expression
- -
- - Global. First mark every line which matches the given regularexpression. - Then for every such line, execute the command list with dot initially - set to that line. A single command or the first of multiple commands - appears on the same line with the global command. All lines of - a multi-line list except the last line - must end with \. The ‘.’ terminating input mode for an a, i, c - command may be omitted if it would be on the last line of the - command list. The commands g and v are not permitted in the command - list. Any character other than space or newline may be used instead - of / to delimit the regular expression. - The second and third forms mean g/regular expression/p.
- -
- (.)i
- <text>
- .     Insert the given text before the addressed line. Dot is left - at the last line input, or, if there were none, at the line before - the addressed line. This command differs from the a command only - in the placement of the text.
- (.,.+1)j
- -
- - Join the addressed lines into a single line; intermediate newlines - are deleted. Dot is left at the resulting line.
- -
- (.)kxMark the addressed line with name x, which must be a lower-case - letter. The address form 'x then addresses this line.
- (.,.)l
- -
- - List. Print the addressed lines in an unambiguous way: a tab is - printed as \t, a backspace as \b, backslashes as \\, and non-printing - characters as a backslash, an x, and four hexadecimal digits. - Long lines are folded, with the second and subsequent sub-lines - indented one tab stop. If the last character in - the line is a blank, it is followed by \n. An l may be appended, - like p, to any non-I/O command.
- -
- (.,.)ma
- -
- - Move. Reposition the addressed lines after the line addressed - by a. Dot is left at the last moved line.
- -
- (.,.)n
- -
- - Number. Perform p, prefixing each line with its line number and - a tab. An n may be appended, like p, to any non-I/O command.
- -
- (.,.)p
- -
- - Print the addressed lines. Dot is left at the last line printed. - A p appended to any non-I/O command causes the then current line - to be printed after the command is executed.
- -
- (.,.)P
- -
- - This command is a synonym for p.
- -
- q     Quit the editor. No automatic write of a file is done. A q or - e command is considered to be in error if the buffer has been - modified since the last w, q, or e command.
- Q     Quit unconditionally.
- ($)r filename
- -
- - Read in the given file after the addressed line. If no filename - is given, the remembered file name is used. The file name is remembered - if there were no remembered file name already. If the read is - successful, the number of characters read is printed. Dot is left - at the last line read from the file. - -
- (.,.)sn/regular expression/replacement/
- (.,.)sn/regular expression/replacement/g
- (.,.)sn/regular expression/replacement
- -
- - Substitute. Search each addressed line for an occurrence of the - specified regular expression. On each line in which n matches - are found (n defaults to 1 if missing), the nth matched string - is replaced by the replacement specified. If the global replacement - indicator g appears after the command, all subsequent - matches on the line are also replaced. It is an error for the - substitution to fail on all addressed lines. Any character other - than space or newline may be used instead of / to delimit the - regular expression and the replacement. Dot is left at the last - line substituted. The third form means - sn/regular expression/replacement/p. The second / may be omitted - if the replacement is empty.
- An ampersand & appearing in the replacement is replaced by the - string matching the regular expression. The characters \n, where - n is a digit, are replaced by the text matched by the n-th regular - subexpression enclosed between ( and ). When nested parenthesized - subexpressions are present, n is - determined by counting occurrences of ( starting from the left.
- A literal &, /, \ or newline may be included in a replacement by - prefixing it with \.
- -
- (.,.)ta
- -
- - Transfer. Copy the addressed lines after the line addressed by - a. Dot is left at the last line of the copy.
- -
- (.,.)u
- -
- - Undo. Restore the preceding contents of the first addressed line - (sic), which must be the last line in which a substitution was - made (double sic).
- -
- (1,$)v/regular expression/command list
- -
- - This command is the same as the global command g except that the - command list is executed with dot initially set to every line - except those matching the regular expression.
- -
- (1,$)w filename
- -
- - Write the addressed lines to the given file. If the file does - not exist, it is created with mode 666 (readable and writable - by everyone). If no filename is given, the remembered file name, - if any, is used. The file name is remembered if there were no - remembered file name already. Dot is unchanged. If the write is - successful, the number of characters written is printed.
- -
- (1,$)W filename
- -
- - Perform w, but append to, instead of overwriting, any existing - file contents.
- -
- ($)=   Print the line number of the addressed line. Dot is unchanged.
- !shell command
- -
- - Send the remainder of the line after the ! to rc(1) to be interpreted - as a command. Dot is unchanged.
- -
- (.+1)<newline>
- -
- - An address without a command is taken as a p command. A terminal - / may be omitted from the address. A blank line alone is equivalent - to .+1p; it is useful for stepping through text. -
- - -
- If an interrupt signal (DEL) is sent, ed prints a ? and returns - to its command level. -
- - When reading a file, ed discards NUL characters and all characters - after the last newline.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /tmp/e*
- ed.hup work is saved here if terminal hangs up
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/ed.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sam(1), sed(1), regexp(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - ?name for inaccessible file; ?TMP for temporary file overflow; - ? for errors in commands or other overflows.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/eqn.html b/man/man1/eqn.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3d819235..00000000 --- a/man/man1/eqn.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,203 +0,0 @@ - -eqn(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
EQN(1)EQN(1) -
- -
- - -
- - delim $$
- -
- -
-

NAME
- -
- - eqn – typeset mathematics
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - eqn [ option ... ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Eqn is a troff(1) preprocessor for typesetting mathematics on - a typesetter. Usage is almost always
- -
- - eqn file ... | troff -
- - -
- If no files are specified, eqn reads from the standard input. - Eqn prepares output for the typesetter named in the −Tdest option - (default −Tutf; see troff(1)). When run with other preprocessor - filters, eqn usually comes last. -
- - A line beginning with .EQ marks the start of an equation; the - end of an equation is marked by a line beginning with .EN. Neither - of these lines is altered, so they may be defined in macro packages - to get centering, numbering, etc. It is also possible to set two - characters as ‘delimiters’; text between delimiters is also - eqn input. Delimiters may be set to characters x and y with the - option −dxy or (more commonly) with delim xy between .EQ and .EN. - Left and right delimiters may be identical. (They are customarily - taken to be $font L "$$" )$. Delimiters are turned off by delim - off. All text that is neither between delimiters - nor between .EQ and .EN is passed through untouched. -
- - Tokens within eqn are separated by spaces, tabs, newlines, braces, - double quotes, tildes or circumflexes. Braces {} are used for - grouping; generally speaking, anywhere a single character like - x could appear, a complicated construction enclosed in braces - may be used instead. Tilde ~ represents a full space in the - output, circumflex ^ half as much. -
- - Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords sub - and sup. Thus x sub i makes $x sub i$, a sub i sup 2 produces - $a sub i sup 2$, and e sup {x sup 2 + y sup 2} gives $e sup {x - sup 2 + y sup 2}$. -
- - Over makes fractions: a over b yields $a over b$. -
- - Sqrt produces square roots: 1 over sqrt {ax sup 2 +bx+c} results - in $1 over sqrt {ax sup 2 +bx+c}$ . -
- - The keywords from and to introduce lower and upper limits on arbitrary - things: $lim from {n -> inf} sum from 0 to n x sub i$ is made with - lim from {n −> inf} sum from 0 to n x sub i. -
- - Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height are - made with left and right: left [ x sup 2 + y sup 2 over alpha - right ] ~=~1 produces $left [ x sup 2 + y sup 2 over alpha right - ] ~=~1$. The right clause is optional. Legal characters after - left and right are braces, brackets, - bars, c and f for ceiling and floor, and "" for nothing at all (useful - for a right-side-only bracket). -
- - Vertical piles of things are made with pile, lpile, cpile, and - rpile: pile {a above b above c} produces $pile {a above b above - c}$. There can be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile. lpile - left-justifies, pile and cpile center, with different vertical - spacing, and rpile right justifies. -
- - Matrices are made with matrix: matrix { lcol { x sub i above y - sub 2 } ccol { 1 above 2 } } produces $matrix { lcol { x sub i - above y sub 2 } ccol { 1 above 2 } }$. In addition, there is rcol - for a right-justified column. -
- - Diacritical marks are made with prime, dot, dotdot, hat, tilde, - bar, under, vec, dyad, and under: x sub 0 sup prime = f(t) bar - + g(t) under is $x sub 0 sup prime = f(t) bar + g(t) under$, and - x vec = y dyad is $x vec = y dyad$. -
- - Sizes and fonts can be changed with prefix operators size n, size - ±n, fat, roman, italic, bold, or font n. Size and fonts can be - changed globally in a document by gsize n and gfont n, or by the - command-line arguments −sn and −fn. -
- - Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by 3 point sizes - from the previous size; this may be changed by the command-line - argument −pn. -
- - Successive display arguments can be lined up. Place mark before - the desired lineup point in the first equation; place lineup at - the place that is to line up vertically in subsequent equations. - -
- - Shorthands may be defined or existing keywords redefined with - define: define thing % replacement % defines a new token called - thing which will be replaced by replacement whenever it appears - thereafter. The % may be any character that does not occur in - replacement. -
- - Keywords like sum ( sum ), int ( int ), inf ( inf ), and shorthands - like >= (>=), −> (->), and != ( != ) are recognized. Greek letters - are spelled out in the desired case, as in alpha or GAMMA. Mathematical - words like sin, cos, log are made Roman automatically. Troff(1) - four-character escapes like \(lh (<=) can - be used anywhere. Strings enclosed in double quotes " " are passed - through untouched; this permits keywords to be entered as text, - and can be used to communicate with troff when all else fails.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /sys/lib/troff/font/devutf   font descriptions for PostScript
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/eqn
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), tbl(1)
- J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan, “Troff User’s Manual”.
- B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry, “Typesetting Mathematics--User’s - Guide”, Unix Research System Programmer’s Manual, Tenth Edition, - Volume 2.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To embolden digits, parens, etc., it is necessary to quote them, - as in bold "12.3". delim off
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/factor.html b/man/man1/factor.html deleted file mode 100644 index 893f2ad9..00000000 --- a/man/man1/factor.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ - -factor(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FACTOR(1)FACTOR(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - factor, primes – factor a number, generate large primes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - factor [ number ] -
- - primes [ start [ finish ] ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Factor prints number and its prime factors, each repeated the - proper number of times. The number must be positive and less than - 254 (about 1.8×1016). -
- - If no number is given, factor reads a stream of numbers from the - standard input and factors them. It exits on any input not a positive - integer. Maximum running time is proportional to -/n . -
- - -
- - Primes prints the prime numbers ranging from start to finish, - where start and finish are positive numbers less than 256. If - finish is missing, primes prints without end; if start is missing, - it reads the starting number from the standard input.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/factor.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/primes.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/fmt.html b/man/man1/fmt.html deleted file mode 100644 index 28d339a4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/fmt.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ - -fmt(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FMT(1)FMT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - fmt, htmlfmt – simple text formatters
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - fmt [ option ... ] [ file ... ] -
- - htmlfmt [ −a ] [ −c charset ] [ −u url ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Fmt copies the given files (standard input by default) to its - standard output, filling and indenting lines. The options are
- −l n   Output line length is n, including indent (default 70).
- −w n   A synonym for −l.
- −i n   Indent n spaces (default 0).
- −j    Do not join short lines: only fold long lines. -
- - Empty lines and initial white space in input lines are preserved. - Empty lines are inserted between input files. -
- - Fmt is idempotent: it leaves already formatted text unchanged. - -
- - Htmlfmt performs a similar service, but accepts as input text - formatted with HTML tags. It accepts fmt’s −l and −w flags and - also:
- −a    Normally htmlfmt suppresses the contents of form fields and - anchors (URLs and image files); this flag causes it to print them, - in square brackets.
- −c charset
- -
- - change the default character set from iso-8859-1 to charset. This - is the character set assumed if there isn’t one specified by the - html itself in a <meta> directive.
- -
- −u urlUse url as the base URL for the document when displaying - anchors; sets −a.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/fmt.c -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/htmlfmt
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Htmlfmt makes no attempt to render the two-dimensional geometry - of tables; it just treats the table entries as plain, to-be-formatted - text.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/fortune.html b/man/man1/fortune.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2793ee92..00000000 --- a/man/man1/fortune.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ - -fortune(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FORTUNE(1)FORTUNE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - fortune – sample lines from a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - fortune [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Fortune prints a one-line aphorism chosen at random. If a file - is specified, the saying is taken from that file; otherwise it - is selected from /usr/local/plan9/lib/fortunes.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/fortunes
- /usr/local/plan9/lib/fortunes.index fast lookup table, maintained - automatically
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/fortune.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/freq.html b/man/man1/freq.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6a4b82d0..00000000 --- a/man/man1/freq.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ - -freq(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FREQ(1)FREQ(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - freq – print histogram of character frequencies
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - freq [ −dxocr ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Freq reads the given files (default standard input) and prints - histograms of the character frequencies. By default, freq counts - each byte as a character; under the −r option it instead counts - UTF sequences, that is, runes. -
- - Each non-zero entry of the table is printed preceded by the byte - value, in decimal, octal, hex, and Unicode character (if printable). - If any options are given, the −d, −x, −o, −c flags specify a subset - of value formats: decimal, hex, octal, and character, respectively.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/freq.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - utf(7), wc(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/fsize.html b/man/man1/fsize.html deleted file mode 100644 index 871ef383..00000000 --- a/man/man1/fsize.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ - -fsize(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FSIZE(1)FSIZE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - fsize, mtime – print file information
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - fsize file ... -
- - mtime file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Fsize prints the name and size of each of the files. -
- - Mtime prints the name and modification time (in seconds since - the epoch) of each of the files.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/fsize.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/mtime.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The output formats of the two programs are different.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/grap.html b/man/man1/grap.html deleted file mode 100644 index e4e9c3c4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/grap.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ - -grap(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GRAP(1)GRAP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - grap – pic preprocessor for drawing graphs
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - grap [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Grap is a pic(1) preprocessor for drawing graphs on a typesetter. - Graphs are surrounded by the troff ‘commands’ .G1 and .G2. Data - are scaled and plotted, with tick marks supplied automatically. - Commands exist to modify the frame, add labels, override the default - ticks, change the plotting style, define coordinate - ranges and transformations, and include data from files. In addition, - grap provides the same loops, conditionals, and macro processing - that pic does. -
- - frame ht e wid e top dotted ...: Set the frame around the graph - to specified ht and wid; default is 2 by 3 (inches). The line - styles (dotted, dashed, invis, solid (default)) of the sides (top, - bot, left, right) of the frame can be set independently. -
- - label side "a label" "as a set of strings" adjust: Place label on - specified side; default side is bottom. adjust is up (or down - left right) expr to shift default position; width expr sets the - width explicitly. -
- - ticks side in at optname expr, expr, ...: Put ticks on side at - expr, ..., and label with "expr". If any expr is followed by "...", - label tick with "...", and turn off all automatic labels. If "..." - contains %f’s, they will be interpreted as printf formatting instructions - for the tick value. Ticks point in or out (default out). Tick - iterator: instead of at ..., use from expr to expr by op expr - where op is optionally +−*/ for additive or multiplicative steps. - by can be omitted, to give steps of size 1. If no ticks are requested, - they are supplied automatically; suppress this with ticks off. - Automatic ticks normally leave a margin of 7% on each - side; set this to anything by margin = expr. -
- - grid side linedesc at optname expr, expr, ...: Draw grids perpendicular - to side in style linedesc at expr, .... Iterators and labels work - as with ticks. -
- - coord optname x min, max y min, max log x    log y: Set range of - coords and optional log scaling on either or both. This overrides - computation of data range. Default value of optname is current - coordinate system (each coord defines a new coordinate system). - -
- - plot "str" at point; "str" at point: Put str at point. Text position - can be qualified with rjust, ljust, above, below after "...". -
- - line from point to point linedesc: Draw line from here to there. - arrow works in place of line. -
- - next optname at point linedesc: Continue plot of data in optname - to point; default is current. -
- - draw optname linedesc ...: Set mode for next: use this style from - now on, and plot "..." at each point (if given). -
- - new optname linedesc ...: Set mode for next, but disconnect from - previous. -
- - A list of numbers x y1 y2 y3 ... is treated as plot bullet at - x,y1; plot bullet at x,y2; etc., or as next at x,y1 etc., if draw - is specified. Abscissae of 1,2,3,... are provided if there is - only one input number per line. -
- - A point optname expr, expr maps the point to the named coordinate - system. A linedesc is one of dot dash invis solid optionally followed - by an expression. -
- - define name {whatever}: Define a macro. There are macros already - defined for standard plotting symbols like bullet, circle, star, - plus, etc., in /usr/local/plan9/lib/grap.defines, which is included - if it exists. -
- - var = expr: Evaluate an expression. Operators are + − * and /. - Functions are log and exp (both base 10), sin, cos, sqrt; rand - returns random number on [0,1); max(e,e), min(e,e), int(e). -
- - print expr; print "...": As a debugging aid, print expr or string - on the standard error. -
- - copy "file name": Include this file right here. -
- - copy thru macro: Pass rest of input (until .G2) through macro, - treating each field (non-blank, or "...") as an argument. macro - can be the name of a macro previously defined, or the body of - one in place, like /plot $1 at $2,$3/. -
- - copy thru macro until "string": Stop copy when input is string (left-justified). - -
- - pic remainder of line: Copy to output with leading blanks removed. - -
- - graph Name pic-position: Start a new frame, place it at specified - position, e.g., graph Thing2 with .sw at Thing1.se + (0.1,0). - Name must be capitalized to keep pic happy. -
- - .anything at beginning of line: Copied verbatim. -
- - sh %anything %: Pass everything between the %’s to the shell; - as with macros, % may be any character and anything may include - newlines. -
- - # anything: A comment, which is discarded. -
- - Order is mostly irrelevant; no category is mandatory. Any arguments - on the .G1 line are placed on the generated .PS line for pic.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - .G1
- frame ht 1 top invis right invis
- coord x 0, 10 y 1, 3 log y
- ticks left in at 1 "bottommost tick", 2,3 "top tick"
- ticks bot in from 0 to 10 by 2
- label bot "silly graph"
- label left "left side label" "here"
- grid left dashed at 2.5
- copy thru / circle at $1,$2 /
- 1 1
- 2 1.5
- 3 2
- 4 1.5
- 10 3
- .G2
- frame ht 1 top invis right invis
- coord x 0, 10 y 1, 3 log y
- ticks left in at 1 "bottommost tick", 2,3 "top tick"
- ticks bot in from 0 to 10 by 2
- label bot "silly graph"
- label left "left side label" "here"
- grid left dashed at 2.5
- copy thru / circle at $1,$2 /
- 1 1
- 2 1.5
- 3 2
- 4 1.5
- 10 3
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/grap.defines   definitions of standard plotting - characters, e.g., bullet
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/grap
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - pic(1), troff(1)
- J. L. Bentley and B. W. Kernighan, “GRAP--A Language for Typesetting - Graphs”, Unix Research System Programmer’s Manual, Tenth Edition, - Volume 2.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/graph.html b/man/man1/graph.html deleted file mode 100644 index af80b3d4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/graph.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ - -graph(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GRAPH(1)GRAPH(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - graph – draw a graph
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - graph [ option ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Graph with no options takes pairs of numbers from the standard - input as abscissas (x-values) and ordinates (y-values) of a graph. - Successive points are connected by straight lines. The graph is - encoded on the standard output for display by plot(1) filters. - -
- - If an ordinate is followed by a nonnumeric string, that string - is printed as a label beginning on the point. Labels may be surrounded - with quotes " " in which case they may be empty or contain blanks - and numbers; labels never contain newlines. -
- - The following options are recognized, each as a separate argument.
- −a    Supply abscissas automatically; no x-values appear in the input. - Spacing is given by the next argument (default 1). A second optional - argument is the starting point for automatic abscissas (default - 0, or 1 with a log scale in x, or the lower limit given by −x).
- −b    Break (disconnect) the graph after each label in the input.
- −c    Character string given by next argument is default label for - each point.
- −g    Next argument is grid style, 0 no grid, 1 frame with ticks, - 2 full grid (default).
- −l    Next argument is a legend to title the graph. Grid ranges are - automatically printed as part of the title unless a −s option - is present.
- −m    Next argument is mode (style) of connecting lines: 0 disconnected, - 1 connected. Some devices give distinguishable line styles for - other small integers. Mode –1 (default) begins with style 1 and - rotates styles for successive curves under option −o.
- −o    (Overlay.) The ordinates for n superposed curves appear in the - input with each abscissa value. The next argument is n.
- −s    Save screen; no new page for this graph.
- −x lIf l is present, x-axis is logarithmic. Next 1 (or 2) arguments - are lower (and upper) x limits. Third argument, if present, is - grid spacing on x axis. Normally these quantities are determined - automatically.
- −y lSimilarly for y.
- −e    Make automatically determined x and y scales equal.
- −h    Next argument is fraction of space for height.
- −w    Similarly for width.
- −r    Next argument is fraction of space to move right before plotting.
- −u    Similarly to move up before plotting.
- −t    Transpose horizontal and vertical axes. (Option −a now applies - to the vertical axis.) -
- - If a specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit, the axis is - reversed.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/graph
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - plot(1), grap(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Segments that run out of bounds are dropped, not windowed. Logarithmic - axes may not be reversed. Option −e actually makes automatic limits, - rather than automatic scaling, equal.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/grep.html b/man/man1/grep.html deleted file mode 100644 index e9682561..00000000 --- a/man/man1/grep.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ - -grep(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GREP(1)GREP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - grep, g – search a file for a pattern
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - grep [ option ... ] pattern [ file ... ] -
- - g [ option ... ] pattern [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Grep searches the input files (standard input default) for lines - that match the pattern, a regular expression as defined in regexp(7) - with the addition of a newline character as an alternative (substitute - for |) with lowest precedence. Normally, each line matching the - pattern is ‘selected’, and each selected line is copied to - the standard output. The options are
- −c    Print only a count of matching lines.
- −h    Do not print file name tags (headers) with output lines.
- −e    The following argument is taken as a pattern. This option makes - it easy to specify patterns that might confuse argument parsing, - such as −n.
- −i    Ignore alphabetic case distinctions. The implementation folds - into lower case all letters in the pattern and input before interpretation. - Matched lines are printed in their original form.
- −l    (ell) Print the names of files with selected lines; don’t print - the lines.
- −L    Print the names of files with no selected lines; the converse - of −l.
- −n    Mark each printed line with its line number counted in its file.
- −s    Produce no output, but return status.
- −v    Reverse: print lines that do not match the pattern.
- −f    The pattern argument is the name of a file containing regular - expressions one per line.
- −b    Don’t buffer the output: write each output line as soon as it - is discovered. -
- - Output lines are tagged by file name when there is more than one - input file. (To force this tagging, include /dev/null as a file - name argument.) -
- - Care should be taken when using the shell metacharacters $*[^|()=\ - and newline in pattern; it is safest to enclose the entire expression - in single quotes '...'. An expression starting with ’*’ will treat - the rest of the expression as literal characters. -
- - G invokes grep with −n and forces tagging of output lines by file - name. If no files are listed, it searches all files matching
- -
- - *.C *.b *.c *.h *.m *.cc *.java *.py *.tex *.ms
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/grep
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/g
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ed(1), awk(1), sed(1), sam(1), regexp(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Exit status is null if any lines are selected, or non-null when - no lines are selected or an error occurs.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/gview.html b/man/man1/gview.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6abdc7da..00000000 --- a/man/man1/gview.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,155 +0,0 @@ - -gview(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GVIEW(1)GVIEW(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - gview – interactive graph viewer
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - gview [ −l logfile ] [ −m ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Gview reads polygonal lines or a polygonal line drawing from an - ASCII input file (which defaults to standard input), and views - it interactively, with commands to zoom in and out, perform simple - editing operations, and display information about points and polylines. - The editing commands can change the color and - thickness of the polylines, delete (or undelete) some of them, - and optionally rotate and move them. It is also possible to generate - an output file that reflects these changes and is in the same - format as the input. -
- - Since the move and rotate commands are undesirable when just viewing - a graph, they are only enabled if gview is invoked with the −m - option. -
- - Clicking on a polyline with button 1 displays the coordinates - and a t value that tells how far along the polyline. (t=0 at the - first vertex, t=1 at the first vertex, t=1.5 halfway between the - second and third vertices, etc.) The −l option generates a log - file that lists all points selected in this manner. -
- - The most important interactive operations are to zoom in by sweeping - out a rectangle, or to zoom out so that everything currently being - displayed shrinks to fit in the swept-out rectangle. Other options - on the button 3 menu are unzoom which restores the coordinate - system to the default state where everything fits on - the screen, recenter which takes a point and makes it the center - of the window, and square up which makes the horizontal and vertical - scale factors equal. -
- - To take a graph of a function where some part is almost linear - and see how it deviates from a straight line, select two points - on this part of the graph (i.e., select one with button 1 and - then select the other) and then use the slant command on the button - 3 menu. This slants the coordinate system so that the line - between the two selected points appears horizontal (but vertical - still means positive y). Then the zoom in command can be used - to accentuate deviations from horizontal. There is also an unslant - command that undoes all of this and goes back to an unslanted - coordinate system. -
- - There is a recolor command on button 3 that lets you select a - color and change everything to have that color, and a similar - command on button 2 that only affects the selected polyline. The - thick or thin command on button 2 changes the thickness of the - selected polyline and there is also an undo command for such - edits. -
- - Finally, button 3 had commands to read a new input file and display - it on top of everything else, restack the drawing order (in case - lines of different color are drawn on top of each other), write - everything into an output file, or exit the program. -
- - Each polyline in an input or output file is a space-delimited - x y coordinate pair on a line by itself, and the polyline is a - sequence of such vertices followed by a label. The label could - be just a blank line or it could be a string in double quotes, - or virtually any text that does not contain spaces and is on a - line by itself. The - label at the end of the last polyline is optional. It is not legal - to have two consecutive labels, since that would denote a zero-vertex - polyline and each polyline must have at least one vertex. (One-vertex - polylines are useful for scatter plots.)
- If the label after a polyline can contains the word Thick or a - color name (Red, Pink, Dkred, Orange, Yellow, Dkyellow, Green, - Dkgreen, Cyan, Blue, Ltblue, Magenta, Violet, Gray, Black, White), - whichever color name comes first will be used to color the polyline. - -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - To see a graph of the function y=sin(x)/x generate input with - an awk script and pipe it into gview:
- -
- - awk 'BEGIN{for(x=.1;x<500;x+=.1)print x,sin(x)/x}' | gview
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/gview.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - awk(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The user interface for the slant command is counter-intuitive. - Perhaps it would be better to have a scheme for sweeping out a - parallelogram.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/gzip.html b/man/man1/gzip.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3f476f15..00000000 --- a/man/man1/gzip.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,135 +0,0 @@ - -gzip(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GZIP(1)GZIP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - gzip, gunzip, bzip2, bunzip2, zip, unzip, – compress and expand - data
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - gzip [−cvD[1−9]] [file ...] -
- - gunzip [−ctTvD] [file ...] -
- - bzip2 [−cvD[1−9]] [file ...] -
- - bunzip2 [−cvD] [file ...] -
- - zip [−vD[1−9]] [−f zipfile] file [...] -
- - unzip [−cistTvD] [−f zipfile] [file ...]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Gzip encodes files with a hybrid Lempel-Ziv 1977 and Huffman compression - algorithm known as deflate. Most of the time, the resulting file - is smaller, and will never be much bigger. Output files are named - by taking the last path element of each file argument and appending - .gz; if the resulting name ends with - .tar.gz, it is converted to .tgz instead. Gunzip reverses the - process. Its output files are named by taking the last path element - of each file argument, converting .tgz to .tar.gz, and stripping - any .gz; the resulting name must be different from the original - name. -
- - Bzip2 and bunzip2 are similar in interface to gzip and gunzip, - but use a modified Burrows-Wheeler block sorting compression algorithm. - The default suffix for output files is .bz2, with .tar.bz2 becoming - .tbz. Bunzip2 recognizes the extension .tbz2 as a synonym for - .tbz. -
- - Zip encodes the named files and places the results into the archive - zipfile, or the standard output if no file is given. Unzip extracts - files from an archive created by zip. If no files are named as - arguments, all of files in the archive are extracted. A directory’s - name implies all recursively contained files and subdirectories. - -
- - None of these programs removes the original files. If the process - fails, the faulty output files are removed. -
- - The options are:
- −c          Write to standard output rather than creating an output file.
- −i          Convert all archive file names to lower case.
- −s          Streaming mode. Looks at the file data adjacent to each compressed - file rather than seeking in the central file directory. This is - the mode used by unzip if no zipfile is specified. If −s is given, - −T is ignored.
- −t          List matching files in the archive rather than extracting them.
- −T          Set the output time to that specified in the archive.
- −1 .. −9      Sets the compression level. −1 is tuned for speed, −9 - for minimal output size. The best compromise is −6, the default.
- −v          Produce more descriptive output. With −t, adds the uncompressed - size in bytes and the modification time to the output. Without - −t, prints the names of files on standard error as they are compressed - or decompressed.
- −D          Produce debugging output.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/gzip
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/bzip2
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - tar(1), compress(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Unzip can only extract files which are uncompressed or compressed - with the deflate compression scheme. Recent zip files fall into - this category.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/hoc.html b/man/man1/hoc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 21107e8e..00000000 --- a/man/man1/hoc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,136 +0,0 @@ - -hoc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
HOC(1)HOC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - hoc – interactive floating point language
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - hoc [ file ... ] [ −e expression ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Hoc interprets a simple language for floating point arithmetic, - at about the level of BASIC, with C-like syntax and functions. - -
- - The named files are read and interpreted in order. If no file - is given or if file is − hoc interprets the standard input. The - −e option allows input to hoc to be specified on the command line, - to be treated as if it appeared in a file. -
- - Hoc input consists of expressions and statements. Expressions - are evaluated and their results printed. Statements, typically - assignments and function or procedure definitions, produce no - output unless they explicitly call print. -
- - Variable names have the usual syntax, including _; the name _ - by itself contains the value of the last expression evaluated. - The variables E, PI, PHI, GAMMA and DEG are predefined; the last - is 59.25..., degrees per radian. -
- - Expressions are formed with these C-like operators, listed by - decreasing precedence.
- ^     exponentiation
- ! − ++ −−
- * / %
- + −
- > >= < <= == !=
- &&
- ||
- = += −= *= /= %=
- -
- - Built in functions are abs, acos, asin, atan (one argument), cos, - cosh, exp, int, log, log10, sin, sinh, sqrt, tan, and tanh. The - function read(x) reads a value into the variable x and returns - 0 at EOF; the statement print prints a list of expressions that - may include string constants such as - "hello\n". -
- - Control flow statements are if-else, while, and for, with braces - for grouping. Newline ends a statement. Backslash-newline is equivalent - to a space. -
- - Functions and procedures are introduced by the words func and - proc; return is used to return with a value from a function.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - func gcd(a, b) {
- -
- - temp = abs(a) % abs(b)
- if(temp == 0) return abs(b)
- return gcd(b, temp)
- -
- }
- for(i=1; i<12; i++) print gcd(i,12)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/hoc
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - bc(1), dc(1)
- B. W. Kernighan and R. Pike, The Unix Programming Environment, - Prentice-Hall, 1984
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Error recovery is imperfect within function and procedure definitions.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/idiff.html b/man/man1/idiff.html deleted file mode 100644 index 15296a37..00000000 --- a/man/man1/idiff.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,87 +0,0 @@ - -idiff(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
IDIFF(1)IDIFF(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - idiff – interactive diff
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - idiff [ −bw ] file1 file2
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Idiff interactively merges file1 and file2 onto standard output. - Wherever file1 and file2 differ, idiff displays the differences - in the style of “diff −n” on standard error and prompts the user - to select a chunk. Valid responses are:
- <     Use the chunk from file1.
- >     Use the chunk from file2.
- =     Use the diff output itself.
- q<, q>, q=
- -
- - Use the given response for all future questions.
- -
- !cmdExecute cmd and prompt again. -
- - Idiff invokes diff(1) to compare the files. The −b and −w flags, - if passed, are passed to diff.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /tmp/idiff.*
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/idiff.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - diff(1)
- Kernighan and Pike, The Unix Programming Environment, Prentice-Hall, - 1984.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/index.html b/man/man1/index.html deleted file mode 100644 index c35ab541..00000000 --- a/man/man1/index.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,449 +0,0 @@ - - -Manual Section 1 - Plan 9 from User Space - - - -
-
- -
-
-
- Manual Section 1 - Plan 9 from User Space -
-
-
intro(1)intro – introduction to Plan 9 from User Space -
-
-
-
9(1)9 – run Plan 9 commands -
-
-
-
9c(1)9c, 9a, 9l, 9ar – C compiler, assembler, linker, archiver -
-
-
-
9p(1)9p – read and write files on a 9P server -
-
-
-
9term(1)9term – terminal windows -
-
-
-
acid(1)acid, acidtypes – debugger -
-
-
-
acme(1)acme, win, awd – interactive text windows -
-
-
-
acmeevent(1)acmeevent, acme.rc – shell script support for acme clients -
-
-
-
ascii(1)ascii, unicode – interpret ASCII, Unicode characters -
-
-
-
astro(1)astro – print astronomical information -
-
-
-
basename(1)basename – strip file name affixes -
-
-
-
bc(1)bc – arbitrary-precision arithmetic language -
-
-
-
bundle(1)bundle – collect files for distribution -
-
-
-
cal(1)cal – print calendar -
-
-
-
calendar(1)calendar – print upcoming events -
-
-
-
cat(1)cat, read, nobs – catenate files -
-
-
-
cleanname(1)cleanname – clean a path name -
-
-
-
clog(1)auxclog – create date-stamped console log -
-
-
-
cmp(1)cmp – compare two files -
-
-
-
colors(1)colors, cmapcube – display color map -
-
-
-
comm(1)comm – select or reject lines common to two sorted files -
-
-
-
core(1)core – print information about dead processes -
-
-
-
crop(1)crop, iconv – frame, crop, and convert image -
-
-
-
date(1)date – date and time -
-
-
-
db(1)db – debugger -
-
-
-
dc(1)dc – desk calculator -
-
-
-
deroff(1)deroff, delatex – remove formatting requests -
-
-
-
dial(1)dial – connect to a remote service -
-
-
-
dict(1)dict, adict – dictionary browser -
-
-
-
diff(1)diff – differential file comparator -
-
-
-
doctype(1)doctype – intuit command line for formatting a document -
-
-
-
echo(1)echo – print arguments -
-
-
-
ed(1)ed – text editor -
-
-
-
eqn(1)eqn – typeset mathematics -
-
-
-
factor(1)factor, primes – factor a number, generate large primes -
-
-
-
fmt(1)fmt, htmlfmt – simple text formatters -
-
-
-
fortune(1)fortune – sample lines from a file -
-
-
-
freq(1)freq – print histogram of character frequencies -
-
-
-
fsize(1)fsize, mtime – print file information -
-
-
-
grap(1)grap – pic preprocessor for drawing graphs -
-
-
-
graph(1)graph – draw a graph -
-
-
-
grep(1)grep, g – search a file for a pattern -
-
-
-
gview(1)gview – interactive graph viewer -
-
-
-
gzip(1)gzip, gunzip, bzip2, bunzip2, zip, unzip, – compress and expand data -
-
-
-
hoc(1)hoc – interactive floating point language -
-
-
-
idiff(1)idiff – interactive diff -
-
-
-
join(1)join – relational database operator -
-
-
-
jpg(1)jpg, gif, png, ppm, bmp, yuv, ico, togif, toppm, topng, toico – view and convert pictures -
-
-
-
kill(1)kill, slay, start, stop – print commands to manipulate processes -
-
-
-
label(1)label, awd – set window label -
-
-
-
lex(1)lex – generator of lexical analysis programs -
-
-
-
look(1)look – find lines in a sorted list -
-
-
-
ls(1)ls, lc – list contents of directory -
-
-
-
man(1)man, lookman, sig – print or find pages of this manual -
-
-
-
map(1)map, mapdemo, mapd – draw maps on various projections -
-
-
-
mc(1)mc – multicolumn print -
-
-
-
mk(1)mk – maintain (make) related files -
-
-
-
mkdir(1)mkdir – make a directory -
-
-
-
namespace(1)namespace – print name space directory -
-
-
-
news(1)news – print news items -
-
-
-
p(1)p – paginate -
-
-
-
page(1)img, psv – view -
-
-
-
pic(1)pic, tpic – troff and tex preprocessors for drawing pictures -
-
-
-
plot(1)plot – graphics filter -
-
-
-
plumb(1)plumb – send message to plumber -
-
-
-
pr(1)pr – print file -
-
-
-
proof(1)proof – troff output interpreter -
-
-
-
ps(1)ps, psu – process status -
-
-
-
psfonts(1)psfonts, psdownload – add necessary fonts to PostScript document for printing -
-
-
-
pwd(1)pwd, pbd – working directory -
-
-
-
rc(1)rc, cd, eval, exec, exit, flag, rfork, shift, wait, whatis, ., ~ – command language -
-
-
-
rio(1)rio – rio-like Window Manager for X -
-
-
-
rm(1)rm – remove files -
-
-
-
sam(1)sam, B, E, sam.save, samterm, samsave – screen editor with structural regular expressions -
-
-
-
scat(1)scat – sky catalogue and Digitized Sky Survey -
-
-
-
secstore(1)aescbc, secstore, ipso – secstore commands -
-
-
-
sed(1)sed – stream editor -
-
-
-
seq(1)seq – print sequences of numbers -
-
-
-
sleep(1)sleep – suspend execution for an interval -
-
-
-
sort(1)sort – sort and/or merge files -
-
-
-
spell(1)spell, sprog – find spelling errors -
-
-
-
split(1)split – split a file into pieces -
-
-
-
src(1)src – find source code for executable -
-
-
-
stats(1)stats, auxstats – display graphs of system activity -
-
-
-
strings(1)strings – extract printable strings -
-
-
-
sum(1)sum, md5sum, sha1sum – sum and count blocks in a file -
-
-
-
tail(1)tail – deliver the last part of a file -
-
-
-
tbl(1)tbl – format tables for nroff or troff -
-
-
-
tcs(1)tcs – translate character sets -
-
-
-
tee(1)tee – pipe fitting -
-
-
-
test(1)test – set status according to condition -
-
-
-
time(1)time – time a command -
-
-
-
touch(1)touch – set modification date of a file -
-
-
-
tr(1)tr – translate characters -
-
-
-
tr2post(1)tr2post – convert troff intermediate to PostScript -
-
-
-
troff(1)troff, nroff – text formatting and typesetting -
-
-
-
troff2html(1)troff2html – convert troff output into HTML -
-
-
-
tweak(1)tweak – edit image files, subfont files, face files, etc. -
-
-
-
uniq(1)uniq – report repeated lines in a file -
-
-
-
units(1)units – conversion program -
-
-
-
vac(1)vac – create a vac archive on Venti -
-
-
-
wc(1)wc – word count -
-
-
-
web(1)web, wmail – handle web page, mail message for plumber -
-
-
-
wintext(1)wintext, ", "" – access text in current window -
-
-
-
xd(1)xd – hex, octal, decimal, or ASCII dump -
-
-
-
yacc(1)yacc – yet another compiler-compiler -
-
- -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
-		 -
- - diff --git a/man/man1/intro.html b/man/man1/intro.html deleted file mode 100644 index fc628e5a..00000000 --- a/man/man1/intro.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,221 +0,0 @@ - -intro(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
INTRO(1)INTRO(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - intro – introduction to Plan 9 from User Space
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Plan 9 is a distributed computing environment built at Bell Labs - starting in the late 1980s. The system can be obtained from Bell - Labs at http://plan9.bell−labs.com/plan9 and runs on PCs and a - variety of other platforms. Plan 9 became a convenient platform - for experimenting with new ideas, - applications, and services. -
- - Plan 9 from User Space provides many of the ideas, applications, - and services from Plan 9 on Unix-like systems. It runs on FreeBSD - (x86), Linux (x86 and PowerPC), Mac OS X (PowerPC), OpenBSD (x86), - and SunOS (Sparc).
-

Commands
- Plan 9 from User Space expects its own directory tree, conventionally - /usr/local/plan9. When programs need to access files in the tree, - they expect the $PLAN9 environment variable to contain the name - of the root of the tree. See install(1) for details about installation. - -
- - Many of the familiar Unix commands, for example cat(1), ls(1), - and wc(1), are present, but in their Plan 9 forms: cat takes no - arguments, ls does not columnate its output when printing to a - terminal, and wc counts UTF characters. In some cases, the differences - are quite noticeable: grep(1) and sed(1) expect Plan 9 - regular expressions (see regexp(7)), which are closest to what - Unix calls extended regular expressions. Because of these differences, - it is not recommended to put $PLAN9/bin before the usual system - bin directories in your search path. Instead, put it at the end - of your path and use the 9(1) script when you want to - invoke the Plan 9 version of a traditional Unix command. -
- - Occasionally the Plan 9 programs have been changed to adapt to - Unix. Mk(1) now allows mkfiles to choose their own shell, and - rc(1) has a ulimit builtin and manages $PATH. -
- - Many of the graphical programs from Plan 9 are present, including - sam(1) and acme(1). An X11 window manager rio(1) mimics Plan 9’s - window system, with command windows implemented by the external - program 9term(1). Following the style of X Windows, these programs - run in new windows rather than the one in - which they are invoked. They all take a −W option to specify the - size and placement of the new window. The argument is one of widthxheight, - widthxheight@xmin,xmax, or xmin,ymin,xmax,ymax. -
- - The plumber(4) helps to connect the various Plan 9 programs together, - and fittings like web(1) connect it to external programs such - as web browsers; one can click on a URL in acme and see the page - load in Firefox.
-

User-level file servers
- In Plan 9, user-level file servers present file trees via the - Plan 9 file protocol, 9P. Processes can mount arbitrary file servers - and customize their own name spaces. These facilities are used - to connect programs. Clients interact with file servers by reading - and writing files. -
- - This cannot be done directly on Unix. Instead the servers listen - for 9P connections on Unix domain sockets; clients connect to - these sockets and speak 9P directly using the 9pclient(3) library. - Intro(4) tells more of the story. The effect is not as clean as - on Plan 9, but it gets the job done and still provides a uniform - and - easy-to-understand mechanism. The 9p(1) client can be used in - shell scripts or by hand to carry out simple interactions with - servers.
-

External databases
- Some programs rely on large databases that would be cumbersome - to include in every release. Scripts are provided that download - these databases separately. These databases can be downloaded - separately. See $PLAN9/dict/README and $PLAN9/sky/README.
-

Programming
- The shell scripts 9c and 9l (see 9c(1)) provide a simple interface - to the underlying system compiler and linker, similar to the 2c - and 2l families on Plan 9. 9c compiles source files, and 9l links - object files into executables. When using Plan 9 libraries, 9l - infers the correct set of libraries from the object files, so - that no −l - options are needed. -
- - The only way to write multithreaded programs is to use the thread(3) - library. Rfork(3) exists but is not as capable as on Plan 9. There - are many unfortunate by necessary preprocessor diversions to make - Plan 9 and Unix libraries coexist. See intro(3) for details. -
- - The debuggers acid(1) and db(1) and the debugging library mach(3) - are works in progress. They are platform-independent, so that - x86 Linux core dumps can be inspected on PowerPC Mac OS X machines, - but they are also fairly incomplete. The x86 target is the most - mature; initial PowerPC support exists; and other - targets are unimplemented. The debuggers can only inspect, not - manipulate, target processes. Support for operating system threads - and for 64-bit architectures needs to be rethought. On x86 Linux - systems, acid and db can be relied upon to produce reasonable - stack traces (often in cases when GNU gdb cannot) and - dump data structures, but that it is the extent to which they - have been developed and exercised.
-

Porting programs
- The vast majority of the familiar Plan 9 programs have been ported, - including the Unicode-aware troff(1). -
- - Of the more recent additions to Plan 9, the secstore(1) client - has been ported, though secstored has not. Vac(1) has been ported, - though vacfs has not. Factotum and venti are in progress. -
- - A backup system providing a dump file system built atop Venti - is also in progress.
-

Porting to new systems
- Porting the tree to new operating systems or architectures should - be straightforward, as system-specific code has been kept to a - minimum. The largest pieces of system-specific code are <u.h>, which - must include the right system files and set up the right integer - type definitions, and libthread, which must implement - spin locks, operating system thread creation, and context switching - routines. Portable implementations of these using <pthread.h> and - <ucontext.h> already exist. If your system supports them, you may - not need to write any system specific code at all. -
- - There are other smaller system dependencies, such as the terminal - handling code in 9term(1) and the implementation of getcallerpc(3), - but these are usually simple and are not on the critical path - for getting the system up and running.
- -

-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - The rest of this manual describes Plan 9 from User Space. Many - of the man pages have been brought from Plan 9, but they have - been updated, and others have been written from scratch. -
- - The manual pages are in a Unix style tree, with names like $PLAN9/man/man1/cat.1 - instead of Plan 9’s simpler $PLAN9/man/1/cat, so that the Unix - man(1) utility can handle it. Some systems, for example Debian - Linux, deduce the man page locations from the search path, so - that adding $PLAN9/bin to - your path is sufficient to cause $PLAN9/man to be consulted for - manual pages using the system man. On other systems, or to look - at manual pages with the same name as a system page, invoke the - Plan 9 man directly, as in 9 man cat. -
- - The manual sections follow the Unix numbering conventions, not - the Plan 9 ones. -
- - Section (1) describes general publicly accessible commands. -
- - Section (3) describes C library functions. -
- - Section (4) describes user-level file servers. -
- - Section (7) describes file formats and protocols. (On Unix, section - (5) is technically for file formats but seems now to be used for - describing specific files.) -
- - Section (9p) describes the Plan 9 file protocol 9P.
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - In Plan 9, a program’s exit status is an arbitrary text string, - while on Unix it is an integer. Section (1) of this manual describes - commands as though they exit with string statuses. In fact, exiting - with an empty status corresponds to exiting with status 0, and - exiting with any non-empty string corresponds to exiting with - status 1. See exits(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/join.html b/man/man1/join.html deleted file mode 100644 index 704837e4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/join.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,144 +0,0 @@ - -join(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
JOIN(1)JOIN(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - join – relational database operator
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - join [ options ] file1 file2
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Join forms, on the standard output, a join of the two relations - specified by the lines of file1 and file2. If one of the file - names is −, the standard input is used. -
- - File1 and file2 must be sorted in increasing ASCII collating sequence - on the fields on which they are to be joined, normally the first - in each line. -
- - There is one line in the output for each pair of lines in file1 - and file2 that have identical join fields. The output line normally - consists of the common field, then the rest of the line from file1, - then the rest of the line from file2. -
- - Input fields are normally separated spaces or tabs; output fields - by space. In this case, multiple separators count as one, and - leading separators are discarded. -
- - The following options are recognized, with POSIX syntax.
- −a n   In addition to the normal output, produce a line for each - unpairable line in file n, where n is 1 or 2.
- −v n   Like −a, omitting output for paired lines.
- −e s   Replace empty output fields by string s.
- −1 m
- −2 m   Join on the mth field of file1 or file2.
- −jn m
- -
- - Archaic equivalent for −n m.
- -
- −ofields
- -
- - Each output line comprises the designated fields. The comma-separated - field designators are either 0, meaning the join field, or have - the form n.m, where n is a file number and m is a field number. - Archaic usage allows separate arguments for field designators. - -
- - -
- −tc   Use character c as the only separator (tab character) on input - and output. Every appearance of c in a line is significant.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - sort /etc/passwd | join −t: −1 1 −a 1 −e "" − bdays
- -
- - Add birthdays to the /etc/passwd file, leaving unknown birthdays - empty. The layout of /adm/users is given in passwd(5); bdays contains - sorted lines like ken:Feb 4, 1953.
- -
- tr : ' ' </etc/passwd | sort −k 3 3 >temp
- join −1 3 −2 3 −o 1.1,2.1 temp temp | awk '$1 < $2'
- -
- - Print all pairs of users with identical userids.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/join.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sort(1), comm(1), awk(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - With default field separation, the collating sequence is that - of sort −b −ky,y; with −t, the sequence is that of sort −tx −ky,y. - -
- - One of the files must be randomly accessible.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/jpg.html b/man/man1/jpg.html deleted file mode 100644 index 30629c7c..00000000 --- a/man/man1/jpg.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,175 +0,0 @@ - -jpg(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
JPG(1)JPG(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - jpg, gif, png, ppm, bmp, yuv, ico, togif, toppm, topng, toico - – view and convert pictures
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - jpg [ −39cdefFkJrtv ] [ file ... ]
- gif [ −39cdektv ] [ file ... ]
- png [ −39cdektv ] [ file ... ]
- ppm [ −39cdektv ] [ file ... ]
- bmp [ file ]
- yuv [ file ] -
- - togif [ −c comment ] [ −l loopcount ] [ −d msec ] [ −t transindex - ] [ file ... [ −d msec ] file ... ]
- toppm [ −c comment ] [ file ]
- topng [ −c comment ] [ [ −g gamma ] [ file ] -
- - ico [ file ]
- toico [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These programs read, display, and write image files in public - formats. Jpg, gif, png, ppm, bmp, and yuv. read files in the corresponding - formats and, by default, display them in the current window; options - cause them instead to convert the images to Plan 9 image format - and write them to standard output. Togif, - Toppm, and topng read Plan 9 images files, convert them to GIF, - PPM, or PNG, and write them to standard output. -
- - The default behavior of jpg, gif, and ppm is to display the file, - or standard input if no file is named. Once a file is displayed, - typing a character causes the program to display the next image. - Typing a q, DEL, or control-D exits the program. For a more user-friendly - interface, use page(1), which invokes these - programs to convert the images to standard format, displays them, - and offers scrolling, panning, and menu-driven navigation among - the files. -
- - These programs share many options:
- −e    Disable Floyd-Steinberg error diffusion, which is used to improve - the appearance of images on color-mapped displays, typically with - 8 bits per pixel. Primarily useful for debugging; if the display - has true RGB color, the image will be displayed in full glory.
- −k    Convert and display the image as a black and white (really grey-scale) - image.
- −v    Convert the image to an RGBV color-mapped image, even if the - display has true RGB color.
- −d    Suppress display of the image; this is set automatically by - any of the following options:
- −c    Convert the image to a Plan 9 representation, as defined by - image(7), and write it to standard output.
- −9    Like −c, but produce an uncompressed image. This saves processing - time, particularly when the output is being piped to another program - such as page(1), since it avoids compression and decompression.
- −t    Convert the image, if it is in color, to a true color RGB image.
- −3    Like −t, but force the image to RGB even if it is originally - grey-scale. -
- - Jpg has two extra options used to process the output of the LML - video card:
- −f    Merge two adjacent images, which represent the two fields of - a video picture, into a single image.
- −F    The input is a motion JPEG file, with multiple images representing - frames of the movie. Sets −f. -
- - The togif and toppm programs go the other way: they convert from - Plan 9 images to GIF and PPM, and have no display capability. - Both accept an option −c to set the comment field of the resulting - file. If there is only one input picture, togif converts the image - to GIF format. If there are many files, though, it will - assemble them into an animated GIF file. The options control this - process:
- −lloopcount
- -
- - By default, the animation will loop forever; loopcount specifies - how many times to loop. A value of zero means loop forever and - a negative value means to stop after playing the sequence once.
- -
- −dmsec
- -
- - By default, the images are displayed as fast as they can be rendered. - This option specifies the time, in milliseconds, to pause while - displaying the next named file. -
- - -
- Gif translates files that contain a ‘transparency’ index by attaching - an alpha channel to the converted image. -
- - Ico displays a Windows icon (.ico) file. If no file is specified, - ico reads from standard input. Icon files contain sets of icons - represeted by an image and a mask. Clicking the right button pops - up a menu that lets you write any icon’s image as a Plan 9 image - (widthxheight.image), write any icon’s mask as a Plan 9 - image (widthxheight.mask), or exit. Selecting one of the write - menu items yields a sight cursor. Move the sight over the icon - and right click again to write. -
- - Toico takes a list of Plan 9 image files (or standard input) and - creates a single icon file. The masks in the icon file will be - the white space in the image. The icon file is written to standard - output.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/jpg
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - page(1), image(7).
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Writing an animated GIF using togif is a clumsy undertaking.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/kill.html b/man/man1/kill.html deleted file mode 100644 index 107e438d..00000000 --- a/man/man1/kill.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ - -kill(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
KILL(1)KILL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - kill, slay, start, stop – print commands to manipulate processes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - kill name ... -
- - slay name ... -
- - start name ... -
- - stop name ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Kill prints commands that will cause all processes with name and - owned by the current user to be terminated. Each command is commented - with an output line from ps(1) describing the process that would - be killed. Use the send command of 9term(1), or pipe the output - of kill into rc(1) or sh(1) to execute the - commands. -
- - Kill suggests sending a Unix TERM signal to the process; sending - a KILL signal is a surer, if heavy handed, kill, but is necessary - if the offending process is ignoring signals. The slay command - prints commands to do this. -
- - Stop prints commands to pause execution of processes by sending - them the STOP signal. -
- - Start prints commands to restart stopped processes by sending - them the CONT signal.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ps(1), notify(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Stop and start should limit themselves to currently running or - stopped processes.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/label.html b/man/man1/label.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8c7999d4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/label.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,117 +0,0 @@ - -label(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
LABEL(1)LABEL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - label, awd – set window label
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - label string
- awd
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Label sets the label of the current win (see acme(1)) or X terminal - window (e.g., 9term(1) or xterm(1)) by echoing a special control - sequence to standard output. -
- - Acme and 9term windows assume the label is a directory name. When - unrooted file names are plumbed in the window, they are evaluated - relative to the directory named in the label.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - One can use the following sh(1) function to keep the label up-to-date - in response to cd commands:
- -
- - _cd () {
- -
- - \cd "$@" &&
- case $− in
- *i*)
- awd
- esac
- -
- }
- alias cd=_cd
- cd .
- -
- - -
- Rc(1) installs a similar fn cd at startup if there is not already - a function named cd:
- -
- - fn cd {
- -
- - builtin cd $1 && flag i && awd
- -
- }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/label
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/awd
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Awd is also documented in acme(1). -
- - Awd does not append the −label suffix that it does on Plan 9.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/lex.html b/man/man1/lex.html deleted file mode 100644 index e0f84d1e..00000000 --- a/man/man1/lex.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ - -lex(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
LEX(1)LEX(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - lex – generator of lexical analysis programs
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - lex [ −tvn9 ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Lex generates programs to be used in simple lexical analysis of - text. The input files (standard input default) contain regular - expressions to be searched for and actions written in C to be - executed when expressions are found. -
- - A C source program, lex.yy.c is generated. This program, when - run, copies unrecognized portions of the input to the output, - and executes the associated C action for each regular expression - that is recognized. -
- - The options have the following meanings.
- −t    Place the result on the standard output instead of in file lex.yy.c.
- −v    Print a one-line summary of statistics of the generated analyzer.
- −n    Opposite of −v; −n is default.
- −9    Adds code to be able to compile through the native C compilers.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - This program converts upper case to lower, removes blanks at the - end of lines, and replaces multiple blanks by single blanks. -
- - %%
- [A−Z]       putchar(yytext[0]+'a'−'A');
- [ ]+$
- [ ]+ putchar(' ');
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - lex.yy.c             output
- /sys/lib/lex/ncform   template
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - yacc(1), sed(1)
- M. E. Lesk and E. Schmidt, ‘LEX--Lexical Analyzer Generator’, Unix - Research System Programmer’s Manual, Tenth Edition, Volume 2.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/lex
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Cannot handle UTF. -
- - The asteroid to kill this dinosaur is still in orbit.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/look.html b/man/man1/look.html deleted file mode 100644 index cc8686d0..00000000 --- a/man/man1/look.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ - -look(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
LOOK(1)LOOK(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - look – find lines in a sorted list
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - look [ −dfnixtc ] [ string ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Look consults a sorted file and prints all lines that begin with - string. It uses binary search. -
- - The following options are recognized. Options dfnt affect comparisons - as in sort(1).
- −i    Interactive. There is no string argument; instead look takes - lines from the standard input as strings to be looked up.
- −x    Exact. Print only lines of the file whose key matches string - exactly.
- −d    ‘Directory’ order: only letters, digits, tabs and blanks participate - in comparisons.
- −f    Fold. Upper case letters compare equal to lower case.
- −n    Numeric comparison with initial string of digits, optional minus - sign, and optional decimal point.
- −t[c]Character c terminates the sort key in the file. By default, - tab terminates the key. If c is missing the entire line comprises - the key. -
- - If no file is specified, /lib/words is assumed, with collating - sequence df.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /lib/words
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/look.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sort(1), grep(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - The exit status is “not found” if no match is found, and “no dictionary” - if file or the default dictionary cannot be opened.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/ls.html b/man/man1/ls.html deleted file mode 100644 index e5ed5566..00000000 --- a/man/man1/ls.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,121 +0,0 @@ - -ls(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
LS(1)LS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ls, lc – list contents of directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - ls [ −dlmnpqrstuFQ ] name ... -
- - lc [ −dlmnpqrstuFQ ] name ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - For each directory argument, ls lists the contents of the directory; - for each file argument, ls repeats its name and any other information - requested. When no argument is given, the current directory is - listed. By default, the output is sorted alphabetically by name. - -
- - Lc is the same as ls, but sets the −p option and pipes the output - through mc(1). -
- - There are a number of options:
- −d    If argument is a directory, list it, not its contents.
- −l    List in long format, giving mode (see below), file system type - (e.g., for devices, the # code letter that names it; see intro(3)), - the instance or subdevice number, owner, group, size in bytes, - and time of last modification for each file.
- −m    List the name of the user who most recently modified the file.
- −n    Don’t sort the listing.
- −p    Print only the final path element of each file name.
- −q    List the qid (see stat(3)) of each file; the printed fields - are in the order path, version, and type.
- −r    Reverse the order of sort.
- −s    Give size in Kbytes for each entry.
- −t    Sort by time modified (latest first) instead of by name.
- −u    Under −t sort by time of last access; under −l print time of - last access.
- −F    Add the character / after all directory names and the character - * after all executable files.
- −L    Print the character t before each file if it has the temporary - flag set, and − otherwise.
- −Q    By default, printed file names are quoted if they contain characters - special to rc(1). The −Q flag disables this behavior. -
- - The mode printed under the −l option contains 11 characters, interpreted - as follows: the first character is
- d     if the entry is a directory;
- a     if the entry is an append-only file;
- −     if the entry is a plain file. -
- - The next letter is l if the file is exclusive access (one writer - or reader at a time). -
- - The last 9 characters are interpreted as three sets of three bits - each. The first set refers to owner permissions; the next to permissions - to others in the same user-group; and the last to all others. - Within each set the three characters indicate permission respectively - to read, to write, or to execute the file as a program. - For a directory, ‘execute’ permission is interpreted to mean permission - to search the directory for a specified file. The permissions - are indicated as follows:
- rif the file is readable;
- wif the file is writable;
- xif the file is executable;
- −if none of the above permissions is granted.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/ls.c
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/lc
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - stat(3), mc(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/man.html b/man/man1/man.html deleted file mode 100644 index 41f472ab..00000000 --- a/man/man1/man.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,139 +0,0 @@ - -man(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MAN(1)MAN(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - man, lookman, sig – print or find pages of this manual
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - man [ option ... ] [ section ... ] title ... -
- - lookman key ... -
- - sig function ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Man locates and prints pages of this manual named title in the - specified sections. Title is given in lower case. Each section - is a number; pages marked (2S), for example, belong to chapter - 2. If no section is specified, pages in all sections are printed. - Any name from the NAME section at the top of the page will serve - as a - title. -
- - The options are:
- −p    Run proof(1) on the specified man pages.
- −P    Run page(1) on the specified man pages.
- −t    Run troff and send its output to standard output.
- −n    (Default) Print the pages on the standard output using nroff. - -
- - Lookman prints the names of all manual sections that contain all - of the key words given on the command line. -
- - Sig prints the signature (i.e. C definition) of the function’s - given on the command line.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/man?/*
- -
- - troff source for manual; this page is /usr/local/plan9/man/man1/man.1
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/man/man?/INDEX
- -
- - indices searched to find pages corresponding to titles
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/man/secindex
- -
- - command to make an index for a given section
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/man/lookman/index
- -
- - index for lookman
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/man
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/lookman
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - page(1), proof(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The manual was intended to be typeset; some detail is sacrificed - on text terminals. -
- - There is no automatic mechanism to keep the indices up to date. - -
- - Except for special cases, man doesn’t recognize things that should - be run through tbl and/or eqn.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/map.html b/man/man1/map.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6ed18ccb..00000000 --- a/man/man1/map.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,483 +0,0 @@ - -map(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MAP(1)MAP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - map, mapdemo, mapd – draw maps on various projections
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - map projection [ option ... ] -
- - mapdemo -
- - -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Map prepares on the standard output a map suitable for display - by any plotting filter described in plot(1). A menu of projections - is produced in response to an unknown projection. Mapdemo is a - short course in mapping. -
- - The default data for map are world shorelines. Option −f accesses - more detailed data classified by feature.
- −f [ feature ... ]
- -
- - Features are ranked 1 (default) to 4 from major to minor. Higher-numbered - ranks include all lower-numbered ones. Features are
- shore[1-4]      seacoasts, lakes, and islands; option −f always shows - shore1
- ilake[1-2]      intermittent lakes
- river[1-4]      rivers
- iriver[1-3]     intermittent rivers
- canal[1-3]      3=irrigation canals
- glacier
- iceshelf[12]
- reef
- saltpan[12]
- country[1-3]    2=disputed boundaries, 3=indefinite boundaries
- state          states and provinces (US and Canada only)
- -
- - -
- In other options coordinates are in degrees, with north latitude - and west longitude counted as positive.
- −l S N E W
- -
- - Set the southern and northern latitude and the eastern and western - longitude limits. Missing arguments are filled out from the list - –90, 90, –180, 180, or lesser limits suitable to the projection - at hand.
- -
- −k S N E W
- -
- - Set the scale as if for a map with limits −l S N E W . Do not - consider any −l or −w option in setting scale.
- -
- −o lat lon rot
- -
- - Orient the map in a nonstandard position. Imagine a transparent - gridded sphere around the globe. Turn the overlay about the North - Pole so that the Prime Meridian (longitude 0) of the overlay coincides - with meridian lon on the globe. Then tilt the North Pole of the - overlay along its Prime Meridian to latitude lat - on the globe. Finally again turn the overlay about its ‘North - Pole’ so that its Prime Meridian coincides with the previous position - of meridian rot. Project the map in the standard form appropriate - to the overlay, but presenting information from the underlying - globe. Missing arguments are filled out from the list - 90, 0, 0. In the absence of −o, the orientation is 90, 0, m, where - m is the middle of the longitude range.
- -
- −w S N E W
- -
- - Window the map by the specified latitudes and longitudes in the - tilted, rotated coordinate system. Missing arguments are filled - out from the list –90, 90, –180, 180. (It is wise to give an encompassing - −l option with −w. Otherwise for small windows computing time - varies inversely with area!) - -
- −d n   For speed, plot only every nth point.
- −r    Reverse left and right (good for star charts and inside-out - views).
- −v    Verso. Switch to a normally suppressed sheet of the map, such - as the back side of the earth in orthographic projection.
- −s1
- −s2   Superpose; outputs for a −s1 map (no closing) and a −s2 map - (no opening) may be concatenated.
- −g dlat dlon res
- -
- - Grid spacings are dlat, dlon. Zero spacing means no grid. Missing - dlat is taken to be zero. Missing dlon is taken the same as dlat. - Grid lines are drawn to a resolution of res (2° or less by default). - In the absence of −g, grid spacing is 10°.
- -
- −p lat lon extent
- -
- - Position the point lat, lon at the center of the plotting area. - Scale the map so that the height (and width) of the nominal plotting - area is extent times the size of one degree of latitude at the - center. By default maps are scaled and positioned to fit within - the plotting area. An extent overrides option −k. - -
- −c x y rot
- -
- - After all other positioning and scaling operations have been performed, - rotate the image rot degrees counterclockwise about the center - and move the center to position x, y, where the nominal plotting - area is –1≤x≤1, –1≤y≤1. Missing arguments are taken to be 0. −x Allow - the map to extend outside the - nominal plotting area.
- -
- −m [ file ... ]
- -
- - Use map data from named files. If no files are named, omit map - data. Names that do not exist as pathnames are looked up in a - standard directory, which contains, in addition to the data for - −f,
- -
- - world      World Data Bank I (default)
- states     US map from Census Bureau
- counties   US map from Census Bureau
- The environment variables MAP and MAPDIR change the default map - and default directory.
- -
- −b [lat0 lon0 lat1 lon1... ]
- -
- - Suppress the drawing of the normal boundary (defined by options - −l and −w). Coordinates, if present, define the vertices of a - polygon to which the map is clipped. If only two vertices are - given, they are taken to be the diagonal of a rectangle. To draw - the polygon, give its vertices as a −u track. - -
- −t file ...
- -
- - The files contain lists of points, given as latitude-longitude - pairs in degrees. If the first file is named −, the standard input - is taken instead. The points of each list are plotted as connected - ‘tracks’.
- Points in a track file may be followed by label strings. A label - breaks the track. A label may be prefixed by ", :, or ! and is - terminated by a newline. An unprefixed string or a string prefixed - with " is displayed at the designated point. The first word of - a : or ! string names a special symbol (see option −y). - An optional numerical second word is a scale factor for the size - of the symbol, 1 by default. A : symbol is aligned with its top - to the north; a ! symbol is aligned vertically on the page.
- -
- −u file ...
- -
- - Same as −t, except the tracks are unbroken lines. (−t tracks appear - as dot-dashed lines if the plotting filter supports them.)
- -
- −y file
- -
- - The file contains plot(7)-style data for : or ! labels in −t or - −u files. Each symbol is defined by a comment :name then a sequence - of m and v commands. Coordinates (0,0) fall on the plotting point. - Default scaling is as if the nominal plotting range were ra −1 - −1 1 1; ra commands in file change the - scaling.
- -
-

Projections
- Equatorial projections centered on the Prime Meridian (longitude - 0). Parallels are straight horizontal lines. -
- - mercator         equally spaced straight meridians, conformal, straight - compass courses
- sinusoidal       equally spaced parallels, equal-area, same as bonne - 0.
- cylequalarea lat0   equally spaced straight meridians, equal-area, - true scale on lat0
- cylindrical      central projection on tangent cylinder
- rectangular lat0   equally spaced parallels, equally spaced straight - meridians, true scale on lat0
- gall lat0          parallels spaced stereographically on prime meridian, - equally spaced straight meridians, true scale on lat0
- mollweide        (homalographic) equal-area, hemisphere is a circle
- -
- - -
- - gilbert() sphere conformally mapped on hemisphere and viewed orthographically
- -
- -
- gilbert          globe mapped conformally on hemisphere, viewed orthographically - -
- - Azimuthal projections centered on the North Pole. Parallels are - concentric circles. Meridians are equally spaced radial lines. - -
- - azequidistant     equally spaced parallels, true distances from pole
- azequalarea      equal-area
- gnomonic         central projection on tangent plane, straight great circles
- perspective dist   viewed along earth’s axis dist earth radii from - center of earth
- orthographic      viewed from infinity
- stereographic     conformal, projected from opposite pole
- laueradius = tan(2×colatitude), used in X-ray crystallography
- fisheye n         stereographic seen from just inside medium with refractive - index n
- newyorker rradius = log(colatitude/r): New Yorker map from viewing - pedestal of radius r degrees -
- - Polar conic projections symmetric about the Prime Meridian. Parallels - are segments of concentric circles. Except in the Bonne projection, - meridians are equally spaced radial lines orthogonal to the parallels. - -
- - conic lat0         central projection on cone tangent at lat0
- simpleconic lat0 lat1
- -
- - -
- - equally spaced parallels, true scale on lat0 and lat1
- -
- -
- lambert lat0 lat1    conformal, true scale on lat0 and lat1
- albers lat0 lat1     equal-area, true scale on lat0 and lat1
- bonne lat0         equally spaced parallels, equal-area, parallel lat0 - developed from tangent cone -
- - Projections with bilateral symmetry about the Prime Meridian and - the equator. -
- - polyconic        parallels developed from tangent cones, equally spaced - along Prime Meridian
- aitoff           equal-area projection of globe onto 2-to-1 ellipse, based - on azequalarea
- lagrange         conformal, maps whole sphere into a circle
- bicentric lon0     points plotted at true azimuth from two centers - on the equator at longitudes ±lon0, great circles are straight - lines (a stretched gnomonic )
- elliptic lon0      points plotted at true distance from two centers - on the equator at longitudes ±lon0
- globular         hemisphere is circle, circular arc meridians equally spaced - on equator, circular arc parallels equally spaced on 0- and 90-degree - meridians
- vandergrinten     sphere is circle, meridians as in globular, circular - arc parallels resemble mercator -
- - Doubly periodic conformal projections. -
- - guyou            W and E hemispheres are square
- square           world is square with Poles at diagonally opposite corners
- tetra            map on tetrahedron with edge tangent to Prime Meridian at - S Pole, unfolded into equilateral triangle
- hex              world is hexagon centered on N Pole, N and S hemispheres are - equilateral triangles -
- - Miscellaneous projections. -
- - harrison dist angleoblique perspective from above the North Pole, - dist earth radii from center of earth, looking along the Date - Line angle degrees off vertical
- trapezoidal lat0 lat1
- -
- - -
- - equally spaced parallels, straight meridians equally spaced along - parallels, true scale at lat0 and lat1 on Prime Meridian
- lune(lat,angle) conformal, polar cap above latitude lat maps to - convex lune with given angle at 90°E and 90°W -
- - -
- -
- Retroazimuthal projections. At every point the angle between vertical - and a straight line to ‘Mecca’, latitude lat0 on the prime meridian, - is the true bearing of Mecca. -
- - mecca lat0         equally spaced vertical meridians
- homing lat0        distances to Mecca are true -
- - Maps based on the spheroid. Of geodetic quality, these projections - do not make sense for tilted orientations. For descriptions, see - corresponding maps above. -
- - sp_mercator
- sp_albers lat0 lat1
- -

-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - map perspective 1.025 −o 40.75 74
- -
- - A view looking down on New York from 100 miles (0.025 of the 4000-mile - earth radius) up. The job can be done faster by limiting the map - so as not to ‘plot’ the invisible part of the world: map perspective - 1.025 −o 40.75 74 −l 20 60 30 100. A circular border can be forced - by adding option - −w 77.33. (Latitude 77.33° falls just inside a polar cap of opening - angle arccos(1/1.025) = 12.6804°.)
- -
- map mercator −o 49.25 −106 180
- -
- - An ‘equatorial’ map of the earth centered on New York. The pole - of the map is placed 90° away (40.75+49.25=90) on the other side - of the earth. A 180° twist around the pole of the map arranges - that the ‘Prime Meridian’ of the map runs from the pole of the - map over the North Pole to New York instead of - down the back side of the earth. The same effect can be had from -    map mercator −o 130.75 74
- -
- map albers 28 45 −l 20 50 60 130 −m states
- -
- - A customary curved-latitude map of the United States.
- -
- map harrison 2 30 −l −90 90 120 240 −o 90 0 0
- -
- - A fan view covering 60° on either side of the Date Line, as seen - from one earth radius above the North Pole gazing at the earth’s - limb, which is 30° off vertical. The −o option overrides the default - −o 90 0 180, which would rotate the scene to behind the observer.
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /lib/map/[1−4]??   World Data Bank II, for −f
- /lib/map/*         maps for −m
- /lib/map/*.x       map indexes
- mapd              Map driver program
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/map
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - map(7), plot(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - ‘Map seems to be empty’--a coarse survey found zero extent within - the −l and −w bounds; for maps of limited extent the grid resolution, - res, or the limits may have to be refined.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Windows (option −w) cannot cross the Date Line. No borders appear - along edges arising from visibility limits. Segments that cross - a border are dropped, not clipped. Excessively large scale or - −d setting may cause long line segments to be dropped. Map tries - to draw grid lines dotted and −t tracks dot-dashed. As - very few plotting filters properly support curved textured lines, - these lines are likely to appear solid. The west-longitude-positive - convention betrays Yankee chauvinism. Gilbert should be a map - from sphere to sphere, independent of the mapping from sphere - to plane.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/mc.html b/man/man1/mc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1c133aec..00000000 --- a/man/man1/mc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ - -mc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MC(1)MC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - mc – multicolumn print
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - mc [ − ] [ −N ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Mc splits the input into as many columns as will fit in N print - positions. If run in a 9term(1), xterm(1), or acme(1) window, - the default N is the number of blanks that will fit across the - window; otherwise the default N is 80. Under option − each input - line ending in a colon : is printed separately. - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/mc.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9term(1), acme(1), acme(4), xterm(1), pr(1), lc in ls(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/mk.1 b/man/man1/mk.1 index 6ef12499..0698ef5b 100644 --- a/man/man1/mk.1 +++ b/man/man1/mk.1 @@ -654,7 +654,7 @@ x.tab.h:Pcmp -s: y.tab.h cp y.tab.h x.tab.h .EE .SH SOURCE -.B /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/mk +.B \*9/src/cmd/mk .SH SEE ALSO .IR sh (1), .IR regexp (7) diff --git a/man/man1/mk.html b/man/man1/mk.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3dde6143..00000000 --- a/man/man1/mk.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,621 +0,0 @@ - -mk(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MK(1)MK(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - mk – maintain (make) related files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - mk [ −f mkfile ] ... [ option ... ] [ target ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Mk uses the dependency rules specified in mkfile to control the - update (usually by compilation) of targets (usually files) from - the source files upon which they depend. The mkfile (default mkfile) - contains a rule for each target that identifies the files and - other targets upon which it depends and an sh(1) script, a - recipe, to update the target. The script is run if the target - does not exist or if it is older than any of the files it depends - on. Mkfile may also contain meta-rules that define actions for - updating implicit targets. If no target is specified, the target - of the first rule (not meta-rule) in mkfile is updated. -
- - The environment variable $NPROC determines how many targets may - be updated simultaneously; Some operating systems, e.g., Plan - 9, set $NPROC automatically to the number of CPUs on the current - machine. -
- - Options are:
- −a       Assume all targets to be out of date. Thus, everything is updated.
- −d[egp]   Produce debugging output (p is for parsing, g for graph - building, e for execution).
- −e       Explain why each target is made.
- −i       Force any missing intermediate targets to be made.
- −k       Do as much work as possible in the face of errors.
- −n       Print, but do not execute, the commands needed to update the - targets.
- −s       Make the command line arguments sequentially rather than in - parallel.
- −t       Touch (update the modified date of) file targets, without executing - any recipes.
- −wtarget1,target2,...
- -
- - -
- - Pretend the modify time for each target is the current time; useful - in conjunction with −n to learn what updates would be triggered - by modifying the targets.
- -
- -
-

The mkfile
- A mkfile consists of assignments (described under ‘Environment’) - and rules. A rule contains targets and a tail. A target is a literal - string and is normally a file name. The tail contains zero or - more prerequisites and an optional recipe, which is an shell script. - Each line of the recipe must begin with white space. A rule - takes the form
- -
- - target: prereq1 prereq2
- -
- - recipe using prereq1, prereq2 to build target
- -
- - -
- -
- When the recipe is executed, the first character on every line - is elided. -
- - After the colon on the target line, a rule may specify attributes, - described below. -
- - A meta-rule has a target of the form A%B where A and B are (possibly - empty) strings. A meta-rule acts as a rule for any potential target - whose name matches A%B with % replaced by an arbitrary string, - called the stem. In interpreting a meta-rule, the stem is substituted - for all occurrences of % in the prerequisite - names. In the recipe of a meta-rule, the environment variable - $stem contains the string matched by the %. For example, a meta-rule - to compile a C program using 9c(1) might be:
- -
- - %:      %.c
- -
- - 9c −c $stem.c
- 9l −o $stem $stem.o
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- Meta-rules may contain an ampersand & rather than a percent sign - %. A % matches a maximal length string of any characters; an & - matches a maximal length string of any characters except period - or slash. -
- - The text of the mkfile is processed as follows. Lines beginning - with < followed by a file name are replaced by the contents of - the named file. Lines beginning with <| followed by a file name - are replaced by the output of the execution of the named file. - Blank lines and comments, which run from unquoted # characters - to the following newline, are deleted. The character sequence - backslash-newline is deleted, so long lines in mkfile may be folded. - Non-recipe lines are processed by substituting for `{command} - the output of the command when run by sh. References to variables - are replaced by the variables’ values. Special - characters may be quoted using single quotes '' as in sh(1). -
- - Assignments and rules are distinguished by the first unquoted - occurrence of : (rule) or = (assignment). -
- - A later rule may modify or override an existing rule under the - following conditions:
- –     If the targets of the rules exactly match and one rule contains - only a prerequisite clause and no recipe, the clause is added - to the prerequisites of the other rule. If either or both targets - are virtual, the recipe is always executed.
- –     If the targets of the rules match exactly and the prerequisites - do not match and both rules contain recipes, mk reports an “ambiguous - recipe” error.
- –     If the target and prerequisites of both rules match exactly, the - second rule overrides the first.
-

Environment
- Rules may make use of shell environment variables. A legal reference - of the form $OBJ or ${name} is expanded as in sh(1). A reference - of the form ${name:A%B=C%D}, where A, B, C, D are (possibly empty) - strings, has the value formed by expanding $name and substituting - C for A and D for B in each word in - $name that matches pattern A%B. -
- - Variables can be set by assignments of the form
- -
- - var=[attr=]value
- -
- Blanks in the value break it into words. Such variables are exported - to the environment of recipes as they are executed, unless U, - the only legal attribute attr, is present. The initial value of - a variable is taken from (in increasing order of precedence) the - default values below, mk’s environment, the mkfiles, and any - command line assignment as an argument to mk. A variable assignment - argument overrides the first (but not any subsequent) assignment - to that variable. -
- - The variable MKFLAGS contains all the option arguments (arguments - starting with − or containing =) and MKARGS contains all the targets - in the call to mk. -
- - The variable MKSHELL contains the shell command line mk uses to - run recipes. If the first word of the command ends in rc or rcsh, - mk uses rc(1)’s quoting rules; otherwise it uses sh(1)’s. The - MKSHELL variable is consulted when the mkfile is read, not when - it is executed, so that different shells can be used within - a single mkfile:
- -
- - MKSHELL=$PLAN9/bin/rc
- use−rc:V:
- -
- - for(i in a b c) echo $i
- -
- MKSHELL=sh
- use−sh:V:
- -
- - for i in a b c; do echo $i; done
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- Mkfiles included via < or <| (q.v.) see their own private copy of - MKSHELL, which always starts set to sh . -
- - Dynamic information may be included in the mkfile by using a line - of the form
- -
- - <|command args -
- - -
- This runs the command command with the given arguments args and - pipes its standard output to mk to be included as part of the - mkfile. For instance, the Inferno kernels use this technique to - run a shell command with an awk script and a configuration file - as arguments in order for the awk script to process the file - and output a set of variables and their values.
-

Execution
- -
- - During execution, mk determines which targets must be updated, - and in what order, to build the names specified on the command - line. It then runs the associated recipes. -
- - A target is considered up to date if it has no prerequisites or - if all its prerequisites are up to date and it is newer than all - its prerequisites. Once the recipe for a target has executed, - the target is considered up to date. -
- - The date stamp used to determine if a target is up to date is - computed differently for different types of targets. If a target - is virtual (the target of a rule with the V attribute), its date - stamp is initially zero; when the target is updated the date stamp - is set to the most recent date stamp of its prerequisites. Otherwise, - if a - target does not exist as a file, its date stamp is set to the - most recent date stamp of its prerequisites, or zero if it has - no prerequisites. Otherwise, the target is the name of a file - and the target’s date stamp is always that file’s modification - date. The date stamp is computed when the target is needed in - the execution of - a rule; it is not a static value. -
- - Nonexistent targets that have prerequisites and are themselves - prerequisites are treated specially. Such a target t is given - the date stamp of its most recent prerequisite and if this causes - all the targets which have t as a prerequisite to be up to date, - t is considered up to date. Otherwise, t is made in the normal - fashion. - The −i flag overrides this special treatment. -
- - Files may be made in any order that respects the preceding restrictions. - -
- - A recipe is executed by supplying the recipe as standard input - to the command /bin/sh. (Note that unlike make, mk feeds the entire - recipe to the shell rather than running each line of the recipe - separately.) The environment is augmented by the following variables:
- $alltarget
- -
- - -
- - all the targets of this rule.
- -
- -
- $newprereq
- -
- - -
- - the prerequisites that caused this rule to execute.
- -
- -
- $newmember
- -
- - -
- - the prerequisites that are members of an aggregate that caused - this rule to execute. When the prerequisites of a rule are members - of an aggregate, $newprereq contains the name of the aggregate - and out of date members, while $newmember contains only the name - of the members. - -
- -
- $nproc     the process slot for this recipe. It satisfies 0≤$nproc<$NPROC.
- $pid       the process id for the mk executing the recipe.
- $prereq    all the prerequisites for this rule.
- $stem      if this is a meta-rule, $stem is the string that matched - % or &. Otherwise, it is empty. For regular expression meta-rules - (see below), the variables stem0, ..., stem9 are set to the corresponding - subexpressions.
- $target    the targets for this rule that need to be remade. -
- - These variables are available only during the execution of a recipe, - not while evaluating the mkfile. -
- - Unless the rule has the Q attribute, the recipe is printed prior - to execution with recognizable environment variables expanded. - Commands returning error status cause mk to terminate. -
- - Recipes and backquoted rc commands in places such as assignments - execute in a copy of mk’s environment; changes they make to environment - variables are not visible from mk. -
- - Variable substitution in a rule is done when the rule is read; - variable substitution in the recipe is done when the recipe is - executed. For example:
- -
- - bar=a.c
- foo: $bar
- -
- - $CC −o foo $bar
- -
- bar=b.c
- -
- - -
- will compile b.c into foo, if a.c is newer than foo.
-

Aggregates
- Names of the form a(b) refer to member b of the aggregate a. Currently, - the only aggregates supported are 9ar (see 9c(1)) archives.
-

Attributes
- The colon separating the target from the prerequisites may be - immediately followed by attributes and another colon. The attributes - are:
- D     If the recipe exits with a non-null status, the target is deleted.
- E     Continue execution if the recipe draws errors.
- N     If there is no recipe, the target has its time updated.
- n     The rule is a meta-rule that cannot be a target of a virtual - rule. Only files match the pattern in the target.
- P     The characters after the P until the terminating : are taken - as a program name. It will be invoked as sh −c prog 'arg1' 'arg2' - and should return a zero exit status if and only if arg1 is up - to date with respect to arg2. Date stamps are still propagated - in the normal way.
- Q     The recipe is not printed prior to execution.
- R     The rule is a meta-rule using regular expressions. In the rule, - % has no special meaning. The target is interpreted as a regular - expression as defined in regexp(7). The prerequisites may contain - references to subexpressions in form \n, as in the substitute - command of sed(1).
- U     The targets are considered to have been updated even if the recipe - did not do so.
- V     The targets of this rule are marked as virtual. They are distinct - from files of the same name.
- -

-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - A simple mkfile to compile a program:
- -
- - </$objtype/mkfile
- prog: a.$O b.$O c.$O
- -
- - $LD $LDFLAGS −o $target $prereq
- -
- %.$O: %.c
- -
- - $CC $CFLAGS $stem.c
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- Override flag settings in the mkfile:
- -
- - % mk target 'CFLAGS=−S −w'
- -
- - -
- Maintain a library:
- -
- - libc.a(%.$O):N:    %.$O
- libc.a:      libc.a(abs.$O) libc.a(access.$O) libc.a(alarm.$O) ...
- -
- - ar r libc.a $newmember
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- String expression variables to derive names from a master list:
- -
- - NAMES=alloc arc bquote builtins expand main match mk var word
- OBJ=${NAMES:%=%.$O}
- -
- - -
- Regular expression meta-rules:
- -
- - ([^/]*)/(.*)\.$O:R:    \1/\2.c
- -
- - cd $stem1; $CC $CFLAGS $stem2.c
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- A correct way to deal with yacc(1) grammars. The file lex.c includes - the file x.tab.h rather than y.tab.h in order to reflect changes - in content, not just modification time.
- -
- - lex.$O:      x.tab.h
- x.tab.h:     y.tab.h
- -
- - cmp −s x.tab.h y.tab.h || cp y.tab.h x.tab.h
- -
- y.tab.c y.tab.h: gram.y
- -
- - $YACC −d gram.y
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- The above example could also use the P attribute for the x.tab.h - rule:
- -
- - x.tab.h:Pcmp −s: y.tab.h
- -
- - cp y.tab.h x.tab.h
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/mk
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sh(1), regexp(7) -
- - A. Hume, “Mk: a Successor to Make” (Tenth Edition Research Unix - Manuals). -
- - Andrew G. Hume and Bob Flandrena, “Maintaining Files on Plan 9 - with Mk”. DOCPREFIX/doc/mk.pdf
- -
-

HISTORY
- -
- - Andrew Hume wrote mk for Tenth Edition Research Unix. It was later - ported to Plan 9. This software is a port of the Plan 9 version - back to Unix.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Identical recipes for regular expression meta-rules only have - one target. -
- - Seemingly appropriate input like CFLAGS=−DHZ=60 is parsed as an - erroneous attribute; correct it by inserting a space after the - first =. -
- - The recipes printed by mk before being passed to the shell for - execution are sometimes erroneously expanded for printing. Don’t - trust what’s printed; rely on what the shell does.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/mkdir.html b/man/man1/mkdir.html deleted file mode 100644 index 489d8b91..00000000 --- a/man/man1/mkdir.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ - -mkdir(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MKDIR(1)MKDIR(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - mkdir – make a directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - mkdir [ −p ] [ −m mode ] dirname ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Mkdir creates the specified directories. It requires write permission - in the parent directory. -
- - If the −p flag is given, mkdir creates any necessary parent directories - and does not complain if the target directory already exists. - -
- - The −m flag sets the permissions to be used when creating the - directory. The default is 0777.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rm(1)
- cd in rc(1)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/mkdir.c
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Mkdir returns null exit status if all directories were successfully - made. Otherwise it prints a diagnostic and returns "error" status.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/namespace.html b/man/man1/namespace.html deleted file mode 100644 index 45ae83bc..00000000 --- a/man/man1/namespace.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ - -namespace(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
NAMESPACE(1)NAMESPACE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - namespace – print name space directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - namespace
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Namespace prints the directory representing the current name space. - See intro(4).
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/namespace.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - getns(3), intro(4)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/news.html b/man/man1/news.html deleted file mode 100644 index 29cede42..00000000 --- a/man/man1/news.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ - -news(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
NEWS(1)NEWS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - news – print news items
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - news [ −a ] [ −n ] [ item ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - When invoked without options, this simple local news service prints - files that have appeared in /lib/news since last reading, most - recent first, with each preceded by an appropriate header. The - time of reading is recorded. The options are
- −a    Print all items, regardless of currency. The recorded time is - not changed.
- −n    Report the names of the current items without printing their - contents, and without changing the recorded time. -
- - Other arguments select particular news items. -
- - To post a news item, create a file in /usr/local/plan9/news. -
- - Empty news items, and news items named core or dead.letter are - ignored.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/news/*
- -
- - articles
- -
- $HOME/lib/newstime
- -
- - modify time is time news was last read who gets news mailed to - them
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/news.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/p.html b/man/man1/p.html deleted file mode 100644 index a2339d2f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/p.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ - -p(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
P(1)P(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - p – paginate
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - p [ −number ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - P copies its standard input, or the named files if given, to its - standard output, stopping at the end of every 22nd line, and between - files, to wait for a newline from the user. The option sets the - number of lines on a page. -
- - While waiting for a newline, p interprets the commands:
- !     Pass the rest of the line to the shell as a command.
- q     Quit. -
- - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/p.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/page.html b/man/man1/page.html deleted file mode 100644 index 91b48993..00000000 --- a/man/man1/page.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,97 +0,0 @@ - -page(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PAGE(1)PAGE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - img, psv – view FAX, image, graphic, PostScript, PDF, and typesetter - output files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - page [ file... ] -
- - img file.bit -
- - psv file.ps -
- - psv file.pdf
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Plan 9’s page(1) is not ported. Instead, page is a script that - invokes qiv(1) to view graphic files or psv to view PostScript - and PDF. On Mac OS X, page invokes Preview to handle all files. - -
- - Img is a simple image viewer for Plan 9 images (see image(7)). - -
- - Psv is a PostScript and PDF viewer. It is a streamlined interface - to gv(1). -
- - To view troff output, use proof(1).
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - gs(1), gv(1), jpg(1), proof(1), tex(1), troff(1)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/img.c
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/psv
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - When using Preview on Mac OS X, page leaves temporary files in - /var/tmp, since it has no way to know when the viewer has exited. - -
- - Page does not handle Plan 9 image(7) files; use img explicitly.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/pic.html b/man/man1/pic.html deleted file mode 100644 index acba241b..00000000 --- a/man/man1/pic.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,435 +0,0 @@ - -pic(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PIC(1)PIC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - pic, tpic – troff and tex preprocessors for drawing pictures
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - pic [ files ] -
- - tpic [ files ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Pic is a troff(1) preprocessor for drawing figures on a typesetter. - Pic code is contained between .PS and .PE lines:
- -
- - .PS optional-width optional-height
- element-list
- .PE
- -
- - -
- or in a file mentioned in a .PS line:
- -
- - .PS <file -
- - -
- If optional-width is present, the picture is made that many inches - wide, regardless of any dimensions used internally. The height - is scaled in the same proportion unless optional-height is present. - If .PF is used instead of .PE, the typesetting position after - printing is restored to what it was upon entry. -
- - An element-list is a list of elements:
- -
- - primitive attribute-list
- placename : element
- placename : position
- var = expr
- direction
- { element-list }
- [ element-list ]
- for var = expr to expr by expr do { anything }
- if expr then { anything } else { anything }
- copy file,    copy thru macro,    copy file thru macro
- sh { commandline }
- print expr
- reset optional var-list
- troff-command
- -
- - -
- Elements are separated by newlines or semicolons; a long element - may be continued by ending the line with a backslash. Comments - are introduced by a # and terminated by a newline. Variable names - begin with a lower case letter; place names begin with upper case. - Place and variable names retain their values from - one picture to the next. -
- - After each primitive the current position moves in the current - direction (up,down, left,right (default)) by the size of the primitive. - The current position and direction are saved upon entry to a {...} - block and restored upon exit. Elements within a block enclosed - in [...] are treated as a unit; the dimensions are - determined by the extreme points of the contained objects. Names, - variables, and direction of motion within a block are local to - that block. -
- - Troff-command is any line that begins with a period. Such a line - is assumed to make sense in the context where it appears; generally, - this means only size and font changes. -
- - The primitive objects are:
- -
- - box    circle    ellipse    arc    line    arrow    spline    move    text-list
- -
- arrow is a synonym for line −>. -
- - An attribute-list is a sequence of zero or more attributes; each - attribute consists of a keyword, perhaps followed by a value.
- -
- - -
- - h(eigh)t expr           wid(th) expr
- rad(ius) expr           diam(eter) expr
- up opt-expr              down opt-expr
- right opt-expr           left opt-expr
- from position             to position
- at position               with corner
- by expr, expr             then
- dotted opt-expr          dashed opt-expr
- chop opt-expr            −>    <−    <−>
- invis                  same
- fill opt-expr
- text-list                 expr
- -
- -
- Missing attributes and values are filled in from defaults. Not - all attributes make sense for all primitives; irrelevant ones - are silently ignored. The attribute at causes the geometrical - center to be put at the specified place; with causes the position - on the object to be put at the specified place. For lines, splines - and - arcs, height and width refer to arrowhead size. A bare expr implies - motion in the current direction. -
- - Text is normally an attribute of some primitive; by default it - is placed at the geometrical center of the object. Stand-alone - text is also permitted. A text list is a list of text items:
- -
- - text-item:
- -
- - "..." -
- -
- - positioning ...
- sprintf("format", expr, ...) positioning ...
- -
- positioning:
- -
- - center    ljust    rjust    above    below
- -
- -
- If there are multiple text items for some primitive, they are - arranged vertically and centered except as qualified. Positioning - requests apply to each item independently. Text items may contain - troff commands for size and font changes, local motions, etc., - but make sure that these are balanced so that the entering state - is restored before exiting. -
- - A position is ultimately an x,y coordinate pair, but it may be - specified in other ways.
- -
- - position:
- -
- - expr, expr
- place ± expr, expr
- place ± ( expr, expr )
- ( position, position )        x from one, y the other
- expr [of the way] between position and position
- expr < position , position >
- ( position )
- -
- - -
- place:
- -
- - placename optional-corner
- corner of placename
- nth primitive optional-corner
- corner of nth primitive
- Here
- -
- -
- An optional-corner is one of the eight compass points or the center - or the start or end of a primitive.
- -
- - optional-corner:
- -
- - .n    .e    .w    .s    .ne    .se    .nw    .sw    .c    .start    .end
- -
- corner:
- -
- - top    bot    left    right    start    end
- -
- -
- Each object in a picture has an ordinal number; nth refers to - this.
- -
- - nth:
- -
- - nth,    nth last
- -
- - -
- -
- The built-in variables and their default values are:
- -
- - -
- - boxwid 0.75            boxht 0.5
- circlerad 0.25          arcrad 0.25
- ellipsewid 0.75         ellipseht 0.5
- linewid 0.5            lineht 0.5
- movewid 0.5            moveht 0.5
- textwid 0              textht 0
- arrowwid 0.05           arrowht 0.1
- dashwid 0.1            arrowhead 2
- scale 1
- -
- -
- These may be changed at any time, and the new values remain in - force from picture to picture until changed again or reset by - a reset statement. Variables changed within [ and ] revert to - their previous value upon exit from the block. Dimensions are - divided by scale during output. -
- - Expressions in pic are evaluated in floating point. All numbers - representing dimensions are taken to be in inches.
- -
- - expr:
- -
- - expr op expr
- − expr
- ! expr
- ( expr )
- variable
- number
- place .x    place .y    place .ht    place .wid    place .rad
- sin(expr)    cos(expr)    atan2(expr,expr)    log(expr)    exp(expr)
- sqrt(expr)    max(expr,expr)    min(expr,expr)    int(expr)    rand()
- -
- op:
- -
- - +    −    *    /    %    <    <=    >    >=    ==    !=    &&    ||
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- The define and undef statements are not part of the grammar.
- -
- - -
- - define name { replacement text }
- undef name
- -
- -
- Occurrences of $1, $2, etc., in the replacement text will be replaced - by the corresponding arguments if name is invoked as
- -
- - -
- - name(arg1, arg2, ...)
- -
- -
- Non-existent arguments are replaced by null strings. Replacement - text may contain newlines. The undef statement removes the definition - of a macro. -
- - Tpic is a tex(1) preprocessor that accepts pic language. It produces - Tex commands that define a box called \graph, which contains the - picture. The box may be output this way:
- -
- - \centerline{\box\graph}
- -
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - arrow "input" above; box "process"; arrow "output" above
- move
- A: ellipse
- -
- - circle rad .1 with .w at A.e
- circle rad .05 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
- circle rad .065 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
- spline from last circle.nw left .25 then left .05 down .05
- arc from A.c to A.se rad 0.5
- for i = 1 to 10 do { line from A.s+.025*i,.01*i down i/50 }
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- arrow "input" above; box "process"; arrow "output" above move A: ellipse
- -
- - circle rad .1 with .w at A.e
- circle rad .05 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
- circle rad .065 at 0.5 <A.c, A.ne>
- spline from last circle.nw left .25 then left .05 down .05
- arc from A.c to A.se rad 0.5
- for i = 1 to 10 do { line from A.s+.025*i,.01*i down i/50 }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/pic
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - grap(1), doctype(1), troff(1)
- B. W. Kernighan, “PIC--a Graphics Language for Typesetting”, Unix - Research System Programmer’s Manual, Tenth Edition, Volume 2
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/plot.html b/man/man1/plot.html deleted file mode 100644 index b93d6d34..00000000 --- a/man/man1/plot.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,88 +0,0 @@ - -plot(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PLOT(1)PLOT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - plot – graphics filter
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - plot [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Plot interprets plotting instructions (see plot(7)) from the files - or standard input, drawing the results in a newly created rio(1) - window. Plot persists until a newline is typed in the window. - Various options may be interspersed with the file arguments; they - take effect at the given point in processing. Options are: - −d        Double buffer: accumulate the plot off-screen and write to the - screen all at once when an erase command is encountered or at - end of file.
- −e        Erase the screen.
- −c col     Set the foreground color (see plot(7) for color names).
- −f fill     Set the background color.
- −g grade   Set the quality factor for arcs. Higher grades give better - quality.
- −p col     Set the pen color.
- −w        Pause until a newline is typed on standard input.
- −C        Close the current plot.
- −W    x0,y0,x1,y1
- -
- - -
- - Specify the bounding rectangle of plot’s window. By default it - uses a 512x512 window in the middle of the screen.
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/plot
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rio(1), plot(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/plumb.html b/man/man1/plumb.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2a868f7a..00000000 --- a/man/man1/plumb.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ - -plumb(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PLUMB(1)PLUMB(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - plumb – send message to plumber
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - plumb [ −p plumbfile ] [ −a attributes ] [ −s source ] [ −d destination - ] [ −t type ] [ −w directory ] −i | data...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The plumb command formats and sends a plumbing message whose data - is, by default, the concatenation of the argument strings separated - by blanks. The options are:
- −p    write the message to plumbfile (default /mnt/plumb/send).
- −a    set the attr field of the message (default is empty).
- −s    set the src field of the message (default is plumb).
- −d    set the dst field of the message (default is empty).
- −t    set the type field of the message (default is text).
- −w    set the wdir field of the message (default is the current working - directory of plumb).
- −i    take the data from standard input rather than the argument strings. - If an action= attribute is not otherwise specified, plumb will - add an action=showdata attribute to the message.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - $HOME/lib/plumbing   default rules file
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/plumb
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - plumb(3), plumber(4), plumb(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/pr.html b/man/man1/pr.html deleted file mode 100644 index ca8772b2..00000000 --- a/man/man1/pr.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,90 +0,0 @@ - -pr(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PR(1)PR(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - pr – print file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - pr [ option ... ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Pr produces a printed listing of one or more files on its standard - output. The output is separated into pages headed by a date, the - name of the file or a specified header, and the page number. With - no file arguments, pr prints its standard input. -
- - Options apply to all following files but may be reset between - files:
- −n    Produce n-column output.
- +n    Begin printing with page n.
- −b    Balance columns on last page, in case of multi-column output.
- −d    Double space.
- −en   Set the tab stops for input text every n spaces.
- −h    Take the next argument as a page header (file by default).
- −in   Replace sequences of blanks in the output by tabs, using tab - stops set every n spaces.
- −f    Use form feeds to separate pages.
- −ln   Take the length of the page to be n lines instead of the default - 66.
- −m    Print all files simultaneously, each in one column.
- −nm   Number the lines of each file. The numeric argument m, default - 5, sets the width of the line-number field.
- −on   Offset the left margin n character positions.
- −p    Pad each file printed to an odd number of pages. For two-sided - printers, this will ensure each file will start a new page.
- −sc   Separate columns by the single character c instead of aligning - them with white space. A missing c is taken to be a tab.
- −t    Do not print the 5-line header or the 5-line trailer normally - supplied for each page.
- −wn   For multi-column output, take the width of the page to be n - characters instead of the default 72.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/pr.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cat(1), lp(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/proof.html b/man/man1/proof.html deleted file mode 100644 index a442fd71..00000000 --- a/man/man1/proof.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ - -proof(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PROOF(1)PROOF(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - proof – troff output interpreter
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - proof [ −mmag ] [ −/nview ] [ −F dir ] [ −d ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Proof reads troff(1) intermediate language from file or standard - input and simulates the resulting pages on the screen. -
- - After a page of text is displayed, proof pauses for a command - from the keyboard. The typed commands are:
- newlineGo on to next page of text.
- −      Go back to the previous page.
- q      Quit.
- pn     Print page n. An out-of-bounds page number means the end nearer - to that number; a missing number means the current page; a signed - number means an offset to the current page.
- n      Same as pn.
- c      Clear the screen, then wait for another command.
- mmag   Change the magnification at which the output is printed. Normally - it is printed with magnification .9; mag=.5 shrinks it to half - size; mag=2 doubles the size.
- xval    Move everything val screen pixels to the right (left, if val - is negative).
- yval    Move everything val screen pixels down (up, if val is negative).
- /nview   Split the window into nview pieces. The current page goes - into the rightmost, bottommost piece, and previous pages are shown - in the other pieces.
- −F dirUse dir for fonts instead of /lib/font/bit.
- d      Toggle the debug flag. -
- - These commands are also available, under slightly different form, - from a menu on button 3. The pan menu item allows arbitrary positioning - of the page: after selecting pan, press the mouse button again - and hold it down while moving the page to the desired location. - The page will be redisplayed in its entirety when - the button is released. Mouse button 1 also pans, without the - need for selecting from a menu. -
- - The m, x, y, F, /, and d commands are also available as command - line options.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/font/*
- -
- - fonts
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/font/MAP
- -
- - how to convert troff output fonts and character names into screen - fonts and character numbers
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/proof
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - lp(1), gs(1), page(1)
- J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan, “Troff User’s Manual”
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/ps.html b/man/man1/ps.html deleted file mode 100644 index bf19c676..00000000 --- a/man/man1/ps.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ - -ps(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PS(1)PS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ps, psu – process status
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - ps [ −pa ] -
- - psu [ −pa ] [ user ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Ps prints information about processes. Psu prints only information - about processes started by user (default $USER). -
- - For each process reported, the user, process id, user time, system - time, size, state, and command name are printed. State is one - of the following:
- Moribund   Process has exited and is about to have its resources - reclaimed.
- Ready      on the queue of processes ready to be run.
- Scheding   about to be run.
- Running    running.
- Queueing   waiting on a queue for a resource.
- Wakeme     waiting for I/O or some other kernel event to wake it up.
- Broken     dead of unnatural causes; lingering so that it can be examined.
- Stopped    stopped.
- Stopwait   waiting for another process to stop.
- Fault      servicing a page fault.
- Idle       waiting for something to do (kernel processes only).
- New        being created.
- Pageout    paging out some other process.
- Syscall      performing the named system call.
- no resource   waiting for more of a critical resource.
- wchan       waiting on the named wait channel (on a Unix kernel). -
- - With the −p flag, ps also prints, after the system time, the baseline - and current priorities of each process. -
- - The −a flag causes ps to print the arguments for the process. - Newlines in arguments will be translated to spaces for display.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/ps
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/psu
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - acid(1), db(1), kill(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/psfonts.html b/man/man1/psfonts.html deleted file mode 100644 index b0510a81..00000000 --- a/man/man1/psfonts.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,148 +0,0 @@ - -psfonts(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PSFONTS(1)PSFONTS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - psfonts, psdownload – add necessary fonts to PostScript document - for printing
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - psfonts [ files ... ] -
- - psdownload [ options ] [ files ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Plan 9’s troff(1) and tr2post(1) use non-standard PostScript fonts - (found in /usr/local/plan9/postscript/font). Before sending PostScript - output from tr2post to a standard printer, code implementing the - non-standard fonts must be added to the PostScript. -
- - Psfonts copies files (or standard input) to standard output, adding - necessary PostScript fonts. -
- - Psdownload is the more general program used to implement psfonts. - The options are:
- −c comment
- -
- - Expect the fonts used in the document to be listed in a comment - beginning with this string (default %%DocumentFonts:).
- -
- −f atend
- -
- - Expect extra fonts comments at the end of the document, so read - the entire input before starting output (by default this only - happens if a %%DocumentFonts: (atend) comment is encountered).
- -
- −m mapfile
- -
- - Use mapfile to translate from PostScript font names to files. - Each line in the map has two white space-separated fields: a font - name and the corresponding file. If mapfile is not a rooted path, - it is evaluated relative to the fontdir (see −H below).
- -
- −p printer
- -
- - Set the name of the printer. This option is deprecated. Its only - effect is to override the −r option, causing fontdir/printers/printer - to be used as the resident fonts list.
- -
- −r residentfonts
- -
- - Read a list of fonts assumed to be on the printer (not necessary - to re-download) from the file residentfonts. If residentfonts - is not a rooted path, it is evaluated relative to the fontdir - (see −H below).
- -
- −H fontdir
- -
- - Set the directory that is assumed to contain the PostScript fonts - and information about printers (see −m, −p, and −r above; default - /usr/local/plan9/postscript/font).
- -
- −T tmpdir
- -
- - Use tmpdir for storing temporary files (default /var/tmp).
- -
- −D    Produce copious amounts of debugging information on standard - error.
- −I    Continue running even after fatal errors occur.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - See tr2post(1) for an example.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/psfonts
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/postscript/download
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), tr2post(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/pwd.html b/man/man1/pwd.html deleted file mode 100644 index ab8b8c3d..00000000 --- a/man/man1/pwd.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ - -pwd(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PWD(1)PWD(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - pwd, pbd – working directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - pwd
- pbd
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Pwd prints the path name of the working (current) directory. -
- - Pbd prints the base name of the working (current) directory. It - prints no final newline and is intended for applications such - as constructing shell prompts.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/pbd.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cd in rc(1), getwd(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Pwd is not provided. Unix already provides one.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/rc.html b/man/man1/rc.html deleted file mode 100644 index a599adfd..00000000 --- a/man/man1/rc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,655 +0,0 @@ - -rc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RC(1)RC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - rc, cd, eval, exec, exit, flag, rfork, shift, wait, whatis, ., - ~ – command language
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - rc [ −srdiIlxepvV ] [ −c command ] [ file [ arg ... ]]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Rc is the Plan 9 shell. It executes command lines read from a - terminal or a file or, with the −c flag, from rc’s argument list.
-

Command Lines
- A command line is a sequence of commands, separated by ampersands - or semicolons (& or ;), terminated by a newline. The commands are - executed in sequence from left to right. Rc does not wait for - a command followed by & to finish executing before starting the - following command. Whenever a command - followed by & is executed, its process id is assigned to the rc - variable $apid. Whenever a command not followed by & exits or is - terminated, the rc variable $status gets the process’s wait message - (see wait(3)); it will be the null string if the command was successful. - -
- - A long command line may be continued on subsequent lines by typing - a backslash (\) followed by a newline. This sequence is treated - as though it were a blank. Backslash is not otherwise a special - character. -
- - A number-sign (#) and any following characters up to (but not - including) the next newline are ignored, except in quotation marks.
-

Simple Commands
- A simple command is a sequence of arguments interspersed with - I/O redirections. If the first argument is the name of an rc function - or of one of rc’s built-in commands, it is executed by rc. Otherwise - if the name starts with a slash (/), it must be the path name - of the program to be executed. Names containing no - initial slash are searched for in a list of directory names stored - in $path. The first executable file of the given name found in - a directory in $path is the program to be executed. To be executable, - the user must have execute permission (see stat(3)) and the file - must be either an executable binary for the current - machine’s CPU type, or a shell script. Shell scripts begin with - a line containing the full path name of a shell (usually /bin/rc), - prefixed by #!. -
- - The first word of a simple command cannot be a keyword unless - it is quoted or otherwise disguised. The keywords are
- -
- - for in while if not switch fn ~ ! @
- -
-

Arguments and Variables
- A number of constructions may be used where rc’s syntax requires - an argument to appear. In many cases a construction’s value will - be a list of arguments rather than a single string. -
- - The simplest kind of argument is the unquoted word: a sequence - of one or more characters none of which is a blank, tab, newline, - or any of the following:
- -
- - # ; & | ^ $ = ` ' { } ( ) < >
- -
- An unquoted word that contains any of the characters * ? [ is - a pattern for matching against file names. The character * matches - any sequence of characters, ? matches any single character, and - [class] matches any character in the class. If the first character - of class is ~, the class is complemented. The class may - also contain pairs of characters separated by −, standing for - all characters lexically between the two. The character / must - appear explicitly in a pattern, as must the first character of - the path name components . and ... A pattern is replaced by a - list of arguments, one for each path name matched, except that - a - pattern matching no names is not replaced by the empty list, but - rather stands for itself. Pattern matching is done after all other - operations. Thus,
- -
- - x=/tmp echo $x^/*.c
- -
- matches /tmp/*.c, rather than matching /*.c and then prefixing - /tmp. -
- - A quoted word is a sequence of characters surrounded by single - quotes ('). A single quote is represented in a quoted word by - a pair of quotes (''). -
- - Each of the following is an argument.
- (arguments)
- -
- - The value of a sequence of arguments enclosed in parentheses is - a list comprising the members of each element of the sequence. - Argument lists have no recursive structure, although their syntax - may suggest it. The following are entirely equivalent:
- -
- - echo hi there everybody
- ((echo) (hi there) everybody)
- -
- -
- $argument
- $argument(subscript)
- -
- - The argument after the $ is the name of a variable whose value - is substituted. Multiple levels of indirection are possible, but - of questionable utility. Variable values are lists of strings. - If argument is a number n, the value is the nth element of $*, - unless $* doesn’t have n elements, in which case the value is - empty. If argument is followed by a parenthesized list of subscripts, - the value substituted is a list composed of the requested elements - (origin 1). The parenthesis must follow the variable name with - no spaces. Assignments to variables are described below.
- -
- $#argument
- -
- - The value is the number of elements in the named variable. A variable - never assigned a value has zero elements.
- -
- $"argument
- -
- - The value is a single string containing the components of the - named variable separated by spaces. A variable with zero elements - yields the empty string.
- -
- `{command}
- -
- - rc executes the command and reads its standard output, splitting - it into a list of arguments, using characters in $ifs as separators. - If $ifs is not otherwise set, its value is ' \t\n'.
- -
- <{command}
- >{command}
- -
- - The command is executed asynchronously with its standard output - or standard input connected to a pipe. The value of the argument - is the name of a file referring to the other end of the pipe. - This allows the construction of non-linear pipelines. For example, - the following runs two commands old and new - and uses cmp to compare their outputs
- -
- - cmp <{old} <{new}
- -
- -
- argument^argument
- -
- - The ^ operator concatenates its two operands. If the two operands - have the same number of components, they are concatenated pairwise. - If not, then one operand must have one component, and the other - must be non-empty, and concatenation is distributive.
- -
-

Free Carets
- In most circumstances, rc will insert the ^ operator automatically - between words that are not separated by white space. Whenever - one of $ ' ` follows a quoted or unquoted word or an unquoted - word follows a quoted word with no intervening blanks or tabs, - a ^ is inserted between the two. If an unquoted word - immediately follows a $ and contains a character other than an - alphanumeric, underscore, or *, a ^ is inserted before the first - such character. Thus
- -
- - cc −$flags $stem.c -
- - -
- is equivalent to
- -
- - cc −^$flags $stem^.c
- -
-

I/O Redirections
- The sequence >file redirects the standard output file (file descriptor - 1, normally the terminal) to the named file; >>file appends standard - output to the file. The standard input file (file descriptor 0, - also normally the terminal) may be redirected from a file by the - sequence <file, or from an inline ‘here document’ by the - sequence <<eof-marker. The contents of a here document are lines - of text taken from the command input stream up to a line containing - nothing but the eof-marker, which may be either a quoted or unquoted - word. If eof-marker is unquoted, variable names of the form $word - have their values substituted from rc’s - environment. If $word is followed by a caret (^), the caret is - deleted. If eof-marker is quoted, no substitution occurs. -
- - Redirections may be applied to a file-descriptor other than standard - input or output by qualifying the redirection operator with a - number in square brackets. For example, the diagnostic output - (file descriptor 2) may be redirected by writing cc junk.c >[2]junk. - -
- - A file descriptor may be redirected to an already open descriptor - by writing >[fd0=fd1] or <[fd0=fd1]. Fd1 is a previously opened - file descriptor and fd0 becomes a new copy (in the sense of dup(3)) - of it. A file descriptor may be closed by writing >[fd0=] or <[fd0=]. - -
- - Redirections are executed from left to right. Therefore, cc junk.c - >/dev/null >[2=1] and cc junk.c >[2=1] >/dev/null have different effects: - the first puts standard output in /dev/null and then puts diagnostic - output in the same place, where the second directs diagnostic - output to the - terminal and sends standard output to /dev/null.
-

Compound Commands
- A pair of commands separated by a pipe operator (|) is a command. - The standard output of the left command is sent through a pipe - to the standard input of the right command. The pipe operator - may be decorated to use different file descriptors. |[fd] connects - the output end of the pipe to file descriptor fd rather - than 1. |[fd0=fd1] connects output to fd1 of the left command - and input to fd0 of the right command. -
- - A pair of commands separated by && or || is a command. In either - case, the left command is executed and its exit status examined. - If the operator is && the right command is executed if the left - command’s status is null. || causes the right command to be executed - if the left command’s status is non-null. -
- - The exit status of a command may be inverted (non-null is changed - to null, null is changed to non-null) by preceding it with a !. - -
- - The | operator has highest precedence, and is left-associative - (i.e. binds tighter to the left than the right). ! has intermediate - precedence, and && and || have the lowest precedence. -
- - The unary @ operator, with precedence equal to !, causes its operand - to be executed in a subshell. -
- - Each of the following is a command.
- if ( list ) command
- -
- - A list is a sequence of commands, separated by &, ;, or newline. - It is executed and if its exit status is null, the command is - executed.
- -
- if not command
- -
- - The immediately preceding command must have been if(list) command. - If its condition was non-zero, the command is executed.
- -
- for(name in arguments) command
- for(name) command
- -
- - The command is executed once for each argument with that argument - assigned to name. If the argument list is omitted, $* is used.
- -
- while(list) command
- -
- - The list is executed repeatedly until its exit status is non-null. - Each time it returns null status, the command is executed. An - empty list is taken to give null status.
- -
- switch(argument){list}
- -
- - The list is searched for simple commands beginning with the word - case. (The search is only at the ‘top level’ of the list. That - is, cases in nested constructs are not found.) Argument is matched - against each word following case using the pattern-matching algorithm - described above, except that / and the - first characters of . and .. need not be matched explicitly. When - a match is found, commands in the list are executed up to the - next following case command (at the top level) or the closing - brace.
- -
- {list}
- -
- - Braces serve to alter the grouping of commands implied by operator - priorities. The body is a sequence of commands separated by &, - ;, or newline.
- -
- fn name{list}
- fn name
- -
- - The first form defines a function with the given name. Subsequently, - whenever a command whose first argument is name is encountered, - the current value of the remainder of the command’s argument list - will be assigned to $*, after saving its current value, and rc - will execute the list. The second form removes - name’s function definition.
- -
- fn note{list}
- fn note
- -
- - A function with a special name will be called when rc receives - a corresponding note; see notify(3). The valid note names (and - corresponding notes) are sighup (hangup), sigint (interrupt), - sigalrm (alarm), and sigfpe (floating point trap). By default - rc exits on receiving any signal, except when - run interactively, in which case interrupts and quits normally - cause rc to stop whatever it’s doing and start reading a new command. - The second form causes rc to handle a signal in the default manner. - Rc recognizes an artificial note, sigexit, which occurs when rc - is about to finish executing. - -
- name=argument command
- -
- - Any command may be preceded by a sequence of assignments interspersed - with redirections. The assignments remain in effect until the - end of the command, unless the command is empty (i.e. the assignments - stand alone), in which case they are effective until rescinded - by later assignments. - -
-

Built-in Commands
- These commands are executed internally by rc, usually because - their execution changes or depends on rc’s internal state.
- . file ...
- -
- - Execute commands from file. $* is set for the duration to the - remainder of the argument list following file. File is searched - for using $path.
- -
- builtin command ...
- -
- - Execute command as usual except that any function named command - is ignored in favor of the built-in meaning.
- -
- cd [dir]
- -
- - Change the current directory to dir. The default argument is $home. - dir is searched for in each of the directories mentioned in $cdpath.
- -
- eval [arg ...]
- -
- - The arguments are concatenated separated by spaces into a single - string, read as input to rc, and executed.
- -
- exec [command ...]
- -
- - This instance of rc replaces itself with the given (non-built-in) - command.
- -
- flag f [+−]
- -
- - Either set (+), clear (−), or test (neither + nor −) the flag - f, where f is a single character, one of the command line flags - (see Invocation, below).
- -
- exit [status]
- -
- - Exit with the given exit status. If none is given, the current - value of $status is used.
- -
- rfork [nNeEsfFm]
- -
- - Become a new process group using rfork(flags) where flags is composed - of the bitwise OR of the rfork flags specified by the option letters - (see fork(2)). If no flags are given, they default to ens. The - flags and their meanings are: n is RFNAMEG; N is RFCNAMEG; e is - RFENVG; E is RFCENVG; s is - RFNOTEG; f is RFFDG; F is RFCFDG; and m is RFNOMNT.
- -
- shift [n]
- -
- - Delete the first n (default 1) elements of $*.
- -
- wait [pid]
- -
- - Wait for the process with the given pid to exit. If no pid is - given, all outstanding processes are waited for.
- -
- whatis name ...
- -
- - Print the value of each name in a form suitable for input to rc. - The output is an assignment to any variable, the definition of - any function, a call to builtin for any built-in command, or the - completed pathname of any executable file.
- -
- ~ subject pattern ...
- -
- - The subject is matched against each pattern in sequence. If it - matches any pattern, $status is set to zero. Otherwise, $status - is set to one. Patterns are the same as for file name matching, - except that / and the first character of . and .. need not be - matched explicitly. The patterns are not subjected to - file name matching before the ~ command is executed, so they need - not be enclosed in quotation marks.
- -
-

Environment
- The environment is a list of strings made available to executing - binaries by the kernel. Rc creates an environment entry for each - variable whose value is non-empty, and for each function. The - string for a variable entry has the variable’s name followed by - = and its value. If the value has more than one component, - these are separated by SOH (001) characters. The string for a - function is just the rc input that defines the function. The name - of a function in the environment is the function name preceded - by fn#. -
- - When rc starts executing it reads variable and function definitions - from its environment.
-

Special Variables
- The following variables are set or used by rc.
- $*        Set to rc’s argument list during initialization. Whenever a - . command or a function is executed, the current value is saved - and $* receives the new argument list. The saved value is restored - on completion of the . or function.
- $apid     Whenever a process is started asynchronously with &, $apid - is set to its process id.
- $home     The default directory for cd.
- $ifs      The input field separators used in backquote substitutions. - If $ifs is not set in rc’s environment, it is initialized to blank, - tab and newline.
- $path     The search path used to find commands and input files for - the . command. If not set in the environment, it is initialized - by parsing the $PATH variable (as in sh(1)) or by path=(. /bin). - The variables $path and $PATH are maintained together: changes - to one will be reflected in the other. - $pid      Set during initialization to rc’s process id.
- $prompt   When rc is run interactively, the first component of $prompt - is printed before reading each command. The second component is - printed whenever a newline is typed and more lines are required - to complete the command. If not set in the environment, it is - initialized by prompt=('% ' ' '). - $status   Set to the wait message of the last-executed program. (unless - started with &). ! and ~ also change $status. Its value is used - to control execution in &&, ||, if and while commands. When rc exits - at end-of-file of its input or on executing an exit command with - no argument, $status is its - -
- - -
- - exit status.
- -
- -
-

Invocation
- If rc is started with no arguments it reads commands from standard - input. Otherwise its first non-flag argument is the name of a - file from which to read commands (but see −c below). Subsequent - arguments become the initial value of $*. Rc accepts the following - command-line flags.
- −c string   Commands are read from string.
- −s        Print out exit status after any command where the status is - non-null.
- −e        Exit if $status is non-null after executing a simple command.
- −i        If −i is present, or rc is given no arguments and its standard - input is a terminal, it runs interactively. Commands are prompted - for using $prompt.
- −I        Makes sure rc is not run interactively.
- −l        If −l is given or the first character of argument zero is −, - rc reads commands from $home/lib/profile, if it exists, before - reading its normal input.
- −p        A no-op.
- −d        A no-op.
- −v        Echo input on file descriptor 2 as it is read.
- −x        Print each simple command before executing it.
- −r        Print debugging information (internal form of commands as they - are executed).
- -

-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/rc
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - Tom Duff, “Rc – The Plan 9 Shell”.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There should be a way to match patterns against whole lists rather - than just single strings. -
- - Using ~ to check the value of $status changes $status. -
- - Functions that use here documents don’t work. -
- - Free carets don’t get inserted next to keywords. -
- - The <{command} syntax depends on the underlying operating system - providing a file descriptor device tree at /dev/fd. -
- - By default, FreeBSD 5 does not provide file descriptors greater - than 2 in /dev/fd. To fix this, add
- -
- - /fdescfs      /dev/fd      fdescfs      rw      0      0
- -
- - -
- to /etc/fstab, and then mount /dev/fd. (Adding the line to fstab - ensures causes FreeBSD to mount the file system automatically - at boot time.)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/rio.html b/man/man1/rio.html deleted file mode 100644 index ad3f9adc..00000000 --- a/man/man1/rio.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,172 +0,0 @@ - -rio(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RIO(1)RIO(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - rio – rio-like Window Manager for X
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - rio [ –font fontname ] [ –grey ] [ –s ] [ –term termprog ] [ –version - ] [ –virtuals num ] [ exit | restart ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Rio is a window manager for X which attempts to emulate the window - management policies of Plan 9’s rio window manager. Rio is derived - from David Hogan’s 8½. -
- - The –grey option makes the background stippled grey, the default - X11 background, instead of solid grey, the Plan 9 background. - -
- - The –font option sets the font in rio’s menu to fname, overriding - the default. Unlike the other programs in the Plan 9 ports, rio - expects this font to be an X11 font rather than a Plan 9 font. - -
- - The –term option specifies an alternative program to run when the - New menu item is selected. The default is to try 9term(1) and - then to fall back to xterm(1). The –s option causes rio to add - −s to 9term’s command-line, starting the window in scrolling mode. - -
- - The –version option prints the current version on standard error, - then exits. -
- - The –virtuals option sets the number of virtual screens (the default - is 1, and the maximum is 12). -
- - If the argument exit or restart is given, it is sent to an already-running - rio, causing the extant rio to exit or restart.
-

Using rio
- -
- - One window is current, and is indicated with a dark border and - text; characters typed on the keyboard are available in the /dev/cons - file of the process in the current window. Characters written - on /dev/cons appear asynchronously in the associated window whether - or not the window is current. -
- - Windows are created, deleted and rearranged using the mouse. Clicking - (pressing and releasing) mouse button 1 in a non-current window - makes that window current and brings it in front of any windows - that happen to be overlapping it. When the mouse cursor points - to the background area or is in a window that has - not claimed the mouse for its own use, pressing mouse button 3 - activates a menu of window operations provided by rio. Releasing - button 3 then selects an operation. At this point, a gunsight - or cross cursor indicates that an operation is pending. The button - 3 menu operations are:
- New      Create a window. Press button 3 where one corner of the new - rectangle should appear (cross cursor), and move the mouse, while - holding down button 3, to the diagonally opposite corner. Releasing - button 3 creates the window, and makes it current. Very small - windows may not be created. The new - -
- - -
- - window is created running termprog, by default 9term(1) or, if - 9term is not available, xterm(1).
- -
- -
- Resize   Change the size and location of a window. First click button - 3 in the window to be changed (gunsight cursor). Then sweep out - a window as for the New operation. The window is made current.
- Move     Move a window to another location. After pressing and holding - button 3 over the window to be moved (gunsight cursor), indicate - the new position by dragging the rectangle to the new location. - The window is made current. Windows may be moved partially off-screen.
- Delete   Delete a window. Click in the window to be deleted (gunsight - cursor). Deleting a window causes a hangup note to be sent to - all processes in the window’s process group (see notify(3)).
- Hide     Hide a window. Click in the window to be hidden (gunsight - cursor); it will be moved off-screen. Each hidden window is given - a menu entry in the button 3 menu according to its current window - system label.
- label     Restore a hidden window. -
- - Windows may also be arranged by dragging their borders. Pressing - button 1 or 2 over a window’s border allows one to move the corresponding - edge or corner, while button 3 moves the whole window. -
- - When the mouse cursor points to the background area and rio has - been started with multiple virtual screens using the –virtuals - option, clicking button 2 brings up a menu to select a virtual - screen to view. Scrolling the mouse wheel while the cursor points - at the background will cycle through the virtual screens. - -

-

BUGS
- -
- - In Plan 9’s rio, clicking button 2 or button 3 to select a window - also sends that event to the window itself. This rio does not. - -
- - The command-line syntax is non-standard. -
- - In Plan 9’s rio, newly started applications take over the current - window. This rio starts a new window for each program. (In X11, - it appears to be impossible to know which window starts a particular - program.) -
- - There is a currently a compiled-in limit of 128 hidden windows.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9term(1), xterm(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/rm.html b/man/man1/rm.html deleted file mode 100644 index a19b3d3c..00000000 --- a/man/man1/rm.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ - -rm(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RM(1)RM(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - rm – remove files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - rm [ −fr ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Rm removes files or directories. A directory is removed only if - it is empty. Removal of a file requires write permission in its - directory, but neither read nor write permission on the file itself. - The options are
- −f    Don’t report files that can’t be removed.
- −r    Recursively delete the entire contents of a directory and the - directory itself.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/rm.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - remove(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/sam.html b/man/man1/sam.html deleted file mode 100644 index c27afa63..00000000 --- a/man/man1/sam.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,577 +0,0 @@ - -sam(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SAM(1)SAM(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sam, B, E, sam.save, samterm, samsave – screen editor with structural - regular expressions
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - sam [ option ... ] [ files ] -
- - sam −r machine -
- - sam.save -
- - B file[:line] ... -
- - E file
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Sam is a multi-file editor. It modifies a local copy of an external - file. The copy is here called a file. The files are listed in - a menu available through mouse button 3 or the n command. Each - file has an associated name, usually the name of the external - file from which it was read, and a ‘modified’ bit that indicates - whether the editor’s file agrees with the external file. The external - file is not read into the editor’s file until it first becomes - the current file--that to which editing commands apply--whereupon - its menu entry is printed. The options are
- −d          Do not ‘download’ the terminal part of sam. Editing will be - done with the command language only, as in ed(1).
- −r machine    Run the host part remotely on the specified machine, - the terminal part locally.
- −s path      Start the host part from the specified file on the remote - host. Only meaningful with the −r option.
- −t path      Start the terminal part from the specified file. Useful - for debugging.
-

Regular expressions
- Regular expressions are as in regexp(7) with the addition of \n - to represent newlines. A regular expression may never contain - a literal newline character. The empty regular expression stands - for the last complete expression encountered. A regular expression - in sam matches the longest leftmost substring formally - matched by the expression. Searching in the reverse direction - is equivalent to searching backwards with the catenation operations - reversed in the expression.
-

Addresses
- An address identifies a substring in a file. In the following, - ‘character n’ means the null string after the n-th character in - the file, with 1 the first character in the file. ‘Line n’ means - the n-th match, starting at the beginning of the file, of the - regular expression .*\n?. All files always have a current substring, - called - dot, that is the default address.
-

Simple Addresses
- #n    The empty string after character n; #0 is the beginning of the - file.
- n     Line n; 0 is the beginning of the file.
- /regexp/
- ?regexp?
- -
- - The substring that matches the regular expression, found by looking - toward the end (/) or beginning (?) of the file, and if necessary - continuing the search from the other end to the starting point - of the search. The matched substring may straddle the starting - point. When entering a pattern containing a literal - question mark for a backward search, the question mark should - be specified as a member of a class.
- -
- 0     The string before the first full line. This is not necessarily - the null string; see + and − below.
- $     The null string at the end of the file.
- .     Dot.
- '     The mark in the file (see the k command below).
- "regexp"
- -
- - Preceding a simple address (default .), refers to the address - evaluated in the unique file whose menu line matches the regular - expression.
- -
-

Compound Addresses
- In the following, a1 and a2 are addresses.
- a1+a2   The address a2 evaluated starting at the end of a1.
- a1−a2   The address a2 evaluated looking in the reverse direction - starting at the beginning of a1.
- a1,a2   The substring from the beginning of a1 to the end of a2. - If a1 is missing, 0 is substituted. If a2 is missing, $ is substituted.
- a1;a2   Like a1,a2, but with a2 evaluated at the end of, and dot - set to, a1. -
- - The operators + and − are high precedence, while , and ; are low - precedence. -
- - In both + and − forms, if a2 is a line or character address with - a missing number, the number defaults to 1. If a1 is missing, - . is substituted. If both a1 and a2 are present and distinguishable, - + may be elided. a2 may be a regular expression; if it is delimited - by ?’s, the effect of the + or − is reversed. -
- - It is an error for a compound address to represent a malformed - substring. Some useful idioms: a1+− (a1-+) selects the line containing - the end (beginning) of a1. 0/regexp/ locates the first match of - the expression in the file. (The form 0;// sets dot unnecessarily.) - ./regexp/// finds the second following - occurrence of the expression, and .,/regexp/ extends dot.
-

Commands
- In the following, text demarcated by slashes represents text delimited - by any printable character except alphanumerics. Any number of - trailing delimiters may be elided, with multiple elisions then - representing null strings, but the first delimiter must always - be present. In any delimited text, newline may not appear - literally; \n may be typed for newline; and \/ quotes the delimiter, - here /. Backslash is otherwise interpreted literally, except in - s commands. -
- - Most commands may be prefixed by an address to indicate their - range of operation. Those that may not are marked with a * below. - If a command takes an address and none is supplied, dot is used. - The sole exception is the w command, which defaults to 0,$. In - the description, ‘range’ is used to represent whatever - address is supplied. Many commands set the value of dot as a side - effect. If so, it is always set to the ‘result’ of the change: - the empty string for a deletion, the new text for an insertion, - etc. (but see the s and e commands).
-

Text commands
- a/text/
- or
- a
- lines of text
- .     Insert the text into the file after the range. Set dot.
- c
- i     Same as a, but c replaces the text, while i inserts before the - range.
- d     Delete the text in the range. Set dot.
- s/regexp/text/
- -
- - Substitute text for the first match to the regular expression - in the range. Set dot to the modified range. In text the character - & stands for the string that matched the expression. Backslash - behaves as usual unless followed by a digit: \d stands for the - string that matched the subexpression begun by the d-th left - parenthesis. If s is followed immediately by a number n, as in - s2/x/y/, the n-th match in the range is substituted. If the command - is followed by a g, as in s/x/y/g, all matches in the range are - substituted.
- -
- m a1
- t a1   Move (m) or copy (t) the range to after a1. Set dot.
-

Display commands
- p     Print the text in the range. Set dot.
- =     Print the line address and character address of the range.
- =#    Print just the character address of the range.
-

File commands
- * b file-list
- -
- - Set the current file to the first file named in the list that - sam also has in its menu. The list may be expressed <Plan 9 command - in which case the file names are taken as words (in the shell - sense) generated by the Plan 9 command.
- -
- * B file-list
- -
- - Same as b, except that file names not in the menu are entered - there, and all file names in the list are examined.
- -
- * n    Print a menu of files. The format is:
- -
- - ' or blankindicating the file is modified or clean,
- − or +    indicating the file is unread or has been read (in the terminal, - * means more than one window is open),
- . or blankindicating the current file,
- a blank,
- and the file name.
- -
- * D file-list
- -
- - Delete the named files from the menu. If no files are named, the - current file is deleted. It is an error to D a modified file, - but a subsequent D will delete such a file.
- -
-

I/O Commands
- * e filename
- -
- - Replace the file by the contents of the named external file. Set - dot to the beginning of the file.
- -
- r filename
- -
- - Replace the text in the range by the contents of the named external - file. Set dot.
- -
- w filename
- -
- - Write the range (default 0,$) to the named external file.
- -
- * f filename
- -
- - Set the file name and print the resulting menu entry. -
- - -
- If the file name is absent from any of these, the current file - name is used. e always sets the file name; r and w do so if the - file has no name.
- < Plan 9-command
- -
- - Replace the range by the standard output of the Plan 9 command.
- -
- > Plan 9-command
- -
- - Send the range to the standard input of the Plan 9 command.
- -
- | Plan 9-command
- -
- - Send the range to the standard input, and replace it by the standard - output, of the Plan 9 command.
- -
- * ! Plan 9-command
- -
- - Run the Plan 9 command.
- -
- * cd directory
- -
- - Change working directory. If no directory is specified, $home - is used. -
- - -
- In any of <, >, | or !, if the Plan 9 command is omitted the last - Plan 9 command (of any type) is substituted. If sam is downloaded - (using the mouse and raster display, i.e. not using option −d), - ! sets standard input to /dev/null, and otherwise unassigned output - (stdout for ! and >, stderr for all) is placed in - /tmp/sam.err and the first few lines are printed.
-

Loops and Conditionals
- x/regexp/ command
- -
- - For each match of the regular expression in the range, run the - command with dot set to the match. Set dot to the last match. - If the regular expression and its slashes are omitted, /.*\n/ - is assumed. Null string matches potentially occur before every - character of the range and at the end of the range. - -
- y/regexp/ command
- -
- - Like x, but run the command for each substring that lies before, - between, or after the matches that would be generated by x. There - is no default regular expression. Null substrings potentially - occur before every character in the range.
- -
- * X/regexp/ command
- -
- - For each file whose menu entry matches the regular expression, - make that the current file and run the command. If the expression - is omitted, the command is run in every file.
- -
- * Y/regexp/ command
- -
- - Same as X, but for files that do not match the regular expression, - and the expression is required.
- -
- g/regexp/ command
- v/regexp/ command
- -
- - If the range contains (g) or does not contain (v) a match for - the expression, set dot to the range and run the command. -
- - -
- These may be nested arbitrarily deeply, but only one instance - of either X or Y may appear in a single command. An empty command - in an x or y defaults to p; an empty command in X or Y defaults - to f. g and v do not have defaults.
-

Miscellany
- k         Set the current file’s mark to the range. Does not set dot.
- * q        Quit. It is an error to quit with modified files, but a second - q will succeed.
- * u n      Undo the last n (default 1) top-level commands that changed - the contents or name of the current file, and any other file whose - most recent change was simultaneous with the current file’s change. - Successive u’s move further back in time. The only commands for - which u is ineffective are cd, u, q, w and - -
- - -
- - D. If n is negative, u ‘redoes,’ undoing the undo, going forwards - in time again.
- -
- -
- (empty)    If the range is explicit, set dot to the range. If sam - is downloaded, the resulting dot is selected on the screen; otherwise - it is printed. If no address is specified (the command is a newline) - dot is extended in either direction to line boundaries and printed. - If dot is thereby unchanged, it is set to .+1 and - -
- - -
- - printed.
- -
- -
-

Grouping and multiple changes
- Commands may be grouped by enclosing them in braces {}. Commands - within the braces must appear on separate lines (no backslashes - are required between commands). Semantically, an opening brace - is like a command: it takes an (optional) address and sets dot - for each sub-command. Commands within the - braces are executed sequentially, but changes made by one command - are not visible to other commands (see the next paragraph). Braces - may be nested arbitrarily. -
- - When a command makes a number of changes to a file, as in x/re/c/text/, - the addresses of all changes to the file are computed in the original - file. If the changes are in sequence, they are applied to the - file. Successive insertions at the same address are catenated - into a single insertion composed of the several - insertions in the order applied.
-

The terminal
- What follows refers to behavior of sam when downloaded, that is, - when operating as a display editor on a raster display. This is - the default behavior; invoking sam with the −d (no download) option - provides access to the command language only. -
- - Each file may have zero or more windows open. Each window is equivalent - and is updated simultaneously with changes in other windows on - the same file. Each window has an independent value of dot, indicated - by a highlighted substring on the display. Dot may be in a region - not within the window. There is usually - a ‘current window’, marked with a dark border, to which typed - text and editing commands apply. Text may be typed and edited - as in rio(1); also the escape key (ESC) selects (sets dot to) - text typed since the last mouse button hit. -
- - The button 3 menu controls window operations. The top of the menu - provides the following operators, each of which uses one or more - rio-like cursors to prompt for selection of a window or sweeping - of a rectangle. ‘Sweeping’ a null rectangle gets a large window, - disjoint from the command window or the whole - screen, depending on where the null rectangle is.
- new      Create a new, empty file.
- zerox    Create a copy of an existing window.
- resize   As in rio.
- close    Delete the window. In the last window of a file, close is - equivalent to a D for the file.
- write    Equivalent to a w for the file. -
- - Below these operators is a list of available files, starting with - ~~sam~~, the command window. Selecting a file from the list makes - the most recently used window on that file current, unless it - is already current, in which case selections cycle through the - open windows. If no windows are open on the file, the user is - prompted to open one. Files other than ~~sam~~ are marked with - one of the characters −+* according as zero, one, or more windows - are open on the file. A further mark . appears on the file in - the current window and a single quote, ', on a file modified since - last write. -
- - The command window, created automatically when sam starts, is - an ordinary window except that text typed to it is interpreted - as commands for the editor rather than passive text, and text - printed by editor commands appears in it. The behavior is like - rio, with an ‘output point’ that separates commands being typed - from previous output. Commands typed in the command window apply - to the current open file--the file in the most recently current - window.
-

Manipulating text
- Button 1 changes selection, much like rio. Pointing to a non-current - window with button 1 makes it current; within the current window, - button 1 selects text, thus setting dot. Double-clicking selects - text to the boundaries of words, lines, quoted strings or bracketed - strings, depending on the text at the click. -
- - Button 2 provides a menu of editing commands:
- cut       Delete dot and save the deleted text in the snarf buffer.
- paste     Replace the text in dot by the contents of the snarf buffer.
- snarf     Save the text in dot in the snarf buffer.
- plumb     Send the text in the selection as a plumb message. If the - selection is empty, the white-space-delimited block of text is - sent as a plumb message with a click attribute defining where - the selection lies (see plumb(7)).
- look      Search forward for the next occurrence of the literal text - in dot. If dot is the null string, the text in the snarf buffer - is used. The snarf buffer is unaffected.
- <rio>     Exchange snarf buffers with rio.
- /regexp    Search forward for the next match of the last regular expression - typed in a command. (Not in command window.)
- send      Send the text in dot, or the snarf buffer if dot is the null - string, as if it were typed to the command window. Saves the sent - text in the snarf buffer. (Command window only.)
-

External communication
- Sam listens to the edit plumb port. If plumbing is not active, - on invocation sam creates a named pipe /srv/sam.user which acts - as an additional source of commands. Characters written to the - named pipe are treated as if they had been typed in the command - window. -
- - B is a shell-level command that causes an instance of sam running - on the same terminal to load the named files. B uses either plumbing - or the named pipe, whichever service is available. If plumbing - is not enabled, the option allows a line number to be specified - for the initial position to display in the last named file - (plumbing provides a more general mechanism for this ability). - -
- - E is a shell-level command that can be used as $EDITOR in a Unix - environment. It runs B on file and then does not exit until file - is changed, which is taken as a signal that file is done being - edited.
-

Abnormal termination
- If sam terminates other than by a q command (by hangup, deleting - its window, etc.), modified files are saved in an executable file, - $HOME/sam.save. This program, when executed, asks whether to write - each file back to a external file. The answer y causes writing; - anything else skips the file. - -

-

FILES
- -
- - $HOME/sam.save
- $HOME/sam.err
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/samsave
- -
- - -
- - the program called to unpack $HOME/sam.save.
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sam       source for sam itself
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/samterm   source for the separate terminal - part
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/B
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/E
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ed(1), sed(1), grep(1), rio(1), regexp(7). -
- - Rob Pike, “The text editor sam”.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/scat.html b/man/man1/scat.html deleted file mode 100644 index d5cf2007..00000000 --- a/man/man1/scat.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,385 +0,0 @@ - -scat(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SCAT(1)SCAT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - scat – sky catalogue and Digitized Sky Survey
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - scat
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Scat looks up items in catalogues of objects outside the solar - system and implements database-like manipulations on sets of such - objects. It also provides an interface to astro(1) to plot the - locations of solar system objects. Finally, it displays images - from the Space Telescope Science Institute’s Digitized Sky Survey, - keyed to the catalogues. -
- - Items are read, one per line, from the standard input and looked - up in the catalogs. Input is case-insensitive. The result of the - lookup becomes the set of objects available to the database commands. - After each lookup or command, if more than two objects are in - the set, scat prints how many objects are in the set; - otherwise it prints the objects’ descriptions or cross-index listings - (suitable for input to scat). An item is in one of the following - formats:
- ngc1234
- -
- - Number 1234 in the New General Catalogue of Nonstellar Objects, - NGC2000.0. The output identifies the type (Gx=galaxy, Pl=planetary - nebula, OC=open cluster, Gb=globular cluster, Nb=bright nebula, - C+N=cluster associated with nebulosity, Ast=asterism, Kt=knot - or nebulous region in a galaxy, - ***=triple star, D*=double star, ?=uncertain, −=nonexistent, PD=plate - defect, and (blank)=unverified or unknown), its position in 2000.0 - coordinates, its size in minutes of arc, a brief description, - and popular names.
- -
- ic1234
- -
- - Like NGC references, but from the Index Catalog.
- -
- sao12345
- -
- - Number 12345 in the Smithsonian Astrophysical Star Catalogue. - Output identifies the visual and photographic magnitudes, 2000.0 - coordinates, proper motion, spectral type, multiplicity and variability - class, and HD number.
- -
- m4    Catalog number 4 in Messier’s catalog. The output is the NGC - number.
- abell1701
- -
- - Catalog number 1701 in the Abell and Zwicky catalog of clusters - of galaxies. Output identifies the magnitude of the tenth brightest - member of the cluster, radius of the cluster in degrees, its distance - in megaparsecs, 2000.0 coordinates, galactic latitude and longitude, - magnitude range of the cluster (the - ‘distance group’), number of members (the ‘richness group’), population - per square degree, and popular names.
- -
- planetarynebula
- -
- - The set of NGC objects of the specified type. The type may be - a compact NGC code or a full name, as above, with no blank.
- -
- "α umi"
- -
- - Names are provided in double quotes. Known names are the Greek - letter designations, proper names such as Betelgeuse, bright variable - stars, and some proper names of stars, NGC objects, and Abell - clusters. Greek letters may be spelled out, e.g. alpha. Constellation - names must be the three-letter - abbreviations. The output is the SAO number. For non-Greek names, - catalog numbers and names are listed for all objects with names - for which the given name is a prefix.
- -
- 12h34m −16
- -
- - Coordinates in the sky are translated to the nearest ‘patch’, - approximately one square degree of sky. The output is the coordinates - identifying the patch, the constellations touching the patch, - and the Abell, NGC, and SAO objects in the patch. The program - prints sky positions in several formats corresponding to - different precisions; any output format is understood as input.
- -
- umi   All the patches in the named constellation.
- marsThe planets are identified by their names. The names shadow - and comet refer to the earth’s penumbra at lunar distance and - the comet installed in the current astro(1). The output is the - planet’s name, right ascension and declination, azimuth and altitude, - and phase for the moon and sun, as shown by - -
- - astro. The positions are current at the start of scat’s execution; - see the astro command in the next section for more information. - -
- - -
- The commands are:
- add itemAdd the named item to the set.
- keep class ...
- -
- - -
- - Flatten the set and cull it, keeping only the specified classes. - The classes may be specific NGC types, all stars (sao), all NGC - objects (ngc), all M objects (m), all Abell clusters (abell), - or a specified brightness range. Brightness ranges are specified - by a leading > or < followed by a magnitude. Remember - that brighter objects have lesser magnitudes.
- -
- -
- drop class ...
- -
- - -
- - Complement to keep.
- -
- -
- flat    Some items such as patches represents sets of items. Flat - flattens the set so scat holds all the information available for - the objects in the set.
- print   Print the contents of the set. If the information seems meager, - try flattening the set.
- expand n
- -
- - -
- - Flatten the set, expand the area of the sky covered by the set - to be n degrees wider, and collect all the objects in that area. - If n is zero, expand collects all objects in the patches that - cover the current set.
- -
- -
- astro option
- -
- - -
- - Run astro(1) with the specified options (to which will be appended - −p), to discover the positions of the planets. Astro’s −d and - −l options can be used to set the time and place; by default, - it’s right now at the coordinates in /lib/sky/here. Running astro - does not change the positions of planets - already in the display set, so astro may be run multiple times, - executing e.g. add mars each time, to plot a series of planetary - positions.
- -
- -
- plot option
- -
- - -
- - Expand and plot the set in a new window on the screen. Symbols - for NGC objects are as in Sky Atlas 2000.0, except that open clusters - are shown as stippled disks rather than circles. Abell clusters - are plotted as a triangle of ellipses. The planets are drawn as - disks of representative color with the first letter - of the name in the disk (lower case for inferior planets; upper - case for superior); the sun, moon, and earth’s shadow are unlabeled - disks. Objects larger than a few pixels are plotted to scale; - however, scat does not have the information necessary to show - the correct orientation for galaxies. - The option nogrid suppresses the lines of declination and right - ascension. By default, scat labels NGC objects, Abell clusters, - and bright stars; option nolabel suppresses these while alllabel - labels stars with their SAO number as well. The default size is - 512x512; options dx n and dy n set the x and - y extent. The option zenithup orients the map so it appears as - it would in the sky at the time and location used by the astro - command (q.v.).
- The output is designed to look best on an LCD display. CRTs have - trouble with the thin, grey lines and dim stars. The option nogrey - uses white instead of grey for these details, improving visibility - at the cost of legibility when plotting on CRTs.
- -
- -
- plate [[ra dec] rasize [decsize]]
- -
- - -
- - Display the section of the Digitized Sky Survey (plate scale approximately - 1.7 arcseconds per pixel) centered on the given right ascension - and declination or, if no position is specified, the current set - of objects. The maximum area that will be displayed is one degree - on a side. The horizontal and vertical sizes - may be specified in the usual notation for angles. If the second - size is omitted, a square region is displayed. If no size is specified, - the size is sufficient to display the centers of all the objects - in the current set. If a single object is in the set, the 500x500 - pixel block from the survey containing the center of - the object is displayed. The survey is stored in the CD-ROM juke - box; run 9fs juke before running scat.
- -
- -
- gamma value
- -
- - -
- - Set the gamma for converting plates to images. Default is –1.0. - Negative values display white stars, positive black. The images - look best on displays with depth 8 or greater. Scat does not change - the hardware color map, which should be set externally to a grey - scale; try the command getmap gamma (see - getmap(9.1)) on an 8-bit color-mapped display.
- -
- -
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Plot the Messier objects and naked-eye stars in Orion.
- -
- - ori
- keep m <6
- plot nogrid
- -
- - -
- Draw a finder chart for Uranus:
- -
- - uranus
- expand 5
- plot
- -
- - -
- Show a partial lunar eclipse:
- -
- - astro −d
- 2000 07 16 12 45
- moon
- add shadow
- expand 2
- plot
- -
- - -
- Draw a map of the Pleiades.
- -
- - "alcyone"
- expand 1
- plot
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/sky/*.scat
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/scat
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - astro(1)
- /usr/local/plan9/sky/constelnames the three-letter abbreviations - of the constellation names. -
- - The data was provided by the Astronomical Data Center at the NASA - Goddard Space Flight Center, except for NGC2000.0, which is Copyright - © 1988, Sky Publishing Corporation, used (but not distributed) - by permission. The Digitized Sky Survey, 102 CD-ROMs, is not distributed - with the system. - -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/secstore.html b/man/man1/secstore.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1b9a3a89..00000000 --- a/man/man1/secstore.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,145 +0,0 @@ - -secstore(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SECSTORE(1)SECSTORE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - aescbc, secstore, ipso – secstore commands
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - secstore [ −s server ] [ −(g|G) getfile ] [ −p putfile ] [ −r - rmfile ] [ −c ] [ −u user ] [ −v ] [ −i ] -
- - aescbc -e <cleartext >ciphertext
- aescbc -d <ciphertext >cleartext -
- - ipso [ −a −e −l −f −s ] [ file ... ] -
- - -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Secstore authenticates to the server using a password and optionally - a hardware token, then saves or retrieves a file. This is intended - to be a credentials store (public/private keypairs, passwords, - and other secrets) for a factotum. -
- - Option −p stores a file on the secstore. -
- - Option −g retrieves a file to the local directory; option −G writes - it to standard output instead. Specifying getfile of . will send - to standard output a list of remote files with dates, lengths - and SHA1 hashes. -
- - Option −r removes a file from the secstore. -
- - Option −c prompts for a password change. -
- - Option −v produces more verbose output, in particular providing - a few bits of feedback to help the user detect mistyping. -
- - Option −i says that the password should be read from standard - input instead of from /dev/cons. -
- - Option −n says that the password should be read from NVRAM instead - of from /dev/cons. This option is unsupported. -
- - The server is tcp!$auth!5356, or the server specified by option - −s. -
- - For example, to add a secret to the file read by factotum(4) at - startup, open a new window, type
- -
- - % ramfs −p; cd /tmp
- % auth/secstore −g factotum
- secstore password:
- % echo 'key proto=apop dom=x.com user=ehg !password=hi' >> factotum
- % auth/secstore −p factotum
- secstore password:
- % read −m factotum > /mnt/factotum/ctl
- -
- - -
- and delete the window. The first line creates an ephemeral memory-resident - workspace, invisible to others and automatically removed when - the window is deleted. The next three commands fetch the persistent - copy of the secrets, append a new secret, and save the updated - file back to secstore. The final command - loads the new secret into the running factotum. -
- - Aescbc encrypts and decrypts using AES (Rijndael) in cipher block - chaining (CBC) mode.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/secstore
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - factotum(4), Plan 9’s secstore(8)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There is deliberately no backup of files on the secstore, so −r - (or a disk crash) is irrevocable. You are advised to store important - secrets in a second location.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/sed.html b/man/man1/sed.html deleted file mode 100644 index c40874ad..00000000 --- a/man/man1/sed.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,300 +0,0 @@ - -sed(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SED(1)SED(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sed – stream editor
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - sed [ −n ] [ −g ] [ −e script ] [ −f sfile ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Sed copies the named files (standard input default) to the standard - output, edited according to a script of commands. The −f option - causes the script to be taken from file sfile; these options accumulate. - If there is just one −e option and no −f’s, the flag −e may be - omitted. The −n option suppresses the default - output; −g causes all substitutions to be global, as if suffixed - g. -
- - A script consists of editing commands, one per line, of the following - form:
- -
- - [address [, address] ] function [argument ...] -
- - -
- In normal operation sed cyclically copies a line of input into - a pattern space (unless there is something left after a D command), - applies in sequence all commands whose addresses select that pattern - space, and at the end of the script copies the pattern space to - the standard output (except under −n) and deletes the - pattern space. -
- - An address is either a decimal number that counts input lines - cumulatively across files, a $ that addresses the last line of - input, or a context address, /regular-expression/, in the style - of regexp(7), with the added convention that \n matches a newline - embedded in the pattern space. -
- - A command line with no addresses selects every pattern space. - -
- - A command line with one address selects each pattern space that - matches the address. -
- - A command line with two addresses selects the inclusive range - from the first pattern space that matches the first address through - the next pattern space that matches the second. (If the second - address is a number less than or equal to the line number first - selected, only one line is selected.) Thereafter the process is - repeated, looking again for the first address. -
- - Editing commands can be applied to non-selected pattern spaces - by use of the negation function ! (below). -
- - An argument denoted text consists of one or more lines, all but - the last of which end with \ to hide the newline. Backslashes - in text are treated like backslashes in the replacement string - of an s command, and may be used to protect initial blanks and - tabs against the stripping that is done on every script line. - -
- - An argument denoted rfile or wfile must terminate the command - line and must be preceded by exactly one blank. Each wfile is - created before processing begins. There can be at most 120 distinct - wfile arguments.
- a\
- text        Append. Place text on the output before reading the next input - line.
- b label      Branch to the : command bearing the label. If label is - empty, branch to the end of the script.
- c\
- text        Change. Delete the pattern space. With 0 or 1 address or at - the end of a 2-address range, place text on the output. Start - the next cycle.
- d          Delete the pattern space. Start the next cycle.
- D          Delete the initial segment of the pattern space through the first - newline. Start the next cycle.
- g          Replace the contents of the pattern space by the contents of - the hold space.
- G          Append the contents of the hold space to the pattern space.
- h          Replace the contents of the hold space by the contents of the - pattern space.
- H          Append the contents of the pattern space to the hold space.
- i\
- text        Insert. Place text on the standard output.
- n          Copy the pattern space to the standard output. Replace the pattern - space with the next line of input.
- N          Append the next line of input to the pattern space with an embedded - newline. (The current line number changes.)
- p          Print. Copy the pattern space to the standard output.
- P          Copy the initial segment of the pattern space through the first - newline to the standard output.
- q          Quit. Branch to the end of the script. Do not start a new cycle.
- r rfile       Read the contents of rfile. Place them on the output before - reading the next input line.
- s/regular-expression/replacement/flags
- -
- - -
- - Substitute the replacement string for instances of the regular-expression - in the pattern space. Any character may be used instead of /. - For a fuller description see regexp(7). Flags is zero or more - of
- g     Global. Substitute for all non-overlapping instances of the regular - expression rather than just the first one.
- p     Print the pattern space if a replacement was made.
- w wfile
- Write. Append the pattern space to wfile if a replacement was - made.
- -
- -
- t label      Test. Branch to the : command bearing the label if any - substitutions have been made since the most recent reading of - an input line or execution of a t. If label is empty, branch to - the end of the script.
- w          wfile
- -
- - -
- - Write. Append the pattern space to wfile.
- -
- -
- x          Exchange the contents of the pattern and hold spaces.
- y/string1/string2/
- -
- - -
- - Transform. Replace all occurrences of characters in string1 with - the corresponding character in string2. The lengths of string1 - and string2 must be equal.
- -
- -
- !function     Don’t. Apply the function (or group, if function is {) - only to lines not selected by the address(es).
- : label      This command does nothing; it bears a label for b and t - commands to branch to.
- =          Place the current line number on the standard output as a line.
- {          Execute the following commands through a matching } only when - the pattern space is selected.
- -
- - -
- - An empty command is ignored.
- -
- -
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - sed 10q file
- -
- - Print the first 10 lines of the file.
- -
- sed '/^$/d'
- -
- - Delete empty lines from standard input.
- -
- sed 's/UNIX/& system/g'
- -
- - Replace every instance of UNIX by UNIX system. -
- - -
- sed 's/ *$//     drop trailing blanks
- /^$/d                drop empty lines
- s/    */\          replace blanks by newlines
- /g
- /^$/d' chapter*
- -
- - Print the files chapter1, chapter2, etc. one word to a line. -
- - -
- nroff −ms manuscript | sed '
- ${
- -
- - /^$/p -
- -
- -           if last line of file is empty, print it
- -
- }
- //N             if current line is empty, append next line
- /^\n$/D'         if two lines are empty, delete the first
- -
- - Delete all but one of each group of empty lines from a formatted - manuscript.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sed.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ed(1), grep(1), awk(1), lex(1), sam(1), regexp(7)
- L. E. McMahon, ‘SED -- A Non-interactive Text Editor’, Unix Research - System Programmer’s Manual, Volume 2.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - If input is from a pipe, buffering may consume characters beyond - a line on which a q command is executed.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/seq.html b/man/man1/seq.html deleted file mode 100644 index c04a08e5..00000000 --- a/man/man1/seq.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ - -seq(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SEQ(1)SEQ(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - seq – print sequences of numbers
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - seq [ −w ] [ −fformat ] [ first [ incr ] ] last
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Seq prints a sequence of numbers, one per line, from first (default - 1) to as near last as possible, in increments of incr (default - 1). The loop is:
- -
- - for(val = min; val <= max; val += incr) print val;
- -
- The numbers are interpreted as floating point. -
- - Normally integer values are printed as decimal integers. The options - are
- −fformat    Use the print(3)-style format print for printing each - (floating point) number. The default is %g.
- −w        Equalize the widths of all numbers by padding with leading zeros - as necessary. Not effective with option −f, nor with numbers in - exponential notation.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - seq 0 .05 .1
- -
- - Print 0 0.05 0.1 (on separate lines).
- -
- seq −w 0 .05 .1
- -
- - Print 0.00 0.05 0.10.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/seq.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Option −w always surveys every value in advance. Thus seq −w 1000000000 - is a painful way to get an ‘infinite’ sequence.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/sleep.html b/man/man1/sleep.html deleted file mode 100644 index 622bca9a..00000000 --- a/man/man1/sleep.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ - -sleep(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SLEEP(1)SLEEP(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sleep – suspend execution for an interval
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - sleep time
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Sleep suspends execution for time seconds.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Execute a command 100 seconds hence.
- -
- - {sleep 100; command}&
- -
- - -
- Repeat a command every 30 seconds.
- -
- - while (){
- -
- - command
- sleep 30
- -
- }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sleep.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sleep(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/sort.html b/man/man1/sort.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2f6de1b7..00000000 --- a/man/man1/sort.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,200 +0,0 @@ - -sort(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SORT(1)SORT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sort – sort and/or merge files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - sort [ −cmuMbdfinrwtx ] [ +pos1 [ −pos2 ] ... ] ... [ −k pos1 - [ ,pos2 ] ] ...
- -
- - -
- - ’ [ −o output ] [ −T dir ... ] [ option ... ] [ file ... ]
- -
- -
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Sort sorts lines of all the files together and writes the result - on the standard output. If no input files are named, the standard - input is sorted. -
- - The default sort key is an entire line. Default ordering is lexicographic - by runes. The ordering is affected globally by the following options, - one or more of which may appear.
- −M    Compare as months. The first three non-white space characters - of the field are folded to upper case and compared so that JAN - precedes FEB, etc. Invalid fields compare low to JAN.
- −b    Ignore leading white space (spaces and tabs) in field comparisons.
- −d    ‘Phone directory’ order: only letters, accented letters, digits - and white space are significant in comparisons.
- −f    Fold lower case letters onto upper case. Accented characters - are folded to their non-accented upper case form.
- −i    Ignore characters outside the ASCII range 040-0176 in non-numeric - comparisons.
- −w    Like −i, but ignore only tabs and spaces.
- −n    An initial numeric string, consisting of optional white space, - optional plus or minus sign, and zero or more digits with optional - decimal point, is sorted by arithmetic value.
- −g    Numbers, like −n but with optional e-style exponents, are sorted - by value.
- −r    Reverse the sense of comparisons.
- −tx   ‘Tab character’ separating fields is x. -
- - The notation +pos1 −pos2 restricts a sort key to a field beginning - at pos1 and ending just before pos2. Pos1 and pos2 each have the - form m.n, optionally followed by one or more of the flags Mbdfginr, - where m tells a number of fields to skip from the beginning of - the line and n tells a number of characters to skip - further. If any flags are present they override all the global - ordering options for this key. A missing .n means .0; a missing - −pos2 means the end of the line. Under the −tx option, fields - are strings separated by x; otherwise fields are non-empty strings - separated by white space. White space before a field is part of - the field, except under option −b. A b flag may be attached independently - to pos1 and pos2. -
- - The notation −k pos1[,pos2] is how POSIX sort defines fields: - pos1 and pos2 have the same format but different meanings. The - value of m is origin 1 instead of origin 0 and a missing .n in - pos2 is the end of the field. -
- - When there are multiple sort keys, later keys are compared only - after all earlier keys compare equal. Lines that otherwise compare - equal are ordered with all bytes significant. -
- - These option arguments are also understood:
- −c       Check that the single input file is sorted according to the - ordering rules; give no output unless the file is out of sort.
- −m       Merge; assume the input files are already sorted.
- −u       Suppress all but one in each set of equal lines. Ignored bytes - and bytes outside keys do not participate in this comparison.
- −o       The next argument is the name of an output file to use instead - of the standard output. This file may be the same as one of the - inputs.
- −Tdir     Put temporary files in dir rather than in /var/tmp.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - sort −u +0f +0 list
- -
- - Print in alphabetical order all the unique spellings in a list - of words where capitalized words differ from uncapitalized.
- -
- sort −t: +1 /adm/users
- -
- - Print the users file sorted by user name (the second colon-separated - field).
- -
- sort −umM dates
- -
- - Print the first instance of each month in an already sorted file. - Options −um with just one input file make the choice of a unique - representative from a set of equal lines predictable.
- -
- grep −n '^' input | sort −t: +1f +0n | sed 's/[0−9]*://'
- -
- - A stable sort: input lines that compare equal will come out in - their original order.
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /var/tmp/sort.<pid>.<ordinal>
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sort.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - uniq(1), look(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Sort comments and exits with non-null status for various trouble - conditions and for disorder discovered under option −c.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - An external null character can be confused with an internally - generated end-of-field character. The result can make a sub-field - not sort less than a longer field. -
- - Some of the options, e.g. −i and −M, are hopelessly provincial.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/spell.html b/man/man1/spell.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9f412d2c..00000000 --- a/man/man1/spell.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,125 +0,0 @@ - -spell(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SPELL(1)SPELL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - spell, sprog – find spelling errors
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - spell [ options ] ... [ file ] ... -
- - sprog [ options ] [ −f file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Spell looks up words from the named files (standard input default) - in a spelling list and places possible misspellings--words not sanctioned - there--on the standard output. -
- - Spell ignores constructs of troff(1) and its standard preprocessors. - It understands these options:
- −b    Check British spelling.
- −v    Print all words not literally in the spelling list, with derivations.
- −x    Print, marked with =, every stem as it is looked up in the spelling - list, along with its affix classes. -
- - As a matter of policy, spell does not admit multiple spellings - of the same word. Variants that follow general rules are preferred - over those that don’t, even when the unruly spelling is more common. - Thus, in American usage, ‘modelled’, ‘sizeable’, and ‘judgment’ - are rejected in favor of ‘modeled’, ‘sizable’, and - ‘judgement’. Agglutinated variants are shunned: ‘crewmember’ and - ‘backyard’ cede to ‘crew member’ and ‘back yard’ (noun) or ‘back-yard’ - (adjective).
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/amspell
- -
- - American spelling list
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/lib/brspell
- -
- - British spelling list
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/bin/sprog
- -
- - The actual spelling checker. It expects one word per line on standard - input, and takes the same arguments as spell.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/spell       the script
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/spell   source for sprog
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - deroff(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The heuristics of deroff(1) used to excise formatting information - are imperfect. -
- - The spelling list’s coverage is uneven; in particular biology, - medicine, and chemistry, and perforce proper names, not to mention - languages other than English, are covered very lightly.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/split.html b/man/man1/split.html deleted file mode 100644 index ff3a3d38..00000000 --- a/man/man1/split.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,91 +0,0 @@ - -split(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SPLIT(1)SPLIT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - split – split a file into pieces
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - split [ option ... ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Split reads file (standard input by default) and writes it in - pieces of 1000 lines per output file. The names of the output - files are xaa, xab, and so on to xzz. The options are
- −n n   Split into n-line pieces.
- −l n   Synonym for −n n, a nod to Unix’s syntax.
- −e expression
- -
- - File divisions occur at each line that matches a regular expression; - see regexp(7). Multiple −e options may appear. If a subexpression - of expression is contained in parentheses (...), the output file - name is the portion of the line which matches the subexpression.
- -
- −f stem
- -
- - Use stem instead of x in output file names.
- -
- −s suffix
- -
- - Append suffix to names identified under −e.
- -
- −x    Exclude the matched input line from the output file.
- −i    Ignore case in option −e; force output file names (excluding - the suffix) to lower case.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/split.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sed(1), awk(1), grep(1), regexp(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/src.html b/man/man1/src.html deleted file mode 100644 index cd8334ec..00000000 --- a/man/man1/src.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ - -src(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SRC(1)SRC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - src – find source code for executable
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - src [ −n ] [ −s symbol ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Src examines the named files to find the corresponding source - code, which is then sent to the editor using B (see sam(1)). If - file is an rc(1) script, the source is the file itself. If file - is an executable, the source is defined to be the single file - containing the definition of main and src will point the editor - at the line that - begins the definition. Src uses db(1) to extract the symbol table - information that identifies the source. -
- - Src looks for each file in the current directory, in /bin, and - in the subdirectories of /bin, in that order. -
- - The −n flag causes src to print the file name but not send it - to the editor. The −s flag identifies a symbol other than main - to locate.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Find the source to the main routine in /bin/ed:
- -
- - src ed
- -
- - -
- Find the source for strcmp:
- -
- - src −s strcmp rc
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin/src
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - db(1), plumb(1), sam(1).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/stats.html b/man/man1/stats.html deleted file mode 100644 index 77b598d5..00000000 --- a/man/man1/stats.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,214 +0,0 @@ - -stats(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
STATS(1)STATS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - stats, auxstats – display graphs of system activity
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - stats [ −option ] [ machine[:path] ... ] -
- - auxstats [ machine [ path ] ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Stats displays a rolling graph of various statistics collected - by the operating system and updated once per second. The statistics - may be from a remote machine or multiple machines, whose graphs - will appear in adjacent columns. The columns are labeled by the - machine names and the number of processors on the - machine if it is a multiprocessor. -
- - Auxstats collects the machine statistics for display by stats. - With no arguments, it collects statistics from the local machine. - If machine is named, it executes ssh machine path; when ssh finishes, - auxstats sleeps for one minute and runs it again. The default - path is simply auxstats, but since some shells do not - execute any sort of user profile when run as a non-login shell, - it is often necessary to specify an exact path. -
- - The right mouse button presents a menu to enable and disable the - display of various statistics; by default, stats begins by showing - the load average on the executing machine. -
- - The lower-case options choose the initial set to display:
- b battery     percentage battery life remaining.
- c context     number of process context switches per second.
- e ether       total number of packets sent and received per second.
- E etherin,out
- -
- - -
- - number of packets sent and received per second, displayed as separate - graphs.
- -
- -
- f fault       number of page faults per second.
- i intr        number of interrupts per second.
- l load        (default) system load average. The load is computed as a - running average of the number of processes ready to run, multiplied - by 1000. On most systems, it changes only every five seconds and - has limited accuracy.
- m mem         total pages of active memory. The graph displays the fraction - of the machine’s total memory in use.
- n etherin,out,err
- -
- - -
- - number of packets sent and received per second, and total number - of errors, displayed as separate graphs.
- -
- -
- s syscall     number of system calls per second.
- w swap        number of valid pages on the swap device. The swap is displayed - as a fraction of the number of swap pages configured by the machine. - -
- - The graphs are plotted with time on the horizontal axis. The vertical - axes range from 0 to 1000*sleepsecs, multiplied by the number - of processors on the machine when appropriate. The only exceptions - are memory, and swap space, which display fractions of the total - available, system load, which displays a number - between 0 and 1000, idle and intr, which display percentages and - the Ethernet error count, which goes from 0 to 10.. If the value - of the parameter is too large for the visible range, its value - is shown in decimal in the upper left corner of the graph. -
- - Upper-case options control details of the display. All graphs - are affected; there is no mechanism to affect only one graph.
- −T sleepsecs
- -
- - Set the number of seconds between samples to sleepsecs (default - one second).
- -
- −S scale
- -
- - Sets a scale factor for the displays. A value of 2, for example, - means that the highest value plotted will be twice as large as - the default.
- -
- −L    Plot all graphs with logarithmic y axes. The graph is plotted - so the maximum value that would be displayed on a linear graph - is 2/3 of the way up the y axis and the total range of the graph - is a factor of 1000; thus the y origin is 1/100 of the default - maximum value and the top of the graph is 10 times the - -
- - default maximum.
- -
- −Y    If the display is large enough to show them, place value markers - along the y axes of the graphs. Since one set of markers serves - for all machines across the display, the values in the markers - disregard scaling factors due to multiple processors on the machines. - On a graph for a multiprocessor, the displayed - -
- - values will be larger than the markers indicate. The markers appear - along the right, and the markers show values appropriate to the - rightmost machine; this only matters for graphs such as memory - that have machine-specific maxima. -
- - -
- Typing ‘q’ or DEL causes stats to exit.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - Show the load, memory, interrupts, system calls, context switches, - and ethernet packets for the local machine, a remote BSD machine - daemon, and a remote Linux machine tux. Auxstats is not in tux’s - path, so the full path must be given.
- -
- - stats −lmisce `hostname` daemon \
- -
- - tux:/usr/local/plan9/bin/auxstats
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/stats.c -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/auxstats
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The auxstats binary needs read access to /dev/kmem in order to - collect network statistics on non-Linux systems. Typically this - can be arranged by setting the auxstat binary’s group to kmem - and then turning on its set-gid bit.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/strings.html b/man/man1/strings.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3b1f4eff..00000000 --- a/man/man1/strings.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ - -strings(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
STRINGS(1)STRINGS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - strings – extract printable strings
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - strings [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Strings finds and prints strings containing 6 or more consecutive - printable UTF-encoded characters in a (typically) binary file, - default standard input. Printable characters are taken to be ASCII - characters from blank through tilde (hexadecimal 20 through 7E), - inclusive, and all other characters from value 00A0 to FFFF. - Strings reports the decimal offset within the file at which the - string starts and the text of the string. If the string is longer - than 70 runes the line is terminated by three dots and the printing - is resumed on the next line with the offset of the continuation - line.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/strings.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - nm(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/sum.html b/man/man1/sum.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2b86af65..00000000 --- a/man/man1/sum.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ - -sum(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SUM(1)SUM(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sum, md5sum, sha1sum – sum and count blocks in a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - sum [ −5r ] [ file ... ] -
- - md5sum [ file ... ] -
- - sha1sum [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - By default, sum calculates and prints a 32-bit hexadecimal checksum, - a byte count, and the name of each file. The checksum is also - a function of the input length. If no files are given, the standard - input is summed. Other summing algorithms are available. The options - are
- −r    Sum with the algorithm of System V’s sum −r and print the length - (in 1K blocks) of the input.
- −5    Sum with System V’s default algorithm and print the length (in - 512-byte blocks) of the input. -
- - Sum is typically used to look for bad spots, to validate a file - communicated over some transmission line or as a quick way to - determine if two files on different machines might be the same. - -
- - Md5sum computes the 32 hex digit RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest - Algorithm described in RFC1321. If no files are given, the standard - input is summed. -
- - Sha1sum computes the 40 hex digit National Institute of Standards - and Technology SHA1 secure hash algorithm described in FIPS PUB - 180-1. If no files are given, the standard input is summed.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sum.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/md5sum.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/sha1sum.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cmp(1), wc(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tail.html b/man/man1/tail.html deleted file mode 100644 index 781f3333..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tail.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ - -tail(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TAIL(1)TAIL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tail – deliver the last part of a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tail [ +−number[lbc][rf] ] [ file ] -
- - tail [ −fr ] [ −n nlines ] [ −c nbytes ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tail copies the named file to the standard output beginning at - a designated place. If no file is named, the standard input is - copied. -
- - Copying begins at position +number measured from the beginning, - or −number from the end of the input. Number is counted in lines, - 1K blocks or bytes, according to the appended flag l, b, or c. - Default is −10l (ten ell). -
- - The further flag r causes tail to print lines from the end of - the file in reverse order; f (follow) causes tail, after printing - to the end, to keep watch and print further data as it appears. - -
- - The second syntax is that promulgated by POSIX, where the numbers - rather than the options are signed.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - tail file
- -
- - Print the last 10 lines of a file.
- -
- tail +0f file
- -
- - Print a file, and continue to watch data accumulate as it grows.
- -
- sed 10q file
- -
- - Print the first 10 lines of a file.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/tail.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Tails relative to the end of the file are treasured up in a buffer, - and thus are limited in length. -
- - According to custom, option +number counts lines from 1, and counts - blocks and bytes from 0. -
- - Tail is ignorant of UTF.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tbl.html b/man/man1/tbl.html deleted file mode 100644 index a50e8939..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tbl.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,187 +0,0 @@ - -tbl(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TBL(1)TBL(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tbl – format tables for nroff or troff
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tbl [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tbl is a preprocessor for formatting tables for nroff or troff(1). - The input files are copied to the standard output, except for - segments of the form
- -
- - .TS
- options ;
- format .
- data
- .T&
- format .
- data
- . . .
- .TE
- -
- - -
- which describe tables and are replaced by troff requests to lay - out the tables. If no arguments are given, tbl reads the standard - input. -
- - The (optional) options line is terminated by a semicolon and contains - one or more of
- -
- - center        center the table; default is left-adjust
- expand        make table as wide as current line length
- box
- doublebox     enclose the table in a box or double box
- allbox        enclose every item in a box
- tab(x)        use x to separate input items; default is tab
- linesize(n)   set rules in n-point type
- delim(xy)     recognize x and y as eqn(1) delimiters
- -
- - -
- Each line, except the last, of the obligatory format describes - one row of the table. The last line describes all rows until the - next .T&, where the format changes, or the end of the table at - .TE. A format is specified by key letters, one per column, either - upper or lower case:
- -
- - L     Left justify: the default for columns without format keys.
- R     Right justify.
- C     Center.
- N     Numeric: align at decimal point (inferred for integers) or at - \&.
- S     Span: extend previous column across this one.
- A     Alphabetic: left-aligned within column, widest item centered, - indented relative to L rows.
- ^     Vertical span: continue item from previous row into this row.
- −     Draw a horizontal rule in this column.
- =     Draw a double horizontal rule in this column.
- -
- - -
- Key letters may be followed by modifiers, also either case:
- -
- - |      Draw vertical rule between columns.
- ||     Draw a double vertical rule between columns.
- n      Gap between column is n ens wide. Default is 3.
- Ffont   Use specified font. B and I mean FB and FI.
- T      Begin vertically-spanned item at top row of range; default is - vertical centering (with ^).
- Pn     Use point size n.
- Vn     Use n-point vertical spacing in text block; signed n means relative - change.
- W(n)   Column width as a troff width specification. Parens are optional - if n is a simple integer.
- E      Equalize the widths of all columns marked E.
- -
- - -
- Each line of data becomes one row of the table; tabs separate - items. Lines beginning with . are troff requests. Certain special - data items are recognized:
- -
- - _     Draw a horizontal rule in this column.
- =     Draw a double horizontal rule in this column. A data line consisting - of a single _ or = draws the rule across the whole table.
- \_    Draw a rule only as wide as the contents of the column.
- \Rx   Repeat character x across the column.
- \^    Span the previous item in this column down into this row.
- T{    The item is a text block to be separately formatted by troff - and placed in the table. The block continues to the next line - beginning with T}. The remainder of the data line follows at that - point.
- -
- - -
- When it is used in a pipeline with eqn, the tbl command should - be first, to minimize the volume of data passed through pipes.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Let <tab> represent a tab (which should be typed as a genuine tab).
- .TS
- c s s
- c c s
- c c c
- l n n.
- Household Population
- Town<tab>Households
- <tab>Number<tab>Size
- -
-Bedminster<tab>789<tab>3.26
-Bernards Twp.<tab>3087<tab>3.74
-Bernardsville<tab>2018<tab>3.30
-.TE
-
-
-
-c s s
-c c s
-c c c
-l n n.
-Household Population
-Town Households
-Number      Size
-Bedminster    789    3.26
-Bernards Twp. 3087    3.74
-Bernardsville 2018    3.30
-

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tcs.html b/man/man1/tcs.html deleted file mode 100644 index 50919607..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tcs.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,131 +0,0 @@ - -tcs(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TCS(1)TCS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tcs – translate character sets
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tcs [ −slcv ] [ −f ics ] [ −t ocs ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tcs interprets the named file(s) (standard input default) as a - stream of characters from the ics character set or format, converts - them to runes, and then converts them into a stream of characters - from the ocs character set or format on the standard output. The - default value for ics and ocs is utf, the UTF encoding - described in utf(7). The −l option lists the character sets known - to tcs. Processing continues in the face of conversion errors - (the −s option prevents reporting of these errors). The −c option - forces the output to contain only correctly converted characters; - otherwise, 0x80 characters will be substituted for UTF - encoding errors and 0xFFFD characters will substituted for unknown - characters. -
- - The −v option generates various diagnostic and summary information - on standard error, or makes the −l output more verbose. -
- - Tcs recognizes an ever changing list of character sets. In particular, - it supports a variety of Russian and Japanese encodings. Some - of the supported encodings are
- utf         The Plan 9 UTF encoding, known by ISO as UTF-8
- utf1        The deprecated original UTF encoding from ISO 10646
- ascii       7-bit ASCII
- 8859−1      Latin-1 (Central European)
- 8859−2      Latin-2 (Czech .. Slovak)
- 8859−3      Latin-3 (Dutch .. Turkish)
- 8859−4      Latin-4 (Scandinavian)
- 8859−5      Part 5 (Cyrillic)
- 8859−6      Part 6 (Arabic)
- 8859−7      Part 7 (Greek)
- 8859−8      Part 8 (Hebrew)
- 8859−9      Latin-5 (Finnish .. Portuguese)
- koi8        KOI-8 (GOST 19769-74)
- jis−kanji   ISO 2022-JP
- ujis        EUC-JX: JIS 0208
- ms−kanji    Microsoft, or Shift-JIS
- jis         (from only) guesses between ISO 2022-JP, EUC or Shift-Jis
- gb          Chinese national standard (GB2312-80)
- big5        Big 5 (HKU version)
- unicode     Unicode Standard 1.0
- tis         Thai character set plus ASCII (TIS 620-1986)
- msdos       IBM PC: CP 437
- atari       Atari-ST character set
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - tcs −f 8859−1
- -
- - Convert 8859-1 (Latin-1) characters into UTF format.
- -
- tcs −s −f jis
- -
- - Convert characters encoded in one of several shift JIS encodings - into UTF format. Unknown Kanji will be converted into 0xFFFD characters.
- -
- tcs −lv
- -
- - Print an up to date list of the supported character sets.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/tcs
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ascii(1), rune(3), utf(7).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tee.html b/man/man1/tee.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2ece532f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tee.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,56 +0,0 @@ - -tee(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TEE(1)TEE(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tee – pipe fitting
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tee [ −i ] [ −a ] files
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tee transcribes the standard input to the standard output and - makes copies in the files. The options are
- −i    Ignore interrupts.
- −a    Append the output to the files rather than rewriting them.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/tee.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/test.html b/man/man1/test.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0f3fa85d..00000000 --- a/man/man1/test.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,156 +0,0 @@ - -test(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TEST(1)TEST(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - test – set status according to condition
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - test expr
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Test evaluates the expression expr. If the value is true the exit - status is null; otherwise the exit status is non-null. If there - are no arguments the exit status is non-null. -
- - The following primitives are used to construct expr.
- −r file      True if the file exists (is accessible) and is readable.
- −w file      True if the file exists and is writable.
- −x file      True if the file exists and has execute permission.
- −e file      True if the file exists.
- −f file      True if the file exists and is a plain file.
- −d file      True if the file exists and is a directory.
- −s file      True if the file exists and has a size greater than zero.
- −t fildes     True if the open file whose file descriptor number is - fildes (1 by default) is the same file as /dev/cons.
- −A file      True if the file exists and is append-only.
- −L file      True if the file exists and is exclusive-use.
- −Tfile      True if the file exists and is temporary.
- s1 = s2     True if the strings s1 and s2 are identical.
- s1 != s2    True if the strings s1 and s2 are not identical.
- s1         True if s1 is not the null string. (Deprecated.)
- −n s1       True if the length of string s1 is non-zero.
- −z s1       True if the length of string s1 is zero.
- n1 −eq n2True if the integers n1 and n2 are arithmetically equal. - Any of the comparisons −ne, −gt, −ge, −lt, or −le may be used - in place of −eq. The (nonstandard) construct −l string, meaning - the length of string, may be used in place of an integer.
- a −nt b    True if file a is newer than (modified after) file b.
- a −ot b    True if file a is older than (modified before) file b.
- f −older tTrue if file f is older than (modified before) time - t. If t is a integer followed by the letters y(years), M(months), - d(days), h(hours), m(minutes), or s(seconds), it represents current - time minus the specified time. If there is no letter, it represents - seconds since epoch. You can also concatenate mixed units. - -
- - -
- - For example, 3d12h means three days and twelve hours ago. -
- - -
- -
- These primaries may be combined with the following operators:
- !         unary negation operator
- −o        binary or operator
- −a        binary and operator; higher precedence than −o
- ( expr )   parentheses for grouping. -
- - The primitives −b, −u, −g, and −s return false; they are recognized - for compatibility with POSIX. -
- - Notice that all the operators and flags are separate arguments - to test. Notice also that parentheses and equal signs are meaningful - to rc and must be enclosed in quotes.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Test is a dubious way to check for specific character strings: - it uses a process to do what an rc(1) match or switch statement - can do. The first example is not only inefficient but wrong, because - test understands the purported string "−c" as an option.
- -
- - if (test $1 '=' "−c") echo OK # wrong!
- -
- - -
- A better way is
- -
- - if (~ $1 −c) echo OK
- -
- - -
- Test whether abc is in the current directory.
- -
- - test −f abc −o −d abc
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/test.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rc(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/time.html b/man/man1/time.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4646754f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/time.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,63 +0,0 @@ - -time(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TIME(1)TIME(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - time – time a command
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - time command [ arg ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The command is executed with the given arguments; after it is - complete, time reports on standard error the program’s elapsed - user time, system time, and real time, in seconds, followed by - the command line.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/time.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - prof(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/touch.html b/man/man1/touch.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6e2f7f91..00000000 --- a/man/man1/touch.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ - -touch(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TOUCH(1)TOUCH(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - touch – set modification date of a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - touch [ −c ] [ −t time ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Touch attempts to set the modification time of the files to time - (by default, the current time). If a file does not exist, it will - be created unless option −c is present.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/touch.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ls(1), stat(3), chmod(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Touch will not touch directories.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tr.html b/man/man1/tr.html deleted file mode 100644 index dc827b3f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tr.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ - -tr(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TR(1)TR(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tr – translate characters
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tr [ −cds ] [ string1 [ string2 ] ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tr copies the standard input to the standard output with substitution - or deletion of selected characters (runes). Input characters found - in string1 are mapped into the corresponding characters of string2. - When string2 is short it is padded to the length of string1 by - duplicating its last character. Any combination of the - options −cds may be used:
- −c    Complement string1: replace it with a lexicographically ordered - list of all other characters.
- −d    Delete from input all characters in string1.
- −s    Squeeze repeated output characters that occur in string2 to - single characters. -
- - In either string a noninitial sequence −x, where x is any character - (possibly quoted), stands for a range of characters: a possibly - empty sequence of codes running from the successor of the previous - code up through the code for x. The character \ followed by 1, - 2 or 3 octal digits stands for the character whose 16-bit - value is given by those digits. The character sequence \x followed - by 1, 2, 3, or 4 hexadecimal digits stands for the character whose - 16-bit value is given by those digits. A \ followed by any other - character stands for that character.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Replace all upper-case ASCII letters by lower-case.
- -
- - tr A−Z a−z <mixed >lower
- -
- - -
- Create a list of all the words in file1 one per line in file2, - where a word is taken to be a maximal string of alphabetics. String2 - is given as a quoted newline.
- -
- - tr −cs A−Za−z '
- ' <file1 >file2
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/tr.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sed(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tr2post.html b/man/man1/tr2post.html deleted file mode 100644 index 808c329b..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tr2post.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,152 +0,0 @@ - -tr2post(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TR2POST(1)TR2POST(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tr2post – convert troff intermediate to PostScript
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tr2post [ options ] [ files ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tr2post converts files (or standard input), which should be the - device-independent output of troff(1), into the PostScript printer - language. -
- - The options are:
- −a aspectratio
- -
- - Set an aspect ratio (y/x) to stretch the PostScript output (default - 1.0).
- -
- −c copies
- -
- - Set a comment in the PostScript output marking the number of copies - that should be printed. The comment is intended for ancient versions - of the Unix lp(1) and is not recognized by any current printer - or print spooler.
- -
- −d    Emit volumes of debugging output on standard error.
- −m magnification
- -
- - Magnify the PostScript output (default 1.0).
- -
- −n formsperpage
- -
- - Print the PostScript with formsperpage logical pages per physical - page (default 1). Using this option emits PostScript with invalid - document structuring comments. It will print fine but will not - view correctly in gv(1) or psv (see page(1)).
- -
- −o pagelist
- -
- - Print only the pages in the pagelist, which is a comma-separated - list of ranges. Each range is of the form p (just page p), p−q - (pages p through q), −p (pages 1 through p), or p− (pages p through - the end of the document).
- -
- −p l   Print the document in landscape mode. An argument that does - not begin with l will print the document in portrait mode.
- −x xoffset
- -
- - Translate the page output by xoffset inches to the right. (Negative - offsets translate to the left.)
- -
- −y yoffset
- -
- - Translate the page output by yoffset inches down. (Negative offsets - translate up.)
- -
- −P pscode
- -
- - Emit the text pscode at the end of the usual PostScript header.
- -
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - Preview this manual page:
- -
- - troff −man /usr/local/plan9/man/man1/tr2post.1 |
- tr2post |
- psfonts >/tmp/a.ps
- psv /tmp/a.ps
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/postscript/tr2post
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), psfonts(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/troff.html b/man/man1/troff.html deleted file mode 100644 index a3d8477f..00000000 --- a/man/man1/troff.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ - -troff(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TROFF(1)TROFF(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - troff, nroff – text formatting and typesetting
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - troff [ option ... ] [ file ... ] -
- - nroff [ option ... ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Troff formats text in the named files for printing on a typesetter. - Nroff does the same, but produces output suitable for typewriter-like - devices. -
- - If no file argument is present, the standard input is read. An - argument consisting of a single minus (−) is taken to be a file - name corresponding to the standard input. The options are:
- −olist   Print pages in the comma-separated list of numbers and ranges. - A range N−M means N through M; initial −M means up to M; final - N− means from N to the end.
- −nN     Number first generated page N.
- −mnameProcess the macro file /sys/lib/tmac/tmac.name before the - input files.
- −raN    Set register a (one character name) to N.
- −i      Read standard input after the input files are exhausted.
- −q      Invoke the simultaneous input-output mode of the rd request.
- −N      Produce output suitable for typewriter-like devices.
-

Typesetter devices (not −N) only
- −a      Send a printable textual approximation of the results to the - standard output.
- −Tdest   Prepare output for typesetter dest:
- -
- - -
- - −Tutf     (The default.) PostScript printers with preprocessing to - handle Unicode characters encoded in UTF
- −Tpost    Regular PostScript printers
- −T202     Mergenthaler Linotron 202
- -
- -
- −Fdir   Take font information from directory dir.
-

Typewriter (−N) output only
- −sN     Halt prior to every N pages (default N=1) to allow paper loading - or changing.
- −TnamePrepare output for specified terminal. Known names include - utf for the normal Plan 9 UTF encoding of the Unicode Standard - character set (default), 37 for the Teletype model 37, lp (‘line-printer’) - for any terminal without half-line capability, 450 for the DASI-450 - (Diablo Hyterm), and think (HP ThinkJet). - −e      Produce equally-spaced words in adjusted lines, using full terminal - resolution.
- −h      Use output tabs during horizontal spacing to speed output and - reduce output character count. Tab settings are assumed to be - every 8 nominal character widths.
- -

-

FILES
- -
- - /tmp/trtmp*                   temporary file
- /usr/local/plan9/tmac/tmac.*    standard macro files
- /usr/local/plan9/troff/term/*   terminal driving tables for nroff
- /usr/local/plan9/troff/font/*   font width tables for troff
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/troff
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - lpr(1), proof(1), tr2post(1), eqn(1), tbl(1), pic(1), grap(1), - doctype(1), ms(7), image(7), tex(1), deroff(1)
- J. F. Ossanna and B. W. Kernighan, “Troff User’s Manual”
- B. W. Kernighan, “A TROFF Tutorial”, Unix Research System Programmer’s - Manual, Tenth Edition, Volume 2.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/troff2html.1 b/man/man1/troff2html.1 index 01bd0681..a40e22f0 100644 --- a/man/man1/troff2html.1 +++ b/man/man1/troff2html.1 @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ which converts .IR man (1) pages into HTML and depends on a specially annotated set of -.IR man (6) +.IR man (7) macros, invoked by .B troff .BR -manhtml . @@ -63,7 +63,8 @@ pointing to .PP .I Troff2html is new and experimental; in time, it may improve and subsume -.IR ms2html (1). +Plan 9's +\fIms2html\fR(1). On the one hand, because it uses the input, .B ms2html can handle @@ -74,7 +75,7 @@ etc., which does not handle at all; on the other hand, .B ms2html understands only -.IR ms (6) +.IR ms (7) documents and is easily confused by complex .B troff constructions. @@ -83,10 +84,12 @@ has the reverse properties: it does not handle the preprocessors but its output is reliable and (modulo helper annotations) is independent of macro package. .SH SEE ALSO .IR troff (1), -.IR ms2html (1), -.B man2html +Plan 9's +\fIms2html\fR(1), +.I man2html in -.IR httpd (8). +Plan 9's +\fIhttpd\fR(8). .SH BUGS .B Troff and HTML have different models, and they don't mesh well in all cases. diff --git a/man/man1/troff2html.html b/man/man1/troff2html.html deleted file mode 100644 index 77dff2d7..00000000 --- a/man/man1/troff2html.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ - -troff2html(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TROFF2HTML(1)TROFF2HTML(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - troff2html – convert troff output into HTML
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - troff2html [ −t title ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Troff2html reads the troff(1) output in the named files, default - standard input, and converts them into HTML. -
- - Troff2html does a tolerable job with straight troff output, but - it is helped by annotations, described below. Its main use is - for man2html (see Plan 9’s httpd(8)), which converts man(1) pages - into HTML and depends on a specially annotated set of man(6) macros, - invoked by troff −manhtml. -
- - Troff output lines beginning
- -
- - x X html ...
- -
- - -
- which are introduced by placing \X'html ...' in the input, cause - the rest of the line to be interpolated into the HTML produced. - Several such lines are recognized specially by troff2html. The - most important are the pair
- -
- - x X html manref start cp 1
- x X html manref end cp 1
- -
- - -
- which are used to create HTML hyperlinks around text of the form - cp(1) pointing to /magic/man2html/1/cp. -
- - Troff2html is new and experimental; in time, it may improve and - subsume ms2html(1). On the one hand, because it uses the input, - ms2html can handle pic(1), eqn(1), etc., which troff2html does - not handle at all; on the other hand, ms2html understands only - ms(6) documents and is easily confused by complex - troff constructions. Troff2html has the reverse properties: it - does not handle the preprocessors but its output is reliable and - (modulo helper annotations) is independent of macro package.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), ms2html(1), man2html in httpd(8).
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Troff and HTML have different models, and they don’t mesh well - in all cases. Troff’s indented paragraphs are not well served - in HTML, and the output of troff2html shows this.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/tweak.html b/man/man1/tweak.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9d63dcd4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/tweak.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,194 +0,0 @@ - -tweak(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TWEAK(1)TWEAK(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - tweak – edit image files, subfont files, face files, etc.
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - tweak [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Tweak edits existing files holding various forms of images. To - create original images, start from an existing image, subfont, - etc. -
- - Tweak reads its argument files and displays the resulting images - in a vertical column. If the image is too wide to fit across the - display, it is folded much like a long line of text in an rio - window. Under each image is displayed one or two lines of text - presenting its parameters. The first line shows the image’s depth, - the number of bits per pixel; r, the rectangle covered by the - image; and the name of the file from which it was read. If the - file is a subfont, a second line presents a hexadecimal 16-bit - offset to be applied to character values from the subfont (typically - as stored in a font file; see font(7)); and the subfont’s n, - height, and ascent as defined in cachechars(3). -
- - By means described below, magnified views of portions of the images - may be displayed. The text associated with such a view includes - mag, the magnification. If the view is of a single character from - a subfont, the second line of text shows the character’s value - (including the subfont’s offset) in hexadecimal and as a - character in tweak’s default font; the character’s x, top, bottom, - left, and width as defined in cachechars(3); and iwidth, the physical - width of the image in the subfont’s image. -
- - There are two methods to obtain a magnified view of a character - from a subfont. The first is to click mouse button 1 over the - image of the character in the subfont. The second is to select - the char entry on the button 3 menu, point the resulting gunsight - cursor at the desired subfont and click button 3, and then type - at the text prompt at the bottom of the screen the character value, - either as a multi-digit hexadecimal number or as a single rune - representing the character. -
- - To magnify a portion of other types of image files, click button - 1 over the unmagnified file. The cursor will switch to a cross. - Still with button 1, sweep a rectangle, as in rio, that encloses - the portion of the image to be magnified. (If the file is 16x16 - or smaller, tweak will just magnify the entire file; no sweeping - is - necessary.) -
- - Pressing buttons 1 and 2 within magnified images changes pixel - values. By default, button 1 sets the pixel to all zeros and button - 2 sets the pixel to all ones. -
- - Across the top of the screen is a textual display of global parameters. - These values, as well as many of the textual values associated - with the images, may be edited by clicking button 1 on the displayed - value and typing a new value. The values along the top of the - screen are:
- mag   Default magnification.
- val(hex)
- -
- - The value used to modify pixels within magnified images. The value - must be in hexadecimal, optionally preceded by a tilde for bitwise - negation.
- -
- but1
- but2The pixel value written when the corresponding button is pressed - over a pixel.
- invert−on−copy
- -
- - Whether the pixel values are inverted when a copy operation is - performed. -
- - -
- Under button 3 is a menu holding a variety of functions. Many - of these functions prompt for the image upon which to act by switching - to a gunsight cursor; click button 3 over the selection, or click - a different button to cancel the action.
- openRead and display a file. The name of the file is typed to - the prompt on the bottom line.
- readReread a file.
- write
- -
- - Write a file.
- -
- copyUse the copy function, default S, to transfer a rectangle - of pixels from one image to another. The program prompts with - a cross cursor; sweep out a rectangle in one image or just click - button 3 to select the whole image. The program will leave that - rectangle in place and attach another one to the cursor. Move - -
- - that rectangle to the desired place in any image and click button - 3, or another button to cancel the action.
- -
- charAs described above, open a magnified view of a character image - in a subfont.
- pixels
- -
- - Report the coordinate and value of individual pixels indicated - by pressing button 3. This is a mode of operation canceled by - pressing button 1 or 2.
- -
- close
- -
- - Close the specified image. If the image is the unmagnified file, - also close any magnified views of that file.
- -
- exitQuit tweak. The program will complain once about modified - but unwritten files.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/draw/tweak.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cachechars(3), image(7), font(7)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - For a program written to adjust width tables in fonts, tweak has - been pushed unreasonably far.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/uniq.html b/man/man1/uniq.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7f0e4377..00000000 --- a/man/man1/uniq.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ - -uniq(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
UNIQ(1)UNIQ(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - uniq – report repeated lines in a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - uniq [ −udc [ +−num ] ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Uniq copies the input file, or the standard input, to the standard - output, comparing adjacent lines. In the normal case, the second - and succeeding copies of repeated lines are removed. Repeated - lines must be adjacent in order to be found.
- −u    Print unique lines.
- −d    Print (one copy of) duplicated lines.
- −c    Prefix a repetition count and a tab to each output line. Implies - −u and −d.
- −numThe first num fields together with any blanks before each - are ignored. A field is defined as a string of non-space, non-tab - characters separated by tabs and spaces from its neighbors.
- +numThe first num characters are ignored. Fields are skipped before - characters.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/uniq.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - sort(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Field selection and comparison should be compatible with sort(1).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/units.html b/man/man1/units.html deleted file mode 100644 index fed0c287..00000000 --- a/man/man1/units.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,156 +0,0 @@ - -units(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
UNITS(1)UNITS(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - units – conversion program
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - units [ −v ] [ file ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Units converts quantities expressed in various standard scales - to their equivalents in other scales. It works interactively in - this fashion:
- -
- - you have: inch
- you want: cm
- -
- - * 2.54
- / 0.393701
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- A quantity is specified as a multiplicative combination of units - and floating point numbers. Operators have the following precedence:
- -
- - + −             add and subtract
- * / x ÷           multiply and divide
- catenation         multiply
- ² ³ ^            exponentiation
- |               divide
- ( ... )            grouping
- -
- - -
- Most familiar units, abbreviations, and metric prefixes are recognized, - together with a generous leavening of exotica and a few constants - of nature including:
- -
- - pi,π      ratio of circumference to diameter
- c         speed of light
- e         charge on an electron
- g         acceleration of gravity
- force     same as g
- mole      Avogadro’s number
- water     pressure head per unit height of water
- au        astronomical unit
- -
- - -
- The pound is a unit of mass. Compound names are run together, - e.g. lightyear. British units that differ from their US counterparts - are prefixed thus: brgallon. Currency is denoted belgiumfranc, - britainpound, etc. -
- - The complete list of units can be found in /usr/local/plan9/lib/units. - A file argument to units specifies a file to be used instead of - /usr/local/plan9/lib/units. The −v flag causes units to print - its entire database.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - you have: 15 pounds force/in²
- you want: atm
- -
- - * 1.02069
- / .97973
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/lib/units
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/units.y
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Since units does only multiplicative scale changes, it can convert - Kelvin to Rankine but not Centigrade to Fahrenheit. -
- - Currency conversions are only as accurate as the last time someone - updated the database.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/vac.html b/man/man1/vac.html deleted file mode 100644 index 71f121ff..00000000 --- a/man/man1/vac.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,160 +0,0 @@ - -vac(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
VAC(1)VAC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - vac – create a vac archive on Venti
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - vac [ −mqsv ] [ −b blocksize ] [ −d oldvacfile ] [ −e exclude - ] [ −f vacfile ] [ −i name ] [ −h host ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Vac creates an archival copy of Plan 9 file trees on Venti. It - can be used to build a simple backup system. One of the unusual - properties of Venti is that duplicate blocks are detected and - coalesced. When vac is used on a file tree that shares data with - an existing archive, the consumption of storage will be approximately - equal to an incremental backup. This reduction in storage consumption - occurs transparently to the user. -
- - As an optimization, the −d and −q options, described below, can - be used to explicitly create an archive relative to an existing - archive. These options do not change the resulting archive generated - by vac, but simply reduce the number of write operations to Venti. - -
- - The output of vac is the hexadecimal representation of the Sha1 - fingerprint of the root of the archive, in this format:
- -
- - vac:64daefaecc4df4b5cb48a368b361ef56012a4f46
- -
- - -
- Option to vac are:
- −b blocksize
- -
- - Specifies the block size that data will be broken into. The units - for the size can be specified by appending k to indicate kilobytes. - The default is 8k. The size must be in the range of 512 bytes - to 52k.
- -
- −d oldvacfile
- -
- - Reduce the number of blocks written to Venti by comparing the - files to be stored with the contents of an existing vac file tree - given by oldvacfile.
- -
- −e exclude
- -
- - Do not include the file or directory specified by exclude. This - option may be repeated multiple times.
- -
- −f vacfile
- -
- - The results of vac are place in vacfile, or the standard output - if no file is given.
- -
- −i name
- -
- - Include standard input as one of the input files, storing it in - the archive with the specified name.
- -
- −h host
- -
- - The network address of the Venti server. The default is taken - from the environment variable venti.
- -
- −m    Expand and merge any vac archives that are found while reading - the input files. This option is useful for building an archive - from a collection of existing archives. Each archive is inserted - into the new archive as if it had been unpacked in the directory - in which it was found. Multiple archives can be unpacked in - -
- - a single directory and the contents will be merged. To be detected, - the archives must end in .vac. Note, an archive is inserted by - simply copying the root fingerprint and does not require the archive - to be unpacked.
- -
- −q    Increase the performance of the −d option by detecting unchanged - files based on a match of the files name and other meta data, - rather than examining the contents of the files.
- −s    Print out various statistics on standard error.
- −v    Produce more verbose output on standard error, including the - name of the files added to the archive and the vac archives that - are expanded and merged.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/vac
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - Plan 9’s vacfs(4) and venti(8)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/wc.html b/man/man1/wc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 677c2937..00000000 --- a/man/man1/wc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ - -wc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
WC(1)WC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - wc – word count
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - wc [ −lwrbc ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Wc counts lines, words, runes, syntactically-invalid UTF codes - and bytes in the named files, or in the standard input if no file - is named. A word is a maximal string of characters delimited by - spaces, tabs or newlines. The count of runes includes invalid - codes. -
- - If the optional argument is present, just the specified counts - (lines, words, runes, broken UTF codes or bytes) are selected - by the letters l, w, r, b, or c. Otherwise, lines, words and bytes - (−lwc) are reported.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/wc.c
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The Unicode Standard has many blank characters scattered through - it, but wc looks for only ASCII space, tab and newline. -
- - Wc should have options to count suboptimal UTF codes and bytes - that cannot occur in any UTF code.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/web.html b/man/man1/web.html deleted file mode 100644 index cb0ad0b4..00000000 --- a/man/man1/web.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,115 +0,0 @@ - -web(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
WEB(1)WEB(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - web, wmail – handle web page, mail message for plumber
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - web url ...
- wmail address
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Web opens each of the named urls in a new web browser window. - Any of the urls may be relative paths to files in the file system; - they will be translated into file:// URLs before being passed - to the web browser. -
- - Web uses the web browser’s −remote option command-line option, - which requires an instance of the web browser to be already running. - The choice of browser is determined by the $BROWSER environment - variable, which should be the name of the executable for your - choice of web browser. The default is - firefox. Since the various browsers all use different syntaxes - in their −remote options, the executable name is inspected to - determine the type of browser. The supported browsers are Opera, - Mozilla Firefox, Mozilla Firebird, and Mozilla. When possible, - web opens each URL in a new tab rather than a new window. - -
- - When run under Mac OS X, $BROWSER should be set to the string - safari or firefox. Web uses AppleScript to talk to the browser. - If $BROWSER is not set, web looks for Firefox in /Applications/Firefox.app - and uses it if found; otherwise it uses Safari. -
- - Wmail starts the composition of a new mail message to address. - -
- - The choice of mailer is determined by the $MAILER environment - variable. The supported mailers are:
- browser
- -
- - invoke the mailer via a mailto:// URL passed to web -
- - -
- Web and wmail are invoked as start commands in the plumber(4)’s - rules for opening web pages and writing mail messages.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/plumb/basic
- -
- - plumbing rules using web and wmail
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - plumber(4)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/wintext.html b/man/man1/wintext.html deleted file mode 100644 index d4de3349..00000000 --- a/man/man1/wintext.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,124 +0,0 @@ - -wintext(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
WINTEXT(1)WINTEXT(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - wintext, ", "" – access text in current window
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - wintext
- ?? [ prefix ]
- ???? [ prefix ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Wintext prints the text of the current win (see acme(1)) or 9term(1) - window to standard output. -
- - ?? searches the window text for commands typed with a particular - prefix and prints them, indented, to standard output. Prefix is - a regular expression that is matched against the beginning of - the command-line. If prefix is omitted, ?? prints the last command - executed. ???? prints the last command that ?? would print and - then executes it by piping it into rc(1). -
- - Both ?? and ???? identify commands in the window text by looking for - lines beginning with a shell prompt. Prompts are assumed to be - an unindented sequence of non-whitespace characters followed by - one of the characters %, ;, $, or #.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Print the ls(1) and lc commands executed in this window:
- -
- - % ?? 'l[sc]'
- -
- - % ls −l /tmp/qq*
- # ls −lrt /etc
- % lc r*
- -
- %
- -
- - -
- Execute the most recent lc command again:
- -
- - % ???? lc
- -
- - % lc r*
- -
- ramfs     rc        read      rio       rm
- %
- -
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9term(1), acme(1)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/bin
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - ?? and ???? are hard to type in shells other than rc(1).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/xd.html b/man/man1/xd.html deleted file mode 100644 index 86e6152e..00000000 --- a/man/man1/xd.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ - -xd(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
XD(1)XD(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - xd – hex, octal, decimal, or ASCII dump
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - xd [ option ... ] [ −format ... ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Xd concatenates and dumps the files (standard input by default) - in one or more formats. Groups of 16 bytes are printed in each - of the named formats, one format per line. Each line of output - is prefixed by its address (byte offset) in the input file. The - first line of output for each group is zero-padded; subsequent - are - blank-padded. -
- - Formats other than −c are specified by pairs of characters telling - size and style, 4x by default. The sizes are
- 1 or b   1-byte units.
- 2 or w   2-byte big-endian units.
- 4 or l   4-byte big-endian units.
- 8 or v   8-byte big-endian units. -
- - The styles are
- o     Octal.
- x     Hexadecimal.
- d     Decimal. -
- - Other options are
- −c      Format as 1x but print ASCII representations or C escape sequences - where possible.
- −astyle   Print file addresses in the given style (and size 4).
- −u      (Unbuffered) Flush the output buffer after each 16-byte sequence.
- −s      Reverse (swab) the order of bytes in each group of 4 before - printing.
- −r      Print repeating groups of identical 16-byte sequences as the - first group followed by an asterisk.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/xd.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - db(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The various output formats don’t line up properly in the output - of xd.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man1/yacc.html b/man/man1/yacc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1a485ce6..00000000 --- a/man/man1/yacc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,170 +0,0 @@ - -yacc(1) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
YACC(1)YACC(1) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - yacc – yet another compiler-compiler
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - yacc [ option ... ] grammar
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Yacc converts a context-free grammar and translation code into - a set of tables for an LR(1) parser and translator. The grammar - may be ambiguous; specified precedence rules are used to break - ambiguities. -
- - The output file, y.tab.c, must be compiled by the C compiler to - produce a program yyparse. This program must be loaded with a - lexical analyzer function, yylex(void) (often generated by lex(1)), - with a main(int    argc,    char    *argv[]) program, and with an error - handling routine, - yyerror(char*). -
- - The options are
- −o output   Direct output to the specified file instead of y.tab.c.
- −Dn       Create file y.debug, containing diagnostic messages. To incorporate - them in the parser, compile it with preprocessor symbol yydebug - defined. The amount of diagnostic output from the parser is regulated - by value n. The value 0 reports errors; 1 reports reductions; - higher values (up to 4) include - -
- - -
- - more information about state transitions.
- -
- -
- −v        Create file y.output, containing a description of the parsing - tables and of conflicts arising from ambiguities in the grammar.
- −d        Create file y.tab.h, containing #define statements that associate - yacc-assigned ‘token codes’ with user-declared ‘token names’. - Include it in source files other than y.tab.c to give access to - the token codes.
- −s stem     Change the prefix y of the file names y.tab.c, y.tab.h, - y.debug, and y.output to stem.
- −S        Write a parser that uses Stdio instead of the print routines - in libc. -
- - The specification of yacc itself is essentially the same as the - UNIX version described in the references mentioned below. Besides - the −D option, the main relevant differences are:
- -
- - The interface to the C environment is by default through <libc.h> - rather than <stdio.h>; the −S option reverses this.
- The parser accepts UTF input text (see utf(7)), which has a couple - of effects. First, the return value of yylex() no longer fits - in a short; second, the starting value for non-terminals is now - 0xE000 rather than 257.
- The generated parser can be recursive: actions can call yyparse, - for example to implement a sort of #include statement in an interpreter.
- Finally, some undocumented inner workings of the parser have been - changed, which may affect programs that know too much about its - structure.
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - y.output
- y.tab.c
- y.tab.h
- y.debug
- y.tmp.*         temporary file
- y.acts.*        temporary file
- /usr/local/plan9/lib/yaccpar
- -
- - -
- - parser prototype
- -
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/lib/yaccpars
- -
- - -
- - parser prototype using stdio
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/yacc.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - lex(1)
- S. C. Johnson and R. Sethi, “Yacc: A parser generator”, Unix Research - System Programmer’s Manual, Tenth Edition, Volume 2
- B. W. Kernighan and Rob Pike, The UNIX Programming Environment, - Prentice Hall, 1984
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The parser may not have full information when it writes to y.debug - so that the names of the tokens returned by yylex may be missing.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/9p-cmdbuf.html b/man/man3/9p-cmdbuf.html deleted file mode 100644 index 122a5857..00000000 --- a/man/man3/9p-cmdbuf.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,128 +0,0 @@ - -9p-cmdbuf(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9P-CMDBUF(3)9P-CMDBUF(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Cmdbuf, parsecmd, respondcmderror, lookupcmd – control message - parsing
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <fcall.h>
- #include <thread.h>
- #include <9p.h>
- -
- - typedef struct Cmdbuf
- {
- -
- - char      *buf;
- char      **f;
- int       nf;
- -
- } Cmdbuf;
- typedef struct Cmdtab
- {
- -
- - int       index;
- char      *cmd;
- int       narg;
- -
- };
- Cmdbuf        *parsecmd(char *p, int n)
- Cmdtab        *lookupcmd(Cmdbuf *cb, Cmdtab *tab, int ntab)
- void          respondcmderror(Req *r, Cmdbuf *cb, char *fmt, ...)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These data structures and functions provide parsing of textual - control messages. -
- - Parsecmd treats the n bytes at p (which need not be NUL-terminated) - as a UTF string and splits it using tokenize (see getfields(3)). - It returns a Cmdbuf structure holding pointers to each field in - the message. -
- - Lookupcmd walks through the array ctab, which has ntab entries, - looking for the first Cmdtab that matches the parsed command. - (If the parsed command is empty, lookupcmd returns nil immediately.) - A Cmdtab matches the command if cmd is equal to cb−>f[0] or if - cmd is *. Once a matching Cmdtab has been - found, if narg is not zero, then the parsed command must have - exactly narg fields (including the command string itself). If - the command has the wrong number of arguments, lookupcmd returns - nil. Otherwise, it returns a pointer to the Cmdtab entry. If lookupcmd - does not find a matching command at all, it returns - nil. Whenever lookupcmd returns nil, it sets the system error - string. -
- - Respondcmderror resoponds to request r with an error of the form - ‘fmt: cmd,’ where fmt is the formatted string and cmd is a reconstruction - of the parsed command. Fmt is often simply %r .
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - This interface is not used in any distributed 9P servers. It was - lifted from the Plan 9 kernel. Almost any Plan 9 kernel driver - (/sys/src/9/*/dev*.c on Plan 9) is a good example.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9p/parse.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9p(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/9p-fid.html b/man/man3/9p-fid.html deleted file mode 100644 index 44bca53c..00000000 --- a/man/man3/9p-fid.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,170 +0,0 @@ - -9p-fid(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9P-FID(3)9P-FID(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Fid, Fidpool, allocfidpool, freefidpool, allocfid, closefid, lookupfid, - removefid, Req, Reqpool, allocreqpool, freereqpool, allocreq, - closereq, lookupreq, removereq – 9P fid, request tracking
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <fcall.h>
- #include <thread.h>
- #include <9p.h>
- -
- - typedef struct Fid
- {
- -
- - ulong fid;
- char    omode;    /* −1 if not open */
- char    *uid;
- Qid     qid;
- File    *file;
- void    *aux;
- -
- -
- - ...
- -
- } Fid;
- -
- - typedef struct Req
- {
- -
- - ulong tag;
- Fcall ifcall;
- Fcall ofcall;
- Req     *oldreq;
- void    *aux;
- -
- -
- - ...
- -
- } Req;
- -
- - Fidpool* allocfidpool(void (*destroy)(Fid*))
- void       freefidpool(Fidpool *p)
- Fid*       allocfid(Fidpool *p, ulong fid)
- Fid*       lookupfid(Fidpool *p, ulong fid)
- void       closefid(Fid *f)
- void       removefid(Fid *f)
- -
- - Reqpool* allocreqpool(void (*destroy)(Req*))
- void       freereqpool(Reqpool *p)
- Req*       allocreq(Reqpool *p, ulong tag)
- Req*       lookupreq(Reqpool *p, ulong tag)
- void       closereq(Req *f)
- void       removereq(Req *r)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines provide management of Fid and Req structures from - Fidpools and Reqpools. They are primarily used by the 9P server - loop described in 9p(3). -
- - Fid structures are intended to represent active fids in a 9P connection, - as Chan structures do in the Plan 9 kernel. The fid element is - the integer fid used in the 9P connection. Omode is the mode under - which the fid was opened, or −1 if this fid has not been opened - yet. Note that in addition to the values OREAD, - OWRITE, and ORDWR, omode can contain the various flags permissible - in an open call. To ignore the flags, use omode&OMASK. Omode should - not be changed by the client. The fid derives from a successful - authentication by uid. Qid contains the qid returned in the last - successful walk or create transaction - involving the fid. In a file tree-based server, the Fid’s file - element points at a File structure (see 9p-file(3)) corresponding - to the fid. The aux member is intended for use by the client to - hold information specific to a particular Fid. With the exception - of aux, these elements should be treated as read-only by - the client. -
- - Allocfidpool creates a new Fidpool. Freefidpool destroys such - a pool. Allocfid returns a new Fid whose fid number is fid. There - must not already be an extant Fid with that number in the pool. - Once a Fid has been allocated, it can be looked up by fid number - using lookupfid. Fids are reference counted: both - allocfid and lookupfid increment the reference count on the Fid - structure before returning. When a reference to a Fid is no longer - needed, closefid should be called to note the destruction of the - reference. When the last reference to a Fid is removed, if destroy - (supplied when creating the fid pool) is not zero, it is - called with the Fid as a parameter. It should perform whatever - cleanup is necessary regarding the aux element. Removefid is equivalent - to closefid but also removes the Fid from the pool. Note that - due to lingering references, the return of removefid may not mean - that destroy has been called. -
- - Allocreqpool, freereqpool, allocreq, lookupreq, closereq, and - removereq are analogous but operate on Reqpools and Req structures.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9p
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9p(3), 9p-file(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/9p-file.html b/man/man3/9p-file.html deleted file mode 100644 index 63ae5042..00000000 --- a/man/man3/9p-file.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,258 +0,0 @@ - -9p-file(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9P-FILE(3)9P-FILE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Tree, alloctree, freetree, File, createfile, closefile, removefile, - walkfile, opendirfile, readdirfile, closedirfile, hasperm – in-memory - file hierarchy
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <fcall.h>
- #include <thread.h>
- #include <9p.h>
- -
- - typedef struct File
- {
- -
- - -
- - Ref;
- Dir;
- void*aux;
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - ...
- -
- -
- } File;
- -
- - typedef struct Tree
- {
- -
- - -
- - File *root;
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - ...
- -
- -
- } Tree;
- -
- - Tree*      alloctree(char *uid, char *gid, ulong mode,
- -
- - -
- - void (*destroy)(File*))
- -
- -
- void       freetree(Tree *tree)
- File*      createfile(File *dir, char *name, char *uid,
- -
- - -
- - ulong mode, void *aux)
- -
- -
- int        removefile(File *file)
- void       closefile(File *file)
- File*      walkfile(File *dir, char *path)
- Readdir* opendirfile(File *dir)
- long       readdirfile(Readdir *rdir, char *buf, long n)
- void       closedirfile(Readdir *rdir)
- int        hasperm(File *file, char *uid, int p)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Files and Trees provide an in-memory file hierarchy intended for - use in 9P file servers. -
- - Alloctree creates a new tree of files, and freetree destroys it. - The root of the tree (also the root element in the structure) - will have mode mode and be owned by user uid and group gid. Destroy - is used when freeing File structures and is described later. -
- - Files (including directories) other than the root are created - using createfile, which attempts to create a file named name in - the directory dir. If created, the file will have owner uid and - have a group inherited from the directory. Mode and the permissions - of dir are used to calculate the permission bits for the file - as - described in open(9p). It is permissible for name to be a slash-separated - path rather than a single element. -
- - Removefile removes a file from the file tree. The file will not - be freed until the last reference to it has been removed. Directories - may only be removed when empty. Removefile returns zero on success, - –1 on error. It is correct to consider removefile to be closefile - with the side effect of removing the file when possible. -
- - Walkfile evaluates path relative to the directory dir, returning - the resulting file, or zero if the named file or any intermediate - element does not exist. -
- - The File structure’s aux pointer may be used by the client for - per-File storage. Files are reference-counted: if not zero, destroy - (specified in the call to alloctree) will be called for each file - when its last reference is removed or when the tree is freed. - Destroy should take care of any necessary cleanup related to - aux. When creating new file references by copying pointers, call - incref (see lock(3)) to update the reference count. To note the - removal of a reference to a file, call closefile. Createfile and - walkfile return new references. Removefile, closefile, and walkfile - (but not createfile) consume the passed reference. -
- - Directories may be read, yielding a directory entry structure - (see stat(9p)) for each file in the directory. In order to allow - concurrent reading of directories, clients must obtain a Readdir - structure by calling opendirfile on a directory. Subsequent calls - to readdirfile will each yield an integral number of machine- - independent stat buffers, until end of directory. When finished, - call closedirfile to free the Readdir. -
- - Hasperm does simplistic permission checking; it assumes only one-user - groups named by uid and returns non-zero if uid has permission - p (a bitwise-or of AREAD, AWRITE and AEXEC) according to file−>mode. - 9P servers written using File trees will do standard permission - checks automatically; hasperm may be - called explicitly to do additional checks. A 9P server may link - against a different hasperm implementation to provide more complex - groups.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - The following code correctly handles references when elementwise - walking a path and creating a file.
- -
- - f = tree−>root;
- incref(f);
- for(i=0; i<n && f!=nil; i++)
- -
- - f = walkfile(f, elem[i]);
- -
- if(f == nil)
- -
- - return nil;
- -
- nf = createfile(f, "foo", "nls", 0666, nil);
- closefile(f);
- return nf;
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9p/file.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9p(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The reference counting is cumbersome.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/9p-intmap.html b/man/man3/9p-intmap.html deleted file mode 100644 index f6d1822f..00000000 --- a/man/man3/9p-intmap.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ - -9p-intmap(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9P-INTMAP(3)9P-INTMAP(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Intmap, allocmap, freemap, insertkey, caninsertkey, lookupkey, - deletekey – integer to data structure maps
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <fcall.h>
- #include <thread.h>
- #include <9p.h>
- -
- - Intmap* allocmap(void (*inc)(void*))
- void      freemap(Intmap *map, void (*dec)(void*))
- void*     lookupkey(Intmap *map, ulong key)
- void*     insertkey(Intmap *map, ulong key, void *val)
- int       caninsertkey(Intmap *map, ulong key, void *val)
- void*     lookupkey(Intmap *map, ulong key)
- void*     deletekey(Intmap *map, ulong key)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - An Intmap is an arbitrary mapping from integers to pointers. Allocmap - creates a new map, and freemap destroys it. The inc function is - called each time a new pointer is added to the map; similarly, - dec is called on each pointer left in the map when it is being - freed. Typically these functions maintain reference counts. - New entries are added to the map by calling insertkey, which will - return the previous value associated with the given key, or zero - if there was no previous value. Caninsertkey is like insertkey - but only inserts val if there is no current mapping. It returns - 1 if val was inserted, 0 otherwise. Lookupkey returns the pointer - associated with key, or zero if there is no such pointer. Deletekey - removes the entry for id from the map, returning the associated - pointer, if any. -
- - Concurrent access to Intmaps is safe, moderated via a QLock stored - in the Intmap structure. -
- - In anticipation of the storage of reference-counted structures, - an increment function inc may be specified at map creation time. - Lookupkey calls inc (if non-zero) on pointers before returning - them. If the reference count adjustments were left to the caller - (and thus not protected by the lock), it would be possible to - accidentally reclaim a structure if, for example, it was deleted - from the map and its reference count decremented between the return - of insertkey and the external increment. Insertkey and caninsertkey - do not call inc when inserting val into the map, nor do insertkey - or deletekey call inc when returning old map entries. - The rationale is that calling an insertion function transfers - responsibility for the reference to the map, and responsibility - is given back via the return value of deletekey or the next insertkey. - -
- - Intmaps are used by the 9P library to implement Fidpools and Reqpools.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9p/intmap.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9p(3), 9p-fid(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/9p.html b/man/man3/9p.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9896b0b7..00000000 --- a/man/man3/9p.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,434 +0,0 @@ - -9p(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9P(3)9P(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Srv, dirread9p, emalloc9p, erealloc9p, estrdup9p, postfd, postmountsrv, - readbuf, readstr, respond, srv, threadpostmountsrv, walkandclone - – 9P file service
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <fcall.h>
- #include <thread.h>
- #include <9p.h>
- -
- - typedef struct Srv {
- -
- - Tree* tree;
- void    (*attach)(Req *r);
- void    (*auth)(Req *r);
- void    (*open)(Req *r);
- void    (*create)(Req *r);
- void    (*read)(Req *r);
- void    (*write)(Req *r);
- void    (*remove)(Req *r);
- void    (*flush)(Req *r);
- void    (*stat)(Req *r);
- void    (*wstat)(Req *r);
- void    (*walk)(Req *r);
- char* (*walk1)(Fid *fid, char *name, Qid *qid);
- char* (*clone)(Fid *oldfid, Fid *newfid);
- void    (*destroyfid)(Fid *fid);
- void    (*destroyreq)(Req *r);
- void    (*end)(Srv *s);
- void* aux;
- int     infd;
- int     outfd;
- int     srvfd;
- int     nopipe;
- -
- } Srv;
- -
- - int     srv(Srv *s)
- void    postmountsrv(Srv *s, char *name, char *mtpt, int flag)
- void    threadpostmountsrv(Srv *s, char *name, char *mtpt, int flag)
- int     postfd(char *srvname, int fd)
- void    respond(Req *r, char *error)
- ulong readstr(Req *r, char *src)
- ulong readbuf(Req *r, void *src, ulong nsrc)
- typedef int Dirgen(int n, Dir *dir, void *aux)
- void    dirread9p(Req *r, Dirgen *gen, void *aux)
- void    walkandclone(Req *r, char *(*walk1)(Fid *old, char *name, - void *v),
- -
- - -
- - char *(*clone)(Fid *old, Fid *new, void *v), void *v)
- -
- - -
- -
- void* emalloc9p(ulong n)
- void* erealloc9p(void *v, ulong n)
- char* estrdup9p(char *s)
- -
- - extern int chatty9p;
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The function srv serves a 9P session by reading requests from - s−>infd, dispatching them to the function pointers kept in Srv, - and writing the responses to s−>outfd. (Typically, postmountsrv - or threadpostmountsrv initializes the infd and outfd structure - members. See the description below.) -
- - Req and Fid structures are allocated one-to-one with uncompleted - requests and active fids, and are described in 9p-fid(3). -
- - The behavior of srv depends on whether there is a file tree (see - 9p-file(3)) associated with the server, that is, whether the tree - element is nonzero. The differences are made explicit in the discussion - of the service loop below. The aux element is the client’s, to - do with as it pleases. -
- - Srv does not return until the 9P conversation is finished. Since - it is usually run in a separate process so that the caller can - exit, the service loop has little chance to return gracefully - on out of memory errors. It calls emalloc9p, erealloc9p, and estrdup9p - to obtain its memory. The default implementations of these - functions act as malloc, realloc, and strdup but abort the program - if they run out of memory. If alternate behavior is desired, clients - can link against alternate implementations of these functions. - -
- - Postmountsrv and threadpostmountsrv are wrappers that create a - separate process in which to run srv. They do the following:
- -
- - If s−>nopipe is zero (the common case), initialize s−>infd and s−>outfd - to be one end of a freshly allocated pipe, with s−>srvfd initialized - as the other end.
- If name is non-nil, call postfd(s−>srvfd, name) to post s−>srvfd - as /srv/name.
- Fork a child process via rfork(3) or procrfork (see thread(3)), - using the RFFDG, RFNAMEG, and RFMEM flags. The child process calls - close(s->srvfd) and then srv(s); it will exit once srv returns.
- If mtpt is non-nil, call amount(s−>srvfd, mtpt, flag, ""); otherwise, - close s−>srvfd.
- The parent returns to the caller. -
- - -
- If any error occurs during this process, the entire process is - terminated by calling sysfatal(3).
-

Service functions
- The functions in a Srv structure named after 9P transactions are - called to satisfy requests as they arrive. If a function is provided, - it must arrange for respond to be called when the request is satisfied. - The only parameter of each service function is a Req* parameter - (say r). The incoming request parameters are - stored in r−>ifcall; r−>fid and r−>newfid are pointers to Fid structures - corresponding to the numeric fids in r−>ifcall; similarly, r−>oldreq - is the Req structure corresponding to r−>ifcall.oldtag. The outgoing - response data should be stored in r−>ofcall. The one exception - to this rule is that stat should fill in - r−>d rather than r−>ofcall.stat: the library will convert the structure - into the machine-independent wire representation. Similarly, wstat - may consult r−>d rather than decoding r−>ifcall.stat itself. When - a request has been handled, respond should be called with r and - an error string. If the request was satisfied - successfully, the error string should be a nil pointer. Note that - it is permissible for a function to return without itself calling - respond, as long as it has arranged for respond to be called at - some point in the future by another proc sharing its address space, - but see the discussion of flush below. Once respond has been - called, the Req* as well as any pointers it once contained must - be considered freed and not referenced. -
- - If the service loop detects an error in a request (e.g., an attempt - to reuse an extant fid, an open of an already open fid, a read - from a fid opened for write, etc.) it will reply with an error - without consulting the service functions. -
- - The service loop provided by srv (and indirectly by postmountsrv - and threadpostmountsrv) is single-threaded. If it is expected - that some requests might block, arranging for alternate processes - to handle them is suggested. -
- - The constraints on the service functions are as follows. These - constraints are checked while the server executes. If a service - function fails to do something it ought to have, srv will call - endsrv and then abort.
- Auth   If authentication is desired, the auth function should record - that afid is the new authentication fid and set afid->qid and ofcall.qid. - Auth may be nil, in which case it will be treated as having responded - with the error “argv0: authentication not required,” where argv0 - is the program name variable as set by - -
- - ARGBEGIN (see arg(3)).
- -
- AttachThe attach function should check the authentication state - of afid if desired, and set r−>fid−>qid and ofcall.qid to the qid - of the file system root. Attach may be nil only if file trees - are in use; in this case, the qid will be filled from the root - of the tree, and no authentication will be done. - Walk   If file trees are in use, walk is handled internally, and - srv−>walk is never called.
- -
- - If file trees are not in use, walk should consult r−>ifcall.wname - and r−>ifcall.nwname, filling in ofcall.qid and ofcall.nqid, and - also copying any necessary aux state from r−>fid to r−>newfid when - the two are different. As long as walk sets ofcall.nqid appropriately, - it can respond with a nil error string - even when 9P demands an error (e.g., in the case of a short walk); - the library detects error conditions and handles them appropriately.
- Because implementing the full walk message is intricate and prone - to error, the helper routine walkandclone will handle the request - given pointers to two functions walk1 and (optionally) clone . - Clone, if non-nil, is called to signal the creation of newfid - from oldfid. Typically a clone routine will copy or increment - a reference count in oldfid’s aux element. Walk1 should walk fid - to name, initializing fid−>qid to the new path’s qid. Both should - return nil on success or an error message on error. Walkandclone - will call respond after handling the request.
- -
- Walk1, Clone
- -
- - If the client provides functions srv−>walk1 and (optionally) srv−>clone, - the 9P service loop will call walkandclone with these functions - to handle the request. Unlike the walk1 above, srv−>walk1 must - fill in both fid−>qid and *qid with the new qid on a successful - walk.
- -
- Open   If file trees are in use, the file metadata will be consulted - on open, create, remove, and wstat to see if the requester has - the appropriate permissions. If not, an error will be sent back - without consulting a service function. -
- - If not using file trees or the user has the appropriate permissions, - open is called with r−>ofcall.qid already initialized to the one - stored in the Fid structure (that is, the one returned in the - previous walk). If the qid changes, both should be updated.
- CreateThe create function must fill in both r−>fid−>qid and r−>ofcall.qid - on success. When using file trees, create should allocate a new - File with createfile; note that createfile may return nil (because, - say, the file already exists). If the create function is nil, - srv behaves as though it were a function that always - -
- - responded with the error “create prohibited”.
- -
- Remove
- -
- - Remove -
- -
- - should mark the file as removed, whether by calling removefile - when using file trees, or by updating an internal data structure. - In general it is not a good idea to clean up the aux information - associated with the corresponding File at this time, to avoid - memory errors if other fids have references to that - file. Instead, it is suggested that remove simply mark the file - as removed (so that further operations on it know to fail) and - wait until the file tree’s destroy function is called to reclaim - the aux pointer. If not using file trees, it is prudent to take - the analogous measures. If remove is not provided, all remove - requests will draw “remove prohibited” errors.
- -
- Read   The read function must be provided; it fills r−>ofcall.data - with at most r−>ifcall.count bytes of data from offset r−>ifcall.offset - of the file. It also sets r−>ofcall.count to the number of bytes - being returned. If using file trees, srv will handle reads of - directories internally, only calling read for requests on - -
- - files. Readstr and readbuf are useful for satisfying read requests - on a string or buffer. Consulting the request in r−>ifcall, they - fill r−>ofcall.data and set r−>ofcall.count; they do not call respond. - Similarly, dirread9p can be used to handle directory reads in - servers not using file trees. The passed gen - function will be called as necessary to fill dir with information - for the nth entry in the directory. The string pointers placed - in dir should be fresh copies made with estrdup9p; they will be - freed by dirread9p after each successful call to gen. Gen should - return zero if it successfully filled dir, minus one on end of - directory.
- -
- WriteThe write function is similar but need not be provided. If - it is not, all writes will draw “write prohibited” errors. Otherwise, - write should attempt to write the r−>ifcall.count bytes of r−>ifcall.data - to offset r−>ifcall.offset of the file, setting r−>ofcall.count - to the number of bytes actually written. Most - -
- - programs consider it an error to write less than the requested - amount.
- -
- Stat   Stat should fill r−>d with the stat information for r−>fid. - If using file trees, r−>d will have been initialized with the stat - info from the tree, and stat itself may be nil.
- WstatThe wstat consults r−>d in changing the metadata for r−>fid - as described in stat(9p). When using file trees, srv will take - care to check that the request satisfies the permissions outlined - in stat(9p). Otherwise wstat should take care to enforce permissions - where appropriate.
- Flush   Single-threaded servers, which always call respond before - returning from the service functions, need not provide a flush - implementation: flush is only necessary in multithreaded programs, - which arrange for respond to be called asynchronously. Flush should - cause the request r−>oldreq to be cancelled or - -
- - hurried along. If oldreq is cancelled, this should be signalled - by calling respond on oldreq with error string ‘interrupted’. - Flush must respond to r with a nil error string. Flush may respond - to r before forcing a response to r−>oldreq. In this case, the - library will delay sending the Rflush message until the - response to r−>oldreq has been sent. -
- - -
- Destroyfid, destroyreq, and end are auxiliary functions, not called - in direct response to 9P requests.
- Destroyfid
- -
- - When a Fid’s reference count drops to zero (i.e., it has been - clunked and there are no outstanding requests referring to it), - destroyfid is called to allow the program to dispose of the fid−>aux - pointer.
- -
- Destroyreq
- -
- - Similarly, when a Req’s reference count drops to zero (i.e., it - has been handled via respond and other outstanding pointers to - it have been closed), destroyreq is called to allow the program - to dispose of the r−>aux pointer.
- -
- End    Once the 9P service loop has finished (end of file been reached - on the service pipe or a bad message has been read), end is called - (if provided) to allow any final cleanup. For example, it was - used by the Palm Pilot synchronization file system (never finished) - to gracefully terminate the serial conversation once the - -
- - file system had been unmounted. After calling end, the service - loop (which runs in a separate process from its caller) terminates - using _exits (see exits(3)). -
- - -
- If the chatty9p flag is at least one, a transcript of the 9P session - is printed on standard error. If the chatty9p flag is greater - than one, additional unspecified debugging output is generated. - By convention, servers written using this library accept the −D - option to increment chatty9p. - -

-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9p/ramfs.c is an example of a simple single-threaded - file server. On Plan 9, see archfs, cdfs, nntpfs, webfs, and sshnet - for more examples. -
- - In general, the File interface is appropriate for maintaining - arbitrary file trees (as in ramfs). The File interface is best - avoided when the tree structure is easily generated as necessary; - this is true when the tree is highly structured (as in cdfs and - nntpfs) or is maintained elsewhere.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9p
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9p-fid(3), 9p-file(3), intro(9p)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/9pclient.html b/man/man3/9pclient.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4ae50c21..00000000 --- a/man/man3/9pclient.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,250 +0,0 @@ - -9pclient(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9PCLIENT(3)9PCLIENT(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - CFid, CFsys, fsinit, fsmount, fsroot, fssetroot, fsunmount, nsmount, - fsversion, fsauth, fsattach, fsclose, fscreate, fsdirread, fsdirreadall, - fsdirstat, fsdirfstat, fsdirwstat, fsdirfwstat, fsopen, fsopenfd, - fspread, fspwrite, fsread, fsreadn, fswrite – 9P client library
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h> -
- - #include <libc.h> -
- - #include <fcall.h> -
- - #include <9pclient.h> -
- - CFsys* fsmount(int fd, char *aname) -
- - CFsys* nsmount(char *name, char *aname) -
- - CFid*    fsroot(CFsys *fsys) -
- - void     fsunmount(CFsys *fsys) -
- - CFsys* fsinit(int fd) -
- - int      fsversion(CFsys *fsys, int msize, char *version, int nversion) - -
- - CFid     *fsauth(CFsys *fsys, char *uname, char *aname) -
- - CFid     *fsattach(CFsys *fsys, CFid *afid, char *uname, char *aname) - -
- - void     fssetroot(CFsys *fsys, CFid *fid) -
- - void     fsclose(CFid *fid) -
- - CFid     *fscreate(CFsys *fs, char *path, int mode, ulong perm) -
- - CFid*    fsopen(CFsys *fs, char *path, int mode) -
- - long     fspread(CFid *fid, void *buf, long n, vlong offset) -
- - long     fspwrite(CFid *fid, void *buf, long n, vlong offset) -
- - long     fsread(CFid *fid, void *buf, long n) -
- - long     fsreadn(CFid *fid, void *buf, long n) -
- - long     fswrite(CFid *fid, void *buf, long n) -
- - long     fsdirread(CFid *fid, Dir **d) -
- - long     fsdirreadall(CFid *fid, Dir **d) -
- - Dir*     fsdirstat(CFsys *fs, char *path) -
- - Dir*     fsdirfstat(CFid *fid) -
- - int      fsdirwstat(CFsys *fs, char *path, Dir *d) -
- - int      fsdirfwstat(CFid *fid, Dir *d) -
- - int      fsopenfd(CFsys *fs, char *path, int mode)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The 9pclient library helps client programs interact with 9P servers. - -
- - A CFsys* represents a connection to a 9P server. A CFid* represents - an active fid on some connection; see intro(9p). -
- - A new connection to a 9P server is typically established by fsmount - or nsmount. Fsmount initializes a new 9P conversation on the open - file descriptor fd; nsmount connects to a service named name in - the current name space directory (see intro(4)). Both attach to - the root of the file system using the attach name aname. - Fsroot returns the CFid* corresponding to this root. -
- - Fsinit, fsversion, fsauth, fsattach, and fssetroot provide more - detailed control over the file system connection than fsmount - and nsmount. Fsinit allocates a new CFsys* corresponding to a - 9P conversation on the file descriptor fd. Fsversion executes - a version(9p) transaction to establish maximum message size and - 9P - version. Fsauth executes an auth(9p) transaction, returning the - new auth fid. (Fsread and fswrite can then be used to run the - authentication protocol over the fid.) Fsattach executes an attach(9p) - transaction to connect to the root of a file tree served by the - server. It presents afid (which may be nil) to establish - identity. Fssetroot sets the root fid used by fsopen, fsopenfd, - fsdirstat, and fsdirwstat, which evaluate rooted path names. -
- - When a fid is no longer needed, it should be clunked by calling - fsclose and then considered freed. Similarly, when the connection - to the server is no longer needed, it should be closed by calling - fsunmount, which will take care of calling fsclose on the current - root fid. Once all fids have been clunked and the connection - has been closed (the order is not important), the allocated structures - will be freed and the file descriptor corresponding to the connection - will be closed (see close(2)). Fids are not reference counted: - when fsclose is called, the clunk transaction and freeing of storage - happen immediately. -
- - Fscreate and fsopen establish new fids using the walk, create - and open transactions (see walk(9p) and open(9p)). The path argument - is evaluated relative to the CFsys root (see fsroot and fssetroot - above). The path is parsed as a slash-separated sequence of path - elements, as on Unix and Plan 9. Elements that are - empty or dot (.) are ignored. -
- - Once opened, these fids can be read and written using fspread - and fspwrite, which execute read and write transactions (see read(9p)). - The library maintains an offset for each fid, analagous to the - offset maintained by the kernel for each open file descriptor. - Fsread and fswrite read and write from this offset, and - update it after successful calls. Calling fspread or fspwrite - with an offset of –1 is identical to calling fsread or fswrite. - Fsreadn calls fsread repeatedly to obtain exactly n bytes of data, - unless it encounters end-of-file or an error. -
- - Reading an open a directory returns directory entries encoded - as described in stat(9p). Fsdirread calls fsread and then parses - the encoded entries into an array of Dir* data structures, storing - a pointer to the array in *d and returning the number of entries. - Fsdirreadall is similar but reads the entire directory. The - returned pointer should be freed with free (see malloc(3)) when - no longer needed. -
- - Fsdirfstat and fsdirfwstat execute stat and wstat (see stat(9p)) - transactions. The Dir structure returned by fsdirfstat should - be freed with free (see malloc(3)) when no longer needed. -
- - Fsdirstat and fsdirwstat are similar to fsdirfstat and fsdirfwstat - but operate on paths relative to the file system root (see fsopen - and fscreate above). -
- - Fsopenfd opens a file on the 9P server for reading or writing - but returns a Unix file descriptor instead of a fid structure. - The file descriptor is actually one end of a pipe(2). A proxy - process on the other end is ferrying data between the pipe and - the 9P fid. Because of the implementation as a pipe, the only - signal of a - read or write error is the closing of the pipe. The file descriptor - remains valid even after the CFsys is unmounted.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9pclient
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(4), intro(9p)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The implementation should use a special version string to distinguish - between servers that support openfd(9p) and servers that do not. - -
- - The interface does not provide access to the walk(9p) transaction, - or to open and create on already-established fids. -
- - There is no fsseek.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/INDEX b/man/man3/INDEX index 4739b175..0844b3c0 100644 --- a/man/man3/INDEX +++ b/man/man3/INDEX @@ -84,6 +84,41 @@ fsunmount 9pclient.3 fsversion 9pclient.3 fswrite 9pclient.3 nsmount 9pclient.3 +9pcmdbuf 9pcmdbuf.3 +Cmdbuf 9pcmdbuf.3 +lookupcmd 9pcmdbuf.3 +parsecmd 9pcmdbuf.3 +respondcmderror 9pcmdbuf.3 +9pfid 9pfid.3 +Fid 9pfid.3 +Fidpool 9pfid.3 +Req 9pfid.3 +Reqpool 9pfid.3 +allocfid 9pfid.3 +allocfidpool 9pfid.3 +allocreq 9pfid.3 +allocreqpool 9pfid.3 +closefid 9pfid.3 +closereq 9pfid.3 +freefidpool 9pfid.3 +freereqpool 9pfid.3 +lookupfid 9pfid.3 +lookupreq 9pfid.3 +removefid 9pfid.3 +removereq 9pfid.3 +9pfile 9pfile.3 +File 9pfile.3 +Tree 9pfile.3 +alloctree 9pfile.3 +closedirfile 9pfile.3 +closefile 9pfile.3 +createfile 9pfile.3 +freetree 9pfile.3 +hasperm 9pfile.3 +opendirfile 9pfile.3 +readdirfile 9pfile.3 +removefile 9pfile.3 +walkfile 9pfile.3 Dx addpt.3 Dy addpt.3 Pt addpt.3 @@ -248,6 +283,9 @@ netmkaddr dial.3 reject dial.3 dirread dirread.3 dirreadall dirread.3 +Disk disk.3 +disk disk.3 +opendisk disk.3 ARROW draw.3 Image draw.3 _string draw.3 @@ -479,6 +517,14 @@ targetid html.3 targetname html.3 toStr html.3 validitems html.3 +Intmap intmap.3 +allocmap intmap.3 +caninsertkey intmap.3 +deletekey intmap.3 +freemap intmap.3 +insertkey intmap.3 +intmap intmap.3 +lookupkey intmap.3 closeioproc ioproc.3 iocall ioproc.3 ioclose ioproc.3 @@ -925,6 +971,9 @@ pwrite read.3 read read.3 readn read.3 write read.3 +RGB readcolmap.3 +readcolmap readcolmap.3 +writecolmap readcolmap.3 regcomp regexp.3 regcomplit regexp.3 regcompnl regexp.3 @@ -934,6 +983,15 @@ regexp regexp.3 regsub regexp.3 rregexec regexp.3 rregsub regexp.3 +regcomp regexp9.3 +regcomplit regexp9.3 +regcompnl regexp9.3 +regerror regexp9.3 +regexec regexp9.3 +regexp9 regexp9.3 +regsub regexp9.3 +rregexec regexp9.3 +rregsub regexp9.3 rfork rfork.3 X509dump rsa.3 @@ -979,6 +1037,11 @@ runestrncmp runestrcat.3 runestrncpy runestrcat.3 runestrrchr runestrcat.3 runestrstr runestrcat.3 +openscsi scsi.3 +scsi scsi.3 +scsicmd scsi.3 +scsierror scsi.3 +scsiready scsi.3 hmac_md5 sechash.3 hmac_sha1 sechash.3 md4 sechash.3 diff --git a/man/man3/addpt.html b/man/man3/addpt.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1c327aaa..00000000 --- a/man/man3/addpt.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,174 +0,0 @@ - -addpt(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ADDPT(3)ADDPT(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - addpt, subpt, mulpt, divpt, rectaddpt, rectsubpt, insetrect, canonrect, - eqpt, eqrect, ptinrect, rectinrect, rectXrect, rectclip, combinerect, - Dx, Dy, Pt, Rect, Rpt – arithmetic on points and rectangles
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h> -
- - Point       addpt(Point p, Point q) -
- - Point       subpt(Point p, Point q) -
- - Point       mulpt(Point p, int a) -
- - Point       divpt(Point p, int a) -
- - Rectangle rectaddpt(Rectangle r, Point p) -
- - Rectangle rectsubpt(Rectangle r, Point p) -
- - Rectangle insetrect(Rectangle r, int n) -
- - Rectangle canonrect(Rectangle r) -
- - int         eqpt(Point p, Point q) -
- - int         eqrect(Rectangle r, Rectangle s) -
- - int         ptinrect(Point p, Rectangle r) -
- - int         rectinrect(Rectangle r, Rectangle s) -
- - int         rectXrect(Rectangle r, Rectangle s) -
- - int         rectclip(Rectangle *rp, Rectangle b) -
- - void        combinerect(Rectangle *rp, Rectangle b) -
- - int         Dx(Rectangle r) -
- - int         Dy(Rectangle r) -
- - Point       Pt(int x, int y) -
- - Rectangle Rect(int x0, int y0, int x1, int y1) -
- - Rectangle Rpt(Point p, Point q)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The functions Pt, Rect and Rpt construct geometrical data types - from their components. -
- - Addpt returns the Point sum of its arguments: Pt(p.x+q.x, p.y+q.y). - Subpt returns the Point difference of its arguments: Pt(p.x−q.x, - p.y−q.y). Mulpt returns the Point Pt(p.x*a, p.y*a). Divpt returns - the Point Pt(p.x/a, p.y/a). -
- - Rectaddpt returns the Rectangle Rect(add(r.min, p), add(r.max, - p)); rectsubpt returns the Rectangle Rpt(sub(r.min, p), sub(r.max, - p)). -
- - Insetrect returns the Rectangle Rect(r.min.x+n, r.min.y+n, r.max.x−n, - r.max.y−n). -
- - Canonrect returns a rectangle with the same extent as r, canonicalized - so that min.x ≤ max.x, and min.y ≤ max.y. -
- - Eqpt compares its argument Points and returns 0 if unequal, 1 - if equal. Eqrect does the same for its argument Rectangles. -
- - Ptinrect returns 1 if p is a point within r, and 0 otherwise. - -
- - Rectinrect returns 1 if all the pixels in r are also in s, and - 0 otherwise. -
- - RectXrect returns 1 if r and s share any point, and 0 otherwise. - -
- - Rectclip clips in place the Rectangle pointed to by rp so that - it is completely contained within b. The return value is 1 if - any part of *rp is within b. Otherwise, the return value is 0 - and *rp is unchanged. -
- - Combinerect overwrites *rp with the smallest rectangle sufficient - to cover all the pixels of *rp and b. -
- - The functions Dx and Dy give the width (Δx) and height (Δy) of - a Rectangle. They are implemented as macros.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/aes.html b/man/man3/aes.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1a455c2f..00000000 --- a/man/man3/aes.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ - -aes(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
AES(3)AES(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - setupAESstate, aesCBCencrypt, aesCBCdecrypt - advanced encryption - standard (rijndael)
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - void setupAESstate(AESstate *s, uchar key[], int keybytes, uchar - *ivec) -
- - void aesCBCencrypt(uchar*, int, AESstate*) -
- - void aesCBCdecrypt(uchar*, int, AESstate*) -
- - -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - DES is being replaced by Rijndael, also known as AES, as the preferred - block ciper. setupAESstate, aesCBCencrypt, and aesCBCdecrypt implement - cipher block chaining encryption. Keybytes should be 16, 24, or - 32. The initialization vector ivec of AESbsize bytes should random - enough to be unlikely to be reused but - does not need to be cryptographically strongly unpredictable.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mp(3), blowfish(3), des(3), dsa(3), elgamal(3), rc4(3), rsa(3), - sechash(3), prime(3), rand(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/allocimage.html b/man/man3/allocimage.html deleted file mode 100644 index d36fb0eb..00000000 --- a/man/man3/allocimage.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,321 +0,0 @@ - -allocimage(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ALLOCIMAGE(3)ALLOCIMAGE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - allocimage, allocimagemix, freeimage, nameimage, namedimage, setalpha, - loadimage, cloadimage, unloadimage, readimage, writeimage, bytesperline, - wordsperline – allocating, freeing, reading, writing images
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h>
- -
- - Image *allocimage(Display *d, Rectangle r,
- -
- - -
- - ulong chan, int repl, int col)
- -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- Image *allocimagemix(Display *d, ulong one, ulong three)
- -
- - void    freeimage(Image *i)
- -
- - int     nameimage(Image *i, char *name, int in)
- -
- - Image *namedimage(Display *d, char *name)
- -
- - ulong setalpha(ulong color, uchar alpha)
- -
- - int     loadimage(Image *i, Rectangle r, uchar *data, int ndata)
- -
- - int     cloadimage(Image *i, Rectangle r, uchar *data, int ndata)
- -
- - int     unloadimage(Image *i, Rectangle r, uchar *data, int ndata)
- -
- - Image *readimage(Display *d, int fd, int dolock)
- -
- - int     writeimage(int fd, Image *i, int dolock)
- -
- - int     bytesperline(Rectangle r, int d)
- -
- - int     wordsperline(Rectangle r, int d)
- -
- - enum
- {
- -
- - DOpaque                     = 0xFFFFFFFF,
- DTransparent                 = 0x00000000,
- DBlack                      = 0x000000FF,
- DWhite                      = 0xFFFFFFFF,
- DRed                        = 0xFF0000FF,
- DGreen                      = 0x00FF00FF,
- DBlue                       = 0x0000FFFF,
- DCyan                       = 0x00FFFFFF,
- DMagenta                    = 0xFF00FFFF,
- DYellow                     = 0xFFFF00FF,
- DPaleyellow                 = 0xFFFFAAFF,
- DDarkyellow                 = 0xEEEE9EFF,
- DDarkgreen                  = 0x448844FF,
- DPalegreen                  = 0xAAFFAAFF,
- DMedgreen                   = 0x88CC88FF,
- DDarkblue                   = 0x000055FF,
- DPalebluegreen               = 0xAAFFFFFF,
- DPaleblue                   = 0x0000BBFF,
- DBluegreen                  = 0x008888FF,
- DGreygreen                  = 0x55AAAAFF,
- DPalegreygreen               = 0x9EEEEEFF,
- DYellowgreen                 = 0x99994CFF,
- DMedblue                    = 0x000099FF,
- DGreyblue                   = 0x005DBBFF,
- DPalegreyblue                = 0x4993DDFF,
- DPurpleblue                 = 0x8888CCFF,
- DNotacolor                  = 0xFFFFFF00,
- DNofill                     = DNotacolor,
-
- -
- };
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - A new Image on Display d is allocated with allocimage; it will - have the rectangle, pixel channel format, and replication flag - given by its arguments. Convenient pixel channels like GREY1, - GREY2, CMAP8, RGB16, RGB24, and RGBA32 are predefined. All the - new image’s pixels will have initial value col. If col - is DNofill, no initialization is done. Representative useful values - of color are predefined: DBlack, DWhite, DRed, and so on. Colors - are specified by 32-bit numbers comprising, from most to least - significant byte, 8-bit values for red, green, blue, and alpha. - The values correspond to illumination, so 0 is black - and 255 is white. Similarly, for alpha 0 is transparent and 255 - is opaque. The id field will have been set to the identifying - number used by /dev/draw (see draw(3)), and the cache field will - be zero. If repl is true, the clip rectangle is set to a very - large region; if false, it is set to r. The depth field will be - set to the - number of bits per pixel specified by the channel descriptor (see - image(7)). Allocimage returns 0 if the server has run out of image - memory. -
- - Allocimagemix is used to allocate background colors. On 8-bit - color-mapped displays, it returns a 2x2 replicated image with one - pixel colored the color one and the other three with three. (This - simulates a wider range of tones than can be represented by a - single pixel value on a color-mapped display.) On true color - displays, it returns a 1x1 replicated image whose pixel is the - result of mixing the two colors in a one to three ratio. -
- - Freeimage frees the resources used by its argument image. -
- - Nameimage publishes in the server the image i under the given - name. If in is non-zero, the image is published; otherwise i must - be already named name and it is withdrawn from publication. Namedimage - returns a reference to the image published under the given name - on Display d. These routines permit - unrelated applications sharing a display to share an image; for - example they provide the mechanism behind getwindow (see graphics(3)). - -
- - The RGB values in a color are premultiplied by the alpha value; - for example, a 50% red is 0x7F00007F not 0xFF00007F. The function - setalpha performs the alpha computation on a given color, ignoring - its initial alpha value, multiplying the components by the supplied - alpha. For example, to make a 50% red - color value, one could execute setalpha(DRed, 0x7F). -
- - The remaining functions deal with moving groups of pixel values - between image and user space or external files. There is a fixed - format for the exchange and storage of image data (see image(7)). - -
- - Unloadimage reads a rectangle of pixels from image i into data, - whose length is specified by ndata. It is an error if ndata is - too small to accommodate the pixels. -
- - Loadimage replaces the specified rectangle in image i with the - ndata bytes of data. -
- - The pixels are presented one horizontal line at a time, starting - with the top-left pixel of r. In the data processed by these routines, - each scan line starts with a new byte in the array, leaving the - last byte of the previous line partially empty, if necessary. - Pixels are packed as tightly as possible within data, regardless - of - the rectangle being extracted. Bytes are filled from most to least - significant bit order, as the x coordinate increases, aligned - so x=0 would appear as the leftmost pixel of its byte. Thus, for - depth 1, the pixel at x offset 165 within the rectangle will be - in a data byte at bit-position 0x04 regardless of the overall - rectangle: 165 mod 8 equals 5, and 0x80 >> 5 equals 0x04. -
- - Cloadimage does the same as loadimage, but for ndata bytes of - compressed image data (see image(7)). On each call to cloadimage, - the data must be at the beginning of a compressed data block, - in particular, it should start with the y coordinate and data - length for the block. -
- - Loadimage, cloadimage, and unloadimage return the number of bytes - copied. -
- - Readimage creates an image from data contained in an external - file (see image(7) for the file format); fd is a file descriptor - obtained by opening such a file for reading. The returned image - is allocated using allocimage. The dolock flag specifies whether - the Display should be synchronized for multithreaded access; - single-threaded programs can leave it zero. -
- - Writeimage writes image i onto file descriptor fd, which should - be open for writing. The format is as described for readimage. - -
- - Readimage and writeimage do not close fd. -
- - Bytesperline and wordsperline return the number of bytes or words - occupied in memory by one scan line of rectangle r in an image - with d bits per pixel.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - To allocate a single-pixel replicated image that may be used to - paint a region red,
- -
- - red = allocimage(display, Rect(0, 0, 1, 1), RGB24, 1, DRed);
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), draw(3), draw(3), image(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - These functions return pointer 0 or integer –1 on failure, usually - due to insufficient memory. -
- - May set errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Depth must be a divisor or multiple of 8.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/arg.html b/man/man3/arg.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8ca66c80..00000000 --- a/man/man3/arg.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,152 +0,0 @@ - -arg(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ARG(3)ARG(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ARGBEGIN, ARGEND, ARGC, ARGF, EARGF, arginit, argopt – process - option letters from argv
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - ARGBEGIN {
- char *ARGF();
- char *EARGF(code);
- Rune ARGC();
- } ARGEND
- -
- - extern char *argv0;
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These macros assume the names argc and argv are in scope; see - exec(3). ARGBEGIN and ARGEND surround code for processing program - options. The code should be the cases of a C switch on option - characters; it is executed once for each option character. Options - end after an argument −−, before an argument −, or - before an argument that doesn’t begin with −. -
- - The function macro ARGC returns the current option character, - as an integer. -
- - The function macro ARGF returns the current option argument: a - pointer to the rest of the option string if not empty, or the - next argument in argv if any, or 0. ARGF must be called just once - for each option that takes an argument. The macro EARGF is like - ARGF but instead of returning zero runs code and, if that - returns, calls abort(3). A typical value for code is usage(), - as in EARGF(usage()). -
- - After ARGBEGIN, argv0 is a copy of argv[0] (conventionally the - name of the program). -
- - After ARGEND, argv points at a zero-terminated list of the remaining - argc arguments.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - This C program can take option b and option f, which requires - an argument.
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- void
- main(int argc, char *argv[])
- {
- -
- - char *f;
- print("%s", argv[0]);
- ARGBEGIN {
- case 'b':
- print(" −b");
- break;
- case 'f':
- print(" −f(%s)", (f=ARGF())? f: "no arg");
- break;
- default:
- print(" badflag('%c')", ARGC());
- } ARGEND
- print(" %d args:", argc);
- while(*argv)
- print(" '%s'", *argv++);
- print("\n");
- exits(nil);
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- Here is the output from running the command prog −bffile1 −r −f - file2 arg1 arg2
- -
- - prog −b −f(file1) badflag('r') −f(file2) 2 args: 'arg1' 'arg2' - -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/include/libc.h
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/arith3.html b/man/man3/arith3.html deleted file mode 100644 index 71cf815c..00000000 --- a/man/man3/arith3.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,216 +0,0 @@ - -arith3(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ARITH3(3)ARITH3(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - add3, sub3, neg3, div3, mul3, eqpt3, closept3, dot3, cross3, len3, - dist3, unit3, midpt3, lerp3, reflect3, nearseg3, pldist3, vdiv3, - vrem3, pn2f3, ppp2f3, fff2p3, pdiv4, add4, sub4 – operations on - 3-d points and planes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <draw.h> -
- - #include <geometry.h> -
- - Point3 add3(Point3 a, Point3 b) -
- - Point3 sub3(Point3 a, Point3 b) -
- - Point3 neg3(Point3 a) -
- - Point3 div3(Point3 a, double b) -
- - Point3 mul3(Point3 a, double b) -
- - int eqpt3(Point3 p, Point3 q) -
- - int closept3(Point3 p, Point3 q, double eps) -
- - double dot3(Point3 p, Point3 q) -
- - Point3 cross3(Point3 p, Point3 q) -
- - double len3(Point3 p) -
- - double dist3(Point3 p, Point3 q) -
- - Point3 unit3(Point3 p) -
- - Point3 midpt3(Point3 p, Point3 q) -
- - Point3 lerp3(Point3 p, Point3 q, double alpha) -
- - Point3 reflect3(Point3 p, Point3 p0, Point3 p1) -
- - Point3 nearseg3(Point3 p0, Point3 p1, Point3 testp) -
- - double pldist3(Point3 p, Point3 p0, Point3 p1) -
- - double vdiv3(Point3 a, Point3 b) -
- - Point3 vrem3(Point3 a, Point3 b) -
- - Point3 pn2f3(Point3 p, Point3 n) -
- - Point3 ppp2f3(Point3 p0, Point3 p1, Point3 p2) -
- - Point3 fff2p3(Point3 f0, Point3 f1, Point3 f2) -
- - Point3 pdiv4(Point3 a) -
- - Point3 add4(Point3 a, Point3 b) -
- - Point3 sub4(Point3 a, Point3 b)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines do arithmetic on points and planes in affine or - projective 3-space. Type Point3 is
- -
- - typedef struct Point3 Point3;
- struct Point3{
- -
- - double x, y, z, w;
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- Routines whose names end in 3 operate on vectors or ordinary points - in affine 3-space, represented by their Euclidean (x,y,z) coordinates. - (They assume w=1 in their arguments, and set w=1 in their results.)
- Name       Description
- add3       Add the coordinates of two points.
- sub3       Subtract coordinates of two points.
- neg3       Negate the coordinates of a point.
- mul3       Multiply coordinates by a scalar.
- div3       Divide coordinates by a scalar.
- eqpt3      Test two points for exact equality.
- closept3   Is the distance between two points smaller than eps?
- dot3       Dot product.
- cross3     Cross product.
- len3       Distance to the origin.
- dist3      Distance between two points.
- unit3      A unit vector parallel to p.
- midpt3     The midpoint of line segment pq.
- lerp3      Linear interpolation between p and q.
- reflect3   The reflection of point p in the segment joining p0 and - p1.
- nearseg3   The closest point to testp on segment p0 p1.
- pldist3    The distance from p to segment p0 p1.
- vdiv3      Vector divide -- the length of the component of a parallel - to b, in units of the length of b.
- vrem3      Vector remainder -- the component of a perpendicular to b. - Ignoring roundoff, we have eqpt3(add3(mul3(b, vdiv3(a, b)), vrem3(a, - b)), a). -
- - The following routines convert amongst various representations - of points and planes. Planes are represented identically to points, - by duality; a point p is on a plane q whenever p.x*q.x+p.y*q.y+p.z*q.z+p.w*q.w=0. - Although when dealing with affine points we assume p.w=1, we can’t - make the same - assumption for planes. The names of these routines are extra-cryptic. - They contain an f (for ‘face’) to indicate a plane, p for a point - and n for a normal vector. The number 2 abbreviates the word ‘to.’ - The number 3 reminds us, as before, that we’re dealing with affine - points. Thus pn2f3 takes a point and a normal - vector and returns the corresponding plane.
- Name       Description
- pn2f3      Compute the plane passing through p with normal n.
- ppp2f3     Compute the plane passing through three points.
- fff2p3     Compute the intersection point of three planes. -
- - The names of the following routines end in 4 because they operate - on points in projective 4-space, represented by their homogeneous - coordinates.
- pdiv4Perspective division. Divide p.w into p’s coordinates, converting - to affine coordinates. If p.w is zero, the result is the same - as the argument.
- add4   Add the coordinates of two points.
- sub4   Subtract the coordinates of two points.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libgeometry
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - matrix(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/atof.html b/man/man3/atof.html deleted file mode 100644 index ef464d0a..00000000 --- a/man/man3/atof.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,170 +0,0 @@ - -atof(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ATOF(3)ATOF(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - atof, atoi, atol, atoll, charstod, strtod, strtol, strtoll, strtoul, - strtoull – convert text to numbers
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - double atof(char *nptr)
- -
- - int      atoi(char *nptr)
- -
- - long     atol(char *nptr)
- -
- - vlong    atoll(char *nptr)
- -
- - double charstod(int (*f)(void *), void *a)
- -
- - double strtod(char *nptr, char **rptr)
- -
- - long     strtol(char *nptr, char **rptr, int base)
- -
- - vlong    strtoll(char *nptr, char **rptr, int base)
- -
- - ulong    strtoul(char *nptr, char **rptr, int base)
- -
- - vlong    strtoull(char *nptr, char **rptr, int base)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Atof, atoi, atol, and atoll convert a string pointed to by nptr - to floating, integer, long integer, and long long integer (vlong) - representation respectively. The first unrecognized character - ends the string. Leading C escapes are understood, as in strtol - with base zero (described below). -
- - Atof recognizes an optional string of tabs and spaces, then an - optional sign, then a string of digits optionally containing a - decimal point, then an optional e or E followed by an optionally - signed integer. -
- - Atoi and atol recognize an optional string of tabs and spaces, - then an optional sign, then a string of decimal digits. -
- - Strtod, strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull behave similarly - to atof and atol and, if rptr is not zero, set *rptr to point - to the input character immediately after the string converted. - -
- - Strtol, strtoll, strtoul, and strtoull interpret the digit string - in the specified base, from 2 to 36, each digit being less than - the base. Digits with value over 9 are represented by letters, - a-z or A-Z. If base is 0, the input is interpreted as an integral - constant in the style of C (with no suffixed type indicators): - numbers are - octal if they begin with 0, hexadecimal if they begin with 0x - or 0X, otherwise decimal. -
- - Charstod interprets floating point numbers in the manner of atof, - but gets successive characters by calling (*f)(a). The last call - to f terminates the scan, so it must have returned a character - that is not a legal continuation of a number. Therefore, it may - be necessary to back up the input stream one character after - calling charstod.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - fscanf(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Zero is returned if the beginning of the input string is not interpretable - as a number; even in this case, rptr will be updated.
- These routines set errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Atoi and atol accept octal and hexadecimal numbers in the style - of C, contrary to the ANSI specification. -
- - Atof, strtod, strtol, strtoul, strtoll, and strtoull are not provided: - they are expected to be provided by the underlying system. -
- - Because they are implemented in the fmt library, charstod and - strtod are preprocessor macros defined as fmtcharstod and fmtstrtod. - -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, atoi, atol, - and atoll are preprocessor macros defined as p9atoi, p9atol, and - p9atoll; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/bin.html b/man/man3/bin.html deleted file mode 100644 index f016622f..00000000 --- a/man/man3/bin.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,131 +0,0 @@ - -bin(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
BIN(3)BIN(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - binalloc, bingrow, binfree – grouped memory allocation
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <bin.h> -
- - -
- - typedef struct BinBin; -
- - void    *binalloc(Bin **bp, ulong size, int clr); -
- - void    *bingrow(Bin **bp, void *op, ulong osize,
- -
- - -
- - ulong size, int clr); -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- void    binfree(Bin **bp);
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines provide simple grouped memory allocation and deallocation. - Items allocated with binalloc are added to the Bin pointed to - by bp. All items in a bin may be freed with one call to binfree; - there is no way to free a single item. -
- - Binalloc returns a pointer to a new block of at least size bytes. - The block is suitably aligned for storage of any type of object. - No two active pointers from binalloc will have the same value. - The call binalloc(0) returns a valid pointer rather than null. - If clr is non-zero, the allocated memory is set to 0; otherwise, - the contents are undefined. -
- - Bingrow is used to extend the size of a block of memory returned - by binalloc. Bp must point to the same bin group used to allocate - the original block, and osize must be the last size used to allocate - or grow the block. A pointer to a block of at least size bytes - is returned, with the same contents in the first osize - locations. If clr is non-zero, the remaining bytes are set to - 0, and are undefined otherwise. If op is nil, it and osize are - ignored, and the result is the same as calling binalloc. -
- - Binalloc and bingrow allocate large chunks of memory using malloc(3) - and return pieces of these chunks. The chunks are free’d upon - a call to binfree.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libbin
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - malloc(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - binalloc and bingrow return 0 if there is no available memory.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/bio.html b/man/man3/bio.html deleted file mode 100644 index 78259922..00000000 --- a/man/man3/bio.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,293 +0,0 @@ - -bio(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
BIO(3)BIO(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Bopen, Bfdopen, Binit, Binits, Brdline, Brdstr, Bgetc, Bgetrune, - Bgetd, Bungetc, Bungetrune, Bread, Bseek, Boffset, Bfildes, Blinelen, - Bputc, Bputrune, Bprint, Bvprint, Bwrite, Bflush, Bterm, Bbuffered - – buffered input/output
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <bio.h> -
- - Biobuf* Bopen(char *file, int mode) -
- - Biobuf* Bfdopen(int fd, int mode) -
- - int       Binit(Biobuf *bp, int fd, int mode) -
- - int       Binits(Biobufhdr *bp, int fd, int mode, uchar *buf, int size) - -
- - int       Bterm(Biobufhdr *bp) -
- - int       Bprint(Biobufhdr *bp, char *format, ...) -
- - int       Bvprint(Biobufhdr *bp, char *format, va_list arglist); -
- - void*     Brdline(Biobufhdr *bp, int delim) -
- - char*     Brdstr(Biobufhdr *bp, int delim, int nulldelim) -
- - int       Blinelen(Biobufhdr *bp) -
- - vlong     Boffset(Biobufhdr *bp) -
- - int       Bfildes(Biobufhdr *bp) -
- - int       Bgetc(Biobufhdr *bp) -
- - long      Bgetrune(Biobufhdr *bp) -
- - int       Bgetd(Biobufhdr *bp, double *d) -
- - int       Bungetc(Biobufhdr *bp) -
- - int       Bungetrune(Biobufhdr *bp) -
- - vlong     Bseek(Biobufhdr *bp, vlong n, int type) -
- - int       Bputc(Biobufhdr *bp, int c) -
- - int       Bputrune(Biobufhdr *bp, long c) -
- - long      Bread(Biobufhdr *bp, void *addr, long nbytes) -
- - long      Bwrite(Biobufhdr *bp, void *addr, long nbytes) -
- - int       Bflush(Biobufhdr *bp) -
- - int       Bbuffered(Biobufhdr *bp) -
- - -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines implement fast buffered I/O. I/O on different file - descriptors is independent. -
- - Bopen opens file for mode OREAD or creates for mode OWRITE. It - calls malloc(3) to allocate a buffer. -
- - Bfdopen allocates a buffer for the already-open file descriptor - fd for mode OREAD or OWRITE. It calls malloc(3) to allocate a - buffer. -
- - Binit initializes a standard size buffer, type Biobuf, with the - open file descriptor passed in by the user. Binits initializes - a non-standard size buffer, type Biobufhdr, with the open file - descriptor, buffer area, and buffer size passed in by the user. - Biobuf and Biobufhdr are related by the declaration: - -
- - typedef struct Biobuf Biobuf;
- struct Biobuf
- {
- -
- - Biobufhdr;
- uchar b[Bungetsize+Bsize];
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- Arguments of types pointer to Biobuf and pointer to Biobufhdr - can be used interchangeably in the following routines. -
- - Bopen, Binit, or Binits should be called before any of the other - routines on that buffer. Bfildes returns the integer file descriptor - of the associated open file. -
- - Bterm flushes the buffer for bp. If the buffer was allocated by - Bopen, the buffer is freed and the file is closed. -
- - Brdline reads a string from the file associated with bp up to - and including the first delim character. The delimiter character - at the end of the line is not altered. Brdline returns a pointer - to the start of the line or 0 on end-of-file or read error. Blinelen - returns the length (including the delimiter) of the most recent - string - returned by Brdline. -
- - Brdstr returns a malloc(3)-allocated buffer containing the next - line of input delimited by delim, terminated by a NUL (0) byte. - Unlike Brdline, which returns when its buffer is full even if - no delimiter has been found, Brdstr will return an arbitrarily - long line in a single call. If nulldelim is set, the terminal - delimiter will be - overwritten with a NUL. After a successful call to Brdstr, the - return value of Blinelen will be the length of the returned buffer, - excluding the NUL. -
- - Bgetc returns the next character from bp, or a negative value - at end of file. Bungetc may be called immediately after Bgetc - to allow the same character to be reread. -
- - Bgetrune calls Bgetc to read the bytes of the next UTF sequence - in the input stream and returns the value of the rune represented - by the sequence. It returns a negative value at end of file. Bungetrune - may be called immediately after Bgetrune to allow the same UTF - sequence to be reread as either bytes or a rune. - Bungetc and Bungetrune may back up a maximum of five bytes. -
- - Bgetd uses charstod (see atof(3)) and Bgetc to read the formatted - floating-point number in the input stream, skipping initial blanks - and tabs. The value is stored in *d. -
- - Bread reads nbytes of data from bp into memory starting at addr. - The number of bytes read is returned on success and a negative - value is returned if a read error occurred. -
- - Bseek applies seek(3) to bp. It returns the new file offset. Boffset - returns the file offset of the next character to be processed. - -
- - Bputc outputs the low order 8 bits of c on bp. If this causes - a write to occur and there is an error, a negative value is returned. - Otherwise, a zero is returned. -
- - Bputrune calls Bputc to output the low order 16 bits of c as a - rune in UTF format on the output stream. -
- - Bprint is a buffered interface to print(3). If this causes a write - to occur and there is an error, a negative value (Beof) is returned. - Otherwise, the number of bytes output is returned. Bvprint does - the same except it takes as argument a va_list parameter, so it - can be called within a variadic function. -
- - Bwrite outputs nbytes of data starting at addr to bp. If this - causes a write to occur and there is an error, a negative value - is returned. Otherwise, the number of bytes written is returned. - -
- - Bflush causes any buffered output associated with bp to be written. - The return is as for Bputc. Bflush is called on exit for every - buffer still open for writing. -
- - Bbuffered returns the number of bytes in the buffer. When reading, - this is the number of bytes still available from the last read - on the file; when writing, it is the number of bytes ready to - be written.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libbio
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - open(3), print(3), exits(3), utf(7),
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Bio routines that return integers yield Beof if bp is not the - descriptor of an open file. Bopen returns zero if the file cannot - be opened in the given mode. All routines set errstr on error.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Brdline returns an error on strings longer than the buffer associated - with the file and also if the end-of-file is encountered before - a delimiter. Blinelen will tell how many characters are available - in these cases. In the case of a true end-of-file, Blinelen will - return zero. At the cost of allocating a buffer, Brdstr sidesteps - these issues. -
- - The data returned by Brdline may be overwritten by calls to any - other bio routine on the same bp.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/blowfish.html b/man/man3/blowfish.html deleted file mode 100644 index d8da66de..00000000 --- a/man/man3/blowfish.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ - -blowfish(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
BLOWFISH(3)BLOWFISH(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - setupBFstate, bfCBCencrypt, bfCBCdecrypt, bfECBencrypt, bfECBdecrypt - - blowfish encryption
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - void setupBFstate(BFstate *s, uchar key[], int keybytes,                  uchar - *ivec) -
- - void bfCBCencrypt(uchar *data, int len, BFstate *s) -
- - void bfCBCdecrypt(uchar *data, int len, BFstate *s) -
- - void bfECBencrypt(uchar *data, int len, BFstate *s) -
- - void bfECBdecrypt(uchar *data, int len, BFstate *s)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Blowfish is Bruce Schneier’s symmetric block cipher. It supports - variable length keys from 32 to 448 bits and has a block size - of 64 bits. Both CBC and ECB modes are supported. -
- - setupBFstate takes a BFstate structure, a key of at most 56 bytes, - the length of the key in bytes, and an initialization vector of - 8 bytes (set to all zeroes if argument is nil). The encryption - and decryption functions take a BFstate structure, a data buffer, - and a length, which must be a multiple of eight bytes as padding - is - currently unsupported.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mp(3), aes(3), des(3), dsa(3), elgamal(3), rc4(3), rsa(3), sechash(3), - prime(3), rand(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/cachechars.html b/man/man3/cachechars.html deleted file mode 100644 index 382b5e7e..00000000 --- a/man/man3/cachechars.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,292 +0,0 @@ - -cachechars(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CACHECHARS(3)CACHECHARS(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cachechars, agefont, loadchar, Subfont, Fontchar, Font – font utilities
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h> -
- - -
- - int    cachechars(Font *f, char **s, Rune **r, ushort *c, int max, - -
- - -
- - -
- - int *widp, char **sfname) -
- - -
- -
- int    loadchar(Font *f, Rune r, Cacheinfo *c, int h, -
- - -
- - -
- - int noclr, char **sfname) -
- - -
- -
- void agefont(Font *f)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - A Font may contain too many characters to hold in memory simultaneously. - The graphics library and draw device (see draw(3)) cooperate to - solve this problem by maintaining a cache of recently used character - images. The details of this cooperation need not be known by most - programs: initdraw and its associated - font variable, openfont, stringwidth, string, and freefont are - sufficient for most purposes. The routines described below are - used internally by the graphics library to maintain the font cache. - -
- - A Subfont is a set of images for a contiguous range of characters, - stored as a single image with the characters placed side-by-side - on a common baseline. It is described by the following data structures.
- -
- - typedef
- struct Fontchar {
- -
- - int        x;          /* left edge of bits */
- uchar      top;        /* first non−zero scan−line */
- uchar      bottom;     /* last non−zero scan−line */
- char       left;       /* offset of baseline */
- uchar      width;      /* width of baseline */
- -
- } Fontchar;
- typedef
- struct Subfont {
- -
- - char       *name;
- short      n;          /* number of chars in subfont */
- uchar      height;     /* height of image */
- char       ascent;     /* top of image to baseline */
- Fontchar *info;      /* n+1 Fontchars */
- Image      *bits;      /* of font */
- -
- } Subfont;
- -
- - -
- The image fills the rectangle (0, 0, w, height), where w is the - sum of the horizontal extents (of non-zero pixels) for all characters. - The pixels to be displayed for character c are in the rectangle - (i−>x, i−>top, (i+1)−>x, i−>bottom) where i is &subfont−>info[c]. When - a character is displayed - at Point p in an image, the character rectangle is placed at (p.x+i−>left, - p.y) and the next character of the string is displayed at (p.x+i−>width, - p.y). The baseline of the characters is ascent rows down from - the top of the subfont image. The info array has n+1 elements, - one each for characters 0 - to n−1 plus an additional entry so the size of the last character - can be calculated. Thus the width, w, of the Image associated - with a Subfont s is s−>info[s−>n].x. -
- - A Font consists of an overall height and ascent and a collection - of subfonts together with the ranges of runes (see utf(7)) they - represent. Fonts are described by the following structures.
- -
- - typedef
- struct Cachefont {
- -
- - Rune        min;        /* value of 0th char in subfont */
- Rune        max;        /* value+1 of last char in subfont */
- int         offset;     /* posn in subfont of char at min */
- char        *name;      /* stored in font */
- char        *subfontname;/* to access subfont */
- -
- } Cachefont;
- typedef
- struct Cacheinfo {
- -
- - ushort      x;          /* left edge of bits */
- uchar       width;      /* width of baseline */
- schar       left;       /* offset of baseline */
- Rune        value;      /* of char at this slot in cache */
- ushort      age;
- -
- } Cacheinfo;
- typedef
- struct Cachesubf {
- -
- - ulong       age;        /* for replacement */
- Cachefont *cf;        /* font info that owns us */
- Subfont     *f;         /* attached subfont */
- -
- } Cachesubf;
- typedef
- struct Font {
- -
- - char        *name;
- Display     *display;
- short       height;     /* max ht of image;interline space*/
- short       ascent;     /* top of image to baseline */
- short       width;      /* widest so far; used in caching */
- short       nsub;       /* number of subfonts */
- ulong       age;        /* increasing counter; for LRU */
- int         ncache;     /* size of cache */
- int         nsubf;      /* size of subfont list */
- Cacheinfo *cache;
- Cachesubf *subf;
- Cachefont **sub;      /* as read from file */
- Image       *cacheimage;
- -
- } Font;
- -
- - -
- The height and ascent fields of Font are described in graphics(3). - Sub contains nsub pointers to Cachefonts. A Cachefont connects - runes min through max, inclusive, to the subfont with file name - name; it corresponds to a line of the file describing the font. - -
- - The characters are taken from the subfont starting at character - number offset (usually zero) in the subfont, permitting selection - of parts of subfonts. Thus the image for rune r is found in position - r−min+offset of the subfont. -
- - For each font, the library, with support from the graphics server, - maintains a cache of subfonts and a cache of recently used character - images. The subf and cache fields are used by the library to maintain - these caches. The width of a font is the maximum of the horizontal - extents of the characters in the cache. - String draws a string by loading the cache and emitting a sequence - of cache indices to draw. Cachechars guarantees the images for - the characters pointed to by *s or *r (one of these must be nil - in each call) are in the cache of f. It calls loadchar to put - missing characters into the cache. Cachechars translates the - character string into a set of cache indices which it loads into - the array c, up to a maximum of n indices or the length of the - string. Cachechars returns in c the number of cache indices emitted, - updates *s to point to the next character to be processed, and - sets *widp to the total width of the characters processed. - Cachechars may return before the end of the string if it cannot - proceed without destroying active data in the caches. If it needs - to load a new subfont, it will fill *sfname with the name of the - subfont it needs and return –1. It can return zero if it is unable - to make progress because it cannot resize the caches. -
- - Loadchar loads a character image into the character cache. Then - it tells the graphics server to copy the character into position - h in the character cache. If the current font width is smaller - than the horizontal extent of the character being loaded, loadfont - clears the cache and resets it to accept characters with the - bigger width, unless noclr is set, in which case it just returns - –1. If the character does not exist in the font at all, loadfont - returns 0; if it is unable to load the character without destroying - cached information, it returns –1, updating *sfname as described - above. It returns 1 to indicate success. -
- - The age fields record when subfonts and characters have been used. - The font age is increased every time the font is used (agefont - does this). A character or subfont age is set to the font age - at each use. Thus, characters or subfonts with small ages are - the best candidates for replacement when the cache is full. - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), allocimage(3), draw(3), subfont(3), image(7), font(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - All of the functions use the graphics error function (see graphics(3)).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/cleanname.html b/man/man3/cleanname.html deleted file mode 100644 index eba39965..00000000 --- a/man/man3/cleanname.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ - -cleanname(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CLEANNAME(3)CLEANNAME(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cleanname – clean a path name
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- char*       cleanname(char *filename)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Cleanname takes a filename and by lexical processing only returns - the shortest string that names the same (possibly hypothetical) - file. It eliminates multiple and trailing slashes, and it lexically - interprets . and .. directory components in the name. The string - is overwritten in place. -
- - The shortest string cleanname can return is two bytes: the null-terminated - string ".". Therefore filename must contain room for at least two - bytes.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/cleanname.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - cleanname(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/color.html b/man/man3/color.html deleted file mode 100644 index a8274707..00000000 --- a/man/man3/color.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,89 +0,0 @@ - -color(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
COLOR(3)COLOR(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cmap2rgb, cmap2rgba, rgb2cmap – colors and color maps
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h> -
- - int    rgb2cmap(int red, int green, int blue) -
- - int    cmap2rgb(int col) -
- - int    cmap2rgba(int col)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines convert between ‘true color’ red/green/blue triples - and the Plan 9 color map. See color(7) for a description of RGBV, - the standard color map. -
- - Rgb2cmap takes a trio of color values, scaled from 0 (no intensity) - to 255 (full intensity), and returns the index of the color in - RGBV closest to that represented by those values. -
- - Cmap2rgb decomposes the color of RGBV index col and returns a - 24-bit integer with the low 8 bits representing the blue value, - the next 8 representing green, and the next 8 representing red. - Cmap2rgba decomposes the color of RGBV index col and returns a - 32-bit integer with the low 8 bits representing an alpha - value, defined to be 255, and the next 8 representing blue, then - green, then red, as for cmap2rgba shifted up 8 bits. This 32-bit - representation is the format used by draw(3) and memdraw(3) library - routines that take colors as arguments.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), allocimage(3), draw(3), image(7), color(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/complete.html b/man/man3/complete.html deleted file mode 100644 index 29453752..00000000 --- a/man/man3/complete.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,136 +0,0 @@ - -complete(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
COMPLETE(3)COMPLETE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - complete, freecompletion – file name completion
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <complete.h> -
- - typedef struct CompletionCompletion;
- struct Completion{
- -
- - uchar advance;
- uchar complete;
- char *string;
- int nmatch;
- int nfile;
- char **filename;
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- - Completion* complete(char *dir, char *s); -
- - void freecompletion(Completion *c);
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The complete function implements file name completion. Given a - directory dir and a string s, it returns an analysis of the file - names in that directory that begin with the string s. The fields - nmatch and nfile will be set to the number of files that match - the prefix and filename will be filled in with their names. If - the file named is a directory, a slash character will be appended - to it. -
- - If no files match the string, nmatch will be zero, but complete - will return the full set of files in the directory, with nfile - set to their number. -
- - The flag advance reports whether the string s can be extended - without changing the set of files that match. If true, string - will be set to the extension; that is, the value of string may - be appended to s by the caller to extend the embryonic file name - unambiguously. -
- - The flag complete reports whether the extended file name uniquely - identifies a file. If true, string will be suffixed with a blank, - or a slash and a blank, depending on whether the resulting file - name identifies a plain file or a directory. -
- - The freecompletion function frees a Completion structure and its - contents. -
- - In rio(1) and acme(1), file name completion is triggered by a - control-F character or an Insert character.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libcomplete
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rio(1), acme(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - The complete function returns a null pointer and sets errstr if - the directory is unreadable or there is some other error.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The behavior of file name completion should be controlled by the - plumber.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/cputime.html b/man/man3/cputime.html deleted file mode 100644 index fafc7f57..00000000 --- a/man/man3/cputime.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,65 +0,0 @@ - -cputime(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CPUTIME(3)CPUTIME(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - cputime, times – cpu time in this process and children
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int      times(long t[4]) -
- - double cputime(void)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - If t is non-null, times fills it in with the number of milliseconds - spent in user code, system calls, child processes in user code, - and child processes in system calls. Cputime returns the sum of - those same times, converted to seconds. Times returns the elapsed - real time, in milliseconds, that the process has been - running.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/time.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/ctime.html b/man/man3/ctime.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4c162391..00000000 --- a/man/man3/ctime.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,150 +0,0 @@ - -ctime(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CTIME(3)CTIME(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ctime, localtime, gmtime, asctime, tm2sec, timezone – convert date - and time
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - char* ctime(long clock) -
- - Tm*     localtime(long clock) -
- - Tm*     gmtime(long clock) -
- - char* asctime(Tm *tm) -
- - long    tm2sec(Tm *tm)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Ctime converts a time clock such as returned by time(3) into ASCII - (sic) and returns a pointer to a 30-byte string in the following - form. All the fields have constant width. -
- - -
- - -
- - Wed Aug    5 01:07:47 EST 1973\n\0 -
- - -
- -
- Localtime and gmtime return pointers to structures containing - the broken-down time. Localtime corrects for the time zone and - possible daylight savings time; gmtime converts directly to GMT. - Asctime converts a broken-down time to ASCII and returns a pointer - to a 30-byte string.
- -
- - typedef
- struct {
- -
- - int    sec;          /* seconds (range 0..59) */
- int    min;          /* minutes (0..59) */
- int    hour;         /* hours (0..23) */
- int    mday;         /* day of the month (1..31) */
- int    mon;          /* month of the year (0..11) */
- int    year;         /* year A.D. – 1900 */
- int    wday;         /* day of week (0..6, Sunday = 0) */
- int    yday;         /* day of year (0..365) */
- char zone[4];      /* time zone name */
- int    tzoff;        /* time zone delta from GMT */
- -
- } Tm;
- -
- - -
- Tm2sec converts a broken-down time to seconds since the start - of the epoch. It ignores wday, and assumes the local time zone - if zone is not GMT.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/date.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/ctime.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - date(1), time(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The return values point to static data whose content is overwritten - by each call. -
- - Daylight Savings Time is “normal” in the Southern hemisphere. - -
- - These routines are not equipped to handle non-ASCII text, and - are provincial anyway. -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, ctime, localtime, - gmtime, asctime, and tm2sec are preprocessor macros defined as - p9ctime, p9localtime, p9gmtime, p9asctime, and p9tm2sec; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/des.html b/man/man3/des.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0752e8c8..00000000 --- a/man/man3/des.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,170 +0,0 @@ - -des(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DES(3)DES(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - setupDESstate, des_key_setup, block_cipher, desCBCencrypt, desCBCdecrypt, - desECBencrypt, desECBdecrypt, des3CBCencrypt, des3CBCdecrypt, - des3ECBencrypt, des3ECBdecrypt, key_setup, des56to64, des64to56, - setupDES3state, triple_block_cipher, - single and triple digital - encryption standard - -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - void des_key_setup(uchar key[8], ulong schedule[32]) -
- - void block_cipher(ulong *schedule, uchar *data,            int decrypting) - -
- - void setupDESstate(DESstate *s, uchar key[8], uchar *ivec) -
- - void desCBCencrypt(uchar*, int, DESstate*) -
- - void desCBCdecrypt(uchar*, int, DESstate*) -
- - void desECBencrypt(uchar*, int, DESstate*) -
- - void desECBdecrypt(uchar*, int, DESstate*) -
- - void triple_block_cipher(ulong keys[3][32], uchar*, int) -
- - void setupDES3state(DES3state *s, uchar key[3][8],                  uchar *ivec) - -
- - void des3CBCencrypt(uchar*, int, DES3state*) -
- - void des3CBCdecrypt(uchar*, int, DES3state*) -
- - void des3ECBencrypt(uchar*, int, DES3state*) -
- - void des3ECBdecrypt(uchar*, int, DES3state*) -
- - void key_setup(uchar[7], ulong[32]) -
- - void des56to64(uchar *k56, uchar *k64) -
- - void des64to56(uchar *k64, uchar *k56)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - The Digital Encryption Standard (DES) is a shared key or symmetric - encryption using either a 56 bit key for single DES or three 56 - bit keys for triple des. The keys are encoded into 64 bits where - every eight bit is parity. -
- - The basic DES function, block_cipher, works on a block of 8 bytes, - converting them in place. It takes a key schedule, a pointer to - the block, and a flag indicating encrypting (0) or decrypting - (1). The key schedule is created from the key using des_key_setup. - -
- - Since it is a bit awkward, block_cipher is rarely called directly. - Instead, one normally uses routines that encrypt larger buffers - of data and which may chain the encryption state from one buffer - to the next. These routines keep track of the state of the encryption - using a DESstate structure that contains the key - schedule and any chained state. SetupDESstate sets up the DESstate - structure using the key and an 8 byte initialization vector. -
- - Electronic code book, using desECBencrypt and desECBdecrypt, is - the less secure mode. The encryption of each 8 bytes does not - depend on the encryption of any other. Hence the encryption is - a substitution cipher using 64 bit characters. -
- - Cipher block chaining mode, using desCBCencrypt and desCBCdecrypt, - is more secure. Every block encrypted depends on the initialization - vector and all blocks encrypted before it. -
- - For both CBC and ECB modes, a stream of data can be encrypted - as multiple buffers. However, all buffers except the last must - be a multiple of 8 bytes to ensure successful decryption of the - stream. -
- - There are equivalent triple DES functions for each of the DES - functions. -
- - In the past Plan 9 used a 56 bit or 7 byte format for DES keys. - To be compatible with the rest of the world, we’ve abandoned this - format. There are two functions: des56to64 and des64to56 to convert - back and forth between the two formats. Also a key schedule can - be set up from the 7 byte format using key_setup. -
- - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mp(3), aes(3), blowfish(3), dsa(3), elgamal(3), rc4(3), rsa(3), - sechash(3), prime(3), rand(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/dial.html b/man/man3/dial.html deleted file mode 100644 index e1014859..00000000 --- a/man/man3/dial.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,241 +0,0 @@ - -dial(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DIAL(3)DIAL(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dial, announce, listen, accept, reject, netmkaddr, dialparse – - make and break network connections
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int     dial(char *addr, char *local, char *dir, int *cfdp) -
- - int     announce(char *addr, char *dir) -
- - int     listen(char *dir, char *newdir) -
- - int     accept(int ctl, char *dir) -
- - int     reject(int ctl, char *dir, char *cause) -
- - char* netmkaddr(char *addr, char *defnet, char *defservice) -
- - int     dialparse(char *addr, char **net, char **unix,
- -
- - -
- - u32int *host, int *port)
- -
- -
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - For these routines, addr is a network address of the form network!netaddr!service, - network!netaddr, or simply netaddr. Network is tcp, udp, unix, - or the special token, net. Net is a free variable that stands - for any network in common between the source and the host netaddr. - Netaddr can be a host name, a - domain name, or a network address. -
- - On Plan 9, the dir argument is a path name to a line directory - that has files for accessing the connection. To keep the same - function signatures, the Unix port of these routines uses strings - of the form /dev/fd/n instead of line directory paths. These strings - should be treated as opaque data and ignored. -
- - Dial makes a call to destination addr on a multiplexed network. - If the network in addr is net, dial will try in succession all - networks in common between source and destination until a call - succeeds. It returns a file descriptor open for reading and writing - the data file in the line directory. The addr file in the line - directory contains the address called. Dial’s local, dir, and - cfdp arguments are not supported and must be zero. -
- - Announce and listen are the complements of dial. Announce establishes - a network name to which calls can be made. Like dial, announce - returns an open ctl file. The netaddr used in announce may be - a local address or an asterisk, to indicate all local addresses, - e.g. tcp!*!echo. The listen routine takes as its - first argument the dir of a previous announce. When a call is - received, listen returns an open ctl file for the line the call - was received on. It sets newdir to the path name of the new line - directory. Accept accepts a call received by listen, while reject - refuses the call because of cause. Accept returns a file descriptor - for - the data file opened ORDWR. -
- - Netmkaddr makes an address suitable for dialing or announcing. - It takes an address along with a default network and service to - use if they are not specified in the address. It returns a pointer - to static data holding the actual address to use. -
- - Dialparse parses a network address as described above into a network - name, a Unix domain socket address, an IPv4 host address, and - an IPv4 port number.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - Make a call and return an open file descriptor to use for communications:
- -
- - int callkremvax(void)
- {
- -
- - return dial("kremvax", 0, 0, 0);
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- Connect to a Unix socket served by acme(4):
- -
- - int dialacme(void)
- {
- -
- - return dial("unix!/tmp/ns.ken.:0/acme", 0, 0, 0);
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- Announce as kremvax on TCP/IP and loop forever receiving calls - and echoing back to the caller anything sent:
- -
- - int
- bekremvax(void)
- {
- -
- - int dfd, acfd, lcfd;
- char adir[40], ldir[40];
- int n;
- char buf[256];
- acfd = announce("tcp!*!7", adir);
- if(acfd < 0)
- return −1;
- for(;;){
- /* listen for a call */
- lcfd = listen(adir, ldir);
- if(lcfd < 0)
- return −1;
- /* fork a process to echo */
- switch(fork()){
- case −1:
- perror("forking");
- close(lcfd);
- break;
- case 0:
- /* accept the call and open the data file */
- dfd = accept(lcfd, ldir);
- if(dfd < 0)
- return −1;
- /* echo until EOF */
- while((n = read(dfd, buf, sizeof(buf))) > 0)
- write(dfd, buf, n);
- exits(0);
- default:
- close(lcfd);
- break;
- }
- }
- -
- }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/dial.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/announce.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/_p9dialparse.c
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Dial, announce, and listen return –1 if they fail.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, dial, announce, - listen, netmkaddr, and reject are preprocessor macros defined - as p9dial, p9announce, and so on; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/dirread.html b/man/man3/dirread.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7c5ba4ed..00000000 --- a/man/man3/dirread.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,114 +0,0 @@ - -dirread(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DIRREAD(3)DIRREAD(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dirread, dirreadall – read directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - long dirread(int fd, Dir **buf) -
- - long dirreadall(int fd, Dir **buf) -
- - #define     STATMAX     65535U -
- - #define     DIRMAX      (sizeof(Dir)+STATMAX)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The data returned by a read(3) on a directory is a set of complete - directory entries in a machine-independent format, exactly equivalent - to the result of a stat(3) on each file or subdirectory in the - directory. Dirread decodes the directory entries into a machine-dependent - form. It reads from fd and unpacks the data - into an array of Dir structures whose address is returned in *buf - (see stat(3) for the layout of a Dir). The array is allocated - with malloc(3) each time dirread is called. -
- - Dirreadall is like dirread, but reads in the entire directory; - by contrast, dirread steps through a directory one read(3) at - a time. -
- - Directory entries have variable length. A successful read of a - directory always returns an integral number of complete directory - entries; dirread always returns complete Dir structures. See read(9p) - for more information. -
- - The constant STATMAX is the maximum size that a directory entry - can occupy. The constant DIRMAX is an upper limit on the size - necessary to hold a Dir structure and all the associated data. - -
- - Dirread and dirreadall return the number of Dir structures filled - in buf. The file offset is advanced by the number of bytes actually - read.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/dirread.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), open(3), read(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Dirread and Dirreadall return zero for end of file and a negative - value for error. In either case, *buf is set to nil so the pointer - can always be freed with impunity. -
- - These functions set errstr.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/draw.html b/man/man3/draw.html deleted file mode 100644 index f90b16fc..00000000 --- a/man/man3/draw.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1174 +0,0 @@ - -draw(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DRAW(3)DRAW(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Image, draw, drawop, gendraw, gendrawop, drawreplxy, drawrepl, - replclipr, line, lineop, poly, polyop, fillpoly, fillpolyop, bezier, - bezierop, bezspline, bezsplineop, bezsplinepts, fillbezier, fillbezierop, - fillbezspline, fillbezsplineop, ellipse, ellipseop, fillellipse, - fillellipseop, arc, arcop, fillarc, fillarcop, icossin, icossin2, - border, string, stringop, stringn, stringnop, runestring, runestringop, - runestringn, runestringnop, stringbg, stringbgop, stringnbg, stringnbgop, - runestringbg, runestringbgop, runestringnbg, runestringnbgop, - _string, ARROW, drawsetdebug – graphics functions
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h>
- -
- - typedef
- struct Image
- {
- -
- - Display     *display; /* display holding data */
- int         id;         /* id of system−held Image */
- Rectangle r;          /* rectangle in data area, local coords */
- Rectangle clipr;      /* clipping region */
- ulong       chan;       /* pixel channel format descriptor */
- int         depth;      /* number of bits per pixel */
- int         repl;       /* flag: data replicates to tile clipr */
- Screen      *screen;    /* 0 if not a window */
- Image       *next;      /* next in list of windows */
- -
- } Image;
- -
- - typedef enum
- {
- -
- - /* Porter−Duff compositing operators */
- Clear       = 0,
- SinD = 8,
- DinS = 4,
- SoutD       = 2,
- DoutS       = 1,
- S          = SinD|SoutD,
- SoverD      = SinD|SoutD|DoutS,
- SatopD      = SinD|DoutS,
- SxorD       = SoutD|DoutS,
- D          = DinS|DoutS,
- DoverS      = DinS|DoutS|SoutD,
- DatopS      = DinS|SoutD,
- DxorS       = DoutS|SoutD, /* == SxorD */
- Ncomp = 12,
- -
- } Drawop;
- -
- - void    draw(Image *dst, Rectangle r, Image *src,
- -
- - -
- - Image *mask, Point p)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    drawop(Image *dst, Rectangle r, Image *src,
- -
- - -
- - Image *mask, Point p, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    gendraw(Image *dst, Rectangle r, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Image *mask, Point mp)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    gendrawop(Image *dst, Rectangle r, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Image *mask, Point mp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     drawreplxy(int min, int max, int x)
- -
- - Point drawrepl(Rectangle r, Point p)
- -
- - void    replclipr(Image *i, int repl, Rectangle clipr)
- -
- - void    line(Image *dst, Point p0, Point p1, int end0, int end1,
- -
- - -
- - int radius, Image *src, Point sp)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    lineop(Image *dst, Point p0, Point p1, int end0, int end1,
- -
- - -
- - int radius, Image *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    poly(Image *dst, Point *p, int np, int end0, int end1,
- -
- - -
- - int radius, Image *src, Point sp)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    polyop(Image *dst, Point *p, int np, int end0, int end1,
- -
- - -
- - int radius, Image *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    fillpoly(Image *dst, Point *p, int np, int wind,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    fillpolyop(Image *dst, Point *p, int np, int wind,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     bezier(Image *dst, Point p0, Point p1, Point p2, Point p3,
- -
- - -
- - int end0, int end1, int radius, Image *src, Point sp)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     bezierop(Image *dst, Point p0, Point p1, Point p2, Point p3,
- -
- - -
- - int end0, int end1, int radius, Image *src, Point sp,
- Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     bezspline(Image *dst, Point *pt, int npt, int end0, int end1,
- -
- - -
- - int radius, Image *src, Point sp)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     bezsplineop(Image *dst, Point *pt, int npt, int end0, int - end1,
- -
- - -
- - int radius, Image *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     bezsplinepts(Point *pt, int npt, Point **pp)
- -
- - int     fillbezier(Image *dst, Point p0, Point p1, Point p2, Point - p3,
- -
- - -
- - int w, Image *src, Point sp)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     fillbezierop(Image *dst, Point p0, Point p1, Point p2, Point - p3,
- -
- - -
- - int w, Image *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     fillbezspline(Image *dst, Point *pt, int npt, int w,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     fillbezsplineop(Image *dst, Point *pt, int npt, int w,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    ellipse(Image *dst, Point c, int a, int b, int thick,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    ellipseop(Image *dst, Point c, int a, int b, int thick,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    fillellipse(Image *dst, Point c, int a, int b,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    fillellipseop(Image *dst, Point c, int a, int b,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    arc(Image *dst, Point c, int a, int b, int thick,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp, int alpha, int phi)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    arcop(Image *dst, Point c, int a, int b, int thick,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp, int alpha, int phi, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    fillarc(Image *dst, Point c, int a, int b, Image *src,
- -
- - -
- - Point sp, int alpha, int phi)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    fillarcop(Image *dst, Point c, int a, int b, Image *src,
- -
- - -
- - Point sp, int alpha, int phi, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     icossin(int deg, int *cosp, int *sinp)
- -
- - int     icossin2(int x, int y, int *cosp, int *sinp)
- -
- - void    border(Image *dst, Rectangle r, int i, Image *color, Point - sp)
- -
- - Point string(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, char *s)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point stringop(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, char *s, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point stringn(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, char *s, int len)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point stringnop(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, char *s, int len, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point runestring(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, Rune *r)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point runestringop(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, Rune *r, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point runestringn(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, Rune *r, int len)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point runestringnop(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, Rune *r, int len, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point stringbg(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, char *s, Image *bg, Point bgp)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point stringbgop(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, char *s, Image *bg, Point bgp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point stringnbg(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, char *s, int len, Image *bg, Point bgp)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point stringnbgop(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, char *s, int len, Image *bg, Point bgp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point runestringbg(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, Rune *r, Image *bg, Point bgp)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point runestringbgop(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, Rune *r, Image *bg, Point bgp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point runestringnbg(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, Rune *r, int len, Image *bg, Point bgp)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point runestringnbgop(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src, Point sp,
- -
- - -
- - Font *f, Rune *r, int len, Image *bg, Point bgp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- Point _string(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src,
- -
- - -
- - Point sp, Font *f, char *s, Rune *r, int len,
- Rectangle clipr, Image *bg, Point bgp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- void    drawsetdebug(int on)
- -
- - enum
- {
- -
- - -
- - /* line ends */
- Endsquare    = 0,
- Enddisc      = 1,
- Endarrow = 2,
- Endmask      = 0x1F
- -
- -
- };
- -
- - #define ARROW(a, b, c) (Endarrow|((a)<<5)|((b)<<14)|((c)<<23))
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The Image type defines rectangular pictures and the methods to - draw upon them; it is also the building block for higher level - objects such as windows and fonts. In particular, a window is - represented as an Image; no special operators are needed to draw - on a window. -
- - r       The coordinates of the rectangle in the plane for which the Image - has defined pixel values. It should not be modified after the - image is created.
- clipr   The clipping rectangle: operations that read or write the - image will not access pixels outside clipr. Frequently, clipr - is the same as r, but it may differ; see in particular the discussion - of repl. The clipping region may be modified dynamically using - replclipr (q.v.).
- chan    The pixel channel format descriptor, as described in image(7). - The value should not be modified after the image is created.
- depth   The number of bits per pixel in the picture; it is identically - chantodepth(chan) (see graphics(3)) and is provided as a convenience. - The value should not be modified after the image is created.
- repl    A boolean value specifying whether the image is tiled to cover - the plane when used as a source for a drawing operation. If repl - is zero, operations are restricted to the intersection of r and - clipr. If repl is set, r defines the tile to be replicated and - clipr defines the portion of the plane covered by the - -
- - -
- - tiling, in other words, r is replicated to cover clipr; in such - cases r and clipr are independent.
- For example, a replicated image with r set to ((0, 0), (1, 1)) - and clipr set to ((0, 0), (100, 100)), with the single pixel of - r set to blue, behaves identically to an image with r and clipr - both set to ((0, 0), (100, 100)) and all pixels set to blue. However, - the first image requires far less memory. The - replication flag may be modified dynamically using replclipr (q.v.). - -
- - -
- -
- Most of the drawing functions come in two forms: a basic form, - and an extended form that takes an extra Drawop to specify a Porter-Duff - compositing operator to use. The basic forms assume the operator - is SoverD, which suffices for the vast majority of applications. - The extended forms are named by adding an - -op suffix to the basic form. Only the basic forms are listed - below.
- draw(dst, r, src, mask, p)
- -
- - Draw is the standard drawing function. Only those pixels within - the intersection of dst−>r and dst−>clipr will be affected; draw - ignores dst−>repl. The operation proceeds as follows (this is a - description of the behavior, not the implementation):
- 1.    If repl is set in src or mask, replicate their contents to fill - their clip rectangles.
- 2.    Translate src and mask so p is aligned with r.min.
- 3.    Set r to the intersection of r and dst−>r.
- 4.    Intersect r with src−>clipr. If src−>repl is false, also intersect - r with src−>r.
- 5.    Intersect r with mask−>clipr. If mask−>repl is false, also intersect - r with mask−>r.
- 6.    For each location in r, combine the dst pixel with the src pixel - using the alpha value corresponding to the mask pixel. If the - mask has an explicit alpha channel, the alpha value corresponding - to the mask pixel is simply that pixel’s alpha channel. Otherwise, - the alpha value is the NTSC greyscale - -
- - equivalent of the color value, with white meaning opaque and black - transparent. In terms of the Porter-Duff compositing algebra, - draw replaces the dst pixels with (src in mask) over dst. (In - the extended form, “over” is replaced by op).
- -
- The various pixel channel formats involved need not be identical. - If the channels involved are smaller than 8-bits, they will be - promoted before the calculation by replicating the extant bits; - after the calculation, they will be truncated to their proper - sizes.
- -
- gendraw(dst, r, src, p0, mask, p1)
- -
- - Similar to draw except that gendraw aligns the source and mask - differently: src is aligned so p0 corresponds to r.min and mask - is aligned so p1 corresponds to r.min. For most purposes with - simple masks and source images, draw is sufficient, but gendraw - is the general operator and the one all other - drawing primitives are built upon.
- -
- drawreplxy(min,max,x)
- -
- - Clips x to be in the half-open interval [min, max) by adding or - subtracting a multiple of max-min.
- -
- drawrepl(r,p)
- -
- - Clips the point p to be within the rectangle r by translating - the point horizontally by an integer multiple of rectangle width - and vertically by the height.
- -
- replclipr(i,repl,clipr)
- -
- - Because the image data is stored on the server, local modifications - to the Image data structure itself will have no effect. Repclipr - modifies the local Image data structure’s repl and clipr fields, - and notifies the server of their modification.
- -
- line(dst, p0, p1, end0, end1, thick, src, sp)
- -
- - Line draws in dst a line of width 1+2*thick pixels joining points - p0 and p1. The line is drawn using pixels from the src image aligned - so sp in the source corresponds to p0 in the destination. The - line touches both p0 and p1, and end0 and end1 specify how the - ends of the line are drawn. Endsquare - terminates the line perpendicularly to the direction of the line; - a thick line with Endsquare on both ends will be a rectangle. - Enddisc terminates the line by drawing a disc of diameter 1+2*thick - centered on the end point. Endarrow terminates the line with an - arrowhead whose tip touches the endpoint. - The macro ARROW permits explicit control of the shape of the arrow. - If all three parameters are zero, it produces the default arrowhead, - otherwise, a sets the distance along line from end of the regular - line to tip, b sets the distance along line from the barb to the - tip, and c sets the distance perpendicular to the - line from edge of line to the tip of the barb, all in pixels.
- Line and the other geometrical operators are equivalent to calls - to gendraw using a mask produced by the geometric procedure.
- -
- poly(dst, p, np, end0, end1, thick, src, sp)
- -
- - Poly draws a general polygon; it is conceptually equivalent to - a series of calls to line joining adjacent points in the array - of Points p, which has np elements. The ends of the polygon are - specified as in line; interior lines are terminated with Enddisc - to make smooth joins. The source is aligned so sp - corresponds to p[0].
- -
- fillpoly(dst, p, np, wind, src, sp)
- -
- - Fillpoly is like poly but fills in the resulting polygon rather - than outlining it. The source is aligned so sp corresponds to - p[0]. The winding rule parameter wind resolves ambiguities about - what to fill if the polygon is self-intersecting. If wind is ~0, - a pixel is inside the polygon if the polygon’s winding number - about the point is non-zero. If wind is 1, a pixel is inside if - the winding number is odd. Complementary values (0 or ~1) cause - outside pixels to be filled. The meaning of other values is undefined. - The polygon is closed with a line if necessary.
- -
- bezier(dst, a, b, c, d, end0, end1, thick, src, sp)
- -
- - Bezier draws the cubic Bezier curve defined by Points a, b, c, - and d. The end styles are determined by end0 and end1; the thickness - of the curve is 1+2*thick. The source is aligned so sp in src - corresponds to a in dst.
- -
- bezspline(dst, p, end0, end1, thick, src, sp)
- -
- - Bezspline takes the same arguments as poly but draws a quadratic - B-spline (despite its name) rather than a polygon. If the first - and last points in p are equal, the spline has periodic end conditions.
- -
- bezsplinepts(pt, npt, pp)
- -
- - Bezsplinepts returns in pp a list of points making up the open - polygon that bezspline would draw. The caller is responsible for - freeing *pp.
- -
- fillbezier(dst, a, b, c, d, wind, src, sp)
- -
- - Fillbezier is to bezier as fillpoly is to poly.
- -
- fillbezspline(dst, p, wind, src, sp)
- -
- - Fillbezspline is like fillpoly but fills the quadratic B-spline - rather than the polygon outlined by p. The spline is closed with - a line if necessary.
- -
- ellipse(dst, c, a, b, thick, src, sp)
- -
- - Ellipse draws in dst an ellipse centered on c with horizontal - and vertical semiaxes a and b. The source is aligned so sp in - src corresponds to c in dst. The ellipse is drawn with thickness - 1+2*thick.
- -
- fillellipse(dst, c, a, b, src, sp)
- -
- - Fillellipse is like ellipse but fills the ellipse rather than - outlining it.
- -
- arc(dst, c, a, b, thick, src, sp, alpha, phi)
- -
- - Arc is like ellipse, but draws only that portion of the ellipse - starting at angle alpha and extending through an angle of phi. - The angles are measured in degrees counterclockwise from the positive - x axis.
- -
- fillarc(dst, c, a, b, src, sp, alpha, phi)
- -
- - Fillarc is like arc, but fills the sector with the source color.
- -
- icossin(deg, cosp, sinp)
- -
- - Icossin stores in *cosp and *sinp scaled integers representing - the cosine and sine of the angle deg, measured in integer degrees. - The values are scaled so cos(0) is 1024.
- -
- icossin2(x, y, cosp, sinp)
- -
- - Icossin2 is analogous to icossin, with the angle represented not - in degrees but implicitly by the point (x,y). It is to icossin - what atan2 is to atan (see sin(3)).
- -
- border(dst, r, i, color, sp)
- -
- - Border draws an outline of rectangle r in the specified color. - The outline has width i; if positive, the border goes inside the - rectangle; negative, outside. The source is aligned so sp corresponds - to r.min.
- -
- string(dst, p, src, sp, font, s)
- -
- - String draws in dst characters specified by the string s and font; - it is equivalent to a series of calls to gendraw using source - src and masks determined by the character shapes. The text is - positioned with the left of the first character at p.x and the - top of the line of text at p.y. The source is positioned so sp - in - src corresponds to p in dst. String returns a Point that is the - position of the next character that would be drawn if the string - were longer.
- For characters with undefined or zero-width images in the font, - the character at font position 0 (NUL) is drawn.
- The other string routines are variants of this basic form, and - have names that encode their variant behavior. Routines whose - names contain rune accept a string of Runes rather than UTF-encoded - bytes. Routines ending in n accept an argument, n, that defines - the number of characters to draw rather than - accepting a NUL-terminated string. Routines containing bg draw - the background behind the characters in the specified color (bg) - and alignment (bgp); normally the text is drawn leaving the background - intact.
- The routine _string captures all this behavior into a single operator. - Whether it draws a UTF string or Rune string depends on whether - s or r is null (the string length is always determined by len). - If bg is non-null, it is used as a background color. The clipr - argument allows further management of clipping when - drawing the string; it is intersected with the usual clipping - rectangles to further limit the extent of the text.
- -
- drawsetdebug(on)
- -
- - Turns on or off debugging output (usually to a serial line) according - to whether on is non-zero.
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), stringsize(3), color(7), utf(7), addpt(3) -
- - T. Porter, T. Duff. “Compositing Digital Images”, Computer Graphics - (Proc. SIGGRAPH), 18:3, pp. 253-259, 1984.
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - These routines call the graphics error function on fatal errors.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Anti-aliased characters can be drawn by defining a font with multiple - bits per pixel, but there are no anti-aliasing geometric primitives.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/dsa.html b/man/man3/dsa.html deleted file mode 100644 index 765ddd7c..00000000 --- a/man/man3/dsa.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,172 +0,0 @@ - -dsa(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DSA(3)DSA(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dsagen, dsasign, dsaverify, dsapuballoc, dsapubfree, dsaprivalloc, - dsaprivfree, dsasigalloc, dsasigfree, dsaprivtopub - digital signature - algorithm
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - DSApriv*    dsagen(DSApub *opub) -
- - DSAsig*     dsasign(DSApriv *k, mpint *m) -
- - int         dsaverify(DSApub *k, DSAsig *sig, mpint *m) -
- - DSApub*     dsapuballoc(void) -
- - void        dsapubfree(DSApub*) -
- - DSApriv*    dsaprivalloc(void) -
- - void        dsaprivfree(DSApriv*) -
- - DSAsig*     dsasigalloc(void) -
- - void        dsasigfree(DSAsig*) -
- - DSApub*     dsaprivtopub(DSApriv*)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - DSA is the NIST approved digital signature algorithm. The owner - of a key publishes the public part of the key:
- -
- - struct DSApub
- {
- -
- - mpint       *p;    // modulus
- mpint       *q;    // group order, q divides p−1
- mpint       *alpha;     // group generator
- mpint       *key;       // alpha**secret mod p
- -
- };
- -
- This part can be used for verifying signatures (with dsaverify) - created by the owner. The owner signs (with dsasign) using his - private key:
- -
- - struct DSApriv
- {
- -
- - DSApub      pub;
- mpint       *secret; // (decryption key)
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- Keys are generated using dsagen. If dsagen’s argument opub is - nil, a key is created using a new p and q generated by DSAprimes - (see prime(3)). Otherwise, p and q are copied from the old key. - -
- - Dsaprivtopub returns a newly allocated copy of the public key - corresponding to the private key. -
- - The routines dsapuballoc, dsapubfree, dsaprivalloc, and dsaprivfree - are provided to manage key storage. -
- - Dsasign signs message m using a private key k yielding a
- -
- - struct DSAsig
- {
- -
- - mpint       *r, *s;
- -
- };
- -
- Dsaverify returns 0 if the signature is valid and –1 if not. -
- - The routines dsasigalloc and dsasigfree are provided to manage - signature storage.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mp(3), aes(3), blowfish(3), des(3), rc4(3), rsa(3), sechash(3), - prime(3), rand(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/dup.html b/man/man3/dup.html deleted file mode 100644 index c601e3b2..00000000 --- a/man/man3/dup.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ - -dup(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
DUP(3)DUP(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dup – duplicate an open file descriptor
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int dup(int oldfd, int newfd)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Given a file descriptor, oldfd, referring to an open file, dup - returns a new file descriptor referring to the same file. -
- - If newfd is –1 the system chooses the lowest available file descriptor. - Otherwise, dup will use newfd for the new file descriptor (closing - any old file associated with newfd).
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/dup.c
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Sets errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, dup is a preprocessor - macro defined as p9dup; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/elgamal.html b/man/man3/elgamal.html deleted file mode 100644 index a6518468..00000000 --- a/man/man3/elgamal.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,174 +0,0 @@ - -elgamal(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ELGAMAL(3)ELGAMAL(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - eggen, egencrypt, egdecrypt, egsign, egverify, egpuballoc, egpubfree, - egprivalloc, egprivfree, egsigalloc, egsigfree, egprivtopub - - elgamal encryption
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - EGpriv*     eggen(int nlen, int nrep) -
- - mpint*      egencrypt(EGpub *k, mpint *in, mpint *out) -
- - mpint*      egdecrypt(EGpriv *k, mpint *in, mpint *out) -
- - EGsig*      egsign(EGpriv *k, mpint *m) -
- - int         egverify(EGpub *k, EGsig *sig, mpint *m) -
- - EGpub*      egpuballoc(void) -
- - void        egpubfree(EGpub*) -
- - EGpriv*     egprivalloc(void) -
- - void        egprivfree(EGpriv*) -
- - EGsig*      egsigalloc(void) -
- - void        egsigfree(EGsig*) -
- - EGpub*      egprivtopub(EGpriv*)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Elgamal is a public key encryption and signature algorithm. The - owner of a key publishes the public part of the key:
- -
- - struct EGpub
- {
- -
- - mpint       *p;    // modulus
- mpint       *alpha;     // generator
- mpint       *key;       // (encryption key) alpha**secret mod p
- -
- };
- -
- This part can be used for encrypting data (with egencrypt) to - be sent to the owner. The owner decrypts (with egdecrypt) using - his private key:
- -
- - struct EGpriv
- {
- -
- - EGpub       pub;
- mpint       *secret; // (decryption key)
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- Keys are generated using eggen. Eggen takes both bit length of - the modulus and the number of repetitions of the Miller-Rabin - primality test to run. If the latter is 0, it does the default - number of rounds. Egprivtopub returns a newly allocated copy of - the public key corresponding to the private key. -
- - The routines egpuballoc, egpubfree, egprivalloc, and egprivfree - are provided to manage key storage. -
- - Egsign signs message m using a private key k yielding a
- -
- - struct EGsig
- {
- -
- - mpint       *r, *s;
- -
- };
- -
- Egverify returns 0 if the signature is valid and –1 if not. -
- - The routines egsigalloc and egsigfree are provided to manage signature - storage.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mp(3), aes(3), blowfish(3), des(3), dsa(3), rc4(3), rsa(3), sechash(3), - prime(3), rand(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/encode.html b/man/man3/encode.html deleted file mode 100644 index c7a8132c..00000000 --- a/man/man3/encode.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ - -encode(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ENCODE(3)ENCODE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - dec64, enc64, dec32, enc32, dec16, enc16, encodefmt – encoding - byte arrays as strings
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int    dec64(uchar *out, int lim, char *in, int n) -
- - int    enc64(char *out, int lim, uchar *in, int n) -
- - int    dec32(uchar *out, int lim, char *in, int n) -
- - int    enc32(char *out, int lim, uchar *in, int n) -
- - int    dec16(uchar *out, int lim, char *in, int n) -
- - int    enc16(char *out, int lim, uchar *in, int n) -
- - int    encodefmt(Fmt*)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Enc16, enc32 and enc64 create null terminated strings. They return - the size of the encoded string (without the null) or -1 if the - encoding fails. The encoding fails if lim, the length of the output - buffer, is too small. -
- - Dec16, dec32 and dec64 return the number of bytes decoded or -1 - if the decoding fails. The decoding fails if the output buffer - is not large enough or, for base 32, if the input buffer length - is not a multiple of 8. -
- - Encodefmt can be used with fmtinstall(3) and print(3) to print - encoded representations of byte arrays. The verbs are
- H     base 16 (i.e. hexadecimal). The default encoding is in upper - case. The l flag forces lower case.
- <     base 32
- [     base 64 (same as MIME) -
- - The length of the array is specified as f2. For example, to display - a 15 byte array as hex:
- -
- - char x[15];
- fmtinstall('H', encodefmt);
- print("%.*H\n", sizeof x, x);
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/u32.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/u64.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/errstr.html b/man/man3/errstr.html deleted file mode 100644 index 547efc8d..00000000 --- a/man/man3/errstr.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,121 +0,0 @@ - -errstr(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ERRSTR(3)ERRSTR(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - errstr, rerrstr, werrstr – description of last system call error
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int errstr(char *err, uint nerr) -
- - void rerrstr(char *err, uint nerr) -
- - void werrstr(char *fmt, ...)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - When a system call fails it returns –1 and records a null terminated - string describing the error in a per-process buffer. Errstr swaps - the contents of that buffer with the contents of the array err. - Errstr will write at most nerr bytes into err; if the per-process - error string does not fit, it is silently truncated at a UTF - character boundary. The returned string is NUL-terminated. Usually - errstr will be called with an empty string, but the exchange property - provides a mechanism for libraries to set the return value for - the next call to errstr. -
- - The per-process buffer is ERRMAX bytes long. Any error string - provided by the user will be truncated at ERRMAX−1 bytes. ERRMAX - is defined in <libc.h>. -
- - If no system call has generated an error since the last call to - errstr with an empty string, the result is an empty string. -
- - The verb r in print(3) calls errstr and outputs the error string. - -
- - Rerrstr reads the error string but does not modify the per-process - buffer, so a subsequent errstr will recover the same string. -
- - Werrstr takes a print style format as its argument and uses it - to format a string to pass to errstr. The string returned from - errstr is discarded. -
- - The error string is maintained in parallel with the Unix error - number errno. Changing errno will reset the error string, and - changing the error string via errstr or werrstr will reset errno.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/errstr.c
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Errstr always returns 0.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), perror(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The implementation sets errno to the (somewhat arbitrary) constant - 0x19283745 when the error string is valid. When errno is set to - other values, the error string is synthesized using strerror(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/event.html b/man/man3/event.html deleted file mode 100644 index 87cff2fd..00000000 --- a/man/man3/event.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,390 +0,0 @@ - -event(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
EVENT(3)EVENT(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - event, einit, estart, estartfn, etimer, eread, emouse, ekbd, ecanread, - ecanmouse, ecankbd, ereadmouse, eatomouse, eresized, egetrect, - edrawgetrect, emenuhit, emoveto, esetcursor, Event, Mouse, Menu - – graphics events
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include    <u.h>
- #include    <libc.h>
- #include    <draw.h>
- #include    <event.h>
- #include    <cursor.h>
- -
- - void        einit(ulong keys)
- -
- - ulong       event(Event *e)
- -
- - Mouse       emouse(void)
- -
- - int         ekbd(void)
- -
- - int         ecanmouse(void)
- -
- - int         ecankbd(void)
- -
- - int         ereadmouse(Mouse *m)
- -
- - int         eatomouse(Mouse *m, char *buf, int n)
- -
- - ulong       estart(ulong key, int fd, int n)
- -
- - ulong       estartfn(int id, ulong key, int fd, int n,
- -
- - -
- - int (*fn)(Event*, uchar*, int))
- -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- ulong       etimer(ulong key, int n)
- -
- - ulong       eread(ulong keys, Event *e)
- -
- - int         ecanread(ulong keys)
- -
- - void        eresized(int new)
- -
- - Rectangle egetrect(int but, Mouse *m)
- -
- - void        edrawgetrect(Rectangle r, int up)
- -
- - int         emenuhit(int but, Mouse *m, Menu *menu)
- -
- - -
- - int         emoveto(Point p)
- -
- - -
- - int         esetcursor(Cursor *c)
- -
- - extern Mouse      *mouse
- -
- - enum{
- -
- - -
- - Emouse = 1,
- Ekeyboard = 2,
- -
- -
- };
- -
- - -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines provide an interface to multiple sources of input - for unthreaded programs. Threaded programs (see thread(3)) should - instead use the threaded mouse and keyboard interface described - in mouse(3) and keyboard(3). -
- - Einit must be called first. If the argument to einit has the Emouse - and Ekeyboard bits set, the mouse and keyboard events will be - enabled; in this case, initdraw (see graphics(3)) must have already - been called. The user must provide a function called eresized - to be called whenever the window in which the process - is running has been resized; the argument new is a flag specifying - whether the program must call getwindow (see graphics(3)) to re-establish - a connection to its window. After resizing (and perhaps calling - getwindow), the global variable screen will be updated to point - to the new window’s Image structure. -
- - As characters are typed on the keyboard, they are read by the - event mechanism and put in a queue. Ekbd returns the next rune - from the queue, blocking until the queue is non-empty. The characters - are read in raw mode, so they are available as soon as a complete - rune is typed. -
- - When the mouse moves or a mouse button is pressed or released, - a new mouse event is queued by the event mechanism. Emouse returns - the next mouse event from the queue, blocking until the queue - is non-empty. Emouse returns a Mouse structure:
- -
- - struct Mouse
- {
- -
- - int     buttons;
- Point xy;
- ulong msec;
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- Buttons&1 is set when the left mouse button is pressed, buttons&2 - when the middle button is pressed, and buttons&4 when the right - button is pressed. The current mouse position is always returned - in xy. Msec is a time stamp in units of milliseconds. -
- - Ecankbd and ecanmouse return non-zero when there are keyboard - or mouse events available to be read. -
- - Ereadmouse reads the next mouse event from the file descriptor - connected to the mouse, converts the textual data into a Mouse - structure by calling eatomouse with the buffer and count from - the read call, and returns the number of bytes read, or –1 for - an error. -
- - Estart can be used to register additional file descriptors to - scan for input. It takes as arguments the file descriptor to register, - the maximum length of an event message on that descriptor, and - a key to be used in accessing the event. The key must be a power - of 2 and must not conflict with any previous keys. If a zero - key is given, a key will be allocated and returned. Estartfn is - similar to estart, but processes the data received by calling - fn before returning the event to the user. The function fn is - called with the id of the event; it should return id if the event - is to be passed to the user, 0 if it is to be ignored. The variable - Event.v - can be used by fn to attach an arbitrary data item to the returned - Event structure.    Ekeyboard and Emouse are the keyboard and mouse - event keys. -
- - Etimer starts a repeating timer with a period of n milliseconds; - it returns the timer event key, or zero if it fails. Only one - timer can be started. Extra timer events are not queued and the - timer channel has no associated data. -
- - Eread waits for the next event specified by the mask keys of event - keys submitted to estart. It fills in the appropriate field of - the argument Event structure, which looks like:
- -
- - struct Event
- {
- -
- - int     kbdc;
- Mouse mouse;
- int     n;
- void    *v;
- uchar data[EMAXMSG];
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- Data is an array which is large enough to hold a 9P message. Eread - returns the key for the event which was chosen. For example, if - a mouse event was read, Emouse will be returned. -
- - Event waits for the next event of any kind. The return is the - same as for eread. -
- - As described in graphics(3), the graphics functions are buffered. - Event, eread, emouse, and ekbd all cause a buffer flush unless - there is an event of the appropriate type already queued. -
- - Ecanread checks whether a call to eread(keys) would block, returning - 0 if it would, 1 if it would not. -
- - Getrect prompts the user to sweep a rectangle. It should be called - with m holding the mouse event that triggered the egetrect (or, - if none, a Mouse with buttons set to 7). It changes to the sweep - cursor, waits for the buttons all to be released, and then waits - for button number but to be pressed, marking the initial - corner. If another button is pressed instead, egetrect returns - a rectangle with zero for both corners, after waiting for all - the buttons to be released. Otherwise, egetrect continually draws - the swept rectangle until the button is released again, and returns - the swept rectangle. The mouse structure pointed to by m will - contain the final mouse event. -
- - Egetrect uses successive calls to edrawgetrect to maintain the - red rectangle showing the sweep-in-progress. The rectangle to - be drawn is specified by rc and the up parameter says whether - to draw (1) or erase (0) the rectangle. -
- - Emenuhit displays a menu and returns a selected menu item number. - It should be called with m holding the mouse event that triggered - the emenuhit; it will call emouse to update it. A Menu is a structure:
- -
- - struct Menu
- {
- -
- - char    **item;
- char    *(*gen)(int);
- int     lasthit;
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- If item is nonzero, it should be a null-terminated array of the - character strings to be displayed as menu items. Otherwise, gen - should be a function that, given an item number, returns the character - string for that item, or zero if the number is past the end of - the list. Items are numbered starting at zero. Menuhit - waits until but is released, and then returns the number of the - selection, or –1 for no selection. The m argument is filled in - with the final mouse event. -
- - Emoveto moves the mouse cursor to the position p on the screen. - -
- - Esetcursor changes the cursor image to that described by the Cursor - c (see mouse(3)). If c is nil, it restores the image to the default - arrow.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rio(1), graphics(3), plumb(3), draw(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Etimer and estart are unimplemented.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/exec.html b/man/man3/exec.html deleted file mode 100644 index e5397352..00000000 --- a/man/man3/exec.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,146 +0,0 @@ - -exec(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
EXEC(3)EXEC(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - exec, execl – execute a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int exec(char *name, char* argv[])
- -
- - int execl(char *name, ...)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Exec and execl overlay the calling process with the named file, - then transfer to the entry point of the image of the file. -
- - Name points to the name of the file to be executed; it must not - be a directory, and the permissions must allow the current user - to execute it (see stat(3)). It should also be a valid binary - image, as defined by the local operating system, or a shell script - (see rc(1)). The first line of a shell script must begin with - #! followed - by the name of the program to interpret the file and any initial - arguments to that program, for example
- -
- - #!/bin/rc
- ls | mc
- -
- - -
- When a C program is executed, it is called as follows:
- -
- - void main(int argc, char *argv[])
- -
- - -
- Argv is a copy of the array of argument pointers passed to exec; - that array must end in a null pointer, and argc is the number - of elements before the null pointer. By convention, the first - argument should be the name of the program to be executed. Execl - is like exec except that argv will be an array of the parameters - that follow name in the call. The last argument to execl must - be a null pointer. -
- - For a file beginning #!, the arguments passed to the program (/bin/rc - in the example above) will be the name of the file being executed, - any arguments on the #! line, the name of the file again, and - finally the second and subsequent arguments given to the original - exec call. The result honors the two conventions - of a program accepting as argument a file to be interpreted and - argv[0] naming the file being executed. -
- - Most attributes of the calling process are carried into the result; - in particular, files remain open across exec (except those opened - with OCEXEC OR’d into the open mode; see open(3)); and the working - directory and environment (see getenv(3)) remain the same. However, - a newly exec’ed process has no notification - handlers (see notify(3)).
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/exec.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/execl.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - prof(1), intro(3), stat(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - If these functions fail, they return and set errstr. There can - be no return from a successful exec or execl; the calling image - is lost.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - On Unix, unlike on Plan 9, exec and execl use the user’s current - path to locate prog. This is a clumsy way to deal with Unix’s - lack of a union directory for /bin. -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, exec and execl - are preprocessor macros defined as p9exec and p9execl; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/exits.html b/man/man3/exits.html deleted file mode 100644 index cc94a468..00000000 --- a/man/man3/exits.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,126 +0,0 @@ - -exits(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
EXITS(3)EXITS(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - exits, _exits, atexit, atexitdont, terminate – terminate process, - process cleanup
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - void _exits(char *msg)
- void exits(char *msg)
- -
- - int    atexit(void(*)(void))
- -
- - void atexitdont(void(*)(void))
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Exits is the conventional way to terminate a process. _Exits also - terminates a process but does not call the registered atexit handlers - (q.v.). They can never return. -
- - Msg conventionally includes a brief (maximum length ERRLEN) explanation - of the reason for exiting, or a null pointer or empty string to - indicate normal termination. The string is passed to the parent - process, prefixed by the name and process id of the exiting process, - when the parent does a wait(3). -
- - Before calling _exits with msg as an argument, exits calls in - reverse order all the functions recorded by atexit. -
- - Atexit records fn as a function to be called by exits. It returns - zero if it failed, nonzero otherwise. A typical use is to register - a cleanup routine for an I/O package. To simplify programs that - fork or share memory, exits only calls those atexit-registered - functions that were registered by the same process as that calling - exits. -
- - Calling atexit twice (or more) with the same function argument - causes exits to invoke the function twice (or more). -
- - There is a limit to the number of exit functions that will be - recorded; atexit returns 0 if that limit has been reached. -
- - Atexitdont cancels a previous registration of an exit function.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/atexit.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/_exits.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - fork(2), wait(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Because of limitations of Unix, the exit status of a process can - only be an 8-bit integer. Exit status 0 is used for empty exit - messages, and 1 for non-empty messages. -
- - Exit codes 97 through 99 are used by the thread library to signal - internal synchronization errors between the main program and a - proxy process that implements backgrounding. -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, atexit and - atexitdont are preprocessor macros defined as p9atexit and p9atexitdont; - see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/fcall.html b/man/man3/fcall.html deleted file mode 100644 index 926b47dc..00000000 --- a/man/man3/fcall.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,274 +0,0 @@ - -fcall(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FCALL(3)FCALL(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Fcall, convS2M, convD2M, convM2S, convM2D, fcallfmt, dirfmt, dirmodefmt, - read9pmsg, statcheck, sizeS2M, sizeD2M – interface to Plan 9 File - protocol
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <fcall.h> -
- - uint convS2M(Fcall *f, uchar *ap, uint nap) -
- - uint convD2M(Dir *d, uchar *ap, uint nap) -
- - uint convM2S(uchar *ap, uint nap, Fcall *f) -
- - uint convM2D(uchar *ap, uint nap, Dir *d, char *strs) -
- - int dirfmt(Fmt*) -
- - int fcallfmt(Fmt*) -
- - int dirmodefmt(Fmt*) -
- - int read9pmsg(int fd, uchar *buf, uint nbuf) -
- - int statcheck(uchar *buf, uint nbuf) -
- - uint sizeS2M(Fcall *f) -
- - uint sizeD2M(Dir *d)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines convert messages in the machine-independent format - of the Plan 9 file protocol, 9P, to and from a more convenient - form, an Fcall structure: -
- - #define MAXWELEM 16
- typedef
- struct Fcall
- {
- -
- - uchar type;
- u32int      fid;
- ushort      tag;
- union {
- -
- - struct {
- u32int msize;              /* Tversion, Rversion */
- char     *version;           /* Tversion, Rversion */
- };
- struct {
- ushort oldtag;             /* Tflush */
- };
- struct {
- char     *ename;             /* Rerror */
- };
- struct {
- Qid      qid;                /* Rattach, Ropen, Rcreate */
- u32int iounit;             /* Ropen, Rcreate */
- };
- struct {
- Qid      aqid;               /* Rauth */
- };
- struct {
- u32int afid;               /* Tauth, Tattach */
- char     *uname;             /* Tauth, Tattach */
- char     *aname;             /* Tauth, Tattach */
- };
- struct {
- u32int perm;               /* Tcreate */
- char     *name;              /* Tcreate */
- uchar    mode;               /* Tcreate, Topen */
- };
- struct {
- u32int newfid;             /* Twalk */
- ushort nwname;             /* Twalk */
- char     *wname[MAXWELEM];    /* Twalk */
- };
- struct {
- ushort nwqid;              /* Rwalk */
- Qid      wqid[MAXWELEM];      /* Rwalk */
- };
- struct {
- vlong    offset;             /* Tread, Twrite */
- u32int count;              /* Tread, Twrite, Rread */
- char     *data;              /* Twrite, Rread */
- };
- struct {
- ushort nstat;              /* Twstat, Rstat */
- uchar    *stat;              /* Twstat, Rstat */
- };
- -
- };
- -
- } Fcall;
- /* these are implemented as macros */
- uchar       GBIT8(uchar*)
- ushort      GBIT16(uchar*)
- ulong       GBIT32(uchar*)
- vlong       GBIT64(uchar*)
- void        PBIT8(uchar*, uchar)
- void        PBIT16(uchar*, ushort)
- void        PBIT32(uchar*, ulong)
- void        PBIT64(uchar*, vlong)
- #define     BIT8SZ       1
- #define     BIT16SZ      2
- #define     BIT32SZ      4
- #define     BIT64SZ      8
- -
- - This structure is defined in <fcall.h>. See section 5 for a full - description of 9P messages and their encoding. For all message - types, the type field of an Fcall holds one of Tversion, Rversion, - Tattach, Rattach, etc. (defined in an enumerated type in <fcall.h>). - Fid is used by most messages, and - tag is used by all messages. The other fields are used selectively - by the message types given in comments. -
- - ConvM2S takes a 9P message at ap of length nap, and uses it to - fill in Fcall structure f. If the passed message including any - data for Twrite and Rread messages is formatted properly, the - return value is the number of bytes the message occupied in the - buffer ap, which will always be less than or equal to nap; - otherwise it is 0. For Twrite and Tread messages, data is set - to a pointer into the argument message, not a copy. -
- - ConvS2M does the reverse conversion, turning f into a message - starting at ap. The length of the resulting message is returned. - For Twrite and Rread messages, count bytes starting at data are - copied into the message. -
- - The constant IOHDRSZ is a suitable amount of buffer to reserve - for storing the 9P header; the data portion of a Twrite or Rread - will be no more than the buffer size negotiated in the Tversion/Rversion - exchange, minus IOHDRSZ. -
- - The routine sizeS2M returns the number of bytes required to store - the machine-independent representation of the Fcall structure - f, including its initial 32-bit size field. In other words, it - reports the number of bytes produced by a successful call to convS2M. - -
- - Another structure is Dir, used by the routines described in stat(3). - ConvM2D converts the machine-independent form starting at ap into - d and returns the length of the machine-independent encoding. - The strings in the returned Dir structure are stored at successive - locations starting at strs. Usually strs will - point to storage immediately after the Dir itself. It can also - be a nil pointer, in which case the string pointers in the returned - Dir are all nil; however, the return value still includes their - length. -
- - ConvD2M does the reverse translation, also returning the length - of the encoding. If the buffer is too short, the return value - will be BIT16SZ and the correct size will be returned in the first - BIT16SZ bytes. (If the buffer is less that BIT16SZ, the return - value is zero; therefore a correct test for complete packing of - the - message is that the return value is greater than BIT16SZ). The - macro GBIT16 can be used to extract the correct value. The related - macros with different sizes retrieve the corresponding-sized quantities. - PBIT16 and its brethren place values in messages. With the exception - of handling short buffers in convD2M, - these macros are not usually needed except by internal routines. - -
- - Analogous to sizeS2M, sizeD2M returns the number of bytes required - to store the machine-independent representation of the Dir structure - d, including its initial 16-bit size field. -
- - The routine statcheck checks whether the nbuf bytes of buf contain - a validly formatted machine-independent Dir entry suitable as - an argument, for example, for the wstat (see stat(3)) system call. - It checks that the sizes of all the elements of the the entry - sum to exactly nbuf, which is a simple but effective test - of validity. Nbuf and buf should include the second two-byte (16-bit) - length field that precedes the entry when formatted in a 9P message - (see stat(9p)); in other words, nbuf is 2 plus the sum of the - sizes of the entry itself. Statcheck also verifies that the length - field has the correct value (that is, nbuf−2). It returns 0 - for a valid entry and −1 for an incorrectly formatted entry. -
- - Dirfmt, fcallfmt, and dirmodefmt are formatting routines, suitable - for fmtinstall(3). They convert Dir*, Fcall*, and long values - into string representations of the directory buffer, Fcall buffer, - or file mode value. Fcallfmt assumes that dirfmt has been installed - with format letter D and dirmodefmt with format - letter M. -
- - Read9pmsg calls read(3) multiple times, if necessary, to read - an entire 9P message into buf. The return value is 0 for end of - file, or -1 for error; it does not return partial messages.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), 9p(3), stat(3), intro(9p)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/flate.html b/man/man3/flate.html deleted file mode 100644 index 41591034..00000000 --- a/man/man3/flate.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,333 +0,0 @@ - -flate(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FLATE(3)FLATE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - deflateinit, deflate, deflatezlib, deflateblock, deflatezlibblock, - inflateinit, inflate, inflatezlib, inflateblock, inflatezlibblock, - flateerr, mkcrctab, blockcrc, adler32 – deflate compression
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <flate.h> -
- - -
- - int      deflateinit(void) -
- - int      deflate(void *wr, int (*w)(void*,void*,int),
- -
- - -
- - void *rr, int (*r)(void*,void*,int),
- int level, int debug) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int      deflatezlib(void *wr, int (*w)(void*,void*,int),
- -
- - -
- - void *rr, int (*r)(void*,void*,int),
- int level, int debug) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int      deflateblock(uchar *dst, int dsize,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *src, int ssize,
- int level, int debug) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int      deflatezlibblock(uchar *dst, int dsize,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *src, int ssize,
- int level, int debug) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int      inflateinit(void) -
- - int      inflate(void *wr, int (*w)(void*, void*, int),
- -
- - -
- - void *getr, int (*get)(void*)) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int      inflatezlib(void *wr, int (*w)(void*, void*, int),
- -
- - -
- - void *getr, int (*get)(void*)) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int      inflateblock(uchar *dst, int dsize,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *src, int ssize) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int      inflatezlibblock(uchar *dst, int dsize,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *src, int ssize) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- char     *flateerr(int error) -
- - ulong    *mkcrctab(ulong poly) -
- - ulong    blockcrc(ulong *tab, ulong crc, void *buf, int n) -
- - ulong    adler32(ulong adler, void *buf, int n)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines compress and decompress data using the deflate - compression algorithm, which is used for most gzip, zip, and zlib - files. -
- - Deflate compresses input data retrieved by calls to r with arguments - rr, an input buffer, and a count of bytes to read. R should return - the number of bytes read; end of input is signaled by returning - zero, an input error by returning a negative number. The compressed - output is written to w with arguments wr, the - output data, and the number of bytes to write. W should return - the number of bytes written; writing fewer than the requested - number of bytes is an error. Level indicates the amount of computation - deflate should do while compressing the data. Higher levels usually - take more time and produce smaller outputs. Valid - values are 1 to 9, inclusive; 6 is a good compromise. If debug - is non-zero, cryptic debugging information is produced on standard - error. -
- - Inflate reverses the process, converting compressed data into - uncompressed output. Input is retrieved one byte at a time by - calling get with the argument getr. End of input of signaled by - returning a negative value. The uncompressed output is written - to w, which has the same interface as for deflate. -
- - Deflateblock and inflateblock operate on blocks of memory but - are otherwise similar to deflate and inflate. -
- - The zlib functions are similar, but operate on files with a zlib - header and trailer. -
- - Deflateinit or inflateinit must be called once before any call - to the corresponding routines. -
- - If the above routines fail, they return a negative number indicating - the problem. The possible values are FlateNoMem, FlateInputFail, - FlateOutputFail, FlateCorrupted, and FlateInternal. Flateerr converts - the number into a printable message. FlateOk is defined to be - zero, the successful return value for deflateinit, - deflate, deflatezlib, inflateinit, inflate, and inflatezlib. The - block functions return the number of bytes produced when they - succeed. -
- - Mkcrctab allocates (using malloc(3)), initializes, and returns - a table for rapid computation of 32 bit CRC values using the polynomial - poly. Blockcrc uses tab, a table returned by mkcrctab, to update - crc for the n bytes of data in buf, and returns the new value. - Crc should initially be zero. Blockcrc pre-conditions and - post-conditions crc by ones complementation. -
- - Adler32 updates the Adler 32-bit checksum of the n butes of data - in buf. The initial value of adler (that is, its value after seeing - zero bytes) should be 1.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libflate
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/fmtinstall.html b/man/man3/fmtinstall.html deleted file mode 100644 index 848c1333..00000000 --- a/man/man3/fmtinstall.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,339 +0,0 @@ - -fmtinstall(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FMTINSTALL(3)FMTINSTALL(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - fmtinstall, dofmt, dorfmt, fmtprint, fmtvprint, fmtrune, fmtstrcpy, - fmtrunestrcpy, fmtfdinit, fmtfdflush, fmtstrinit, fmtstrflush, - runefmtstrinit, runefmtstrflush, errfmt – support for user-defined - print formats and output routines
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - typedef struct Fmt    Fmt;
- struct Fmt{
- -
- - uchar     runes;    /* output buffer is runes or chars? */
- void      *start; /* of buffer */
- void      *to;      /* current place in the buffer */
- void      *stop;    /* end of the buffer; overwritten if flush fails */
- int       (*flush)(Fmt*);/* called when to == stop */
- void      *farg;    /* to make flush a closure */
- int       nfmt;     /* num chars formatted so far */
- va_list args;     /* args passed to dofmt */
- int       r;        /* % format Rune */
- int       width;
- int       prec;
- ulong     flags;
- -
- };
- enum{
- -
- - FmtWidth      = 1,
- FmtLeft       = FmtWidth << 1,
- FmtPrec       = FmtLeft << 1,
- FmtSharp      = FmtPrec << 1,
- FmtSpace      = FmtSharp << 1,
- FmtSign       = FmtSpace << 1,
- FmtZero       = FmtSign << 1,
- FmtUnsigned = FmtZero << 1,
- FmtShort      = FmtUnsigned << 1,
- FmtLong       = FmtShort << 1,
- FmtVLong      = FmtLong << 1,
- FmtComma      = FmtVLong << 1,
- FmtFlag       = FmtComma << 1
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- - int     fmtfdinit(Fmt *f, int fd, char *buf, int nbuf); -
- - int     fmtfdflush(Fmt *f); -
- - int     fmtstrinit(Fmt *f); -
- - char* fmtstrflush(Fmt *f); -
- - int     runefmtstrinit(Fmt *f); -
- - Rune* runefmtstrflush(Fmt *f);
- -
- - int     fmtinstall(int c, int (*fn)(Fmt*)); -
- - int     dofmt(Fmt *f, char *fmt); -
- - int     dorfmt(Fmt*, Rune *fmt); -
- - int     fmtprint(Fmt *f, char *fmt, ...); -
- - int     fmtvprint(Fmt *f, char *fmt, va_list v); -
- - int     fmtrune(Fmt *f, int r); -
- - int     fmtstrcpy(Fmt *f, char *s); -
- - int     fmtrunestrcpy(Fmt *f, Rune *s); -
- - int     errfmt(Fmt *f);
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The interface described here allows the construction of custom - print(3) verbs and output routines. In essence, they provide access - to the workings of the formatted print code. -
- - The print(3) suite maintains its state with a data structure called - Fmt. A typical call to print(3) or its relatives initializes a - Fmt structure, passes it to subsidiary routines to process the - output, and finishes by emitting any saved state recorded in the - Fmt. The details of the Fmt are unimportant to outside users, - except - insofar as the general design influences the interface. The Fmt - records whether the output is in runes or bytes, the verb being - processed, its precision and width, and buffering parameters. - Most important, it also records a flush routine that the library - will call if a buffer overflows. When printing to a file descriptor, - the - flush routine will emit saved characters and reset the buffer; - when printing to an allocated string, it will resize the string - to receive more output. The flush routine is nil when printing - to fixed-size buffers. User code need never provide a flush routine; - this is done internally by the library.
-

Custom output routines
- To write a custom output routine, such as an error handler that - formats and prints custom error messages, the output sequence - can be run from outside the library using the routines described - here. There are two main cases: output to an open file descriptor - and output to a string. -
- - To write to a file descriptor, call fmtfdinit to initialize the - local Fmt structure f, giving the file descriptor fd, the buffer - buf, and its size nbuf. Then call fmtprint or fmtvprint to generate - the output. These behave like fprint (see print(3)) or vfprint - except that the characters are buffered until fmtfdflush is called - and the return value is either 0 or –1. A typical example of this - sequence appears in the Examples section. -
- - The same basic sequence applies when outputting to an allocated - string: call fmtstrinit to initialize the Fmt, then call fmtprint - and fmtvprint to generate the output. Finally, fmtstrflush will - return the allocated string, which should be freed after use. - To output to a rune string, use runefmtstrinit and runefmtstrflush. - Regardless of the output style or type, fmtprint or fmtvprint - generates the characters.
-

Custom format verbs
- Fmtinstall is used to install custom verbs and flags labeled by - character c, which may be any non-zero Unicode character. Fn should - be declared as
- -
- - int     fn(Fmt*)
- -
- - -
- Fp−>r is the flag or verb character to cause fn to be called. In - fn, fp−>width, fp−>prec are the width and precision, and fp−>flags - the decoded flags for the verb (see print(3) for a description - of these items). The standard flag values are: FmtSign (+), FmtLeft - (−), FmtSpace (' '), FmtSharp (#), - FmtComma (,), FmtLong (l), FmtShort (h), FmtUnsigned (u), and - FmtVLong (ll). The flag bits FmtWidth and FmtPrec identify whether - a width and precision were specified. -
- - Fn is passed a pointer to the Fmt structure recording the state - of the output. If fp−>r is a verb (rather than a flag), fn should - use Fmt−>args to fetch its argument from the list, then format - it, and return zero. If fp−>r is a flag, fn should return one. - All interpretation of fp−>width, fp−>prec, and fp->flags is - left up to the conversion routine. Fmtinstall returns 0 if the - installation succeeds, –1 if it fails. -
- - Fmtprint and fmtvprint may be called to help prepare output in - custom conversion routines. However, these functions clear the - width, precision, and flags. Both functions return 0 for success - and –1 for failure. -
- - The functions dofmt and dorfmt are the underlying formatters; - they use the existing contents of Fmt and should be called only - by sophisticated conversion routines. These routines return the - number of characters (bytes of UTF or runes) produced. -
- - Some internal functions may be useful to format primitive types. - They honor the width, precision and flags as described in print(3). - Fmtrune formats a single character r. Fmtstrcpy formats a string - s; fmtrunestrcpy formats a rune string s. Errfmt formats the system - error string. All these routines return zero for - successful execution. Conversion routines that call these functions - will work properly regardless of whether the output is bytes or - runes.
- -

-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - This function prints an error message with a variable number of - arguments and then quits. Compared to the corresponding example - in print(3), this version uses a smaller buffer, will never truncate - the output message, but might generate multiple write system calls - to produce its output. - -
- - #pragma    varargck argpos    error     1
- void fatal(char *fmt, ...)
- {
- -
- - Fmt f;
- char buf[64];
- va_list arg;
- fmtfdinit(&f, 1, buf, sizeof buf);
- fmtprint(&f, "fatal: ");
- va_start(arg, fmt);
- fmtvprint(&f, fmt, arg);
- va_end(arg);
- fmtprint(&f, "\n");
- fmtfdflush(&f);
- exits("fatal error");
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- This example adds a verb to print complex numbers.
- -
- - typedef
- struct {
- -
- - double    r, i;
- -
- } Complex;
- #pragma    varargck type "X" Complex
- int
- Xfmt(Fmt *f)
- {
- -
- - Complex c;
- c = va_arg(f−>args, Complex);
- return fmtprint(f, "(%g,%g)", c.r, c.i);
- -
- }
- main(...)
- {
- -
- - Complex x = (Complex){ 1.5, −2.3 };
- fmtinstall('X', Xfmt);
- print("x = %X\n", x);
- -
- }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/fmt
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - print(3), utf(7), errstr(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - These routines return negative numbers or nil for errors and set - errstr.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/frame.html b/man/man3/frame.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4a80453c..00000000 --- a/man/man3/frame.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,325 +0,0 @@ - -frame(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FRAME(3)FRAME(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - frinit, frsetrects, frinittick, frclear, frcharofpt, frptofchar, - frinsert, frdelete, frselect, frtick, frselectpaint, frdrawsel, - frdrawsel0, frgetmouse – frames of text
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h>
- #include <thread.h>
- #include <mouse.h>
- #include <frame.h>
- -
- - void    frinit(Frame *f, Rectangle r, Font *ft, Image *b, Image **cols)
- -
- - void    frsetrects(Frame *f, Rectangle r, Image *b)
- -
- - void    frinittick(Frame *f)
- -
- - void    frclear(Frame *f, int resize)
- -
- - ulong frcharofpt(Frame *f, Point pt)
- -
- - Point frptofchar(Frame *f, ulong p)
- -
- - void    frinsert(Frame *f, Rune *r0, Rune *r1, ulong p)
- -
- - int     frdelete(Frame *f, ulong p0, ulong p1)
- -
- - void    frselect(Frame *f, Mousectl *m)
- -
- - void    frtick(Frame *f, Point pt, int up)
- -
- - void    frselectpaint(Frame *f, Point p0, Point p1, Image *col)
- -
- - void    frdrawsel(Frame *f, Point pt0, ulong p0, ulong p1,
- -
- - -
- - int highlighted)
- -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- void    frdrawsel0(Frame *f, Point pt0, ulong p0, ulong p1,
- -
- - -
- - Image *back, Image *text)
- -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- enum{
- -
- - BACK,
- HIGH,
- BORD,
- TEXT,
- HTEXT,
- NCOL
- -
- };
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - This library supports frames of editable text in a single font - on raster displays, such as in sam(1) and 9term(1). Frames may - hold any character except NUL (0). Long lines are folded and tabs - are at fixed intervals. -
- - The user-visible data structure, a Frame, is defined in <frame.h>:
- -
- - typedef struct Frame Frame;
- struct Frame
- {
- -
- - Font        *font;           /* of chars in the frame */
- Display     *display;         /* on which frame appears */
- Image       *b;              /* on which frame appears */
- Image       *cols[NCOL];      /* text and background colors */
- Rectangle r;               /* in which text appears */
- Rectangle entire;           /* of full frame */
- Frbox       *box;
- ulong       p0, p1;           /* selection */
- ushort      nbox, nalloc;
- ushort      maxtab;           /* max size of tab, in pixels */
- ushort      nchars;           /* # runes in frame */
- ushort      nlines;           /* # lines with text */
- ushort      maxlines;         /* total # lines in frame */
- ushort      lastlinefull;     /* last line fills frame */
- ushort      modified;         /* changed since frselect() */
- Image       *tick;           /* typing tick */
- Image       *tickback;        /* saved image under tick */
- int         ticked;           /* flag: is tick onscreen? */
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- Frbox is an internal type and is not used by the interface. P0 - and p1 may be changed by the application provided the selection - routines are called afterwards to maintain a consistent display. - Maxtab determines the size of tab stops. Frinit sets it to 8 times - the width of a 0 (zero) character in the font; it may be - changed before any text is added to the frame. The other elements - of the structure are maintained by the library and should not - be modified directly. -
- - The text within frames is not directly addressable; instead frames - are designed to work alongside another structure that holds the - text. The typical application is to display a section of a longer - document such as a text file or terminal session. Usually the - program will keep its own copy of the text in the window - (probably as an array of Runes) and pass components of this text - to the frame routines to display the visible portion. Only the - text that is visible is held by the Frame; the application must - check maxlines, nlines, and lastlinefull to determine, for example, - whether new text needs to be appended at the - end of the Frame after calling frdelete (q.v.). -
- - There are no routines in the library to allocate Frames; instead - the interface assumes that Frames will be components of larger - structures. Frinit prepares the Frame f so characters drawn in - it will appear in the single Font ft. It then calls frsetrects - and frinittick to initialize the geometry for the Frame. The Image - b is where the Frame is to be drawn; Rectangle r defines the limit - of the portion of the Image the text will occupy. The Image pointer - may be null, allowing the other routines to be called to maintain - the associated data structure in, for example, an obscured window. - -
- - The array of Images cols sets the colors in which text and borders - will be drawn. The background of the frame will be drawn in cols[BACK]; - the background of highlighted text in cols[HIGH]; borders and - scroll bar in cols[BORD]; regular text in cols[TEXT]; and highlighted - text in cols[HTEXT]. -
- - Frclear frees the internal structures associated with f, permitting - another frinit or frsetrects on the Frame. It does not clear the - associated display. If f is to be deallocated, the associated - Font and Image must be freed separately. The resize argument should - be non-zero if the frame is to be redrawn with a - different font; otherwise the frame will maintain some data structures - associated with the font. -
- - To resize a Frame, use frclear and frinit and then frinsert (q.v.) - to recreate the display. If a Frame is being moved but not resized, - that is, if the shape of its containing rectangle is unchanged, - it is sufficient to use draw(3) to copy the containing rectangle - from the old to the new location and then call frsetrects to - establish the new geometry. (It is unnecessary to call frinittick - unless the font size has changed.) No redrawing is necessary. - -
- - Frames hold text as runes, not as bytes. Frptofchar returns the - location of the upper left corner of the p’th rune, starting from - 0, in the Frame f. If f holds fewer than p runes, frptofchar returns - the location of the upper right corner of the last character in - f. Frcharofpt is the inverse: it returns the index of the closest - rune whose image’s upper left corner is up and to the left of - pt. -
- - Frinsert inserts into Frame f starting at rune index p the runes - between r0 and r1. If a NUL (0) character is inserted, chaos will - ensue. Tabs and newlines are handled by the library, but all other - characters, including control characters, are just displayed. - For example, backspaces are printed; to erase a character, use - frdelete. -
- - Frdelete deletes from the Frame the text between p0 and p1; p1 - points at the first rune beyond the deletion. -
- - Frselect tracks the mouse to select a contiguous string of text - in the Frame. When called, a mouse button is typically down. Frselect - will return when the button state has changed (some buttons may - still be down) and will set f−>p0 and f−>p1 to the selected range - of text. -
- - Programs that wish to manage the selection themselves have several - routines to help. They involve the maintenance of the ‘tick’, - the vertical line indicating a null selection between characters, - and the colored region representing a non-null selection. Frtick - draws (if up is non-zero) or removes (if up is zero) the tick - at - the screen position indicated by pt. Frdrawsel repaints a section - of the frame, delimited by character positions p0 and p1, either - with plain background or entirely highlighted, according to the - flag highlighted, managing the tick appropriately. The point pt0 - is the geometrical location of p0 on the screen; like all of the - selection-helper routines’ Point arguments, it must be a value - generated by frptofchar. Frdrawsel0 is a lower-level routine, - taking as arguments a background color, back, and text color, - text. It assumes that the tick is being handled (removed beforehand, - replaced afterwards, as required) by its caller. Frselectpaint - uses a solid color, col, to paint a region of the frame defined - by the Points p0 and p1.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libframe
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), draw(3), cachechars(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/genrandom.html b/man/man3/genrandom.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0cddd21d..00000000 --- a/man/man3/genrandom.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ - -genrandom(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GENRANDOM(3)GENRANDOM(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - genrandom, prng – random number generation
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - void genrandom(uchar *buf, int nbytes) -
- - void prng(uchar *buf, int nbytes)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Most security software requires a source of random or, at the - very least, unguessable numbers. -
- - Genrandom fills a buffer with bytes from the X9.17 pseudo-random - number generator. The X9.17 generator is seeded by 24 truly random - bytes read via truerand (see rand(3)). -
- - Prng uses the native rand(3) pseudo-random number generator to - fill the buffer. Used with srand, this function can produce a - reproducible stream of pseudo random numbers useful in testing. - -
- - Both functions may be passed to mprand (see mp(3)).
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mp(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/get9root.html b/man/man3/get9root.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6ca02c02..00000000 --- a/man/man3/get9root.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ - -get9root(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GET9ROOT(3)GET9ROOT(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - get9root, unsharp – get path to root of Plan 9 tree
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - char*       get9root(void) -
- - char*       unsharp(char *path)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - This tree of Plan 9 software is conventionally installed in /usr/local/plan9 - but may be installed in other places (for example, users without - the ability to write to /usr/local may with to install it in their - own home directories). The environment variable $PLAN9 should - contain the path to the root. Get9root - returns a static pointer to the pathname of root, first checking - $PLAN9 and defaulting to /usr/local/plan9. -
- - The lack of a fixed location for the Plan 9 tree makes it difficult - to hard-code paths to files. Unsharp replaces a leading #9 in - path with the root of the tree. Unsharp also replaces a leading - #d with the path to the underlying system’s file descriptor dup - device, typically /dev/fd. The string returned from unsharp, if - different from path, should be freed with free (see malloc(3)) - when no longer needed. -
- - As a convention, programs should never unsharp paths obtained - from user input.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - The plumber(4) uses this code to find unrooted file names included - by plumb rules.
- -
- - snprint(buf, sizeof buf, "#9/plumb/%s", name);
- fd = open(unsharp(buf), OREAD);
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/getns.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(4)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Get9root could be smarter about finding the tree when $PLAN9 is - not set.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/getcallerpc.html b/man/man3/getcallerpc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 72a835d1..00000000 --- a/man/man3/getcallerpc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,99 +0,0 @@ - -getcallerpc(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GETCALLERPC(3)GETCALLERPC(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - getcallerpc – fetch return PC of current function
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - ulong getcallerpc(void *firstarg)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Getcallerpc is a portable way to discover the PC to which the - current function will return. Firstarg should be a pointer to - the first argument to the function in question.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - -
- - void
- printpc(ulong arg)
- {
- -
- - print("Called from %.8lux\n", getcallerpc(&arg));
- -
- }
- void
- main(int argc, char *argv[])
- {
- -
- - printpc(0);
- printpc(0);
- printpc(0);
- -
- }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The firstarg parameter should not be necessary.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/getenv.html b/man/man3/getenv.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5b51354c..00000000 --- a/man/man3/getenv.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ - -getenv(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GETENV(3)GETENV(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - getenv, putenv – access environment variables
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - char* getenv(char *name)
- int     putenv(char *name, char *val)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Getenv fetches the environment value associated with name into - memory allocated with malloc(3), 0-terminates it, and returns - a pointer to that area. If no file exists, 0 is returned. -
- - Putenv sets the environment value associated with name to val.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/getenv.c
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Sets errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, getenv and - putenv are preprocessor macros defined as p9getenv and p9putenv; - see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/getfields.html b/man/man3/getfields.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7c1d8f64..00000000 --- a/man/man3/getfields.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,136 +0,0 @@ - -getfields(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GETFIELDS(3)GETFIELDS(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - getfields, gettokens, tokenize – break a string into fields
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int     getfields(char *str, char **args, int maxargs, int multiflag,
- -
- - -
- - char *delims) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int     gettokens(char *str, char **args, int maxargs, char *delims) - -
- - int     tokenize(char *str, char **args, int maxargs)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Getfields places into the array args pointers to the first maxargs - fields of the null terminated UTF string str. Delimiters between - these fields are set to null. -
- - Fields are substrings of str whose definition depends on the value - of multiflag. If multiflag is zero, adjacent fields are separated - by exactly one delimiter. For example
- -
- - -
- - getfields("#alice#bob##charles###", arg, 3, 0, "#");
- -
- -
- yields three substrings: null-string , alice, and bob##charles###. - If the multiflag argument is not zero, a field is a non-empty - string of non-delimiters. For example
- -
- - -
- - getfields("#alice#bob##charles###", arg, 3, 1, "#");
- -
- -
- yields the three substrings: alice, bob, and charles###. -
- - Getfields returns the number of fields pointed to. -
- - Gettokens is the same as getfields with multiflag non-zero, except - that fields may be quoted using single quotes, in the manner of - rc(1). See quote(3) for related quote-handling software. -
- - Tokenize is gettokens with delims set to "\t\r\n ".
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/tokenize.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - strtok in strcat(3), quote(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/getns.html b/man/man3/getns.html deleted file mode 100644 index e5da2bb2..00000000 --- a/man/man3/getns.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ - -getns(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GETNS(3)GETNS(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - getns – get path to name space directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - char*       getns(void)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Getns returns a pointer to a malloced string that contains the - path to the name space directory for the current process. The - name space directory is a clumsy substitute for Plan 9’s per-process - name spaces; see intro(4) for details.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/getns.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(4)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/getsnarf.html b/man/man3/getsnarf.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3f3e7512..00000000 --- a/man/man3/getsnarf.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,73 +0,0 @@ - -getsnarf(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GETSNARF(3)GETSNARF(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - getsnarf, putsnarf – window system snarf (cut and paste) buffer
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <draw.h> -
- - char *getsnarf(void) -
- - void putsnarf(char *text)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Getsnarf and putsnarf access the window system’s snarf (cut and - paste) buffer. -
- - Getsnarf returns a copy of the current buffer; the returned pointer - should be freed with free (see malloc(3)) when no longer needed. - -
- - Putsnarf sets the buffer to the text string text. -
- - Callers should assume that the snarf buffer is UTF. If the window - system does not keep the buffer in UTF, getsnarf and putsnarf - will convert as necessary.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw/x11−itrans.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/getuser.html b/man/man3/getuser.html deleted file mode 100644 index c34b23cf..00000000 --- a/man/man3/getuser.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,75 +0,0 @@ - -getuser(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GETUSER(3)GETUSER(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - getuser, sysname – get user or system name
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - char*       getuser(void) -
- - char*       sysname(void)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Getuser returns a pointer to static data which contains the null-terminated - name of the user who owns the current process. Getuser calls getuid(2) - and then reads /etc/passwd to find the corresponding name. -
- - Sysname returns a pointer to static data which contains the name - of the machine on which the current process is running. Sysname - looks first for an environment variable $sysname. If there is - no such variable, sysname calls gethostname(2) and truncates the - returned name at the first dot. If gethostname fails, - sysname returns the default name gnot. -
- - Unlike getuser, sysname caches the string, deriving the host name - only once.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/getuser.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/sysname.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/getwd.html b/man/man3/getwd.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1f5d2288..00000000 --- a/man/man3/getwd.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,84 +0,0 @@ - -getwd(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GETWD(3)GETWD(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - getwd – get current directory
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - char* getwd(char *buf, int size)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Getwd fills buf with a null-terminated string representing the - current directory and returns buf. -
- - Getwd places no more than size bytes in the buffer provided.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/getwd.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - pwd(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - On error, zero is returned. Errstr(3) may be consulted for more - information.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, getwd is a - preprocessor macro defined as p9getwd; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/graphics.html b/man/man3/graphics.html deleted file mode 100644 index 92f08c00..00000000 --- a/man/man3/graphics.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,592 +0,0 @@ - -graphics(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
GRAPHICS(3)GRAPHICS(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Display, Point, Rectangle, Cursor, initdraw, geninitdraw, drawerror, - initdisplay, closedisplay, getdefont, getwindow, gengetwindow, - flushimage, bufimage, lockdisplay, unlockdisplay, cursorswitch, - cursorset, openfont, buildfont, freefont, Pfmt, Rfmt, strtochan, - chantostr, chantodepth – interactive graphics - -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h>
- #include <cursor.h>
- -
- - int     initdraw(void (*errfun)(Display*, char*), char *font,
- -
- - -
- - char *label)
- -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int     geninitdraw(char *devdir, void(*errfun)(Display*, char*),
- -
- - -
- - -
- - char *font, char *label, char *mousedir, char *windir,
- int ref)
- -
- - -
- -
- int     newwindow(char *str)
- -
- - void    drawerror(Display *d, char *msg)
- -
- - Display*initdisplay(char *devdir, char *win, void(*errfun)(Display*, - char*))
- -
- - void    closedisplay(Display *d)
- -
- - Font* getdefont(Display *d)
- -
- - int     flushimage(Display *d, int vis)
- -
- - int     bufimage(Display *d, int n)
- -
- - int     lockdisplay(Display *d)
- -
- - int     unlockdisplay(Display *d)
- -
- - int     getwindow(Display *d, int ref)
- -
- - int     gengetwindow(Display *d, char *winname,
- -
- - -
- - Image **ip, Screen **sp, int ref)
- -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- void    cursorswitch(Cursor *curs)
- -
- - void    cursorset(Point p)
- -
- - Font* openfont(Display *d, char *name)
- -
- - Font* buildfont(Display *d, char *desc, char *name)
- -
- - void    freefont(Font *f)
- -
- - int     Pfmt(Fmt*)
- -
- - int     Rfmt(Fmt*)
- -
- - ulong strtochan(char *s)
- -
- - char* chantostr(char *s, ulong chan)
- -
- - int     chantodepth(ulong chan)
- -
- - extern Display *display
- -
- - extern Image     *screen
- -
- - extern Screen     *_screen
- -
- - extern Font      *font
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - A Display structure represents a connection to the graphics device, - draw(3), holding all graphics resources associated with the connection, - including in particular raster image data in use by the client - program. The structure is defined (in part) as:
- -
- - typedef
- struct Display
- {
- -
- - ...
- void     (*error)(Display*, char*);
- ...
- Image    *black;
- Image    *white;
- Image    *opaque;
- Image    *transparent;
- Image    *image;
- Font     *defaultfont;
- Subfont*defaultsubfont;
- ...
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- A Point is a location in an Image (see below and draw(3)), such - as the display, and is defined as:
- -
- - typedef
- struct Point {
- -
- - int x;
- int y;
- -
- } Point;
- -
- - -
- The coordinate system has x increasing to the right and y increasing - down. -
- - A Rectangle is a rectangular area in an image.
- -
- - typedef
- struct Rectangle {
- -
- - Point min;        /* upper left */
- Point max;        /* lower right */
- -
- } Rectangle;
- -
- - -
- By definition, min.x≤max.x and min.y≤max.y. By convention, the right - (maximum x) and bottom (maximum y) edges are excluded from the - represented rectangle, so abutting rectangles have no points in - common. Thus, max contains the coordinates of the first point - beyond the rectangle. -
- - The Image data structure is defined in draw(3). -
- - A Font is a set of character images, indexed by runes (see utf(7)). - The images are organized into Subfonts, each containing the images - for a small, contiguous set of runes. The detailed format of these - data structures, which are described in detail in cachechars(3), - is immaterial for most applications. Font and - Subfont structures contain two interrelated fields: ascent, the - distance from the top of the highest character (actually the top - of the image holding all the characters) to the baseline, and - height, the distance from the top of the highest character to - the bottom of the lowest character (and hence, the interline - spacing). See cachechars(3) for more details. -
- - Buildfont parses the font description in the buffer desc, returning - a Font* pointer that can be used by string (see draw(3)) to draw - characters from the font. Openfont does the same, but reads the - description from the named file. Freefont frees a font. The convention - for naming font files is: - -
- - /lib/font/bit/name/range.size.font -
- - -
- where size is approximately the height in pixels of the lower - case letters (without ascenders or descenders). Range gives some - indication of which characters will be available: for example - ascii, latin1, euro, or unicode. Euro includes most European languages, - punctuation marks, the International Phonetic - Alphabet, etc., but no Oriental languages. Unicode includes every - character for which appropriate-sized images exist on the system. - -
- - A Cursor is defined:
- -
- - typedef struct
- Cursor {
- -
- - Point offset;
- uchar clr[2*16];
- uchar set[2*16];
- -
- } Cursor;
- -
- - -
- The arrays are arranged in rows, two bytes per row, left to right - in big-endian order to give 16 rows of 16 bits each. A cursor - is displayed on the screen by adding offset to the current mouse - position, using clr as a mask to draw white at the pixels where - clr is one, and then drawing black at the pixels where set - is one. -
- - The routine initdraw connects to the display; it returns –1 if - it fails and sets the error string. Initdraw sets up the global - variables display (the Display structure representing the connection), - screen (an Image representing the display memory itself or, if - rio(1) is running, the client’s window), and font (the - default font for text). The arguments to initdraw include a label, - which is written to /dev/label if non-nil so that it can be used - to identify the window when hidden (see rio(1)). The font is created - by reading the named font file. If font is null, initdraw reads - the file named in the environment variable $font; if - $font is not set, it imports the default (usually minimal) font - from the operating system. The global font will be set to point - to the resulting Font structure. The errfun argument is a graphics - error function to call in the event of a fatal error in the library; - it must never return. Its arguments are the display pointer - and an error string. If errfun is nil, the library provides a - default, called drawerror. Another effect of initdraw is that - it installs print(3) formats Pfmt and Rfmt as %P and %R for printing - Points and Rectangles. -
- - The geninitdraw function provides a less automated way to establish - a connection, for programs that wish to connect to multiple displays. - Devdir is the name of the directory containing the device files - for the display (if nil, default /dev); errfun, font, and label - are as in initdraw; mousedir and windir are the directories - holding the mouse and winname files; and ref specifies the refresh - function to be used to create the window, if running under rio(1) - (see window(3)). -
- - Initdisplay is part of geninitdraw; it sets up the display structures - but does not allocate any fonts or call getwindow. The arguments - are similar to those of initdraw; win names the directory, default - /dev, in which the files associated with the window reside. Closedisplay - disconnects the display and frees the associated - data structures. Getdefont builds a Font structure from in-core - data describing a default font. None of these routines is needed - by most programs, since initdraw calls them as needed. -
- - The data structures associated with the display must be protected - in a multi-process program, because they assume only one process - will be using them at a time. Multi-process programs should set - display−>locking to 1, to notify the library to use a locking protocol - for its own accesses, and call lockdisplay and - unlockdisplay around any calls to the graphics library that will - cause messages to be sent to the display device. Initdraw and - geninitdraw initialize the display to the locked state. -
- - Getwindow returns a pointer to the window associated with the - application; it is called automatically by initdraw to establish - the screen pointer but must be called after each resizing of the - window to restore the library’s connection to the window. If rio - is not running, it returns display−>image; otherwise it - negotiates with rio by looking in /dev/winname to find the name - of the window and opening it using namedimage (see allocimage(3)). - The resulting window will be created using the refresh method - ref (see window(3)); this should almost always be Refnone because - rio provides backing store for the window. -
- - Getwindow overwrites the global variables screen, a pointer to - the Image defining the window (or the overall display, if no window - system is running); and _screen, a pointer to the Screen representing - the root of the window’s hierarchy. (See window(3). The overloading - of the screen word is an unfortunate - historical accident.) Getwindow arranges that screen point to - the portion of the window inside the border; sophisticated clients - may use _screen to make further subwindows. Gengetwindow’s extra - arguments are the full path of the window’s winname file and pointers - to be overwritten with the values of the - ‘global’ Image and Screen variables for the new window. -
- - The mouse cursor is always displayed. The initial cursor is an - arrow. Cursorswitch causes the argument cursor to be displayed - instead. A zero argument causes a switch back to the arrow cursor. - Cursorset moves the mouse cursor to position p, provided (if in - a window) that the requesting program is executing in the - current window and the mouse is within the window boundaries; - otherwise cursorset is a no-op. -
- - The graphics functions described in draw(3), allocimage(3), cachechars(3), - and subfont(3) are implemented by writing commands to files under - /dev/draw (see draw(3)); the writes are buffered, so the functions - may not take effect immediately. Flushimage flushes the buffer, - doing all pending graphics operations. If - vis is non-zero, any changes are also copied from the ‘soft screen’ - (if any) in the driver to the visible frame buffer. The various - allocation routines in the library flush automatically, as does - the event package (see event(3)); most programs do not need to - call flushimage. It returns –1 on error. -
- - Bufimage is used to allocate space for n bytes in the display - buffer. It is used by all the graphics routines to send messages - to the display. -
- - The functions strtochan and chantostr convert between the channel - descriptor strings used by image(7) and the internal ulong representation - used by the graphics protocol (see draw(3)’s b message). Chantostr - writes at most nine bytes into the buffer pointed at by s and - returns s on success, 0 on failure. - Chantodepth returns the number of bits per pixel used by the format - specified by chan. Both chantodepth and strtochan return 0 when - presented with bad input.
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - To reconnect to the window after a resize event,
- -
- - if(getwindow(display, Refnone) < 0)
- -
- - sysfatal("resize failed: %r");
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- To create and set up a new rio(1) window,
- -
- - Image *screen2;
- Screen *_screen2;
- srvwsys = getenv("wsys");
- if(srvwsys == nil)
- -
- - sysfatal("can't find $wsys: %r");
- -
- rfork(RFNAMEG); /* keep mount of rio private */
- fd = open(srvwsys, ORDWR);
- if(fd < 0)
- -
- - sysfatal("can't open $wsys: %r");
- -
- /* mount creates window; see rio(4) */
- if(mount(fd, −1, "/tmp", MREPL, "new −dx 300−dy 200") < 0)
- -
- - sysfatal("can't mount new window: %r");
- -
- if(gengetwindow(display, "/tmp/winname",
- -
- - &screen2, &_screen2, Refnone) < 0)
- sysfatal("resize failed: %r");
- -
- /* now open /tmp/cons, /tmp/mouse */
- ...
- -
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/font/bit    directory of fonts
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rio(1), addpt(3), allocimage(3), cachechars(3), subfont(3), draw(3), - event(3), frame(3), print(3), window(3), draw(3), image(7), font(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - An error function may call errstr(3) for further diagnostics.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The names clr and set in the Cursor structure are reminders of - an archaic color map and might be more appropriately called white - and black. -
- - These manual pages contain many references to the now-fictitious - /dev/draw.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/html.html b/man/man3/html.html deleted file mode 100644 index 465edcdb..00000000 --- a/man/man3/html.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1206 +0,0 @@ - -html(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
HTML(3)HTML(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - parsehtml, printitems, validitems, freeitems, freedocinfo, dimenkind, - dimenspec, targetid, targetname, fromStr, toStr – HTML parser
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <html.h>
- -
- - Item*    parsehtml(uchar* data, int datalen, Rune* src, int mtype,
- -
- - -
- - int chset, Docinfo** pdi)
- -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- void     printitems(Item* items, char* msg)
- -
- - int      validitems(Item* items)
- -
- - void     freeitems(Item* items)
- -
- - void     freedocinfo(Docinfo* d)
- -
- - int      dimenkind(Dimen d)
- -
- - int      dimenspec(Dimen d)
- -
- - int      targetid(Rune* s)
- -
- - Rune*    targetname(int targid)
- -
- - uchar* fromStr(Rune* buf, int n, int chset)
- -
- - Rune*    toStr(uchar* buf, int n, int chset)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - This library implements a parser for HTML 4.0 documents. The parsed - HTML is converted into an intermediate representation that describes - how the formatted HTML should be laid out. -
- - Parsehtml parses an entire HTML document contained in the buffer - data and having length datalen. The URL of the document should - be passed in as src. Mtype is the media type of the document, - which should be either TextHtml or TextPlain. The character set - of the document is described in chset, which can be - one of US_Ascii, ISO_8859_1, UTF_8 or Unicode. The return value - is a linked list of Item structures, described in detail below. - As a side effect, *pdi is set to point to a newly created Docinfo - structure, containing information pertaining to the entire document. - -
- - The library expects two allocation routines to be provided by - the caller, emalloc and erealloc. These routines are analogous - to the standard malloc and realloc routines, except that they - should not return if the memory allocation fails. In addition, - emalloc is required to zero the memory. -
- - For debugging purposes, printitems may be called to display the - contents of an item list; individual items may be printed using - the %I print verb, installed on the first call to parsehtml. validitems - traverses the item list, checking that all of the pointers are - valid. It returns 1 is everything is ok, and 0 if an error was - found. Normally, one would not call these routines directly. Instead, - one sets the global variable dbgbuild and the library calls them - automatically. One can also set warn, to cause the library to - print a warning whenever it finds a problem with the input document, - and dbglex, to print debugging information in the - lexer. -
- - When an item list is finished with, it should be freed with freeitems. - Then, freedocinfo should be called on the pointer returned in - *pdi. -
- - Dimenkind and dimenspec are provided to interpret the Dimen type, - as described in the section Dimension Specifications. -
- - Frame target names are mapped to integer ids via a global, permanent - mapping. To find the value for a given name, call targetid, which - allocates a new id if the name hasn’t been seen before. The name - of a given, known id may be retrieved using targetname. The library - predefines FTtop, FTself, FTparent and - FTblank. -
- - The library handles all text as Unicode strings (type Rune*). - Character set conversion is provided by fromStr and toStr. FromStr - takes n Unicode characters from buf and converts them to the character - set described by chset. ToStr takes n bytes from buf, interpretted - as belonging to character set chset, and converts - them to a Unicode string. Both routines null-terminate the result, - and use emalloc to allocate space for it.
-

Items
- The return value of parsehtml is a linked list of variant structures, - with the generic portion described by the following definition: - -
- - typedef struct Item Item;
- struct Item
- {
- -
- - Item*      next;
- int        width;
- int        height;
- int        ascent;
- int        anchorid;
- int        state;
- Genattr* genattr;
- int        tag;
- -
- };
- -
- - The field next points to the successor in the linked list of items, - while width, height, and ascent are intended for use by the caller - as part of the layout process. Anchorid, if non-zero, gives the - integer id assigned by the parser to the anchor that this item - is in (see section Anchors). State is a collection of - flags and values described as follows: -
- - enum
- {
- -
- - IFbrk =           0x80000000,
- IFbrksp =         0x40000000,
- IFnobrk =         0x20000000,
- IFcleft =         0x10000000,
- IFcright =        0x08000000,
- IFwrap =          0x04000000,
- IFhang =          0x02000000,
- IFrjust =         0x01000000,
- IFcjust =         0x00800000,
- IFsmap =          0x00400000,
- IFindentshift = 8,
- IFindentmask =    (255<<IFindentshift),
- IFhangmask =      255
- -
- };
- -
- - IFbrk is set if a break is to be forced before placing this item. - IFbrksp is set if a 1 line space should be added to the break - (in which case IFbrk is also set). IFnobrk is set if a break is - not permitted before the item. IFcleft is set if left floats should - be cleared (that is, if the list of pending left floats should - be placed) before this item is placed, and IFcright is set for - right floats. In both cases, IFbrk is also set. IFwrap is set - if the line containing this item is allowed to wrap. IFhang is - set if this item hangs into the left indent. IFrjust is set if - the line containing this item should be right justified, and IFcjust - is - set for center justified lines. IFsmap is used to indicate that - an image is a server-side map. The low 8 bits, represented by - IFhangmask, indicate the current hang into left indent, in tenths - of a tabstop. The next 8 bits, represented by IFindentmask and - IFindentshift, indicate the current indent in tab - stops. -
- - The field genattr is an optional pointer to an auxiliary structure, - described in the section Generic Attributes. -
- - Finally, tag describes which variant type this item has. It can - have one of the values Itexttag, Iruletag, Iimagetag, Iformfieldtag, - Itabletag, Ifloattag or Ispacertag. For each of these values, - there is an additional structure defined, which includes Item - as an unnamed initial substructure, - and then defines additional fields. -
- - Items of type Itexttag represent a piece of text, using the following - structure: -
- - struct Itext
- {
- -
- - Item;
- Rune* s;
- int     fnt;
- int     fg;
- uchar voff;
- uchar ul;
- -
- };
- -
- - Here s is a null-terminated Unicode string of the actual characters - making up this text item, fnt is the font number (described in - the section Font Numbers), and fg is the RGB encoded color for - the text. Voff measures the vertical offset from the baseline; - subtract Voffbias to get the actual value (negative values - represent a displacement down the page). The field ul is the underline - style: ULnone if no underline, ULunder for conventional underline, - and ULmid for strike-through. -
- - Items of type Iruletag represent a horizontal rule, as follows: - -
- - struct Irule
- {
- -
- - Item;
- uchar align;
- uchar noshade;
- int     size;
- Dimen wspec;
- -
- };
- -
- - Here align is the alignment specification (described in the corresponding - section), noshade is set if the rule should not be shaded, size - is the height of the rule (as set by the size attribute), and - wspec is the desired width (see section Dimension Specifications). - -
- - Items of type Iimagetag describe embedded images, for which the - following structure is defined: -
- - struct Iimage
- {
- -
- - Item;
- Rune*     imsrc;
- int       imwidth;
- int       imheight;
- Rune*     altrep;
- Map*      map;
- int       ctlid;
- uchar     align;
- uchar     hspace;
- uchar     vspace;
- uchar     border;
- Iimage* nextimage;
- -
- };
- -
- - Here imsrc is the URL of the image source, imwidth and imheight, - if non-zero, contain the specified width and height for the image, - and altrep is the text to use as an alternative to the image, - if the image is not displayed. Map, if set, points to a structure - describing an associated client-side image map. - Ctlid is reserved for use by the application, for handling animated - images. Align encodes the alignment specification of the image. - Hspace contains the number of pixels to pad the image with on - either side, and Vspace the padding above and below. Border is - the width of the border to draw around the - image. Nextimage points to the next image in the document (the - head of this list is Docinfo.images). -
- - For items of type Iformfieldtag, the following structure is defined: - -
- - struct Iformfield
- {
- -
- - Item;
- Formfield* formfield;
- -
- };
- -
- - This adds a single field, formfield, which points to a structure - describing a field in a form, described in section Forms. -
- - For items of type Itabletag, the following structure is defined: - -
- - struct Itable
- {
- -
- - Item;
- Table* table;
- -
- };
- -
- - Table points to a structure describing the table, described in - the section Tables. -
- - For items of type Ifloattag, the following structure is defined: - -
- - struct Ifloat
- {
- -
- - Item;
- Item*     item;
- int       x;
- int       y;
- uchar     side;
- uchar     infloats;
- Ifloat* nextfloat;
- -
- };
- -
- - The item points to a single item (either a table or an image) - that floats (the text of the document flows around it), and side - indicates the margin that this float sticks to; it is either ALleft - or ALright. X and y are reserved for use by the caller; these - are typically used for the coordinates of the top of the float. - Infloats is used by the caller to keep track of whether it has - placed the float. Nextfloat is used by the caller to link together - all of the floats that it has placed. -
- - For items of type Ispacertag, the following structure is defined: - -
- - struct Ispacer
- {
- -
- - Item;
- int     spkind;
- -
- };
- -
- - Spkind encodes the kind of spacer, and may be one of ISPnull (zero - height and width), ISPvline (takes on height and ascent of the - current font), ISPhspace (has the width of a space in the current - font) and ISPgeneral (for all other purposes, such as between - markers and lists). -

Generic Attributes
- -
- - The genattr field of an item, if non-nil, points to a structure - that holds the values of attributes not specific to any particular - item type, as they occur on a wide variety of underlying HTML - tags. The structure is as follows: -
- - typedef struct Genattr Genattr;
- struct Genattr
- {
- -
- - Rune*     id;
- Rune*     class;
- Rune*     style;
- Rune*     title;
- SEvent* events;
- -
- };
- -
- - Fields id, class, style and title, when non-nil, contain values - of correspondingly named attributes of the HTML tag associated - with this item. Events is a linked list of events (with corresponding - scripted actions) associated with the item: -
- - typedef struct SEvent SEvent;
- struct SEvent
- {
- -
- - SEvent* next;
- int       type;
- Rune*     script;
- -
- };
- -
- - Here, next points to the next event in the list, type is one of - SEonblur, SEonchange, SEonclick, SEondblclick, SEonfocus, SEonkeypress, - SEonkeyup, SEonload, SEonmousedown, SEonmousemove, SEonmouseout, - SEonmouseover, SEonmouseup, SEonreset, SEonselect, - SEonsubmit or SEonunload, and script is the text of the associated - script.
-

Dimension Specifications
- -
- - Some structures include a dimension specification, used where - a number can be followed by a % or a * to indicate percentage - of total or relative weight. This is encoded using the following - structure: -
- - typedef struct Dimen Dimen;
- struct Dimen
- {
- -
- - int kindspec;
- -
- };
- -
- - Separate kind and spec values are extracted using dimenkind and - dimenspec. Dimenkind returns one of Dnone, Dpixels, Dpercent or - Drelative. Dnone means that no dimension was specified. In all - other cases, dimenspec should be called to find the absolute number - of pixels, the percentage of total, or the - relative weight.
-

Background Specifications
- -
- - It is possible to set the background of the entire document, and - also for some parts of the document (such as tables). This is - encoded as follows: -
- - typedef struct Background Background;
- struct Background
- {
- -
- - Rune* image;
- int     color;
- -
- };
- -
- - Image, if non-nil, is the URL of an image to use as the background. - If this is nil, color is used instead, as the RGB value for a - solid fill color.
-

Alignment Specifications
- -
- - Certain items have alignment specifiers taken from the following - enumerated type: -
- - enum
- {
- -
- - ALnone = 0, ALleft, ALcenter, ALright, ALjustify,
- ALchar, ALtop, ALmiddle, ALbottom, ALbaseline
- -
- };
- -
- - These values correspond to the various alignment types named in - the HTML 4.0 standard. If an item has an alignment of ALleft or - ALright, the library automatically encapsulates it inside a float - item. -
- - Tables, and the various rows, columns and cells within them, have - a more complex alignment specification, composed of separate vertical - and horizontal alignments: -
- - typedef struct Align Align;
- struct Align
- {
- -
- - uchar halign;
- uchar valign;
- -
- };
- -
- - Halign can be one of ALnone, ALleft, ALcenter, ALright, ALjustify - or ALchar. Valign can be one of ALnone, ALmiddle, ALbottom, ALtop - or ALbaseline.
-

Font Numbers
- -
- - Text items have an associated font number (the fnt field), which - is encoded as style*NumSize+size. Here, style is one of FntR, - FntI, FntB or FntT, for roman, italic, bold and typewriter font - styles, respectively, and size is Tiny, Small, Normal, Large or - Verylarge. The total number of possible - font numbers is NumFnt, and the default font number is DefFnt - (which is roman style, normal size).
-

Document Info
- -
- - Global information about an HTML page is stored in the following - structure: -
- - typedef struct Docinfo Docinfo;
- struct Docinfo
- {
- -
- - // stuff from HTTP headers, doc head, and body tag
- Rune*         src;
- Rune*         base;
- Rune*         doctitle;
- Background    background;
- Iimage*       backgrounditem;
- int           text;
- int           link;
- int           vlink;
- int           alink;
- int           target;
- int           chset;
- int           mediatype;
- int           scripttype;
- int           hasscripts;
- Rune*         refresh;
- Kidinfo*      kidinfo;
- int           frameid;
- // info needed to respond to user actions
- Anchor*       anchors;
- DestAnchor* dests;
- Form*         forms;
- Table*        tables;
- Map*          maps;
- Iimage*       images;
- -
- };
- -
- - Src gives the URL of the original source of the document, and - base is the base URL. Doctitle is the document’s title, as set - by a <title> element. Background is as described in the section - Background Specifications, and backgrounditem is set to be an - image item for the document’s background image - (if given as a URL), or else nil. Text gives the default foregound - text color of the document, link the unvisited hyperlink color, - vlink the visited hyperlink color, and alink the color for highlighting - hyperlinks (all in 24-bit RGB format). Target is the default target - frame id. Chset and mediatype are as for - the chset and mtype parameters to parsehtml. Scripttype is the - type of any scripts contained in the document, and is always TextJavascript. - Hasscripts is set if the document contains any scripts. Scripting - is currently unsupported. Refresh is the contents of a <meta http−equiv=Refresh - ...> tag, if any. Kidinfo is set if this document is a frameset - (see section Frames). Frameid is this document’s frame id. -
- - Anchors is a list of hyperlinks contained in the document, and - dests is a list of hyperlink destinations within the page (see - the following section for details). Forms, tables and maps are - lists of the various forms, tables and client-side maps contained - in the document, as described in subsequent sections. - Images is a list of all the image items in the document.
-

Anchors
- -
- - The library builds two lists for all of the <a> elements (anchors) - in a document. Each anchor is assigned a unique anchor id within - the document. For anchors which are hyperlinks (the href attribute - was supplied), the following structure is defined: -
- - typedef struct Anchor Anchor;
- struct Anchor
- {
- -
- - Anchor* next;
- int       index;
- Rune*     name;
- Rune*     href;
- int       target;
- -
- };
- -
- - Next points to the next anchor in the list (the head of this list - is Docinfo.anchors). Index is the anchor id; each item within - this hyperlink is tagged with this value in its anchorid field. - Name and href are the values of the correspondingly named attributes - of the anchor (in particular, href is the URL to go - to). Target is the value of the target attribute (if provided) - converted to a frame id. -
- - Destinations within the document (anchors with the name attribute - set) are held in the Docinfo.dests list, using the following structure: - -
- - typedef struct DestAnchor DestAnchor;
- struct DestAnchor
- {
- -
- - DestAnchor* next;
- int           index;
- Rune*         name;
- Item*         item;
- -
- };
- -
- - Next is the next element of the list, index is the anchor id, - name is the value of the name attribute, and item is points to - the item within the parsed document that should be considered - to be the destination.
-

Forms
- -
- - Any forms within a document are kept in a list, headed by Docinfo.forms. - The elements of this list are as follows: -
- - typedef struct Form Form;
- struct Form
- {
- -
- - Form*        next;
- int          formid;
- Rune*        name;
- Rune*        action;
- int          target;
- int          method;
- int          nfields;
- Formfield* fields;
- -
- };
- -
- - Next points to the next form in the list. Formid is a serial number - for the form within the document. Name is the value of the form’s - name or id attribute. Action is the value of any action attribute. - Target is the value of the target attribute (if any) converted - to a frame target id. Method is one of HGet or - HPost. Nfields is the number of fields in the form, and fields - is a linked list of the actual fields. -
- - The individual fields in a form are described by the following - structure: -
- - typedef struct Formfield Formfield;
- struct Formfield
- {
- -
- - Formfield* next;
- int          ftype;
- int          fieldid;
- Form*        form;
- Rune*        name;
- Rune*        value;
- int          size;
- int          maxlength;
- int          rows;
- int          cols;
- uchar        flags;
- Option*      options;
- Item*        image;
- int          ctlid;
- SEvent*      events;
- -
- };
- -
- - Here, next points to the next field in the list. Ftype is the - type of the field, which can be one of Ftext, Fpassword, Fcheckbox, - Fradio, Fsubmit, Fhidden, Fimage, Freset, Ffile, Fbutton, Fselect - or Ftextarea. Fieldid is a serial number for the field within - the form. Form points back - to the form containing this field. Name, value, size, maxlength, - rows and cols each contain the values of corresponding attributes - of the field, if present. Flags contains per-field flags, of which - FFchecked and FFmultiple are defined. Image is only used for fields - of type Fimage; it points to an - image item containing the image to be displayed. Ctlid is reserved - for use by the caller, typically to store a unique id of an associated - control used to implement the field. Events is the same as the - corresponding field of the generic attributes associated with - the item containing this field. Options is only used by - fields of type Fselect; it consists of a list of possible options - that may be selected for that field, using the following structure: - -
- - typedef struct Option Option;
- struct Option
- {
- -
- - Option* next;
- int       selected;
- Rune*     value;
- Rune*     display;
- -
- };
- -
- - Next points to the next element of the list. Selected is set if - this option is to be displayed initially. Value is the value to - send when the form is submitted if this option is selected. Display - is the string to display on the screen for this option.
-

Tables
- -
- - The library builds a list of all the tables in the document, headed - by Docinfo.tables. Each element of this list has the following - format: -
- - typedef struct Table Table;
- struct Table
- {
- -
- - Table*         next;
- int           tableid;
- Tablerow*      rows;
- int           nrow;
- Tablecol*      cols;
- int           ncol;
- Tablecell*     cells;
- int           ncell;
- Tablecell*** grid;
- Align          align;
- Dimen          width;
- int           border;
- int           cellspacing;
- int           cellpadding;
- Background     background;
- Item*          caption;
- uchar          caption_place;
- Lay*           caption_lay;
- int           totw;
- int           toth;
- int           caph;
- int           availw;
- Token*         tabletok;
- uchar          flags;
- -
- };
- -
- - Next points to the next element in the list of tables. Tableid - is a serial number for the table within the document. Rows is - an array of row specifications (described below) and nrow is the - number of elements in this array. Similarly, cols is an array - of column specifications, and ncol the size of this array. - Cells is a list of all cells within the table (structure described - below) and ncell is the number of elements in this list. Note - that a cell may span multiple rows and/or columns, thus ncell - may be smaller than nrow*ncol. Grid is a two-dimensional array - of cells within the table; the cell at row i and column j is - Table.grid[i][j]. A cell that spans multiple rows and/or columns - will be referenced by grid multiple times, however it will only - occur once in cells. Align gives the alignment specification for - the entire table, and width gives the requested width as a dimension - specification. Border, cellspacing - and cellpadding give the values of the corresponding attributes - for the table, and background gives the requested background for - the table. Caption is a linked list of items to be displayed as - the caption of the table, either above or below depending on whether - caption_place is ALtop or ALbottom. - Most of the remaining fields are reserved for use by the caller, - except tabletok, which is reserved for internal use. The type - Lay is not defined by the library; the caller can provide its - own definition. -
- - The Tablecol structure is defined for use by the caller. The library - ensures that the correct number of these is allocated, but leaves - them blank. The fields are as follows: -
- - typedef struct Tablecol Tablecol;
- struct Tablecol
- {
- -
- - int     width;
- Align align;
- Point pos;
- -
- };
- -
- - The rows in the table are specified as follows: -
- - typedef struct Tablerow Tablerow;
- struct Tablerow
- {
- -
- - Tablerow*    next;
- Tablecell* cells;
- int          height;
- int          ascent;
- Align        align;
- Background background;
- Point        pos;
- uchar        flags;
- -
- };
- -
- - Next is only used during parsing; it should be ignored by the - caller. Cells provides a list of all the cells in a row, linked - through their nextinrow fields (see below). Height, ascent and - pos are reserved for use by the caller. Align is the alignment - specification for the row, and background is the - background to use, if specified. Flags is used by the parser; - ignore this field. -
- - The individual cells of the table are described as follows: -
- - typedef struct Tablecell Tablecell;
- struct Tablecell
- {
- -
- - Tablecell* next;
- Tablecell* nextinrow;
- int          cellid;
- Item*        content;
- Lay*         lay;
- int          rowspan;
- int          colspan;
- Align        align;
- uchar        flags;
- Dimen        wspec;
- int          hspec;
- Background background;
- int          minw;
- int          maxw;
- int          ascent;
- int          row;
- int          col;
- Point        pos;
- -
- };
- -
- - Next is used to link together the list of all cells within a table - (Table.cells), whereas nextinrow is used to link together all - the cells within a single row (Tablerow.cells). Cellid provides - a serial number for the cell within the table. Content is a linked - list of the items to be laid out within the cell. Lay - is reserved for the user to describe how these items have been - laid out. Rowspan and colspan are the number of rows and columns - spanned by this cell, respectively. Align is the alignment specification - for the cell. Flags is some combination of TFparsing, TFnowrap - and TFisth or’d together. Here - TFparsing is used internally by the parser, and should be ignored. - TFnowrap means that the contents of the cell should not be wrapped - if they don’t fit the available width, rather, the table should - be expanded if need be (this is set when the nowrap attribute - is supplied). TFisth means that the cell was created - by the <th> element (rather than the <td> element), indicating that - it is a header cell rather than a data cell. Wspec provides a - suggested width as a dimension specification, and hspec provides - a suggested height in pixels. Background gives a background specification - for the individual cell. Minw, maxw, - ascent and pos are reserved for use by the caller during layout. - Row and col give the indices of the row and column of the top - left-hand corner of the cell within the table grid.
-

Client-side Maps
- -
- - The library builds a list of client-side maps, headed by Docinfo.maps, - and having the following structure: -
- - typedef struct Map Map;
- struct Map
- {
- -
- - Map*    next;
- Rune* name;
- Area* areas;
- -
- };
- -
- - Next points to the next element in the list, name is the name - of the map (use to bind it to an image), and areas is a list of - the areas within the image that comprise the map, using the following - structure: -
- - typedef struct Area Area;
- struct Area
- {
- -
- - Area*    next;
- int      shape;
- Rune*    href;
- int      target;
- Dimen* coords;
- int      ncoords;
- -
- };
- -
- - Next points to the next element in the map’s list of areas. Shape - describes the shape of the area, and is one of SHrect, SHcircle - or SHpoly. Href is the URL associated with this area in its role - as a hypertext link, and target is the target frame it should - be loaded in. Coords is an array of coordinates for - the shape, and ncoords is the size of this array (number of elements).
-

Frames
- -
- - If the Docinfo.kidinfo field is set, the document is a frameset. - In this case, it is typical for parsehtml to return nil, as a - document which is a frameset should have no actual items that - need to be laid out (such will appear only in subsidiary documents). - It is possible that items will be returned by a malformed - document; the caller should check for this and free any such items. - -
- - The Kidinfo structure itself reflects the fact that framesets - can be nested within a document. If is defined as follows: -
- - typedef struct Kidinfo Kidinfo;
- struct Kidinfo
- {
- -
- - Kidinfo* next;
- int        isframeset;
- // fields for "frame"
- Rune*      src;
- Rune*      name;
- int        marginw;
- int        marginh;
- int        framebd;
- int        flags;
- // fields for "frameset"
- Dimen*     rows;
- int        nrows;
- Dimen*     cols;
- int        ncols;
- Kidinfo* kidinfos;
- Kidinfo* nextframeset;
- -
- };
- -
- - Next is only used if this structure is part of a containing frameset; - it points to the next element in the list of children of that - frameset. Isframeset is set when this structure represents a frameset; - if clear, it is an individual frame. -
- - Some fields are used only for framesets. Rows is an array of dimension - specifications for rows in the frameset, and nrows is the length - of this array. Cols is the corresponding array for columns, of - length ncols. Kidinfos points to a list of components contained - within this frameset, each of which may be a - frameset or a frame. Nextframeset is only used during parsing, - and should be ignored. -
- - The remaining fields are used if the structure describes a frame, - not a frameset. Src provides the URL for the document that should - be initially loaded into this frame. Note that this may be a relative - URL, in which case it should be interpretted using the containing - document’s URL as the base. Name gives the name of - the frame, typically supplied via a name attribute in the HTML. - If no name was given, the library allocates one. Marginw, marginh - and framebd are the values of the marginwidth, marginheight and - frameborder attributes, respectively. Flags can contain some combination - of the following: FRnoresize (the - frame had the noresize attribute set, and the user should not - be allowed to resize it), FRnoscroll (the frame should not have - any scroll bars), FRhscroll (the frame should have a horizontal - scroll bar), FRvscroll (the frame should have a vertical scroll - bar), FRhscrollauto (the frame should be automatically - given a horizontal scroll bar if its contents would not otherwise - fit), and FRvscrollauto (the frame gets a vertical scrollbar only - if required).
- -

-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libhtml
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - fmt(1) -
- - W3C World Wide Web Consortium, “HTML 4.01 Specification”.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The entire HTML document must be loaded into memory before any - of it can be parsed.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/index.html b/man/man3/index.html deleted file mode 100644 index 90e8d3cf..00000000 --- a/man/man3/index.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,647 +0,0 @@ - - -Manual Section 3 - Plan 9 from User Space - - - -
-
- -
-
-
- Manual Section 3 - Plan 9 from User Space -
-
-
intro(3)intro – introduction to library functions -
-
-
-
9p(3)Srv -dirread9p -emalloc9p -erealloc9p -estrdup9p -postfd -postmountsrv -readbuf -readstr -respond -srv -threadpostmountsrv -walkandclone – 9P file service -
-
-
-
9p-cmdbuf(3)Cmdbuf, parsecmd, respondcmderror, lookupcmd – control message parsing -
-
-
-
9p-fid(3)Fid, Fidpool, allocfidpool, freefidpool, allocfid, closefid, lookupfid, removefid -Req, Reqpool, allocreqpool, freereqpool, allocreq, closereq, lookupreq, removereq – 9P fid, request tracking -
-
-
-
9p-file(3)Tree, alloctree, freetree -File, createfile, closefile, removefile, walkfile -opendirfile, readdirfile, closedirfile, hasperm – in-memory file hierarchy -
-
-
-
9p-intmap(3)Intmap, allocmap, freemap, insertkey, caninsertkey, lookupkey -deletekey – integer to data structure maps -
-
-
-
9pclient(3)CFid, CFsys, fsinit, fsmount, fsroot, fssetroot, fsunmount, nsmount, fsversion, fsauth, fsattach, fsclose, fscreate, fsdirread, fsdirreadall, fsdirstat, fsdirfstat, fsdirwstat, fsdirfwstat, fsopen, fsopenfd, fspread, fspwrite, fsread, fsreadn, fswrite – 9P client library -
-
-
-
addpt(3)addpt, subpt, mulpt, divpt, rectaddpt, rectsubpt, insetrect, canonrect, eqpt, eqrect, ptinrect, rectinrect, rectXrect, rectclip, combinerect, Dx, Dy, Pt, Rect, Rpt – arithmetic on points and rectangles -
-
-
-
aes(3)setupAESstate, aesCBCencrypt, aesCBCdecrypt - advanced encryption standard (rijndael) -
-
-
-
allocimage(3)allocimage, allocimagemix, freeimage, nameimage, namedimage, setalpha, loadimage, cloadimage, unloadimage, readimage, writeimage, bytesperline, wordsperline – allocating, freeing, reading, writing images -
-
-
-
arg(3)ARGBEGIN, ARGEND, ARGC, ARGF, EARGF, arginit, argopt – process option letters from argv -
-
-
-
arith3(3)add3, sub3, neg3, div3, mul3, eqpt3, closept3, dot3, cross3, len3, dist3, unit3, midpt3, lerp3, reflect3, nearseg3, pldist3, vdiv3, vrem3, pn2f3, ppp2f3, fff2p3, pdiv4, add4, sub4 – operations on 3-d points and planes -
-
-
-
atof(3)atof, atoi, atol, atoll, charstod, strtod, strtol, strtoll, strtoul, strtoull – convert text to numbers -
-
-
-
bin(3)binalloc, bingrow, binfree – grouped memory allocation -
-
-
-
bio(3)Bopen, Bfdopen, Binit, Binits, Brdline, Brdstr, Bgetc, Bgetrune, Bgetd, Bungetc, Bungetrune, Bread, Bseek, Boffset, Bfildes, Blinelen, Bputc, Bputrune, Bprint, Bvprint, Bwrite, Bflush, Bterm, Bbuffered – buffered input/output -
-
-
-
blowfish(3)setupBFstate, bfCBCencrypt, bfCBCdecrypt, bfECBencrypt, bfECBdecrypt - blowfish encryption -
-
-
-
cachechars(3)cachechars, agefont, loadchar, Subfont, Fontchar, Font – font utilities -
-
-
-
cleanname(3)cleanname – clean a path name -
-
-
-
color(3)cmap2rgb, cmap2rgba, rgb2cmap – colors and color maps -
-
-
-
complete(3)complete, freecompletion – file name completion -
-
-
-
cputime(3)cputime, times – cpu time in this process and children -
-
-
-
ctime(3)ctime, localtime, gmtime, asctime, tm2sec, timezone – convert date and time -
-
-
-
des(3)setupDESstate, des_key_setup, block_cipher, desCBCencrypt, desCBCdecrypt, desECBencrypt, desECBdecrypt, des3CBCencrypt, des3CBCdecrypt, des3ECBencrypt, des3ECBdecrypt, key_setup, des56to64, des64to56, setupDES3state, triple_block_cipher, - single and triple digital encryption standard -
-
-
-
dial(3)dial, announce, listen, accept, reject, netmkaddr, dialparse – make and break network connections -
-
-
-
dirread(3)dirread, dirreadall – read directory -
-
-
-
draw(3)Image, draw, drawop, gendraw, gendrawop, drawreplxy, drawrepl -replclipr, line, lineop, poly, polyop, fillpoly, fillpolyop, bezier, bezierop -bezspline, bezsplineop, bezsplinepts, fillbezier, fillbezierop -fillbezspline, fillbezsplineop, ellipse, ellipseop -fillellipse, fillellipseop, arc, arcop, fillarc, fillarcop -icossin, icossin2, border, string, stringop, stringn, stringnop -runestring, runestringop, runestringn, runestringnop, stringbg -stringbgop, stringnbg, stringnbgop, runestringbg, runestringbgop -runestringnbg, runestringnbgop, _string, ARROW, drawsetdebug – graphics functions -
-
-
-
dsa(3)dsagen, dsasign, dsaverify, dsapuballoc, dsapubfree, dsaprivalloc, dsaprivfree, dsasigalloc, dsasigfree, dsaprivtopub - digital signature algorithm -
-
-
-
dup(3)dup – duplicate an open file descriptor -
-
-
-
elgamal(3)eggen, egencrypt, egdecrypt, egsign, egverify, egpuballoc, egpubfree, egprivalloc, egprivfree, egsigalloc, egsigfree, egprivtopub - elgamal encryption -
-
-
-
encode(3)dec64, enc64, dec32, enc32, dec16, enc16, encodefmt – encoding byte arrays as strings -
-
-
-
errstr(3)errstr, rerrstr, werrstr – description of last system call error -
-
-
-
event(3)event, einit, estart, estartfn, etimer, eread, emouse, ekbd, ecanread, ecanmouse, ecankbd, ereadmouse, eatomouse, eresized, egetrect, edrawgetrect, emenuhit, emoveto, esetcursor, Event, Mouse, Menu – graphics events -
-
-
-
exec(3)exec, execl – execute a file -
-
-
-
exits(3)exits, _exits, atexit, atexitdont, terminate – terminate process, process cleanup -
-
-
-
fcall(3)Fcall, convS2M, convD2M, convM2S, convM2D, fcallfmt, dirfmt, dirmodefmt, read9pmsg, statcheck, sizeS2M, sizeD2M – interface to Plan 9 File protocol -
-
-
-
flate(3)deflateinit, deflate, deflatezlib, deflateblock, deflatezlibblock, inflateinit, inflate, inflatezlib, inflateblock, inflatezlibblock, flateerr, mkcrctab, blockcrc, adler32 – deflate compression -
-
-
-
fmtinstall(3)fmtinstall, dofmt, dorfmt, fmtprint, fmtvprint, fmtrune, fmtstrcpy, fmtrunestrcpy, fmtfdinit, fmtfdflush, fmtstrinit, fmtstrflush, runefmtstrinit, runefmtstrflush, errfmt – support for user-defined print formats and output routines -
-
-
-
frame(3)frinit, frsetrects, frinittick, frclear, frcharofpt, frptofchar, frinsert, frdelete, frselect, frtick, frselectpaint, frdrawsel, frdrawsel0, frgetmouse – frames of text -
-
-
-
genrandom(3)genrandom, prng – random number generation -
-
-
-
get9root(3)get9root, unsharp – get path to root of Plan 9 tree -
-
-
-
getcallerpc(3)getcallerpc – fetch return PC of current function -
-
-
-
getenv(3)getenv, putenv – access environment variables -
-
-
-
getfields(3)getfields, gettokens, tokenize – break a string into fields -
-
-
-
getns(3)getns – get path to name space directory -
-
-
-
getsnarf(3)getsnarf, putsnarf – window system snarf (cut and paste) buffer -
-
-
-
getuser(3)getuser, sysname – get user or system name -
-
-
-
getwd(3)getwd – get current directory -
-
-
-
graphics(3)Display, Point, Rectangle, Cursor, initdraw, geninitdraw, drawerror, initdisplay, closedisplay, getdefont, getwindow, gengetwindow, flushimage, bufimage, lockdisplay, unlockdisplay, cursorswitch, cursorset, openfont, buildfont, freefont, Pfmt, Rfmt, strtochan, chantostr, chantodepth – interactive graphics -
-
-
-
html(3)parsehtml -printitems -validitems -freeitems -freedocinfo -dimenkind -dimenspec -targetid -targetname -fromStr -toStr -– HTML parser -
-
-
-
ioproc(3)closeioproc -iocall -ioclose -iointerrupt -iodial -ioopen -ioproc -ioread -ioread9pmsg -ioreadn -iorecvfd -iosendfd -iosleep -iowrite – slave I/O processes for threaded programs -
-
-
-
ip(3)eipfmt, parseip, parseipmask, v4parseip, v4parsecidr, parseether, myipaddr, myetheraddr, maskip, equivip, defmask, isv4, v4tov6, v6tov4, nhgetl, nhgets, nhgetv, hnputl, hnputs, hnputv, ptclbsum, readipifc – Internet protocol -
-
-
-
isalpharune(3)isalpharune, islowerrune, isspacerune, istitlerune, isupperrune, tolowerrune, totitlerune, toupperrune – Unicode character classes and cases -
-
-
-
keyboard(3)initkeyboard, ctlkeyboard, closekeyboard – keyboard control -
-
-
-
lock(3)lock, canlock, unlock -qlock, canqlock, qunlock -rlock, canrlock, runlock -wlock, canwlock, wunlock -rsleep, rwakeup, rwakeupall -incref, decref -– spin locks, queueing rendezvous locks, reader-writer locks, rendezvous points, and reference counts -
-
-
-
mach(3)machbytype, machbyname – machine-independent access to executables and programs -
-
-
-
mach-cmd(3)attachargs, attachcore, attachdynamic, attachproc, proctextfile – debugging processes and core files -
-
-
-
mach-file(3)crackhdr, uncrackhdr, mapfile, unmapfile, mapproc, unmapproc, detachproc, ctlproc -procnotes – machine-independent access to exectuable files and running processes -
-
-
-
mach-map(3)allocmap, addseg, findseg, addrtoseg -addrtosegafter, removeseg, freemap -get1, get2, get4, get8 -put1, put2, put4, put8 -rget, rput, fpformat -locnone, locaddr, locconst, locreg, locindir -loccmp, loceval, locfmt, locsimplify -lget1, lget2, lget4, lget8 -lput1, lput2, lput4, lput8 – machine-independent -
-
-
-
mach-stack(3)stacktrace, localaddr, unwindframe, windindex, windreglocs – stack traces -
-
-
-
mach-swap(3)beswap2, beswap4, beswap8, beieeeftoa32, beieeeftoa64, beieeeftoa80 -beload2, beload4, beload8 -leswap2, leswap4, leswap8, leieeeftoa32, leieeeftoa64, leieeeftoa80 -leload2, leload4, leload8, ieeeftoa32, ieeeftoa64 – machine-independent access to byte-ordered data -
-
-
-
mach-symbol(3)symopen, symclose, findhdr, indexsym, lookupsym, findsym -findexsym, flookupsym, ffindsym -lookuplsym, indexlsym, findlsym -symoff, pc2file, file2pc, line2pc, fnbound, fileline -pc2line – symbol table access functions -
-
-
-
malloc(3)malloc, mallocz, free, realloc, calloc, setmalloctag, setrealloctag, getmalloctag, getrealloctag – memory allocator -
-
-
-
matrix(3)ident, matmul, matmulr, determinant, adjoint, invertmat, xformpoint, xformpointd, xformplane, pushmat, popmat, rot, qrot, scale, move, xform, ixform, persp, look, viewport – Geometric transformations -
-
-
-
memdraw(3)Memimage -Memdata -Memdrawparam -memimageinit -wordaddr -byteaddr -memimagemove -allocmemimage -allocmemimaged -readmemimage -creadmemimage -writememimage -freememimage -memsetchan -loadmemimage -cloadmemimage -unloadmemimage -memfillcolor -memarc -mempoly -memellipse -memfillpoly -memimageline -memimagedraw -drawclip -memlinebbox -memlineendsize -allocmemsubfont -openmemsubfont -freememsubfont -memsubfontwidth -getmemdefont -memimagestring -iprint -hwdraw – drawing routines for memory-resident images -
-
-
-
memlayer(3)memdraw, memlalloc, memldelete, memlexpose, memlfree, memlhide, memline, memlnorefresh, memload, memunload, memlorigin, memlsetrefresh, memltofront, memltofrontn, memltorear, memltorearn – windows of memory-resident images -
-
-
-
memory(3)memccpy, memchr, memcmp, memcpy, memmove, memset – memory operations -
-
-
-
mouse(3)initmouse, readmouse, closemouse, moveto, cursorswitch, getrect, drawgetrect, menuhit, setcursor – mouse control -
-
-
-
mousescrollsize(3)mousescrollsize – compute mouse scroll increment -
-
-
-
mp(3)mpsetminbits, mpnew, mpfree, mpbits, mpnorm, mpcopy, mpassign, mprand, strtomp, mpfmt,mptoa, betomp, mptobe, letomp, mptole, mptoui, uitomp, mptoi, itomp, uvtomp, mptouv, vtomp, mptov, mpdigdiv, mpadd, mpsub, mpleft, mpright, mpmul, mpexp, mpmod, mpdiv, mpfactorial, mpcmp, mpextendedgcd, mpinvert, mpsignif, mplowbits0, mpvecdigmuladd, mpvecdigmulsub, mpvecadd, mpvecsub, mpveccmp, mpvecmul, mpmagcmp, mpmagadd, mpmagsub, crtpre, crtin, crtout, crtprefree, crtresfree – extended precision arithmetic -
-
-
-
muldiv(3)muldiv, umuldiv – high-precision multiplication and division -
-
-
-
mux(3)Mux, muxinit, muxrpc, muxthreads – protocol multiplexor -
-
-
-
nan(3)NaN, Inf, isNaN, isInf – not-a-number and infinity functions -
-
-
-
needstack(3)needstack – check for execution stack overflow -
-
-
-
notify(3)notify, noted, atnotify, noteenable, notedisable, notifyon, notifyoff – handle asynchronous process notification -
-
-
-
open(3)open, create, close – open a file for reading or writing, create file -
-
-
-
opentemp(3)opentemp – create a uniquely-named file -
-
-
-
pipe(3)pipe – create an interprocess channel -
-
-
-
plumb(3)eplumb, plumbfree, plumbopen, plumbopenfid, plumbsend, plumbsendtofid, plumbsendtext, plumblookup, plumbpack, plumbpackattr, plumbaddattr, plumbdelattr, plumbrecv, plumbrecvfid, plumbunpack, plumbunpackpartial, plumbunpackattr, Plumbmsg – plumb messages -
-
-
-
post9pservice(3)post9pservice – post 9P service for use by clients -
-
-
-
postnote(3)postnote – send a note to a process or process group -
-
-
-
prime(3)genprime, gensafeprime, genstrongprime, DSAprimes, probably_prime, smallprimetest – prime number generation -
-
-
-
print(3)print, fprint, sprint, snprint, seprint, smprint, runesprint, runesnprint, runeseprint, runesmprint, vfprint, vsnprint, vseprint, vsmprint, runevsnprint, runevseprint, runevsmprint – print formatted output -
-
-
-
proto(3)rdproto – parse and process a proto file listing -
-
-
-
pushtls(3)pushtls, tlsClient, tlsServer, initThumbprints, freeThumbprints, okThumbprint, readcert, readcertchain – attach TLS1 or SSL3 encryption to a communication channel -
-
-
-
qball(3)qball – 3-d rotation controller -
-
-
-
quaternion(3)qtom, mtoq, qadd, qsub, qneg, qmul, qdiv, qunit, qinv, qlen, slerp, qmid, qsqrt – Quaternion arithmetic -
-
-
-
quote(3)quotestrdup, quoterunestrdup, unquotestrdup, unquoterunestrdup, quotestrfmt, quoterunestrfmt, quotefmtinstall, doquote, needsrcquote – quoted character strings -
-
-
-
rand(3)rand, lrand, frand, nrand, lnrand, srand, truerand, ntruerand, fastrand, nfastrand – random number generator -
-
-
-
rc4(3)setupRC4state, rc4, rc4skip, rc4back - alleged rc4 encryption -
-
-
-
read(3)read, readn, write, pread, pwrite – read or write file -
-
-
-
regexp(3)regcomp, regcomplit, regcompnl, regexec, regsub, rregexec, rregsub, regerror – regular expression -
-
-
-
rfork(3)rfork – manipulate process state -
-
-
-
rsa(3)asn1dump -asn1toRSApriv -decodepem -decodepemchain -rsadecrypt -rsaencrypt -rsafill, -rsagen -rsaprivalloc -rsaprivfree -rsaprivtopub -rsapuballoc -rsapubfree -X509toRSApub -X509dump -X509gen -X509req -X509verify – RSA encryption algorithm -
-
-
-
rune(3)runetochar, chartorune, runelen, runenlen, fullrune, utfecpy, utflen, utfnlen, utfrune, utfrrune, utfutf – rune/UTF conversion -
-
-
-
runestrcat(3)runestrcat -runestrncat -runestrcmp -runestrncmp -runestrcpy -runestrncpy -runestrecpy -runestrlen -runestrchr -runestrrchr -runestrdup -runestrstr – rune string operations -
-
-
-
sechash(3)md4, md5, sha1, hmac_md5, hmac_sha1, md5pickle, md5unpickle, sha1pickle, sha1unpickle – cryptographically secure hashes -
-
-
-
seek(3)seek – change file offset -
-
-
-
sendfd(3)sendfd, recvfd – pass file descriptors along Unix domain sockets -
-
-
-
setjmp(3)setjmp, longjmp, notejmp – non-local goto -
-
-
-
sleep(3)sleep, alarm – delay, ask for delayed note -
-
-
-
stat(3)stat, fstat, wstat, fwstat, dirstat, dirfstat, dirwstat, dirfwstat, nulldir – get and put file status -
-
-
-
strcat(3)strcat, strncat, strcmp, strncmp, cistrcmp, cistrncmp, strcpy, strncpy, strecpy, strlen, strchr, strrchr, strpbrk, strspn, strcspn, strtok, strdup, strstr, cistrstr – string operations -
-
-
-
string(3)s_alloc, s_append, s_array, s_copy, s_error, s_free, s_incref, s_memappend, s_nappend, s_new, s_newalloc, s_parse, s_reset, s_restart, s_terminate, s_tolower, s_putc, s_unique, s_grow, s_read, s_read_line, s_getline, s_allocinstack, s_freeinstack, s_rdinstack – extensible strings -
-
-
-
stringsize(3)stringsize, stringwidth, stringnwidth, runestringsize, runestringwidth, runestringnwidth – graphical size of strings -
-
-
-
subfont(3)allocsubfont, freesubfont, installsubfont, lookupsubfont, uninstallsubfont, subfontname, readsubfont, readsubfonti, writesubfont, stringsubfont, strsubfontwidth, mkfont – subfont manipulation -
-
-
-
sysfatal(3)sysfatal – system error messages -
-
-
-
thread(3)alt -chancreate -chanfree -chaninit -chanprint -chansetname -mainstacksize -proccreate -procdata -recv -recvp -recvul -send -sendp -sendul -nbrecv -nbrecvp -nbrecvul -nbsend -nbsendp -nbsendul -threadcreate -threaddata -threadexec -threadexecl -threadexits -threadexitsall -threadgetgrp -threadgetname -threadint -threadintgrp -threadkill -threadkillgrp -threadmain -threadnotify -threadid -threadpid -threadsetgrp -threadsetname -threadsetstate -threadspawn -threadwaitchan -yield – thread and proc management -
-
-
-
time(3)time, nsec – time in seconds and nanoseconds since epoch -
-
-
-
udpread(3)udpread, udpwrite – read and write UDP packets -
-
-
-
wait(3)await, awaitnohang, awaitfor, wait, waitnohang, waitfor, waitpid – wait for a process to exit -
-
-
-
wctl(3)drawresizewindow, drawsetlabel, drawtopwindow – window management -
-
-
-
window(3)Screen, allocscreen, publicscreen, freescreen, allocwindow, bottomwindow, bottomnwindows, topwindow, topnwindows, originwindow – window management -
-
- -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
-		 -
- - diff --git a/man/man3/intro.html b/man/man3/intro.html deleted file mode 100644 index f6f4b311..00000000 --- a/man/man3/intro.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,288 +0,0 @@ - -intro(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
INTRO(3)INTRO(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - intro – introduction to library functions
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- -
- - #include any Unix headers
- -
- - #include <libc.h>
- -
- - #include <auth.h>
- -
- - #include <bio.h>
- -
- - #include <draw.h>
- -
- - #include <fcall.h>
- -
- - #include <frame.h>
- -
- - #include <mach.h>
- -
- - #include <regexp.h>
- -
- - #include <thread.h>
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - This section describes functions in various libraries. For the - most part, each library is defined by a single C include file, - such as those listed above, and a single archive file containing - the library proper. The name of the archive is /usr/local/plan9/lib/libx.a, - where x is the base of the include file name, - stripped of a leading lib if present. For example, <draw.h> defines - the contents of library /usr/local/plan9/lib/libdraw.a, which - may be abbreviated when named to the loader as −ldraw. In practice, - each include file contains a magic pragma that directs the loader - to pick up the associated archive - automatically, so it is rarely necessary to tell the loader which - libraries a program needs; see 9c(1). -
- - The library to which a function belongs is defined by the header - file that defines its interface. The ‘C library’, libc, contains - most of the basic subroutines such as strlen. Declarations for - all of these functions are in <libc.h>, which must be preceded by - (needs) an include of <u.h>. The graphics library, draw, is - defined by <draw.h>, which needs <libc.h> and <u.h>. The Buffered I/O - library, libbio, is defined by <bio.h>, which needs <libc.h> and <u.h>. - The ANSI C Standard I/O library, libstdio, is defined by <stdio.h>, - which needs <u.h>. There are a few other, less commonly used libraries - defined on - individual pages of this section. -
- - The include file <u.h>, a prerequisite of several other include - files, declares the architecture-dependent and -independent types, - including: uchar, ushort, and ulong, the unsigned integer types; - schar, the signed char type; vlong and uvlong, the signed and - unsigned very long integral types; Rune, the Unicode - character type; u8int, u16int, u32int, and u64int, the unsigned - integral types with specific widths; jmp_buf, the type of the - argument to setjmp and longjmp, plus macros that define the layout - of jmp_buf (see setjmp(3)); and the macros va_arg and friends - for accessing arguments of variadic functions (identical to the - macros defined in <stdarg.h> in ANSI C). -
- - Plan 9 and Unix use many similarly-named functions for different - purposes: for example, Plan 9’s dup is closer to (but not exactly) - Unix’s dup2. To avoid name conflicts, <libc.h> defines many of these - names as preprocessor macros to add a p9 prefix, so that dup becomes - p9dup. To disable this renaming, - #define NOPLAN9DEFINES before including <libc.h>. If Unix headers - must be included in a program, they should be included after <u.h>, - which sets important preprocessor directives (for example, to - enable 64-bit file offsets), but before <libc.h>, to avoid renaming - problems. -

Name space
- Files are collected into a hierarchical organization called a - file tree starting in a directory called the root. File names, - also called paths, consist of a number of /-separated path elements - with the slashes corresponding to directories. A path element - must contain only printable characters (those outside the control - spaces of ASCII and Latin-1). A path element cannot contain a - slash. -
- - When a process presents a file name to Plan 9, it is evaluated - by the following algorithm. Start with a directory that depends - on the first character of the path: / means the root of the main - hierarchy, and anything else means the process’s current working - directory. Then for each path element, look up the element in - the directory, advance to that directory, do a possible translation - (see below), and repeat. The last step may yield a directory or - regular file.
-

File I/O
- Files are opened for input or output by open or create (see open(3)). - These calls return an integer called a file descriptor which identifies - the file to subsequent I/O calls, notably read(3) and write. The - system allocates the numbers by selecting the lowest unused descriptor. - They are allocated dynamically; there is no - visible limit to the number of file descriptors a process may - have open. They may be reassigned using dup(3). File descriptors - are indices into a kernel resident file descriptor table. Each - process has an associated file descriptor table. In threaded programs - (see thread(3)), the file descriptor table is shared by all the - procs. -
- - By convention, file descriptor 0 is the standard input, 1 is the - standard output, and 2 is the standard error output. With one - exception, the operating system is unaware of these conventions; - it is permissible to close file 0, or even to replace it by a - file open only for writing, but many programs will be confused - by such - chicanery. The exception is that the system prints messages about - broken processes to file descriptor 2. -
- - Files are normally read or written in sequential order. The I/O - position in the file is called the file offset and may be set - arbitrarily using the seek(3) system call. -
- - Directories may be opened like regular files. Instead of reading - them with read(3), use the Dir structure-based routines described - in dirread(3). The entry corresponding to an arbitrary file can - be retrieved by dirstat (see stat(3)) or dirfstat; dirwstat and - dirfwstat write back entries, thus changing the properties of - a - file. -
- - New files are made with create (see open(3)) and deleted with - remove(3). Directories may not directly be written; create, remove, - wstat, and fwstat alter them. -
- - Pipe(3) creates a connected pair of file descriptors, useful for - bidirectional local communication.
-

Process execution and control
- A new process is created when an existing one calls fork(2). The - new (child) process starts out with copies of the address space - and most other attributes of the old (parent) process. In particular, - the child starts out running the same program as the parent; exec(3) - will bring in a different one. -
- - Each process has a unique integer process id; a set of open files, - indexed by file descriptor; and a current working directory (changed - by chdir(2)). -
- - Each process has a set of attributes -- memory, open files, name - space, etc. -- that may be shared or unique. Flags to rfork control - the sharing of these attributes. -
- - A process terminates by calling exits(3). A parent process may - call wait(3) to wait for some child to terminate. A bit of status - information may be passed from exits to wait. On Plan 9, the status - information is an arbitrary text string, but on Unix it is a single - integer. The Plan 9 interface persists here, although the - functionality does not. Instead, empty strings are converted to - exit status 0 and non-empty strings to 1. -
- - A process can go to sleep for a specified time by calling sleep(3). - -
- - There is a notification mechanism for telling a process about - events such as address faults, floating point faults, and messages - from other processes. A process uses notify(3) to register the - function to be called (the notification handler) when such events - occur.
-

Multithreading
- Where possible according to the ANSI C standard, the main C library - works properly in multiprocess programs; malloc, print, and the - other routines use locks (see lock(3)) to synchronize access to - their data structures. The graphics library defined in <draw.h> - is also multi-process capable; details are in graphics(3). - In general, though, multiprocess programs should use some form - of synchronization to protect shared data. -
- - The thread library, defined in <thread.h>, provides support for - multiprocess programs. It includes a data structure called a Channel - that can be used to send messages between processes, and coroutine-like - threads, which enable multiple threads of control within a single - process. The threads within a process - are scheduled by the library, but there is no pre-emptive scheduling - within a process; thread switching occurs only at communication - or synchronization points. -
- - Most programs using the thread library comprise multiple processes - communicating over channels, and within some processes, multiple - threads. Since I/O calls may block, a system call may block all - the threads in a process. Therefore, a program that shouldn’t - block unexpectedly will use a process to serve the I/O - request, passing the result to the main processes over a channel - when the request completes. For examples of this design, see ioproc(3) - or mouse(3).
- -

-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - nm(1), 9c(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Math functions in libc return special values when the function - is undefined for the given arguments or when the value is not - representable (see nan(3)). -
- - Some of the functions in libc are system calls and many others - employ system calls in their implementation. All system calls - return integers, with –1 indicating that an error occurred; errstr(3) - recovers a string describing the error. Some user-level library - functions also use the errstr mechanism to report errors. - Functions that may affect the value of the error string are said - to “set errstr”; it is understood that the error string is altered - only if an error occurs.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/ioproc.html b/man/man3/ioproc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 092bac91..00000000 --- a/man/man3/ioproc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,211 +0,0 @@ - -ioproc(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
IOPROC(3)IOPROC(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - closeioproc, iocall, ioclose, iointerrupt, iodial, ioopen, ioproc, - ioread, ioread9pmsg, ioreadn, iorecvfd, iosendfd, iosleep, iowrite - – slave I/O processes for threaded programs
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <thread.h>
- typedef struct Ioproc Ioproc;
- Ioproc* ioproc(void);
- int       ioclose(Ioproc *io, int fd);
- int       iodial(Ioproc *io, char *addr, char *local, char *dir, char - *cdfp);
- int       ioopen(Ioproc *io, char *file, int omode);
- long      ioread(Ioproc *io, int fd, void *a, long n);
- int       ioread9pmsg(Ioproc *io, int fd, void *a, uint n);
- long      ioreadn(Ioproc *io, int fd, void *a, long n);
- int       iorecvfd(int socket);
- int       iosendfd(int socket, int fd);
- int       iosleep(int milli);
- long      iowrite(Ioproc *io, int fd, void *a, long n);
- void      iointerrupt(Ioproc *io);
- void      closeioproc(Ioproc *io);
- long      iocall(Ioproc *io, long (*op)(va_list *arg), ...);
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - These routines provide access to I/O in slave procs. Since the - I/O itself is done in a slave proc, other threads in the calling - proc can run while the calling thread waits for the I/O to complete. - -
- - Ioproc forks a new slave proc and returns a pointer to the Ioproc - associated with it. Ioproc uses mallocz and proccreate; if either - fails, it calls sysfatal rather than return an error. -
- - Ioclose, iodial, ioopen, ioread, ioread9pmsg, ioreadn, iorecvfd, - iosendfd, iosleep, and iowrite execute the similarly named library - or system calls (see close(2), dial(3), open(3), read(3), fcall(3), - sendfd(3), and sleep(3)) in the slave process associated with - io. It is an error to execute more than one call at a time in - an I/O - proc. -
- - Iointerrupt interrupts the call currently executing in the I/O - proc. If no call is executing, iointerrupt is a no-op. -
- - Closeioproc terminates the I/O proc and frees the associated Ioproc - . -
- - Iocall is a primitive that may be used to implement more slave - I/O routines. Iocall arranges for op to be called in io’s proc, - with arg set to the variable parameter list, returning the value - that op returns.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - Relay messages between two file descriptors, counting the total - number of bytes seen:
- -
- - int tot;
- void
- relaythread(void *v)
- {
- -
- - int *fd, n;
- char buf[1024];
- Ioproc *io;
- fd = v;
- io = ioproc();
- while((n = ioread(io, fd[0], buf, sizeof buf)) > 0){
- if(iowrite(io, fd[1], buf, n) != n)
- sysfatal("iowrite: %r");
- tot += n;
- }
- closeioproc(io);
- -
- }
- void
- relay(int fd0, int fd1)
- {
- -
- - int fd[4];
- fd[0] = fd[3] = fd0;
- fd[1] = fd[2] = fd1;
- threadcreate(relaythread, fd, 8192);
- threadcreate(relaythread, fd+2, 8192);
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- If the two relaythread instances were running in different procs, - the common access to tot would be unsafe. -
- - Implement ioread:
- -
- - static long
- _ioread(va_list *arg)
- {
- -
- - int fd;
- void *a;
- long n;
- fd = va_arg(*arg, int);
- a = va_arg(*arg, void*);
- n = va_arg(*arg, long);
- return read(fd, a, n);
- -
- }
- long
- ioread(Ioproc *io, int fd, void *a, long n)
- {
- -
- - return iocall(io, _ioread, fd, a, n);
- -
- }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libthread
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - dial(3), open(3), read(3), thread(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Iointerrupt is currently unimplemented.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/ip.html b/man/man3/ip.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0376fa95..00000000 --- a/man/man3/ip.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,345 +0,0 @@ - -ip(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
IP(3)IP(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - eipfmt, parseip, parseipmask, v4parseip, v4parsecidr, parseether, - myipaddr, myetheraddr, maskip, equivip, defmask, isv4, v4tov6, - v6tov4, nhgetl, nhgets, nhgetv, hnputl, hnputs, hnputv, ptclbsum, - readipifc – Internet protocol
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <ip.h> -
- - int    eipfmt(Fmt*) -
- - ulong       parseip(uchar *ipaddr, char *str) -
- - ulong       parseipmask(uchar *ipaddr, char *str) -
- - char*       v4parseip(uchar *ipaddr, char *str) -
- - ulong       v4parsecidr(uchar *addr, uchar *mask, char *str) -
- - int    parseether(uchar *eaddr, char *str) -
- - int    myetheraddr(uchar *eaddr, char *dev) -
- - int    myipaddr(uchar *ipaddr, char *net) -
- - void maskip(uchar *from, uchar *mask, uchar *to) -
- - int    equivip(uchar *ipaddr1, uchar *ipaddr2) -
- - uchar*      defmask(uchar *ipaddr) -
- - int    isv4(uchar *ipaddr) -
- - void v4tov6(uchar *ipv6, uchar *ipv4) -
- - void v6tov4(uchar *ipv4, uchar *ipv6) -
- - ushort      nhgets(void *p) -
- - uint nhgetl(void *p) -
- - uvlong      nhgetv(void *p) -
- - void hnputs(void *p, ushort v) -
- - void hnputl(void *p, uint v) -
- - void hnputv(void *p, uvlong v) -
- - ushort      ptclbsum(uchar *a, int n) -
- - Ipifc*      readipifc(char *net, Ipifc *ifc, int index) -
- - uchar       IPv4bcast[IPaddrlen]; -
- - uchar       IPv4allsys[IPaddrlen]; -
- - uchar       IPv4allrouter[IPaddrlen]; -
- - uchar       IPallbits[IPaddrlen]; -
- - uchar       IPnoaddr[IPaddrlen]; -
- - uchar       v4prefix[IPaddrlen];
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines are used by Internet Protocol (IP) programs to - manipulate IP and Ethernet addresses. Plan 9, by default, uses - V6 format IP addresses. Since V4 addresses fit into the V6 space, - all IP addresses can be represented. IP addresses are stored as - a string of 16 unsigned chars, Ethernet addresses as 6 - unsigned chars. Either V4 or V6 string representation can be used - for IP addresses. For V4 addresses, the representation can be - (up to) 4 decimal integers from 0 to 255 separated by periods. - For V6 addresses, the representation is (up to) 8 hex integers - from 0x0 to 0xFFFF separated by colons. Strings of 0 - integers can be elided using two colons. For example, FFFF::1111 - is equivalent to FFFF:0:0:0:0:0:0:1111. The string representation - for IP masks is a superset of the address representation. It includes - slash notation that indicates the number of leading 1 bits in - the mask. Thus, a V4 class C mask can be - represented as FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FF00, 255.255.255.0, - or /120. The string representation of Ethernet addresses is exactly - 12 hexadecimal digits. -
- - Eipfmt is a print(3) formatter for Ethernet (verb E) addresses, - IP V6 (verb I) addresses, IP V4 (verb V) addresses, and IP V6 - (verb M) masks. -
- - Parseip converts a string pointed to by str to a 16-byte IP address - starting at ipaddr. As a concession to backwards compatibility, - if the string is a V4 address, the return value is an unsigned - long integer containing the big-endian V4 address. If not, the - return value is 6. Parseipmask converts a string pointed to by - str - to a 6-byte IP mask starting at ipaddr. It too returns an unsigned - long big-endian V4 address or 6. Both routines return -1 on errors. - -
- - V4parseip converts a string pointed to by str to a 4-byte V4 IP - address starting at ipaddr. -
- - V4parsecidr converts a string of the form addr/mask, pointed to - by str, to a 4-byte V4 IP address starting at ipaddr and a 4-byte - V4 IP mask starting at mask. -
- - Myipaddr returns the first valid IP address in the IP stack rooted - at net. -
- - Parseether converts a string pointed to by str to a 6-byte Ethernet - address starting at eaddr. Myetheraddr reads the Ethernet address - string from file dev/1/stats and parses it into eaddr. Both routines - return a negative number on errors. -
- - Maskip places the bit-wise AND of the IP addresses pointed to - by its first two arguments into the buffer pointed to by the third. - -
- - Equivip returns non-zero if the IP addresses pointed to by its - two arguments are equal. -
- - Defmask returns the standard class A, B, or C mask for ipaddr. - -
- - Isv4 returns non-zero if the V6 address is in the V4 space, that - is, if it starts with 0:0:0:0:0:0:FFFF. V4tov6 converts the V4 - address, v4ip, to a V6 address and puts the result in v6ip. V6tov4 - converts the V6 address, v6ip, to a V4 address and puts the result - in v4ip. -
- - Hnputs, hnputl, and hnputv are used to store 16-, 32-, and 64-bit - integers into IP big-endian form. Nhgets, nhgetl, and nhgetv convert - big-endian 2-, 4-, and 8-byte quantities into integers. -
- - Pctlbsum returns the one’s complement checksum used in IP protocols, - typically invoked as
- hnputs(hdr−>cksum, ~ptclbsum(data, len) & 0xffff);
- -
- - A number of standard IP addresses in V6 format are also defined. - They are:
- IPv4bcast
- -
- - the V4 broadcast address
- -
- IPv4allsys
- -
- - the V4 all systems multicast address
- -
- IPv4allrouter
- -
- - the V4 all routers multicast address
- -
- IPallbits
- -
- - the V6 all bits on address
- -
- IPnoaddr
- -
- - the V6 null address, all zeros
- -
- v4prefix
- -
- - the IP V6 prefix to all embedded V4 addresses -
- - -
- Readipifc returns information about a particular interface (index - >= 0) or all IP interfaces (index < 0) configured under a mount - point net, default /net. Each interface is described by one Ipifc - structure which in turn points to a linked list of Iplifc structures - describing the addresses assigned to this interface. If the list - ifc is supplied, that list is freed. Thus, subsequent calls can - be used to free the list returned by the previous call. Ipifc - is: -
- - typedef struct Ipifc
- {
- -
- - Ipifc       *next;
- Iplifc      *lifc;          /* local addressses */
- /* per ip interface */
- int    index;          /* number of interface in ipifc dir */
- char dev[64];    /* associated physical device */
- int    mtu;        /* max transfer unit */
- long validlt;    /* valid life time */
- long preflt;          /* preferred life time */
- uchar       sendra6;    /* on == send router adv */
- uchar       recvra6;    /* on == rcv router adv */
- ulong       pktin;          /* packets read */
- ulong       pktout;          /* packets written */
- ulong       errin;          /* read errors */
- ulong       errout;          /* write errors */
- Ipv6rp      rp;         /* route advertisement params */
- -
- } Ipifc;
- -
- - Iplifc is: -
- - struct Iplifc
- {
- -
- - Iplifc      *next;
- uchar       ip[IPaddrlen];
- uchar       mask[IPaddrlen];
- uchar       net[IPaddrlen];           /* ip & mask */
- ulong       preflt;              /* preferred lifetime */
- ulong       validlt;         /* valid lifetime */
- -
- };
- -
- - Ipv6rp is: struct Ipv6rp {       int     mflag;       int     oflag;       int     maxraint; -     /* max route adv interval */       int     minraint;     /* min route adv interval - */       int     linkmtu;       int     reachtime;       int     rxmitra;       int     ttl;       int     routerlt; -      }; -
- - Dev contains the first 64 bytes of the device configured with - this interface. Net is ip&mask if the network is multipoint or - the remote address if the network is point to point.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libip
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - print(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/isalpharune.html b/man/man3/isalpharune.html deleted file mode 100644 index 99c2f387..00000000 --- a/man/man3/isalpharune.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ - -isalpharune(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ISALPHARUNE(3)ISALPHARUNE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - isalpharune, islowerrune, isspacerune, istitlerune, isupperrune, - tolowerrune, totitlerune, toupperrune – Unicode character classes - and cases
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int isalpharune(Rune c) -
- - int islowerrune(Rune c) -
- - int isspacerune(Rune c) -
- - int istitlerune(Rune c) -
- - int isupperrune(Rune c) -
- - Rune tolowerrune(Rune c) -
- - Rune totitlerune(Rune c) -
- - Rune toupperrune(Rune c)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines examine and operate on Unicode characters, in particular - a subset of their properties as defined in the Unicode standard. - Unicode defines some characters as alphabetic and specifies three - cases: upper, lower, and title. Analogously to isalpha(3) for - ASCII, these routines test types and modify cases for - Unicode characters. The names are self-explanatory. -
- - The case-conversion routines return the character unchanged if - it has no case.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/utf/runetype.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - isalpha(3), The Unicode Standard.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/keyboard.html b/man/man3/keyboard.html deleted file mode 100644 index 19dc833d..00000000 --- a/man/man3/keyboard.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,135 +0,0 @@ - -keyboard(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
KEYBOARD(3)KEYBOARD(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - initkeyboard, ctlkeyboard, closekeyboard – keyboard control
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <thread.h>
- #include <keyboard.h>
- -
- - Keyboardctl      *initkeyboard(char *file)
- -
- - int             ctlkeyboard(Keyboardctl *kc, char *msg)
- -
- - void            closekeyboard(Keyboard *kc)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These functions access and control a keyboard interface for character-at-a-time - I/O in a multi-threaded environment, usually in combination with - mouse(3). They use the message-passing Channel interface in the - threads library (see thread(3)); programs that wish a more event-driven, - single-threaded approach - should use event(3). -
- - Initkeyboard opens a connection to the keyboard and returns a - Keyboardctl structure:
- -
- - typedef struct Keyboardct Keyboardctl;
- struct Keyboardctl
- {
- -
- - Channel *c;         /* chan(Rune[20]) */
- char      *file;
- int       consfd;     /* to cons file */
- int       ctlfd;      /* to ctl file */
- int       pid;        /* of slave proc */
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- The argument to initkeyboard is ignored (on Plan 9, it is the - name of the keyboard device). -
- - Once the Keyboardctl is set up a message containing a Rune will - be sent on the Channel Keyboardctl.c to report each character - read from the device. -
- - Ctlkeyboard is used to set the state of the interface, typically - to turn raw mode on and off. It writes the string msg to the control - file associated with the device, which is assumed to be the regular - device file name with the string ctl appended. -
- - Closekeyboard closes the file descriptors associated with the - keyboard, kills the slave processes, and frees the Keyboardctl - structure. -
- - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), draw(3), event(3), thread(3).
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Because the interface delivers complete runes, there is no way - to report lesser actions such as shift keys or even individual - bytes.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/lock.html b/man/man3/lock.html deleted file mode 100644 index 72d66e12..00000000 --- a/man/man3/lock.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,222 +0,0 @@ - -lock(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
LOCK(3)LOCK(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - lock, canlock, unlock, qlock, canqlock, qunlock, rlock, canrlock, - runlock, wlock, canwlock, wunlock, rsleep, rwakeup, rwakeupall - incref, decref – spin locks, queueing rendezvous locks, reader-writer - locks, rendezvous points, and reference counts
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- -
- - void lock(Lock *l)
- int    canlock(Lock *l)
- void unlock(Lock *l)
- -
- - void qlock(QLock *l)
- int    canqlock(QLock *l)
- void qunlock(QLock *l)
- -
- - void rlock(RWLock *l)
- int    canrlock(RWLock *l)
- void runlock(RWLock *l)
- -
- - void wlock(RWLock *l)
- int    canwlock(RWLock *l)
- void wunlock(RWLock *l)
- -
- - typedef struct Rendez {
- -
- - QLock *l;
- -
- -
- - ...
- -
- } Rendez;
- -
- - void rsleep(Rendez *r)
- int    rwakeup(Rendez *r)
- int    rwakeupall(Rendez *r)
- -
- - #include <thread.h>
- -
- - typedef struct Ref {
- -
- - long ref;
- -
- } Ref;
- -
- - void incref(Ref*)
- long decref(Ref*)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines are used to synchronize processes sharing memory. - -
- - Locks are spin locks, QLocks and RWLocks are different types of - queueing locks, and Rendezes are rendezvous points. -
- - Locks and rendezvous points have trivial implementations in programs - not using the thread library (see thread(3)), since such programs - have no concurrency. -
- - Used carelessly, spin locks can be expensive and can easily generate - deadlocks. Their use is discouraged, especially in programs that - use the thread library because they prevent context switches between - threads. -
- - Lock blocks until the lock has been obtained. Canlock is non-blocking. - It tries to obtain a lock and returns a non-zero value if it was - successful, 0 otherwise. Unlock releases a lock. -
- - QLocks have the same interface but are not spin locks; instead - if the lock is taken qlock will suspend execution of the calling - thread until it is released. -
- - Although Locks are the more primitive lock, they have limitations; - for example, they cannot synchronize between tasks in the same - proc. Use QLocks instead. -
- - RWLocks manage access to a data structure that has distinct readers - and writers. Rlock grants read access; runlock releases it. Wlock - grants write access; wunlock releases it. Canrlock and canwlock - are the non-blocking versions. There may be any number of simultaneous - readers, but only one writer. Moreover, if - write access is granted no one may have read access until write - access is released. -
- - All types of lock should be initialized to all zeros before use; - this puts them in the unlocked state. -
- - Rendezes are rendezvous points. Each Rendez r is protected by - a QLock r−>l, which must be held by the callers of rsleep, rwakeup, - and rwakeupall. Rsleep atomically releases r−>l and suspends execution - of the calling task. After resuming execution, rsleep will reacquire - r−>l before returning. If any processes - are sleeping on r, rwakeup wakes one of them. it returns 1 if - a process was awakened, 0 if not. Rwakeupall wakes all processes - sleeping on r, returning the number of processes awakened. Rwakeup - and rwakeupall do not release r−>l and do not suspend execution - of the current task. -
- - Before use, Rendezes should be initialized to all zeros except - for r−>l pointer, which should point at the QLock that will guard - r. -
- - A Ref contains a long that can be incremented and decremented - atomically: Incref increments the Ref in one atomic operation. - Decref atomically decrements the Ref and returns zero if the resulting - value is zero, non-zero otherwise.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/qlock.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/libthread
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Locks are not always spin locks. Instead they are usually implemented - using the pthreads library’s pthread_mutex_t, whose implementation - method is not defined. -
- - On pthreads-based systems, the implementation of Lock never calls - pthread_mutex_destroy to free the pthread_mutex_t’s. This leads - to resource leaks on FreeBSD 5 (though not on Linux 2.6, where - pthread_mutex_destroy is a no-op). -
- - On systems that do not have a usable pthreads implementation, - the Lock implementation provided by libthread is still not exactly - a spin lock. After each unsuccessful attempt, lock calls sleep(0) - to yield the CPU; this handles the common case where some other - process holds the lock. After a thousand - unsuccessful attempts, lock sleeps for 100ms between attempts. - Another another thousand unsuccessful attempts, lock sleeps for - a full second between attempts. Locks are not intended to be held - for long periods of time. The 100ms and full second sleeps are - only heuristics to avoid tying up the CPU when a - process deadlocks. As discussed above, if a lock is to be held - for much more than a few instructions, the queueing lock types - should be almost always be used.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mach-cmd.html b/man/man3/mach-cmd.html deleted file mode 100644 index 978e80b5..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mach-cmd.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,167 +0,0 @@ - -mach-cmd(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MACH-CMD(3)MACH-CMD(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - attachargs, attachcore, attachdynamic, attachproc, proctextfile - – debugging processes and core files
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mach.h> -
- - int      attachcore(Fhdr *hdr) -
- - int      attachproc(int pid) -
- - int      attachdynamic(void) -
- - char*    proctextfile(int pid) -
- - int      attachargs(int argc, char **argv, int omode) -
- - extern Fhdr* symhdr;
- extern     char*    symfil;
- extern     Map*    symmap;
- extern     Fhdr*    fhdrlist;
- extern     Fhdr*    corhdr;
- extern     char*    corfil;
- extern     Map*    cormap;
- extern     int      corpid;
- extern     Regs*    correg;
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines provide access to the objects a typical debugger - manipulates: an executable binary, some number of shared libraries, - a memory image in the form of a core dump or active process, and - a register set. -
- - The maintained state is:
- symhdr
- -
- - The file header for the main binary.
- -
- symfilThe file name of the main binary.
- symmap
- -
- - The memory map of the main binary.
- -
- fhdrlist
- -
- - A linked list (via the Fhdr.next fields) of all currently open - headers (see symopen in mach-symbol(3)). When dynamically linked - objects have been attached, they are present in this linked list, - and therefore included in searches by indexsym, lookupsym, and - findsym (see mach-symbol(3)). - -
- corhdrThe file header for the core dump, if any.
- corfilThe file name of the core dump, if any.
- cormap
- -
- - The memory map of the core dump or attached process.
- -
- corpidThe process id of the attached process, if any.
- corregThe register set of the core dump or attached process. If - these fields are not valid, they are zeroed. -
- - Attachcore and attachproc attach to an opened core file or an - executing process. They set corhdr, corfil, cormap, corpid, and - correg. -
- - Proctextfile returns the name of the main binary for the process - with id pid. -
- - Attachdynamic requires that the memory image already be attached. - It reads the dynamic linker’s internal run-time data structures - and then opens all the dynamic objects that are currently loaded. - -
- - Attachargs uses all of these functions while parsing an argument - vector as would be passed to a debugger like db(1) or acid(1). - It expects a list of executable files, core dump files, or process - ids, given in any order. If extra arguments are given (for example, - more than one executable, or both a core dump and a - process id), they are ignored and diagnostics are printed to standard - error. If arguments are missing (for example, the process id is - given without an executable file), attachargs fills them in as - best it can.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libmach
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mach(3), mach-file(3), mach-map(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The interface needs to be changed to support multiple threads, - each with its own register set.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mach-file.html b/man/man3/mach-file.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7fd1a578..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mach-file.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,185 +0,0 @@ - -mach-file(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MACH-FILE(3)MACH-FILE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - crackhdr, uncrackhdr, mapfile, unmapfile, mapproc, unmapproc, - detachproc, ctlproc, procnotes – machine-independent access to - exectuable files and running processes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mach.h> -
- - int     crackhdr(int fd, Fhdr *hdr)
- void    uncrackhdr(Fhdr *hdr) -
- - int     mapfile(Fhdr *hdr, ulong base, Map *map, Regs **regs)
- void    unmapfile(Fhdr *hdr, Map *map)
- int     mapproc(int pid, Map *map, Regs **regs)
- void    unmapproc(Map *map)
- int     detachproc(int pid)
- int     ctlproc(int pid, char *msg)
- int     procnotes(int pid, char ***notes)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These functions parse executable files and provide access to those - files and to running processes. -
- - Crackhdr opens and parses the named executable file. The returned - data structure hdr is initialized with a machine-independent description - of the header information. The following fields are the most commonly - used:
- macha pointer to the Mach structure for the target architecture
- mname
- -
- - the name of the target architecture
- -
- fname
- -
- - a description of the kind of file (e.g., executable, core dump)
- -
- aname
- -
- - a description of the application binary interface this file uses; - typically it is the name of an operating system If the global - variable mach is nil, crackhdr points it to the same Mach structure. - -
- - -
- Mapfile adds the segments found in hdr to map. If hdr is an executable - file, there are typically three segments: text, data, and a zero-backed - bss. If hdr is a dynamic shared library, its segments are relocated - by base before being mapping. -
- - If hdr is a core file, there is one segment named core for each - contiguous section of memory recorded in the core file. There - are often quite a few of these, as most operating systems omit - clean memory pages when writing core files (Mac OS X is the only - exception among the supported systems). Because core files - have such holes, it is typically necessary to construct the core - map by calling mapfile on the executable and then calling it again - on the core file. Newly-added segments are mapped on top of existing - segments, so this arrangement will use the core file for the segments - it contains but fall back to the executable for the - rest. -
- - Unmapfile removes the mappings in map corresponding to hdr. -
- - Mapproc attaches to a running program and adds its segments to - the given map. It adds one segment for each contiguous section - of mapped memory. On systems where this information cannot be - determined, it adds a single segment covering the entire address - space. Accessing areas of this segment that are - actually not mapped in the process address space will cause the - get/put routines to return errors. -
- - Unmapproc removes the mappings in map corresponding to pid. Detachproc - detaches from all previously attached processes. -
- - Ctlproc manipulates the process with id pid according to the message - msg. Valid messages include:
- killterminate the process
- startstop
- -
- - start the process and wait for it to stop
- -
- sysstop
- -
- - arrange for the process to stop at its next system call, start - the process, and then wait for it to stop
- -
- waitstop
- -
- - wait for the process to stop
- -
- start
- -
- - start the process -
- - -
- Procnotes fills *notes with a pointer to an array of strings representing - pending notes waiting for the process. (On Unix, these notes are - textual descriptions of any pending signals.) Procnotes returns - the number of pending notes. The memory at *notes should be freed - via free (see malloc(3)) when no longer needed. - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libmach
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mach(3), mach-map(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mach-map.html b/man/man3/mach-map.html deleted file mode 100644 index ddf7275f..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mach-map.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,312 +0,0 @@ - -mach-map(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MACH-MAP(3)MACH-MAP(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - allocmap, addseg, findseg, addrtoseg, addrtosegafter, removeseg, - freemap, get1, get2, get4, get8, put1, put2, put4, put8, rget, - rput, fpformat, locnone, locaddr, locconst, locreg, locindir, - loccmp, loceval, locfmt, locsimplify, lget1, lget2, lget4, lget8, - lput1, lput2, lput4, lput8 – machine-independent access to address - spaces and register sets
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mach.h> -
- - typedef struct Map Map;
- typedef struct Seg Seg;
- -
- - struct Seg
- {
- -
- - char    *name;
- char    *file;
- int     fd;
- ulong    base;
- ulong    size;
- ulong    offset;
- int     (*rw)(Map*, Seg*, ulong, void*, uint, int);
- -
- };
- -
- - struct Map
- {
- -
- - Seg     *seg;
- int     nseg;
- ...
- -
- };
- -
- - Map    *allocmap(void)
- int     addseg(Map *map, Seg seg)
- int     findseg(Map *map, char *name, char *file)
- int     addrtoseg(Map *map, ulong addr, Seg *seg)
- int     addrtosegafter(Map *map, ulong addr, Seg *seg)
- void    removeseg(Map *map, int i)
- void    freemap(Map *map)
- -
- - int     get1(Map *map, ulong addr, uchar *a, uint n)
- int     get2(Map *map, ulong addr, u16int *u)
- int     get4(Map *map, ulong addr, u32int *u)
- int     get8(Map *map, ulong addr, u64int *u)
- -
- - int     put1(Map *map, ulong addr, uchar *a, uint n)
- int     put2(Map *map, ulong addr, u16int u)
- int     put4(Map *map, ulong addr, u32int u)
- int     put8(Map *map, ulong addr, u64int u)
- -
- - int     rget(Regs *regs, char *reg, ulong *u)
- int     fpformat(Map *map, char *reg, char *a, uint n, char code);
- -
- - int     rput(Regs *regs, char *name, ulong u)
- -
- - Loc    locnone(void)
- Loc    locaddr(ulong addr)
- Loc    locconst(ulong con)
- Loc    locreg(char *reg)
- Loc    locindir(char *reg, long offset)
- -
- - int     loccmp(Loc *a, Loc *b)
- int     loceval(Map *map, Loc loc, ulong *addr)
- int     locfmt(Fmt *fmt)
- int     locsimplify(Map *map, Loc *regs, Loc loc, Loc *newloc)
- -
- - int     lget1(Map *map, Loc loc, uchar *a, uint n)
- int     lget2(Map *map, Loc loc, u16int *u)
- int     lget4(Map *map, Loc loc, u32int *u)
- int     lget8(Map *map, Loc loc, u64int *u)
- -
- - int     lput1(Map *map, Loc loc, uchar *a, uint n)
- int     lput2(Map *map, Loc loc, u16int u)
- int     lput4(Map *map, Loc loc, u32int u)
- int     lput8(Map *map, Loc loc, u64int u)
- -
- - -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These functions provide a processor-independent interface for - accessing executable files, core files, and running processes - via maps, data structures that provides access to an address space - and register set. The functions described in mach-file(3) are - typically used to construct these maps. Related library functions - described in mach-symbol(3) provide similar access to symbol tables. - -
- - Each map comprises an optional register set and one or more segments, - each associating a non-overlapping range of memory addresses with - a logical section of an executable file or of a running process’s - address space. Other library functions then use a map and the - architecture-specific data structures to provide - a generic interface to the processor-dependent data. -
- - Each segment has a name (e.g., text or data) and may be associated - with a particular file. A segment represents a range of accessible - address space. Segments may be backed an arbitary access function - (if the rw pointer is non-nil), or by the contents of an open - file (using the fd file descriptor). Each range has a - starting address in the space (base) and an extent (size). In - segments mapped by files, the range begins at byte offset in the - file. The rw function is most commonly used to provide access - to executing processes via ptrace(2) and to zeroed segments. -
- - Allocmap creates an empty map; freemap frees a map. -
- - Addseg adds the given segment to the map, resizing the map’s seg - array if necessary. A negative return value indicates an allocation - error. -
- - Findseg returns the index of the segment with the given name (and, - if file is non-nil, the given file), or –1 if no such segment is - found. -
- - Addrtoseg returns the index of the segment containing for the - given address, or –1 if that address is not mapped. Segments may - have overlapping address ranges: addseg appends segments to the - end of the seg array in the map, and addrtoseg searches the map - backwards from the end, so the most recently mapped - segment wins. -
- - Addrtosegafter returns the index of the segment containing the - lowest mapped address greater than addr. -
- - Removeseg removes the segment at the given index. -
- - Get1, get2, get4, and get8 retrieve the data stored at address - addr in the address space associated with map. Get1 retrieves - n bytes of data beginning at addr into buf. Get2, get4 and get8 - retrieve 16-bit, 32-bit and 64-bit values respectively, into the - location pointed to by u. The value is byte-swapped if the source - byte order differs from that of the current architecture. This - implies that the value returned by get2, get4, and get8 may not - be the same as the byte sequences returned by get1 when n is two, - four or eight; the former may be byte-swapped, the latter reflects - the byte order of the target architecture. These functions - return the number of bytes read or a –1 when there is an error. - -
- - Put1, put2, put4, and put8 write to the address space associated - with map. The address is translated using the map parameters and - multi-byte quantities are byte-swapped, if necessary, before they - are written. Put1 transfers n bytes stored at buf; put2, put4, - and put8 write the 16-bit, 32-bit or 64-bit quantity - contained in val, respectively. The number of bytes transferred - is returned. A –1 return value indicates an error. -
- - When representing core files or running programs, maps also provide - access to the register set. Rget and rput read or write the register - named by reg. If the register is smaller than a ulong, the high - bits are ignored. -
- - Fpformat converts the contents of a floating-point register to - a string. Buf is the address of a buffer of n bytes to hold the - resulting string. Code must be either F or f, selecting double - or single precision, respectively. If code is F, the contents - of the specified register and the following register are interpreted - as a - double-precision floating-point number; this is meaningful only - for architectures that implement double-precision floats by combining - adjacent single-precision registers. -
- - A location represents a place in an executing image capable of - storing a value. Note that locations are typically passed by value - rather than by reference. -
- - Locnone returns an unreadable, unwritable location. Locaddr returns - a location representing the memory address addr. Locreg returns - a location representing the register reg. Locindir returns an - location representing the memory address at offset added to the - value of reg. Locconst returns an imaginary unwritable - location holding the constant con; such locations are useful for - passing specific constants to functions expect locations, such - as unwind (see mach-stack(3)). -
- - Loccmp compares two locations, returning negative, zero, or positive - values if *a is less than, equal to, or greater than *b, respectively. - Register locations are ordered before memory addresses, which - are ordered before indirections. -
- - Locfmt is a print(3)-verb that formats a Loc structure (not a - pointer to one). -
- - Indirection locations are needed in some contexts (e.g., when - using findlsym (see mach-symbol(3))), but bothersome in most. - Locsimplify rewrites indirections as absolute memory addresses, - by evaluating the register using the given map and adding the - offset. -
- - The functions lget1, lget2, lget4, lget8, lput1, lput2, lput4, - and lput8 read and write the given locations, using the get, put, - rget, and rput function families as necessary.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libmach
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mach(3), mach-file(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - These routines set errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - This man page needs to describe Regs and Regdesc
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mach-stack.html b/man/man3/mach-stack.html deleted file mode 100644 index d08258bd..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mach-stack.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,232 +0,0 @@ - -mach-stack(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MACH-STACK(3)MACH-STACK(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - stacktrace, localaddr, unwindframe, windindex, windreglocs – stack - traces
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mach.h> -
- - int     stacktrace(Map *map, Rgetter rget, Tracer trace) -
- - int     localaddr(Map *map, Regs *regs, char *fn, char *val, ulong - *val) -
- - int     unwindframe(Map *map, Regs *regs, ulong *next, Symbol *sym) - -
- - int     windindex(char *regname) -
- - Loc*    windreglocs(void)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Stacktrace provides machine-independent implementations of process - stack traces. They must retrieve data and register contents from - an executing image. Sometimes the desired registers are not the - current registers but rather a set of saved registers stored elsewhere - in memory. The caller may specify an initial - register set in the form of an Rgetter function, of the form -
- - -
- - ulong rget(Map *map, char *name)
- -
- - -
- It returns the contents of a register when given a map and a register - name. It is usually sufficient for the register function to return - meaningful values only for SP and PC, and for the link register - (usually LR) on CISC machines. -
- - Given the map and the rgetter, stacktrace unwinds the stack starting - at the innermost function. At each level in the trace, it calls - the tracer function, which has the form -
- - -
- - int trace(Map *map, ulong pc, ulong callerpc,
- -
- - Rgetter rget, Symbol *s)
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- The tracer is passed the map, the current program counter, the - program counter of the caller (zero if the caller is unknown), - a new rget function, and a symbol (see mach-symbol(3)) describing - the current function (nil if no symbol is known). The value returned - by the tracer controls whether the stack trace continues: a - zero or negative return value stops the trace, while a positive - return value continues it. -
- - The rgetter passed to the tracer is not the rgetter passed to - stacktrace itself. Instead, it is a function returning the register - values at the time of the call, to the extent that they can be - reconstructed. The most common use for this rgetter is as an argument - to lget4, etc., when evaluating the locations of local - variables. -
- - Localaddr uses stacktrace to walk up the stack looking for the - innermost instance of a function named fn ; once it finds the - function, it looks for the parameter or local variable var, storing - the address of the variable in val. -
- - Unwindframe is the low-level function on which stacktrace is built. - Given the current memory image in map and the current register - set in regs , unwindframe fills in next with the values of the - register set at the time of the call to the function in the current - program counter. Sym should be the symbol corresponding to - the current function, if available. -
- - The next array holds only the winding registers, typically the - caller-save registers and the program counter and stack pointer. - The order of registers in the array is called the winding order. - The winding set can be found in the array mach−>windreg, which - has mach−>nwindreg entries. Windindex returns the index of - the named register in the winding order. Windreglocs returns an - array of Loc structures corresponding to the winding registers, - in the winding order.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - The following code writes a simple stack trace to standard output, - stopping after at most 20 stack frames.
- -
- - static int
- trace(Map *map, ulong pc, ulong callerpc,
- -
- - Rgetter rget, Symbol *s, int depth)
- -
- {
- -
- - char buf[512];
- int i, first;
- u32int v;
- Symbol s2;
- if(sym)
- print("%s+%lx", s->name, pc - loceval(s->loc));
- else
- print("%lux", pc);
- print("(");
- first = 0;
- for(i=0; indexlsym(s, &i, &s2)>=0; i++){
- if(s.class != CPARAM)
- continue;
- if(first++)
- print(", ");
- if(lget4(map, rget, s->loc, &v) >= 0)
- print("%s=%#lux", s->name, (ulong)v);
- else
- print("%s=???", s->name);
- }
- print(") called from ");
- symoff(buf, sizeof buf, callerpc, CTEXT);
- print("%s\n", buf);
- return depth < 20;
- -
- }
- -
- - if(stacktrace(map, nil, trace) <= 0)
- print("no stack frame0);
- -
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libmach
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mach(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Need to talk about Regs
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mach-swap.html b/man/man3/mach-swap.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5eefd9d6..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mach-swap.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,124 +0,0 @@ - -mach-swap(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MACH-SWAP(3)MACH-SWAP(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - beswap2, beswap4, beswap8, beieeeftoa32, beieeeftoa64, beieeeftoa80, - beload2, beload4, beload8, leswap2, leswap4, leswap8, leieeeftoa32, - leieeeftoa64, leieeeftoa80, leload2, leload4, leload8, ieeeftoa32, - ieeeftoa64 – machine-independent access to byte-ordered data
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mach.h> -
- - u16int beswap2(u16int u)
- u32int    beswap4(u32int u)
- u64int    beswap8(u64int u) -
- - int     beieeeftoa32(char *a, uint n, void *f)
- int      beieeeftoa64(char *a, uint n, void *f)
- int      beieeeftoa80(char *a, uint n, void *f) -
- - u16int beload2(uchar *p)
- u32int    beload4(uchar *p)
- u64int    beload8(uchar *p) -
- - u16int leswap2(u16int u)
- u32int    leswap4(u32int u)
- u64int    leswap8(u64int u) -
- - int     leieeeftoa32(char *a, uint n, void *f)
- int      leieeeftoa64(char *a, uint n, void *f)
- int      leieeeftoa80(char *a, uint n, void *f) -
- - u16int leload2(uchar *p)
- u32int    leload4(uchar *p)
- u64int    leload8(uchar *p) -
- - int     ieeeftoa32(char *a, uint n, u32int u)
- int      ieeeftoa64(char *a, uint n, u32int hi, u32int lo)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These functions provide machine-independent access to data in - a particular byte order. -
- - Beswap2, beswap4, and beswap8 return the 2-byte, 4-byte, and 8-byte - big-endian representation of the bytes in val, respectively. -
- - Beload2, beload4, and beload8 return the 2-byte, 4-byte, and 8-byte - big-endian interpretation of the bytes at p, respectively. -
- - Beieeeftoa32, beieeeftoa64, and beieeeftoa80 format the big-endian - 4-byte, 8-byte, or 10-byte IEEE floating-point value at f into - the n-byte string buffer a. -
- - Leswap2, leswap4, etc. are the little-endian equivalents of the - routines just described. -
- - Ieeeftoa32 and ieeeftoa64 format a local machine byte-order floating-point - value into the n-byte string buffer a. Ieeeftoa32 expects a 32-bit - floating-point value stored in the bits of u. Ieeeftoa64 expects - a 64-bit floating-point value whose high 32-bits are in hi and - low 32-bits are in lo. - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libmach
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mach(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mach-symbol.html b/man/man3/mach-symbol.html deleted file mode 100644 index 246d51b4..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mach-symbol.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,272 +0,0 @@ - -mach-symbol(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MACH-SYMBOL(3)MACH-SYMBOL(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - symopen, symclose, findhdr, indexsym, lookupsym, findsym, findexsym, - flookupsym, ffindsym, lookuplsym, indexlsym, findlsym, symoff, - pc2file, file2pc, line2pc, fnbound, fileline, pc2line – symbol - table access functions
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mach.h> -
- - int      symopen(Fhdr *hdr)
- void     symclose(Fhdr *hdr)
- Fhdr     *findhdr(char *name)
- extern    Fhdr* fhdrlist; -
- - int      indexsym(uint n, Symbol *s)
- int      lookupsym(char *fn, char *var, Symbol *s)
- int      findsym(Loc loc, uint class, Symbol *s) -
- - int      findexsym(Fhdr *hdr, uint n, Symbol *s)
- Symbol *flookupsym(Fhdr *hdr, char *name)
- Symbol *ffindsym(Fhdr *hdr, Loc loc, uint class) -
- - int      indexlsym(Symbol *s1, uint n, Symbol *s2)
- int      lookuplsym(Symbol *s1, char *name, Symbol *s2)
- int      findlsym(Symbol *s1, Loc loc, Symbol *s2) -
- - int      symoff(char *a, uint n, ulong addr, uint class) -
- - int      pc2file(ulong pc, char *file, uint n, ulong *line)
- int      pc2line(ulong pc, ulong *line)
- int      fileline(ulong pc, char *buf, uint n)
- int      file2pc(char *file, ulong line, ulong *pc)
- int      line2pc(ulong basepc, ulong line, ulong *pc)
- int      fnbound(ulong pc, ulong bounds[2])
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These functions provide machine-independent access to the symbol - table of an executable file or executing process. Mach(3), mach-file(3), - and mach-map(3) describe additional library functions for accessing - executable files and executing processes. -
- - Symopen uses the data in the Fhdr structure filled by crackhdr - (see mach-file(3)) to initialize in-memory structures used to - access the symbol tables contained in the file. Symclose frees - the structures. The rest of the functions described here access - a composite symbol table made up of all currently open tables. - -
- - The set of all currently open Fhdrs is maintained as a linked - list starting at fhdrlist (chained via Fhdr.next). -
- - Findhdr searches the currently open Fhdrs for one whose file name - ends with the path name (that is, libc.so matches /usr/lib/libc.so - but not mylibc.so). -
- - The Symbol data structure:
- -
- - typedef struct Symbol Symbol;
- struct Symbol
- {
- -
- - char    *name;
- Loc    loc;
- Loc    hiloc;
- char    class;
- char    type;
- ...
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- describes a symbol table entry. The value field contains the offset - of the symbol within its address space: global variables relative - to the beginning of the data segment, text beyond the start of - the text segment, and automatic variables and parameters relative - to the stack frame. The type field contains the type of - the symbol:
- -
- - T     text segment symbol
- t     static text segment symbol
- D     data segment symbol
- d     static data segment symbol
- B     bss segment symbol
- b     static bss segment symbol
- a     automatic (local) variable symbol
- p     function parameter symbol
- U     undefined symbol
- -
- - -
- The class field assigns the symbol to a general class; CTEXT, - CDATA, CAUTO, and CPARAM are the most popular. -
- - Indexsym stores information for the n th symbol into s. The symbols - are ordered by increasing address. -
- - Lookupsym fills a Symbol structure with symbol table information. - Global variables and functions are represented by a single name; - local variables and parameters are uniquely specified by a function - and variable name pair. Arguments fn and var contain the name - of a function and variable, respectively. If both are - non-zero, the symbol table is searched for a parameter or automatic - variable. If only var is zero, the text symbol table is searched - for function fn. If only fn is zero, the global variable table - is searched for var. -
- - Findsym returns the symbol table entry of type class stored near - addr. The selected symbol is a global variable or function with - address nearest to and less than or equal to addr. Class specification - CDATA searches only the global variable symbol table; class CTEXT - limits the search to the text symbol table. Class - specification CANY searches the text table first, then the global - table. -
- - Findexsym, flookupsym, and ffindsym are similar to indexsym, lookupsym, - and findsym, but operate only on the symbols from hdr. Flookupsym - and ffindsym return pointers to data stored in the hdr, which - must not be modified or freed. -
- - Indexlsym, lookuplsym, and findlsym are similar to indexsym, lookupsym, - and findsym, but operate on the smaller symbol table of parameters - and variables local to the function represented by symbol s1. - -
- - Indexlsym writes symbol information for the nth local symbol of - function s1 to s2. Function parameters appear first in the ordering, - followed by local symbols. -
- - Lookuplsym writes symbol information for the symbol named name - in function s1 to s2. -
- - Findlsym searches for a symbol local to the function s1 whose - location is exactly loc, writing its symbol information to s2. - Loc is almost always an indirection through a frame pointer register; - the details vary from architecture to architecture. -
- - Symoff converts a location to a symbol reference. The string containing - that reference is of the form ‘name+offset’, where ‘name’ is the - name of the nearest symbol with an address less than or equal - to the target address, and ‘offset’ is the hexadecimal offset - beyond that symbol. If ‘offset’ is zero, only the name of the - symbol is printed. If no symbol is found within 4096 bytes of - the address, the address is formatted as a hexadecimal address. - Buf is the address of a buffer of n bytes to receive the formatted - string. Addr is the address to be converted. Type is the type - code of the search space: CTEXT, CDATA, or CANY. Symoff - returns the length of the formatted string contained in buf. -
- - Pc2file searches the symbol table to find the file and line number - corresponding to the instruction at program counter pc. File is - the address of a buffer of n bytes to receive the file name. Line - receives the line number. -
- - Pc2line is like pc2file but neglects to return information about - the source file. -
- - Fileline is also like pc2file, but returns the file and line number - in the n-byte text buffer buf, formatted as ‘file:line’. -
- - File2pc performs the opposite mapping: it stores in pc a text - address associated with line line in file file. -
- - Line2pc is similar: it converts a line number to an instruction - address, storing it in pc. Since a line number does not uniquely - identify an instruction (e.g., every source file has line 1), - basepc specifies a text address from which the search begins. - Usually this is the address of the first function in the file - of interest. -
- - Fnbound returns the start and end addresses of the function containing - the text address supplied as the first argument. The second argument - is an array of two unsigned longs; fnbound places the bounding - addresses of the function in the first and second elements of - this array. The start address is the address of the - first instruction of the function; the end address is the first - address beyond the end of the target function. -
- - All functions return 0 on success and –1 on error. When an error - occurs, a message describing it is stored in the system error - buffer where it is available via errstr.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libmach
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mach(3), mach-file(3), mach-map(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mach.html b/man/man3/mach.html deleted file mode 100644 index d69e5929..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mach.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ - -mach(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MACH(3)MACH(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - machbytype, machbyname – machine-independent access to executables - and programs
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mach.h> -
- - -
- - void machbytype(int type) -
- - int machbyname(char *name) -
- - extern Mach *mach;
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Libmach provides an interface for accessing the executable files - and executing images of various architectures and operating systems. - The interface is machine-independent, meaning that, for example, - Mac OS X core dumps may be inspected using an x86 Linux machine - and vice versa. In its current form, the library is - mainly useful for writing debuggers of one sort or another. -
- - An architecture is described primarily by a Mach structure, which - contains data structures and parameters describing the particular - architecture. Most library functions assume that the global variable - mach points at the structure for the architecture being debugged. - It is set implicitly by crackhdr (see mach-file(3)) and - can be set explicitly by calling machbyname or machbytype. -
- - There is no operating system-specific structure akin to mach. - Typically the choice of operating system on a particular architecture - affects only the executable and core dump formats; the various - file parsers deduce the operating system from information in the - binary files themselves and adjust accordingly. -
- - The supported architectures are 386 (Intel 32-bit x86) 386 and - later) and power (IBM PowerPC, typically running Mac OS X). -
- - Other manual pages describe the library functions in detail. -
- - Mach-cmd(3) describes some convenience routines for attaching - to processes and core files. -
- - Mach-file(3) describes the manipulation of binary files. -
- - Mach-map(3) describes the interface to address spaces and register - sets in executable files and executing programs. -
- - Mach-stack(3) describes support for unwinding the stack. -
- - Mach-swap(3) describes helper functions for accessing data in - a particular byte order. -
- - Mach-symbol(3) describes the interface to debugging symbol information.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libmach
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mach-file(3), mach-map(3), mach-stack(3), mach-swap(3), mach-symbol(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/malloc.html b/man/man3/malloc.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9c30c293..00000000 --- a/man/man3/malloc.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,181 +0,0 @@ - -malloc(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MALLOC(3)MALLOC(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - malloc, mallocz, free, realloc, calloc, setmalloctag, setrealloctag, - getmalloctag, getrealloctag – memory allocator
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - void* malloc(ulong size) -
- - void* mallocz(ulong size, int clr) -
- - void    free(void *ptr) -
- - void* realloc(void *ptr, ulong size) -
- - void* calloc(ulong nelem, ulong elsize) -
- - void    setmalloctag(void *ptr, ulong tag) -
- - ulong getmalloctag(void *ptr) -
- - void    setrealloctag(void *ptr, ulong tag) -
- - ulong getrealloctag(void *ptr)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Malloc and free provide a simple memory allocation package. Malloc - returns a pointer to a new block of at least size bytes. The block - is suitably aligned for storage of any type of object. No two - active pointers from malloc will have the same value. The call - malloc(0) returns a valid pointer rather than null. -
- - The argument to free is a pointer to a block previously allocated - by malloc; this space is made available for further allocation. - It is legal to free a null pointer; the effect is a no-op. The - contents of the space returned by malloc are undefined. Mallocz - behaves as malloc, except that if clr is non-zero, the memory - returned will be zeroed. -
- - Realloc changes the size of the block pointed to by ptr to size - bytes and returns a pointer to the (possibly moved) block. The - contents will be unchanged up to the lesser of the new and old - sizes. Realloc takes on special meanings when one or both arguments - are zero:
- realloc(0, size)
- -
- - means malloc(size); returns a pointer to the newly-allocated memory
- -
- realloc(ptr, 0)
- -
- - means free(ptr); returns null
- -
- realloc(0, 0)
- -
- - no-op; returns null -
- - -
- Calloc allocates space for an array of nelem elements of size - elsize. The space is initialized to zeros. Free frees such a block. - -
- - The memory allocator on Plan 9 maintains two word-sized fields - associated with each block, the “malloc tag” and the “realloc - tag”. By convention, the malloc tag is the PC that allocated the - block, and the realloc tag the PC that last reallocated the block. - These may be set or examined with setmalloctag, getmalloctag, - setrealloctag, and getrealloctag. When allocating blocks directly - with malloc and realloc, these tags will be set properly. If a - custom allocator wrapper is used, the allocator wrapper can set - the tags itself (usually by passing the result of getcallerpc(3) - to setmalloctag) to provide more useful information about the - source - of allocation.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/malloc.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/malloctag.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - trump (in acid(1)), getcallerpc(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Malloc, realloc and calloc return 0 if there is no available memory. - Errstr is likely to be set. If the allocated blocks have no malloc - or realloc tags, getmalloctag and getrealloctag return ~0. -
- - The trump library for acid can be used to obtain traces of malloc - execution; see acid(1).
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The different specification of calloc is bizarre. -
- - User errors can corrupt the storage arena. The most common gaffes - are (1) freeing an already freed block, (2) storing beyond the - bounds of an allocated block, and (3) freeing data that was not - obtained from the allocator. When malloc and free detect such - corruption, they abort. -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the system versions of these functions, - malloc, realloc, calloc, and free are preprocessor macros defined - as p9malloc, p9realloc, p9calloc, and p9free; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/matrix.html b/man/man3/matrix.html deleted file mode 100644 index ad72d10a..00000000 --- a/man/man3/matrix.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,263 +0,0 @@ - -matrix(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MATRIX(3)MATRIX(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ident, matmul, matmulr, determinant, adjoint, invertmat, xformpoint, - xformpointd, xformplane, pushmat, popmat, rot, qrot, scale, move, - xform, ixform, persp, look, viewport – Geometric transformations
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <draw.h> -
- - #include <geometry.h> -
- - void ident(Matrix m) -
- - void matmul(Matrix a, Matrix b) -
- - void matmulr(Matrix a, Matrix b) -
- - double determinant(Matrix m) -
- - void adjoint(Matrix m, Matrix madj) -
- - double invertmat(Matrix m, Matrix inv) -
- - Point3 xformpoint(Point3 p, Space *to, Space *from) -
- - Point3 xformpointd(Point3 p, Space *to, Space *from) -
- - Point3 xformplane(Point3 p, Space *to, Space *from) -
- - Space *pushmat(Space *t) -
- - Space *popmat(Space *t) -
- - void rot(Space *t, double theta, int axis) -
- - void qrot(Space *t, Quaternion q) -
- - void scale(Space *t, double x, double y, double z) -
- - void move(Space *t, double x, double y, double z) -
- - void xform(Space *t, Matrix m) -
- - void ixform(Space *t, Matrix m, Matrix inv) -
- - int persp(Space *t, double fov, double n, double f) -
- - void look(Space *t, Point3 eye, Point3 look, Point3 up) -
- - void viewport(Space *t, Rectangle r, double aspect)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines manipulate 3-space affine and projective transformations, - represented as 4×4 matrices, thus:
- -
- - typedef double Matrix[4][4];
- -
- - -
- Ident stores an identity matrix in its argument. Matmul stores - a×b in a. Matmulr stores b×a in b. Determinant returns the determinant - of matrix m. Adjoint stores the adjoint (matrix of cofactors) - of m in madj. Invertmat stores the inverse of matrix m in minv, - returning m’s determinant. Should m be singular - (determinant zero), invertmat stores its adjoint in minv. -
- - The rest of the routines described here manipulate Spaces and - transform Point3s. A Point3 is a point in three-space, represented - by its homogeneous coordinates:
- -
- - typedef struct Point3 Point3;
- struct Point3{
- -
- - double x, y, z, w;
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- The homogeneous coordinates (x, y, z, w) represent the Euclidean - point (x/w, y/w, z/w) if w!=0, and a “point at infinity” if w=0. - -
- - A Space is just a data structure describing a coordinate system:
- -
- - typedef struct Space Space;
- struct Space{
- -
- - Matrix t;
- Matrix tinv;
- Space *next;
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- It contains a pair of transformation matrices and a pointer to - the Space’s parent. The matrices transform points to and from - the “root coordinate system,” which is represented by a null Space - pointer. -
- - Pushmat creates a new Space. Its argument is a pointer to the - parent space. Its result is a newly allocated copy of the parent, - but with its next pointer pointing at the parent. Popmat discards - the Space that is its argument, returning a pointer to the stack. - Nominally, these two functions define a stack of - transformations, but pushmat can be called multiple times on the - same Space multiple times, creating a transformation tree. -
- - Xformpoint and Xformpointd both transform points from the Space - pointed to by from to the space pointed to by to. Either pointer - may be null, indicating the root coordinate system. The difference - between the two functions is that xformpointd divides x, y, z, - and w by w, if w!=0, making (x, y, z) the Euclidean - coordinates of the point. -
- - Xformplane transforms planes or normal vectors. A plane is specified - by the coefficients (a, b, c, d) of its implicit equation ax+by+cz+d=0. - Since this representation is dual to the homogeneous representation - of points, libgeometry represents planes by Point3 structures, - with (a, b, c, d) stored in (x, y, z, w). -
- - The remaining functions transform the coordinate system represented - by a Space. Their Space * argument must be non-null -- you can’t - modify the root Space. Rot rotates by angle theta (in radians) - about the given axis, which must be one of XAXIS, YAXIS or ZAXIS. - Qrot transforms by a rotation about an - arbitrary axis, specified by Quaternion q. -
- - Scale scales the coordinate system by the given scale factors - in the directions of the three axes. Move translates by the given - displacement in the three axial directions. -
- - Xform transforms the coordinate system by the given Matrix. If - the matrix’s inverse is known a priori, calling ixform will save - the work of recomputing it. -
- - Persp does a perspective transformation. The transformation maps - the frustum with apex at the origin, central axis down the positive - y axis, and apex angle fov and clipping planes y=n and y=f into - the double-unit cube. The plane y=n maps to y’=-1, y=f maps to - y’=1. -
- - Look does a view-pointing transformation. The eye point is moved - to the origin. The line through the eye and look points is aligned - with the y axis, and the plane containing the eye, look and up - points is rotated into the x-y plane. -
- - Viewport maps the unit-cube window into the given screen viewport. - The viewport rectangle r has r.min at the top left-hand corner, - and r.max just outside the lower right-hand corner. Argument aspect - is the aspect ratio (dx/dy) of the viewport’s pixels (not of the - whole viewport). The whole window is transformed - to fit centered inside the viewport with equal slop on either - top and bottom or left and right, depending on the viewport’s - aspect ratio. The window is viewed down the y axis, with x to - the left and z up. The viewport has x increasing to the right - and y increasing down. The window’s y coordinates are mapped, - unchanged, into the viewport’s z coordinates.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libgeometry/matrix.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - arith3(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/memdraw.html b/man/man3/memdraw.html deleted file mode 100644 index 57a0c96c..00000000 --- a/man/man3/memdraw.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,466 +0,0 @@ - -memdraw(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MEMDRAW(3)MEMDRAW(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Memimage, Memdata, Memdrawparam, memimageinit, wordaddr, byteaddr, - memimagemove, allocmemimage, allocmemimaged, readmemimage, creadmemimage, - writememimage, freememimage, memsetchan, loadmemimage, cloadmemimage, - unloadmemimage, memfillcolor, memarc, mempoly, memellipse, - memfillpoly, memimageline, memimagedraw, drawclip, memlinebbox, - memlineendsize, allocmemsubfont, openmemsubfont, freememsubfont, - memsubfontwidth, getmemdefont, memimagestring, iprint, hwdraw - – drawing routines for memory-resident images
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h>
- #include <memdraw.h>
- -
- - typedef struct Memdata
- {
- -
- - ulong       *base;      /* allocated data pointer */
- uchar       *bdata;     /* first byte of actual data; word−aligned */
- int         ref;        /* number of Memimages using this data */
- void*       imref;      /* last image that pointed at this */
- int         allocd;     /* is this malloc'd? */
- -
- } Memdata;
- enum {
- -
- - Frepl       = 1<<0,     /* is replicated */
- Fsimple     = 1<<1,     /* is 1x1 */
- Fgrey       = 1<<2,     /* is grey */
- Falpha      = 1<<3,     /* has explicit alpha */
- Fcmap       = 1<<4,     /* has cmap channel */
- Fbytes      = 1<<5,     /* has only 8−bit channels */
- -
- };
- typedef struct Memimage
- {
- -
- - Rectangle r;          /* rectangle in data area, local coords */
- Rectangle clipr;      /* clipping region */
- int         depth;      /* number of bits of storage per pixel */
- int         nchan;      /* number of channels */
- ulong       chan;       /* channel descriptions */
- Memdata     *data;      /* pointer to data */
- int         zero;       /* data−>bdata+zero==&byte containing (0,0) */
- ulong       width;      /* width in words of a single scan line */
- Memlayer    *layer;     /* nil if not a layer*/
- ulong       flags;
- -
- -
- - ...
- -
- } Memimage;
- typedef struct Memdrawparam
- {
- -
- - Memimage    *dst;
- Rectangle r;
- Memimage    *src;
- Rectangle sr;
- Memimage    *mask;
- Rectangle mr;
- -
- -
- - ...
- -
- } Memdrawparam;
- int           drawdebug;
- -
- - void          memimageinit(void)
- ulong*        wordaddr(Memimage *i, Point p)
- uchar*        byteaddr(Memimage *i, Point p)
- void          memimagemove(void *from, void *to)
- -
- - Memimage*     allocmemimage(Rectangle r, ulong chan)
- Memimage*     allocmemimaged(Rectangle r, ulong chan, Memdata *data)
- Memimage*     readmemimage(int fd)
- Memimage*     creadmemimage(int fd)
- int           writememimage(int fd, Memimage *i)
- void          freememimage(Memimage *i)
- int           memsetchan(Memimage*, ulong)
- -
- - int           loadmemimage(Memimage *i, Rectangle r,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *buf, int nbuf)
- -
- -
- int           cloadmemimage(Memimage *i, Rectangle r,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *buf, int nbuf)
- -
- -
- int           unloadmemimage(Memimage *i, Rectangle r,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *buf, int nbuf)
- -
- -
- void          memfillcolor(Memimage *i, ulong color)
- -
- - void          memarc(Memimage *dst, Point c, int a, int b, int thick,
- -
- - -
- - Memimage *src, Point sp, int alpha, int phi, Drawop op)
- -
- -
- void          mempoly(Memimage *dst, Point *p, int np, int end0,
- -
- - -
- - int end1, int radius, Memimage *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- -
- void          memellipse(Memimage *dst, Point c, int a, int b,
- -
- - -
- - int thick, Memimage *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- -
- void          memfillpoly(Memimage *dst, Point *p, int np, int wind,
- -
- - -
- - Memimage *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- -
- void          memimageline(Memimage *dst, Point p0, Point p1, int end0,
- -
- - -
- - int end1, int radius, Memimage *src, Point sp, Drawop op)
- -
- -
- void          memimagedraw(Memimage *dst, Rectangle r, Memimage *src,
- -
- - -
- - Point sp, Memimage *mask, Point mp, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- int           drawclip(Memimage *dst, Rectangle *dr, Memimage *src,
- -
- - -
- - Point *sp, Memimage *mask, Point *mp,
- Rectangle *sr, Rectangle *mr)
- -
- -
- Rectangle     memlinebbox(Point p0, Point p1, int end0, int end1,
- -
- - -
- - int radius)
- -
- -
- int           memlineendsize(int end)
- -
- - Memsubfont* allocmemsubfont(char *name, int n, int height,
- -
- - -
- - int ascent, Fontchar *info, Memimage *i)
- -
- -
- Memsubfont* openmemsubfont(char *name)
- void          freememsubfont(Memsubfont *f)
- Point         memsubfontwidth(Memsubfont *f, char *s)
- Memsubfont* getmemdefont(void)
- Point         memimagestring(Memimage *dst, Point p, Memimage *color,
- -
- - -
- - Point cp, Memsubfont *f, char *cs, Drawop op)
- -
- - -
- -
- int           iprint(char *fmt, ...)
- int           hwdraw(Memdrawparam *param)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The Memimage type defines memory-resident rectangular pictures - and the methods to draw upon them; Memimages differ from Images - (see draw(3)) in that they are manipulated directly in user memory - rather than by RPCs to the /dev/draw hierarchy. The library is - the basis for the kernel draw(3) driver and also - used by a number of programs that must manipulate images without - a display. -
- - The r, clipr, depth, nchan, and chan structure elements are identical - to the ones of the same name in the Image structure. -
- - The flags element of the Memimage structure holds a number of - bits of information about the image. In particular, it subsumes - the purpose of the repl element of Image structures. -
- - Memimageinit initializes various static data that the library - depends on, as well as the replicated solid color images memopaque, - memtransparent, memblack, and memwhite. It should be called before - referring to any of these images and before calling any of the - other library functions. -
- - Each Memimage points at a Memdata structure that in turn points - at the actual pixel data for the image. This allows multiple images - to be associated with the same Memdata. The first word of the - data pointed at by the base element of Memdata points back at - the Memdata structure, so that in the Plan 9 kernel, - the memory allocator (see Plan 9’s pool(3)) can compact image - memory using memimagemove. -
- - Because images can have different coordinate systems, the zero - element of the Memimage structure contains the offset that must - be added to the bdata element of the corresponding Memdata structure - in order to yield a pointer to the data for the pixel (0,0). Adding - width machine words to this pointer moves it - down one scan line. The depth element can be used to determine - how to move the pointer horizontally. Note that this method works - even for images whose rectangles do not include the origin, although - one should only dereference pointers corresponding to pixels within - the image rectangle. Wordaddr and - byteaddr perform these calculations, returning pointers to the - word and byte, respectively, that contain the beginning of the - data for a given pixel. -
- - Allocmemimage allocages images with a given rectangle and channel - descriptor (see strtochan in graphics(3)), creating a fresh Memdata - structure and associated storage. Allocmemimaged is similar but - uses the supplied Memdata structure rather than a new one. The - readmemimage function reads an - uncompressed bitmap from the given file descriptor, while creadmemimage - reads a compressed bitmap. Writememimage writes a compressed representation - of i to file descriptor fd. For more on bitmap formats, see image(7). - Freememimage frees images returned by any of these routines. The - Memimage structure - contains some tables that are used to store precomputed values - depending on the channel descriptor. Memsetchan updates the chan - element of the structure as well as these tables, returning –1 - if passed a bad channel descriptor. -
- - Loadmemimage and cloadmemimage replace the pixel data for a given - rectangle of an image with the given buffer of uncompressed or - compressed data, respectively. When calling cloadmemimage, the - buffer must contain an integral number of compressed chunks of - data that exactly cover the rectangle. - Unloadmemimage retrieves the uncompressed pixel data for a given - rectangle of an image. All three return the number of bytes consumed - on success, and –1 in case of an error. -
- - Memfillcolor fills an image with the given color, a 32-bit number - as described in color(3). -
- - Memarc, mempoly, memellipse, memfillpoly, memimageline, and memimagedraw - are identical to the arc, poly, ellipse, fillpoly, line, and gendraw, - routines described in draw(3), except that they operate on Memimages - rather than Images. Similarly, allocmemsubfont, openmemsubfont, - freememsubfont, - memsubfontwidth, getmemdefont, and memimagestring are the Memimage - analogues of allocsubfont, openfont, freesubfont, strsubfontwidth, - getdefont, and string (see subfont(3) and graphics(3)), except - that they operate only on Memsubfonts rather than Fonts. -
- - Drawclip takes the images involved in a draw operation, together - with the destination rectangle dr and source and mask alignment - points sp and mp, and clips them according to the clipping rectangles - of the images involved. It also fills in the rectangles sr and - mr with rectangles congruent to the returned - destination rectangle but translated so the upper left corners - are the returned sp and mp. Drawclip returns zero when the clipped - rectangle is empty. Memlinebbox returns a conservative bounding - box containing a line between two points with given end styles - and radius. Memlineendsize calculates the extra length - added to a line by attaching an end of a given style. -
- - The hwdraw and iprint functions are no-op stubs that may be overridden - by clients of the library. Hwdraw is called at each call to memimagedraw - with the current request’s parameters. If it can satisfy the request, - it should do so and return 1. If it cannot satisfy the request, - it should return 0. This allows (for - instance) the kernel to take advantage of hardware acceleration. - Iprint should format and print its arguments; it is given much - debugging output when the global integer variable drawdebug is - non-zero. In the kernel, iprint prints to a serial line rather - than the screen, for obvious reasons. - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - addpt(3), color(3), draw(3), graphics(3), memlayer(3), stringsize(3), - subfont(3), color(7), utf(7)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Memimagestring is unusual in using a subfont rather than a font, - and in having no parameter to align the source. -
- - These functions are archived into libdraw.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/memlayer.html b/man/man3/memlayer.html deleted file mode 100644 index c21f5bf6..00000000 --- a/man/man3/memlayer.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,325 +0,0 @@ - -memlayer(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MEMLAYER(3)MEMLAYER(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - memdraw, memlalloc, memldelete, memlexpose, memlfree, memlhide, - memline, memlnorefresh, memload, memunload, memlorigin, memlsetrefresh, - memltofront, memltofrontn, memltorear, memltorearn – windows of - memory-resident images
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h>
- #include <memdraw.h>
- #include <memlayer.h>
- -
- - typedef struct Memscreen Memscreen;
- typedef struct Memlayer Memlayer;
- typedef void (*Refreshfn)(Memimage*, Rectangle, void*);
- struct Memscreen
- {
- -
- - Memimage    *frontmost; /* frontmost layer on screen */
- Memimage    *rearmost;    /* rearmost layer on screen */
- Memimage    *image;       /* upon which all layers are drawn */
- Memimage    *fill;        /* if non−zero, picture to use when repainting - */
- -
- };
- struct Memlayer
- {
- -
- - Rectangle screenr;      /* true position of layer on screen */
- Point       delta;        /* add delta to go from image coords to screen */
- Memscreen *screen;      /* screen this layer belongs to */
- Memimage    *front;       /* window in front of this one */
- Memimage    *rear;        /* window behind this one*/
- int         clear;        /* layer is fully visible */
- Memimage    *save;        /* save area for obscured parts */
- Refreshfn refreshfn;    /* fn to refresh obscured parts if save==nil - */
- void        *refreshptr;/* argument to refreshfn */
- -
- };
- -
- - Memimage* memlalloc(Memscreen *s, Rectangle r, Refreshfn fn, void - *arg, ulong col)
- -
- - void        memlnorefresh(Memimage *i, Rectangle r, void *arg)
- -
- - int         memlsetrefresh(Memimage *i, Refreshfn fn, void *arg)
- -
- - int         memldelete(Memimage *i)
- -
- - int         memlfree(Memimage *i)
- -
- - int         memlexpose(Memimage *i, Rectangle r)
- -
- - int         memlhide(Memimage *i, Rectangle r)
- -
- - void        memltofront(Memimage *i)
- -
- - void        memltofrontn(Memimage**ia, int n)
- -
- - void        memltorear(Memimage *i)
- -
- - void        memltorearn(Memimage **ia , int n)
- -
- - int         memlorigin(Memimage *i, Point log, Point phys)
- -
- - void        memdraw(Image *dst, Rectangle r,
- -
- - -
- - Image *src, Point sp, Image *mask, Point mp, Drawop op)
- -
- -
- int         memload(Memimage *i, Rectangle r,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *buf, int n, int iscompressed) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int         memunload(Memimage *i, Rectangle r,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *buf, int n) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These functions build upon the memdraw(3) interface to maintain - overlapping graphical windows on in-memory images. They are used - by the kernel to implement the windows interface presented by - draw(3) and window(3) and probably have little use outside of - the kernel. -
- - The basic function is to extend the definition of a Memimage (see - memdraw(3)) to include overlapping windows defined by the Memlayer - type. The first fields of the Memlayer structure are identical - to those in Memimage, permitting a function that expects a Memimage - to be passed a Memlayer, and vice versa. - Both structures have a save field, which is nil in a Memimage - and points to ‘backing store’ in a Memlayer. The layer routines - accept Memimages or Memlayers; if the image is a Memimage the - underlying Memimage routine is called; otherwise the layer routines - recursively subdivide the geometry, reducing the - operation into a smaller component that ultimately can be performed - on a Memimage, either the display on which the window appears, - or the backing store. -
- - Memlayers are associated with a Memscreen that holds the data - structures to maintain the windows and connects them to the associated - image. The fill color is used to paint the background when a window - is deleted. There is no function to establish a Memscreen; to - create one, allocate the memory, zero - frontmost and rearmost, set fill to a valid fill color or image, - and set image to the Memimage (or Memlayer) on which the windows - will be displayed. -
- - Memlalloc allocates a Memlayer of size r on Memscreen s. If col - is not DNofill, the new window will be initialized by painting - it that color. -
- - The refresh function fn and associated argument arg will be called - by routines in the library to restore portions of the window uncovered - due to another window being deleted or this window being pulled - to the front of the stack. The function, when called, receives - a pointer to the image (window) being refreshed, the - rectangle that has been uncovered, and the arg recorded when the - window was created. A couple of predefined functions provide built-in - management methods: memlnorefresh does no backup at all, useful - for making efficient temporary windows; while a nil function specifies - that the backing store - (Memlayer.save) will be used to keep the obscured data. Other - functions may be provided by the client. Memlsetrefresh allows - one to change the function associated with the window. -
- - Memldelete deletes the window i, restoring the underlying display. - Memlfree frees the data structures without unlinking the window - from the associated Memscreen or doing any graphics. -
- - Memlexpose restores rectangle r within the window, using the backing - store or appropriate refresh method. Memlhide goes the other way, - backing up r so that that portion of the screen may be modified - without losing the data in this window. -
- - Memltofront pulls i to the front of the stack of windows, making - it fully visible. Memltofrontn pulls the n windows in the array - ia to the front as a group, leaving their internal order unaffected. - Memltorear and memltorearn push the windows to the rear. -
- - Memlorigin changes the coordinate systems associated with the - window i. The points log and phys represent the upper left corner - (min) of the window’s internal coordinate system and its physical - location on the screen. Changing log changes the interpretation - of coordinates within the window; for example, setting it - to (0, 0) makes the upper left corner of the window appear to - be the origin of the coordinate system, regardless of its position - on the screen. Changing phys changes the physical location of - the window on the screen. When a window is created, its logical - and physical coordinates are the same, so - -
- - -
- - memlorigin(i, i−>r.min, i−>r.min)
- -
- -
- would be a no-op. -
- - Memdraw and memline are implemented in the layer library but provide - the main entry points for drawing on memory-resident windows. - They have the signatures of memimagedraw and memimageline (see - memdraw(3)) but accept Memlayer or Memimage arguments both. -
- - Memload and memunload are similarly layer-savvy versions of loadmemimage - and unloadmemimage. The iscompressed flag to memload specifies - whether the n bytes of data in buf are in compressed image format - (see image(7)).
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), memdraw(3), stringsize(3), window(3), draw(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - These functions are archived into libdraw.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/memory.html b/man/man3/memory.html deleted file mode 100644 index a67101b7..00000000 --- a/man/man3/memory.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,123 +0,0 @@ - -memory(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MEMORY(3)MEMORY(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - memccpy, memchr, memcmp, memcpy, memmove, memset – memory operations
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - void* memccpy(void *s1, void *s2, int c, long n) -
- - void* memchr(void *s, int c, long n) -
- - int     memcmp(void *s1, void *s2, long n) -
- - void* memcpy(void *s1, void *s2, long n) -
- - void* memmove(void *s1, void *s2, long n) -
- - void* memset(void *s, int c, long n)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These functions operate efficiently on memory areas (arrays of - bytes bounded by a count, not terminated by a zero byte). They - do not check for the overflow of any receiving memory area. -
- - Memccpy copies bytes from memory area s2 into s1, stopping after - the first occurrence of byte c has been copied, or after n bytes - have been copied, whichever comes first. It returns a pointer - to the byte after the copy of c in s1, or zero if c was not found - in the first n bytes of s2. -
- - Memchr returns a pointer to the first occurrence of byte c in - the first n bytes of memory area s, or zero if c does not occur. - -
- - Memcmp compares its arguments, looking at the first n bytes only, - and returns an integer less than, equal to, or greater than 0, - according as s1 is lexicographically less than, equal to, or greater - than s2. The comparison is bytewise unsigned. -
- - Memcpy copies n bytes from memory area s2 to s1. It returns s1. - -
- - Memmove works like memcpy, except that it is guaranteed to work - if s1 and s2 overlap. -
- - Memset sets the first n bytes in memory area s to the value of - byte c. It returns s.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - All these routines have portable C implementations in /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - strcat(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - ANSI C does not require memcpy to handle overlapping source and - destination; on Plan 9, it does, so memmove and memcpy behave - identically. -
- - If memcpy and memmove are handed a negative count, they abort.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mouse.html b/man/man3/mouse.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5e2b278d..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mouse.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,249 +0,0 @@ - -mouse(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MOUSE(3)MOUSE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - initmouse, readmouse, closemouse, moveto, cursorswitch, getrect, - drawgetrect, menuhit, setcursor – mouse control
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h>
- #include <thread.h>
- #include <mouse.h>
- #include <cursor.h>
- -
- - Mousectl    *initmouse(char *file, Image *i)
- -
- - int         readmouse(Mousectl *mc)
- -
- - int         atomouse();
- -
- - void        closemouse(Mousectl *mc)
- -
- - void        moveto(Mousectl *mc, Point pt)
- -
- - void        setcursor(Mousectl *mc, Cursor *c)
- -
- - Rectangle getrect(int but, Mousectl *mc)
- -
- - void        drawgetrect(Rectangle r, int up)
- -
- - int         menuhit(int but, Mousectl *mc, Menu *menu, Screen *scr)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These functions access and control a mouse in a multi-threaded - environment. They use the message-passing Channel interface in - the threads library (see thread(3)); programs that wish a more - event-driven, single-threaded approach should use event(3). -
- - The state of the mouse is recorded in a structure, Mouse, defined - in <mouse.h>:
- -
- - typedef struct Mouse Mouse;
- struct Mouse
- {
- -
- - int         buttons;     /* bit array: LMR=124 */
- Point       xy;
- ulong       msec;
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- The Point xy records the position of the cursor, buttons the state - of the buttons (three bits representing, from bit 0 up, the buttons - from left to right, 0 if the button is released, 1 if it is pressed), - and msec, a millisecond time stamp. -
- - The routine initmouse returns a structure through which one may - access the mouse:
- -
- - typedef struct Mousectl Mousectl;
- struct Mousectl
- {
- -
- - Mouse;
- Channel     *c;          /* chan(Mouse)[16] */
- Channel     *resizec;    /* chan(int)[2] */
- char        *file;
- int         mfd;         /* to mouse file */
- int         cfd;         /* to cursor file */
- int         pid;         /* of slave proc */
- Image*      image;       /* of associated window/display */
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- The arguments to initmouse are a file naming the device file connected - to the mouse and an Image (see draw(3)) on which the mouse will - be visible. Typically the file is nil, which requests the default - /dev/mouse; and the image is the window in which the program is - running, held in the variable screen after a call - to initdraw. -
- - Once the Mousectl is set up, mouse motion will be reported by - messages of type Mouse sent on the Channel Mousectl.c. Typically, - a message will be sent every time a read of /dev/mouse succeeds, - which is every time the state of the mouse changes. -
- - When the window is resized, a message is sent on Mousectl.resizec. - The actual value sent may be discarded; the receipt of the message - tells the program that it should call getwindow (see graphics(3)) - to reconnect to the window. -
- - Readmouse updates the Mouse structure held in the Mousectl, blocking - if the state has not changed since the last readmouse or message - sent on the channel. It calls flushimage (see graphics(3)) before - blocking, so any buffered graphics requests are displayed. -
- - Closemouse closes the file descriptors associated with the mouse, - kills the slave processes, and frees the Mousectl structure. -
- - Moveto moves the mouse cursor on the display to the position specified - by pt. -
- - Setcursor sets the image of the cursor to that specified by c. - If c is nil, the cursor is set to the default. The format of the - cursor data is spelled out in <cursor.h> and described in graphics(3). - -
- - Getrect returns the dimensions of a rectangle swept by the user, - using the mouse, in the manner rio(1) or sam(1) uses to create - a new window. The but argument specifies which button the user - must press to sweep the window; any other button press cancels - the action. The returned rectangle is all zeros if the user - cancels. -
- - Getrect uses successive calls to drawgetrect to maintain the red - rectangle showing the sweep-in-progress. The rectangle to be drawn - is specified by rc and the up parameter says whether to draw (1) - or erase (0) the rectangle. -
- - Menuhit provides a simple menu mechanism. It uses a Menu structure - defined in <mouse.h>:
- -
- - typedef struct Menu Menu;
- struct Menu
- {
- -
- - char        **item;
- char        *(*gen)(int);
- int         lasthit;
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- Menuhit behaves the same as its namesake emenuhit described in - event(3), with two exceptions. First, it uses a Mousectl to access - the mouse rather than using the event interface; and second, it - creates the menu as a true window on the Screen scr (see window(3)), - permitting the menu to be displayed in parallel - with other activities on the display. If scr is null, menuhit - behaves like emenuhit, creating backing store for the menu, writing - the menu directly on the display, and restoring the display when - the menu is removed. -
- - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), draw(3), event(3), keyboard(3), thread(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mousescrollsize.html b/man/man3/mousescrollsize.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3aa816fb..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mousescrollsize.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ - -mousescrollsize(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MOUSESCROLLSIZE(3)MOUSESCROLLSIZE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - mousescrollsize – compute mouse scroll increment
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <draw.h> -
- - int     mousescrollsize(int maxlines)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Mousescrollsize computes the number of lines of text that should - be scrolled in response to a mouse scroll wheel click. Maxlines - is the number of lines visible in the text window. -
- - The default scroll increment is one line. This default can be - overridden by setting the $mousescrollsize environment variable - to an integer, which specifies a constant number of lines, or - to a real number followed by a percent character, indicating that - the scroll increment should be a percentage of the total - number of lines in the window. For example, setting $mousescrollsize - to 50% causes a half-window scroll increment. -
- - Mousescrollsize is used by 9term(1) and acme(1) to set their scrolling - behavior.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw/scroll.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9term(1), acme(1)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Libdraw expects up and down scroll wheel events to be expressed - as clicks of mouse buttons 4 and 5, but the XFree86 default is - to ignore the scroll wheel. To enable the scroll wheel, change - your InputDevice section of XF86Config−4 to look like:
- -
- - Section "InputDevice"
- -
- - Identifier       "Mouse0"
- Driver      "mouse"
- Option      "Device" "/dev/psaux"
- # next four lines enable scroll wheel as buttons 4 and 5
- Option      "Buttons" "5"
- Option      "Emulate3Buttons" "off"
- Option      "Protocol" "ImPS/2"
- Option      "ZAxisMapping" "4 5"
- -
- EndSection
- -
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mp.html b/man/man3/mp.html deleted file mode 100644 index 86dc7455..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mp.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,441 +0,0 @@ - -mp(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MP(3)MP(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - mpsetminbits, mpnew, mpfree, mpbits, mpnorm, mpcopy, mpassign, - mprand, strtomp, mpfmt,mptoa, betomp, mptobe, letomp, mptole, - mptoui, uitomp, mptoi, itomp, uvtomp, mptouv, vtomp, mptov, mpdigdiv, - mpadd, mpsub, mpleft, mpright, mpmul, mpexp, mpmod, mpdiv, mpfactorial, - mpcmp, mpextendedgcd, - mpinvert, mpsignif, mplowbits0, mpvecdigmuladd, mpvecdigmulsub, - mpvecadd, mpvecsub, mpveccmp, mpvecmul, mpmagcmp, mpmagadd, mpmagsub, - crtpre, crtin, crtout, crtprefree, crtresfree – extended precision - arithmetic
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h> -
- - mpint*      mpnew(int n) -
- - void mpfree(mpint *b) -
- - void mpsetminbits(int n) -
- - void mpbits(mpint *b, int n) -
- - void mpnorm(mpint *b) -
- - mpint*      mpcopy(mpint *b) -
- - void mpassign(mpint *old, mpint *new) -
- - mpint*      mprand(int bits, void (*gen)(uchar*, int), mpint *b) -
- - mpint*      strtomp(char *buf, char **rptr, int base, mpint *b) -
- - char*       mptoa(mpint *b, int base, char *buf, int blen) -
- - int    mpfmt(Fmt*) -
- - mpint*      betomp(uchar *buf, uint blen, mpint *b) -
- - int    mptobe(mpint *b, uchar *buf, uint blen, uchar **bufp) -
- - mpint*      letomp(uchar *buf, uint blen, mpint *b) -
- - int    mptole(mpint *b, uchar *buf, uint blen, uchar **bufp) -
- - uint mptoui(mpint*) -
- - mpint*      uitomp(uint, mpint*) -
- - int    mptoi(mpint*) -
- - mpint*      itomp(int, mpint*) -
- - mpint*      vtomp(vlong, mpint*) -
- - vlong       mptov(mpint*) -
- - mpint*      uvtomp(uvlong, mpint*) -
- - uvlong      mptouv(mpint*) -
- - void mpadd(mpint *b1, mpint *b2, mpint *sum) -
- - void mpmagadd(mpint *b1, mpint *b2, mpint *sum) -
- - void mpsub(mpint *b1, mpint *b2, mpint *diff) -
- - void mpmagsub(mpint *b1, mpint *b2, mpint *diff) -
- - void mpleft(mpint *b, int shift, mpint *res) -
- - void mpright(mpint *b, int shift, mpint *res) -
- - void mpmul(mpint *b1, mpint *b2, mpint *prod) -
- - void mpexp(mpint *b, mpint *e, mpint *m, mpint *res) -
- - void mpmod(mpint *b, mpint *m, mpint *remainder) -
- - void mpdiv(mpint *dividend, mpint *divisor,    mpint *quotient, mpint - *remainder) -
- - mpint*      mpfactorial(ulong n) -
- - int    mpcmp(mpint *b1, mpint *b2) -
- - int    mpmagcmp(mpint *b1, mpint *b2) -
- - void mpextendedgcd(mpint *a, mpint *b, mpint *d, mpint *x, mpint - *y) -
- - void mpinvert(mpint *b, mpint *m, mpint *res) -
- - int    mpsignif(mpint *b) -
- - int    mplowbits0(mpint *b) -
- - void mpdigdiv(mpdigit *dividend, mpdigit divisor, mpdigit *quotient) - -
- - void mpvecadd(mpdigit *a, int alen, mpdigit *b, int blen, mpdigit - *sum) -
- - void mpvecsub(mpdigit *a, int alen, mpdigit *b, int blen, mpdigit - *diff) -
- - void mpvecdigmuladd(mpdigit *b, int n, mpdigit m, mpdigit *p) - -
- - int    mpvecdigmulsub(mpdigit *b, int n, mpdigit m, mpdigit *p) -
- - void mpvecmul(mpdigit *a, int alen, mpdigit *b, int blen, mpdigit - *p) -
- - int    mpveccmp(mpdigit *a, int alen, mpdigit *b, int blen) -
- - CRTpre*     crtpre(int nfactors, mpint **factors) -
- - CRTres*     crtin(CRTpre *crt, mpint *x) -
- - void crtout(CRTpre *crt, CRTres *r, mpint *x) -
- - void crtprefree(CRTpre *cre) -
- - void crtresfree(CRTres *res) -
- - mpint       *mpzero, *mpone, *mptwo
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - These routines perform extended precision integer arithmetic. - The basic type is mpint, which points to an array of mpdigits, - stored in little-endian order:
- typedef struct mpint mpint;
- struct mpint
- {
- -
- - int    sign;     /* +1 or −1 */
- int    size;     /* allocated digits */
- int    top;      /* significant digits */
- mpdigit     *p;
- char flags;
- -
- };
- -
- - The sign of 0 is +1. -
- - The size of mpdigit is architecture-dependent and defined in /$cputype/include/u.h. - Mpints are dynamically allocated and must be explicitly freed. - Operations grow the array of digits as needed. -
- - In general, the result parameters are last in the argument list. - -
- - Routines that return an mpint will allocate the mpint if the result - parameter is nil. This includes strtomp, itomp, uitomp, and btomp. - These functions, in addition to mpnew and mpcopy, will return - nil if the allocation fails. -
- - Input and result parameters may point to the same mpint. The routines - check and copy where necessary. -
- - Mpnew creates an mpint with an initial allocation of n bits. If - n is zero, the allocation will be whatever was specified in the - last call to mpsetminbits or to the initial value, 1056. Mpfree - frees an mpint. Mpbits grows the allocation of b to fit at least - n bits. If b−>top doesn’t cover n bits it increases it to do so. - Unless - you are writing new basic operations, you can restrict yourself - to mpnew(0) and mpfree(b). -
- - Mpnorm normalizes the representation by trimming any high order - zero digits. All routines except mpbits return normalized results. - -
- - Mpcopy creates a new mpint with the same value as b while mpassign - sets the value of new to be that of old. -
- - Mprand creates an n bit random number using the generator gen. - Gen takes a pointer to a string of uchar’s and the number to fill - in. -
- - Strtomp and mptoa convert between ASCII and mpint representations - using the base indicated. Only the bases 10, 16, 32, and 64 are - supported. Anything else defaults to 16. Strtomp skips any leading - spaces or tabs. Strtomp’s scan stops when encountering a digit - not valid in the base. If rptr is not zero, *rptr is - set to point to the character immediately after the string converted. - If the parse pterminates before any digits are found, strtomp - return nil. Mptoa returns a pointer to the filled buffer. If the - parameter buf is nil, the buffer is allocated. Mpfmt can be used - with fmtinstall(3) and print(3) to print hexadecimal - representations of mpints. -
- - Mptobe and mptole convert an mpint to a byte array. The former - creates a big endian representation, the latter a little endian - one. If the destination buf is not nil, it specifies the buffer - of length blen for the result. If the representation is less than - blen bytes, the rest of the buffer is zero filled. If buf is nil, - then a - buffer is allocated and a pointer to it is deposited in the location - pointed to by bufp. Sign is ignored in these conversions, i.e., - the byte array version is always positive. -
- - Betomp, and letomp convert from a big or little endian byte array - at buf of length blen to an mpint. If b is not nil, it refers - to a preallocated mpint for the result. If b is nil, a new integer - is allocated and returned as the result. -
- - The integer conversions are:
- mptoui    mpint->unsigned int
- uitomp    unsigned int->mpint
- mptoi     mpint->int
- itomp     int->mpint
- mptouv    mpint->unsigned vlong
- uvtomp    unsigned vlong->mpint
- mptov     mpint->vlong
- vtomp     vlong->mpint -
- - When converting to the base integer types, if the integer is too - large, the largest integer of the appropriate sign and size is - returned. -
- - The mathematical functions are:
- mpadd      sum = b1 + b2.
- mpmagadd   sum = abs(b1) + abs(b2).
- mpsub      diff = b1 − b2.
- mpmagsub    diff = abs(b1) − abs(b2).
- mpleft      res = b<<shift.
- mpright     res = b>>shift.
- mpmul      prod = b1*b2.
- mpexp      if m is nil, res = b**e. Otherwise, res = b**e mod m.
- mpmod      remainder = b % m.
- mpdiv      quotient = dividend/divisor. remainder = dividend % divisor.
- mpfactorial   returns factorial of n.
- mpcmp      returns -1, 0, or +1 as b1 is less than, equal to, or greater - than b2.
- mpmagcmp   the same as mpcmp but ignores the sign and just compares - magnitudes. -
- - Mpextendedgcd computes the greatest common denominator, d, of - a and b. It also computes x and y such that a*x + b*y = d. Both - a and b are required to be positive. If called with negative arguments, - it will return a gcd of 0. -
- - Mpinverse computes the multiplicative inverse of b mod m. -
- - Mpsignif returns the bit offset of the left most 1 bit in b. Mplowbits0 - returns the bit offset of the right most 1 bit. For example, for - 0x14, mpsignif would return 4 and mplowbits0 would return 2. -
- - The remaining routines all work on arrays of mpdigit rather than - mpint’s. They are the basis of all the other routines. They are - separated out to allow them to be rewritten in assembler for each - architecture. There is also a portable C version for each one.
- mpdigdiv          quotient = dividend[0:1] / divisor.
- mpvecadd          sum[0:alen] = a[0:alen−1] + b[0:blen−1]. We assume alen - >= blen and that sum has room for alen+1 digits.
- mpvecsub          diff[0:alen−1] = a[0:alen−1] − b[0:blen−1]. We assume - that alen >= blen and that diff has room for alen digits.
- mpvecdigmuladd     p[0:n] += m * b[0:n−1]. This multiplies a an array - of digits times a scalar and adds it to another array. We assume - p has room for n+1 digits.
- mpvecdigmulsub     p[0:n] −= m * b[0:n−1]. This multiplies a an array - of digits times a scalar and subtracts it fromo another array. - We assume p has room for n+1 digits. It returns +1 is the result - is positive and -1 if negative.
- mpvecmul         p[0:alen*blen] = a[0:alen−1] * b[0:blen−1]. We assume - that p has room for alen*blen+1 digits.
- mpveccmp         This returns -1, 0, or +1 as a - b is negative, 0, or - positive. -
- - mptwo, mpone and mpzero are the constants 2, 1 and 0. These cannot - be freed.
-

Chinese remainder theorem
- -
- - When computing in a non-prime modulus, n, it is possible to perform - the computations on the residues modulo the prime factors of n - instead. Since these numbers are smaller, multiplication and exponentiation - can be much faster. -
- - Crtin computes the residues of x and returns them in a newly allocated - structure:
- -
- - typedef struct CRTres      CRTres;
- {
- -
- - int    n;     // number of residues
- mpint       *r[n];      // residues
- -
- };
- -
- - -
- Crtout takes a residue representation of a number and converts - it back into the number. It also frees the residue structure. - -
- - Crepre saves a copy of the factors and precomputes the constants - necessary for converting the residue form back into a number modulo - the product of the factors. It returns a newly allocated structure - containing values. -
- - Crtprefree and crtresfree free CRTpre and CRTres structures respectively.
- -

-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libmp
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/muldiv.html b/man/man3/muldiv.html deleted file mode 100644 index 486020ca..00000000 --- a/man/man3/muldiv.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,61 +0,0 @@ - -muldiv(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MULDIV(3)MULDIV(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - muldiv, umuldiv – high-precision multiplication and division
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - long    muldiv(long a, long b, long c) -
- - ulong umuldiv(ulong a, ulong b, ulong c)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Muldiv returns a*b/c, using a vlong to hold the intermediate result. - Umuldiv is the equivalent for unsigned integers. They can be used - to scale integer values without worry about overflowing the intermediate - result. -
- - On some architectures, these routines can generate a trap if the - final result does not fit in a long or ulong; on others they will - silently truncate.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/mux.html b/man/man3/mux.html deleted file mode 100644 index e3e7e4c8..00000000 --- a/man/man3/mux.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,169 +0,0 @@ - -mux(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MUX(3)MUX(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Mux, muxinit, muxrpc, muxthreads – protocol multiplexor
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <mux.h> -
- - struct Mux
- {
- -
- - uint mintag;
- uint maxtag;
- int (*settag)(Mux *mux, void *msg, uint tag);
- int (*gettag)(Mux *mux, void *msg);
- int (*send)(Mux *mux, void *msg);
- void *(*recv)(Mux *mux);
- void *aux;
- ... /* private fields follow */
- -
- };
- -
- - void    muxinit(Mux *mux);
- -
- - void* muxrpc(Mux *mux, void *request);
- -
- - void    muxprocs(Mux *mux);
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Libmux is a generic protocol multiplexor. A client program initializes - a Mux structure with information about the protocol (mainly in - the form of helper functions) and can then use muxrpc to execute - individual RPCs without worrying about details of multiplexing - requests and demultiplexing responses. -
- - Libmux assumes that the protocol messages contain a tag (or message - ID) field that exists for the sole purpose of demultiplexing messages. - Libmux chooses the tags and then calls a helper function to put - them in the outgoing messages. Libmux calls another helper function - to retrieve tags from incoming messages. - It also calls helper functions to send and receive packets. -
- - A client should allocate a Mux structure and then call muxinit - to initialize the library’s private elements. The client must - initialize the following elements:
- mintag, maxtag
- -
- - The range of valid tags; maxtag is the maximum valid tag plus - one, so that maxtag–mintag is equal to the number of valid tags. - If libmux runs out of tags (all tags are being used for RPCs currently - in progress), a new call to muxrpc will block until an executing - call finishes.
- -
- settag, gettag
- -
- - Set or get the tag value in a message.
- -
- send, recv
- -
- - Send or receive protocol messages on the connection. Recv should - block until a message is available and should return nil if the - connection is closed. Libmux will arrange that only one call to - recv is active at a time.
- -
- aux   An auxiliary pointer for use by the client. Once a client has - initialized the Mux structure, it can call muxrpc to execute RPCs. - The request is the message passed to settag and send. The return - value is the response packet, as provided by recv, or nil if an - error occurred. Muxprocs allocates new procs (see - -
- - thread(3)) in which to run send and recv. After a call to muxprocs, - muxrpc will run send and recv in these procs instead of in the - calling proc. This is useful if the implementation of either (particularly - recv) blocks an entire proc and there are other threads in the - calling proc that need to remain active. - -
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - See /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9pclient/fs.c for an example of using - libmux with 9P (see intro(9p)).
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libmux
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - thread(3), intro(9p)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Libmux does not know how to free protocol messages, so message - arriving with unexpected or invalid tags are leaked. -
- - Using mintag other than zero is not well tested and probably buggy.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/nan.html b/man/man3/nan.html deleted file mode 100644 index e644116b..00000000 --- a/man/man3/nan.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ - -nan(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
NAN(3)NAN(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - NaN, Inf, isNaN, isInf – not-a-number and infinity functions
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - double NaN(void) -
- - double Inf(int) -
- - int      isNaN(double) -
- - int      isInf(double, int)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The IEEE floating point standard defines values called ‘not-a-number’ - and positive and negative ‘infinity’. These values can be produced - by such things as overflow and division by zero. Also, the library - functions sometimes return them when the arguments are not in - the domain, or the result is out of range. -
- - NaN returns a double that is not-a-number. IsNaN returns true - if its argument is not-a-number. -
- - Inf(i) returns positive infinity if i is greater than or equal - to zero, else negative infinity. IsInf returns true if its first - argument is infinity with the same sign as the second argument.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/nan.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/needstack.html b/man/man3/needstack.html deleted file mode 100644 index bba5fbe8..00000000 --- a/man/man3/needstack.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,98 +0,0 @@ - -needstack(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
NEEDSTACK(3)NEEDSTACK(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - needstack – check for execution stack overflow
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h> -
- - #include <libc.h> -
- - int    needstack(int n)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Stack overflow in the thread library leads to bugs that are difficult - to diagnose. The Plan 9 libraries are careful about not allocating - large structures on the stack, so typically four or eight kilobytes - is plenty of stack for a thread. Other libraries are not always - as careful. Calling needstack indicates to the thread library - that an external routine is about to be called that will require - n bytes of stack space. If there is not enough space left on the - stack, the thread library prints an error and terminates the program. - The call needstack(0) can be used to check whether the stack is - currently overflowed. -
- - Needstack is defined in libc.h so that library functions used - in threaded and non-threaded contexts can call it. The implementation - of needstack in lib9 is a no-op. -
- - Needstack should be thought of as a comment checked at run time, - like assert(3).
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - The X Window library implementation of XLookupString allocates - some very large buffers on the stack, so /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw/x11−itrans.c - calls needstack(20*1024) before making calls to XLookupString. - If a thread (in this case, the keyboard-reading thread used inside - the draw(3) - library) does not allocate a large enough stack, the problem is - diagnosed immediately rather than left to corrupt memory.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/needstack.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/libthread
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - thread(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/notify.html b/man/man3/notify.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9899e701..00000000 --- a/man/man3/notify.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,183 +0,0 @@ - -notify(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
NOTIFY(3)NOTIFY(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - notify, noted, atnotify, noteenable, notedisable, notifyon, notifyoff - – handle asynchronous process notification
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int notify(void (*f)(void*, char*)) -
- - int noted(int v) -
- - int atnotify(int (*f)(void*, char*), int in) -
- - int noteenable(char *msg)
- int notedisable(char *msg) -
- - int notifyon(char *msg)
- int notifyoff(char *msg)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - When a process raises an exceptional condition such as dividing - by zero or writing on a closed pipe, a note is posted to communicate - the exception. A note may also be posted by another process via - postnote(3). On Unix, notes are implemented as signals. -
- - When a note is received, the action taken depends on the note. - See signal(7) for the full description of the defaults. -
- - The default actions may be overridden. The notify function registers - a notification handler to be called within the process when a - note is received. The argument to notify replaces the previous - handler, if any. An argument of zero cancels a previous handler, - restoring the default action. A fork(2) system call leaves the - handler registered in both the parent and the child; exec(3) restores - the default behavior. Handlers may not perform floating point - operations. -
- - After a note is posted, the handler is called with two arguments: - the first is unimplemented and should not be used (on Plan 9 it - is a Ureg structure giving the current values of registers); the - second is a pointer to the note itself, a null-terminated string. - -
- - A notification handler must finish either by exiting the program - or by calling noted; if the handler returns the behavior is undefined - and probably erroneous. Until the program calls noted, any further - externally-generated notes (e.g., hangup or alarm) will be held - off, and any further notes generated by erroneous - behavior by the program (such as divide by zero) will kill the - program. The argument to noted defines the action to take: NDFLT - instructs the system to perform the default action as if the handler - had never been registered; NCONT instructs the system to resume - the process at the point it was notified. In neither case - does noted return to the handler. If the note interrupted an incomplete - system call, that call returns an error (with error string interrupted) - after the process resumes. A notification handler can also jump - out to an environment set up with setjmp using the notejmp function - (see setjmp(3)). -
- - Unix provides a fixed set of notes (typically there are 32) called - signals. It also allows a process to block certain notes from - being delivered (see sigprocmask(2)) and to ignore certain notes - by setting the signal hander to the special value SIG_IGN (see - signal(2)). Noteenable and notedisable enable or disable receipt - of - a particular note by changing the current process’s blocked signal - mask. Receipt of a disabled note will be postponed until it is - reenabled. Notifyon and notifyoff enable or disable whether the - notification handler is called upon receipt of the note; if the - handler is not called, the note is discarded. -
- - Regardless of the origin of the note or the presence of a handler, - if the process is being debugged (see ptrace(2)) the arrival of - a note puts the process in the Stopped state and awakens the debugger. - -
- - Rather than using the system calls notify and noted, most programs - should use atnotify to register notification handlers. The parameter - in is non-zero to register the function f, and zero to cancel - registration. A handler must return a non-zero number if the note - was recognized (and resolved); otherwise it must return - zero. When the system posts a note to the process, each handler - registered with atnotify is called with arguments as described - above until one of the handlers returns non-zero. Then noted is - called with argument NCONT. If no registered function returns - non-zero, atnotify calls noted with argument NDFLT. -
- - The set of notes a process may receive is system-dependent, but - there is a common set that includes: -
- - -
- - Note                          Meaning               Unix signal
- interrupt                    user interrupt (DEL key)     SIGINTR
- hangup                       I/O connection closed      SIGHUP
- alarm                        alarm expired           SIGLARM
- quit                         quit from keyboard        SIGQUIT
- kill                         process requested to exit    SIGTERM
- sys: kill                    process forced to exit      SIGKILL
- sys: bus error                bus error              SIGBUS
- sys: segmentation violation    segmentation violation      SIGSEGV
- sys: write on closed pipe      write on closed pipe       SIGPIPE
- sys: child                    child wait status change     SIGCHLD
- -
- - -
- See /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/await.c (sic) for the full list. - -
- - The notes prefixed sys: are usually generated by the operating - system.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/notify.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/atnotify.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), notejmp in setjmp(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/open.html b/man/man3/open.html deleted file mode 100644 index 64f85c55..00000000 --- a/man/man3/open.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,130 +0,0 @@ - -open(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
OPEN(3)OPEN(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - open, create, close – open a file for reading or writing, create - file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int open(char *file, int omode) -
- - int create(char *file, int omode, ulong perm) -
- - int close(int fd)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Open opens the file for I/O and returns an associated file descriptor. - Omode is one of OREAD, OWRITE, ORDWR, or OEXEC, asking for permission - to read, write, read and write, or execute, respectively. In addition, - there are three values that can be ORed with the omode: OTRUNC - says to truncate the file to zero length - before opening it; OCEXEC says to close the file when an exec(3) - or execl system call is made; and ORCLOSE says to remove the file - when it is closed (by everyone who has a copy of the file descriptor). - Open fails if the file does not exist or the user does not have - permission to open it for the requested purpose (see - stat(3) for a description of permissions). The user must have - write permission on the file if the OTRUNC bit is set. For the - open system call (unlike the implicit open in exec(3)), OEXEC - is actually identical to OREAD. -
- - Create creates a new file or prepares to rewrite an existing file, - opens it according to omode (as described for open), and returns - an associated file descriptor. If the file is new, the owner is - set to the userid of the creating process group; the group to - that of the containing directory; the permissions to perm ANDed - with - the permissions of the containing directory. If the file already - exists, it is truncated to 0 length, and the permissions, owner, - and group remain unchanged. The created file is a directory if - the DMDIR bit is set in perm, an exclusive-use file if the DMEXCL - bit is set, and an append-only file if the DMAPPEND bit is set. - Exclusive-use files may be open for I/O by only one client at - a time, but the file descriptor may become invalid if no I/O is - done for an extended period; see open(9p). -
- - Create fails if the path up to the last element of file cannot - be evaluated, if the user doesn’t have write permission in the - final directory, if the file already exists and does not permit - the access defined by omode, of if there there are no free file - descriptors. In the last case, the file may be created even when - an error is - returned. -
- - Since create may succeed even if the file exists, a special mechanism - is necessary for those applications that require an atomic create - operation. If the OEXCL (0x1000) bit is set in the mode for a - create, the call succeeds only if the file does not already exist; - see open(9p) for details. -
- - Close closes the file associated with a file descriptor. Provided - the file descriptor is a valid open descriptor, close is guaranteed - to close it; there will be no error. Files are closed automatically - upon termination of a process; close allows the file descriptor - to be reused.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), stat(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - These functions set errstr.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/opentemp.html b/man/man3/opentemp.html deleted file mode 100644 index 9ec47571..00000000 --- a/man/man3/opentemp.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ - -opentemp(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
OPENTEMP(3)OPENTEMP(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - opentemp – create a uniquely-named file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int opentemp(char *template)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Opentemp replaces template by a unique file name, and returns - the address of the template. The template should look like a file - name with eleven trailing Xs. The Xs are replaced by a letter - followed by the current process id. Letters from a to z are tried - until the name of a file that does not yet exist (see access(2)) - is - generated. Opentemp then creates the file for reading and writing - and returns the file descriptor. -
- - If no such name can be generated, opentemp returns –1. -
- - Opentemp avoids races. Two simultaneous calls to opentemp will - never return the same name.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/opentemp.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - create in open(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/pipe.html b/man/man3/pipe.html deleted file mode 100644 index b087ae8b..00000000 --- a/man/man3/pipe.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ - -pipe(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PIPE(3)PIPE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - pipe – create an interprocess channel
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int pipe(int fd[2])
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Pipe creates a buffered channel for interprocess I/O communication. - Two file descriptors are returned in fd. Data written to fd[1] - is available for reading from fd[0] and data written to fd[0] - is available for reading from fd[1]. -
- - After the pipe has been established, cooperating processes created - by subsequent fork(2) calls may pass data through the pipe with - read and write calls. -
- - When all the data has been read from a pipe and the writer has - closed the pipe or exited, read(3) will return 0 bytes. Writes - to a pipe with no reader will generate a note sys: write on closed - pipe.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/pipe.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), read(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Sets errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - If a read or a write of a pipe is interrupted, some unknown number - of bytes may have been transferred. -
- - Pipe is a macro defined as p9pipe to avoid name conflicts with - Unix’s pipe system call. -
- - Unix pipes are not guaranteed to be bidirectional. In order to - ensure a bidirectional channel, p9pipe creates Unix domain sockets - via the socketpair(2) instead of Unix pipes. -
- - The implementation of pipes as Unix domain sockets causes problems - with some Unix implementations of /dev/fd, Unix’s dup device. - If a Unix domain socket is open as file descriptor 0, some implementations - disallow the opening of /dev/fd/0; instead one must connect(2) - to it. If this functionality is important - (as it is for rc(1)), one must #undef pipe and fall back on the - (possibly unidirectional) Unix pipes.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/plumb.html b/man/man3/plumb.html deleted file mode 100644 index d7649698..00000000 --- a/man/man3/plumb.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,257 +0,0 @@ - -plumb(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PLUMB(3)PLUMB(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - eplumb, plumbfree, plumbopen, plumbopenfid, plumbsend, plumbsendtofid, - plumbsendtext, plumblookup, plumbpack, plumbpackattr, plumbaddattr, - plumbdelattr, plumbrecv, plumbrecvfid, plumbunpack, plumbunpackpartial, - plumbunpackattr, Plumbmsg – plumb messages
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <plumb.h> -
- - -
- - int          plumbopen(char *port, int omode) -
- - int          plumbsend(int fd, Plumbmsg *m) -
- - int          plumbsendtext(int fd, char *src, char *dst, char *wdir, char - *data) -
- - void         plumbfree(Plumbmsg *m) -
- - Plumbmsg*    plumbrecv(int fd) -
- - char*        plumbpack(Plumbmsg *m, int *np) -
- - Plumbmsg*    plumbunpack(char *buf, int n) -
- - Plumbmsg*    plumbunpackpartial(char *buf, int n, int *morep) -
- - char*        plumbpackattr(Plumbattr *a) -
- - Plumbattr* plumbunpackattr(char *a) -
- - char*        plumblookup(Plumbattr *a, char *name) -
- - Plumbattr* plumbaddattr(Plumbattr *a, Plumbattr *new) -
- - Plumbattr* plumbdelattr(Plumbattra *a, char *name) -
- - int          eplumb(int key, char *port) -
- - #include <9pclient.h> -
- - CFid         *plumbopenfid(char *port, int omode) -
- - Plumbmsg*    plumbrecvfid(CFid *fid) -
- - int          plumbsendtofid(CFid *fid, Plumbmsg *m)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines manipulate plumb(7) messages, transmitting them, - receiving them, and converting them between text and these data - structures:
- -
- - typedef
- struct Plumbmsg
- {
- -
- - char        *src;
- char        *dst;
- char        *wdir;
- char        *type;
- Plumbattr *attr;
- int         ndata;
- char        *data;
- -
- } Plumbmsg;
- typedef
- struct Plumbattr
- {
- -
- - char        *name;
- char        *value;
- Plumbattr *next;
- -
- } Plumbattr;
- -
- - -
- Plumbopen opens the named plumb port, using open(3) mode omode. - If port begins with a slash, it is taken as a literal file name; - otherwise plumbopen searches for the location of the plumber(4) - service and opens the port there. -
- - For programs using the event(3) interface, eplumb registers, using - the given key, receipt of messages from the named port. -
- - Plumbsend formats and writes message m to the file descriptor - fd, which will usually be the result of plumbopen("send", OWRITE). - Plumbsendtext is a simplified version for text-only messages; - it assumes type is text, sets attr to nil, and sets ndata to strlen(data). - -
- - Plumbfree frees all the data associated with the message m, all - the components of which must therefore have been allocated with - malloc(3). -
- - Plumbrecv returns the next message available on the file descriptor - fd, or nil for error. -
- - Plumbpack encodes message m as a character string in the format - of plumb(7), setting *np to the length in bytes of the string. - Plumbunpack does the inverse, translating the n bytes of buf into - a Plumbmsg. -
- - Plumbunpackpartial enables unpacking of messages that arrive in - pieces. The first call to plumbunpackpartial for a given message - must be sufficient to unpack the header; subsequent calls permit - unpacking messages with long data sections. For each call, buf - points to the beginning of the complete message received - so far, and n reports the total number of bytes received for that - message. If the message is complete, the return value will be - as in plumbunpack. If not, and morep is not null, the return value - will be nil and *morep will be set to the number of bytes remaining - to be read for this message to be complete (recall that - the byte count is in the header). Those bytes should be read by - the caller, placed at location buf+n, and the message unpacked - again. If an error is encountered, the return value will be nil - and *morep will be zero. -
- - Plumbpackattr converts the list a of Plumbattr structures into - a null-terminated string. If an attribute value contains white - space, quote characters, or equal signs, the value will be quoted - appropriately. A newline character will terminate processing. - Plumbunpackattr converts the null-terminated string a back into - a list of Plumbattr structures. -
- - Plumblookup searches the Plumbattr list a for an attribute with - the given name and returns the associated value. The returned - string is the original value, not a copy. If the attribute has - no value, the returned value will be the empty string; if the - attribute does not occur in the list at all, the value will be - nil. -
- - Plumbaddattr appends the new Plumbattr (which may be a list) to - the attribute list a and returns the new list. Plumbattr searches - the list a for the first attribute with name name and deletes - it from the list, returning the resulting list. Plumbdelattr is - a no-op if no such attribute exists. -
- - The file descriptor returned by plumbopen is created with fsopenfd - (see 9pclient(3)), which masks information about read and write - errors. This is acceptable for use in plumbrecv but not for plumbsend, - which depends on seeing details of write errors. Plumbopenfid, - plumbrecvfid, and plumbsendtofid provide an - explicit interface to lib9pclient that preserves the exact error - details.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libplumb
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - plumb(1), event(3), plumber(4), plumb(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - When appropriate, including when a plumbsend fails, these routine - set errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To avoid rewriting clients that use plumbsend, the call plumbopen("send", - OWRITE) returns a useless file descriptor (it is opened to /dev/null). - Plumbsend looks for this particular file descriptor and uses a - static copy of the CFid instead.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/post9pservice.html b/man/man3/post9pservice.html deleted file mode 100644 index 62238d0d..00000000 --- a/man/man3/post9pservice.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,67 +0,0 @@ - -post9pservice(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
POST9PSERVICE(3)POST9PSERVICE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - post9pservice – post 9P service for use by clients
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int post9pservice(int fd, char *name)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Post9pservice invokes 9pserve(4) to post a new 9P service in the - current “name space” (see intro(4)) named name. Clients connecting - to the posted service are multiplexed onto a single 9P conversation - with the server on file descriptor fd.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(4), 9pserve(4)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/post9p.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/postnote.html b/man/man3/postnote.html deleted file mode 100644 index b08507e5..00000000 --- a/man/man3/postnote.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,80 +0,0 @@ - -postnote(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
POSTNOTE(3)POSTNOTE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - postnote – send a note to a process or process group
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int    postnote(int who, int pid, char *note)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Postnote sends a note to a process or process group. If who is - PNPROC, then note is sent to the process with id pid. If who is - PNGROUP, the note is delivered to the process group which has - the process with id pid as a member. For PNGROUP only, if the - calling process is in the target group, the note is not delivered - to - that process. -
- - If the write is successful, zero is returned. Otherwise –1 is returned.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/postnote.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - notify(3), intro(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Sets errstr.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/prime.html b/man/man3/prime.html deleted file mode 100644 index abaffda0..00000000 --- a/man/man3/prime.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,114 +0,0 @@ - -prime(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PRIME(3)PRIME(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - genprime, gensafeprime, genstrongprime, DSAprimes, probably_prime, - smallprimetest – prime number generation
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - int    smallprimetest(mpint *p) -
- - int    probably_prime(mpint *p, int nrep) -
- - void genprime(mpint *p, int n, int nrep) -
- - void gensafeprime(mpint *p, mpint *alpha, int n, int accuracy) - -
- - void genstrongprime(mpint *p, int n, int nrep) -
- - void DSAprimes(mpint *q, mpint *p, uchar seed[SHA1dlen])
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Public key algorithms abound in prime numbers. The following routines - generate primes or test numbers for primality. -
- - Smallprimetest checks for divisibility by the first 10000 primes. - It returns 0 if p is not divisible by the primes and –1 if it is. - -
- - Probably_prime uses the Miller-Rabin test to test p. It returns - non-zero if P is probably prime. The probability of it not being - prime is 1/4**nrep. -
- - Genprime generates a random n bit prime. Since it uses the Miller-Rabin - test, nrep is the repetition count passed to probably_prime. Gensafegprime - generates an n-bit prime p and a generator alpha of the multiplicative - group of integers mod p; there is a prime q such that p-1=2*q. - Genstrongprime generates a - prime, p, with the following properties:
- –     (p-1)/2 is prime. Therefore p-1 has a large prime factor, p’.
- –p’-1 has a large prime factor
- –p+1 has a large prime factor -
- - DSAprimes generates two primes, q and p, using the NIST recommended - algorithm for DSA primes. q divides p-1. The random seed used - is also returned, so that skeptics can later confirm the computation. - Be patient; this is a slow algorithm.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - aes(3) blowfish(3), des(3), elgamal(3), rsa(3),
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/print.3 b/man/man3/print.3 index c4f96bbd..3fd32d1c 100644 --- a/man/man3/print.3 +++ b/man/man3/print.3 @@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ void fatal(char *msg, ...) } .EE .SH SOURCE -.B \*9/src/lib9/libfmt +.B \*9/src/lib9/fmt .SH SEE ALSO .IR fmtinstall (3), .IR fprintf (3), diff --git a/man/man3/print.html b/man/man3/print.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8640efc7..00000000 --- a/man/man3/print.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,309 +0,0 @@ - -print(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PRINT(3)PRINT(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - print, fprint, sprint, snprint, seprint, smprint, runesprint, - runesnprint, runeseprint, runesmprint, vfprint, vsnprint, vseprint, - vsmprint, runevsnprint, runevseprint, runevsmprint – print formatted - output
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h> -
- - #include <libc.h> -
- - int     print(char *format, ...) -
- - int     fprint(int fd, char *format, ...) -
- - int     sprint(char *s, char *format, ...) -
- - int     snprint(char *s, int len, char *format, ...) -
- - char* seprint(char *s, char *e, char *format, ...) -
- - char* smprint(char *format, ...) -
- - int     runesprint(Rune *s, char *format, ...) -
- - int     runesnprint(Rune *s, int len, char *format, ...) -
- - Rune* runeseprint(Rune *s, Rune *e, char *format, ...) -
- - Rune* runesmprint(char *format, ...) -
- - int     vfprint(int fd, char *format, va_list v) -
- - int     vsnprint(char *s, int len, char *format, va_list v) -
- - char* vseprint(char *s, char *e, char *format, va_list v) -
- - char* vsmprint(char *format, va_list v) -
- - int     runevsnprint(Rune *s, int len, char *format, va_list v) -
- - Rune* runevseprint(Rune *s, Rune *e, char *format, va_list v) - -
- - Rune* runevsmprint(Rune *format, va_list v) -
- - -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Print writes text to the standard output. Fprint writes to the - named output file descriptor: a buffered form is described in - bio(3). Sprint places text followed by the NUL character (\0) - in consecutive bytes starting at s; it is the user’s responsibility - to ensure that enough storage is available. Each function returns - the - number of bytes transmitted (not including the NUL in the case - of sprint), or a negative value if an output error was encountered. - -
- - Snprint is like sprint, but will not place more than len bytes - in s. Its result is always NUL-terminated and holds the maximal - number of complete UTF-8 characters that can fit. Seprint is like - snprint, except that the end is indicated by a pointer e rather - than a count and the return value points to the terminating NUL - of - the resulting string. Smprint is like sprint, except that it prints - into and returns a string of the required length, which is allocated - by malloc(3). -
- - The routines runesprint, runesnprint, runeseprint, and runesmprint - are the same as sprint, snprint, seprint and smprint except that - their output is rune strings instead of byte strings. -
- - Finally, the routines vfprint, vsnprint, vseprint, vsmprint, runevsnprint, - runevseprint, and runevsmprint are like their v−less relatives - except they take as arguments a va_list parameter, so they can - be called within a variadic function. The Example section shows - a representative usage. -
- - Each of these functions converts, formats, and prints its trailing - arguments under control of a format string. The format contains - two types of objects: plain characters, which are simply copied - to the output stream, and conversion specifications, each of which - results in fetching of zero or more arguments. The results - are undefined if there are arguments of the wrong type or too - few arguments for the format. If the format is exhausted while - arguments remain, the excess is ignored. -
- - Each conversion specification has the following format:
- -
- - % [flags] verb -
- - -
- The verb is a single character and each flag is a single character - or a (decimal) numeric string. Up to two numeric strings may be - used; the first is called width, the second precision. A period - can be used to separate them, and if the period is present then - width and precision are taken to be zero if missing, otherwise - they are ‘omitted’. Either or both of the numbers may be replaced - with the character *, meaning that the actual number will be obtained - from the argument list as an integer. The flags and numbers are - arguments to the verb described below. -
- - The numeric verbs d, o, b, x, and X format their arguments in - decimal, octal, binary, hexadecimal, and upper case hexadecimal. - Each interprets the flags 0, h, hh, l, u, +, −, ,, and # to mean - pad with zeros, short, byte, long, unsigned, always print a sign, - left justified, commas every three digits, and alternate format. - Also, a space character in the flag position is like +, but prints - a space instead of a plus sign for non-negative values. If neither - short nor long is specified, then the argument is an int. If unsigned - is specified, then the argument is interpreted as a positive number - and no sign is output. If two l flags are given, then - the argument is interpreted as a vlong (usually an 8-byte, sometimes - a 4-byte integer). If precision is not omitted, the number is - padded on the left with zeros until at least precision digits - appear. If precision is explicitly 0, and the number is 0, no - digits are generated, and alternate formatting does not apply. - Then, - if alternate format is specified, for o conversion, the number - is preceded by a 0 if it doesn’t already begin with one; for x - conversion, the number is preceded by 0x; for X conversion, the - number is preceded by 0X. Finally, if width is not omitted, the - number is padded on the left (or right, if left justification - is specified) - with enough blanks to make the field at least width characters - long. -
- - The floating point verbs f, e, E, g, and G take a double argument. - Each interprets the flags 0, L +, −, and # to mean pad with zeros, - long double argument, always print a sign, left justified, and - alternate format. Width is the minimum field width and, if the - converted value takes up less than width characters, it is - padded on the left (or right, if ‘left justified’) with spaces. - Precision is the number of digits that are converted after the - decimal place for e, E, and f conversions, and precision is the - maximum number of significant digits for g and G conversions. - The f verb produces output of the form [−]digits[.digits]. E - conversion appends an exponent E[−]digits, and e conversion appends - an exponent e[−]digits. The g verb will output the argument in - either e or f with the goal of producing the smallest output. - Also, trailing zeros are omitted from the fraction part of the - output, and a trailing decimal point appears only if it is - followed by a digit. The G verb is similar, but uses E format - instead of e. When alternate format is specified, the result will - always contain a decimal point, and for g and G conversions, trailing - zeros are not removed. -
- - The s verb copies a NUL-terminated string (pointer to char) to - the output. The number of characters copied (n) is the minimum - of the size of the string and precision. These n characters are - justified within a field of width characters as described above. - If a precision is given, it is safe for the string not to be nul- - terminated as long as it is at least precision characters (not - bytes!) long. The S verb is similar, but it interprets its pointer - as an array of runes (see utf(7)); the runes are converted to - UTF before output. -
- - The c verb copies a single char (promoted to int) justified within - a field of width characters as described above. The C verb is - similar, but works on runes. -
- - The p verb formats a pointer value. At the moment, it is a synonym - for x, but that will change if pointers and integers are different - sizes. -
- - The r verb takes no arguments; it copies the error string returned - by a call to errstr(3). -
- - Custom verbs may be installed using fmtinstall(3).
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - This function prints an error message with a variable number of - arguments and then quits.
- -
- - void fatal(char *msg, ...)
- {
- -
- - char buf[1024], *out;
- va_list arg;
- out = seprint(buf, buf+sizeof buf, "Fatal error: ");
- va_start(arg, msg);
- out = vseprint(out, buf+sizeof buf, msg, arg);
- va_end(arg);
- write(2, buf, out−buf);
- exits("fatal error");
- -
- }
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/libfmt
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - fmtinstall(3), fprintf(3), utf(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Routines that write to a file descriptor or call malloc set errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The formatting is close to that specified for ANSI fprintf(3); - the main difference is that b and r are not in ANSI and u is a - flag here instead of a verb. Also, and distinctly not a bug, print - and friends generate UTF rather than ASCII. -
- - There is no runeprint, runefprint, etc. because runes are byte-order - dependent and should not be written directly to a file; use the - UTF output of print or fprint instead. Also, sprint is deprecated - for safety reasons; use snprint, seprint, or smprint instead. - Safety also precludes the existence of runesprint. - -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/proto.3 b/man/man3/proto.3 index fcd39048..2d5da3af 100644 --- a/man/man3/proto.3 +++ b/man/man3/proto.3 @@ -127,5 +127,5 @@ generic prototype file. .SH SOURCE .B \*9/src/libdisk/proto.c .SH SEE ALSO -.IR mk9660 (8), +.IR mk9660 (1), Plan 9's \fImkfs\fR(8) diff --git a/man/man3/proto.html b/man/man3/proto.html deleted file mode 100644 index 59e4fccd..00000000 --- a/man/man3/proto.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,140 +0,0 @@ - -proto(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PROTO(3)PROTO(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - rdproto – parse and process a proto file listing
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <disk.h>
- -
- - typedef void Protoenum(char *new, char *old, Dir *d, void *a)
- -
- - typedef void Protowarn(char *msg, void *a)
- -
- - int rdproto(char *proto, char *root, Protoenum *enm,
- -
- - -
- - Protowarn *warn, void *a)
- -
- -
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Rdproto reads and interprets the named proto file relative to - the root directory root. -
- - Each line of the proto file specifies a file to copy. Blank lines - and lines beginning with # are ignored. Indentation (usually tabs) - is significant, with each level of indentation corresponding to - a level in the file tree. Fields within a line are separated by - white space. The first field is the last path element in the destination - file tree. The second field specifies the permissions. The third - field is the owner of the file, and the fourth is the group owning - the file. The fifth field is the name of the file from which to - copy; this file is read from the current name space, not the source - file tree. All fields except the first are optional. Specifying - − for - permissions, owner, or group causes rdproto to fetch the corresponding - information from the file rather than override it. (This is the - default behavior when the fields are not present; explicitly specifying - − is useful when one wishes to set, say, the file owner without - setting the permissions.) -
- - Names beginning with a $ are expanded as environment variables. - If the first file specified in a directory is *, all of the files - in that directory are considered listed. If the first file is - +, all of the files are copied, and all subdirectories are recursively - considered listed. All files are considered relative to root. - -
- - For each file named by the proto, enm is called with new pointing - at the name of the file (without the root prefix), old pointing - at the name of the source file (with the root prefix, when applicable), - and Dir at the desired directory information for the new file. - Only the name, uid, gid, mode, mtime, and length fields - are guaranteed to be valid. The argument a is the same argument - passed to rdproto; typically it points at some extra state used - by the enumeration function. -
- - When files or directories do not exist or cannot be read by rdproto, - it formats a warning message, calls warn, and continues processing; - if warn is nil, rdproto prints the warning message to standard - error. -
- - Rdproto returns zero if proto was processed, –1 if it could not - be opened.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /sys/lib/sysconfig/proto/           directory of prototype files.
- /sys/lib/sysconfig/proto/portproto   generic prototype file.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdisk/proto.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mk9660(8), Plan 9’s mkfs(8)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/pushtls.html b/man/man3/pushtls.html deleted file mode 100644 index ee806701..00000000 --- a/man/man3/pushtls.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,261 +0,0 @@ - -pushtls(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PUSHTLS(3)PUSHTLS(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - pushtls, tlsClient, tlsServer, initThumbprints, freeThumbprints, - okThumbprint, readcert, readcertchain – attach TLS1 or SSL3 encryption - to a communication channel
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int             pushtls(int fd, char *hashalg, char *encalg,
- -
- - -
- - int isclient, char *secret, char *dir) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - int             tlsClient(int fd, TLSconn *conn) -
- - int             tlsServer(int fd, TLSconn *conn) -
- - uchar           *readcert(char *filename, int *pcertlen) -
- - PEMchain         *readcertchain(char *filename) -
- - Thumbprint*      initThumbprints(char *ok, char *crl) -
- - void            freeThumbprints(Thumbprint *table) -
- - int             okThumbprint(uchar *hash, Thumbprint *table)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Transport Layer Security (TLS) comprises a record layer protocol, - doing message digesting and encrypting in the kernel, and a handshake - protocol, doing initial authentication and secret creation at - user level and then starting a data channel in the record protocol. - TLS is nearly the same as SSL 3.0, and the software - should interoperate with implementations of either standard. -
- - To use just the record layer, as described in Plan 9’s tls(3), - call pushtls to open the record layer device, connect to the communications - channel fd, and start up encryption and message authentication - as specified in hashalg, encalg, and secret. These parameters - must have been arranged at the two ends of the - conversation by other means. For example, hashalg could be sha1, - encalg could be rc4_128, and secret could be the base-64 encoding - of two (client-to-server and server-to-client) 20-byte digest - keys and two corresponding 16-byte encryption keys. Pushtls returns - a file descriptor for the TLS data channel. - Anything written to this descriptor will get encrypted and authenticated - and then written to the file descriptor, fd. If dir is non-zero, - the path name of the connection directory is copied into dir. - This path name is guaranteed to be less than 40 bytes long. -
- - Alternatively, call tlsClient to speak the full handshake protocol, - negotiate the algorithms and secrets, and return a new data file - descriptor for the data channel. Conn points to a (caller-allocated) - struct
- -
- - typedef struct TLSconn{
- -
- - char dir[40];       // OUT      connection directory
- uchar *cert;        // IN/OUT certificate
- uchar *sessionID; // IN/OUT sessionID
- int certlen, sessionIDlen;
- void (*trace)(char*fmt, ...);
- PEMChain *chain;
- -
- } TLSconn;
- -
- defined in tls.h. On input, the caller can provide options such - as cert, the local certificate, and sessionID, used by a client - to resume a previously negotiated security association. On output, - the connection directory is set, as with listen (see dial(3)). - The input cert is freed and a freshly allocated copy of the remote’s - certificate is returned in conn, to be checked by the caller according - to its needs. One mechanism is supplied by initThumbprints and - freeThumbprints which allocate and free, respectively, a table - of hashes from files of known trusted and revoked certificates. - okThumbprint confirms that a particular hash is in the - table, as computed by -
- - -
- - uchar hash[SHA1dlen];
- conn = (TLSconn*)mallocz(sizeof *conn, 1);
- fd = tlsClient(fd, conn);
- sha1(conn−>cert, conn−>certlen, hash, nil);
- if(!okThumbprint(hash,table))
- -
- - exits("suspect server");
- -
- ...application begins...
- -
- - -
- Call tlsServer to perform the corresponding function on the server - side: -
- - -
- - fd = accept(lcfd, ldir);
- conn = (TLSconn*)mallocz(sizeof *conn, 1);
- conn−>cert = readcert("cert.pem", &conn−>certlen);
- fd = tlsServer(fd, conn);
- ...application begins...
- -
- The private key corresponding to cert.pem should have been previously - loaded into factotum. (See rsa(3) for more about key generation.) - By setting
- -
- - conn−>chain = readcertchain("intermediate−certs.pem");
- -
- the server can present extra certificate evidence to establish - the chain of trust to a root authority known to the client. -
- - Conn is not required for the ongoing conversation and may be freed - by the application whenever convenient.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /sys/lib/tls
- -
- - thumbprints of trusted services
- -
- /sys/lib/ssl
- -
- - PEM certificate files
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec/port
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - dial(3), thumbprint(7); Plan 9’s factotum(4) and tls(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - return –1 on failure.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Pushtls is not implemented. -
- - Client certificates and client sessionIDs are not yet implemented. - -
- - Note that in the TLS protocol sessionID itself is public; it is - used as a pointer to secrets stored in factotum.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/qball.html b/man/man3/qball.html deleted file mode 100644 index b1403336..00000000 --- a/man/man3/qball.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,111 +0,0 @@ - -qball(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
QBALL(3)QBALL(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - qball – 3-d rotation controller
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <draw.h> -
- - #include <geometry.h> -
- - void qball(Rectangle r, Mouse *mousep,
- -
- - Quaternion *orientation,
- void (*redraw)(void), Quaternion *ap)
- -
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Qball is an interactive controller that allows arbitrary 3-space - rotations to be specified with the mouse. Imagine a sphere with - its center at the midpoint of rectangle r, and diameter the smaller - of r’s dimensions. Dragging from one point on the sphere to another - specifies the endpoints of a great-circle arc. (Mouse - points outside the sphere are projected to the nearest point on - the sphere.) The axis of rotation is normal to the plane of the - arc, and the angle of rotation is twice the angle of the arc. - -
- - Argument mousep is a pointer to the mouse event that triggered - the interaction. It should have some button set. Qball will read - more events into mousep, and return when no buttons are down. - -
- - While qball is reading mouse events, it calls out to the caller-supplied - routine redraw, which is expected to update the screen to reflect - the changing orientation. Argument orientation is the orientation - that redraw should examine, represented as a unit Quaternion (see - quaternion(9.2)). The caller may set it to any - orientation. It will be updated before each call to redraw (and - on return) by multiplying by the rotation specified with the mouse. - -
- - It is possible to restrict qball’s attention to rotations about - a particular axis. If ap is null, the rotation is unconstrained. - Otherwise, the rotation will be about the same axis as *ap. This - is accomplished by projecting points on the sphere to the nearest - point also on the plane through the sphere’s center and normal - to - the axis.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libgeometry/qball.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - quaternion(3)
- Ken Shoemake, “Animating Rotation with Quaternion Curves”, SIGGRAPH - ’85 Conference Proceedings.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/quaternion.html b/man/man3/quaternion.html deleted file mode 100644 index 257ebe52..00000000 --- a/man/man3/quaternion.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,163 +0,0 @@ - -quaternion(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
QUATERNION(3)QUATERNION(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - qtom, mtoq, qadd, qsub, qneg, qmul, qdiv, qunit, qinv, qlen, slerp, - qmid, qsqrt – Quaternion arithmetic
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <draw.h> -
- - #include <geometry.h> -
- - Quaternion qadd(Quaternion q, Quaternion r) -
- - Quaternion qsub(Quaternion q, Quaternion r) -
- - Quaternion qneg(Quaternion q) -
- - Quaternion qmul(Quaternion q, Quaternion r) -
- - Quaternion qdiv(Quaternion q, Quaternion r) -
- - Quaternion qinv(Quaternion q) -
- - double qlen(Quaternion p) -
- - Quaternion qunit(Quaternion q) -
- - void qtom(Matrix m, Quaternion q) -
- - Quaternion mtoq(Matrix mat) -
- - Quaternion slerp(Quaternion q, Quaternion r, double a) -
- - Quaternion qmid(Quaternion q, Quaternion r) -
- - Quaternion qsqrt(Quaternion q)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The Quaternions are a non-commutative extension field of the Real - numbers, designed to do for rotations in 3-space what the complex - numbers do for rotations in 2-space. Quaternions have a real component - r and an imaginary vector component v=(i,j,k). Quaternions add - componentwise and multiply according to - the rule (r,v)(s,w)=(rs-v.w, rw+vs+vxw), where . and x are the ordinary - vector dot and cross products. The multiplicative inverse of a - non-zero quaternion (r,v) is (r,-v)/(r2-v.v). -
- - The following routines do arithmetic on quaternions, represented - as
- -
- - typedef struct Quaternion Quaternion;
- struct Quaternion{
- -
- - double r, i, j, k;
- -
- };
- -
- Name    Description
- qadd    Add two quaternions.
- qsub    Subtract two quaternions.
- qneg    Negate a quaternion.
- qmul    Multiply two quaternions.
- qdiv    Divide two quaternions.
- qinv    Return the multiplicative inverse of a quaternion.
- qlen    Return sqrt(q.r*q.r+q.i*q.i+q.j*q.j+q.k*q.k), the length of - a quaternion.
- qunit   Return a unit quaternion (length=1) with components proportional - to q’s. -
- - A rotation by angle θ about axis A (where A is a unit vector) - can be represented by the unit quaternion q=(cos θ/2, Asin θ/2). - The same rotation is represented by -q; a rotation by -θ about -A - is the same as a rotation by θ about A. The quaternion q transforms - points by (0,x’,y’,z’) = q-1(0,x,y,z)q. Quaternion - multiplication composes rotations. The orientation of an object - in 3-space can be represented by a quaternion giving its rotation - relative to some ‘standard’ orientation. -
- - The following routines operate on rotations or orientations represented - as unit quaternions:
- mtoq    Convert a rotation matrix (see matrix(3)) to a unit quaternion.
- qtom    Convert a unit quaternion to a rotation matrix.
- slerp   Spherical lerp. Interpolate between two orientations. The - rotation that carries q to r is q-1r, so slerp(q, r, t) is q(q-1r)t.
- qmid    slerp(q, r, .5)
- qsqrt   The square root of q. This is just a rotation about the same - axis by half the angle.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libgeometry/quaternion.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - matrix(3), qball(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/quote.html b/man/man3/quote.html deleted file mode 100644 index 433c5bfc..00000000 --- a/man/man3/quote.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,164 +0,0 @@ - -quote(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
QUOTE(3)QUOTE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - quotestrdup, quoterunestrdup, unquotestrdup, unquoterunestrdup, - quotestrfmt, quoterunestrfmt, quotefmtinstall, doquote, needsrcquote - – quoted character strings
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - char *quotestrdup(char *s) -
- - Rune *quoterunestrdup(Rune *s) -
- - char *unquotestrdup(char *s) -
- - Rune *unquoterunestrdup(Rune *s) -
- - int quotestrfmt(Fmt*) -
- - int quoterunestrfmt(Fmt*) -
- - void quotefmtinstall(void) -
- - int (*doquote)(int c) -
- - int needsrcquote(int c) -
- - -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines manipulate character strings, either adding or - removing quotes as necessary. In the quoted form, the strings - are in the style of rc(1), with single quotes surrounding the - string. Embedded single quotes are indicated by a doubled single - quote. For instance,
- -
- - Don't worry!
- -
- - -
- when quoted becomes
- -
- - 'Don''t worry!'
- -
- - -
- The empty string is represented by two quotes, ''. -
- - The first four functions act as variants of strdup (see strcat(3)). - Each returns a freshly allocated copy of the string, created using - malloc(3). Quotestrdup returns a quoted copy of s, while unquotestrdup - returns a copy of s with the quotes evaluated. The rune versions - of these functions do the same for strings (see - runestrcat(3)). -
- - The string returned by quotestrdup or quoterunestrdup has the - following properties:
- 1.    If the original string s is empty, the returned string is ''.
- 2.    If s contains no quotes, blanks, or control characters, the - returned string is identical to s.
- 3.    If s needs quotes to be added, the first character of the returned - string will be a quote. For example, hello world becomes 'hello - world' not hello' 'world. -
- - The function pointer doquote is nil by default. If it is non-nil, - characters are passed to that function to see if they should be - quoted. This mechanism allows programs to specify that characters - other than blanks, control characters, or quotes be quoted. Regardless - of the return value of *doquote, blanks, control - characters, and quotes are always quoted. Needsrcquote is provided - as a doquote function that flags any character special to rc(1). - -
- - Quotestrfmt and quoterunestrfmt are print(3) formatting routines - that produce quoted strings as output. They may be installed by - hand, but quotefmtinstall installs them under the standard format - characters q and Q. (They are not installed automatically.) If - the format string includes the alternate format character #, - for example %#q, the printed string will always be quoted; otherwise - quotes will only be provided if necessary to avoid ambiguity. - In <libc.h> there are #pragma statements so the compiler can type-check - uses of %q and %Q in print(3) format strings.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/quote.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/fmt/fmtquote.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rc(1), malloc(3), print(3), strcat(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Because it is provided by the format library, doquote is a preprocessor - macro defined as fmtdoquote; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/rand.html b/man/man3/rand.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0601c6bf..00000000 --- a/man/man3/rand.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,190 +0,0 @@ - -rand(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RAND(3)RAND(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - rand, lrand, frand, nrand, lnrand, srand, truerand, ntruerand, - fastrand, nfastrand – random number generator
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int      rand(void) -
- - long     lrand(void) -
- - double frand(void) -
- - int      nrand(int val) -
- - long     lnrand(long val) -
- - void     srand(long seed) -
- - ulong    truerand(void) -
- - ulong    ntruerand(ulong val)
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - void     genrandom(uchar *buf, int nbytes) -
- - void     prng(uchar *buf, int nbytes) -
- - ulong    fastrand(void) -
- - ulong    nfastrand(ulong val)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Rand returns a uniform pseudo-random number x, 0≤x<215. -
- - Lrand returns a uniform long x, 0≤x<231. -
- - Frand returns a uniform double x, 0.0≤x<1.0, This function calls - lrand twice to generate a number with as many as 62 significant - bits of mantissa. -
- - Nrand returns a uniform integer x, 0≤x<val. Lnrand is the same, - but returns a long. -
- - The algorithm is additive feedback with:
- -
- - x[n] = (x[n-273] + x[n-607]) mod 231 -
- - -
- giving a period of 230 × (2607 – 1). -
- - The generators are initialized by calling srand with whatever - you like as argument. To get a different starting value each time,
- -
- - srand(time(0)) -
- - -
- will work as long as it is not called more often than once per - second. Calling
- -
- - srand(1) -
- - -
- will initialize the generators to their starting state. -
- - Truerand returns a random unsigned long read from /dev/random. - Due to the nature of /dev/random, truerand can only return a few - hundred bits a second. -
- - Ntruerand returns a uniform random integer x, 0≤x<val≤232-1. -
- - Genrandom fills a buffer with bytes from the X9.17 pseudo-random - number generator. The X9.17 generator is seeded by 24 truly random - bytes read from /dev/random. -
- - Prng uses the native rand(3) pseudo-random number generator to - fill the buffer. Used with srand, this function can produce a - reproducible stream of pseudo random numbers useful in testing. - -
- - Both genrandom and prng may be passed to mprand (see mp(3)). -
- - Fastrand uses genrandom to return a uniform unsigned long x, 0≤x<232-1. - -
- - Nfastrand uses genrandom to return a uniform unsigned long x, - 0≤x<val≤232-1.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9
- /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec/port
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mp(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - Truerand and ntruerand maintain a static file descriptor. -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, rand, lrand, - frand, nrand, lnrand, and srand are preprocessor macros defined - as p9rand, p9lrand, and so on; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/rc4.html b/man/man3/rc4.html deleted file mode 100644 index 8c0d374b..00000000 --- a/man/man3/rc4.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ - -rc4(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RC4(3)RC4(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - setupRC4state, rc4, rc4skip, rc4back - alleged rc4 encryption
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - void setupRC4state(RC4state *s, uchar *seed, int slen) -
- - void rc4(RC4state *s, uchar *data, int dlen) -
- - void rc4skip(RC4state *s, int nbytes) -
- - void rc4back(RC4state *s, int nbytes)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - This is an algorithm alleged to be Rivest’s RC4 encryption function. - It is a pseudo-random number generator with a 256 byte state and - a long cycle. The input buffer is XOR’d with the output of the - generator both to encrypt and to decrypt. The seed, entered using - setupRC4state, can be any length. The generator can - be run forward using rc4, skip over bytes using rc4skip to account - lost transmissions, or run backwards using rc4back to cover retransmitted - data. The RC4state structure keeps track of the algorithm.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mp(3), aes(3), blowfish(3), des(3), dsa(3), elgamal(3), rsa(3), - sechash(3), prime(3), rand(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/read.html b/man/man3/read.html deleted file mode 100644 index 515c3f77..00000000 --- a/man/man3/read.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,109 +0,0 @@ - -read(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
READ(3)READ(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - read, readn, write, pread, pwrite – read or write file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - long read(int fd, void *buf, long nbytes) -
- - long readn(int fd, void *buf, long nbytes) -
- - long write(int fd, void *buf, long nbytes) -
- - long pread(int fd, void *buf, long nbytes, vlong offset) -
- - long pwrite(int fd, void *buf, long nbytes, vlong offset)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Read reads nbytes bytes of data from the offset in the file associated - with fd into memory at buf. The offset is advanced by the number - of bytes read. It is not guaranteed that all nbytes bytes will - be read; for example if the file refers to the console, at most - one line will be returned. In any event the number of bytes - read is returned. A return value of 0 is conventionally interpreted - as end of file. -
- - Readn is just like read, but does successive read calls until - nbytes have been read, or a read system call returns a non-positive - count. -
- - Write writes nbytes bytes of data starting at buf to the file - associated with fd at the file offset. The offset is advanced - by the number of bytes written. The number of characters actually - written is returned. It should be regarded as an error if this - is not the same as requested. -
- - Pread and Pwrite equivalent to a seek(3) to offset followed by - a read or write. By combining the operations in a single atomic - call, they more closely match the 9P protocol (see intro(9p)) - and, more important, permit multiprocess programs to execute multiple - concurrent read and write operations on the same file - descriptor without interference.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/readn.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), open(3), dup(3), pipe(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - These functions set errstr.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/regexp.html b/man/man3/regexp.html deleted file mode 100644 index 21e1849b..00000000 --- a/man/man3/regexp.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,178 +0,0 @@ - -regexp(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
REGEXP(3)REGEXP(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - regcomp, regcomplit, regcompnl, regexec, regsub, rregexec, rregsub, - regerror – regular expression
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <regexp.h> -
- - Reprog    *regcomp(char *exp) -
- - Reprog    *regcomplit(char *exp) -
- - Reprog    *regcompnl(char *exp) -
- - int    regexec(Reprog *prog, char *string, Resub *match, int msize)
- -
- - void regsub(char *source, char *dest, int dlen, Resub *match, - int msize)
- -
- - int    rregexec(Reprog *prog, Rune *string, Resub *match, int msize)
- -
- - void rregsub(Rune *source, Rune *dest, int dlen, Resub *match, - int msize)
- -
- - void regerror(char *msg)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Regcomp compiles a regular expression and returns a pointer to - the generated description. The space is allocated by malloc(3) - and may be released by free. Regular expressions are exactly as - in regexp(7). -
- - Regcomplit is like regcomp except that all characters are treated - literally. Regcompnl is like regcomp except that the . metacharacter - matches all characters, including newlines. -
- - Regexec matches a null-terminated string against the compiled - regular expression in prog. If it matches, regexec returns 1 and - fills in the array match with character pointers to the substrings - of string that correspond to the parenthesized subexpressions - of exp: match[i].sp points to the beginning and - match[i].ep points just beyond the end of the ith substring. (Subexpression - i begins at the ith left parenthesis, counting from 1.) Pointers - in match[0] pick out the substring that corresponds to the whole - regular expression. Unused elements of match are filled with zeros. - Matches involving *, +, and ? are - extended as far as possible. The number of array elements in match - is given by msize. The structure of elements of match is:
- -
- - typedef struct {
- -
- - union {
- char *sp;
- Rune *rsp;
- } s;
- union {
- char *ep;
- Rune *rep;
- } e;
- -
- } Resub;
- -
- - -
- If match[0].s.sp is nonzero on entry, regexec starts matching - at that point within string. If match[0].e.ep is nonzero on entry, - the last character matched is the one preceding that point. -
- - Regsub places in dest a substitution instance of source in the - context of the last regexec performed using match. Each instance - of \n, where n is a digit, is replaced by the string delimited - by match[n].sp and match[n].ep. Each instance of & is replaced - by the string delimited by match[0].sp and - match[0].ep. The substitution will always be null terminated and - trimmed to fit into dlen bytes. -
- - Regerror, called whenever an error is detected in regcomp, writes - the string msg on the standard error file and exits. Regerror - can be replaced to perform special error processing. If the user - supplied regerror returns rather than exits, regcomp will return - 0. -
- - Rregexec and rregsub are variants of regexec and regsub that use - strings of Runes instead of strings of chars. With these routines, - the rsp and rep fields of the match array elements should be used.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libregexp
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - grep(1)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Regcomp returns 0 for an illegal expression or other failure. - Regexec returns 0 if string is not matched.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - There is no way to specify or match a NUL character; NULs terminate - patterns and strings.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/rfork.html b/man/man3/rfork.html deleted file mode 100644 index f76a61fd..00000000 --- a/man/man3/rfork.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,118 +0,0 @@ - -rfork(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RFORK(3)RFORK(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - rfork – manipulate process state
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int rfork(int flags)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Rfork is a partial implementation of the Plan 9 system call. It - can be used to manipulate some process state and to create new - processes a la fork(2). It cannot be used to create shared-memory - processes (Plan 9’s RFMEM flag); for that functionality use proccreate - (see thread(3)). -
- - The flags argument to rfork selects which resources of the invoking - process (parent) are shared by the new process (child) or initialized - to their default values. Flags is the logical OR of some subset - of
- RFPROC     If set a new process is created; otherwise changes affect - the current process.
- RFNOWAIT   If set, the child process will be dissociated from the - parent. Upon exit the child will leave no Waitmsg (see wait(3)) - for the parent to collect.
- RFNOTEG    Each process is a member of a group of processes that all - receive notes when a note is sent to the group (see postnote(3) - and signal(2)). The group of a new process is by default the same - as its parent, but if RFNOTEG is set (regardless of RFPROC), the - process becomes the first in a new group, isolated - -
- - -
- - from previous processes. In Plan 9, a process can call rfork(RFNOTEG) - and then be sure that it will no longer receive console interrupts - or other notes. Unix job-control shells put each command in its - own process group and then relay notes to the current foreground - command, making the idiom - less useful.
- -
- -
- RFFDG      If set, the invoker’s file descriptor table (see intro()) - is copied; otherwise the two processes share a single table. -
- - File descriptors in a shared file descriptor table are kept open - until either they are explicitly closed or all processes sharing - the table exit. -
- - If RFPROC is set, the value returned in the parent process is - the process id of the child process; the value returned in the - child is zero. Without RFPROC, the return value is zero. Process - ids range from 1 to the maximum integer (int) value. Rfork will - sleep, if necessary, until required process resources are available. - -
- - Calling rfork(RFFDG|RFPROC) is equivalent to calling fork(2).
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/rfork.c
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Rfork sets errstr.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/rsa.html b/man/man3/rsa.html deleted file mode 100644 index 0cfd2949..00000000 --- a/man/man3/rsa.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,262 +0,0 @@ - -rsa(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RSA(3)RSA(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - asn1dump, asn1toRSApriv, decodepem, decodepemchain, rsadecrypt, - rsaencrypt, rsafill,, rsagen, rsaprivalloc, rsaprivfree, rsaprivtopub, - rsapuballoc, rsapubfree, X509toRSApub, X509dump, X509gen, X509req, - X509verify – RSA encryption algorithm
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - RSApriv*    rsagen(int nlen, int elen, int nrep) -
- - RSApriv*    rsafill(mpint *n, mpint *ek, mpint *dk, mpint *p, mpint - *q) -
- - mpint*      rsaencrypt(RSApub *k, mpint *in, mpint *out) -
- - mpint*      rsadecrypt(RSApriv *k, mpint *in, mpint *out) -
- - RSApub*     rsapuballoc(void) -
- - void        rsapubfree(RSApub*) -
- - RSApriv*    rsaprivalloc(void) -
- - void        rsaprivfree(RSApriv*) -
- - RSApub*     rsaprivtopub(RSApriv*) -
- - RSApub*     X509toRSApub(uchar *cert, int ncert, char *name, int nname) - -
- - RSApriv*    asn1toRSApriv(uchar *priv, int npriv) -
- - void        asn1dump(uchar *der, int len) -
- - uchar*      decodepem(char *s, char *type, int *len) -
- - PEMChain* decodepemchain(char *s, char *type) -
- - void        X509dump(uchar *cert, int ncert) -
- - uchar*      X509gen(RSApriv *priv, char *subj, ulong valid[2], int - *certlen); -
- - uchar*      X509req(RSApriv *priv, char *subj, int *certlen); -
- - char* X509verify(uchar *cert, int ncert, RSApub *pk)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - RSA is a public key encryption algorithm. The owner of a key publishes - the public part of the key:
- -
- - -
- - struct RSApub
- {
- mpint*n;// modulus
- mpint*ek;// exp (encryption key)
- };
- -
- -
- This part can be used for encrypting data (with rsaencrypt) to - be sent to the owner. The owner decrypts (with rsadecrypt) using - his private key:
- -
- - -
- - struct RSApriv
- {
- RSApubpub;
- mpint*dk;// exp (decryption key)
-
- // precomputed crt values
- mpint*p;
- mpint*q;
- mpint*kp;// k mod p−1
- mpint*kq;// k mod q−1
- mpint*c2;// for converting residues to number
- };
- -
- - -
- -
- Keys are generated using rsagen. Rsagen takes both bit length - of the modulus, the bit length of the public key exponent, and - the number of repetitions of the Miller-Rabin primality test to - run. If the latter is 0, it does the default number of rounds. - Rsagen returns a newly allocated structure containing both public - and - private keys. Rsaprivtopub returns a newly allocated copy of the - public key corresponding to the private key. -
- - Rsafill takes as input the bare minimum pieces of an RSA private - key and computes the rest (kp, kq, and c2). It returns a new private - key. All the mpints in the key, even the ones that correspond - directly to rsafill’s input parameters, are freshly allocated, - -
- - The routines rsaalloc, rsafree, rsapuballoc, rsapubfree, rsaprivalloc, - and rsaprivfree are provided to aid in user provided key I/O. - -
- - Given a binary X.509 cert, the routine X509toRSApub returns the - public key and, if name is not nil, the CN part of the Distinguished - Name of the certificate’s Subject. (This is conventionally a userid - or a host DNS name.) No verification is done of the certificate - signature; the caller should check the fingerprint, - sha1(cert), against a table or check the certificate by other - means. X.509 certificates are often stored in PEM format; use - dec64 to convert to binary before computing the fingerprint or - calling X509toRSApub. For the special case of certificates signed - by a known trusted key (in a single step, without certificate - chains) - X509verify checks the signature on cert. It returns nil if successful, - else an error string. -
- - X509dump prints an X.509 certificate to standard ouptut. -
- - X509gen creates a self-signed X.509 certificate, given an RSA - keypair priv, a issuer/subject string subj, and the starting and - ending validity dates, valid. Length of the allocated binary certificate - is stored in certlen. The subject line is conventionally of the - form
- -
- - "C=US ST=NJ L=07922 O=Lucent OU='Bell Labs' CN=Eric"
- -
- using the quoting conventions of tokenize (see getfields(3)). - -
- - X509req creates an X.509 certification request. -
- - Asn1toRSApriv converts an ASN1 formatted RSA private key into - the corresponding RSApriv structure. -
- - Asn1dump prints an ASN1 object to standard output. -
- - Decodepem takes a zero terminated string, s, and decodes the PEM - (privacy-enhanced mail) formatted section for type within it. - If successful, it returns the decoded section and sets *len to - its decoded length. If not, it returns nil, and *len is undefined. - -
- - Decodepemchain is similar but expects a sequence of PEM-formatted - sections and returns a linked list of the decodings:
- -
- - typedef struct PEMChain PEMChain
- struct PEMChain
- {
- -
- - PEMChain *next;
- uchar *pem;
- int pemlen;
- -
- };
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mp(3), aes(3), blowfish(3), des(3), dsa(3), elgamal(3), rc4(3), - sechash(3), prime(3), rand(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/rune.html b/man/man3/rune.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2fed11f3..00000000 --- a/man/man3/rune.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,157 +0,0 @@ - -rune(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RUNE(3)RUNE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - runetochar, chartorune, runelen, runenlen, fullrune, utfecpy, - utflen, utfnlen, utfrune, utfrrune, utfutf – rune/UTF conversion
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int      runetochar(char *s, Rune *r) -
- - int      chartorune(Rune *r, char *s) -
- - int      runelen(long r) -
- - int      runenlen(Rune *r, int n) -
- - int      fullrune(char *s, int n) -
- - char*    utfecpy(char *s1, char *es1, char *s2) -
- - int      utflen(char *s) -
- - int      utfnlen(char *s, long n) -
- - char*    utfrune(char *s, long c) -
- - char*    utfrrune(char *s, long c) -
- - char*    utfutf(char *s1, char *s2)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines convert to and from a UTF byte stream and runes. - -
- - Runetochar copies one rune at r to at most UTFmax bytes starting - at s and returns the number of bytes copied. UTFmax, defined as - 3 in <libc.h>, is the maximum number of bytes required to represent - a rune. -
- - Chartorune copies at most UTFmax bytes starting at s to one rune - at r and returns the number of bytes copied. If the input is not - exactly in UTF format, chartorune will convert to 0x80 and return - 1. -
- - Runelen returns the number of bytes required to convert r into - UTF. -
- - Runenlen returns the number of bytes required to convert the n - runes pointed to by r into UTF. -
- - Fullrune returns 1 if the string s of length n is long enough - to be decoded by chartorune and 0 otherwise. This does not guarantee - that the string contains a legal UTF encoding. This routine is - used by programs that obtain input a byte at a time and need to - know when a full rune has arrived. -
- - The following routines are analogous to the corresponding string - routines with utf substituted for str and rune substituted for - chr. -
- - Utfecpy copies UTF sequences until a null sequence has been copied, - but writes no sequences beyond es1. If any sequences are copied, - s1 is terminated by a null sequence, and a pointer to that sequence - is returned. Otherwise, the original s1 is returned. -
- - Utflen returns the number of runes that are represented by the - UTF string s. -
- - Utfnlen returns the number of complete runes that are represented - by the first n bytes of UTF string s. If the last few bytes of - the string contain an incompletely coded rune, utfnlen will not - count them; in this way, it differs from utflen, which includes - every byte of the string. -
- - Utfrune (utfrrune) returns a pointer to the first (last) occurrence - of rune c in the UTF string s, or 0 if c does not occur in the - string. The NUL byte terminating a string is considered to be - part of the string s. -
- - Utfutf returns a pointer to the first occurrence of the UTF string - s2 as a UTF substring of s1, or 0 if there is none. If s2 is the - null string, utfutf returns s1.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/utf/rune.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/utf/utfrune.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - utf(7), tcs(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/runestrcat.html b/man/man3/runestrcat.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4774265c..00000000 --- a/man/man3/runestrcat.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ - -runestrcat(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RUNESTRCAT(3)RUNESTRCAT(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - runestrcat, runestrncat, runestrcmp, runestrncmp, runestrcpy, - runestrncpy, runestrecpy, runestrlen, runestrchr, runestrrchr, - runestrdup, runestrstr – rune string operations
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - Rune* runestrcat(Rune *s1, Rune *s2) -
- - Rune* runestrncat(Rune *s1, Rune *s2, long n) -
- - int     runestrcmp(Rune *s1, Rune *s2) -
- - int     runestrncmp(Rune *s1, Rune *s2, long n) -
- - Rune* runestrcpy(Rune *s1, Rune *s2) -
- - Rune* runestrncpy(Rune *s1, Rune *s2, long n) -
- - Rune* runestrecpy(Rune *s1, Rune *es1, Rune *s2) -
- - long    runestrlen(Rune *s) -
- - Rune* runestrchr(Rune *s, Rune c) -
- - Rune* runestrrchr(Rune *s, Rune c) -
- - Rune* runestrdup(Rune *s) -
- - Rune* runestrstr(Rune *s1, Rune *s2)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These functions are rune string analogues of the corresponding - functions in strcat(3).
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - memory(3), rune(3), strcat(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The outcome of overlapping moves varies among implementations.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/sechash.html b/man/man3/sechash.html deleted file mode 100644 index 2e055465..00000000 --- a/man/man3/sechash.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,195 +0,0 @@ - -sechash(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SECHASH(3)SECHASH(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - md4, md5, sha1, hmac_md5, hmac_sha1, md5pickle, md5unpickle, sha1pickle, - sha1unpickle – cryptographically secure hashes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <mp.h>
- #include <libsec.h> -
- - DigestState*     md4(uchar *data, ulong dlen, uchar *digest,                    DigestState - *state) -
- - DigestState*     md5(uchar *data, ulong dlen, uchar *digest,                    DigestState - *state) -
- - char*           md5pickle(MD5state *state) -
- - MD5state*        md5unpickle(char *p); -
- - DigestState*     sha1(uchar *data, ulong dlen, uchar *digest,                    DigestState - *state) -
- - char*           sha1pickle(MD5state *state) -
- - MD5state*        sha1unpickle(char *p); -
- - DigestState*     hmac_md5(uchar *data, ulong dlen,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *key, ulong klen,
- uchar *digest, DigestState *state) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- DigestState*     hmac_sha1(uchar *data, ulong dlen,
- -
- - -
- - uchar *key, ulong klen,
- uchar *digest, DigestState *state)
- -
- -
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - These functions implement the cryptographic hash functions MD4, - MD5, and SHA1. The output of the hash is called a digest. A hash - is secure if, given the hashed data and the digest, it is difficult - to predict the change to the digest resulting from some change - to the data without rehashing the whole data. Therefore, if - a secret is part of the hashed data, the digest can be used as - an integrity check of the data by anyone possessing the secret. - -
- - The routines md4, md5, sha1, hmac_md5, and hmac_sha1 differ only - in the length of the resulting digest and in the security of the - hash. Usage for each is the same. The first call to the routine - should have nil as the state parameter. This call returns a state - which can be used to chain subsequent calls. The last call - should have digest non-nil. Digest must point to a buffer of at - least the size of the digest produced. This last call will free - the state and copy the result into digest. For example, to hash - a single buffer using md5:
- -
- - uchar digest[MD5dlen];
- md5(data, len, digest, nil);
- -
- - -
- To chain a number of buffers together, bounded on each end by - some secret:
- -
- - char buf[256];
- uchar digest[MD5dlen];
- DigestState *s;
- s = md5("my password", 11, nil, nil);
- while((n = read(fd, buf, 256)) > 0)
- -
- - md5(buf, n, nil, s);
- -
- md5("drowssap ym", 11, digest, s);
- -
- - -
- The constants MD4dlen, MD5dlen, and SHA1dlen define the lengths - of the digests. -
- - Hmac_md5 and hmac_sha1 are used slightly differently. These hash - algorithms are keyed and require a key to be specified on every - call. The digest lengths for these hashes are MD5dlen and SHA1dlen - respectively. -
- - The functions md5pickle and sha1pickle marshal the state of a - digest for transmission. Md5unpickle and sha1unpickle unmarshal - a pickled digest. All four routines return a pointer to a newly - malloc(3)’d object.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libsec
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - aes(3), blowfish(3), des(3), elgamal(3), rc4(3), rsa(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/seek.html b/man/man3/seek.html deleted file mode 100644 index a2c19651..00000000 --- a/man/man3/seek.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ - -seek(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SEEK(3)SEEK(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - seek – change file offset
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - vlong seek(int fd, vlong n, int type)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Seek sets the offset for the file associated with fd as follows:
- -
- - If type is 0, the offset is set to n bytes.
- If type is 1, the pointer is set to its current location plus - n.
- If type is 2, the pointer is set to the size of the file plus - n. -
- - -
- The new file offset value is returned. -
- - Seeking in a directory is not allowed. Seeking in a pipe is a - no-op.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/seek.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), open(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Sets errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, seek is a - preprocessor macro defined as p9seek; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/sendfd.html b/man/man3/sendfd.html deleted file mode 100644 index 37007603..00000000 --- a/man/man3/sendfd.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,85 +0,0 @@ - -sendfd(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SENDFD(3)SENDFD(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sendfd, recvfd – pass file descriptors along Unix domain sockets
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h> -
- - #include <libc.h> -
- - int    sendfd(int socket, int fd) -
- - int    recvfd(int socket)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Recvfd and sendfd can be used to pass an open file descriptor - over a Unix domain socket from one process to another. Since pipe(3) - is implemented with socketpair(2) instead of pipe(2), socket can - be a file descriptor obtained from pipe(3). -
- - Sendfd sends the file descriptor fd along the socket to a process - calling recvfd on the other end. -
- - It is assumed that the two sides have coordinated and agreed to - transfer a file descriptor already, so that the sendfd is met - with a recvfd instead of an ordinary read. -
- - The file descriptor number may change on its way between processes, - but the kernel structure it represents will not.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/sendfd.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - socketpair(2), sendmsg in send(2)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/setjmp.html b/man/man3/setjmp.html deleted file mode 100644 index b22431fd..00000000 --- a/man/man3/setjmp.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,110 +0,0 @@ - -setjmp(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SETJMP(3)SETJMP(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - setjmp, longjmp, notejmp – non-local goto
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int    setjmp(jmp_buf env) -
- - void longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val) -
- - void notejmp(void *uregs, jmp_buf env, int val)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines are useful for dealing with errors and interrupts - encountered in a low-level subroutine of a program. -
- - Setjmp saves its stack environment in env for later use by longjmp. - It returns value 0. -
- - Longjmp restores the environment saved by the last call of setjmp. - It then causes execution to continue as if the call of setjmp - had just returned with value val. The invoker of setjmp must not - itself have returned in the interim. All accessible data have - values as of the time longjmp was called. -
- - Notejmp is the same as longjmp except that it is to be called - from within a note handler (see notify(3)). The uregs argument - should be the first argument passed to the note handler. -
- - Setjmp and longjmp can also be used to switch stacks.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/jmp.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - notify(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - -
- - Notejmp cannot recover from an address trap or bus error (page - fault) on the 680x0 architectures. -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, setjmp, longjmp, - notejmp, and jmp_buf are preprocessor macros defined as p9setjmp, - p9longjmp, p9notejmp, and p9jmp_buf; see intro(3). -
- - P9setjmp is implemented as a preprocessor macro that calls sigsetjmp - (see Unix’s setjmp(3)).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/sleep.html b/man/man3/sleep.html deleted file mode 100644 index 6614f33a..00000000 --- a/man/man3/sleep.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,95 +0,0 @@ - -sleep(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SLEEP(3)SLEEP(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sleep, alarm – delay, ask for delayed note
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int sleep(long millisecs) -
- - long alarm(unsigned long millisecs)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Sleep suspends the current process for the number of milliseconds - specified by the argument. The actual suspension time may be a - little more or less than the requested time. If millisecs is 0, - the process gives up the CPU if another process is waiting to - run, returning immediately if not. Sleep returns –1 if interrupted, - 0 otherwise. -
- - Alarm causes an alarm note (see notify(3)) to be sent to the invoking - process after the number of milliseconds given by the argument. - Successive calls to alarm reset the alarm clock. A zero argument - clears the alarm. The return value is the amount of time previously - remaining in the alarm clock. - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/sleep.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - These functions set errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, sleep and - alarm are preprocessor macros defined as p9sleep and p9alarm; - see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/stat.html b/man/man3/stat.html deleted file mode 100644 index fb79a647..00000000 --- a/man/man3/stat.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,244 +0,0 @@ - -stat(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
STAT(3)STAT(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - stat, fstat, wstat, fwstat, dirstat, dirfstat, dirwstat, dirfwstat, - nulldir – get and put file status
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - int stat(char *name, uchar *edir, int nedir) -
- - int fstat(int fd, uchar *edir, int nedir) -
- - int wstat(char *name, uchar *edir, int nedir) -
- - int fwstat(int fd, uchar *edir, int nedir) -
- - Dir* dirstat(char *name) -
- - Dir* dirfstat(int fd) -
- - int dirwstat(char *name, Dir *dir) -
- - int dirfwstat(int fd, Dir *dir) -
- - void nulldir(Dir *d)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Given a file’s name, or an open file descriptor fd, these routines - retrieve or modify file status information. Stat, fstat, wstat, - and fwstat are the system calls; they deal with machine-independent - directory entries. Their format is defined by stat(9p). Stat and - fstat retrieve information about name or fd into edir, a buffer - of length nedir, defined in <libc.h>. Wstat and fwstat write information - back, thus changing file attributes according to the contents - of edir. The data returned from the kernel includes its leading - 16-bit length field as described in intro(9p). For symmetry, this - field must also be present when passing data to the - kernel in a call to wstat and fwstat, but its value is ignored. - -
- - Dirstat, dirfstat, dirwstat, and dirfwstat are similar to their - counterparts, except that they operate on Dir structures:
- -
- - typedef
- struct Dir {
- -
- - /* system−modified data */
- uint    type;      /* server type */
- uint    dev;       /* server subtype */
- /* file data */
- Qid     qid;       /* unique id from server */
- ulong mode;      /* permissions */
- ulong atime;     /* last read time */
- ulong mtime;     /* last write time */
- vlong length;    /* file length: see <u.h> */
- char    *name;     /* last element of path */
- char    *uid;      /* owner name */
- char    *gid;      /* group name */
- char    *muid;     /* last modifier name */
- -
- } Dir;
- -
- - -
- The returned structure is allocated by malloc(3); freeing it also - frees the associated strings. -
- - This structure and the Qid structure are defined in <libc.h>. If - the file resides on permanent storage and is not a directory, - the length returned by stat is the number of bytes in the file. - For directories, the length returned is zero. For files that are - streams (e.g., pipes and network connections), the length is the - number of bytes that can be read without blocking. -
- - Each file is the responsibility of some server: it could be a - file server, a kernel device, or a user process. Type identifies - the server type, and dev says which of a group of servers of the - same type is the one responsible for this file. Qid is a structure - containing path and vers fields: path is guaranteed to be - unique among all path names currently on the file server, and - vers changes each time the file is modified. The path is a long - long (64 bits, vlong) and the vers is an unsigned long (32 bits, - ulong). Thus, if two files have the same type, dev, and qid they - are the same file. -
- - The bits in mode are defined by -
- - -
- - 0x80000000     directory
- 0x40000000     append only
- 0x20000000     exclusive use (locked)
- -
- - 0400     read permission by owner
- 0200     write permission by owner
- 0100     execute permission (search on directory) by owner
- 0070     read, write, execute (search) by group
- 0007     read, write, execute (search) by others
- -
- - -
- -
- There are constants defined in <libc.h> for these bits: DMDIR, DMAPPEND, - and DMEXCL for the first three; and DMREAD, DMWRITE, and DMEXEC - for the read, write, and execute bits for others. -
- - The two time fields are measured in seconds since the epoch (Jan - 1 00:00 1970 GMT). Mtime is the time of the last change of content. - Similarly, atime is set whenever the contents are accessed; also, - it is set whenever mtime is set. -
- - Uid and gid are the names of the owner and group of the file; - muid is the name of the user that last modified the file (setting - mtime). Groups are also users, but each server is free to associate - a list of users with any user name g, and that list is the set - of users in the group g. When an initial attachment is made to - a - server, the user string in the process group is communicated to - the server. Thus, the server knows, for any given file access, - whether the accessing process is the owner of, or in the group - of, the file. This selects which sets of three bits in mode is - used to check permissions. -
- - Only some of the fields may be changed with the wstat calls. The - name can be changed by anyone with write permission in the parent - directory. The mode and mtime can be changed by the owner or the - group leader of the file’s current group. The gid can be changed: - by the owner if also a member of the new - group; or by the group leader of the file’s current group if also - leader of the new group (see intro(9p) for more information about - permissions, users, and groups). The length can be changed by - anyone with write permission, provided the operation is implemented - by the server. (See intro(9p) for permission, user, - and group information). -
- - Special values in the fields of the Dir passed to wstat indicate - that the field is not intended to be changed by the call. The - values are the maximum unsigned integer of appropriate size for - integral values (usually ~0, but beware of conversions and size - mismatches when comparing values) and the empty or nil string - for string values. The routine nulldir initializes all the elements - of d to these “don’t care” values. Thus one may change the mode, - for example, by using nulldir to initialize a Dir, then setting - the mode, and then doing wstat; it is not necessary to use stat - to retrieve the initial values first. - -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/dirstat.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), fcall(3), dirread(3), stat(9p)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - The dir functions return a pointer to the data for a successful - call, or nil on error. The others return the number of bytes copied - on success, or –1 on error. All set errstr. -
- - If the buffer for stat or fstat is too short for the returned - data, the return value will be BIT16SZ (see fcall(3)) and the - two bytes returned will contain the initial count field of the - returned data; retrying with nedir equal to that value plus BIT16SZ - (for the count itself) should succeed.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/strcat.html b/man/man3/strcat.html deleted file mode 100644 index 542ebd25..00000000 --- a/man/man3/strcat.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,203 +0,0 @@ - -strcat(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
STRCAT(3)STRCAT(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - strcat, strncat, strcmp, strncmp, cistrcmp, cistrncmp, strcpy, - strncpy, strecpy, strlen, strchr, strrchr, strpbrk, strspn, strcspn, - strtok, strdup, strstr, cistrstr – string operations
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - char* strcat(char *s1, char *s2) -
- - char* strncat(char *s1, char *s2, long n) -
- - int     strcmp(char *s1, char *s2) -
- - int     strncmp(char *s1, char *s2, long n) -
- - int     cistrcmp(char *s1, char *s2) -
- - int     cistrncmp(char *s1, char *s2, long n) -
- - char* strcpy(char *s1, char *s2) -
- - char* strecpy(char *s1, char *es1, char *s2) -
- - char* strncpy(char *s1, char *s2, long n) -
- - long    strlen(char *s) -
- - char* strchr(char *s, char c) -
- - char* strrchr(char *s, char c) -
- - char* strpbrk(char *s1, char *s2) -
- - long    strspn(char *s1, char *s2) -
- - long    strcspn(char *s1, char *s2) -
- - char* strtok(char *s1, char *s2) -
- - char* strdup(char *s) -
- - char* strstr(char *s1, char *s2) -
- - char* cistrstr(char *s1, char *s2)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The arguments s1, s2 and s point to null-terminated strings. The - functions strcat, strncat, strcpy, strecpy, and strncpy all alter - s1. Strcat and strcpy do not check for overflow of the array pointed - to by s1. -
- - Strcat appends a copy of string s2 to the end of string s1. Strncat - appends at most n bytes. Each returns a pointer to the null-terminated - result. -
- - Strcmp compares its arguments and returns an integer less than, - equal to, or greater than 0, according as s1 is lexicographically - less than, equal to, or greater than s2. Strncmp makes the same - comparison but examines at most n bytes. Cistrcmp and cistrncmp - ignore ASCII case distinctions when comparing strings. - The comparisons are made with unsigned bytes. -
- - Strcpy copies string s2 to s1, stopping after the null byte has - been copied. Strncpy copies exactly n bytes, truncating s2 or - adding null bytes to s1 if necessary. The result will not be null-terminated - if the length of s2 is n or more. Each function returns s1. -
- - Strecpy copies bytes until a null byte has been copied, but writes - no bytes beyond es1. If any bytes are copied, s1 is terminated - by a null byte, and a pointer to that byte is returned. Otherwise, - the original s1 is returned. -
- - Strlen returns the number of bytes in s, not including the terminating - null byte. -
- - Strchr (strrchr) returns a pointer to the first (last) occurrence - of byte c in string s, or 0 if c does not occur in the string. - The null byte terminating a string is considered to be part of - the string. -
- - Strpbrk returns a pointer to the first occurrence in string s1 - of any byte from string s2, 0 if no byte from s2 exists in s1. - -
- - Strspn (strcspn) returns the length of the initial segment of - string s1 which consists entirely of bytes from (not from) string - s2. -
- - Strtok considers the string s1 to consist of a sequence of zero - or more text tokens separated by spans of one or more bytes from - the separator string s2. The first call, with pointer s1 specified, - returns a pointer to the first byte of the first token, and will - have written a null byte into s1 immediately following the returned - token. The function keeps track of its position in the string - between separate calls; subsequent calls, signified by s1 being - 0, will work through the string s1 immediately following that - token. The separator string s2 may be different from call to call. - When no token remains in s1, 0 is returned. -
- - Strdup returns a pointer to a distinct copy of the null-terminated - string s in space obtained from malloc(3) or 0 if no space can - be obtained. -
- - Strstr returns a pointer to the first occurrence of s2 as a substring - of s1, or 0 if there is none. If s2 is the null string, strstr - returns s1. Cistrstr operates analogously, but ignores ASCII case - differences when comparing strings.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - memory(3), rune(3), runestrcat(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - These routines know nothing about UTF. Use the routines in rune(3) - as appropriate. Note, however, that the definition of UTF guarantees - that strcmp compares UTF strings correctly. -
- - The outcome of overlapping moves varies among implementations.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/string.html b/man/man3/string.html deleted file mode 100644 index 55a1673b..00000000 --- a/man/man3/string.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,244 +0,0 @@ - -string(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
STRING(3)STRING(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - s_alloc, s_append, s_array, s_copy, s_error, s_free, s_incref, - s_memappend, s_nappend, s_new, s_newalloc, s_parse, s_reset, s_restart, - s_terminate, s_tolower, s_putc, s_unique, s_grow, s_read, s_read_line, - s_getline, s_allocinstack, s_freeinstack, s_rdinstack – extensible - strings
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <String.h> -
- - String*     s_new(void)
- void        s_free(String *s)
- String*     s_newalloc(int n)
- String*     s_array(char *p, int n)
- String*     s_grow(String *s, int n) -
- - void        s_putc(String *s, int c)
- void        s_terminate(String *s)
- String*     s_reset(String *s)
- String*     s_restart(String *s)
- String*     s_append(String *s, char *p)
- String*     s_nappend(String *s, char *p, int n)
- String*     s_memappend(String *s, char *p, int n)
- String*     s_copy(char *p)
- String*     s_parse(String *s1, String *s2)
- -
- - void        s_tolower(String *s) -
- - String*     s_incref(String *s)
- String*     s_unique(String *s) -
- - Sinstack* s_allocinstack(char *file)
- void        s_freeinstack(Sinstack *stack)
- char*       s_rdinstack(Sinstack *stack, String *s) -
- - #include <bio.h> -
- - int         s_read(Biobuf *b, String *s, int n)
- char*       s_read_line(Biobuf *b, String *s)
- char*       s_getline(Biobuf *b, String *s)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - These routines manipulate extensible strings. The basic type is - String, which points to an array of characters. The string maintains - pointers to the beginning and end of the allocated array. In addition - a finger pointer keeps track of where parsing will start (for - s_parse) or new characters will be added (for s_putc, - s_append, and s_nappend). The structure, and a few useful macros - are:
- typedef struct String {
- -
- - -
- - Lock;
- char*base;/* base of String */
- char*end;/* end of allocated space+1 */
- char*ptr;/* ptr into String */
- ...
- -
- -
- } String;
- #define s_to_c(s) ((s)−>base)
- #define s_len(s) ((s)−>ptr−(s)−>base)
- #define s_clone(s) s_copy((s)−>base)
- -
- - S_to_c is used when code needs a reference to the character array. - Using s−>base directly is frowned upon since it exposes too much - of the implementation.
-

Allocation and freeing
- -
- - A string must be allocated before it can be used. One normally - does this using s_new, giving the string an initial allocation - of 128 bytes. If you know that the string will need to grow much - longer, you can use s_newalloc instead, specifying the number - of bytes in the initial allocation. -
- - S_free causes both the string and its character array to be freed. - -
- - S_grow grows a string’s allocation by a fixed amount. It is useful - if you are reading directly into a string’s character array but - should be avoided if possible. -
- - S_array is used to create a constant array, that is, one whose - contents won’t change. It points directly to the character array - given as an argument. Tread lightly when using this call.
-

Filling the string
- After its initial allocation, the string points to the beginning - of an allocated array of characters starting with NUL. -
- - S_putc writes a character into the string at the pointer and advances - the pointer to point after it. -
- - S_terminate writes a NUL at the pointer but doesn’t advance it. - -
- - S_restart resets the pointer to the begining of the string but - doesn’t change the contents. -
- - S_reset is equivalent to s_restart followed by s_terminate. -
- - S_append and s_nappend copy characters into the string at the - pointer and advance the pointer. They also write a NUL at the - pointer without advancing the pointer beyond it. Both routines - stop copying on encountering a NUL. S_memappend is like s_nappend - but doesn’t stop at a NUL. -
- - If you know the initial character array to be copied into a string, - you can allocate a string and copy in the bytes using s_copy. - This is the equivalent of a s_new followed by an s_append. -
- - S_parse copies the next white space terminated token from s1 to - the end of s2. White space is defined as space, tab, and newline. - Both single and double quoted strings are treated as a single - token. The bounding quotes are not copied. There is no escape - mechanism. -
- - S_tolower converts all ASCII characters in the string to lower - case.
-

Multithreading
- -
- - S_incref is used by multithreaded programs to avoid having the - string memory released until the last user of the string performs - an s_free. S_unique returns a unique copy of the string: if the - reference count it 1 it returns the string, otherwise it returns - an s_clone of the string.
-

Bio interaction
- -
- - S_read reads the requested number of characters through a Biobuf - into a string. The string is grown as necessary. An eof or error - terminates the read. The number of bytes read is returned. The - string is null terminated. -
- - S_read_line reads up to and including the next newline and returns - a pointer to the beginning of the bytes read. An eof or error - terminates the read. The string is null terminated. -
- - S_getline reads up to the next newline, appends the input to s, - and returns a pointer to the beginning of the bytes read. Leading - spaces and tabs and the trailing newline are all discarded. S_getline - discards blank lines and lines beginning with #. S_getline ignores - newlines escaped by immediately-preceding - backslashes. -
- - S_allocinstack allocates an input stack with the single file file - open for reading. S_freeinstack frees an input stack. S_rdinstack - reads a line from an input stack. It follows the same rules as - s_getline except that when it encounters a line of the form #include - newfile, s_getline pushes newfile onto the input stack, - postponing further reading of the current file until newfile has - been read. The input stack has a maximum depth of 32 nested include - files.
- -

-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libString
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - bio(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/stringsize.html b/man/man3/stringsize.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1e8c4e91..00000000 --- a/man/man3/stringsize.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ - -stringsize(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
STRINGSIZE(3)STRINGSIZE(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - stringsize, stringwidth, stringnwidth, runestringsize, runestringwidth, - runestringnwidth – graphical size of strings
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h>
- -
- - Point stringsize(Font *f, char *s)
- -
- - int     stringwidth(Font *f, char *s)
- -
- - int     stringnwidth(Font *f, char *s, int n)
- -
- - Point runestringsize(Font *f, Rune *s)
- -
- - int     runestringwidth(Font *f, Rune *s)
- -
- - int     runestringnwidth(Font *f, Rune *s, int n)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines compute the geometrical extent of character strings - when drawn on the display. The most straightforward, stringsize, - returns a Point representing the vector from upper left to lower - right of the NUL-terminated string s drawn in font f. Stringwidth - returns just the x component. - Stringnwidth returns the width of the first n characters of s. - -
- - The routines beginning with rune are analogous, but accept an - array of runes rather than UTF-encoded bytes.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /lib/font/bit    directory of fonts
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - addpt(3), cachechars(3), subfont(3), draw(3), draw(3), image(7), - font(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - Because strings are loaded dynamically, these routines may generate - I/O to the server and produce calls to the graphics error function.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/subfont.html b/man/man3/subfont.html deleted file mode 100644 index 16dc216d..00000000 --- a/man/man3/subfont.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,260 +0,0 @@ - -subfont(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SUBFONT(3)SUBFONT(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - allocsubfont, freesubfont, installsubfont, lookupsubfont, uninstallsubfont, - subfontname, readsubfont, readsubfonti, writesubfont, stringsubfont, - strsubfontwidth, mkfont – subfont manipulation
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h> -
- - Subfont* allocsubfont(char *name, int n, int height, int ascent,
- -
- - -
- - Fontchar *info, Image *i) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- void       freesubfont(Subfont *f) -
- - void       installsubfont(char *name, Subfont *f) -
- - Subfont* lookupsubfont(Subfont *f) -
- - void       uninstallsubfont(Subfont *f) -
- - Subfont* readsubfont(Display *d, char *name, int fd, int dolock) - -
- - Subfont* readsubfonti(Display *d, char *name, int fd, Image *im,
- -
- - -
- - int dolock) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- int        writesubfont(int fd, Subfont *f) -
- - Point      stringsubfont(Image *dst, Point p, Image *src,
- -
- - -
- - Subfont *f, char *str) -
- -
- -
- -
- - -
- - - -
- -
- Point      strsubfontwidth(Subfont *f, char *s) -
- - Font*      mkfont(Subfont *f, Rune min)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Subfonts are the components of fonts that hold the character images. - A font comprises an array of subfonts; see cachechars(3). A new - Subfont is allocated and initialized with allocsubfont. See cachechars(3) - for the meaning of n, height, ascent, and info, and the arrangement - of characters in image i. The name is - used to identify the subfont in the subfont cache; see the descriptions - lookupsubfont and installsubfont (q.v.). The appropriate fields - of the returned Subfont structure are set to the passed arguments, - and the image is registered as a subfont with the graphics device - draw(3). Allocsubfont returns 0 on failure. -
- - Freesubfont frees a subfont and all its associated structure including - the associated image. Since freesbufont calls free on f−>info, - if f−>info was not allocated by malloc(3) it should be zeroed before - calling subffree. -
- - A number of subfonts are kept in external files. The convention - for naming subfont files is:
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/font/name/class.size.depth -
- - -
- where size is approximately the height in pixels of the lower - case letters (without ascenders or descenders). If there is only - one version of the subfont, the .depth extension is elided. Class - describes the range of runes encoded in the subfont: ascii, latin1, - greek, etc. -
- - Subfonts are cached within the program, so a subfont shared between - fonts will be loaded only once. Installsubfont stores subfont - f under the given name, typically the file name from which it - was read. Uninstallsubfont removes the subfont from the cache. - Finally, lookupsubfont searches for a subfont with the given - name in the cache and returns it, or nil if no such subfont exists. - -
- - Subfontname is used to locate subfonts given their names within - the fonts. The default version constructs a name given the cfname, - its name within the font, fname, the name of the font, and the - maximum depth suitable for this subfont. This interface allows - a partially specified name within a font to be resolved at - run-time to the name of a file holding a suitable subfont. Although - it is principally a routine internal to the library, subfontname - may be substituted by the application to provide a less file-oriented - subfont naming scheme. -
- - The format of a subfont file is described in font(7). Briefly, - it contains a image with all the characters in it, followed by - a subfont header, followed by character information. Readsubfont - reads a subfont from the file descriptor fd. The name is used - to identify the font in the cache. The dolock argument specifies - whether - the routine should synchronize use of the Display with other processes; - for single-threaded applications it may always be zero. Readsubfonti - does the same for a subfont whose associated image is already - in memory; it is passed as the argument im. In other words, readsubfonti - reads only the header and character - information from the file descriptor. -
- - Writesubfont writes on fd the part of a subfont file that comes - after the image. It should be preceded by a call to writeimage - (see allocimage(3)). -
- - Stringsubfont is analogous to string (see draw(3)) for subfonts. - Rather than use the underlying font caching primitives, it calls - draw for each character. It is intended for stand-alone environments - such as operating system kernels. Strsubfontwidth returns the - width of the string s in as it would appear if drawn with - stringsubfont in Subfont f. -
- - Mkfont takes as argument a Subfont s and returns a pointer to - a Font that maps the character images in s into the Runes min - to min+s−>n−1.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/font   bitmap font file tree
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), allocimage(3), draw(3), cachechars(3), image(7), - font(7)
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - All of the functions use the graphics error function (see graphics(3)).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/sysfatal.html b/man/man3/sysfatal.html deleted file mode 100644 index 15ceb0ca..00000000 --- a/man/man3/sysfatal.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ - -sysfatal(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
SYSFATAL(3)SYSFATAL(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - sysfatal – system error messages
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - void sysfatal(char *fmt, ...)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Sysfatal prints to standard error the name of the running program, - a colon and a space, the message described by the print(3) format - string fmt and subsequent arguments, and a newline. It then calls - exits(3) with the formatted message as argument. The program’s - name is the value of argv0, which will be set if the - program uses the arg(3) interface to process its arguments. If - argv0 is null, it is ignored and the following colon and space - are suppressed.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/sysfatal.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), errstr(3), the %r format in print(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/thread.html b/man/man3/thread.html deleted file mode 100644 index b14d97e6..00000000 --- a/man/man3/thread.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,383 +0,0 @@ - -thread(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
THREAD(3)THREAD(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - alt, chancreate, chanfree, chaninit, chanprint, chansetname, mainstacksize, - proccreate, procdata, recv, recvp, recvul, send, sendp, sendul, - nbrecv, nbrecvp, nbrecvul, nbsend, nbsendp, nbsendul, threadcreate, - threaddata, threadexec, threadexecl, threadexits, threadexitsall, - threadgetgrp, threadgetname, threadint, - threadintgrp, threadkill, threadkillgrp, threadmain, threadnotify, - threadid, threadpid, threadsetgrp, threadsetname, threadsetstate, - threadspawn, threadwaitchan, yield – thread and proc management
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <thread.h>
- #define    CHANEND      0
- #define    CHANSND      1
- #define    CHANRCV      2
- #define    CHANNOP      3
- #define    CHANNOBLK    4
- typedef struct Alt Alt;
- struct Alt {
- -
- - Channel *c;
- void      *v;
- int       op;
- Channel **tag;
- int       entryno;
- char      *name;
- -
- };
- -
- - void       threadmain(int argc, char *argv[])
- int        mainstacksize
- int        proccreate(void (*fn)(void*), void *arg, uint stacksize)
- int        threadcreate(void (*fn)(void*), void *arg, uint stacksize)
- void       threadexits(char *status)
- void       threadexitsall(char *status)
- void       yield(void)
- int        threadid(void)
- int        threadgrp(void)
- int        threadsetgrp(int group)
- int        threadpid(int id)
- int        threadint(int id)
- int        threadintgrp(int group)
- int        threadkill(int id)
- int        threadkillgrp(int group)
- void       threadsetname(char *name)
- char*      threadgetname(void)
- void**     threaddata(void)
- void**     procdata(void)
- int        chaninit(Channel *c, int elsize, int nel)
- Channel* chancreate(int elsize, int nel)
- void       chanfree(Channel *c)
- int        alt(Alt *alts)
- int        recv(Channel *c, void *v)
- void*      recvp(Channel *c)
- ulong      recvul(Channel *c)
- int        nbrecv(Channel *c, void *v)
- void*      nbrecvp(Channel *c)
- ulong      nbrecvul(Channel *c)
- int        send(Channel *c, void *v)
- int        sendp(Channel *c, void *v)
- int        sendul(Channel *c, ulong v)
- int        nbsend(Channel *c, void *v)
- int        nbsendp(Channel *c, void *v)
- int        nbsendul(Channel *c, ulong v)
- int        chanprint(Channel *c, char *fmt, ...)
- int        threadspawn(int fd[3], char *file, char *args[])
- int        threadexecl(Channel *cpid, int fd[3], char *file, ...)
- int        threadexec(Channel *cpid, int fd[3], char *file, char *args[])
- Channel* threadwaitchan(void)
- int        threadnotify(int (*f)(void*, char*), int in)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - The thread library provides parallel programming support similar - to that of the languages Alef and Newsqueak. Threads and procs - occupy a shared address space, communicating and synchronizing - through channels and shared variables. -
- - A proc is a Plan 9 process that contains one or more cooperatively - scheduled threads. Programs using threads must replace main by - threadmain. The thread library provides a main function that sets - up a proc with a single thread executing threadmain on a stack - of size mainstacksize (default eight kilobytes). To set - mainstacksize, declare a global variable initialized to the desired - value (e.g., int mainstacksize = 1024). -
- - Threadcreate creates a new thread in the calling proc, returning - a unique integer identifying the thread; the thread executes fn(arg) - on a stack of size stacksize. Thread stacks are allocated in shared - memory, making it valid to pass pointers to stack variables between - threads and procs. Proccreate creates a new proc, - and inside that proc creates a single thread as threadcreate would, - returning the id of the created thread. Be aware that the calling - thread may continue execution before the newly created proc and - thread are scheduled. Because of this, arg should not point to - data on the stack of a function that could return before the - new process is scheduled. -
- - Threadexits terminates the calling thread. If the thread is the - last in its proc, threadexits also terminates the proc, using - status as the exit status. Threadexitsall terminates all procs - in the program, using status as the exit status. -
- - When the last thread in threadmain’s proc exits, the program will - appear to its parent to have exited. The remaining procs will - still run together, but as a background program. -
- - The threads in a proc are coroutines, scheduled nonpreemptively - in a round-robin fashion. A thread must explicitly relinquish - control of the processor before another thread in the same proc - is run. Calls that do this are yield, proccreate, threadexec, - threadexecl, threadexits, threadspawn, alt, send, and recv (and - the - calls related to send and recv--see their descriptions further on). - Procs are scheduled by the operating system. Therefore, threads - in different procs can preempt one another in arbitrary ways and - should synchronize their actions using qlocks (see lock(3)) or - channel communication. System calls such as read(3) - block the entire proc; all threads in a proc block until the system - call finishes. -
- - As mentioned above, each thread has a unique integer thread id. - Thread ids are not reused; they are unique across the life of - the program. Threadid returns the id for the current thread. Each - thread also has a thread group id. The initial thread has a group - id of zero. Each new thread inherits the group id of the - thread that created it. Threadgrp returns the group id for the - current thread; threadsetgrp sets it. Threadpid returns the pid - of the Plan 9 process containing the thread identified by id, - or –1 if no such thread is found. -
- - Threadint interrupts a thread that is blocked in a channel operation - or system call. Threadintgrp interrupts all threads with the given - group id. Threadkill marks a thread to die when it next relinquishes - the processor (via one of the calls listed above). If the thread - is blocked in a channel operation or system call, it is - also interrupted. Threadkillgrp kills all threads with the given - group id. Note that threadkill and threadkillgrp will not terminate - a thread that never relinquishes the processor. -
- - Primarily for debugging, threads can have string names associated - with them. Threadgetname returns the current thread’s name; threadsetname - sets it. The pointer returned by threadgetname is only valid until - the next call to threadsetname. -
- - Also for debugging, threads have a string state associated with - them. Threadsetstate sets the state string. There is no threadgetstate; - since the thread scheduler resets the state to Running every time - it runs the thread, it is only useful for debuggers to inspect - the state. -
- - Threaddata returns a pointer to a per-thread pointer that may - be modified by threaded programs for per-thread storage. Similarly, - procdata returns a pointer to a per-proc pointer. -
- - Threadexecl and threadexec are threaded analogues of exec and - execl (see exec(3)); on success, they replace the calling thread - and invoke the external program, never returning. (Unlike on Plan - 9, the calling thread need not be the only thread in its proc--the - other threads will continue executing.) On error, they return - –1. If cpid is not null, the pid of the invoked program will be - sent along cpid (using sendul) once the program has been started, - or –1 will be sent if an error occurs. Threadexec and threadexecl - will not access their arguments after sending a result along cpid. - Thus, programs that malloc the argv passed to threadexec - can safely free it once they have received the cpid response. - -
- - Threadexecl and threadexec will duplicate (see dup(3)) the three - file descriptors in fd onto standard input, output, and error - for the external program and then close them in the calling thread. - Beware of code that sets
- -
- - fd[0] = 0;
- fd[1] = 1;
- fd[2] = 2;
- -
- - -
- to use the current standard files. The correct code is
- -
- - fd[0] = dup(0, −1);
- fd[1] = dup(1, −1);
- fd[2] = dup(2, −1);
- -
- - -
- Threadspawn is like threadexec but does not replace the current - thread. It returns the pid of the invoked program on success, - or –1 on error. -
- - Threadwaitchan returns a channel of pointers to Waitmsg structures - (see wait(3)). When an exec’ed process exits, a pointer to a Waitmsg - is sent to this channel. These Waitmsg structures have been allocated - with malloc(3) and should be freed after use. -
- - A Channel is a buffered or unbuffered queue for fixed-size messages. - Procs and threads send messages into the channel and recv messages - from the channel. If the channel is unbuffered, a send operation - blocks until the corresponding recv operation occurs and vice - versa. Chaninit initializes a Channel for - messages of size elsize and with a buffer holding nel messages. - If nel is zero, the channel is unbuffered. Chancreate allocates - a new channel and initializes it. Chanfree frees a channel that - is no longer used. Chanfree can be called by either sender or - receiver after the last item has been sent or received. Freeing - the - channel will be delayed if there is a thread blocked on it until - that thread unblocks (but chanfree returns immediately). -
- - The name element in the Channel structure is a description intended - for use in debugging. Chansetname sets the name. -
- - Send sends the element pointed at by v to the channel c. If v - is null, zeros are sent. Recv receives an element from c and stores - it in v. If v is null, the received value is discarded. Send and - recv return 1 on success, –1 if interrupted. Nbsend and nbrecv - behave similarly, but return 0 rather than blocking. -
- - Sendp, nbsendp, sendul, and nbsendul send a pointer or an unsigned - long; the channel must have been initialized with the appropriate - elsize. Recvp, nbrecvp, recvul, and nbrecvul receive a pointer - or an unsigned long; they return zero when a zero is received, - when interrupted, or (for nbrecvp and nbrecvul) when the - operation would have blocked. To distinguish between these three - cases, use recv or nbrecv. -
- - Alt can be used to recv from or send to one of a number of channels, - as directed by an array of Alt structures, each of which describes - a potential send or receive operation. In an Alt structure, c - is the channel; v the value pointer (which may be null); and op - the operation: CHANSND for a send operation, - CHANRECV for a recv operation; CHANNOP for no operation (useful - when alt is called with a varying set of operations). The array - of Alt structures is terminated by an entry with op CHANEND or - CHANNOBLK. If at least one Alt structure can proceed, one of them - is chosen at random to be executed. Alt returns the - index of the chosen structure. If no operations can proceed and - the list is terminated with CHANNOBLK, alt returns the index of - the terminating CHANNOBLK structure. Otherwise, alt blocks until - one of the operations can proceed, eventually returning the index - of the structure executes. Alt returns –1 when - interrupted. The tag and entryno fields in the Alt structure are - used internally by alt and need not be initialized. They are not - used between alt calls. -
- - Chanprint formats its arguments in the manner of print(3) and - sends the result to the channel c. The string delivered by chanprint - is allocated with malloc(3) and should be freed upon receipt. - -
- - Thread library functions do not return on failure; if errors occur, - the entire program is aborted. -
- - Threaded programs should use threadnotify in place of atnotify - (see notify(3)). -
- - It is safe to use sysfatal(3) in threaded programs. Sysfatal will - print the error string and call threadexitsall. -
- - It is not safe to call rfork in a threaded program, except to - call rfork(RFNOTEG) from the main proc before any other procs - have been created. To create new processes, use proccreate.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/acid/thread contains useful acid(1) functions - for debugging threaded programs. -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libthread/test contains some example programs.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libthread
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(3), ioproc(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To avoid name conflicts, alt, nbrecv, nbrecvp, nbrecvul, nbsend, - nbsendp, nbsendul, recv, recvp, recvul, send, sendp, and sendul - are defined as macros that expand to chanalt, channbrecv, and - so on. Yield is defined as a macro that expands to threadyield. - See intro(3). -
- - The implementation of threadnotify may not be correct.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/time.html b/man/man3/time.html deleted file mode 100644 index de0de468..00000000 --- a/man/man3/time.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ - -time(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
TIME(3)TIME(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - time, nsec – time in seconds and nanoseconds since epoch
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - long time(long *tp)
- -
- - vlong nsec(void)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Both time and nsec return the time since the epoch 00:00:00 GMT, - Jan. 1, 1970. The return value of the former is in seconds and - the latter in nanoseconds. For time, if tp is not zero then *tp - is also set to the answer.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/time.c
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - These functions set errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, time and nsec - are preprocessor macros defined as p9time and p9nsec; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/udpread.html b/man/man3/udpread.html deleted file mode 100644 index e8f0d37b..00000000 --- a/man/man3/udpread.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,105 +0,0 @@ - -udpread(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
UDPREAD(3)UDPREAD(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - udpread, udpwrite – read and write UDP packets
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h> -
- - #include <libc.h> -
- - #include <ip.h> -
- - typedef struct Udphdr Udphdr;
- struct Udphdr
- {
- -
- - uchar    raddr[IPaddrlen];/* remote address and port */
- uchar    laddr[IPaddrlen];/* local address and port */
- uchar    rport[2];
- uchar    lport[2];
- -
- };
- -
- - long      udpread(int fd, Udphdr *hdr, void *data, long n)
- -
- - long udpwrite(int fd, Udphdr *hdr, void *data, long n)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Udpread and udpwrite read and write UDP packets from the UDP network - connection established on file descriptor fd. -
- - Udpread reads at most n bytes of packet body into data , stores - the header in hdr, and returns the number of bytes stored in data. - -
- - Udpwrite writes the n bytes stored in data in a UDP packet with - header hdr. -
- - Note that the Udphdr frames the addresses as local and remote - instead of source and destination. Thus the hdr filled in for - a packet read by udpread can be used unchanged in udpwrite to - send a response back to the sender of the original packet.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/udp.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ip(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/wait.html b/man/man3/wait.html deleted file mode 100644 index 84322bc2..00000000 --- a/man/man3/wait.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,170 +0,0 @@ - -wait(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
WAIT(3)WAIT(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - await, awaitnohang, awaitfor, wait, waitnohang, waitfor, waitpid - – wait for a process to exit
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h> -
- - Waitmsg*    wait(void) -
- - Waitmsg*    waitnohang(void) -
- - Waitmsg*    waitfor(int pid) -
- - int         waitpid(void) -
- - int         await(char *s, int n) -
- - int         awaitnohang(char *s, int n) -
- - int         awaitfor(int pid, char *s, int n)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Wait causes a process to wait for any child process (see fork(2) - and rfork(3)) to exit. It returns a Waitmsg holding information - about the exited child. A Waitmsg has this structure:
- -
- - typedef
- struct Waitmsg
- {
- -
- - int pid;               /* of loved one */
- ulong time[3];          /* of loved one & descendants */
- char *msg;
- -
- } Waitmsg;
- -
- - -
- Pid is the child’s process id. The time array contains the time - the child and its descendants spent in user code, the time spent - in system calls, and the child’s elapsed real time, all in units - of milliseconds. Msg contains the message that the child specified - in exits(3). For a normal exit, msg[0] is zero, otherwise msg - is the exit string prefixed by the process name, a blank, the - process id, and a colon. -
- - If there are no more children to wait for, wait returns immediately, - with return value nil. -
- - The Waitmsg structure is allocated by malloc(3) and should be - freed after use. For programs that only need the pid of the exiting - program, waitpid returns just the pid and discards the rest of - the information. -
- - Waitnohang is like wait but does not block if there are no more - children to wait for. Instead it returns immediately and sets - errstr. -
- - Waitfor is like wait but waits for a particular pid. -
- - The underlying calls are await, awaitnohang, and awaitfor, which - fill in the n-byte buffer s with a textual representation of the - pid, times, and exit string. There is no terminal NUL. The return - value is the length, in bytes, of the data. -
- - The filled-in buffer may be parsed (after appending a NUL) using - tokenize (see getfields(3)); the resulting fields are, in order, - pid, the three times, and the exit string, which will be '' for - normal exit. If the representation is longer than n bytes, it - is truncated but, if possible, properly formatted. The information - that - does not fit in the buffer is discarded, so a subsequent call - to await will return the information about the next exiting child, - not the remainder of the truncated message. In other words, each - call to await returns the information about one child, blocking - if necessary if no child has exited. If the calling process has - no - living children, await returns −1.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/wait.c -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/lib9/await.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rfork(3), exits(3),
- -
-

DIAGNOSTICS
- -
- - These routines set errstr.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To avoid name conflicts with the underlying system, wait, waitpid, - and waitfor are preprocessor macros defined as p9wait, p9waitpid, - and p9waitfor; see intro(3).
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/wctl.html b/man/man3/wctl.html deleted file mode 100644 index 071217e2..00000000 --- a/man/man3/wctl.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,78 +0,0 @@ - -wctl(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
WCTL(3)WCTL(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - drawresizewindow, drawsetlabel, drawtopwindow – window management
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <draw.h> -
- - void drawresizewindow(Rectangle r) -
- - int    drawsetlabel(Display *d, char *name) -
- - void drawtopwindow(void)
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These routines interact with a window manager to set the properties - of the window running the current program. They substitute for - interacting directly with the Plan 9 rio’s /dev/wctl. -
- - Drawresizewindow requests that the program’s window be resized - to have the width and height of the rectangle r. Only the width - and height are important; the offset is ignored. -
- - Drawsetlabel requests that the program’s window title be set to - name. -
- - Drawtopwindow requests that the program’s window be moved above - all other windows and given the input focus.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw/x11−init.c
- /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw/x11−wsys.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man3/window.html b/man/man3/window.html deleted file mode 100644 index 83355bdd..00000000 --- a/man/man3/window.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,241 +0,0 @@ - -window(3) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
WINDOW(3)WINDOW(3) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - Screen, allocscreen, publicscreen, freescreen, allocwindow, bottomwindow, - bottomnwindows, topwindow, topnwindows, originwindow – window management
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <u.h>
- #include <libc.h>
- #include <draw.h>
- -
- - typedef
- struct Screen
- {
- -
- - Display     *display; /* display holding data */
- int         id;         /* id of system−held Screen */
- Image       *image;     /* unused; for reference only */
- Image       *fill;      /* color to paint behind windows */
- -
- } Screen;
- -
- - Screen* allocscreen(Image *image, Image *fill, int public) -
- - Screen* publicscreen(Display *d, int id, ulong chan) -
- - int       freescreen(Screen *s) -
- - Image*    allocwindow(Screen *s, Rectangle r, int ref, int val) -
- - void      bottomwindow(Image *w) -
- - void      bottomnwindows(Image **wp, int nw) -
- - void      topwindow(Image *w) -
- - void      topnwindows(Image **wp, int nw) -
- - int       originwindow(Image *w, Point log, Point scr) -
- - enum
- {
- -
- - -
- - /* refresh methods */
- Refbackup= 0,
- Refnone= 1,
- Refmesg= 2
- -
- -
- };
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Windows are represented as Images and may be treated as regular - images for all drawing operations. The routines discussed here - permit the creation, deletion, and shuffling of windows, facilities - that do not apply to regular images. -
- - To create windows, it is first necessary to allocate a Screen - data structure to gather them together. A Screen turns an arbitrary - image into something that may have windows upon it. It is created - by allocscreen, which takes an image upon which to place the windows - (typically display−>image), a fill image - to paint the background behind all the windows on the image, and - a flag specifying whether the result should be publicly visible. - If it is public, an arbitrary other program connected to the same - display may acquire a pointer to the same screen by calling publicscreen - with the Display pointer and the id of the - published Screen, as well as the expected channel descriptor, - as a safety check. It will usually require some out-of-band coordination - for programs to share a screen profitably. Freescreen releases - a Screen, although it may not actually disappear from view until - all the windows upon it have also been - deallocated. -
- - Unlike allocwindow, allocscreen does not initialize the appearance - of the Screen. -
- - Windows are created by allocwindow, which takes a pointer to the - Screen upon which to create the window, a rectangle r defining - its geometry, an integer pixel value val to color the window initially, - and a refresh method ref. The refresh methods are Refbackup, which - provides backing store and is the - method used by rio(1) for its clients; Refnone, which provides - no refresh and is designed for temporary uses such as sweeping - a display rectangle, for windows that are completely covered by - other windows, and for windows that are already protected by backing - store; and Refmesg, which causes messages to be - delivered to the owner of the window when it needs to be repainted. - Refmesg is not fully implemented. -
- - The result of allocwindow is an Image pointer that may be treated - like any other image. In particular, it is freed by calling freeimage - (see allocimage(3)). The following functions, however, apply only - to windows, not regular images. -
- - Bottomwindow pushes window w to the bottom of the stack of windows - on its Screen, perhaps obscuring it. Topwindow pulls window w - to the top, making it fully visible on its Screen. (This Screen - may itself be within a window that is not fully visible; topwindow - will not affect the stacking of this parent - window.) Bottomnwindows and Topnwindows are analogous, but push - or pull a group of nw windows listed in the array wp. The order - within wp is unaffected. -
- - Each window is created as an Image whose Rectangle r corresponds - to the rectangle given to allocwindow when it was created. Thus, - a newly created window w resides on its Screen−>image at w−>r and - has internal coordinates w−>r. Both these may be changed by a call - to originwindow. The two - Point arguments to originwindow define the upper left corner of - the logical coordinate system (log) and screen position (scr). - Their usage is shown in the Examples section. -
- - Rio(1) creates its client windows with backing store, Refbackup. - The graphics initialization routine, initdraw (see graphics(3)), - builds a Screen upon this, and then allocates upon that another - window indented to protect the border. That window is created - Refnone, since the backing store created by rio - protects its contents. That window is the one known in the library - by the global name screen (a historic but confusing choice).
- -
-

EXAMPLES
- -
- - To move a window to the upper left corner of the display,
- -
- - -
- - originwindow(w, w−>r.min, Pt(0, 0));
- -
- -
- To leave a window where it is on the screen but change its internal - coordinate system so (0, 0) is the upper left corner of the window,
- -
- - -
- - originwindow(w, Pt(0, 0), w−>r.min);
- -
- -
- After this is done, w−>r is translated to the origin and there - will be no way to discover the actual screen position of the window - unless it is recorded separately.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/libdraw
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), draw(3), cachechars(3), draw(3)
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - The refresh method Refmesg should be finished.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man4/9pserve.html b/man/man4/9pserve.html deleted file mode 100644 index c9f2c3b7..00000000 --- a/man/man4/9pserve.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,79 +0,0 @@ - -9pserve(4) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
9PSERVE(4)9PSERVE(4) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - 9pserve – announce and multiplex 9P service
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - 9pserve [ −v ] addr
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - On Plan 9, when a user-level file server mounts itself into a - name space or posts itself in /srv, the Plan 9 kernel multiplexes - the potentially many processes accessing the server into a single - 9P conversation. The user-level server need not concern itself - with how many processes are accessing it or with cleaning up - after a process when it exits unexpectedly. On Unix, 9pserve takes - the place of the Plan 9 kernel, multiplexing clients onto a single - server conversation and cleaning up after clients when they hang - up unexpectedly. -
- - 9pserve announces a 9P service on addr and multiplexes any 9P - clients connecting to addr into a single conversation with a 9P - server on 9pserve’s standard input and output. When a client hangs - up, 9pserve flushes any outstanding 9P transactions and clunks - any outstanding fids belonging to the client. -
- - 9pserve is typically not invoked directly; use post9pservice(3) - instead.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - intro(4), intro(9p)
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/9pserve.c
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man4/acme.html b/man/man4/acme.html deleted file mode 100644 index ac310c13..00000000 --- a/man/man4/acme.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,268 +0,0 @@ - -acme(4) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ACME(4)ACME(4) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - acme – control files for text windows
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - acme [ −f varfont ] [ −F fixfont ] [ file ... ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The text window system acme(1) serves a variety of files for reading, - writing, and controlling windows. Some of them are virtual versions - of system files for dealing with the virtual console; others control - operations of acme itself. When a command is run under acme, a - directory holding these files is posted as the 9P - service acme (using 9pserve(4)). -
- - Some of these files supply virtual versions of services available - from the underlying environment, in particular the character terminal - files in Plan 9’s cons(3). (Unlike in Plan 9’s rio(1), each command - under acme sees the same set of files; there is not a distinct - /dev/cons for each window.) Other files are unique to - acme.
- acmeis a subdirectory used by win (see acme(1)) as a mount point - for the acme files associated with the window in which win is - running. It has no specific function under acme itself.
- consis the standard and diagnostic output file for all commands - run under acme. (Input for commands is redirected to /dev/null.) - Text written to cons appears in a window labeled dir/+Errors, - where dir is the directory in which the command was run. The window - is created if necessary, but not until text is - -
- - actually written.
- -
- consctl
- -
- - Is an empty unwritable file present only for compatibility; there - is no way to turn off ‘echo’, for example, under acme.
- -
- index
- -
- - holds a sequence of lines of text, one per window. Each line has - 5 decimal numbers, each formatted in 11 characters plus a blank--the - window ID; number of characters (runes) in the tag; number of - characters in the body; a 1 if the window is a directory, 0 otherwise; - and a 1 if the window is modified, 0 - otherwise--followed by the tag up to a newline if present. Thus - at character position 5x12 starts the name of the window. If a - file has multiple zeroxed windows open, only the most recently - used will appear in the index file.
- -
- label
- -
- - is an empty file, writable without effect, present only for compatibility - with rio.
- -
- new   A directory analogous to the numbered directories (q.v.). Accessing - any file in new creates a new window. Thus to cause text to appear - in a new window, write it to /dev/new/body. For more control, - open /dev/new/ctl and use the interface described below. -
- - -
- - Each acme window has associated a directory numbered by its ID. - Window IDs are chosen sequentially and may be discovered by the - ID command, by reading the ctl file, or indirectly through the - index file. The files in the numbered directories are as follows.
- addrmay be written with any textual address (line number, regular - expression, etc.), in the format understood by button 3 but without - the initial colon, including compound addresses, to set the address - for text accessed through the data file. When read, it returns - the value of the address that would next be read or - -
- - written through the data file, in the format #m,#n where m and - n are character (not byte) offsets. If m and n are identical, - the format is just #m. Thus a regular expression may be evaluated - by writing it to addr and reading it back. The addr address has - no effect on the user’s selection of text. - -
- bodyholds contents of the window body. It may be read at any byte - offset. Text written to body is always appended; the file offset - is ignored.
- ctl   may be read to recover the five numbers as held in the index - file, described above, plus two more fields: the width of the - window in pixels and the name of the font used in the window. - Text messages may be written to ctl to affect the window. Each - message is terminated by a newline and multiple messages - -
- - may be sent in a single write.
- -
- - addr=dot     Set the addr address to that of the user’s selected text - in the window.
- clean        Mark the window clean as though it has just been written.
- dirty        Mark the window dirty, the opposite of clean.
- cleartag     Remove all text in the tag after the vertical bar.
- del          Equivalent to the Del interactive command.
- delete       Equivalent to the Delete interactive command.
- dot=addr     Set the user’s selected text in the window to the text - addressed by the addr address.
- dump commandSet the command string to recreate the window from - a dump file.
- dumpdir directory
- Set the directory in which to run the command to recreate the - window from a dump file.
- get          Equivalent to the Get interactive command with no arguments; - accepts no arguments.
- limit=addr   When the ctl file is first opened, regular expression - context searches in addr addresses examine the whole file; this - message restricts subsequent searches to the current addr address.
- mark         Cancel nomark, returning the window to the usual state wherein - each modification to the body must be undone individually.
- name name     Set the name of the window to name.
- nomark       Turn off automatic ‘marking’ of changes, so a set of related - changes may be undone in a single Undo interactive command.
- noscroll     Turn off automatic ‘scrolling’ of the window to show text - written to the body.
- put          Equivalent to the Put interactive command with no arguments; - accepts no arguments.
- scroll       Cancel a noscroll message, returning the window to the default - state wherein each write to the body file causes the window to - ‘scroll’ to display the new text.
- show         Guarantee at least some of the selected text is visible on - the display.
- -
- -
- datais used in conjunction with addr for random access to the - contents of the body. The file offset is ignored when writing - the data file; instead the location of the data to be read or - written is determined by the state of the addr file. Text, which - must contain only whole characters (no ‘partial runes’), written - to - -
- - data replaces the characters addressed by the addr file and sets - the address to the null string at the end of the written text. - A read from data returns as many whole characters as the read - count will permit starting at the beginning of the addr address - (the end of the address has no effect) and sets the - address to the null string at the end of the returned characters.
- -
- event
- -
- - When a window’s event file is open, changes to the window occur - as always but the actions are also reported as messages to the - reader of the file. Also, user actions with buttons 2 and 3 (other - than chorded Cut and Paste, which behave normally) have no immediate - effect on the window; it is expected that - the program reading the event file will interpret them. The messages - have a fixed format: a character indicating the origin or cause - of the action, a character indicating the type of the action, - four free-format blank-terminated decimal numbers, optional text, - and a newline. The first and second numbers are - the character addresses of the action, the third is a flag, and - the final is a count of the characters in the optional text, which - may itself contain newlines. The origin characters are E for writes - to the body or tag file, F for actions through the window’s other - files, K for the keyboard, and M for the mouse. The - type characters are D for text deleted from the body, d for text - deleted from the tag, I for text inserted to the body, i for text - inserted to the tag, L for a button 3 action in the body, l for - a button 3 action in the tag, X for a button 2 action in the body, - and x for a button 2 action in the tag. - If the relevant text has less than 256 characters, it is included - in the message; otherwise it is elided, the fourth number is 0, - and the program must read it from the data file if needed. No - text is sent on a D or d message.
- For D, d, I, and i the flag is always zero. For X and x, the flag - is a bitwise OR (reported decimally) of the following: 1 if the - text indicated is recognized as an acme built-in command; 2 if - the text indicated is a null string that has a non-null expansion; - if so, another complete message will follow describing the - expansion exactly as if it had been indicated explicitly (its - flag will always be 0); 8 if the command has an extra (chorded) - argument; if so, two more complete messages will follow reporting - the argument (with all numbers 0 except the character count) and - where it originated, in the form of a fully-qualified - button 3 style address.
- For L and l, the flag is the bitwise OR of the following: 1 if - acme can interpret the action without loading a new file; 2 if - a second (post-expansion) message follows, analogous to that with - X messages; 4 if the text is a file or window name (perhaps with - address) rather than plain literal text. - For messages with the 1 bit on in the flag, writing the message - back to the event file, but with the flag, count, and text omitted, - will cause the action to be applied to the file exactly as it - would have been if the event file had not been open.
- -
- tag   holds contents of the window tag. It may be read at any byte - offset. Text written to tag is always appended; the file offset - is ignored.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/acme
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - rio(1), acme(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man4/import.html b/man/man4/import.html deleted file mode 100644 index e0eca5cb..00000000 --- a/man/man4/import.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ - -import(4) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
IMPORT(4)IMPORT(4) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - import – import 9P resources from another system
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - import [ −df ] [ −n ns ] [ −p prog ] [ −s service ] system
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Import presents the 9P service service (default plumb) running - on system as a service on the local system, in the current name - space. -
- - The −n option sets the remote name space directory where import - should expect to find service. If it is not specified, import - uses name of the local system’s name space directory. (Since name - space directories are conventionally inside /tmp, the path have - different meanings on the two systems.) -
- - Import connects to system using ssh(1). It invokes import on the - remote system to carry out the remote side of the protocol. The - −p option specifies the path to import on the remote system, in - case it is not in the system search path. -
- - The −d option turns on debugging. The −f option keeps import from - forking itself into the background, also useful for debugging.
- -
-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - Suppose you run sam −r to the CPU server anna. Sam wants to talk - to a plumber on the local terminal, but the file names will refer - to files on anna. -
- - To fix this problem, create a new name space directory and start - a new plumber on anna:
- -
- - remotens=/tmp/ns.`whoami`.on.`hostname`
- ssh anna mkdir $remotens
- ssh anna NAMESPACE=$remotens plumber
- Now import that plumber to the local name space before starting - sam and 9term:
- NAMESPACE=/tmp/ns.anna
- mkdir $NAMESPACE
- import −n $remotens −s plumb anna
- sam &
- 9term ssh anna &
- -
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/import.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9pserve(4), intro(4)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man4/index.html b/man/man4/index.html deleted file mode 100644 index bef356e8..00000000 --- a/man/man4/index.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ - - -Manual Section 4 - Plan 9 from User Space - - - -
-
- -
-
-
- Manual Section 4 - Plan 9 from User Space -
-
-
intro(4)intro – introduction to file servers -
-
-
-
9pserve(4)9pserve – announce and multiplex 9P service -
-
-
-
acme(4)acme – control files for text windows -
-
-
-
import(4)import – import 9P resources from another system -
-
-
-
plumber(4)plumber – file system for interprocess messaging -
-
-
-
ramfs(4)ramfs – memory file system -
-
- -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
-		 -
- - diff --git a/man/man4/intro.html b/man/man4/intro.html deleted file mode 100644 index ec2409c0..00000000 --- a/man/man4/intro.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,92 +0,0 @@ - -intro(4) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
INTRO(4)INTRO(4) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - intro – introduction to file servers
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - A Plan 9 file server provides a file tree to processes. This section - of the manual describes servers that can be mounted in a name - space to give a file-like interface to interesting services. A - file server may be a provider of a conventional file system, with - files maintained on permanent storage, or it may also be a process - that synthesizes files in some manner. -
- - In Plan 9, the kernel mount device mnt(3) acts as a client to - the 9P servers mounted in the current name space, translating - system calls such as open(2) into 9P transactions such as open(9p). - The kernel also multiplexes the potentially many processes onto - a single 9P conversation with each server. Finally, the kernel - provides each process with its own private name space which it - can customize at will. Modern Unix systems do not provide these - niceties, so the Unix port of these Plan 9 file servers provides - them via other means. -
- - On Unix, 9P clients do not access servers via the traditional - file system call interface. Only the Unix name space can be accessed - that way. Instead, 9P clients use the 9pclient(3) library to connect - and interact directly with particular 9P servers. The 9p(1) command-line - client is useful for interactive use and in shell - scripts. -
- - To preserve the façade of a single 9P conversation with each server, - 9P servers invoke 9pserve(4), typically via post9pservice(3). - 9pserve announces a 9P service at a particular network address - and multiplexes the clients that connect to that address onto - a single 9P conversation with the server. -
- - Each ported program operates in a pseudo-name space that determines - which 9P servers it is using. The name space of a ported program - is represented by a directory containing Unix domain sockets, - one for each 9P server. The directory defaults to /tmp/ns.$USER.$DISPLAY, - meaning that all programs in an X - Windows login session share a single name space. Setting the $NAMESPACE - environment variable overrides this default. The namespace(1) - command prints the current name space directory. -
- - Occasionally it is useful to be able to connect the input or output - of a standard Unix program to a file served by a 9P server. The - new openfd(9p) 9P transaction, which depends on file descriptor - passing, provides a sufficient workaround in many cases. 9pserve’s - implementation of openfd (see also fsopenfd in - 9pclient(3)) returns the read or write end of a pipe; a helper - process transfers data between the other end of the pipe and the - 9P server. Note that since the data is being transferred via a - pipe, 9P read and write errors cannot be passed on to the Unix - program. The Unix program sees only end-of-file or a closed pipe. - -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man4/plumber.html b/man/man4/plumber.html deleted file mode 100644 index 83e5943f..00000000 --- a/man/man4/plumber.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,122 +0,0 @@ - -plumber(4) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PLUMBER(4)PLUMBER(4) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - plumber – file system for interprocess messaging
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - plumber [ −p plumbing ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The plumber is a user-level file server that receives, examines, - rewrites, and dispatches plumb(7) messages between programs. Its - behavior is programmed by a plumbing file (default $HOME/lib/plumbing) - in the format of plumb(7). -
- - Its services are posted via 9pserve(4) as plumb. and consist of - two pre-defined files, plumb/send and plumb/rules, and a set of - output ports for dispatching messages to applications. -
- - Programs use fswrite (see 9pclient(3)) to deliver messages to - the send file, and fsread to receive them from the corresponding - port. For example, sam(1)’s plumb menu item or the B command cause - a message to be sent to plumb/send; sam in turn reads from, by - convention, plumb/edit to receive - messages about files to open. -
- - A copy of each message is sent to each client that has the corresponding - port open. If none has it open, and the rule has a plumb client - or plumb start rule, that rule is applied. A plumb client rule - causes the specified command to be run and the message to be held - for delivery when the port is opened. A - plumb start rule runs the command but discards the message. If - neither start or client is specified and the port is not open, - the message is discarded and a write error is returned to the - sender. -
- - The set of output ports is determined dynamically by the specification - in the plumbing rules file: a port is created for each unique - destination of a plumb to rule. -
- - The set of rules currently active may be examined by reading the - file plumb/rules; appending to this file adds new rules to the - set, while creating it (opening it with OTRUNC) clears the rule - set. Thus the rule set may be edited dynamically with a traditional - text editor. However, ports are never deleted dynamically; - if a new set of rules does not include a port that was defined - in earlier rules, that port will still exist (although no new - messages will be delivered there).
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - $HOME/lib/plumbing   default rules file
- /usr/local/plan9/plumb
- -
- - -
- - directory to search for files in include statements
- -
- -
- plumb               mount name for plumber(4).
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/plumb
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - plumb(1), plumb(3), plumb(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man4/ramfs.html b/man/man4/ramfs.html deleted file mode 100644 index 7fb86f5a..00000000 --- a/man/man4/ramfs.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,81 +0,0 @@ - -ramfs(4) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
RAMFS(4)RAMFS(4) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ramfs – memory file system
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - ramfs [ −i ] [ −S service ]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Ramfs starts a 9P file server keeping all files in memory. Initially - the file tree is empty. -
- - By default ramfs posts its service as ramfs using 9pserve(4). - -
- - The −S flag specifies an alternate service name for ramfs to use. - -
- - The −i flag tells ramfs to use file descriptors 0 and 1 for its - communication channel rather than create a pipe. This makes it - possible to use ramfs as a file server on a remote machine: the - file descriptors 0 and 1 will be the network channel from ramfs - to the client machine. -
- - This program is useful mainly as an example of how to write a - user-level file server. It can also be used to provide high-performance - temporary files.
- -
-

SOURCE
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/src/cmd/ramfs.c
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9p(3), 9pserve(4)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man5/index.html b/man/man5/index.html deleted file mode 100644 index f6ea86f3..00000000 --- a/man/man5/index.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,28 +0,0 @@ - - -Manual Section 5 - Plan 9 from User Space - - - -
-
- -
-
-
- Manual Section 5 - Plan 9 from User Space -
-
-
-
- -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
-		 -
- - diff --git a/man/man7/INDEX b/man/man7/INDEX index f7c1bd2a..79302660 100644 --- a/man/man7/INDEX +++ b/man/man7/INDEX @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ ms ms.7 plot plot.7 plumb plumb.7 regexp regexp.7 +regexp9 regexp9.7 thumbprint thumbprint.7 ASCII utf.7 UTF utf.7 diff --git a/man/man7/color.html b/man/man7/color.html deleted file mode 100644 index 262e4633..00000000 --- a/man/man7/color.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,169 +0,0 @@ - -color(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
COLOR(7)COLOR(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - color – representation of pixels and colors
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - To address problems of consistency and portability among applications, - Plan 9 uses a fixed color map, called rgbv, on 8-bit-per-pixel - displays. Although this avoids problems caused by multiplexing - color maps between applications, it requires that the color map - chosen be suitable for most purposes and usable for - all. Other systems that use fixed color maps tend to sample the - color cube uniformly, which has advantages--mapping from a (red, - green, blue) triple to the color map and back again is easy--but - ignores an important property of the human visual system: eyes - are much more sensitive to small changes in intensity than - to changes in hue. Sampling the color cube uniformly gives a color - map with many different hues, but only a few shades of each. Continuous - tone images converted into such maps demonstrate conspicuous artifacts. - -
- - Rather than dice the color cube into subregions of size 6×6×6 (as - in Netscape Navigator) or 8×8×4 (as in previous releases of Plan - 9), picking 1 color in each, the rgbv color map uses a 4×4×4 subdivision, - with 4 shades in each subcube. The idea is to reduce the color - resolution by dicing the color cube into fewer - cells, and to use the extra space to increase the intensity resolution. - This results in 16 grey shades (4 grey subcubes with 4 samples - in each), 13 shades of each primary and secondary color (3 subcubes - with 4 samples plus black) and a reasonable selection of colors - covering the rest of the color cube. The advantage is - better representation of continuous tones. -
- - The following function computes the 256 3-byte entries in the - color map:
- -
- - void
- setmaprgbv(uchar cmap[256][3])
- {
- -
- - uchar *c;
- int r, g, b, v;
- int num, den;
- int i, j;
- for(r=0,i=0; r!=4; r++)
- for(v=0; v!=4; v++,i+=16)
- for(g=0,j=v−r; g!=4; g++)
- for(b=0; b!=4; b++,j++){
- c = cmap[i+(j&15)];
- den = r;
- if(g > den)
- den = g;
- if(b > den)
- den = b;
- if(den == 0) /* would divide check; pick grey shades */
- c[0] = c[1] = c[2] = 17*v;
- else{
- num = 17*(4*den+v);
- c[0] = r*num/den;
- c[1] = g*num/den;
- c[2] = b*num/den;
- }
- }
- -
- }
- -
- - -
- There are 4 nested loops to pick the (red,green,blue) coordinates - of the subcube, and the value (intensity) within the subcube, - indexed by r, g, b, and v, whence the name rgbv. The peculiar - order in which the color map is indexed is designed to distribute - the grey shades uniformly through the map--the i’th grey - shade, 0<=i<=15 has index ix17, with black going to 0 and white to - 255. Therefore, when a call to draw converts a 1, 2 or 4 bit-per-pixel - picture to 8 bits per pixel (which it does by replicating the - pixels’ bits), the converted pixel values are the appropriate - grey shades. -
- - The rgbv map is not gamma-corrected, for two reasons. First, photographic - film and television are both normally under-corrected, the former - by an accident of physics and the latter by NTSC’s design. Second, - we require extra color resolution at low intensities because of - the non-linear response and adaptation of - the human visual system. Properly gamma-corrected displays with - adequate low-intensity resolution pack the high-intensity parts - of the color cube with colors whose differences are almost imperceptible. - Either reason suggests concentrating the available intensities - at the low end of the range. -
- - On ‘true-color’ displays with separate values for the red, green, - and blue components of a pixel, the values are chosen so 0 represents - no intensity (black) and the maximum value (255 for an 8-bit-per-color - display) represents full intensity (e.g., full red). Common display - depths are 24 bits per pixel, with 8 bits per - color in order red, green, blue, and 16 bits per pixel, with 5 - bits of red, 6 bits of green, and 5 bits of blue. -
- - Colors may also be created with an opacity factor called alpha, - which is scaled so 0 represents fully transparent and 255 represents - opaque color. The alpha is premultiplied into the other channels, - as described in the paper by Porter and Duff cited in draw(3). - The function setalpha (see allocimage(3)) aids the - initialization of color values with non-trivial alpha. -
- - The packing of pixels into bytes and words is odd. For compatibility - with VGA frame buffers, the bits within a pixel byte are in big-endian - order (leftmost pixel is most significant bits in byte), while - bytes within a pixel are packed in little-endian order. Pixels - are stored in contiguous bytes. This results in unintuitive - pixel formats. For example, for the RGB24 format, the byte ordering - is blue, green, red. -
- - To maintain a constant external representation, the draw(3) interface - as well as the various graphics libraries represent colors by - 32-bit numbers, as described in color(3).
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - color(3), graphics(3), draw(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/face.html b/man/man7/face.html deleted file mode 100644 index db220326..00000000 --- a/man/man7/face.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,127 +0,0 @@ - -face(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FACE(7)FACE(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - face – face files
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The directories /usr/$user/lib/face and /lib/face contain a hierarchy - of images of people. In those directories are subdirectories named - by the sizes of the corresponding image files: 48x48x1 (48 by - 48 pixels, one bit per pixel); 48x48x2 (48 by 48 pixels, two (grey) - bits per pixel); 48x48x4 (48 by 48 - pixels, four (grey) bits per pixel); 48x48x8 (48 by 48 pixels, - eight (color-mapped) bits per pixel); 512x512x8 (512 by 512 pixels, - eight (color-mapped) bits per pixel); 512x512x24 (512 by 512 pixels, - twenty-four bits per pixel (3 times 8 bits per color)). The large - files serve no special purpose; they are stored as - images (see image(7)). The small files are the ‘icons’ displayed - by faces and seemail (see Plan 9’s faces(1)); for depths less - than 4, their format is special. -
- - One- and two-bit deep icons are stored as text, one line of the - file to one scan line of display. Each line is divided into 8-bit, - 16-bit, or 32-bit big-endian words, stored as a list of comma-separated - hexadecimal C constants, such as:
- -
- - 0x9200, 0x1bb0, 0x003e,
- -
- - -
- This odd format is historical and the programs that read it are - somewhat forgiving about blanks and the need for commas. -
- - The files lib/face/*/.dict hold a correspondence between users - at machines and face files. The format is
- -
- - machine/user directory/file.ver
- -
- - -
- The machine is the domain name of the machine sending the message, - and user the name of the user sending it. The directory is a further - subdirectory of (say) /lib/face/48x48x1, named by a single letter - corresponding to the first character of the user names. The file - is the name of the file, typically but not - always the user name, and ver is a number to distinguish different - images, for example to distinguish the image for Bill Gates from - the image for Bill Joy, both of which might otherwise be called - b/bill. For example, Bill Gates might be represented by the line
- -
- - microsoft.com/bill b/bill.1
- -
- - -
- If multiple entries exist for a user in the various .dict files, - faces chooses the highest pixel size less than or equal to that - of the display on which it is running. -
- - Finally, or rather firstly, the file /lib/face/.machinelist contains - a list of machine/domain pairs, one per line, to map any of a - set of machines to a single domain name to be looked up in the - .dict files. The machine name may be a regular expression, so - for example the entry
- -
- - .*research\.bell−labs\.com      astro
- -
- - -
- maps any of the machines in Bell Labs Research into the shorthand - name astro, which then appears as a domain name in the .dict files.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - mail(1), tweak(1), image(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/font.html b/man/man7/font.html deleted file mode 100644 index a6bd6a91..00000000 --- a/man/man7/font.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,101 +0,0 @@ - -font(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FONT(7)FONT(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - font, subfont – external format for fonts and subfonts
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <draw.h>
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Fonts and subfonts are described in cachechars(3). -
- - External fonts are described by a plain text file that can be - read using openfont. The format of the file is a header followed - by any number of subfont range specifications. The header contains - two numbers: the height and the ascent, both in pixels. The height - is the inter-line spacing and the ascent is the distance from - the top of the line to the baseline. These numbers are chosen - to display consistently all the subfonts of the font. A subfont - range specification contains two or three numbers and a file name. - The numbers are the inclusive range of characters covered by the - subfont, with an optional starting position within the subfont, - and the file name names an external file suitable for readsubfont - (see graphics(3)). The minimum number of a covered range is mapped - to the specified starting position (default zero) of the corresponding - subfont. If the subfont file name does not begin with a slash, - it is taken relative to the directory containing the - font file. Each field must be followed by some white space. Each - numeric field may be C-format decimal, octal, or hexadecimal. - -
- - External subfonts are represented in a more rigid format that - can be read and written using readsubfont and writesubfont (see - subfont(3)). The format for subfont files is: an image containing - character glyphs, followed by a subfont header, followed by character - information. The image has the format for external image - files described in image(7). The subfont header has 3 decimal - strings: n, height, and ascent. Each number is right-justified - and blank padded in 11 characters, followed by a blank. The character - info consists of n+1 6-byte entries, each giving the Fontchar - x (2 bytes, low order byte first), top, bottom, - left, and width. The x field of the last Fontchar is used to calculate - the image width of the previous character; the other fields in - the last Fontchar are irrelevant. -
- - Note that the convention of using the character with value zero - (NUL) to represent characters of zero width (see draw(3)) means - that fonts should have, as their zeroth character, one with non-zero - width.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/font/*   font directories
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - graphics(3), draw(3), cachechars(3), subfont(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/image.html b/man/man7/image.html deleted file mode 100644 index f81c023b..00000000 --- a/man/man7/image.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,175 +0,0 @@ - -image(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
IMAGE(7)IMAGE(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - image – external format for images
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <draw.h>
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Images are described in graphics(3), and the definition of pixel - values is in color(7). Fonts and images are stored in external - files in machine-independent formats. -
- - Image files are read and written using readimage and writeimage - (see allocimage(3)),or readmemimage and writememimage (see memdraw(3)). - An uncompressed image file starts with 5 strings: chan, r.min.x, - r.min.y, r.max.x, and r.max.y. Each is right-justified and blank - padded in 11 - characters, followed by a blank. The chan value is a textual string - describing the pixel format (see strtochan in graphics(3) and - the discussion of channel descriptors below), and the rectangle - coordinates are decimal strings. The rest of the file contains - the r.max.y−r.min.y rows of pixel data. A row consists - of the byte containing pixel r.min.x and all the bytes up to and - including the byte containing pixel r.max.x-1. For images with - depth d less than eight, a pixel with x-coordinate = x will appear - as d contiguous bits in a byte, with the pixel’s high order bit - starting at the byte’s bit number w×(x mod (8/w)), where - bits within a byte are numbered 0 to 7 from the high order to - the low order bit. Rows contain integral number of bytes, so there - may be some unused pixels at either end of a row. If d is greater - than 8, the definition of images requires that it will a multiple - of 8, so pixel values take up an integral number of bytes. -
- - The loadimage and unloadimage functions described in allocimage(3) - also deal with rows in this format, stored in user memory. -
- - The channel format string is a sequence of two-character channel - descriptions, each comprising a letter (r for red, g for green, - b for blue, a for alpha, m for color-mapped, k for greyscale, - and x for “don’t care”) followed by a number of bits per pixel. - The sum of the channel bits per pixel is the depth of the image, - which must be either a divisor or a multiple of eight. It is an - error to have more than one of any channel but x. An image must - have either a greyscale channel; a color mapped channel; or red, - green, and blue channels. If the alpha channel is present, it - must be at least as deep as any other channel. -
- - The channel string defines the format of the pixels in the file, - and should not be confused with ordering of bytes in the file. - In particular 'r8g8b8' pixels have byte ordering blue, green, - and red within the file. See color(7) for more details of the - pixel format. -
- - A venerable yet deprecated format replaces the channel string - with a decimal ldepth, which is the base two logarithm of the - number of bits per pixel in the image. In this case, ldepths 0, - 1, 2, and 3 correspond to channel descriptors k1, k2, k4, and - m8, respectively. -
- - Compressed image files start with a line of text containing the - word compressed, followed by a header as described above, followed - by the image data. The data, when uncompressed, is laid out in - the usual form. -
- - The data is represented by a string of compression blocks, each - encoding a number of rows of the image’s pixel data. Compression - blocks are at most 6024 bytes long, so that they fit comfortably - in a single 9P message. Since a compression block must encode - a whole number of rows, there is a limit (about 5825 - bytes) to the width of images that may be encoded. Most wide images - are in subfonts, which, at 1 bit per pixel (the usual case for - fonts), can be 46600 pixels wide. -
- - A compression block begins with two decimal strings of twelve - bytes each. The first number is one more than the y coordinate - of the last row in the block. The second is the number of bytes - of compressed data in the block, not including the two decimal - strings. This number must not be larger than 6000. -
- - Pixels are encoded using a version of Lempel & Ziv’s sliding window - scheme LZ77, best described in J A Storer & T G Szymanski ‘Data - Compression via Textual Substitution’, JACM 29#4, pp. 928-951. - -
- - The compression block is a string of variable-length code words - encoding substrings of the pixel data. A code word either gives - the substring directly or indicates that it is a copy of data - occurring previously in the pixel stream. -
- - In a code word whose first byte has the high-order bit set, the - rest of the byte indicates the length of a substring encoded directly. - Values from 0 to 127 encode lengths from 1 to 128 bytes. Subsequent - bytes are the literal pixel data. -
- - If the high-order bit is zero, the next 5 bits encode the length - of a substring copied from previous pixels. Values from 0 to 31 - encode lengths from 3 to 34 bytes. The bottom two bits of the - first byte and the 8 bits of the next byte encode an offset backward - from the current position in the pixel data at which the copy - is to be found. Values from 0 to 1023 encode offsets from 1 to - 1024. The encoding may be ‘prescient’, with the length larger - than the offset, which works just fine: the new data is identical - to the data at the given offset, even though the two strings overlap. - -
- - Some small images, in particular 48×48 face files as used by seemail - (see Plan 9’s faces(1) and face(7)) and 16×16 cursors, can be stored - textually, suitable for inclusion in C source. Each line of text - represents one scan line as a comma-separated sequence of hexadecimal - bytes, shorts, or words in C format. For - cursors, each line defines a pair of bytes. (It takes two images - to define a cursor; each must be stored separately to be processed - by programs such as tweak(1).) Face files of one bit per pixel - are stored as a sequence of shorts, those of larger pixel sizes - as a sequence of longs. Software that reads these files must - deduce the image size from the input; there is no header. These - formats reflect history rather than design.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - jpg(1), tweak(1), graphics(3), draw(3), allocimage(3), color(7), - face(7), font(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/index.html b/man/man7/index.html deleted file mode 100644 index 5f61f6e5..00000000 --- a/man/man7/index.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,76 +0,0 @@ - - -Manual Section 7 - Plan 9 from User Space - - - -
-
- -
-
-
- Manual Section 7 - Plan 9 from User Space -
-
-
-
-
-
color(7)color – representation of pixels and colors -
-
-
-
face(7)face – face files -
-
-
-
font(7)font, subfont – external format for fonts and subfonts -
-
-
-
image(7)image – external format for images -
-
-
-
man(7)man – macros to typeset manual -
-
-
-
map(7)map – digitized map formats -
-
-
-
ms(7)ms – macros for formatting manuscripts -
-
-
-
plot(7)plot – graphics interface -
-
-
-
plumb(7)plumb – format of plumb messages and rules -
-
-
-
regexp(7)regexp – Plan 9 regular expression notation -
-
-
-
thumbprint(7)thumbprint – public key thumbprints -
-
-
-
utf(7)UTF, Unicode, ASCII, rune – character set and format -
-
- -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
-		 -
- - diff --git a/man/man7/man.html b/man/man7/man.html deleted file mode 100644 index 4087e795..00000000 --- a/man/man7/man.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,292 +0,0 @@ - -man(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MAN(7)MAN(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - man – macros to typeset manual
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - nroff −man file ... -
- - troff −man file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - These macros are used to format pages of this manual. -
- - Except in .LR and .RL requests, any text argument denoted t in - the request summary may be zero to six words. Quotes " ... " may - be used to include blanks in a ‘word’. If t is empty, the special - treatment is applied to the next text input line (the next line - that doesn’t begin with dot). In this way, for example, .I - may be used to italicize a line of more than 6 words, or .SM followed - by .B to make small letters in ‘bold’ font. -
- - A prevailing indent distance is remembered between successive - indented paragraphs, and is reset to default value upon reaching - a non-indented paragraph. Default units for indents i are ens. - -
- - The fonts are
- R     roman, the main font, preferred for diagnostics
- I     italic, preferred for parameters, short names of commands, names - of manual pages, and naked function names
- B     ‘bold’, actually the constant width font, preferred for examples, - file names, declarations, keywords, names of struct members, and - literals (numbers are rarely literals)
- L     also the constant width font. In troff L=B; in nroff arguments - of the macros .L, .LR, and .RL are printed in quotes; preferred - only where quotes really help (e.g. lower-case literals and punctuation). - -
- - Type font and size are reset to default values before each paragraph, - and after processing font- or size-setting macros. -
- - The −man macros admit equations and tables in the style of eqn(1) - and tbl(1), but do not support arguments on .EQ and .TS macros. - -
- - These strings are predefined by −man:
- \*R   ‘®’, ‘(Reg)’ in nroff.
- \*S   Change to default type size. \*9 The root directory of the - Plan 9 installation.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/tmac/tmac.an -
- - /usr/local/plan9/tmac/tmac.antimes
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - troff(1), man(1)
- -
-

REQUESTS
-Request Cause If no      Explanation
- -
- - -
- - Break Argument
- -
- -
-.B t     no -
- -
- -
- -
-t=n.t.l.*    Text t is ‘bold’.
-.BI t    no -
- -
- -
- -
-t=n.t.l.    Join words of t alternating bold and italic.
-.BR t    no -
- -
- -
- -
-t=n.t.l.    Join words of t alternating bold and Roman.
-.DT      no           Restore default tabs.
-.EE      yes           End displayed example
-.EX      yes           Begin displayed example
-.HP i    yes -
- -
- -
-i=p.i.*     Set prevailing indent to i. Begin paragraph with hanging -indent.
-.I t     no -
- -
- -
- -
-t=n.t.l.    Text t is italic.
-.IB t    no -
- -
- -
- -
-t=n.t.l.    Join words of t alternating italic and bold.
-.IP x i yes -
- -
- -
-x=""      Same as .TP with tag x.
-.IR t    no -
- -
- -
- -
-t=n.t.l.    Join words of t alternating italic and Roman.
-.L t     no -
- -
- -
- -
-t=n.t.l.    Text t is literal.
-.LP      yes           Same as .PP.
-.LR t    no           Join 2 words of t alternating literal and Roman.
-.PD d    no -
- -
- -
- -
-d=.4v    Interparagraph distance is d.
-.PP      yes           Begin paragraph. Set prevailing indent to default.
-.RE      yes           End of relative indent. Set prevailing indent to amount -of starting .RS.
-.RI t    no -
- -
- -
- -
-t=n.t.l.    Join words of t alternating Roman and italic.
-.RL t    no           Join 2 or 3 words of t alternating Roman and literal.
-.RS i    yes -
- -
- -
-i=p.i.     Start relative indent, move left margin in distance i. -Set prevailing indent to default for nested indents.
-.SH t    yes -
- -
- -
-t=""      Subhead; reset paragraph distance.
-.SM t    no -
- -
- -
- -
-t=n.t.l.    Text t is small.
-.SS t    no -
- -
- -
- -
-t=""      Secondary subhead.
-.TF s    yes           Prevailing indent is wide as string s in font L; paragraph -distance is 0.
-.TH n c x      yes       Begin page named n of chapter c; x is extra commentary, -e.g. ‘local’, for page head. Set prevailing indent and tabs to -default.
-.TP i    yes -
- -
- -
-i=p.i.     Set prevailing indent to i. Restore default indent if -i=0. Begin indented paragraph with hanging tag given by next text -line. If tag doesn’t fit, place it on separate line.
-.1C      yes           Equalize columns and return to 1-column output
-.2C      yes           Start 2-column nofill output -
- -* n.t.l. = next text line; p.i. = prevailing indent
-

BUGS
- -
- - There’s no way to fool troff into handling literal double quote - marks " in font-alternation macros, such as .BI. -
- - There is no direct way to suppress column widows in 2-column output; - the column lengths may be adjusted by inserting .sp requests before - the closing .1C.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/map.html b/man/man7/map.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1ebdfbba..00000000 --- a/man/man7/map.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,108 +0,0 @@ - -map(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MAP(7)MAP(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - map – digitized map formats
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Files used by map(7) are a sequence of structures of the form: - -
- - struct {
- -
- - signed char patchlatitude;
- signed char patchlongitude;
- short n;
- union {
- -
- - struct {
- short latitude;
- short longitude;
- } point[n];
- struct {
- short latitude;
- short longitude;
- struct {
- signed char latdiff;
- signed char londiff;
- } point[–n];
- } highres;
- -
- } segment;
- -
- };
- where short stands for 16-bit integers and there is no padding - within or between structs. Shorts are stored in little-endian - order, low byte first. To assure portability, map accesses them - bytewise. -
- - Fields patchlatitude and patchlongitude tell to what 10-degree - by 10-degree patch of the earth’s surface a segment belongs. Their - values range from –9 to 8 and from –18 to 17, respectively, and - indicate the coordinates of the southeast corner of the patch - in units of 10 degrees. -
- - Each segment of |n| points is connected; consecutive segments - are not necessarily related. Latitude and longitude are measured - in units of 0.0001 radian. If n is negative, then differences - to the first and succeeding points are measured in units of 0.00001 - radian. Latitude is counted positive to the north and longitude - positive to the west. -
- - The patches are ordered lexicographically by patchlatitude then - patchlongitude. A printable index to the first segment of each - patch in a file named data is kept in an associated file named - data.x. Each line of an index file contains patchlatitude, patchlongitude - and the byte position of the - patch in the map file. Both the map file and the index file are - ordered by patch latitude and longitude.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - map(7)
- The data comes from the World Data Bank I and II and U.S. Government - sources: the Census Bureau, Geological Survey, and CIA.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/ms.html b/man/man7/ms.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3ef5ef5d..00000000 --- a/man/man7/ms.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,185 +0,0 @@ - -ms(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
MS(7)MS(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - ms – macros for formatting manuscripts
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - nroff −ms [ options ] file ...
- troff −ms [ options ] file ...
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - This package of nroff and troff(1) macro definitions provides - a canned formatting facility for technical papers in various formats. - -
- - The macro requests are defined below. Many nroff and troff requests - are unsafe in conjunction with this package, but the following - requests may be used with impunity after the first .PP: .bp, .br, - .sp, .ls, .na. -
- - Output of the eqn(1), tbl(1), pic(1) and grap(1) preprocessors - for equations, tables, pictures, and graphs is acceptable as input.
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - /usr/local/plan9/tmac/tmac.s
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - M. E. Lesk, “Typing Documents on the UNIX System: Using the –ms - Macros with Troff and Nroff”, Unix Research System Programmer’s - Manual, Tenth Edition, Volume 2.
- eqn(1), troff(1), tbl(1), pic(1)
- -
-

REQUESTS
-Request Initial Cause Explanation
- -
- - -
- - Value Break
- -
- -
-.1C      yes    yes    One column format on a new page.
-.2C      no    yes    Two column format.
-.AB      no    yes    Begin abstract.
-.AE      -     yes    End abstract.
-.AI      no    yes    Author’s institution follows. Suppressed in .TM.
-.AT      no    yes    Print ‘Attached’ and turn off line filling.
-.AU x y no    yes    Author’s name follows. x is location and y is extension, -ignored except in TM.
-.B x y    no    no     Print x in boldface, append y; if no argument switch -to boldface.
-.B1      no    yes    Begin text to be enclosed in a box.
-.B2      no    yes    End boxed text.
-.BI x y no    no     Print x in bold italic and append y; if no argument -switch to bold italic.
-.BT      date no     Bottom title, automatically invoked at foot of page. -May be redefined.
-.BX x     no    no     Print x in a box.
-.CW x y no    no     Constant width font for x, append y; if no argument -switch to constant width.
-.CT      no    yes    Print ‘Copies to’ and turn off line filling.
-.DA x     nroff no     ‘Date line’ at bottom of page is x. Default is -today.
-.DE      -     yes    End displayed text. Implies .KE.
-.DS x     no    yes    Start of displayed text, to appear verbatim line-by-line: -I indented (default), L left-justified, C centered, B (block) -centered with straight left margin. Implies .KS.
-.EG      no    -      Print document in BTL format for ‘Engineer’s Notes.’ -Must be first.
-.EN      -     yes    Space after equation produced by neqn or eqn(1).
-.EQ x y -     yes    Display equation. Equation number is y. Optional -x is I, L, C as in .DS.
-.FE      -     yes    End footnote.
-.FP x     -     no     Set font positions for a family, e.g., .FP lucidasans
-.FS      no    no     Start footnote. The note will be moved to the bottom -of the page.
-.HO      -     no     ‘Bell Laboratories, Holmdel, New Jersey 07733’.
-.I x y    no    no     Italicize x, append y; if no argument switch to italic.
-.IH      no    no     ‘Bell Laboratories, Naperville, Illinois 60540’
-.IM      no    no     Print document in BTL format for an internal memorandum. -Must be first.
-.IP x y no    yes    Start indented paragraph, with hanging tag x. Indentation -is y ens (default 5).
-.KE      -     yes    End keep. Put kept text on next page if not enough room.
-.KF      no    yes    Start floating keep. If the kept text must be moved -to the next page, float later text back to this page.
-.KS      no    yes    Start keeping following text.
-.LG      no    no     Make letters larger.
-.LP      yes    yes    Start left-blocked paragraph.
-.LT      no    yes    Start a letter; a non-empty first argument produces -a full Lucent letterhead, a second argument is a room number, -a third argument is a telephone number.
-.MF      -     -      Print document in BTL format for ‘Memorandum for File.’ -Must be first.
-.MH      -     no     ‘Bell Laboratories, Murray Hill, New Jersey 07974’.
-.MR      -     -      Print document in BTL format for ‘Memorandum for Record.’ -Must be first.
-.ND date troff no     Use date supplied (if any) only in special BTL -format positions; omit from page footer.
-.NH n     -     yes    Same as .SH, with automatic section numbers like ‘1.2.3’; -n is subsection level (default 1).
-.NL      yes    no     Make letters normal size.
-.P1      -     yes    Begin program display in constant width font.
-.P2      -     yes    End program display.
-.PE      -     yes    End picture; see pic(1).
-.PF      -     yes    End picture; restore vertical position.
-.PP      no    yes    Begin paragraph. First line indented.
-.PS h w -     yes    Start picture; height and width in inches.
-.PY      -     no     ‘Bell Laboratories, Piscataway, New Jersey 08854’
-.QE      -     yes    End quoted material.
-.QP      -     yes    Begin quoted paragraph (indent both margins).
-.QS      -     yes    Begin quoted material (indent both margins).
-.R       yes    no     Roman text follows.
-.RE      -     yes    End relative indent level.
-.RP      no    -      Cover sheet and first page for released paper. Must precede -other requests.
-.RS      -     yes    Start level of relative indentation from which subsequent -indentation is measured.
-.SG x     no    yes    Insert signature(s) of author(s), ignored except -in .TM and .LT. x is the reference line (initials of author and -typist). .}f
-.SH      -     yes    Section head follows, font automatically bold.
-.SM      no    no     Make letters smaller.
-.TA x... 5...    no     Set tabs in ens. Default is 5 10 15 ...
-.TE      -     yes    End table; see tbl(1).
-.TH      -     yes    End heading section of table.
-.TL      no    yes    Title follows.
-.TM x... no    -      Print document in BTL technical memorandum format. -Arguments are TM number, (quoted list of) case number(s), and -file number. Must precede other requests.
-.TR x     -     -      Print in BTL technical report format; report number -is x. Must be first.
-.TS x     -     yes    Begin table; if x is H table heading is repeated on -new pages.
-.UL x     -     no     Underline argument (even in troff).
-.UX y z -     no     ‘zUNIXy’; first use gives registered trademark notice.
-.WH      -     no     ‘Bell Laboratories, Whippany, New Jersey 07981’.
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/plot.html b/man/man7/plot.html deleted file mode 100644 index ca64b3fd..00000000 --- a/man/man7/plot.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,386 +0,0 @@ - -plot(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PLOT(7)PLOT(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - plot – graphics interface
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - Files of this format are interpreted by plot(1) to draw graphics - on the screen. A plot file is a UTF stream of instruction lines. - Arguments are delimited by spaces, tabs, or commas. Numbers may - be floating point. Punctuation marks (except :) , spaces, and - tabs at the beginning of lines are ignored. Comments run from - : to newline. Extra letters appended to a valid instruction are - ignored. Thus ...line, line, li all mean the same thing. Arguments - are interpreted as follows:
- 1.    If an instruction requires no arguments, the rest of the line - is ignored.
- 2.    If it requires a string argument, then all the line after the - first field separator is passed as argument. Quote marks may be - used to preserve leading blanks. Strings may include newlines - represented as \n.
- 3.    Between numeric arguments alphabetic characters and punctuation - marks are ignored. Thus line from 5 6 to 7 8 draws a line from - (5, 6) to (7, 8).
- 4.    Instructions with numeric arguments remain in effect until a - new instruction is read. Such commands may spill over many lines. - Thus the following sequence will draw a polygon with vertices - (4.5, 6.77), (5.8, 5.6), (7.8, 4.55), and (10.0, 3.6).
- -
- - move 4.5 6.77
- vec 5.8, 5.6 7.8
- 4.55 10.0, 3.6 4.5, 6.77
- -
- - -
- The instructions are executed in order. The last designated point - in a line, move, rmove, vec, rvec, arc, or point command becomes - the ‘current point’ (X,Y) for the next command.
-

Open & Close
- o string   Open plotting device. For troff, string specifies the - size of the plot (default is 6i).
- cl      Close plotting device.
-

Basic Plotting Commands
- e       Start another frame of output.
- m x y    (move) Current point becomes x y.
- rm dx dyCurrent point becomes X+dx Y+dy.
- poi x yPlot the point x y and make it the current point.
- v x y    Draw a vector from the current point to x y.
- rv dx dyDraw vector from current point to X+dx Y+dy
- li x1 y1 x2 y2
- -
- - -
- - Draw a line from x1 y1 to x2 y2. Make the current point x2 y2.
- -
- -
- t string   Place the string so that its first character is centered - on the current point (default). If string begins with \C (\R), - it is centered (right-adjusted) on the current point. A backslash - at the beginning of the string may be escaped with another backslash.
- a x1 y1 x2 y2 xc yc r
- -
- - -
- - Draw a circular arc from x1 y1 to x2 y2 with center xc yc and - radius r. If the radius is positive, the arc is drawn counterclockwise; - negative, clockwise. The starting point is exact but the ending - point is approximate.
- -
- -
- ci xc yc r
- -
- - -
- - Draw a circle centered at xc yc with radius r. If the range and - frame parameters do not specify a square, the ‘circle’ will be - elliptical.
- -
- -
- di xc yc r
- -
- - -
- - Draw a disc centered at xc yc with radius r using the filling - color (see cfill below).
- -
- -
- bo x1 y1 x2 y2
- -
- - -
- - Draw a box with lower left corner at x1 y1 and upper right corner - at x2 y2.
- -
- -
- sb x1 y1 x2 y2
- -
- - -
- - Draw a solid box with lower left corner at x1 y1 and upper right - corner at x2 y2 using the filling color (see cfill below).
- -
- -
- par x1 y1 x2 y2 xg yg
- -
- - -
- - Draw a parabola from x1 y1 to x2 y2 ‘guided’ by xg yg. The parabola - passes through the midpoint of the line joining xg yg with the - midpoint of the line joining x1 y1 and x2 y2 and is tangent to - the lines from xg yg to the endpoints.
- -
- -
- pol { {x1 y1 ... xn yn} ... {X1 Y1 ... Xm Ym} }
- -
- - -
- - Draw polygons with vertices x1 y1 ... xn yn and X1 Y1 ... Xm Ym. - If only one polygon is specified, the inner brackets are not needed.
- -
- -
- fi { {x1 y1 ... xn yn} ... {X1 Y1 ... Xm Ym} }
- -
- - -
- - Fill a polygon. The arguments are the same as those for pol except - that the first vertex is automatically repeated to close each - polygon. The polygons do not have to be connected. Enclosed polygons - appear as holes.
- -
- -
- sp { {x1 y1 ... xn yn} ... {X1 Y1 ... Xm Ym} }
- -
- - -
- - Draw a parabolic spline guided by x1 y1 ... xn yn with simple - endpoints.
- -
- -
- fsp { {x1 y1 ... xn yn} ... {X1 Y1 ... Xm Ym} }
- -
- - -
- - Draw a parabolic spline guided by x1 y1 ... xn yn with double - first endpoint.
- -
- -
- lsp { {x1 y1 ... xn yn} ... {X1 Y1 ... Xm Ym} }
- -
- - -
- - Draw a parabolic spline guided by x1 y1 ... xn yn with double - last endpoint.
- -
- -
- dsp { {x1 y1 ... xn yn} ... {X1 Y1 ... Xm Ym} }
- -
- - -
- - Draw a parabolic spline guided by x1 y1 ... xn yn with double - endpoints.
- -
- -
- csp { {x1 y1 ... xn yn} ... {X1 Y1 ... Xm Ym} }
- in filename
- -
- - -
- - (include) Take commands from filename.
- -
- -
- de string { commands }
- -
- - -
- - Define string as commands.
- -
- -
- ca string scale
- -
- - -
- - Invoke commands defined as string applying scale to all coordinates.
- -
- -
-

Commands Controlling the Environment
- co string
- -
- - -
- - Use color given by first character of string, one of red, yellow, - green, blue, cyan, magenta, white, and kblack. If string begins - with a digit, it is taken to be a 32-bit number specifying 8 bit - each of red, green, blue, and alpha. For example, 0xFFFF00FF denotes - solid yellow. - -
- -
- pe string
- -
- - -
- - Use string as the style for drawing lines. The available pen styles - are: solid, dott[ed], short, long, dotd[ashed], cdash, ddash
- -
- -
- cf string
- -
- - -
- - Color for filling (see co, above).
- -
- -
- ra x1 y1 x2 y2
- -
- - -
- - The data will fall between x1 y1 and x2 y2. The plot will be magnified - or reduced to fit the device as closely as possible.
- Range settings that exactly fill the plotting area with unity - scaling appear below for devices supported by the filters of plot(1). - The upper limit is just outside the plotting area. In every case - the plotting area is taken to be square; points outside may be - displayable on devices with nonsquare faces. - -
- -
- fr px1 py1 px2 py2
- -
- - -
- - Plot the data in the fraction of the display specified by px1 - py1 for lower left corner and px2 py2 for upper right corner. - Thus frame .5 0 1. .5 plots in the lower right quadrant of the - display; frame 0. 1. 1. 0. uses the whole display but inverts - the y coordinates.
- -
- -
- sa      Save the current environment, and move to a new one. The new - environment inherits the old one. There are 7 levels.
- re      Restore previous environment.
- -

-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - plot(1), graph(1)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/plumb.html b/man/man7/plumb.html deleted file mode 100644 index eca67a76..00000000 --- a/man/man7/plumb.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,357 +0,0 @@ - -plumb(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
PLUMB(7)PLUMB(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - plumb – format of plumb messages and rules
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <plumb.h>
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- -

Message format
- The messages formed by the plumb(3) library are formatted for - transmission between processes into textual form, using newlines - to separate the fields. Only the data field may contain embedded - newlines. The fields occur in a specified order, and each has - a name, corresponding to the elements of the Plumbmsg - structure, that is used in the plumbing rules. The fields, in - order, are:
- -
- - src     application/service generating message
- dst     destination ‘port’ for message
- wdir    working directory (used if data is a file name)
- type    form of the data, e.g. text
- attr    attributes of the message, in name=value pairs separated by - white space (the value must follow the usual quoting convention - if it contains white space or quote characters or equal signs; - it cannot contain a newline)
- ndata   number of bytes of data
- data    the data itself
- -
- At the moment, only textual data (type=text) is supported. -
- - All fields are optional, but type should usually be set since - it describes the form of the data, and ndata must be an accurate - count (possibly zero) of the number of bytes of data. A missing - field is represented by an empty line.
-

Plumbing rules
- The plumber (see plumb(1)) receives messages on its send port - (applications send messages there), interprets and reformats them, - and (typically) emits them from a destination port. Its behavior - is determined by a plumbing rules file, default /usr/$user/lib/plumbing, - which defines a set of pattern/action - rules with which to analyze, rewrite, and dispatch received messages. - -
- - The file is a sequence of rule sets, each of which is a set of - one-line rules called patterns and actions. There must be at least - one pattern and one action in each rule set. (The only exception - is that a rule set may contain nothing but plumb to rules; such - a rule set declares the named ports but has no other effect.) - A - blank line terminates a rule set. Lines beginning with a # character - are commentary and are regarded as blank lines. -
- - A line of the form
- -
- - include file
- -
- substitutes the contents of file for the line, much as in a C - #include statement. Unlike in C, the file name is not quoted. - If file is not an absolute path name, or one beginning ./ or ../, - file is looked for first in the directory in which the plumber - is executing, and then in /sys/lib/plumb. -
- - When a message is received by the plumber, the rule sets are examined - in order. For each rule set, if the message matches all the patterns - in the rule set, the actions associated with the rule set are - triggered to dispose of the message. If a rule set is triggered, - the rest are ignored for this message. If none is - triggered, the message is discarded (giving a write error to the - sender) unless it has a dst field that specifies an existing port, - in which case the message is emitted, unchanged, from there. -
- - Patterns and actions all consist of three components: an object, - a verb, and arguments. These are separated by white space on the - line. The arguments may contain quoted strings and variable substitutions, - described below, and in some cases contain multiple words. The - object and verb are single words from a pre- - defined set. -
- - The object in a pattern is the name of an element of the message, - such as src or data, or the special case arg, which refers to - the argument component of the current rule. The object in an action - is always the word plumb. -
- - The verbs in the pattern rules describe how the objects and arguments - are to be interpreted. Within a rule set, the patterns are evaluated - in sequence; if one fails, the rule set fails. Some verbs are - predicates that check properties of the message; others rewrite - components of the message and implicitly always succeed. - Such rewritings are permanent, so rules that specify them should - be placed after all pattern-matching rules in the rule set.
- -
- - add      The object must be attr. Append the argument, which must be - a sequence of name=value pairs, to the list of attributes of the - message.
- delete   The object must be attr. If the message has an attribute - whose name is the argument, delete it from the list of attributes - of the message. (Even if the message does not, the rule matches - the message.)
- is       If the text of the object is identical to the text of the argument, - the rule matches.
- isdir    If the text of the object is the name of an existing directory, - the rule matches and sets the variable $dir to that directory - name.
- isfile   If the text of the object is the name of an existing file - (not a directory), the rule matches and sets the variable $file - to that file name.
- matchesIf the entire text of the object matches the regular expression - specified in the argument, the rule matches. This verb is described - in more detail below.
- set      The value of the object is set to the value of the argument.
- -
- - -
- The matches verb has special properties that enable the rules - to select which portion of the data is to be sent to the destination. - By default, a data matches rule requires that the entire text - matches the regular expression. If, however, the message has an - attribute named click, that reports that the message was - produced by a mouse click within the text and that the regular - expressions in the rule set should be used to identify what portion - of the data the user intended. Typically, a program such as an - editor will send a white-space delimited block of text containing - the mouse click, using the value of the click attribute (a - number starting from 0) to indicate where in the textual data - the user pointed. -
- - When the message has a click attribute, the data matches rules - extract the longest leftmost match to the regular expression that - contains or abuts the textual location identified by the click. - For a sequence of such rules within a given rule set, each regular - expression, evaluated by this specification, must - match the same subset of the data for the rule set to match the - message. For example, here is a pair of patterns that identify - a message whose data contains the name of an existing file with - a conventional ending for an encoded picture file:
- -
- - data matches '[a−zA−Z0−9_–./]+'
- data matches '([a−zA−Z0−9_–./]+).(jpe?g|gif|bit|ps|pdf)'
- -
- The first expression extracts the largest subset of the data around - the click that contains file name characters; the second sees - if it ends with, for example, .jpeg. If only the second pattern - were present, a piece of text horse.gift could be misinterpreted - as an image file named horse.gif. -
- - If a click attribute is specified in a message, it will be deleted - by the plumber before sending the message if the data matches - rules expand the selection. -
- - The action rules all have the object plumb. There are only three - verbs for action rules:
- -
- - to       The argument is the name of the port to which the message will - be sent. If the message has a destination specified, it must match - the to port of the rule set or the entire rule set will be skipped. - (This is the only rule that is evaluated out of order.)
- client   If no application has the port open, the arguments to a - plumb start rule specify a shell program to run in response to - the message. The message will be held, with the supposition that - the program will eventually open the port to retrieve it.
- start    Like client, but the message is discarded. Only one start - or client rule should be specified in a rule set.
- -
- - -
- The arguments to all rules may contain quoted strings, exactly - as in rc(1). They may also contain simple string variables, identified - by a leading dollar sign $. Variables may be set, between rule - sets, by assignment statements in the style of rc. Only one variable - assignment may appear on a line. The plumber also - maintains some built-in variables:
- -
- - $0      The text that matched the entire regular expression in a previous - data matches rule. $1, $2, etc. refer to text matching the first, - second, etc. parenthesized subexpression.
- $attr   The textual representation of the attributes of the message.
- $data   The contents of the data field of the message.
- $dir    The directory name resulting from a successful isdir rule. - If no such rule has been applied, it is the string constructed - syntactically by interpreting data as a file name in wdir.
- $dst    The contents of the dst field of the message.
- $file   The file name resulting from a successful isfile rule. If - no such rule has been applied, it is the string constructed syntactically - by interpreting data as a file name in wdir.
- $type   The contents of the type field of the message.
- $src    The contents of the src field of the message.
- $wdir   The contents of the wdir field of the message.
- $plan9The root directory of the Plan 9 tree (see get9root(3)).
- -
- -

-

EXAMPLE
- -
- - The following is a modest, representative file of plumbing rules.
- # these are generally in order from most specific to least,
- # since first rule that fires wins.
- addr=':(#?[0−9]+)'
- protocol='(https?|ftp|file|gopher|mailto|news|nntp|telnet|wais)'
- domain='[a−zA−Z0−9_@]+([.:][a−zA−Z0−9_@]+)*/?[a−zA−Z0−9_?,%#~&/\−]+'
- file='([:.][a−zA−Z0−9_?,%#~&/\−]+)*'
- # image files go to page
- type is text
- data matches '[a−zA−Z0−9_\−./]+'
- data matches '([a−zA−Z0−9_\−./]+).(jpe?g|gif|bit)'
- arg isfile $0
- plumb to image
- plumb start page −w $file
- # URLs go to web browser
- type is text
- data matches $protocol://$domain$file
- plumb to web
- plumb start window webbrowser $0
- # existing files, possibly tagged by line number, go to edit/sam
- type is text
- data matches '([.a−zA−Z0−9_/–]+[a−zA−Z0−9_/\−])('$addr')?'
- arg isfile $1
- data set $file
- attr add addr=$3
- plumb to edit
- plumb start window sam $file
- # .h files are looked up in /sys/include and passed to edit/sam
- type is text
- data matches '([a−zA−Z0−9]+\.h)('$addr')?'
- arg isfile /sys/include/$1
- data set $file
- attr add addr=$3
- plumb to edit
- plumb start window sam $file
- -
- - The following simple plumbing rules file is a good beginning set - of rules.
- # to update: cp /usr/$user/lib/plumbing /mnt/plumb/rules
- editor = acme
- # or editor = sam
- include basic
- -
-

FILES
- -
- - $HOME/lib/plumbing   default rules file.
- plumb               service name for plumber(4).
- /usr/local/plan9/plumb
- -
- - -
- - directory for include files.
- -
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/plumb/fileaddr
- -
- - -
- - public macro definitions.
- -
- -
- /usr/local/plan9/plumb/basic
- -
- - -
- - basic rule set.
- -
- -
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - plumb(1), plumb(3), plumber(4), regexp(7)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/regexp.html b/man/man7/regexp.html deleted file mode 100644 index 1bc2c74e..00000000 --- a/man/man7/regexp.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,131 +0,0 @@ - -regexp(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
REGEXP(7)REGEXP(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - regexp – Plan 9 regular expression notation
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - This manual page describes the regular expression syntax used - by the Plan 9 regular expression library regexp(3). It is the - form used by egrep(1) before egrep got complicated. -
- - A regular expression specifies a set of strings of characters. - A member of this set of strings is said to be matched by the regular - expression. In many applications a delimiter character, commonly - /, bounds a regular expression. In the following specification - for regular expressions the word ‘character’ means any - character (rune) but newline. -
- - The syntax for a regular expression e0 is
- -
- - e3:    literal | charclass | '.' | '^' | '$' | '(' e0 ')'
- e2:    e3
- -
- - |    e2 REP
- -
- REP: '*' | '+' | '?'
- e1:    e2
- -
- - |    e1 e2
- -
- e0:    e1
- -
- - |    e0 '|' e1
- -
- -
- -
- - - -
- -
- A literal is any non-metacharacter, or a metacharacter (one of - .*+?[]()|\^$), or the delimiter preceded by \. -
- - A charclass is a nonempty string s bracketed [s] (or [^s]); it - matches any character in (or not in) s. A negated character class - never matches newline. A substring a−b, with a and b in ascending - order, stands for the inclusive range of characters between a - and b. In s, the metacharacters −, ], an initial ^, and the - regular expression delimiter must be preceded by a \; other metacharacters - have no special meaning and may appear unescaped. -
- - A . matches any character. -
- - A ^ matches the beginning of a line; $ matches the end of the - line. -
- - The REP operators match zero or more (*), one or more (+), zero - or one (?), instances respectively of the preceding regular expression - e2. -
- - A concatenated regular expression, e1e2, matches a match to e1 - followed by a match to e2. -
- - An alternative regular expression, e0|e1, matches either a match - to e0 or a match to e1. -
- - A match to any part of a regular expression extends as far as - possible without preventing a match to the remainder of the regular - expression.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - regexp(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/thumbprint.html b/man/man7/thumbprint.html deleted file mode 100644 index eccbe595..00000000 --- a/man/man7/thumbprint.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,68 +0,0 @@ - -thumbprint(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
THUMBPRINT(7)THUMBPRINT(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - thumbprint – public key thumbprints
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - Applications in Plan 9 that use public keys for authentication, - for example by calling tlsClient and okThumbprint (see pushtls(3)), - check the remote side’s public key by comparing against thumbprints - from a trusted list. The list is maintained by people who set - local policies about which servers can be trusted - for which applications, thereby playing the role taken by certificate - authorities in PKI-based systems. By convention, these lists are - stored as files in /sys/lib/tls/ and protected by normal file - system permissions. -
- - Such a thumbprint file comprises lines made up of attribute/value - pairs of the form attr=value or attr. The first attribute must - be x509 and the second must be sha1={hexchecksumofbinarycertificate}. - All other attributes are treated as comments. The file may also - contain lines of the form #includefile -
- - For example, a web server might have thumbprint
- x509 sha1=8fe472d31b360a8303cd29f92bd734813cbd923c cn=*.cs.bell−labs.com
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - pushtls(3)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man7/utf.html b/man/man7/utf.html deleted file mode 100644 index a1e767ec..00000000 --- a/man/man7/utf.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ - -utf(7) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
UTF(7)UTF(7) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - UTF, Unicode, ASCII, rune – character set and format
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The Plan 9 character set and representation are based on the Unicode - Standard and on the ISO multibyte UTF-8 encoding (Universal Character - Set Transformation Format, 8 bits wide). The Unicode Standard - represents its characters in 16 bits; UTF-8 represents such values - in an 8-bit byte stream. Throughout this - manual, UTF-8 is shortened to UTF. -
- - In Plan 9, a rune is a 16-bit quantity representing a Unicode - character. Internally, programs may store characters as runes. - However, any external manifestation of textual information, in - files or at the interface between programs, uses a machine-independent, - byte-stream encoding called UTF. -
- - UTF is designed so the 7-bit ASCII set (values hexadecimal 00 - to 7F), appear only as themselves in the encoding. Runes with - values above 7F appear as sequences of two or more bytes with - values only from 80 to FF. -
- - The UTF encoding of the Unicode Standard is backward compatible - with ASCII: programs presented only with ASCII work on Plan 9 - even if not written to deal with UTF, as do programs that deal - with uninterpreted byte streams. However, programs that perform - semantic processing on ASCII graphic characters must convert - from UTF to runes in order to work properly with non-ASCII input. - See rune(3). -
- - Letting numbers be binary, a rune x is converted to a multibyte - UTF sequence as follows: -
- - 01. x in [00000000.0bbbbbbb] → 0bbbbbbb
- 10. x in [00000bbb.bbbbbbbb] → 110bbbbb, 10bbbbbb
- 11. x in [bbbbbbbb.bbbbbbbb] → 1110bbbb, 10bbbbbb, 10bbbbbb
- -
- - Conversion 01 provides a one-byte sequence that spans the ASCII - character set in a compatible way. Conversions 10 and 11 represent - higher-valued characters as sequences of two or three bytes with - the high bit set. Plan 9 does not support the 4, 5, and 6 byte - sequences proposed by X-Open. When there are - multiple ways to encode a value, for example rune 0, the shortest - encoding is used. -
- - In the inverse mapping, any sequence except those described above - is incorrect and is converted to rune hexadecimal 0080.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - ascii(1), tcs(1), rune(3), The Unicode Standard.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/attach.html b/man/man9/attach.html deleted file mode 100644 index fda46be2..00000000 --- a/man/man9/attach.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,107 +0,0 @@ - -attach(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ATTACH(9P)ATTACH(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - attach, auth – messages to establish a connection
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - size[4] Tauth tag[2] afid[4] uname[s] aname[s]
- size[4] Rauth tag[2] aqid[13] -
- - size[4] Tattach tag[2] fid[4] afid[4] uname[s] aname[s]
- size[4] Rattach tag[2] qid[13]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - -
- - The attach message serves as a fresh introduction from a user - on the client machine to the server. The message identifies the - user (uname) and may select the file tree to access (aname). The - afid argument specifies a fid previously established by an auth - message, as described below. -
- - As a result of the attach transaction, the client will have a - connection to the root directory of the desired file tree, represented - by fid. An error is returned if fid is already in use. The server’s - idea of the root of the file tree is represented by the returned - qid. -
- - If the client does not wish to authenticate the connection, or - knows that authentication is not required, the afid field in the - attach message should be set to NOFID, defined as (u32int)~0 in - <fcall.h>. If the client does wish to authenticate, it must acquire - and validate an afid using an auth message before - doing the attach. -
- - The auth message contains afid, a new fid to be established for - authentication, and the uname and aname that will be those of - the following attach message. If the server does not require authentication, - it returns Rerror to the Tauth message. -
- - If the server does require authentication, it returns aqid defining - a file of type QTAUTH (see intro(9P)) that may be read and written - (using read and write messages in the usual way) to execute an - authentication protocol. That protocol’s definition is not part - of 9P itself. -
- - Once the protocol is complete, the same afid is presented in the - attach message for the user, granting entry. The same validated - afid may be used for multiple attach messages with the same uname - and aname.
- -
-

ENTRY POINTS
- -
- - Fsmount and fsauth (see 9pclient(3)) generate attach and auth - transactions.
- -
-

SEE ALSO
- -
- - 9pclient(3), version(9P), Plan 9’s authsrv(6)
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/clunk.html b/man/man9/clunk.html deleted file mode 100644 index 34aa001f..00000000 --- a/man/man9/clunk.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,66 +0,0 @@ - -clunk(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
CLUNK(9P)CLUNK(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - clunk – forget about a fid
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - size[4] Tclunk tag[2] fid[4]
- size[4] Rclunk tag[2]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The clunk request informs the file server that the current file - represented by fid is no longer needed by the client. The actual - file is not removed on the server unless the fid had been opened - with ORCLOSE. -
- - Once a fid has been clunked, the same fid can be reused in a new - walk or attach request. -
- - Even if the clunk returns an error, the fid is no longer valid.
- -
-

ENTRY POINTS
- -
- - Clunk transactions are generated by fsclose and fsunmount (see - 9pclient(3)) and indirectly by other actions such as failed fsopen - calls.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/error.html b/man/man9/error.html deleted file mode 100644 index ed8b9c6c..00000000 --- a/man/man9/error.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,53 +0,0 @@ - -error(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
ERROR(9P)ERROR(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - error – return an error
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - size[4] Rerror tag[2] ename[s]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The Rerror message (there is no Terror) is used to return an error - string describing the failure of a transaction. It replaces the - corresponding reply message that would accompany a successful - call; its tag is that of the failing request. -
- - By convention, clients may truncate error messages after ERRMAX−1 - bytes; ERRMAX is defined in <libc.h>.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/flush.html b/man/man9/flush.html deleted file mode 100644 index 20544557..00000000 --- a/man/man9/flush.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,98 +0,0 @@ - -flush(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
FLUSH(9P)FLUSH(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - flush – abort a message
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - size[4] Tflush tag[2] oldtag[2]
- size[4] Rflush tag[2]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - When the response to a request is no longer needed, such as when - a user interrupts a process doing a read(9p), a Tflush request - is sent to the server to purge the pending response. The message - being flushed is identified by oldtag. The semantics of flush - depends on messages arriving in order. -
- - The server should answer the flush message immediately. If it - recognizes oldtag as the tag of a pending transaction, it should - abort any pending response and discard that tag. In either case, - it should respond with an Rflush echoing the tag (not oldtag) - of the Tflush message. A Tflush can never be - responded to by an Rerror message. -
- - The server may respond to the pending request before responding - to the Tflush. It is possible for a client to send multiple Tflush - messages for a particular pending request. Each subsequent Tflush - must contain as oldtag the tag of the pending request (not a previous - Tflush). Should multiple Tflushes be - received for a pending request, they must be answered in order. - A Rflush for any of the multiple Tflushes implies an answer for - all previous ones. Therefore, should a server receive a request - and then multiple flushes for that request, it need respond only - to the last flush. -
- - When the client sends a Tflush, it must wait to receive the corresponding - Rflush before reusing oldtag for subsequent messages. If a response - to the flushed request is received before the Rflush, the client - must honor the response as if it had not been flushed, since the - completed request may signify a state - change in the server. For instance, Tcreate may have created a - file and Twalk may have allocated a fid. If no response is received - before the Rflush, the flushed transaction is considered to have - been canceled, and should be treated as though it had never been - sent. -
- - Several exceptional conditions are handled correctly by the above - specification: sending multiple flushes for a single tag, flushing - after a transaction is completed, flushing a Tflush, and flushing - an invalid tag.
- -
-

ENTRY POINTS
- -
- - The 9pclient(3) library does not generate flush transactions.. - 9pserve(4) generates flush transactions to cancel transactions - pending when a client hangs up.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/index.html b/man/man9/index.html deleted file mode 100644 index 76fb6bdb..00000000 --- a/man/man9/index.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,69 +0,0 @@ - - -Manual Section 9 - Plan 9 from User Space - - - -
-
- -
-
-
- Manual Section 9 - Plan 9 from User Space -
-
-
intro(9P)intro – introduction to the Plan 9 File Protocol, 9P -
-
-
-
attach(9P)attach, auth – messages to establish a connection -
-
-
-
clunk(9P)clunk – forget about a fid -
-
-
-
error(9P)error – return an error -
-
-
-
flush(9P)flush – abort a message -
-
-
-
open(9P)open, create – prepare a fid for I/O on an existing or new file -
-
-
-
read(9P)read, write – transfer data from and to a file -
-
-
-
remove(9P)remove – remove a file from a server -
-
-
-
stat(9P)stat, wstat – inquire or change file attributes -
-
-
-
version(9P)version – negotiate protocol version -
-
-
-
walk(9P)walk – descend a directory hierarchy -
-
- -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
-		 -
- - diff --git a/man/man9/intro.html b/man/man9/intro.html deleted file mode 100644 index 226a94eb..00000000 --- a/man/man9/intro.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,344 +0,0 @@ - -intro(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
INTRO(9P)INTRO(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - intro – introduction to the Plan 9 File Protocol, 9P
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - #include <fcall.h>
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - A Plan 9 server is an agent that provides one or more hierarchical - file systems -- file trees -- that may be accessed by Plan 9 processes. - A server responds to requests by clients to navigate the hierarchy, - and to create, remove, read, and write files. The prototypical - server is a separate machine that stores large numbers - of user files on permanent media; such a machine is called, somewhat - confusingly, a file server. Another possibility for a server is - to synthesize files on demand, perhaps based on information on - data structures maintained in memory; the plumber(4) server is - an example of such a server. -
- - A connection to a server is a bidirectional communication path - from the client to the server. There may be a single client or - multiple clients sharing the same connection. -
- - The Plan 9 File Protocol, 9P, is used for messages between clients - and servers. A client transmits requests (T-messages) to a server, - which subsequently returns replies (R-messages) to the client. - The combined acts of transmitting (receiving) a request of a particular - type, and receiving (transmitting) its reply is called a - transaction of that type. -
- - Each message consists of a sequence of bytes. Two-, four-, and - eight-byte fields hold unsigned integers represented in little-endian - order (least significant byte first). Data items of larger or - variable lengths are represented by a two-byte field specifying - a count, n, followed by n bytes of data. Text strings are - represented this way, with the text itself stored as a UTF-8 encoded - sequence of Unicode characters (see utf(7)). Text strings in 9P - messages are not NUL-terminated: n counts the bytes of UTF-8 data, - which include no final zero byte. The NUL character is illegal - in all text strings in 9P, and is therefore excluded from file - names, user names, and so on. -
- - Each 9P message begins with a four-byte size field specifying - the length in bytes of the complete message including the four - bytes of the size field itself. The next byte is the message type, - one of the constants in the enumeration in the include file <fcall.h>. - The next two bytes are an identifying tag, described - below. The remaining bytes are parameters of different sizes. - In the message descriptions, the number of bytes in a field is - given in brackets after the field name. The notation parameter[n] - where n is not a constant represents a variable-length parameter: - n[2] followed by n bytes of data forming the parameter. The - notation string[s] (using a literal s character) is shorthand - for s[2] followed by s bytes of UTF-8 text. (Systems may choose - to reduce the set of legal characters to reduce syntactic problems, - for example to remove slashes from name components, but the protocol - has no such restriction. Plan 9 names may contain any - printable character (that is, any character outside hexadecimal - 00-1F and 80-9F) except slash.) Messages are transported in byte - form to allow for machine independence; fcall(3) describes routines - that convert to and from this form into a machine-dependent C - structure.
- -
-

MESSAGES
- -
- - -
- - size[4] Tversion tag[2] msize[4] version[s]
- size[4] Rversion tag[2] msize[4] version[s]
- size[4] Tauth tag[2] afid[4] uname[s] aname[s]
- size[4] Rauth tag[2] aqid[13]
- size[4] Rerror tag[2] ename[s]
- size[4] Tflush tag[2] oldtag[2]
- size[4] Rflush tag[2]
- size[4] Tattach tag[2] fid[4] afid[4] uname[s] aname[s]
- size[4] Rattach tag[2] qid[13]
- size[4] Twalk tag[2] fid[4] newfid[4] nwname[2] nwname*(wname[s])
- size[4] Rwalk tag[2] nwqid[2] nwqid*(wqid[13])
- size[4] Topen tag[2] fid[4] mode[1]
- size[4] Ropen tag[2] qid[13] iounit[4]
- size[4] Topenfd tag[2] fid[4] mode[1]
- size[4] Ropenfd tag[2] qid[13] iounit[4] unixfd[4]
- size[4] Tcreate tag[2] fid[4] name[s] perm[4] mode[1]
- size[4] Rcreate tag[2] qid[13] iounit[4]
- size[4] Tread tag[2] fid[4] offset[8] count[4]
- size[4] Rread tag[2] count[4] data[count]
- size[4] Twrite tag[2] fid[4] offset[8] count[4] data[count]
- size[4] Rwrite tag[2] count[4]
- size[4] Tclunk tag[2] fid[4]
- size[4] Rclunk tag[2]
- size[4] Tremove tag[2] fid[4]
- size[4] Rremove tag[2]
- size[4] Tstat tag[2] fid[4]
- size[4] Rstat tag[2] stat[n]
- size[4] Twstat tag[2] fid[4] stat[n]
- size[4] Rwstat tag[2] -
- - -
- Each T-message has a tag field, chosen and used by the client - to identify the message. The reply to the message will have the - same tag. Clients must arrange that no two outstanding messages - on the same connection have the same tag. An exception is the - tag NOTAG, defined as (ushort)~0 in <fcall.h>: the - client can use it, when establishing a connection, to override - tag matching in version messages. -
- - The type of an R-message will either be one greater than the type - of the corresponding T-message or Rerror, indicating that the - request failed. In the latter case, the ename field contains a - string describing the reason for failure. -
- - The version message identifies the version of the protocol and - indicates the maximum message size the system is prepared to handle. - It also initializes the connection and aborts all outstanding - I/O on the connection. The set of messages between version requests - is called a session. -
- - Most T-messages contain a fid, a 32-bit unsigned integer that - the client uses to identify a “current file” on the server. Fids - are somewhat like file descriptors in a user process, but they - are not restricted to files open for I/O: directories being examined, - files being accessed by stat(3) calls, and so on -- all files being - manipulated by the operating system -- are identified by fids. Fids - are chosen by the client. All requests on a connection share the - same fid space; when several clients share a connection, the agent - managing the sharing must arrange that no two clients choose the - same fid. -
- - The fid supplied in an attach message will be taken by the server - to refer to the root of the served file tree. The attach identifies - the user to the server and may specify a particular file tree - served by the server (for those that supply more than one). -
- - Permission to attach to the service is proven by providing a special - fid, called afid, in the attach message. This afid is established - by exchanging auth messages and subsequently manipulated using - read and write messages to exchange authentication information - not defined explicitly by 9P. Once the - authentication protocol is complete, the afid is presented in - the attach to permit the user to access the service. -
- - A walk message causes the server to change the current file associated - with a fid to be a file in the directory that is the old current - file, or one of its subdirectories. Walk returns a new fid that - refers to the resulting file. Usually, a client maintains a fid - for the root, and navigates by walks from the root fid. -
- - A client can send multiple T-messages without waiting for the - corresponding R-messages, but all outstanding T-messages must - specify different tags. The server may delay the response to a - request and respond to later ones; this is sometimes necessary, - for example when the client reads from a file that the server - synthesizes from external events such as keyboard characters. - -
- - Replies (R-messages) to auth, attach, walk, open, and create requests - convey a qid field back to the client. The qid represents the - server’s unique identification for the file being accessed: two - files on the same server hierarchy are the same if and only if - their qids are the same. (The client may have multiple - fids pointing to a single file on a server and hence having a - single qid.) The thirteen-byte qid fields hold a one-byte type, - specifying whether the file is a directory, append-only file, - etc., and two unsigned integers: first the four-byte qid version, - then the eight-byte qid path. The path is an integer unique among - all files - in the hierarchy. If a file is deleted and recreated with the - same name in the same directory, the old and new path components - of the qids should be different. The version is a version number - for a file; typically, it is incremented every time the file is - modified. -
- - An existing file can be opened, or a new file may be created in - the current (directory) file. I/O of a given number of bytes at - a given offset on an open file is done by read and write. -
- - A client should clunk any fid that is no longer needed. The remove - transaction deletes files. -
- - Openfd is an extension used by Unix utilities to allow traditional - Unix programs to have their input or output attached to fids on - 9P servers. See openfd(9p) and 9pclient(3) for details. -
- - The stat transaction retrieves information about the file. The - stat field in the reply includes the file’s name, access permissions - (read, write and execute for owner, group and public), access - and modification times, and owner and group identifications (see - stat(3)). The owner and group identifications are textual - names. The wstat transaction allows some of a file’s properties - to be changed. -
- - A request can be aborted with a flush request. When a server receives - a Tflush, it should not reply to the message with tag oldtag (unless - it has already replied), and it should immediately send an Rflush. - The client must wait until it gets the Rflush (even if the reply - to the original message arrives in the interim), - at which point oldtag may be reused. -
- - Because the message size is negotiable and some elements of the - protocol are variable length, it is possible (although unlikely) - to have a situation where a valid message is too large to fit - within the negotiated size. For example, a very long file name - may cause a Rstat of the file or Rread of its directory entry - to be - too large to send. In most such cases, the server should generate - an error rather than modify the data to fit, such as by truncating - the file name. The exception is that a long error string in an - Rerror message should be truncated if necessary, since the string - is only advisory and in some sense arbitrary. -
- - Most programs do not see the 9P protocol directly; on Plan 9, - calls to library routines that access files are translated by - the kernel’s mount driver into 9P messages.
-

Unix
- On Unix, 9P services are posted as Unix domain sockets in a well-known - directory (see getns(3) and 9pserve(4)). Clients connect to these - servers using a 9P client library (see 9pclient(3)).
- -

-

DIRECTORIES
- -
- - Directories are created by create with DMDIR set in the permissions - argument (see stat(9P)). The members of a directory can be found - with read(9P). All directories must support walks to the directory - .. (dot-dot) meaning parent directory, although by convention - directories contain no explicit entry for .. or . - (dot). The parent of the root directory of a server’s tree is - itself.
- -
-

ACCESS PERMISSIONS
- -
- - This section describes the access permission conventions implemented - by most Plan 9 file servers. These conventions are not enforced - by the protocol and may differ between servers, especially servers - built on top of foreign operating systems. -
- - Each file server maintains a set of user and group names. Each - user can be a member of any number of groups. Each group has a - group leader who has special privileges (see stat(9P) and Plan - 9’s users(6)). Every file request has an implicit user id (copied - from the original attach) and an implicit set of groups (every - group of which the user is a member). -
- - Each file has an associated owner and group id and three sets - of permissions: those of the owner, those of the group, and those - of “other” users. When the owner attempts to do something to a - file, the owner, group, and other permissions are consulted, and - if any of them grant the requested permission, the - operation is allowed. For someone who is not the owner, but is - a member of the file’s group, the group and other permissions - are consulted. For everyone else, the other permissions are used. - Each set of permissions says whether reading is allowed, whether - writing is allowed, and whether executing is allowed. A - walk in a directory is regarded as executing the directory, not - reading it. Permissions are kept in the low-order bits of the - file mode: owner read/write/execute permission represented as - 1 in bits 8, 7, and 6 respectively (using 0 to number the low - order). The group permissions are in bits 5, 4, and 3, and the - other - permissions are in bits 2, 1, and 0. -
- - The file mode contains some additional attributes besides the - permissions. If bit 31 (DMDIR) is set, the file is a directory; - if bit 30 (DMAPPEND) is set, the file is append-only (offset is - ignored in writes); if bit 29 (DMEXCL) is set, the file is exclusive-use - (only one client may have it open at a time); if bit 27 (DMAUTH) - is - set, the file is an authentication file established by auth messages; - if bit 26 (DMTMP) is set, the contents of the file (or directory) - are not included in nightly archives. (Bit 28 is skipped for historical - reasons.) These bits are reproduced, from the top bit down, in - the type byte of the Qid: QTDIR, QTAPPEND, QTEXCL, - (skipping one bit) QTAUTH, and QTTMP. The name QTFILE, defined - to be zero, identifies the value of the type for a plain file.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/open.html b/man/man9/open.html deleted file mode 100644 index b893119b..00000000 --- a/man/man9/open.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,154 +0,0 @@ - -open(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
OPEN(9P)OPEN(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - open, create – prepare a fid for I/O on an existing or new file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - size[4] Topen tag[2] fid[4] mode[1]
- size[4] Ropen tag[2] qid[13] iounit[4] -
- - size[4] Tcreate tag[2] fid[4] name[s] perm[4] mode[1]
- size[4] Rcreate tag[2] qid[13] iounit[4]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The open request asks the file server to check permissions and - prepare a fid for I/O with subsequent read and write messages. - The mode field determines the type of I/O: 0 (called OREAD in - <libc.h>), 1 (OWRITE), 2 (ORDWR), and 3 (OEXEC) mean read access, - write access, read and write access, and execute - access, to be checked against the permissions for the file. In - addition, if mode has the OTRUNC (0x10) bit set, the file is to - be truncated, which requires write permission (if the file is - append-only, and permission is granted, the open succeeds but - the file will not be truncated); if the mode has the ORCLOSE (0x40) - bit set, the file is to be removed when the fid is clunked, which - requires permission to remove the file from its directory. All - other bits in mode should be zero. It is illegal to write a directory, - truncate it, or attempt to remove it on close. If the file is - marked for exclusive use (see stat(9P)), only one client can have - the - file open at any time. That is, after such a file has been opened, - further opens will fail until fid has been clunked. All these - permissions are checked at the time of the open request; subsequent - changes to the permissions of files do not affect the ability - to read, write, or remove an open file. -
- - The create request asks the file server to create a new file with - the name supplied, in the directory (dir) represented by fid, - and requires write permission in the directory. The owner of the - file is the implied user id of the request, the group of the file - is the same as dir, and the permissions are the value of - -
- - -
- - perm & (~0666 | (dir.perm & 0666))
- -
- -
- if a regular file is being created and
- -
- - -
- - perm & (~0777 | (dir.perm & 0777))
- -
- -
- if a directory is being created. This means, for example, that - if the create allows read permission to others, but the containing - directory does not, then the created file will not allow others - to read the file. -
- - Finally, the newly created file is opened according to mode, and - fid will represent the newly opened file. Mode is not checked - against the permissions in perm. The qid for the new file is returned - with the create reply message. -
- - Directories are created by setting the DMDIR bit (0x80000000) - in the perm. -
- - The names . and .. are special; it is illegal to create files - with these names. -
- - It is an error for either of these messages if the fid is already - the product of a successful open or create message. -
- - An attempt to create a file in a directory where the given name - already exists will be rejected; in this case, the fscreate call - (see 9pclient(3)) uses open with truncation. The algorithm used - by the create system call is: first walk to the directory to contain - the file. If that fails, return an error. Next walk to the - specified file. If the walk succeeds, send a request to open and - truncate the file and return the result, successful or not. If - the walk fails, send a create message. If that fails, it may be - because the file was created by another process after the previous - walk failed, so (once) try the walk and open again. - -
-

ENTRY POINTS
- -
- - Fsopen and fscreate (see 9pclient(3)) both generate open messages; - only fscreate generates a create message. The iounit associated - with an open file may be discovered by calling fsiounit. -
- - For programs that need atomic file creation, without the race - that exists in the open−create sequence described above, fscreate - does the following. If the OEXCL (0x1000) bit is set in the mode - for a fscreate call, the open message is not sent; the kernel - issues only the create. Thus, if the file exists, fscreate - will draw an error, but if it doesn’t and the fscreate call succeeds, - the process issuing the fscreate is guaranteed to be the one that - created the file.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/read.html b/man/man9/read.html deleted file mode 100644 index c524d8de..00000000 --- a/man/man9/read.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,96 +0,0 @@ - -read(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
READ(9P)READ(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - read, write – transfer data from and to a file
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - size[4] Tread tag[2] fid[4] offset[8] count[4]
- size[4] Rread tag[2] count[4] data[count] -
- - size[4] Twrite tag[2] fid[4] offset[8] count[4] data[count]
- size[4] Rwrite tag[2] count[4]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The read request asks for count bytes of data from the file identified - by fid, which must be opened for reading, starting offset bytes - after the beginning of the file. The bytes are returned with the - read reply message. -
- - The count field in the reply indicates the number of bytes returned. - This may be less than the requested amount. If the offset field - is greater than or equal to the number of bytes in the file, a - count of zero will be returned. -
- - For directories, read returns an integral number of directory - entries exactly as in stat (see stat(9P)), one for each member - of the directory. The read request message must have offset equal - to zero or the value of offset in the previous read on the directory, - plus the number of bytes returned in the previous - read. In other words, seeking other than to the beginning is illegal - in a directory. -
- - The write request asks that count bytes of data be recorded in - the file identified by fid, which must be opened for writing, - starting offset bytes after the beginning of the file. If the - file is append-only, the data will be placed at the end of the - file regardless of offset. Directories may not be written. -
- - The write reply records the number of bytes actually written. - It is usually an error if this is not the same as requested. -
- - Because 9P implementations may limit the size of individual messages, - more than one message may be produced by a single read or write - call. The iounit field returned by open(9P), if non-zero, reports - the maximum size that is guaranteed to be transferred atomically.
- -
-

ENTRY POINTS
- -
- - Fsread and fswrite (see 9pclient(3)) generate the corresponding - messages. Because they take an offset parameter, the fspread and - fspwrite calls correspond more directly to the 9P messages. Although - fsseek affects the offset, it does not generate a message.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/remove.html b/man/man9/remove.html deleted file mode 100644 index 162db8bc..00000000 --- a/man/man9/remove.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,70 +0,0 @@ - -remove(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
REMOVE(9P)REMOVE(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - remove – remove a file from a server
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - size[4] Tremove tag[2] fid[4]
- size[4] Rremove tag[2]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The remove request asks the file server both to remove the file - represented by fid and to clunk the fid, even if the remove fails. - This request will fail if the client does not have write permission - in the parent directory. -
- - It is correct to consider remove to be a clunk with the side effect - of removing the file if permissions allow. -
- - If a file has been opened as multiple fids, possibly on different - connections, and one fid is used to remove the file, whether the - other fids continue to provide access to the file is implementation-defined. - The Plan 9 file servers remove the file immediately: attempts - to use the other fids will yield a “phase error.” U9fs - follows the semantics of the underlying Unix file system, so other - fids typically remain usable.
- -
-

ENTRY POINTS
- -
- - Fsremove (see 9pclient(3)) generates remove messages.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/stat.html b/man/man9/stat.html deleted file mode 100644 index eb5c9c4a..00000000 --- a/man/man9/stat.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,258 +0,0 @@ - -stat(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
STAT(9P)STAT(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - stat, wstat – inquire or change file attributes
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - size[4] Tstat tag[2] fid[4]
- size[4] Rstat tag[2] stat[n] -
- - size[4] Twstat tag[2] fid[4] stat[n]
- size[4] Rwstat tag[2]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The stat transaction inquires about the file identified by fid. - The reply will contain a machine-independent directory entry, - stat, laid out as follows:
- size[2]total byte count of the following data
- type[2]
- -
- - for kernel use
- -
- dev[4]for kernel use
- qid.type[1]
- -
- - the type of the file (directory, etc.), represented as a bit vector - corresponding to the high 8 bits of the file’s mode word.
- -
- qid.vers[4]
- -
- - version number for given path
- -
- qid.path[8]
- -
- - the file server’s unique identification for the file
- -
- mode[4]
- -
- - permissions and flags
- -
- atime[4]
- -
- - last access time
- -
- mtime[4]
- -
- - last modification time
- -
- length[8]
- -
- - length of file in bytes
- -
- name[ s ]
- -
- - file name; must be / if the file is the root directory of the - server
- -
- uid[ s ]
- -
- - owner name
- -
- gid[ s ]
- -
- - group name
- -
- muid[ s ]
- -
- - name of the user who last modified the file -
- - -
- Integers in this encoding are in little-endian order (least significant - byte first). The convM2D and convD2M routines (see fcall(3)) convert - between directory entries and a C structure called a Dir. -
- - The mode contains permission bits as described in intro(9P) and - the following: 0x80000000 (DMDIR, this file is a directory), 0x40000000 - (DMAPPEND, append only), 0x20000000 (DMEXCL, exclusive use), 0x04000000 - (DMTMP, temporary); these are echoed in Qid.type. Writes to append-only - files always - place their data at the end of the file; the offset in the write - message is ignored, as is the OTRUNC bit in an open. Exclusive - use files may be open for I/O by only one fid at a time across - all clients of the server. If a second open is attempted, it draws - an error. Servers may implement a timeout on the lock on an - exclusive use file: if the fid holding the file open has been - unused for an extended period (of order at least minutes), it - is reasonable to break the lock and deny the initial fid further - I/O. Temporary files are not included in nightly archives (see - Plan 9’s fossil(4)). -
- - The two time fields are measured in seconds since the epoch (Jan - 1 00:00 1970 GMT). The mtime field reflects the time of the last - change of content (except when later changed by wstat). For a - plain file, mtime is the time of the most recent create, open - with truncation, or write; for a directory it is the time of - the most recent remove, create, or wstat of a file in the directory. - Similarly, the atime field records the last read of the contents; - also it is set whenever mtime is set. In addition, for a directory, - it is set by an attach, walk, or create, all whether successful - or not. -
- - The muid field names the user whose actions most recently changed - the mtime of the file. -
- - The length records the number of bytes in the file. Directories - and most files representing devices have a conventional length - of 0. -
- - The stat request requires no special permissions. -
- - The wstat request can change some of the file status information. - The name can be changed by anyone with write permission in the - parent directory; it is an error to change the name to that of - an existing file. The length can be changed (affecting the actual - length of the file) by anyone with write permission on the - file. It is an error to attempt to set the length of a directory - to a non-zero value, and servers may decide to reject length changes - for other reasons. The mode and mtime can be changed by the owner - of the file or the group leader of the file’s current group. The - directory bit cannot be changed by a wstat; the other - defined permission and mode bits can. The gid can be changed: - by the owner if also a member of the new group; or by the group - leader of the file’s current group if also leader of the new group - (see intro(9P) for more information about permissions, users, - and groups). None of the other data can be altered by a - wstat and attempts to change them will trigger an error. In particular, - it is illegal to attempt to change the owner of a file. (These - conditions may be relaxed when establishing the initial state - of a file server; see Plan 9’s fsconfig(8).) -
- - Either all the changes in wstat request happen, or none of them - does: if the request succeeds, all changes were made; if it fails, - none were. -
- - A wstat request can avoid modifying some properties of the file - by providing explicit “don’t touch” values in the stat data that - is sent: zero-length strings for text values and the maximum unsigned - value of appropriate size for integral values. As a special case, - if all the elements of the directory entry in a Twstat - message are “don’t touch” values, the server may interpret it - as a request to guarantee that the contents of the associated - file are committed to stable storage before the Rwstat message - is returned. (Consider the message to mean, “make the state of - the file exactly what it claims to be.”) -
- - A read of a directory yields an integral number of directory entries - in the machine independent encoding given above (see read(9P)). - -
- - Note that since the stat information is sent as a 9P variable-length - datum, it is limited to a maximum of 65535 bytes.
- -
-

ENTRY POINTS
- -
- - Stat messages are generated by fsdirfstat and fsdirstat (see 9pclient(3)). - -
- - Wstat messages are generated by fsdirfwstat and fsdirwstat.
- -
-

BUGS
- -
- - To make the contents of a directory, such as returned by read(9P), - easy to parse, each directory entry begins with a size field. - For consistency, the entries in Twstat and Rstat messages also - contain their size, which means the size appears twice. For example, - the Rstat message is formatted as “(4+1+2+2+n)[4] - Rstat tag[2] n[2] (n-2)[2] type[2] dev[4]...,” where n is the - value returned by convD2M.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/version.html b/man/man9/version.html deleted file mode 100644 index 3d382f6b..00000000 --- a/man/man9/version.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,100 +0,0 @@ - -version(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
VERSION(9P)VERSION(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - version – negotiate protocol version
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - size[4] Tversion tag[2] msize[4] version[s]
- size[4] Rversion tag[2] msize[4] version[s]
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The version request negotiates the protocol version and message - size to be used on the connection and initializes the connection - for I/O. Tversion must be the first message sent on the 9P connection, - and the client cannot issue any further requests until it has - received the Rversion reply. The tag should be - NOTAG (value (ushort)~0) for a version message. -
- - The client suggests a maximum message size, msize, that is the - maximum length, in bytes, it will ever generate or expect to receive - in a single 9P message. This count includes all 9P protocol data, - starting from the size field and extending through the message, - but excludes enveloping transport protocols. The - server responds with its own maximum, msize, which must be less - than or equal to the client’s value. Thenceforth, both sides of - the connection must honor this limit. -
- - The version string identifies the level of the protocol. The string - must always begin with the two characters “9P”. If the server - does not understand the client’s version string, it should respond - with an Rversion message (not Rerror) with the version string - the 7 characters “unknown”. -
- - The server may respond with the client’s version string, or a - version string identifying an earlier defined protocol version. - Currently, the only defined version is the 6 characters “9P2000”. - Version strings are defined such that, if the client string contains - one or more period characters, the initial substring up to but - not including any single period in the version string defines - a version of the protocol. After stripping any such period-separated - suffix, the server is allowed to respond with a string of the - form 9Pnnnn, where nnnn is less than or equal to the digits sent - by the client. -
- - The client and server will use the protocol version defined by - the server’s response for all subsequent communication on the - connection. -
- - A successful version request initializes the connection. All outstanding - I/O on the connection is aborted; all active fids are freed (‘clunked’) - automatically. The set of messages between version requests is - called a session.
- -
-

ENTRY POINTS
- -
- - Fsversion (see 9pclient(3)) generates version messages; it is - called automatically by fsmount.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- - diff --git a/man/man9/walk.html b/man/man9/walk.html deleted file mode 100644 index 32a72a9e..00000000 --- a/man/man9/walk.html +++ /dev/null @@ -1,119 +0,0 @@ - -walk(9P) - Plan 9 from User Space - - - - -
-
-
WALK(9P)WALK(9P) -
-
-

NAME
- -
- - walk – descend a directory hierarchy
- -
-

SYNOPSIS
- -
- - size[4] Twalk tag[2] fid[4] newfid[4] nwname[2] nwname*(wname[s])
- size[4] Rwalk tag[2] nwqid[2] nwqid*(qid[13])
- -
-

DESCRIPTION
- -
- - The walk request carries as arguments an existing fid and a proposed - newfid (which must not be in use unless it is the same as fid) - that the client wishes to associate with the result of traversing - the directory hierarchy by ‘walking’ the hierarchy using the successive - path name elements wname. The fid must represent - a directory unless zero path name elements are specified. -
- - The fid must be valid in the current session and must not have - been opened for I/O by an open or create message. If the full - sequence of nwname elements is walked successfully, newfid will - represent the file that results. If not, newfid (and fid) will - be unaffected. However, if newfid is in use or otherwise illegal, - an Rerror is returned. -
- - The name “..” (dot-dot) represents the parent directory. The name - “.” (dot), meaning the current directory, is not used in the protocol. - -
- - It is legal for nwname to be zero, in which case newfid will represent - the same file as fid and the walk will usually succeed; this is - equivalent to walking to dot. The rest of this discussion assumes - nwname is greater than zero. -
- - The nwname path name elements wname are walked in order, “elementwise”. - For the first elementwise walk to succeed, the file identified - by fid must be a directory, and the implied user of the request - must have permission to search the directory (see intro(9P)). - Subsequent elementwise walks have equivalent - restrictions applied to the implicit fid that results from the - preceding elementwise walk. -
- - If the first element cannot be walked for any reason, Rerror is - returned. Otherwise, the walk will return an Rwalk message containing - nwqid qids corresponding, in order, to the files that are visited - by the nwqid successful elementwise walks; nwqid is therefore - either nwname or the index of the first elementwise - walk that failed. The value of nwqid cannot be zero unless nwname - is zero. Also, nwqid will always be less than or equal to nwname. - Only if it is equal, however, will newfid be affected, in which - case newfid will represent the file reached by the final elementwise - walk requested in the message. -
- - A walk of the name “..” in the root directory of a server is equivalent - to a walk with no name elements. -
- - If newfid is the same as fid, the above discussion applies, with - the obvious difference that if the walk changes the state of newfid, - it also changes the state of fid; and if newfid is unaffected, - then fid is also unaffected. -
- - To simplify the implementation of the servers, a maximum of sixteen - name elements or qids may be packed in a single message. This - constant is called MAXWELEM in fcall(3). Despite this restriction, - the system imposes no limit on the number of elements in a file - name, only the number that may be transmitted in a - single message.
- -
-

ENTRY POINTS
- -
- - Fswalk (see 9pclient(3)) generates walk messages. One or more - walk messages may be generated by any call that evaluates file - names: fsopen, fsopenfd, fsdirstat, fsdirwstat.
- -
- -

 -
-
- - -
-
-
-Space Glenda -
-
- -